. ~ . - -   .   . ....... - ~ ............. _ ........ ............... -.

l ¡
l UNIVERSITY OF DELHI l
l l
l 1
l 1
1 1
l 1
l 1
1 1
1 1
" INSTITUTE OF POST GRADU- ,l
l ATE (E) STUDIES LlBRARY !
1 1
l 1
l 1
1 1
l l
.............................................. ....................................... ,..
EP5
TE CF FúST-GRt-DUATE (E) SlUDIES
LIBRAR)
(",, "0 G¿ 1 ' ({ep '.503) \ \ , F,G,
Ac.   E "'2.
1)" ... \" ... or ('Il r'!or¡o t'. 1<- .. > (:. ,. j
b hWJ. J"I "H'r:lue '/5 , :. _' -, . - ,,' '1 \o,'
  '·0 C":l:nc'a c.
--f---- - -- ---- --
- . --------1
-------
  ----- --
-------- - ----- ---
-_.¡_._-
+----
<---- - -.--'-- --
I)INfO'OGERMANISOH E
81 8LIOTH EK
HERAUSGEGEBEN VON
H. HIRT UNO W. STREITBERG t
E R ~ T E ABTEILUNG
SAMMLUNG INOOGERMANISCHER
LEHR- UNO HANOBÜCHER
l. R E I H ~   GRAMMATIKEN
ACHTZEHNTER BANO
THE SYNTAX OF CASES
IN THE NARRAilVE ANO OESCRIPTIVE
PROSE OF THE BRAHMAI':JAS
BY
HANNS CERTEL
...
HEIOELBERG 1926 .
CARL WINTER'S UNIVERSITATSBUCHHANOLUNG
THE SYNTAX OF OASES IN THE
NARRATIVE ANO DESORIPTIVE
PROS E OF THE BRÁHMANAS

BY
HANNS CERTEL
l.
THE DISJUNCT USE 0F CASES
HEIDELBERG 1926
CARL WINTER'S UNIVERSITATSBUCHHANDLUNG
Verlagtl-Nr. 1960.
Alle Rechte, besonders dlls ReoM der Ubersetzung In fremde Sprn.chen,
werden vorbeha.lten
ro
Jacob lFackernagel
this book is gratefully znscribed.
Foreword.
The material presented in these volumes was originally collected
and primarily intended to serve as a basis for the extension of
the 'compendious statement of the use of cases' (§ 268-305,
p. 89-103) in a proposed revised edition of Whitney's Sanskrit
Grammar. If these syntactical paragraphs were to reCeIve a treat-
ment comparable and conform to the statistical and historical
treatment (Preface to the first edition, p. VII, 5-6 and 20-21)
of the inflexional and morphological material in Whitney's Grammar
a much more detailed and complete digest of the facts as ex-
hibited in the literature oí the earliest prose writings than could
be gleaned from the admirable but necessarily brief paragraphs
of Delbruck's Altindische Syntax (§ 64-126, p. 103-188 and
§ 216-217, p. 387-390) seemed indispensable.
The matenal is here given in extenso with a fulness of detail
which would have been neither practicable nor admissible as part
{)f the revised Grammar itself in the hope that it may not only
save Sanskritists the time-consuming task of working through
these extensive and often dreary texts but also be useful to those
who are interested in Comparative Grammar.
The first two volumes (including the translations and many
of the critical and exegetical notes) were substantially finished in
manuscript about a decade ago aud intended for publication in
the United States. This accounts for the English dress in which
the book appears, for it seemed time and labour wasted to recast
the wbole into German.
My thanks are due to tbe Notgemeinscbaft der deutschen Wissen
e
schaft for a substantial grant wit\lout which the publication would
have been impossible. But the greatest debt of gratitude 1 owe
to Professor Jacob Wackernagel who kindly undertook the laborious
work of reading one proof and favomed me with many valuable
suggestions.
München, April 1926
.
Hanns Oartel.
VII
Preface.
1. General Plan and Scope.' The present work is intended
to present, as completely as possible, the use of cases in tha-
narrative and descriptive prose of the Brahma:r;¡.as.
The whole bulk of early .Sanskrit literature may, for syntactjc.al
treatment, be eonveniently divided into the following seven groups
1. The metrical Mantras,
2. Tbe prose Mantras,
Both the metrICal and the prose Mantras are fully recorded in Bloom-
field's Concordance. Witb regard to tbe latter the autbor of thls monu-
mental dlgest rlgbtly remarks (p VIII, col. 2, § 4). 'These prose formulas
are m a dIalect or in a style tbat dIl'fers not a httle from the narratIve
or descriptIve plOse of tbe Br.1bmanas and Sútras. Tbe formulas abound
at any rate in poetlc or otber archaisms and deserve to be collected ana
treated by tbemselves.'
3. Oertain Ara:r;¡.yaka-like pr0se passages in the Atbarva V d   ~
4. Tbe narrative and descriptive prose of the Brahma1).RS proper.
5. The prose of the Ara:r;¡.yakas,
6. Tbe prose of tbe older Upanieads, and
7. The prose oí tbe Sütras.
Each one of these seven groups deserves separa te and detaileq
treatment to furnish the material for a complete picture of tbe
historieal development of early Sanskrít syntax.
It is then the fourth group, viz. the narrativa and descriptiva-
prose of the Brabma1).as proper, which forms tbe subject of tbe
present work.
In three respects only this restriction has not been strictly ad·
hered too (A) Certain Qlokas which are essentially narrative or
descriptive in character, su eh as tbe Qlokas of the Quna"\ll(epa
legend, bave been included although they do not faU within the
scope of any of the seven groups enumerated above. This has
been done for the sake of convenience, for there are relatively so
few of them that a separate treatment of their case syntax would
vrn
Preface.
not be worth while. They are distinctly marked as Qlokas.
(B) For the same reason the prose passages of the AV. have been
included. (O) The question whether the restriction of the present
work to the BráhmaI;las in the strict sense of the word meant the
exclusion of those Arawakas ánd older which now form
separate texts has been given careful consideration. As a matter
oí principIe, a restriction to the proper seemed ad-
visable. But other considerations favoured their inclusion: It is
by a mere chance that e. g. the Brhad AraI;lyaka (now
reckoned as an independent   happens to form an inte-
gral part of the Qatapatha BrahmaI;la, while a text lIke the Ohan-
dogya Upani¡;;ad is separately handed down by our tradition. More-
over the prose of the AraI,lyakas and of the older group of
Upani¡;;ads is so closely sImilar to that of the BrahmaI;las proper
that it seemed inadvisable to omit the syntactical material furnished
by them. And finally, the AraI;lyakas and the older
antedate without doubt a late compilation like the Gopatha
BrahmaI;la, however greatly the various parts of this last work
may diifer in time oí composition. Tbe grent weight of these
considerations finaJIy induced me to include the syntactical matter
of tbe AraI;lyakas and of the early prose 1ll the present
work. These examples are plainly marked as 'Additions from
the AraI,lyakas and UpaI,li¡;;ads', and included within r J brackets.
Tbe following texts are then included:
1. AB. The Aitareya BrahmaI,la; Aufrecht's edition.
2. KB. The or Qañkbayana BrlihmaI,la;' Lindner's
edition.
3. PB. The Pancavióqa or TaI}Q.ya Maha BrahmaI,la; the Biblio-'
theca Indica edition.
4. SB. The SaQ.viuqa BrahmaI).a; Eelsingh's edition.
5. JB. The Jaiminfya or Talavakara BrahmaI,la .
..
Thls text, whlch is In a very corrupt state, has as yet not heen entirely
.. puhlished. The pertinent material has, as far 3S posslble, been collected
from a manuscnpt copy mcludmg a collation of aH extant manuscripts
made by Professor Wbltney and others (see JAOS 11, p. cxllv). Bemg unable
to consult the original manuscripts 1 had to rely on the correctness of this
transcnpt. A large number of extracts from tbe JB. has recently heen
IX
Preface.
pubhshed by Caland 1 and leferences to th1S paper have been added m
theif proper place under the caption 'Caland, Auswahl.'
6. QS. The Qatapatha.BrahmsI).a; Weber's edition.
1 regret that the Kanva recenSlOn of thIS text was not accessIble to me.
For syntactICal purposes a comparison of the Kanva version with the Ma·
dhyandina verswn would hare been of the greatest mterest and importance
7. TS. The prose parts of Taittiríya Sarilhita; Weber's
edition.
8 TB. The prose parts of tbe Taittiríya BrahmaI).a; the Biblio-
theca Indica edltion.
9. MS. The prose parts ofthe Maitraya:l}.1 Samhita; v. Schroeder's
edition.
10. K. The prose parts of the Kilthaka, v. Schroeder's edition
11. G B. Tbe Gopatha BrahmaJ)a.
The material was orlginally collected from the Bibhothera Indica editlOn.
Fortunately the te::d could be revIsed on the basls of D. Gaastra's edItlOn.
The 'Additions from the AraJ)yakas and   present the
material euUed from the foIlowing texts:
12. AA. The Aitareya Aranyaka; Keith's edition.
This comprlses the Aitareya·Upamsad.
13. Qankh Ar. The Qankhayana Aral).yaka, edited by FrIed-
lander (Books I and II), and by Keith (Books VII-XV)
'in his edition of the Aitareya AraI).yaka; the fuH text
in the Ananda«rama Series. _
14. TA. The Taittiríya AraJ)yaka, the Bibliotheca Indica ediholl.
This comprlses the TaIttiriya Upamsad and the M.ahanarayana
J5 Up. The Brahmal).a the Bibli!3-
theca Indica edition.
16. Chand. Up. The BoehtIingk's edition.
17. JUB. Tbe Jalminíya or Talavakara Brahmal).a;
my edition in JAOS. 16.
The- BAU {Brhad Aral).yaka the Aít. Up. (Aítareya
the Taitt. Up. (Taittiriya and the Mahan. Up.
(MahanarayaJ)a Upaniead) form portions of the texts already cited.
1 Das Jalminiya.Brahmana ¡n Auswahl. Verhandelingen der KoninkhJke Aka·
demie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam. Afdeebng LeUerkunde. Deel J, Nieuwe
Reeks, Deel XIX, No 4 Amsterdam 1919.
X
Prefuce
2. The Manner of Presentation. The manner of presentabon
is mtended to be essentially descriptive. It attempts to show the
relative frequency of a given usage, and to exhibit peculiaritles
which the syntactical usage of single texts or groups of texts may
chance to exhlbit.
Historical prospects or retrospects have been purposely avoided.
A really historicaI exposition of Sanskrit Syntax must await the
working up in detall of the syntactical material of the texts which
chronologically precede or follow the seventeen text enumerated
aboye: But within the compass of these texts (unless otherwise
stated) t   ~ collection of examples is intended to be as complete
as possible.
A comparativa treatment, whether with reference to a cIosely
allied language like the Iranian, or to the more remotely allied
other Indo-European languages, lay entirely outside the plan of
the present work.
The grouping of the material is, as far as practical, formal
rather than logical. ..
A discusslOn of the formal treatment of eyntax may be conveniently
fonnd in E. P. MOrrIs' and the author's paper on Agglutillution and Adap·
tabon (Harvard Studles m Classical Phllology XVI, 1905).
The categories and the criteria for grouping the material are
therefore strictly grammatical, not logical 1 have tried to do
justice to both scholastic rules of classification: 'Entia praeter
necessitatem non esse multiplicands', and 'Entmm varietates non
temere esse minuendas'; but, m case of doubt, 1 have preferred
to err in favour of the second maxim.
In conformity with the ideas concerning the origin and deve-
lopment of Indo-European inflection set forth in the paper on
Agglutination and Adaptation referred to aboye \ no attempt has
been made to determine basal meanings ('Grundbegriffe') for any
case. Instead, the various types of usage ('Gebrauchsspharen')
have been treated as fully and accurately as possible with special
reference to their frequency and the peculiarities exhibited by
single texts or text-groups.
1 Compare the discnSSlOn of the 'Origm of GrarnrnatiCal Elements' in chapter
XIX of O. Jespersen's Langnage, its Nature, Development, and Origm, London
and New York, 1922, p 367 ff
XI
Preface.
It also seemed worth while to note the beginnings of certain
constructions, no matter' wbether they led by further development
to established usage or whether their development was arrested
without reacblng fruition.
The use of case-forms in compounds belongs to the chapter
on word-formation. Partly for, this reason and partly because
this subject has been very fully treated in tbe second volume of
Wackernagel's Altindische Grammatik such cases have not been
included in the present work.
3. Secondary Use oí the Material here ·Collected
1
• As tbe
Illustrative material for the case-syntax of the Brahma:o.a prose
is here given in full, the present work may serve, to a certain
and limited extent, not only as a Dictionary but also as a Con-
cordance to the prose-sections of the Brahma:o.as, inasmuch as the
verbal correspondences between the different BrahmaI}l\ texts will
be found grouped together. Such juxtapositions may be a help
to textual emendations; and the importance of such parallels for
an eventual determination of the interdependence of the vanous
BrahmaI}a texts has been briefly pointed out by the writer In
the JAOS. 23, p. 325 with note 4.
Full Indices are intended to faCllitate such investigation.e.
1 Cf. tbe remarks 011 tbe secondary use of Bloomfield's Vedlc Concordance,
p. VIII.
XII
Table of Contents.
Gen e r a l In t r o d u e ti o n.
A. ConJunct and DISJunct Cases § 1
B. Proleptic, Pendent. and Absolute Cases. § 2
1. Prolepbc Cases. § 3
2. Pendent Cases. § 4 .
3. Absolute Ca¡;es. § 5 .
page
1
1
2
5
6
e The Make-up of the DIs¡unct Case. § 6 7
D   ~ T h e Signs of Severance of the DlsJunct Case from the Rest of the
Sentence. § 7 7
The IndIvidual Cases.
1. The Disjunct Nommative
I The Proleptic SubJect Nommahve
A. The Proleptic Subject NominatIve is Resumed by a Demon-
strati ve Pronoun
10
10
10
1. The SImple Proleptic SubJect Nommahve wIthout Accom-
panying Infimte Verb·forrn. § 8-9 .....
2. The ProleptlC SubJect Nominative IS accompanied by a Partl-
clple. § 10-11
3. The ProleptJc SubJect NommatIve IS accompamed by a
Gerund. § 12
4. The ProleptIc Subject NornmatIve 18 accornpamed by both a
Participle and a Gerund. § 13 . . . . . . .'. . .
B. The Proleptlc SubJect Nommative 15 not Resumed by a Demon-
strahve Pronoun
1 The Proleptic SubJect Nornmahve IS Accompamed by a
Participle. § 14
2. The Prolepbc SubJect Nornmahve. 18 Accompamed by a
Gerund. § 15
n. The Pendent NommatIve
A. The Pendent Nommabve is Resumed by a DemonstratIve Pro-
noun m its Proper Obhque Case
The Pendent Nominative Anbclpates
1. ,A Gemtlve. § 16 . .
2. An Instrumental. § 1 T •
3 A Locative § 18 .
4.-5A. An AccusatIve. § 19-20A
"
10
18
27
, 28
28
28
29
29
29
30
36
36
XIII
6 An Ablahve
7 A Datlve
TabIe of Contents.
} § 21 .
B Tbe Pendent Nommatlve IS not Resumed by a DemonstratJve
page
37
Pronoun 37
1 The Pendent NommatJve IS resumed by tbe RepetitlOn of tbe
Noun ID its PlOper Oblique Case. § 22 37
2. Tbe Pendenl NominabV"e lS Resumed by a Past PartiClple
ID ItS Proper Obhque Case. § 23 38
3 The Pendent Nominative wltbout ResumptlOn. § 24 38
1lI. Tbe Absolute Nomlllabve. § 25-26 . . . . 39
AppendlX l. Apparent Instances of DIsJunct Nommahves. § 27 45
Appendlx n. Anacolouthic Constructíons of RelatJve Clauses.
§ 28-29 . . 55
2. The DisJunct Accusatlve . 74
1 Tbe Proleptic AccusatJve Resumed by a DemonstratJve Pronoun 74
A. The Simple Prolephc Accusative witbout Accompanying Infimte
Verb·form. § 30-31.. . . . . . . . . . 74
B. The ProleptIc Accusative IS Accompanied by a Participle 78
1. A Present Particlple § 32 . 78
2. An Active Perfect ParbClple. § 33 80
3. A Future Parbclple. § 34 . 80
4. A Past Particlple. § 35. . 81
C. An AccusatlVe Dependmg on a Gerund IS Resumed by a De-
monstratrve Pronoun. § 35 A 81
n. The Absolute AccusatlVe 8 \
1. Tbe SeDlÍ·dlsJunct Use of the AccusatlVe § 36 81
2. The Absolute Use of tbe AccusatJve. § 37 -38 83
3. The Disjunct Instrumebtal. § 39- 40 89
4. The DisJund Dative. § 41-42 93
5 The Disjunct Ablatlve. § 43-44. . 94
6.   h ~ DisJunct Gemtive 100
l. The ProleptJc Gemtlve Resumed by a Demonstrabve Pronoun 100
A. The SImple Prolepbc GenitIve without Accompanying Infimle
Verb.form. § 25 . . . . . . 100
B. The Proleptic Gemtive IS Accompanied by a Parbciple. § 46 100
n. The Absolute GemtJve 101
1. The Germ" of the Absolute Gemtive. § 47 . . 101
A. The Genit,jve IS a Possesslve Gemtive 101
a) The Mmn Verb oi the Clause is not a Verb of Se·
parabon. § 48 . . . . 102
b) The Main Verb of the Clause is a Verb of Separa.
tion. § 49 110
B. The Gemtive is a Partltive Gembve § 50 122
XIV
TabIe oL Contents.
page
e The GemtIve depends on the Malll Verb of the Clause. § 51 130
D The GemtJve depends on an AdJective. § 52 139
E The Gemtlve depends on an Adverb. § 53 140
2. The Case·form lS AmblguouS. § 54 142
3. The True Absolule GemtIve. § 55 142
7. The DIsjunct Locative
14&
146
147
147
154
A. The Proleptic LocatIve. § 56
B The Absolute LocatIve
1. Germs of the Absolute LocatIve § 57
2. The True Absolute LocatIve .
A. The Accompanymg Parbciple IS a Past,Parhclple
1. of all·lntranslbve Verb § 59
2. of a TransltJve Verb § 60 . . . . . . .
B. The Accompanymg Pro ticiple is a Present PartJciple
1. of an Intranslüve Verbo § 61 . . . . .
2. of a TransItive Verbo § 62
154
154
199
20S.
268
279
C The Accompanymg PartIciple IS a Future ParllcipIe. § 63 292
The Meanmg oC the Absolnte LocatIve. § 64 . .
The Separabon of the Absolute Locative from the Rest
of the Sentence. § 65 .....
The SubJeet of the Absolute Locaüve § 66
The Predlcate of the Absolute Locative. § 67
Appendix 1. Passages which are not to be construed as Loca-
tIves Absolute. § 68 .
Appendix n. ParatactIcal ConstructlOns SemantIcally Equi·
valent to an Absolute Locaüve. § 69
Appendlx III. The Use of the Absolute LocatIve as a Means
of Connecting Sentences § 70 .
8 The DIsJunct Gerund . . . .
The Absolute Use of the Gerund. § 71
1. The Mam clause conslsts of a Verbal Adjectlve in -tavya or
29i>
298
299
302
304
307
307
-ya Used ImpersonaIly § 72 .. .......• 30S.
n. The Main Clause consists of a Verbal Ad]ectIve m -tavya
or ·ya Used Personally. § 73
309
IlI. The Mam Clause consists of a Nornmal SubJect with a
FmIte Velb. § 74 . . . . . . . 311
IV Tbe Main Clause conslsts of a Nommal Subject with or
wlthout the Substantive Verb 'to be' § 75. . . .
Appendix 1. Emendation of MS.3 7.5 (p. 81,13). § 76
Corrections and   d d l t l o n ~
Indices.
315
315
317
332
xv
Introduction.
§ l. A. Conjunct and Disjunct Cases. In t\ llormat Indo-
European sen ten ce a given case-form is directly related to sorne
other element of the sentence; ID fact, the expression of such
retatlou of oue member of a clause to auother lS the mam func-
tlOn,-and from the point of Vlew of strict syntax the only func-
tion-, of the Indo·European declensional endings.
In mtlectmg languages hke the Indo·European a clear distlochon between the
strlCny syntactlcal function and otljer funchons of the mflectiOnal eCHlmgs IS not
formally made; the case endings express he re also gender and number whlch
have nothmg to do wlth the syntactlcal relatlon of words lo oneanother Cf
J. Rles, Was 1st Syntax? (914; Stóhr, AIgebra der Grarnrnahk, 1889, MOlrlS and
Oertel, AgglutmatlOn and Adaptation (Harvard Studles m ClasslCal Phllology, 16,
1905, P 63-122) where the dill'erence of agglutmatlve and lntlectmg languages
In th1S respect is emphaslzed.
They are the outward and visible signs of thls syntactical dove-
taIllllg, and this normal use may be called the   o n j ~ n   t use oC
case-forms.
But there are instances in which this close knitting of a clause
is loosened and a certam dlsintegration, the degree of WhlCh may
vary, sets ID. When such a loosening of the syntactIcal Jomts,
1D whatever degree, has taken place we may speak of the disjunct
use of case-forms.
The very general collective term 'Anacolouthon' comprIses al! mstances in
whlCh the regular sequence of a clause, the 'conSec,utlO vetborum', 15 m any
way dlsturbed, 'genenbus numens temponbu5 persoms pertubatur' (Clcero, Parttt.
oral. § 18).
§ 2. B. The Disjunct U se of Cases more closely considered.
Proleptic, Pendent, and Absolute Cases.· The dlsJunct use of cases
may be subdlvided accordmg to the degree of syntacticallsolation
Oertel, The Syntax of Cases.
1
1
§ 3, a-e Introduction
which a given case-form exhibits, or, in other words. accordmg
to the degree of syntactical disintegration of the slfutence Ulllt
§ 3. 1. Proleptic Cases. a) Prolepsis with ResumptlOn by a.
Demonstrative Pronoun. A noun may retam the case-form WhlCh
is required by the syntaclical setting but be lifted out of its
proper place, placed usually at- the head of tbe clause, and he
tben resumed in its proper place by a demonstrative pronoun.
Tbus, TS. 2. 4. 1. 1 deva manusyah pitara.'! te 'nyata asann asura
te 'nyatah, 'Gods, men, Fathers,-they were on
one side; Asuras,   Piyacas,-they were on tbe other
side'; K. 31. 5 (p. 6, 12) pranarh vyanam apanam tan eva yajarnrtne
dadltatt, 'In - breathing, through - breatbing, out- breathing,-these
he places into the sacrificer' j TB. 2. 6 9. 3 yaJñaya yajamanaya
'tmane febhya eva , {{l$am ar;aste, 'For the sacrifice, for the sacrlficer,
for hlmself,-for them be asks a blessing'; K. 34. 4 (p. 38, ] 2)
antarik$ild dlVah prthivya ahoratrabhyarh tebhya enan sarvebhyo
nzrbhajati, 'From the atmospbere, from the sky, from the earth,
from day and night,-from all these he excludes them (VIZ. his
rivals)' .
This type is represented in .glish by: 'My brother, he is in
Elysium' (Twelftb Nigbt, Act r, Scene 2).
1>1 Prolepsis without Resumption by a Demonstrative Pronoun.
Instead of the resumption oí the proleptic case by a demonstratlve
pronoun the incipient disintegration of the sentence may be out-
wardly marked by the intrusion of a particle separating tbe pro-
leptic case from the main verbo Thus, QB. 1. 8. 1. 25 sa vm catur
upahvayamano 'tha nane 'vo 'pahvayate, 'Verily, calling four
times upon (this Iga), yet he calls upon her in different ways'.
This kind of prolepsis is confined to the nominative (cf. below
§ 14 and § 15). .It contains the germ oí an absolute case (cf.
below § 25-26). The noun is always accompanied by an infinite
verb-form, either a participle or a gerund (cf. below § 3, 1, Cj
§ 4-6)
For atha and other separating particles see below § 7, b
e) Absence of any Outwa.rd Signa of Diaintegration. There are
numerous instances in the BrahmaI,la prose where such visible
2
Proleptlc Cases. § 3, c".
signs as the resumption by a demonstrative pron0un (above § 3.
1, a) or the separation of the no un from the main verb by atha
(above § 3, 1, b) are wanting. When the noun is accompamed
by a participle and the ingredients of a clause are thus present
(cf. below § 4-6) the questlOn arises whether, even m the absence
of any outward sign of disintegration, the noun with it8 accom-
panying partiCiple may be assumed to have gained a certain degree
of independence such as lS implied by tbe use of a hypotactical
clause in an Ellglish rendering. For exa.mple, IS QB. 1. 6, 3 35
prajapater ha vat prajalJ, sasrjanasya parvant vtsasrañsuf¿ equivalent
to 'Of Prajapati having created creatures the joints relaxed', or
rather to 'When Prajapati had created creatures his joints relaxed'?
The latter view is ad vocated by Gaedicke (Accusati v, p 4,7. note):
'Wenn es QB. 14. 3. 1. 2 h8113t yaJñasya   r,;ug udakramat
oder 13 1. 1. 3 ar,;vasya va alabdhasya 1'eta udakramat, so
zwar 13, 1. 1. 4 prajapatzr yaJñam asrjata tasyu mahzma 'pakramat
"Prajapati erschuf das Opfer, dessen Gró13e (Potenz) entwich (=yon
dem wich dIe G.l" auch die Gepitive der eraten beiden Sátze als·
vom Subjekt abhangig auffassen, dennoch aber ist zu überaetzen:
"Ala dem Opfer der Kopf abgeschlagen war, ging seine Quc her-
aus", "Al s da.s Ron geschlachtet war, gmg sem Same davon"
desgleichen 6. 1. 3. 9 tasmat putrasya jatasya flama kuryat, "Daher
móge er, wenn ihm ein Sohn geboren ist, diesem emen Namen
schaffen (eig. seinen N amen machen)". In diesen drei Beispielen
druckt, der Genitiv mit dem nacbgestellten pradikativen Partlzip
einen besonderen, temporalen oder konditionalell Satz aus. Aber
die Zugehórigkeit des Genitivs zu dem Nomen ist noch eine der-
artige, da13 wir ihn yor letzterem durch ein Possessivpronomen zu
wiederholen haben, wenn Wlr ihn zum Subjekt eines besonderen
Satzes machen'. Simllarly, but more guardedly as regards the
Bindu conception of tbe syntactical relation, Delbrúck (Vergl.
Syntax, n, p. 494, § 164): 'So wlrd Z. B. in der altind. Prosa
erzllhIt, da13 Manu emen Stier opferte und dann fortgefahren:
tasyu 'labdhasya sa vag apa cakrama (QB. 1. 1. 4. 15). Das heifit
wortlich. "Dieses geopferten Stimme entwich", aber wir übersetzen:
"AIs er geopfert war, entwich seine Stimme". DaIl wir mit dieser
Übersetzung das richtige (vom Spracbgebrauch des Inders aus
1* 3
§ 3, c. Inh·oductíoD.
gesprochen) getroffen haben, lallt sich freilich nur wahrscheinlich
machen, nicht beweisen' In all these and kindred instances, it
seems to me, considerations of loglC or of translation do not
iouch the beart of the question which lS essentially and wbolly
a question of Sanskrit syntax. There lS, of course, no doubt that
in English or German the rendering by a hypotactical clause is
possible, nay even preferable or necessary, because demanded by
the English or German idiom. But tbe translation of such Sans-
krit clauses into modern English or German, far from being a
belp to tbeir correct interpretation, lS a so urce of danger, as trans-
latlOns into a foreign idlOm frequently are j for such translatlOns
lead us imperceptibly to view the ,syntactical relatlOns of one lan-
guage through the dIsturbing medium of another. In the absence .
of any visIble signa theré are really no cnteria WlllCh would enable
us to say with regard to any mdIvidual passage of tbis char.wter
whether the speaker or the hearer or both felt the noun wlth its
accompanymg partrclple as (more 01' less) independent from the
rest of the clause. All we can say is, that since the true absolute
constructions (below § 5) have th81r root and origm m such con-
structions, some of them must at some time have been felt as
more or les s independent syntactIcal uuits, and it is very probable
1hat frequently the speaker felt the case as conjunct whIle the
hearer construed it as a disjunct case, or vice versa.
It lS instructIve to compare examples of such quasi-disjunct
use of cases with parallel clauses in which the conJunct con·
struction of the case lS ,clear TIms, $8. 1. 7. 2 sadhyant:üh vai
dcvanam sattram astnanath r,¡arlcara alc$asu jajñíre 1 would naturally
be rendered III Enghsh by 'When the Sadhya gods were engaged
in a sacrificial session dust got into their eyes', but the un-
doubtedly conjunct tesam III the immedlately following katham
nu (=   Commentator) r,¡arkara ak$asu jayeran,
'How may dust get into our eyes?' shows that jt is impossible
for us objectively to determine if, or to what degree, the con·
nection of sadhyanam .. aslnanam with ak$asu was loosened
for the HIlldu speaker or hearer. The same is true for QS. 6.
1. 3. 9 cited by Gaedlcke (cf. also QB. 6. 1. 3. 20 tasya [agneh]
1 Cf below § 48, Ex. 24-26.
4
Pendent Cases § 4.
citasya náma karolt¡ KB 7. 2 na va ajatasya garbhasya nama
kurvanti) when compared with the clear conjunct genitives in
QB. 6. 1. 3. 10-17 yad asya tan nama 'karot; 14. 9. 4. 25
(= BAU. 6. 4 25 Madhy. = 26 KaI).v) athü 'sya namadheyarh
(KaIfv. mima) karoh¡ KB. 6. 2-9 nama me kuru. In the passage
TS. 5.2.3.4; 5.3.2.2; PB 8. 13 devanám vm (TS. 5. 2. 3.4
  suvargam (PB. svargarh) lokam yatam diQalt samavliyanta (PB.
dit;o 'vliyanta) the Commentary to PE. expressly interprets devü·
nam ... yatám as an absolute genitiva and the English ldiom
requires the translation: <When the gods went to the heavenly
world the quarters collapsed'. But the parallel K. 20 11 (p. 31, 2)
has here a proleptic genitive: devanam vai svargam lo7carh yatarh
dtQas samavliyanta, where the genitive is not so much a
possessive genitive but rather a genitive of interest and concern:
'Of the gods when they went to the heavenly world,-their-
quarters collapsed', (in German: 'Den Geittern, als sie zur HimmeIs-
welt gingen, - donen sturzton die Himmelsgegelldell zusammon').l
And comparing QB 8. 7. 1. 11 yo vai mrzyata rtavo ha tasmai
vyuhyante 'For him who dies the seasons are confused' with TS.
6.5.5. 1 tasya [mdrasya] vrtrarh Jaghnu$a rtavo 'muhyan the ren-
dering <For him (lndra) when he had slain Vrtra the seasons were
confused' comes perhaps closer to the speaker's understanding oC
tasya ... jaghnu$alt than the rendering 'When Indra had sIain
Vrtra the seasona were confused'.
For this reason such examples oC quasi-coDJunct constructions are liberally
quoted in the followmg paragraphs, but wlthout any intentlOn of thereby preJudg·
ing the question whether, in any indmdual inslance, the case was felt by th&
speaker or hearer or by both as conJullLtly or dlsJunclly used
§ 4:. 2. Pendent Cases. A noun may be lifted out of the sen-
tence, but instead of showing tbe proper case-forro required by
the syntactical setting it is put in the nominative case and later
resumed by a demonstrative pronoun in the proper oblique case.
The nommative which thus anticipates an oblique case ia, froro
the syntactical point of Vlew, wholly severed from the rest of the
clause and hangs, so to speak; in the airo Thus QB. 13. 4. 3. 6
(in the formulas of the 'Cyclic Legend') yamo vaivasvato raja tasya
1 Cf. below, § 50, Ex. 18, Rem.
5
§ 5. IntroductlOn.
pztaro vir,;ah 'King Yama Vaivasvata, - hlS people are the Fathers';
4. 4. 5. 1 athaz, 'tac char'iram tasmzn na raso 'sti, 'Now this" body,
-there is no sap in it'.
When the noun lS accompamed by a partlcIple such conbtJ uchons verge very
closely on the absolute nommatJve (below 9 25-26).
The psyehologlCal process whieh gives rIse to Pendent Nomina-
tIves appears to be as follows: The speaker begins to utter hls
statement before the syntactical mould mto WhlCh hlS thought lS
to be cast is fully matured, I e before the syntactical integratlOll
of its parts has fully taken place As he starts speakmg, his
attentlOn is fixed upon a single item of the thought-complex
ll'respeetive of the relation whieh lt will ultimately bear to the
other elements of the clause The remainder of the thought-
complex takes its syntactical shape after the pendent nominatIve
has been uttered and thus the proper syntactical relation of thlS
nominative to the rest of the sentence must be afterwards indicated
by a resumptive pronoun. The nominatIve lS chosen as pendent
case because it is the only case whleh not only expresses (as sub-
ject case) syntactieal relation, but also implies the absence of aU
syntactlCal relation (as in titles, headmgs, lists) 1 Conversely the
attentlOn of the hearer is more strongly directed to sueh an ah-
normal nominatl ve, so that the emphatlC attention of the speaker
is commulllcated to the hea:rer.
§ 5. -3. Absolute Cases. In the precedmg two groups the dis-
Junct case used eIther proleptically (nbove § 3) or pendently (above
§ 4) forms, syntactically consldered, an integral part wlth the rest
of the clause and a medIate connection at least with another
sentence-element is maintamed. This third group, on the other
hand, lS charaeterized by the faet that the disjunct case no longer
forms an integral part of the sentence, but, through the absence
of even a medIate syntactical connectlOll with any other element'
of the clause, has gained complete syntactical independence. Such
1 S¡mIlaI lS. use of the 'numberless' smgular III the so-called 0xí'llla TIlV-'
i'laplKóv; 'der Erschemung hegt zugrunde, dal3 1m Moment der Setzung des
Vel'bums der Sprechende sIch noch llIcht uber dIe Form klar ¡st, dIe er dem
SubJekt geben wlll, als llldIflerente Verbalform setzt er den Smgular' (Wacker-
nagel, Vorlesungen über Syntax, 1, 1920, p.21).
6
Absolute Cases. §6
independenee cannot be gained by a sImple noun but lt IS ne-
cessary tbat tbe noun sbould be accompanied by an infimte
verb-form (either a partimple 01' a gerund), in other words tbe
dlS.1Ullct case, lf lt lS to be regarded as a true absolute case, must
contalll the materIal for a sImple sentence, VlZ. subject and predi-
cate (cf. aboye § 3, 1, c). Thus, PB. 5. [) 15 devaQ ca va asuraQ
ca 'dttye vyayacchantas tam deva abhyaJayan, 'The gods and the
Asuras contendlllg about AdItya (= when they contended), the
gods WOll him'; AB. 1. 15. 1 hal/lr attthyam mrupyate sorne raJany
agate, 'The guest-offering lS spread klllg Soma havlllg arnved
(= when he has arnved)'. In English thls type lS represented by.
"And tell qualOt hes, How honourable ladles sought my love,
Whích 1 denyíng tbey feH slCk and dled' (Merchant of Venice,
Act lII, Scene 4)
But whIle, on the one hand, the presence of an infinite verb-
forro lS esselltIat for every true absolute case, the mere presenee
of a partlClple tends, on the otber hand, to glve a eertam deglee
of mdependence to proleptlC (§ 3, 1, e), pendent (§ 4) and even
eonJullct cases (§ 3, 1, c). Karl Kunst (Glotta, 12, p. 31) very
Justly speaks of a 'seductIVe force' ('lockende Kraft') of tbe partl-
eíple and Delbruck (Vergl. Syntax n, § 164, P 494) sketches
the transltlOll from conjunct to absolute use wlth the words 'DIe
EntWlCklllng verlauft be! diesen KonstruktlOnen [VIZ. the absolute
gellltIve in Sanskrit aud Greek] so: Zu emem obliquen Kasus
emes Satzes tritt em Partlzlp. Dasselbe ist fuI' den Smn VUll so
tiberragender WlChtlgkeit, daU es den Kasus ins Sehlepptau mmmt,
desseu Verhaltnis zu dem ihn regierenden SatzteIl slCh mfolge-
dessen loekert. Bald geht das ursprungliche grammatische Ab-
hangigke!tsverhaltms für das Gefúhl des Sprechenden. verloren,
das Partlzlp nebst Kasus kann jedem beheblgen Satze angefugt
werden, und so ist eme Ausdrucksform fur eine Nebensatzhand-
lung gewonnen, welehe nicht zu dem Satzsubjekt in Bezwbung
steht' C( § 57, Ex. 5, Rem.
§ 6. C. The Make-up of the Disjunct Case. The DlsJunct
Case may conslst (a) either of a sImple noun 01' a serIes oí' such
sImple nouns, 01' (b) tbe noun may be aecompanied by an lU-
:D.lllte verb-form, VIZ a participle 01' a gerund. The ImpOl'tauce
7
S 7, a, b.
Introduction
of this difference has been discussed above § 3, 1, c; § 4-5: A
simple noun can never reaeh the degree of independence necessnry
for an absolute case; the presence of an infinite verb-forro, on tbe
otbe1' band, gives even to a conjunct case a certam a11' of in-
dependence
§ 7. D. The Signs of Severance of the Disjunct Case froro
the Rest of the Sentence. a) The fact that tbe eonnection of
a dlsjunct case wlth the 1'est of the clause is mediate only is lU-
dicated by the resumption of the disjunct case by lDeans of a
demonstrative pronoun tbrough which the immediate conneetion
wJtb another element of the sentence is established, cf. § 8-1 D;
§ 16-21; § 30-35; § 41, § 43; § 45.
Ir the case-form of the disJunct case is that required by lts syntacbcal rclallOn
we speak of a ProleptJc Case (§ 3); lf the dlSjUnÜ case lS a nommatJ ve we sr Cdk
of a Pendent Case (§ 4 and below § 7, e)
The place of the demonstrative pronoun may be taken by a
noun (as at QB 2. Ó. 4. 11 devanam, ef. below § 22), or by ad-
jectival partieiples (as at AB 8. 10. 9 upavistaya, anvarabdhaya,
ef. below § 23).
For a qUl1s1-prolepsls and resurnjJtion by (e)t/1smin kale cf. § 56.
b) The alienation of the disjunct case from the rest of the
sentence may be indicated by particles whieh intervene between
tbe disjunct case and the sentence-element to WhlCb it beIongs.
The most frequent particle is atha (ef. Delbrúck, Altind. Syntax,
p.539, 7, § 263, II; Speijer, Sanskrit Syntax, § 450, p. 348; Ved.
und Sansk. Syntax, § 286, p. 91, 20), see § 14, Ex. 1 (QB. 1. 8. 1.
24-25); Ex. 2 (TS. 7. 1. 3. 1); § 15, Ex 1 (QE. 1. 9. 2. 25); § 37,
Ex. 2 (TS. 7. 5. 6. -3); Ex. 6 (KB. 30. 5); § 59, Ex. 69 (QB. 1. 6 4.
4); Ex. 212 (QB. 11. 2. 4. 10); § 60, Ex. 4 (TB. 1. 2. 5. 1); Ex 23
QB. 5. 1 3. 13 = Ó 5. 4. 33); Ex. 62 (QB. 7. 3. 1. 2; 3); Ex. 107
(QB. 1 8. 2. 7); Ex. 108 (QB. 1. 9. 2. 26 = 4. 4. 4. 3); Ex. 212
(QB 12.9. r.12-17); § 61, Ex 6 (TE. 1. 6. 8. 9); Ex. 32 (GB.l.
3. 19); § 62, Ex. 22 (QE. 1. 2. Ó. 20 bis); and cf. the similar sepa-
ration oí the absolute gerunds from the rest of the sentence by
atha § 72, Ex. 5 (MS. 3. 9. 2, p. 114, 6); Ex. 6 (MS. 3. 10. 4, p. 134,
11); § 73, Ex. 16 (MS. 1. 6. 10, p. 102,8); § 76, Ex 3 (QE. 1. 9 3. 10).
8
Slgns ot Severance. § 7, e, d.
Other parUeles of separatlOD are atra, tad, tad allU (see below
§ 65, b-d) and tata!t, § 26, Ex 6 (QB. 2. 3. 1. 10).
e) The severanee of the disjunet case lS indieated by the fact
tÍJat, though being semanticlllly an mtegral part of the sentence,
lt cannot be syntactically construed wlth any other element of
the sentence; the necessary connectlon lS brought about through
tbe mediation of a dernonstraÍlve pronoun in tbe syntactlCal1y
required case (see above § 7, a). The result is the Pendent Nornma-
tIve (above § 4).
d) The severance of the disjunct case from the rest of the sen·
tenee has reached Its highest degree in tbe Absolute Case. Here
tbe dlsjunct case is no longer, eIther mediately 01' immediately,
construable with any element of the rest of the sentence nor does
1t form semanticaJ1y an integral pal't of it, out it playa tbe part of
an adjunct and is equivalent to a paratactical (see below § 69) or
hypotactical clause.
9
s§ 8-9, Ex 1-2. ProleptIc NommatIve.
1. The Disjunct N ominative.
I. The Proleptic Suhject Nominative.
A Tha Proleptic Subject Nominativa Resumad by a
Demonstrative Pronoun.
§ 8. The simple Proleptic Subject Nominative (without accom-
panying infinite verb-form).
a) The Proléptic Subject NommatIve is usually placed at the
head of the clause (e. g. Ex. 1-17, etc.); rarely 1mbedded in the
sentence (e. g. Ex. 20) b) It consIsts most frequeutIy of a serIes
of sllnpIe nouns (e g. Ex. 1, 5,6,9, 11-14, etc) which is occa-
slOnally marked off by ttt (Ex. 3, 8, 22 B), more rarely of a smgle
no un (e. g. Ex. 2,7, 21, 22G) WhlCh may be accompamed by an
adJectival (Ex. 4) or by a nommal (Ex. 10) quahfier. c) As a rule
the resumptive demonstratlVe pronoun follows immedlately upon
the ProleptlC Nominative (e. g Ex. 1, 3-6, 8-16, etc.); rarely the
former is separated form the latter by other words (Ex 2, 7, 18,
21). d) The Resumptive Pronoun agrees lU gender and number
wIth the predicate no un (e g. Ex. 5, 6, 17, 19, 22 B, 22C, 22D,
221) Compare for this concord SpeiJer, Sanskrlt Syntax, § 27,
1, p. 18.
§ 9. Examples:
1. devah pttaro manu6yas (TS. deva manuf)ya}¿ pztaras) te 'nyota
asann, asura r   k ~   ñ s z pzr;acas te 'nyatah, 'The gods, Fathers, men,
-tbey were on one side, the Asuras, Rak$ases, PIQ3.cas,-they
were on the other side'. K. 10.7 (p. 132,10); TS 2.4.1. 1; JB. 1.
154 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 54).
2. devar; ca va asurar; ca samyatta asans, tan gayatry antara
'ttsthad ojo viryam annadyam pangrhya, sarnvatsaro vavat 'tan 60
10
Proleptic Nommattve. § 9, Ex. 3-4
'tisthat, 'The gods and the Asuras were engaged in combat;
between them stood the GayatrI havlllg selzed strength, vlgour,
{and) food· eatJllg, the year indeed, -that stood between them.'
K. 10. 7 (p. 133,8).
The parallel pa,,,ages wllhout prolepsl5' M8 2 1 11 (p 1.3, 8 and 14) ca
va ca 'spardhanta, tan gayatrI sarvam annam partgrhyli 'ntara 'tlsthat, ...
samvatSal o vat gaya tri, samvatsaro wi tad atz8that, T8.2 4 3 1-2 dnusurah
.samyattli asan, tesam giiyatry OJO balam tnd1'iyam V'iryam prajam sam-
grhIJa 'daya 'pakramya 'ttSthat, , samvatsaro vai gayatrI, samvatsaro Val tad
apakramya 'tlsthat.
3. prano 'lJa1W9 caksuf¡, 9rotram lty etaln vat purusam akaran,
'In - breathmg, out- breathing, ¡;nght, (and) hearing,-these have
made (= make) man'. GB. 2. 2 14.
For thls 'comprehenslve' of %ti to mark the end of a senes er. PW. s tti,
col. 790, 3-7, Boehtlmgk, Chrestomathle, 2d ed., p 356 = 3d ed. 396-.397 (note
on 1 8. 1 7), pw. s tti, p col 3, 43-48, Delbrück, Altind 8yntax, p 533,
7-17, and cf further the contIoversy artsmg out of Bühle¡'s artlcle WZKM. 1
(1887) p.13-20 Boehtlmgk, ZDMG.41 (1887), P 516-519, Benchte der ph¡)-
hlSt el d kgl. sachs. Ges. d. Wiss 1895, p. 152, Knauer, Festgru& an Boeht\wgk
62-fi7, KeIlh, JRA8. 1910 (1I), p 1317-1321, t;A(OnentalTran,latlOn
Fund, N 8 18) P 8, n G, p 40, n 6, p 51, n 6
Instances In the Bráhmana prose are TB 3 8 20 5, t;B 1. 8, 1 7 (contrast 8,
wllhout ztzl; 13.:l 2 2, 13 2 8.1 = 13 5.2 1 (contrast 13.5 1 13 ",here
malks the pratika of V8. 24 1); 14 6 8 9 (= BAU. 3.8 9, where the Kanva
has ¡tt whlle the Madhyandinas omlt it); KB 6 15 (tel, p 27, 23 and
24 aud p 28, 6 where ftsm ístayah stands In contrast to anya tstil/) , TA 1,
25. 1, Alt Ar.2 .3 1 (p 111,14- Kelthl. 2 3 3 (p. 113,8,15,16; 17); 2 6 (p 123.
6, 7) = AIt. Up 3 1. 2, Alt Ar 5 3 1 (p 146,10), JVB 3 16 2. Chiind Vp 4
11.1,412 1,413.1,5 1O!J, 7 2, t;A.l 4,2 1 =Alt Ar 3 2 2 (Kelth,
p 134,1-3) 8 9,8.11 '
4. fas [apa!t] tatrat 'va 'bhya9ramyad abhyatapat samatapat, [ah
frántas taptal} sardham eva retasa abhavan,
tdsam anyatara (Gaastra's emeud for anya anyatara) al1lavana
apeya asvadvyas ta a9anta retalt samudram vrtva   'These
(waters) he then tOlled over, he heated, he thoroughly heated,
they havmg been tOlled over, heated, .thoroughly heated together
wIth the seed became twofold: one (half) of thern bemg excessively
salty, not dnnkable, not palatable,-they, not bemg appeased,'
contmued to envelop the seed, the ocean'. GB. 1 1. 3
11
§ 9, Ex 5-9 ProleptlC NOIDmahve.
The contmuabon of the sentence athe 'tarah •.• samatapat is llsted
below § 19, Ex 1.
For .y 8thá wlth gerund as amnliary verb ef Delbruek, Altmd. Syntax, p 407;,
SpeJJer, Sansknt Synlax, § 381, p. 298 Such gerundJal eonslructlOns should be
added to WhItney, Gr,.§ 1075, e (ef § 994, e).
5. dad7n madhu ghrtam dh(tnas ta?Zdulas tat samsr$tam syat, 'Curds,
honey, ghee, grains, (and) rice-grains,-those should be the mix-
ture'. K 11. 2 (p. 145, 7).
The neuter noun 8amsTbta 'mixture', whlCh should be added In pw., occurs
also in the slllgular at K. 11. 2 (p. 145, 13): 36. 1 (p 68, 7) = MS 1. 10. 6 (p. 146,6"
wh·ere the text should be emendend to sarhsTstarn malldam) , In the plural al
K 11. 2 (p. 145, 4).
6. agnihotram darfapürnamasan cat1.trmasyany esa vava tarhi yaJna
Ctsit, 'The Agnihotra, the New Moon and the Full Moon ceremonies,
(and) tbe sea son al offerings,-they thell constituted the sacrifice'.
K. 23 7 (p. 82, 19).
7 somahutlr ha va ebhyas [devebhyaf¡,] so 'ccakrama, 'The Soma-
sacrifice,-that departed from these (gods)'. JB. 2. 158.
8. arUmr vajasaneyo barkur pnyo janar;ruteyo bultla'
uflvataraf{mr vaiyaghrapadya ete ha pañea mahabrahma asuZt,
'AruI).i Vajasaneya, Barku VareI].U, Priya Janalfruteya, Bulila
Ac;vatarayvi, Vaiyaghrapadya,-these were five great Brahman-
priests'. JB. 1. 22 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 10).
Wlth mahabrahma- tÍ ºB. 1. 1. 4. 14 asurabrahma-; Altmd.
Gr. n, 1, § 50, b, a, p. 117, 10-11
9. jivala9 ca ha kar"iradtr indradyumna9 ca bhallaveyas tau ha
'runer llcilryasya sabhaga(v) (the mss sabhagií, varo lect. sahagii)
cJivala Kariradi and Indradyumna Bhallaveya,-these
two carne going for a discussion with the teacher AruI).i'. JB. 1.
271 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 103).
The mss of JB. vary here and elsewhere between káriradi and kal·¡raj'l, ef.
Wackemagel, AltIlld. Gr. 1, p. 163, § 140, a, note, where the varíant ApMB 2. 8. 2
Itccatrvádt for RVKh. 10. 128 3; HG. 1. 10.6 uccairva)i may be added. And ef.
tIJe play between the v' l'Uj and rudra at K. 25. 1 (p. 103, 2) yat samaru)at tad
l'ttdrasya rudratvam (Nlrukta 10. 5 yad arttdat tad rudrasya rudratvam itt Katha-
kam seems to refer to this passage 2nd should probably be emended aeeordmgly).
1 have adopled Caland's emendatIOn (WZKM., 27, p. 77) of the mss readmg
sabhaga (val'. lect. sahiiga) to sabhaga(v). Tbe adJective sabhaga occurs besldes
the two passages ºB 3. 3. 4 14 (where, however, aecordmg to   note,
J2
Proleptic NommatIve § 9, Ex. 10-11.
the Kaova recension omlts the clause m whICh sabhiiga occurs) and Chand
Up. 5 3. 6, both cIted m PW., also at JUB. 4. 6 4 (where, of COUl·se, sabhiiga
should be read as one word) = JB. 1. 22 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 13) atha hai 'salh
sabhiiga iivavraJa Wtth sabhiiga the PW compares VS. 30. 6 = TB 3. 4. 1. 2
siwhacara the exact llleanmg of WlllCh 15 uncertam (WebeI, ZDMG 18, P 277 =
Ind Strelfen, 1, p 77, Eggelmg, SBE.44, P 413) In as much sabha and
samlti are closely related m sense (Edgerton, KZ, 46, P 174,17) the adJectIve
samtttmgama QB. 14.9 4.17 (=BAU 64.17 Ma:dhy. = 18 Ka:ov) may be com-
pared wlth sabhiiga The gemhves QB. 3. 3 4 14 asya, JB. 1. 271 atlener iicaryasya
and JB. 1. 22 = JUB. 4. 6. 4 tesam depend 00 the prior memher of the compound
(WIlhoey, Gr. § 1316; Wackernagel, Altmd Gr. 11, 1, P 31, § 12, a, SpelJer Sanso
knt Syntax, p 178, § 231) cf. AV. 8. 10.5 yanty asya sabhiim ,6 yanty asya
samltlm .. The prIor memhl'r sabha of the compound sabhaga must not be
taken in the nalroW meanmg of 'Ratsvelsalllmlung' hul as 'cOlloquIUlll or con-
c!lIUm, a common (sa·) meeting for the eXlhange of or conversahon'
(EdgeIton, KZ, 46, p. 175, 17). Edgerton's etymologlC<11 analY<¡ls IS undoubtedly
preferable to the current connectlOn of sabha wilh Goth1C stbJa etc plOposed by
A Kuhn, KZ, 4, P 370, cf. Wackernagel, KZ, 46, P 272,31. Sabhaga = 'gomg
for a conversahon, dlsmssLOn wllh somebody (gemlive)' fits al! tbe passageó m
which the word occurs; thus QB.3 3 4 14 'Even kll1gs come gomg for an
audlence lulh hlm; he IS the first to address the kmgs', Chand Up. 5 3 6
'Then, on the 1ll0lrOW, he (viz Gautama Arum) went up gOlng for (Ius) audience
(wilh kmg Plava:hal}.a JaIbalI), then he (VIZ. the kmg) addlessed lnm', the sItu·
atlOn m this last passage IS very simIlar to that of Chand. U p 5 11. 7.
10. bhrgvanglraso devas (32. VlQve devas; 33 sadhya devas; 34.
rnaruto devas, 35. rud1'a devas; 36. adttya devas) ta (32.
te 'nustubham; 33. te brhat'im; 34. te panktlm; 35 te tnstubham,
36. te jagatim) anvayattas, tebhya (32. tebhyo 'nustnb; 33 tebhyo
brhat't; 34 tebhyah pañktzr; 35. tebhyas 36 tebhyo Jagaty)
bhrgvañgzrobhyo (32. vu,;vebhyo; 33. sadhyebhyo; 34. marudbhyo;
35 rudrebhyo; 36. adztyebhyo) devebhya ekalkena   kaman
nzkaman duhe, 'The Bbrgu and Añgiras gods [32. Tbe AH Gods;
33. The Sadbya gods; 34 The Marut gods; 35 The Rudra gods,
36 The Aditya gods],-they are connected with the Ut;;mh·metre
[32. tbe Anu$tubb·metre; 33. the Brhati-metre; 34 the Pañktl'
metre; 35. tbe Tflt;;tubh-métre; 36. tbe J agatl-metre]; for these
Bhrgu and Angiras gods [32-36 as aboye) tbe -metre
[32-36 as aboye) milks wisbes (and) desires witb each separate
syllable'. JB. 1. 31-36.
11. datvar,; ca ha sautemanaso, mztravlC ca damstradyumnas tau
1/a pratldarr;asya vatbhiivatasya fValknasya raJño  
13
§ 9, Ex 12-16 Ploleptic NomlOative.
asatuf¿, 'Datva Sautemanasa and Mitravid
these two were puplls of king Pratidar<;a Valbbavata Qvmkna'.
JB. 2 274 (276, Caland, Auswabl, p. 194).
12. ksatram ca rastram ca rtam ca satyam ca tan y avastat (ms.
avasta), tapar; ca tejar; ca svadha ca 'mrtam ca tany l' parastat,
'NobIlity and domimon, rlght aud trutb,-these are belowj on
the othet hand, penance and splendour, happiness and lmmorta-
lit y, -these are aboye'. JB 3. 272.
For u ef. Delbruck, AltlOd Syntax, p '.07, § 254,3
13. katame vasava ih I agnu¿ ca prthlvz ca vayur; ca 'ntanksam
Ctl, 'd2tyar; ca dyaur; ca candramar; ca naksatram 'te vasaval¡. .
"'Who are the Vasus?" - "Agni sud the Earth aud Vayu aud
tbe Atmosphere and AdItya and tbe Sky and the Moon and the
Constellatíons,-tbese are the V asus'''. QB. 11. 6. 3. 6; JB. 2
77 (JAOS. 15, p. 239): QB. 14.6. 9.4 (= BAU. 3. 9. -t Madby. =
3 Kanv.).
l-t. katame te trayastru¡r;ad ttt ¡ vasava ekadara rudra
dvadara ' dltyar ta ekatriñrad, mdrar cal ' va ca tray-
astriñrav itl, '''Who are these thirty-tbree (divinities)?" - "The
eight Vasus, the eleven Rudras, the twelve Adttyas,-tbey are
thirty-one; Indra and Prajapati are the tblrty-second and tbirty-
third"'. QB 11. 6. 3 5, 14. 6. 9.3 (= BAU. 3. 9. 3 =
2 Kanv.
The parallel passage JR 2. 77 (JAOS 15, P 23!J) wJthout ploJepsls: katarne
I astau '/,'asava ekadafa ruara 'ditya mdra!) caí'tu
prajapatl!) ca trayastMitf;av
15 asandi ca 'kha ca ca rukmapal)ar¿ ca 'gnir¿ ca mkmar;
ca tat 'The seat and tbe fire-pan and the netting and the
slmg oí the gold plate and tbe tire and tbe gold plate,-these"
(make up) six', QB. 6. 7. 1. 27
16. catvarah padar¿ catvary anücyani r;zkyam ca   ca yad
u kim ca rajjavyam r¿ikyam tad ana 'T.hagm rukmas tat trayodar¿a,
'The four feet, the fout boards (oí the seat) and tbe netting and
the shng of tbe gold pIate or wbatever corded netting (there is,
and) along (with it) the fire-pan and tbe fire (and) tbe gold plate.
-tbese (make up) thirteen'. QB 6. 7. 1. 28.
14
Proleptlc Nommahve. § 9, Ex 17-22.
17 trini gayatru;atani te dve brhat'i(;ate, saptatim anustubhak sap-
tattm patikti(; eatvariñ(;aeehatam brhatmam, trayanam trlstupehatanam
gayatri(;atam uddhrtya tani tr'ini brhati(;atani, tae ca gayatr't(;atam
jagati(;atam ca te dve brhatl(;ate, pañea(;at trir¡tuMah pañea(;ad usmhak
(;atam brhatyak sampadyante, 'Three hundred GayatrIs,-they are
(equivalent to) two hundred BrhatIs, seventy Anul';ltubhs (and)
seventy PañktIs are   to) one hundred and forty Brha-
tIs; subtracting one hundred GayatrIs from three hundred 'Tril';l-
tubhs,-that lS (equivalent to) three hundred Brhatis, these one
hundred Gayatrls and 011e hundred JagatIs,-they are (equivalent
to) two hundred Brhatis; fifty Tri¡;;tubhs (and) fifty U¡;;l].ihs malee
up one hundren Brbatls'. KE. 18. 3
18. praJapatzr ycw't prathamam ahutzm aJuhot sa hutva yatra
tato mkañkatak samabhavat, 'Prajapati,--the first oblatlOll
wbich he offered,-where he, having made the oblation, washed
(his hands) thence the Vlkañkata-tree sprang up'. QB. 6. 6. 3 lo
Tbe resumptlve sa IS due to the mtervening relative clause ylJm ... aJuhof:
er. belolV § 11, Ex. 1 A, Rem., Ex 8 B, Rem.
19. a(;va rsabho vrstl-zr bastak sa 'A horse, a
bull, a ram, a he-goat,-these are the sacrificial fee, for the
sake of (attammg) VIrIlity' TS. 2. 3. 7. 4.
20. etena Lsaktena] ha va maro 'gastyo marutas te samajanata,
'By means of this (hymn) lndra, Agastya, (and) the Maruts,-
they agreed'. AB. 5. 16. 14.
21. tasmad dha 'py etarh't bhayan wa naktam sa yavanrnatram
lVa 'pakramya (Bib!. Ind. wlth the mss. prakramya) bibketz, 'There-
fore even now, even a strong (man) at night,-he, going off
even for a short distance, is afraid' GB. 2. 5. 1.
Tbe palallel AB 4.5 1 wlthout plOlepsls' tasmad dhii 'py
naktam yavanmlJtram wai 'va 'pakt'amya bibheti.
For iva = eva el. Aufrecht, AB., p 430, 26-28, Eggehng, SBE, 44, p. 152,
note 3 on. QB. 12. 2 2 11 j Keith, JRAS. Fl08, p. 1193, note 1; 190<), p. 754,
note 6; RIgveda Brabmanas (Harvard Oriental SerIes XXV) p 89, § 7, no 25.
And contrast QB. 14. 6. 11. 2 (= BA:U 4.2.2) Madh. rec paroksene 'va with
Kanv rec. pal'oksenai 'va
22. devapatram va esa yad I tad yatha patra ud-
dltrtya prayaeked fad, atila yat pura va§atkara) jukttyad ya-
15
§ 9, Ex 22 A-C. ProleptJc NommatlVe.
,
tha ' dlto bhamau nidlgdham fad amuya syad evam tat, tasmad u
saha vai 'va vasatkare'!la juhuyad t:a$atkrte va 11 tad yatha yonau rc-
tah siñced eva'l1l tad, atha yat pura juhuyad yatha 'yonau
(Weber's text omlts the avagraha) 1'etah s1ktarn tad amuya syad
evam taf, tasmild u saha 'va t'asatk(trena jHhuyád vasatkrte va,
'Tbe is tbe vessel of tbG- gOdR; it lS just as if one were
to offer (food) ladhng it out of a vessel, now if he were to make
the offermg before the as (food) stickmg down on the
ground,-(as) that would he useless, even so (ihe offering would
te useless); therefore he should make the offermg either along
with the VaQat-call or after the Val;lat-call has been uttered: jt lS
Just as lf one were to pour seed jnto a womb, now Ir he were
to make tbe offerlllg before the Vaeat-call, as seed poured mto
.a non-womb,-(as) that would be useless, even so (the offenng
would be useless); therefore he should make the offering elther
along wIth the Val;lat-call or after the Va$at-call has been uttered'.
QB. 1. 7. 2. 13-14.
r Additions froro the Aral,lyakas and Upaml;lads:
22 A. cakf;tth !(1'ot1'am mano vak pl'anas ta eta pañca devata íma/u
V?5tah purusam, pañco 'vat 'ta ayam   'Slght,
hellrmg, mind, speech, breath,-these are the five dlVinities
which have entered man, and thlS man has entered tbese five
(divmities)' Alt. Ar 1. 3 8 (p. 92, 13 Keith).
22 B. prthwi vayur a7car;a apo 'ty va atmo '7ctham
pañcamdham, "fhe Earth, the \Vind, the Ethereal Space, the
Waters, the Lights,-these are tbe Self, tbe five-fold Uktha'.
Alt Ar. 2. 3. 1 (p. 111, 13-14 Keith)
22 C. tasya [samnaM trayy eta vidya hzlika1'o, 'gnzr vayur asav
udLtya esa prastava, ima eva loka ", r;raddha yajiío dakrtna
ttdgttho, dlr;o 'vantaradi!(a a7cá!(a esa pratthara, ápah praJa osa-
dhaya e¡;a upadrava!(, candrama nak,atruni pttara etan nidhanam,
<Of thlS (Saroan) tbe threefold knowledge 18 the Hiilka:ra; Agni,
Vayu, (and) yonder SUll,-they are tbe Prastava, these worlds
are the AdI; faith, the sacrifice, (and) the sacrifiClal glfts,-they
are the UdgItha; the qUllrters, the intermedlate quarters, (and)
the etbereal spuce,-they: are tbe Prabhara; the waters, progeny,
16
ProleptJc NommatJve. S 9, Ex D-H.
(aod) ihe plaots,-they are tbe Upadrava; tbe Mooo, tbe Coostel-
latioos, (aod) the Fathers,-they are the Nidhana'. JUB. 1. 19. 2.
Note that the prolepsis IS confined to subJect nornmatIves whlch consist of a
series of nouns, whlle single nouns (trayi vidya, ime lokah) show lhe normal
constructlon Contrast tma eva loka, a,dth wlth Chand Up '1.. '1.1. 1 trayIJ loküh
sa prastiivah.
22 D. tray;¡;-vidya traya zme lokah sa pray[avo, 'gnzr
vayur adityah su udgítho, nakJatram marIcayaZt sa
haralJ" sarpa gandharvah pitaras tan nidhanam, 'The threefold
knowledge is tbe Hnikara; tbese three worlds,-tbey are tbo
Prastava, Agni, Vayu, (aod) Aditya, -tbey are tbe Udgitba; the
coostel1atioos, the birds, (o.nd) the rays,-tbey are the Pratihara;
tbe serpents, tba Gandbarvas, (aod) tbe Fatbers,- tbey are tbe
Nidhaoa.' Chand. Up. 2. 21. 1.
See tbe note to the preceding example, 22 C.
22 E so 'savadityas sa e$a eva ud, agnir eva gI, candramá eV,l
tham, silmany eva ud, rca eva gi, yajañ$!f eva tham ity adhidevatam
I atha 'dhylitmarh : prtJ1}a eva ud, vag eva gi, mana eva tham, 'Yonder
Sun,-that same is (tp.e syllable) ud, Agni is (the syllable) gi,
the Mooo lS (the syIlable) tham; the Samaos are (the syllable) ud,
the Rig-verses are (the syllable) gl, the Yajuses are (the syllable)
tbam; so witb regard to tbe divinities; oow with regard to the
Self: Breath is (the syllable) ud, speech is (the syllable) gI, rumd
is (tbe syIlable) tham'. JUB. 1. 57. 7.
Note that only the first Item (so 'sl1v adúyas sa esa eva ut) shows prolepsIs
22 F. sudak$zno ha vai k{laimih jábalau te ha
sabrahmacaritta 'SudakeiI).u Keairui, land) tbe
two Jabalas,-they were fellow-students'. JUB. 3. 7. 2.
22 G. aupamanyavah satyayajnal; paulu$zr mdra-
dyttmno bhallaveyo janal;   burJ,ila te hai 'te
mahar;ala mahar;rotriyal,t sametya mimlíñsarh cakrul,t,
Aupamanyava, SatyayaJña Indradyumna Bhallaveya, Jana
Qarkarákeya, (and) Buido. same great bouse-
bolders (aud) great scholars, bavmg come togethel', deliberated'.
Chand. Up, 5. 11. 1.
22 H. sac ca 'sac ca 'sac ca sac ca vák ca manar; ca manar; ca
(the mss. omlt tbe second manar; ca) vak ca cahpu9 ca rrotram ca
Oertel, The Syntax of Cases. 2
17
§ 9, Ex. 221, J, § 10 Proleptic Nommabve.
rrotram ca caksur ca fraddha ca tapar ca tapar ca rraddhd ca tanz
§o(lara 'Existence and non-existence, non-existence and eXIsten ce,
speech and mind, mind and speech, sight and hearing, hearmg
and sight, faith and penance, penance and faith,-these are SlX-
teen'. JUB. 4. 2ó. lo
221. rg gatha kumbya tan :nztam yaJU?' mgado vrthavak iad
  'A   a Gatha, (and) a Kumbya,-these are measured¡
a Yajus, a Nigada, (and) casual speech,-these are unmeasured'
Ait. Ár 2. 3. 6 (p. 115, 9 Kmtb).
22 J. tat pttrtt§O 'manavao, I sa enan brahma gamayati, 'Then a
non-human person,-he makes them go to the Brahman'. Chanclo
Up.4.15 5-6; 5.10.2.
WIth the excephon of the Anandac,rama edItlOn al! the editlOns read manavah
wlthout avagraha, and the Commentary of RlLgavendra also omJts the avagraha
Itankara's and RamanuJa's Commentanes both read amiinavah. Boehtlmgk m
bis edItlOn of the Chand. Up. suggested the emendatlOn to   comparmg
BAU. 5.7 and 6. 1. 18 M. = 6.2 15 K. but abandons thls emendation m favour
of puruso 'miinavah, Ber. sachs. Ges. WISS. 1897, p.87 Deussen regarded the
puruso miinasah of BAU. 6. 1 18 M. (= ItB 14.9. l. 18) = 6 2 15 K. as 'Correctur
des llIcht mehr verstandenen puruso 'miinavah' of Chand. Up. and It is note-
worthy that both Itankara and RamanuJa on Vedanta Sütra 4.3.4-6 have
amiinavah not only for Chand. Up but also m the quotatlOn BAU. 6 2 15 K.
Boehthngk's obJectlOn to the resumptJve sa 'das hier gar mchts zu thun hat'
(p. 102, 29) appears to be groundless III vlew of tbe examples he! e col!ected
J
§ 10. The Proleptic Subject Nominative is accompanied by
a Participle.
Tbe examples where the Participle is not further quahfied are
given in Group A (Ex. 1-8). In Group B (Ex. 9-18) are listed
the instances where the Participle is further qualified, eIther (a)
by a dependent object accusative (Ex. 9-16), or (b) by an lD-
struroental expressing tbe agent (Ex. 17). In Group C (Ex. 18)
tbe Participle is the present participle of tbe y man with a predI-
cative nominatIve.
As regards the tense of the Participle, the present tense pre-
ponderates (Ex. 1-9; 11; 14-18); once a future participle occurs
(Ex 10); twice the middle perfect participle is found (Ex. 12; 13),
once ihe past participle (Ex. 8 B)
18
PlOlephc NommatJve. S 10.>
Caland, Auswahl, p. 48, no. 40, note 2 (to JB. 1. 147, see § 11,
Ex. 8 below) regards the present participle caran in passages hke-
Ex. 3-8 below as having the functlOn of a finite verb; but 1
cannot persuade myself that, with the exception of the past parti·
ciple III -ta, participles occur in the BrahmaJ;la prose in the clear
role of finite. verbs, cf. Delbruck, Altmd Syntax § 219, p. 393
(last line)-394, 7; SpeiJer, Ved. und Sanskrit Syntax, § 287, p.92,
4; Sanskrit Syntax, § 9, Remark, p. 5, Keith, ZDMG.63 (1909),
p. 346-349. Delbruck nghtly emphasizes the close simIlarity of
such proleptlC nominative constructions with the proleptlC accu·
satlVe constructions 1ike QB. 1. 1. 1. 16 (below § 32, Ex. 6). A
proleptic constructlOn like PB 15. 3. 25 dirghar,;rava rajanya nnr
jyog aparuddho 'r;;anayañr;; caran sa etad dairghar;;ravasam [sama}
aparyat (below Ex. 6) is closeIy paralle1ed by the normal conjunct
arrangement PB. 9. 2 19 saputro 'r,;anayanr;; carann aranya..
urvarüny amndat, 'Devatithi, accompanied by l11s son, waIkmg
hungry m the forest found cucumbers', ef. also the proleptic eon-
structlOn K. 21. 6 (p. 45, 2) with its normal conjunct parallels,
given > below Ex. 14
At PB. 13. 4 17 the text should read tan adhinidhaya pancary acarad (Blbl.
Ind. paricaryyacaran) vmdhayans, tan vardhayltva 'bravU ., cf JAOS., 19, P 125-
and the Cornmentary' tan prthural)mytid'in rathe áropya vardhayan
posayan paryacarat (Blbl. Ind. paryacaran) pancaryam krtavan . Partcar'i 1S-
adJectJve as taken by PW. s par1-carin, and acm·at may well have Its full verbal
force: 'He went as theh care-taker, tendIng them', cf Chand. Up 4.4. 2, bah/}
carant¡ partcánn¡; ya¡wane tvam alabhe 'Wandermg a good deal about 10
rny youth as a servant-woman 1 concelved thee'. The order of words makes the
cónstrucLlOn of acarat as auxlhary verb Wlth vardhayon (Delbruck, Altmd Syntax,
p. 390; Whltney, Gr. § 1075, b) less likely.
The perfect middle parhcip1e ijanrrft at TS. 6. 6. 7. 4 yatayamani
va etasya ya   'The metres of hIm who has sa-
crifieed are exhausted', does not stand in Jieu of a finite verb •.
but is a predicate particip1e wlth the substantIve verb bhavatt or
as ti omitted, ef. Delbruck, Altind Syntax, § 218, 1, p. 392 wbere
instances of the future particip1e with -y bhü and 1"as are given.
For the finite use of parhclples 10 Mantras cf. Delbruck, Altmd Syntax, § 21!!.
P 393 f.; OIdenberg, ZDMG. 54, P 170, Anrn. 1, RIgveda Noten, 1, p. 428 col. 2
s. 'PartJzlp statt Verbo fimtum', n, p. 379, col. 1 s. 'PartlZIp ohne Hauptverb';
Neisser, BB 27, p.274, KeIth, ZDMG., 63, p.346.
ti 11, Ex. 1-3 ProleptlC Nommatlve
For a pendent nominatIve wrth present palttclple antIclpatIng an accusative
(JUB 3. 29 7) see below AddHlon from tñe Aranyakas and  
sads, § 20A, 5A, Ex 1 A.
For an absolute nommatlve wlth present parhClple before the exclamatory att
(= etl, AB. 2. 13. 6 see below § 26, Ex. 8.
§ Do Examples'
A. 1. par,¡ur val, myamana{t sa mrtyum praparoat, cThe victim
bemg led (to be slaughtered)-it saw death befo re (it)'. AB. 2. 6. 8.
Thls passage is clted by SpelJer. Ved. und Sanskllt Syntax, § 287, P 91 among
<anacolouthlc constru ctlOns'.
r Addition from the AraJ;lyakas and Upanieads.
1 A. atha ha prana sa yatha suhaya{t paif,bir,¡ar,¡añ-
krmt samkhzded evam ztaran pranant samakhtdat, 'Then breath,
gettlOg ready to depart,-it, as a fine steed would pull out the
thether-pegs, even so tore out the other breaths (= organs of
sen se)'. Cband. Up. 5. 1. 12.
The parallel passage BAU 6. 2. 13 Ma:dhy. = 6. 1. 13 Kanv. wlthout prolepsis'
atha ha prana yathil mahilsuhayah saindhavah padb'i,¡;a,añkünt
sari",'rhed evam hat 've 'man pranant samvavarha Contrast wIlh the resumphve
pronoulI befare the yatha-clause the pronomJnal resumptlOn after a yathli clause
§ 41, Ex 2; § 45, Ex. 2, and after a relatIve clause § 9, Ex. 18 For V khid + sam
cf. TS. 6. 6. 11. 1 sa ya)ñanam soij,a¡;adhe 'ndnymn v¡ryam atmannm abhl sam-
akhtdat, 'He tare out strength (and) of the sacrIfices lO slxleen parts far
bImself'. J
2. vir,¡ve vai devas trUyasavanabhagas santas (so Schroeder's cero
tain emend., with Kap S., for sañtap) te pratassavanam abhyaka-
mayanta, 'The All Gods, bemg sharers in the third pressing,-
they desired the morning pressing'. K. 28. 2 (p. 155, 3).
r Addition from the AraJ;lyakas and Upanieadso
2 A. te va ete pañca 'nye pañca 'nye dar,¡a santas tat krtam,
cThe one five (and) the other five being ten,-they are (equi-
valent to) the Krta-throw'. Chand. Up. 4. 3. 8.
er Lüders, Das WUJfelspiel, p.3'l and 61; SB. d kgl. preul3. Ak. d Wiss. 1906,
X, p. 21j8 'diese, funf auf der emen, funf auf der andern Selle, dIe zusammen
.Eehn ausmachen, die smd das Krla' J
3. Jyog aparuddhal} caran sa etat sain-
[sama] apar,¡yat, cSmdhukeit, the royal sage, wandering
20
ProleptIc NominatIve § 11, Ex. 4-8.
for a lqng time expelled (from bIS realm),-be saw tbis Saindbu-
(-Saman)' PB. 12. 12. 6.
For V rudh + apa = 'expel from one's kIngdom' cf AB 8 10. 7 rastrad apa-
rudhyamanah; C;:B. 12 9. 3. 1 ¡ 3 aparuddhah, AV. 3 3 4
anyaksetre aparuddham ca'·antam. Cf. V bhü + apa, § 73, Ex. 13 and ef. for tha
pbrase aparnddha¡; carat, Klelhorn's note to verse 14- of the Alhole Inscllption
oLPulake"In 11 4I Eplgr. lnd VI, p.9 and hls note In JRAS 1907,11, P 1062f.
4. vm bharato raja jyog aparuddhar; caran so 'kamay-
ata' 'va sva okasz gaccheyam tti, 'King Bharata wauder-
ing for a long time expelled (from bis realm),-he desired' "May
1 return into my own borne".' JB. 3. 82 (Caland, AuswabI, p. 238).
For r gam + ava = 'leturn, be restlJred to one's real m' cf TS 2 3 1; K 11, {);
MS. 2 2 1 where the verb m frequently used in connection wlth the nlual for
the restoratlOn of an expelled (aparuddha) ruler. Further K.27 5 (p. 145,4) =
28. 1 (p. 152, 4); K 27. 5 (p 145, 8) = 28. 1 (p. 152, 7)¡ K. 28. 1 (p 152, 9), AB.
8. 10. 7, PB. 2. 3. 7 In all these pa"sdges r gam + ava governs the aceusatIve:
anaparudhyam; rastram; ksatlam, devavifiim¡ raJyam
(ef. also PB 4. 3. 7 adhvanam, <tB. 14 1. 1. 4 udrcam). For the locatlve cf. the
YaJus K 11 6 (p. 151, 17) tmam amllm amusyamyanam amusyah putram amusyam
vifiY avagamayata.
5. v'itahavya jyog caran so 'kamayata: 'va
sva okasz gaccheyam itz, 'VItahavya A¡;lrayasa wandering for a long
time expelled (from his realm),-be desired: "May 1 return into
rny own borne'" JB. 1. 214 (Caland, Auswahl; p. 82).
cr. wJthout prolepsis PB 9 1. 9 vUahavyah frayaso Jyog niruddha etat [vmta-
havyam] sama 'pafYat, so 'vagacchat PI
6. vaz rajanya rszr Jyog aparuadho 'ranayaitr caran
sa etad dmrgharravasam [sama] apa¡;yat, 'Dirgha¡;lravas, tbe royal
sage, wandermg for a long time expelled (from bis realm and)
bungry,-he saw this DairgbaGravasa [-Saman]'. PE. 15. 3. 25.
7. kanvo va'/, jyog   caran so 'kamayata: prati-
§theyam ztl, 'KaI].va wandering for a long time without
firm support,-be desired. "May 1 gam firm support".' JB. 1. 216
(Caland, Auswahl, p. 82).
8 nodha vai kak¡;ivato jyog caran so 'kamayata:
pratz¡;theyam iti, 'Nodhas wandering for a long time
witbout firm support,-he desired. "May 1 gain firm support".'
JE. 1. 147 (Caland, Auswabl, p. 48).
21
§ 11, Ex. 8E. ProleptIc Nommative.
8 B. so 'yam VI$nUr glanalJ I chandobhir abhttalJ 'gmk
purastan na 'pakramanam asa sa tata evau '$adhinam mulany
'upamumloca 11 te ha deva uculJ: kva nu m$nur abhut kva nu yajno
'bhud tti, te ho ' chandobhtr parigrh'ito 'gnt'1J purastan
na 'pakramanam asty atra'/, 'va 'nvtcchate 'tt, 'This same
brmg ti red out,-he was enclosea on al! sides by the metres,
Agni was in front, there was no escape-, het hereupon hid among
the roots of the plants The gods said: "What hath become of
What hath become of the sacrifice?" They said: "He is
enclosed on aU sides by the metres, Agni is in front, there is no
escape, search (for him) right here".' QB. 1. 2. 5. 8-9.
Eggehng takes glanal,J, Delbrück, Altmd. Synt, p. 3fJ4, 37 -395, 1, both glanah
and chandobhir pu,ngrh'itab, as eqUlvalent to a fimte narrabve tense. The
síngulanty of such a use of the past partIclple was pomted out by Kelth, ZDMG
63 (1909) p.348-349 who correctly takmg sa 'yam Vtsnur glanar; chan-
pang1hltah as prolepbc.subJecl lo upamumloca whlle he regards
.. apakramallam asa as a parenthesl!,. 1 dlfTer from hlm m taking only
$0 'yam   gliinah as prolepllc subJect nommahve, whlle chandobhir abhltah
pangrMtah wlth agnth put'ostiit and na 'pakramanam lisa forms a trÍmembral
parenthesls after WhlCh the subJect IS resumed by sa (cf. § 9, Ex 18 Rem. and
§ 11, Ex. 1, A Rem). Thls seems to be demanded by paragraph 9 where the
same three ítems are grouped together (8 chandobhw abhttah 'gnth
purastan nli 'pakramallam asa :. 9 chandobhzr abhitah pangrhito 'gnth purastiin
na 'pakramanam astl)
The Commentary takes apakramallam ntt 'sa = na Jagama as timle verb
oC the firsl clause and appears to construe so 'yarh VISllur gllinah as ab-
solute nommallve : glanasya tasya vlmor apagamanarlt nli 'sa
B. a. 9. deva ha yajñam tanvanas te 'surarak$asebhya asar/,-
gad blbhayarh cakruh, 'The gods bemg engaged in performmg -the
sacrifice,-they were afraid of the Asuras and lest they
should chng to tbem'. QB. 1. 1. 2. 3; 1. 2. 1. 6 (cf Delbruck;
Altmd. Syntax, § 219, p. 394, 1); 1. 3. 1. 5; 1. 4. 4. 8, 1. 6. 1.
3.3 3.16; 3.3.4.2; 3.5.3.15, 3.6 1. 27; 3.7.2 2,3.9.4. ti!
4. 1. 1. 6; 4.2.4. 19; 4 6.6. 1.
For lisañga cf. QB 1. 5 3 21 j 4. 1 1. 6 yadt no 'sU1'araksasliny asaJeyuh, 1 6
1. 12 su yady enan pUl'astlid asuraraksasany aSlsai¡ksanj 15 yady enam
asllraraksaséiny aSlsañksantt; 3.6. 1. 27, 4. 2. 4. 19 tan daksmato  
iiseJuh.
The phrase asuraraksasebhya iisañglid b¡bhaylim cakruh m the fourleen QB'
passages cIted ahoye appears lo be the only absolutely certam mstance m the Brah-
22
.
Proleptlc Nomínatlve S 11, Ex. 9- 11
mana prose of V bh¡ wüh a double, paratacbcal ablabve of both the person and
the acbon feared. The case form IS amblguous in agneh, TS 5 2. 5 2; 5. 2. 10·
2, K. 20 3 (p 21,4); 20 9 (28, 8), tyam [prthiv'i] va agner atidahád abibhet, 'Thls
(earth) was afrald of Agm, lest he should burn (her) excesslvely', where Delbruck,
Altllld. Syntax, § 69, P 111 takes agneh as ablabve, probably correctly, SIDce here
al so Agm IS the person and attdaha the actlOn feared Contrast the ablatIve of
tbe actlOn and the gemtJve of the person ID the foIlowing mstances: QB. 4. 3
3 11 apah'amad tf hm 'vat   etad btbhayarn caleara, K 29 9 (p 179, 6)
apalcramad ablbhet, 'He was afrald they mlght go away', KB. 7 4 tasya
lesallád mbhemt. '1 am afrald lest It pensh', MS 3 7. 10 (p 90, 1-4.) te va anyo
'nyasya 'bhtdro"f¡ad abtbhayuh, 'They were afrald lest one mlghl decelve the other',
AB 5 15. 9 prasrañsad vii antasya bibhliya, 'He IS afrald (perfect = present)
lest the end may become loose', AB 4.19 2, K.33 6 (p 31,11) tesü,¡h vm det,li!t
(K. deva Val) saptadal,(anlim pravlayad ablbhayuJ;, 'The gods were afrald lest these
should coIlapse', PB 8 9. 21 sa tayor [samnoh] aprayogad ablbhet,
<He was afrald lest these two (Samans) mlght not be properly apphed'; JUB 3
1!l. 2 te manusyanlim anvagamad btbhyatah • ,They, feanng lest men should
go after (them). " TB 1. 2 4 2 deva va adityasya suvarga8ya loleasya paraco
'tipadád ambhayuh; K 33.6 (p 31,9) tasya [adltyasya] paraco 'tipMad abtbhayuh,
PB 4 5 J 1 tasya [ádttyasya 1 paracwattpadad abtbhayuh; AB 4. 18 5, 6 tasua
{ádttyasya] pa1'aCO 'tipatad (so, wIth tl abtbhayuh, TB. 1 2.4 2 deva va
8uvrwgasya lokasya 'vaco 'vapadad abtbhayuh; PB. 4. 5 9, K 33 6 (ter, p. 31,8,
14, 20) del'ii id adztyasya svargiil lokád avaptidlid abtbhayuh, AB. 4. 18. 5, 6,
4 1 q. 3 tasya vai deva adltyasya svargal lolead avapatád (so, wIth t) ambhayuh
'The gods wele afraJd lest th¡s AdJty,\ mlght fall from the heavenly world'. Here
belong also the amblguous case·forms TB 1 5.12 1 (bis) tasya vaco 'vapadad
abtbhayuh, and K. 27 7 (p. 146, 12 -13) agmr va ahutua attdravad abtbhet, 'Agni
was afrald lest the oblabon mlght run beyond'.
Parallel to the use of the Prolephc Nommative ID the foregomg example IS
the use of the Prolepbe aecusahve § 32, Ex. 6 (ef § 10; Delbl'ück, Altmd Syntax,
p 394,5).
10 deva ha samgramam samnzdhasyantas te ho 'cuh:
<The gods being about to prepare for the contest,-they sald: .
<;lB. 1. 2. 6. 18.
.,
,
11. prajapatir vai prajas sa dmtiyam mzthunam na
'vzndata, <Prajapati being desirous of creating offspring,-he did
not find a second, a (fit object for) copulahon'. K 13. 7 (p. 189, 14);
GB. 2. 2. 1 (where the reading of the mss. and of the Blbl. Ind.
should of course be corrected to slsrk$ama1}ah; for
the nvamndat of the mss. and of the Blbl. Ind. Gaastra's text reads
na 'vmdat which should perhaps be further changed to the middle
as K. reada; cf. Delbruck, Altind. Syntax, p. 253, 25 ff).
23
§ 11, Ex. 12-15: ProleptJc Nommatlve.
12. prajapaftk praJi},s sasrjanas sa vyasrañsata, 'Prajapati having
created offsprmg,-he became disjointed'. JB 2. 128 (Oaland, Aus-
wahl, p 164); 409 (Oaland, Auswahl, p.164)
Contrast the normal wnJunct constructIon e. g PB. 15. 8. 2 = 16 5. 13 pm-
Japatth proJa tesr¡ata, 8a dugdho nNcano 'manyata, and compare below § 12, Ex 3.
13. vag yaJiiarn sasrJílna sa 'r,;anayat (the mss. sarnanyat)
sa   'Speech havmg created the sacrifice,-she was hungry,
s11e was thlrsty'. JB. 3. 312.
The emendahon based on JB. 1. 252 na ha va na ptpasat., 2.6,
382 na 'I}anáyat. na ptpasatt
14. añgtraso vat svargam lokam yantas te 'J{iyam gharmam pra-
siñcan, 'The Añglrases going to the heavenly world,-they poured
forth the canldron upon the she-goat'. K. 21. 6 (p. 45, 2)
.The two parall"t texts have the normal conJunct constructlOll' TS 5 4. R 2-3
añgirasah suvargam lokam !/antah I ajayilrh ghm'mam PI aSlñcan; MS.3 3 4 (p. 37, 7\
añgtraso vm 8var yánto (SchlOeder's text svaryánto, see the note to Ex. 15) '7iiya1n
gharmam prasiilcan
15 angtraso vat svargarn lokarn yantas te mekhalas saritnyaktrans,
tatar,; r,;ara 'The Añgirases going to the heavenly
world,-they scattered (thelr) girdles about, thence arose the Qara-
grass'. K. 23. 4 (p 78, 3).
The two palalIe[ passages have the normal, conJunct conslruction TS. 6. 1 3 3
añgu'asah SIlVa¡ gam loleam yanta ürJarh vyabha)anta, t(lto yad te
I}ara abha'Jan, MS 3. 6 7 (p 69, 5) añgtraso vat svar yánto (Schroeder's text
svaryánto) yatra mekhalah samnyasans tatah 'iaro 'Jayata
24
Rere (MS 3. b 7, p. 69, 5) as well as at MS 1. 9. 5 (p. 135, 6); 3.3 4
(p 37,8), and 3. 9. Ó (p 123,9) Schroeder's text, wJth the manuscrlpts, reads
svaryánto (so, and nol as Caland, WZKM, 23, p.55 prmts sváryanto) as
compaund. 8uth a compound would be wJthout parallel (cf. Wackernagel,
Altmd. Gr 1I, 1, p. 193, § 82, b) and an emendation to 8var yánto serlUS
necessary m splte of the concurrent testJmony of the mss.
The entry aval'yánt III PW. col. 1455 and pw. p. 240, col. 3 fol' VS. 17
is due to an overslght. At VS 17.68 the accent marks svªr yantQ slgnify
svar yánto, cf. Weber's IntroductlOD, p X, where yº 'sau cª = yo 'sáu ca IS
clted, el. the paraIlel texts AV. 4. 14. 14, TA. 1. 27 5; QB. 9. 2 3. 27; TS. 4.
6.5 2, 5 4 7. 1; and svar yató VS 11.3, <;:B. 6. 3. 1 15; TS.4 1 1. 1,
MS -!l. 7 1 (p. 7 1,12) Strangely enough the Commentary on AV. 19. 13. 1
and 15.4 takes. 8var yát agamst accent, Pada-text, and sense as a
pouud, glossmg ·yat by gacchat.
PlOleptlC NommatIvE' § 11, Ex. 16-18; § 12, Ex 1-6.
16. addya val, svargarn lolvarn yantas te ' ñgtraSO ' smznl loke saha
yaJfiena pratya?thali, 'The AdItyas gomg to the heavenIy worId,
-they pushed (= kept) the AñgIrases back m this worId together
wIth the sacrIfice'. K. 28. 3 (p 166, U).
b) 17 deva va asurazr hanyarnanas te prajapattm upadhavan,
'The gods bemg on the point of bemg slain by the Asuras,-they
had recourse to PrajapatI.
C. l8. pnyamedha ha vai bharadvaja yajñamdo rnanyamtintis te
ha sma na karn cana vedamdam upayantt, 'The Priyamedhas (and)
BharadvaJa<; consIdermg thenJselves experts m the sacflfice,-
they \Vere not wont to go to any Veda-expert (for instruction)'.
GB 1 3.15.
§ 12. 3. The Proleptic SubJect Nominative accompanied by a
Gerund (on which an Object Accusative depends)
deva va asuran yajnam abhlJdya te prabahug grahan grhnana
aylln, 'The gods having wrested the sacrifice froro the Asuras,- they
eontmually drew tbe cups m a straJght Hne'. K. 29. 6 (p. 174, 3).
2. zndro vrtram hatvti sa ctam agneyam [graham] avzndata, 'Indra
having slam Vrtra,-he found th1S (cup) sacred to Agm'. K. 29 7
(p 17i':l, 16)
- 3. praJapahl} prajas sa rtl zcano 'manyata, 'Prajapati havmg
ereated creatures,-he cousidereu bImself pxhausted'. K. 22. 1
(p. 57, 18); 29.9 (p. 178, 7).
The parallel passages MS 3 4 6 (p 53, 3) and 4. 7 8 (p. 103, 11) ha ve the r ('
conJunct construLtlOn, omlttmg the resumptlve pronoun sa The parallel pas'i.lge
TS. 6. 6. 5. 1 has two coordmated clauses: pra)a asr)ata, sa 1'11
'mangata, cf PE. 15 8.2= 16.5 13 pra}ápatlh praJa asr)ata, sa dugdho t!llCano
'manyata. In a sImIlar passage KB 12 8   pra)apatlh pra)iih srstta 1lri-
cana Ivá 'manyata. Cf above § 11, Ex 12
4. mdro vm vrtram hatva sa tma1il lokan abhyajayat, 'lndra bavmg
sIain Vrtra,-be won these worlds' K. 30. fI (p 187, 12).
5. tndro vrtram hatva ' suran parabhavya sa zmaitl lokan abhya-
jayat, 'Indra havillg slalll Vrtra, having defeated the Asuras,-
he won these worIds'. TB 1 2. 3. 3.
6.   val,' vrtrarn hatva sa mahendro 'bhavat, 'Indra havlllg
slain Vrtra,-he became Great lndra'. K 28.3 (p. 155, 17)
§ 12, EX. 7-13 ProJeptlc NornmaÍlve.
The parallel passage 1\18 4.6 8 (p 91, 15) has two paratactlCal clauses wdro
vat vrtram ahan,. ,sa mahendro 'bhavat.
7. mdro vrtram hatva 'suran parabhavya so 'rnavasyam pratya-
gaeehat, 'Indra baving slain Vrtra, havlUg defeated the Asuras,-
he returned to the night of tbe new moon'. TB 1. 3. 10 1
8 ta [prevah] anyatra 'nnanz avdtvft tah       eval 'kadha
'nnüdyaya 'bJnsamavartanta, 'Tbese (creatUles) findmg food nowbere
else,-they aU at once turned togetber to Prajapatl for food-eating'.
K 37. 1 (p. 84, 15).
The parallel passage TB. 2 7 9 1 wJthoul prolepóls' ta anyatra 'nnadyam
aV1til a praJapatim praJ/i        
9. sa [prajapati[¡,] dar,;adha 'tmananz mdhaya mlthunarn krtva .sa
ayatanarn mechat, • He (PrajapatI) baving dlvided blmself in ten
parts, bavmg copulated,-he desired a resting place'. K. 9. 11
(p. 112, 13).
The parallel passage M8 1 9 3 (p. 132, 9) wlthout prolepsis' sa     'tma-
nam vidháya m¡thunam krtva 'yatanam atOchat
] O tena devas samvatsaranz kalpaYitva svargarn lokam praJñaya
ta etad yajñasya Jyottr     adadhu[¡" 'The gods having there-
by ordered the year, havmg dlscerned (a way to) the heavenly
world,-they placed tbis ligbt of the sacnfice on high'. K 28 2
(p. 154, 18).
11. sa [praJo,patl[¡,] praja asrJata, ta asya prajah sr#a(Q) stanav
ev((, 'bltipadya tas tatal} sambabkavuk, 'He (Prajapatl) created crea-
tUl'es, tbese creatures created by him, havmg recourse to (thelr)
breasts,-tbey tbereby sustamed life'. QB. 2.5. 1. 3.
12 ahoratre deva abhijztya te vajram eva pandhzm akurvata, 'The
goda havmg won day and mght,-they made the thunder-bolt
the enclosure'. JB. 1. 209. 4 (Transactions of the Connecticut
Academy of Arts and Sciences, 15, p. 163).
13. ahoratre devá abhijztya te 'mum adztyam savana¡r eva pratyaii-
cam anayan, 'The gods having won day and night,-they led
yOilder sun westward by meailS of the pressings'. JB. 1. 212. 3
(TransactlOns of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences,
15, p. 165).
26
Prolepbc Nominahve § 13, Ex 1-6
§ 13'. 4 The Proleptic Subject Nominative accompanied by
both a Partwiple and a Gerund.
1. deva va asuran hatva i$amanas te dZQo 'mohayan,
<The gods havmg slain the Asuras (and) fieeing form the pay-
ment of wergeld,-they confused the quarters' K. 23. 8 (p. 83,10).
2. deva va asuran hatva vazradeyad ipamanas ta rtan samvatsaram
amohayan, 'The gods havmg slam the Asuras (and) fieelOg írom
tbe payment oí wergeld,-tbey confuseo the seasons, the year'
K. 28. 2 (p. 15-1:, 1).
3. deva va asuran hatva vazradeylid   te yajñam
praviQan, 'The gods having sIam tbe Asuras (and) fieemg from
tbe payment of wergeld,-tbey entered the sacrifice m the middle'.
K 28. 3 (p. 156, 9)
4 adztyli va asurlin hatvli valradeylid i$amanas te devlin pravtQan,
''1'he A<;l.ityas havmg sIam the Asuras (and) fleemg from the pay-
ment of wergeld,-they betook themselves to the gods'. K 28 6
(p. 160, 6).
For valradeya = 'payment of wergeld' cf Roth, ZDMG.,41, p 675, Macdonell
and Kelth, VedlC Index, n, p 331
Rere belong also the followmg two passages from JB, the text
of wbICh is unfortunately corrupt
5. kanvliyanas sattrlid zttthliya yanta (Caland's text and Whitney's
transcrlpt read utthayli "yanta, but see tbe next Ex.) liyuitjanas
te hodgatha (?, v. 1. hodgatha, hodgítha) iti kzmudvatyaitaddhanvam
(?, V 1. kimudvatyattardhanam) urvarubahupravrltam (v. 1. urvarübahu-
pravrtta) (v. 1. Qayano; emend perhaps to aQanayanta, cf
tbe similar passage PB. 9. 2. 19 devatttlnfi, supatro 'QanayañQ carann
aranya urvarüny aVtndat) upeyuJ; (v. 1. 'peyu!t), c'rbe descendants oí
Kat;lva, havmg risen from a sacrificial session, proceeding, yoking
up,-they, bemg' hungry (?), carne upon ... where there grew
many cucumbers'. JB. 1. 226 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 88).
6. saUrad (so Caland's text; Whitney's transcript has
sattralcamad) utthaya yanta (CaJand's text reads here, as In tbe
preceding Ex., utthaya "yanta, WhItney's transcnpt bas utthaya
yanta) ayuñjanas te ho 'cul} ... , c'rhe sages, havmg risen from a
sacnficial seSSlon, proceeding, yokmg up,-tbey sald:. .'. JB. 3.
203 (Oaland, Auswabl, p. 274).
27
§ 14, Ex. 1-2, § 15, Ex. 1. Prolephc NominalIve.
In both passages Caland construes ayanta7J, as eqUlvalent to a filllte verb (see
aboye § 10), rendermg JB. 1. 226 (Ex.5) by: 'Als dIe Nachkommen des Kanva
eine rnehrtaglge OpfersIlzung beendlgt hatten, kamen sle zuruck, sich Ilnschlrrend (?).
Da sbeoen sle ... auf eme mlt Kurhlssen dlCht hedeckte .. .', and JB 3 203
• tEx. 6) by' 'Als uie RS1S eme mehr\aglge Opfelsltzung beenulgt hallen, kamen
Sle zurück, slch anschirrend (?). Sle sagten' .. '
1 have adopted m both passages the of Whitney's transcrlpt at JB. 3.
203 (Ex.6) utthaya ylintall, preferrmg yantah \0 yantah because \he former is
e g. AB. 5. 30. 1 (yatho 'bhayata¡;cakrena yan) wIth reference to travel by
a car, which IS Imp]¡ed III OUI' two passages by liyuñJanlih. The compounds
V ya + a OI' V + á Oto come' do not seem to tit the context
B. The Proleptic Subject Nominative is not resumed by a De-
monstrative Pronoun but its Severance from the Rest of the
Clause is indicated by atha (cf aboye § 3, 1, bj § 7,1, b).
§ 14. 1. The Prolaptic Subjact Nominativa accompaniad by
a Present Participle.
Both of the following mstances, Ex. 1-2, are noted by Delbruck, Altind. Syn,
tax, p 539, 36
Fol' atha sea aboye § 7, b.
1.   gam, tasmac catur [l{lam] upahvayate 11 sa L'ai
catttr upahvayamano 'tha nane 'vo 'pahvayate   'Four-footed
is the cow; therefore he calls four times upon (tbe 1q.a); venly,
he, calling four tImes upon (ber),-yet he calls upon (her) in
dlfferent ways, as it were, in order to avoid repetition'. QB. 1.
8.1.24-25.
2 brahmavadino vadanti : sa tvai ya jeta yo ' yajamalw
'tha sarvastomena yajete 'ti, 'The theologians say: "He, In sooth,
would sacrifice who (while) sacrificing with the Agnil?toma, -yet
should sacrifice with the Sarvastoma'. TS. 7. 1. 3. 1.
Tbis passage shghtly d¡ffers from the preceding one (Ex. 1) ID that the pIOleptIc
constructlOn occurs in a relativa clause
§ 13. Tha Proleptic Subject Nominative accompanied by a
Gerund.
1. tato deval) sarvam yajñam samvrjya 'tha yat yajnasya
bhagadheyam asit 'nan [asuran] nirabhajan, 'Tbereupon the
gods having seized the whole sacrifice (fol tbemselves),-then dls-
28
Pendent Nommative. § 16, 1 ..
possessed these (Asuras) by means of that which was the worst
portion of the sacrifice'. QB. 1. 9 2. 25.
For atha see aboye § 7, b.
H. The Pendent Nominative.
The disjunct nominative does not form the snbject of the clause
but anticipates an oblique case
SpelJer, Sansknt Syntax, § 499, P 387-388 cItes a f¡>w mstances of the Pen-
dent NommalIve III classical Sansknt as 'a kmd of anacolouthon'
A. The Pendent Nominative Resumed by a Demonstrati:ve
Pronoun in its Proper Oblique Case.
§ 16. 1. The Pendent Nominative anticipates a Genitive
A) The Pendent Nominative consists of a simple Noun.
1. In the Pariplava Akhyana, a legend to be recited at the
AQvamedha-sacrifice and to be repeated at stated intervals' during
the space of ayear, occur the following ten clauses'
The í;B. Inserto;¡ an ity aha after raja and before tasya, the parallel texts
AQ. 10. 7 and QQ. 16.2 omIt thls Insertron, WhlCh do es not belong to the text of
the but they also omrt the word raja.
a) manur vawasvato raja tasya vz()al,t, 'King Manu Vai·
vasvata,-his people are men'. QB. 13. 4. 3. 3.
b) yamo vaivasvato raja tasya pitaro (King Yama Vaivas-
vata,-his people are the Fatbers'. QB. 13. 4. 3. 6.
e) varuna addyo raja tasya gandharva 'King VaruJ;la Adi-
tya,-his people are the Gandharvas' QB. 13. 4. 3. 7.
d) somo raja tasya 'psaraso (King Soma Vail¡!J;la-
va,-his people are the Apsarases'. QB. 13.4.3. 8,
e) arbudaf¿ kadraveyo raja tasya sarpa vifah, (Kmg Arbuda
Kadraveya,- his people are the, Serpents' QB. 13. 4 3. 9.
f) kubero raja tasya vifaf¿, (King Kubera
VaiQravaJ;la,-his people are the   QB. 13. 4. 3. 10.
g) aszto dhanvo raja tasya 'sura 'King Asita Dhanva,-
bis people are the Asuras'. QB 13. 4. 3. 11.
b) matsyah sammado raja tasyo :clakecara (King Matsya
Sammada,-his people are the Water-dwellers'. QB. 13. 4. 3. 12.
29
§ 16, Ex. 2-5, § 17, Ex 1 Pendent Nommahve,
reads IIdakacariih for udakecarah, tf Wackernagel, Altlnd Gl n, 1, § 84, e, 1',
p. 199, 14 and § 88, b, P . ,
1) tark$Yo vaipat;yato raja tasya vlt;ah, 'Kmg
people are the Birds'. QB. 13.4.3. 13
j) dharma mdro raja tasya lleva vtfah, 'King Dharma Indra,-
his people are the gods'. QB. Id. 4. &. 14
2. yad ürdhvarh dvyaftgulam va tryangularn va sadhya
devas tena te{lam lokam jayatz, 'What (space), two or three fingers
Wlde, there ]s aboye the top-ring (of the sacrlfiClal stake),-the gads
called "Sadbyas",-their world he wins by that'. QB. 3. 7. 1. 25:
The parallel passages TS b 3 4 8-9, MS 3 9 4 (p 1 Hl, 3 ff.) and K 26 6
(p 129, 7 ff.) have notbmg 5)ntachcalIy eomparable.
3. vaSavo mdra adltyas te{lililn da) (the mS. et'/,) jyotw agram yad
asavadityaQ" 'The Vasus, the Rudras, (and) the Adityas,-their leader
is this light, (viz) yonder sun'. JB. 2 240 (JAOS. 18, p. 34).
The fragment of the Qatyayana Brahmana eIted by Sayana on RV 7 33.7
shows the same construetlOn
B) The Pendent Nominatlve consists of a Noun accompamed
by a Present PartIciple.
4 deva vaz svat'gam lokam yantas te{lam yam chandarisy
'1'tektiíni svargyany asañs tazs saha svargam lokam ayan, 'The gods
going to the heavenly world,-what their undefined heavenly
metres were with them they went to the heavenly world'. K 21.
2 (p. 68, 14).
5. tau devan upavartamanau tayor ya bhl{lajya tanü,r
asít tam tredha vinyadadhatam: agnau trtiyam brahma't}e trtíyam
apstt trtiyam, 'These two   turning toward the gods,-
what their healing form was that they deposited in three differeut
place s : one third in Agni, oue third in the Brahmana, (and) one
third in the water'. K. 27.4 (p. 143, 14)
The two parallel passages l\1S 4.6.2 (p. 80, 8) and TS 6 4.9 1-2 have nothmg
syntactically comparable
§ 17. 2. The Pendent Nominative, consistmg of a Series of
Simple Nouns, anticipates an Instrumental.
1. vag pranápanau tair va mdro 'kámayata
sayujyam gaccheyam iti, '''Cattle, speech, vigour, m-breathing (and).
30
Pendent Nommatlve § 17, Ex 2
out-breathmg,- wüh them", Iudra desired, "may I be untted"'.
MS. 3. 10 6 (p. 137, 13).
2. rathantaram rathantaram t;astram yaJi/as
tene 'marn lokarn rdhnott, 'The Rathantara Pr¡;;tha (Stotra), the
Qastra containing the Rathantara, (and) the Aglllr;;toma sacnfice,-
by means of that he prospers in regard to this world'. QB 13,
5. 1. 2. .
Excursus: The Nature oí the Accusabve wlth Y'l'dh, y'l'adh, and
A. The aeeusatJve wJth y pus IS, m the Brahmana proge, always to be regarded
as an aceusatJve of eontent or referenee (Delbluck, Altmd Syntax, § 122, p. 177,
3:3-178,7) rather than as aeeusahve of the dlreet obJeeL Thus, PE. 25 16 3
te sahasram·sahasrarh put1°an and te sahasram-sahas/"am putran
'They throve (thnvel wlth thausandfold male Ilrogeny' (Delbruek: 'Slchel helfi,t
das mclJt .Sle la,sen tausend Sohne gedeIhen" , sondern dab Gedelhen haftet an
dem SubJect von pusyatt'), cf RV. 1 64. 14 tokam pusyema tanayam r,;atwh htmah
,
'May we thflve a hundred years wlth progeny (and) offspnng'; PB 10. 1 6 aro
dhamasar,;O ht praJah par;ava oJo balam pusyantt, 'For every half-month offsprmg
(and) cattle merease m strength (and) vIgour', AE. 2 1 7 pusyati praJarh ca
ca, 'He prospers wlth regard to offsprmg and caUle'. In these examples
the aceusatIve IS semantrcally eqUlvalent to an Illstrumental, cf. TS 2 1. 9. 4¡
2.4.6.2 pusyatt pra}aya pap,bhth (synonymous wüh y vrdh TS. 7. 4. 3. 2 Val dhante
prajaya   i TB. 2 :3 3 2 sau [prthwI] 'sadh¡bhtr vanaspattbhtr apusyat,
sa [vayuh) marlcfbhw apusyat; tad [antartksam] vayobhtr apusyat; sa [ad,tyah]
raemron,r sa [dyauhl naksatratr apusyat, so [candramah] 'ho) atratr
ardhamásatr masotr rtubhlh samvatsarena 'pusyat. In ihe end, AB. 2. 1 7
yati prajam ca ca and TS. 2. 1. 9. 4 pusy(ltt praJaya par,;ubluh have very
nearly tbe same meamng as TS 5. 7. 8. 3 praJC!m pa¡:ün •. aVal unddhe
Wlth a slIghtly dlfferent shade of meamng V pus lS \lsed at \iB 13 'l «;1 8',
TB. 3 9. 7 2 tasrmid raja pagün na pusyatl WhICh IS rendered by Delbruck
'Deshalb hat em Adhger seme Starke meht m Heerden'.
Eggelmg renders' 'Wbence the kmg do es not lear eattle'. But whlle
..¡ pus wrth causatIve meanmg oecurs m Mantra (e. g RV 3 45. 3 kl atum
pusyasi ga fva 'thau mcreasest thy power hke kme') the Brahmana prose
uses the causatIve in thIS sense, e g TB. 1 6. 2 5 praja eva tad yaJamanah-
'Thus the sacnficer causes (rus) offsprmg to mcrease'
Fmally K. and J8. use the accusatives varnam and rilpam dependent on y pus:
thus K 9. 11 (p. 113, 1) ahna devan asrJata, te fukluth varnam apusyan ('were
resplendent m whlte colour') ratrya 'sura1i8, te krsna abhavan; JB 3 303 sal
[prthiui] 'kamayata: prcmm varnal/! pusyeyam itt, sat 'tam mantram apavyad : a
'yam gauh akram¡d (RV 10. 189. 1) ttt, tato va iyam prth1vi
varnam apusyat ('attallled vUllegated appearance') ha val varnaril _praJaya
31
§ 17, Ex. 2. Pendent Nommatlve
  pusyatl ya evam veda; K. 11. 2 (p. 146, 2) bahu va efad anyad anya)
Juhott, sa ifval'o 'nyad rupam
cr, in Mantra, VS.4 2 bhadmm varllam pusyan, RV 8 41 5 sa kat'¡h
kavya pUI'U rüpam dyaur ,va AV. 7. 60 7 vl"va rüpam pusyata
13. 2. 10 rupani pusyasi.
Tbese accusalIves of content or reference are easy developments of tbe frequent
cognate accusative wllh V pus, thus w¡lh ¡man eosan MS 1. i.2 (p 111,6); K. 9. 1
{p. 104, 14-15); MS. 1. 7. 3 (p 112.2), K 8 15 (p. 99. lU). PB. 21. 10. 5; with
eMn posan TS 7. 1. 9. 1, PB. 8 4. 4.; wIlh tan posan TB 2 3. 3. 2; wilh para-
ma¡it posam PB 21 10. 9; w¡th bahün posan PR. 19 5. 10, wIth sarvan poslJn
PE 21. 10. 7; 22 7.2, \VIlh bhüyiiñsalh posam 3.7 14, 16, wilh
K. 24. 6 (p. 95, 18); wlth sahasraposlJlt JB. 1 21 (sahasraposiin ptt$yatl ya evam
fJÍdvan agnihotram juhotr¡; wilh pltst¡m PB. 19. 14. 1; simlldry MS. 1. 5. 9 (p. 78, t)
'!fe, pusyatl sahasram; TB. 2. 3. 3. 1 8a [agmh] sahasram (Blbl. Ind,'
sahasram) 'He lhnves (throve] a thousandfold'.
er. the YaJus 14. 9. 4.23 (= BAH 6. 4. 23 Madhy. = 24 K!tnv.) asmin
sahasram pusylJsam; 89. 13 asmm sr:..hasram pusyasma; ApMB. 2
11. 32 asmlnn aham sahasmm pusyami.
B. The accusattve wllb v"adh, where it occurs m the Brahmana prose, must
he Interpreted In lhe same way as accusalive of contenl or reference. Thus,
<;B. S. 6. 3. 1; TS. 2. 6.9 5 idam ariitsma, 'We have be en suecessful in thls'; QB.
1. J. 5. 10 tam kamam anaparadham t'(ldhnoü, 'He succeeds wIthout fad In regard
to tbis wlsh'.
QB 14. 1. 2. 9 yaJíiasya vám adya radhyiisam merely parapbrases
tbe Mantra VS. 37. 3 makhasya vam adya ¡;iro r(l.dhyasam.
Inasmueh as 'to succeed m regard to 50methmg' 15 orlen 5ubstantIally eqUi'
valent to 'to atlam somethmg' tbe V riJ.dh may occaslOoally be rendered by 'to
aUain', e g. idam arlJtsma 'We have attamed tms'; tari, kamath riidhllotl, 'He
attams thls wlsh.' Thus, MS. 3. 2 2 (p. 11), 9-10) agneh priyam dhéimrt 'rlJdhnot
and agne(r, . •• priyam dhama rcldhn"oh, 'He was [IS] successful In regard to Agni's
dear abode' is equivalent to 'He attamed (attallls] Agm's dear abode', and the
parallel passages TS. 5. 2. 1. 6; K. 19 12 (p. 14, 5-6) aetually read here avarun-
ddha and avarunddhe; cr. K. 20, 1 (p 19, 2); TS. 5. 2. l. 2; 5. 2 3 4 agneh pnyam
dhiimii 'vdrunddha and agnen, • •. priyam dhamit 'varunddhe¡ K. 19. 11 (p. 13,3)
etad va agneh pNyam dhiJ.ma, tad evrt 'varunddhe
A cognate accusative \VI lb V rádh has not been noted in the Brahmana prose, but
it occurs In fue YaJus AB. 5. 25. 13 rddhlm aradhnutlan and rddhim "iitsyamah
C The cognate accusative forms the starling pomt for the accusalival con-
structlOns wlth V rdh. Tbus, wllh rddhlm AB 4. 23. 3 (bIs); 4; TS. 1. 5. 4. 4;
6 6 6. 1, 7. 1. S. 2; TB. 3. 3 8. 9, 3. 11. 9. 3 (bis); K. 6. 6 (p. 5:', 3), 8. 15 (p. \l8.
17); 30.1 (p. 182, 12); MS. 1. 7.2 (p 100,10), PB. 6. 9 17. 21, 21. 14.20; 21,
22.18 S'(bls); 23.1 5 (bIS). 23.23 2 (bIS); 3; 24.4.2 (bIS); 3, 24.12.4, 24.. 18
9 (bis), 25.5.3 (biS), 25.6.4 (bIS); 25 7.2 (bIS); 25.14.2,3, 5 (bIS); 25 17 4
(bis); 25 18. 7 (bIS); GB. 1. 3 15; JB 2. 60 praJitpat¡r Imiim rddhllll al dhnot .•. ,
32
Pendenl Nommatlve. §17, Ex. 2.
tad yam eva praJapatzr rddh!m ardhnot tlim eva rddhtm rdhnoti . ya evam veda;
JB. 2 98, 2. 132; 3.186 samlin'im rddhlm rdhnuyliva,. ., samlinim rddhtm •
ardhnutam: JB. 2.213 (bIs) saman'im rddhlm rdhnuyat, ... , sai 'tam eva rddhim
{irdhnot; JB 2. 215 (bIs) samlinim rddhtm rdhnuylim, .. , film eva rddhtm rdhnoti;
JUB 3.19.5.
Contrast with cognate accusahves the cognate mstrumental al
1\'[8 4. 1 2 (p. 3,16) sli 'rdhnQd rddhyli, GB 2. 1 12 rddhYli rdhnotz.
Flom thls cognate accusabve other accusatlves of contenl or develop.
Thus, as wlth v' radh, the accusalIves kamam and kamlin- KA. 26. 1 etan and
.tan kamlin rdhnuvantt; 25. 2; 26 15 sart'ltn kltman rdhnuvantt; 1\'[S 1. 6. 8 (p 98,3)
tam kamam a"dhnot and rdhnotl; K. 7. 5 (p. 67,5) klimam asya [agneh] rdhnotl,
manusasye 'n nu yah klimam rdhnott sa msiylin bhavatz, {24 (bis); 330 tam
kamam rdhnavani yo da¡;aratre, JB 2.330 rdhnott hai 'nenai 'tlin kamlin ya
.etasmm [atlrlitre] klimah, gA 1 2 sarran kaman rdhnuvantt.
kamam, kliman rdhnotz, 'He succeeds m regard lo his wIsh(es)' is thus
nearly equlValent to kamam, kán/án ápnoh, 'He attalnS hls wlsb(es), gB.
2.1. 4. 3; 4; 5, 30, 2.2 1. 5; 9,3.1. 4. 4, 5.8.14 (bIS); 6.2 1. 17,
7 2. 2 21, 9 2. 1. 18, 9.3 3. 2 (bis); 8 (bis), 9 4 4- 10 (hls); !l 5.2 9;
10 2.6.15, 13.4.1. 1 (biS), 12, 13; 13 5.1. 9,14; 13 5.2. 9¡ 22, 13 8.
1,3, AB. 3. 48 5, 8 14 4, 8 19 2; KB. 2. 3, 4.4 (bIS), 6 1"   7.1;
11 6,13.1; 21l. 1 (ter), 29.6; GB 1. 1. 2; 2.1 2b; 2. 2.18; PB. 20. 3. 4
(bIS), 3.7.10, 1'8. 3.7 14.2; K. 8   p.65 1, 4), 1\'[S,3 6 4
(p 64, 6); 4 6. 8 (p 91 14), and to kamam, kliman avarunddhe, 'He oblams
hls wish(es)', PB. 7. 7 8, 11. 8. 8, 12.5.20, 13 3 12; 13.6.9; 13.12.
5; 14.4 7; 14.5 15: 14.6 6; 8: 10: 14. 12. 5; 23.3.4,' TS. 3.5 !!!;
5.1. 8. 2; 5.4 8 1; AB 6.2 4; 2. 17. lO, 2.20.25, K 23.2 (p 76,1)
Wlth the accusatives devam, devatam, or the name of a speClfic dlVlnity, y' rdh
has the sense of 'to succeed wlth the gods' = 'to wm thelr fdvour', 'to WIll tbem
over'. Tbus PB 25 14.4 devatli rdhnott, AB 1 1. 5 deván rdhnuvanti; TS.5
7.4.3 devan rdhnott, JB.2 16 (quatel) tlim [devatam] eva tena ,dhnott, 17 tam
[devatlim] eva rdhnuylit, PB. 17 83 ogmm rdhnott, K.8. 13 (p 97, lb); G8. 2.
1. 7 praJlipattm rdhnotl, K 22 8 (p. 64 23) enam [pra1lipat¡m] rdhnQtt, TS 1 7.
3. 2 eva pro)lipattm rdhnoti, 5.4.12.2; 5 7 1. 3 tam [praJllpatlm] eva
siiksad rdhnott, A B 1. 30. 31 rdhnoty enam [proJapattm J; JB. 2 34i; 356, ::J57;
pra1iipatun rdhnalama; 2 236 krlsllam pl'aJapattm rdhnavlima; M8 4 8 10.
{p. 119, 10) lam [iiddyam] rdhnott; K 30. 5 (p 187,10) tam [adttyam}
1 cr v' áp wllh deviin gB 7 2.2.21; K.30 7 (p 188,20); 33.2 (p
28,10); PB 17.1 1, wIlh deta/ah, K 10,1 (p. 125,20); PB 17 11. 3,22,
7 4, TS. 1. 8 7 1, AB. 4 13 7; GB. 2 1 11; wlth pra)lipatlm, AB 4.
22 9; GB.2 5 4; 2 5 8, PB.4 9.14, 16 4.12,13; 16 16 4, 17.94,
17.11. 3, 18.6 4; 5, 8; 18 7.5, 19 7.6; 21. 14 4, 22 5 5.8; 22 7.5.
8; 3.7 2, TS 7.4.4.1 (biS), TB 1 8.7.1; 3.8 16.1 (biS), K.8 3
(p. 86, 14); 8 11 (p 95,1); 8.13 (blS,'p 97,7,16), 12.9 (p 172,3); 14.7
() ertel, The Syntax of Cases
8
33
§ 17, Ex. 2 Pendent Nommabve.
(p. 206,5), 14.9 (p 208,20),14.10 (p. 209, 3), 18.19 (p. 280,7), 232
(p 75,18),29.6 (biS, P 174,11,12), 34. (p. 43, 19),37 11 (p 92,18);
MS. 1. 6. 7 (p 96, 20), 1. 6. 12 (p. 105, 16), 1. 11 6 (p 168, 9); 1 11. 9
(p. 171,3), 218 (p 10,5); 33.4 (p.36,1), 441 (p. 51, 7); 44.7
(p 58,15); 4 4.10 (p 61,14), 4 5 3 (p 67,8), 4 7.5 (p. 99,15); 4 7 7.
(p. 102, 21); wllh ltd!tyam KB 25.3, TB 3. 12.5.8, wlth jjd¡tyltn PB.
16.14.2 (biS); wlth mdragnt KB 3.2; and v' rudh + ava wIth devatlih
TS.3.5.4.4, 54.1.2,1) 4.8.3; 6;tJ.51.4-5; 5 7.4.1, 6.3.7 3;
7 4.1. 2; TE 1. 2. 2 5; 1. 2 5 2; 1 6.1.6.; 2.7.1. 3, 4, MS. 3.7.1
(p 75,15), K. 8.12 (p. 96,6), 10.1 (biS, p. 125, 3,4), 23.2 (p. 75, 12),
31. 11 (biS, p. 13, 11 and 14, 12); 37 7 (p. 88, 6), wJth alJmm, TS 5. 3
11. 2; TE 2 1 2 1 (biS), MS 1. 8.9 (p 129,8), K 8 15 (p 99,3), wüh
praJltpattm GB 2 2. 13, MS 1. 11. 6 (p. 168,10), wlth somam MS. 4.1. 1
(p 1,7)
2. JB. 2 262 etas,e cat 't'a devatltsv rdhnoty etanr; ca lokan ltpnott,
285 tltsv [devatasu] evat 'tad rdhnott tasu prattstMya 8vargam lokam eti
show the locatlve devatasu mstead of the accusatIve devatah, allhuugh at
JB. 2. 285 the accusative dtr;ah wIlh v' rdh Irnmediately precedl\s. dtfa
eval 'tena rdhnott d¡ksu prattsthaya svargarn lokam eti.
3 Delbruck, Altmd Syntax, p. 176, 30 renders v' rdh in this connectlOn
by 'befnedlgen', PW. s ardh, no 3. by 'genugen, befnedlgen'; pw. s al'dh,
no 2 by 'fordern'. Kelth in bIS note to AB 1 1. 5 (ef also hl5 note to.
TS 1 7. 3. 2) regards the aecusah ve as one of referenee; hls rendermgs
vary: AB. 1 1 5 'They prosper as regards the gods'; TS. 1. 7. 32m the-
text 'He enJoys PraJapah' m the note 'He prospers m relatlOn to P.';
TS 5 4 12 2 and 5 7.4 3 'He wms hlm'; 5.7 4 3 'He prospers the-
gods', takmg appdrently ),/ rdh, hke Haug, wJth causatlve force.
v' I dh m the sense of 'to be successful m regard to somethmg' = 'to succeed
in wmning or attalmng somethmg' lS also. found III the followmg passages'
K. 11. [) (p. 149,21) ena [osadh¡h] Idhnotl;
Cf. TB. 3. 8. 17. 4; K. 20 3 (p 21, 12) ta evo 'bhayIr [osadhIh] avarunddhe;
KB. 20 1 apnuvantl. osadhlh.
MS 3 2. 1 (p 16, 2) sapta . .. saptany agner   'He wins Agm's seven
sevens'.
The 'seven sevens' refers to VS 17. 79 sapta te agne sapta
Jthvah.
The paIallel texts TS.5 4 7.5 and K 19.11 (p. 13, 19) read prllllUt
fQr rdhnotl.
JB. 2. 237; 323, 324 (biS) atho yan lman ekaikan stoman upa,gama tan sar-
dham rddhva tesu pratlsthayo 'drcam a¡:navamaha ltl, 'May we attalll the goal
wmnmg togelher each one of these Stomas wruch we have smgly unuertaken
(and) takmg our Etand in them', JB. 2. 285 eval 'tena ¡'dhnott dtksu pi atls-
thiiya svargam lokam eit, "He thereby WIllS the quarters, takmg hls stand m the
quarters he to lhe !JeJ.venly world',
34
Pendenl NommatJve
§17, Ex 2
Contrast with the accusalive di¡;a rdhnoti the locative dtksv rdhnoti al
TS.3 5.10.2, MS.4. 7. 7 t(bIS, P 103, 1); 3.6.1 (biS, p. 60, 16), K 8.1
(bIS, P 84, 1-2), 29. 6 (p. 174, 9) and cf. GB. 2. 4. 4, etah pañca dl¡;a
apnott; TS. 6.4.4. 3 duta eva 'sma avarunddhe
JB.2 129 brahmana Velva sa tad brahmavarcasam ardhnod, brahmanai 'va
brahmavarcasam rdhnott ya eva/n veda, 2.131 brahmana brahmavarcasam,rdh-
nattima, 2. 175 yado val brahmavarcasam rdhnoty atha sa tasya purodham
gacchatt; 2. 288 jyotir iva ha vai sa bhtiti yo brahmavarcasam rdhnoti; 2 345
tad brahmavarcasam rdhnuvantt tad u brahmavarcasino bhavant.; JUB. 1 37.6;
Cf. brahmavarcasam wJth v' ap, GB 2 5.8: WJlh V rudh + ava, TS 1.
5. 8 4: 2 1. 7. 3, 7; 2 2. 10. 2; 7 2 3 1, 7. 4. 1. 3, 7. 4. 2 5; TB. 1. 1.
311,27.11 (ter); 2; 27.3.3; 38 18.5; 3.9.5.4; 5,3.9.3.3,
MS.l 5. 11 (p 79, 12); 1. b 8 (p 99, 16); 3 3 2 (p 33,8), K. 10 2 (p 126,
17); 20. 13 (p. 34, 1); 21. 2 (p. 38,8): 32. 1 (p 19, 20), 34 9 (p. 43, 11), 34.
10 (p. 44,4); 37.7 (p. 88,4), PB. 8 10 2; 16.14 5; 16.16 6: 18 7.2;
19.5.8,19.77,19.105; 19.11.6; 19.17.6, 19.18.3; 20.10.1. 25.
6. 3;   3. 7. 20, GB. 1. 2. 2
MS 4.3.8 (p 47, 7-8) relstram rdhnotl,
The parallel passage TB. 1 7 3 1 has ta eva 'smai riistram prayacchanti,
and ef. rastram wJth v' rudh + ava TB 1. 7. 3. 6; TS. 3. 4. 8 1; 5 4 9 3;
and rii.Jyam wlth V rudh + ava   l' 6 11' (p. 104, 2-3).
JUB. 1. 37. 5 avyaslktam elcastham ¡;nyam rdhnott 'He successfulIy altains good
forlune not poured asunder (but) closely umted',
For avytis¡kta cf. KB 11. 8 and probably 27.6 below.
JUB. 1. 37. 7 pranam rdhnoti, PB 4. 1 6 yaJnnmukham too rdhnuvanti;
Here the Commenl yaJnamukharh yalniinij,¡h mukhabhutam agm ..
stomam p,'upyii "'dhnuvantt sattrlllah samrddhu bhavanti. K 24. 8 (p. 99,
18) uses the loeatlve yaJnamukha evai 'tena rdhnoti. And ef. MS. 3. 4 1
(p. 45, 17) yaJiiamukham ella 'varunddhe; K. 8 10 (p 94,3) yaJiiamukham
evO. 'labhya ..
KB. 11..8, 27. 6 vacam avyaslktam (at 27. 6 LIndner's lext, wlthout
fiSS. varlant, reads abhyaSlkliim WhlCh should probably be emended to avya-
slMam, ef aboye JUB. 1. 37. 5) prathamata (27 6 antata) rdhnavuma, 'May we In
the begmnmg (at the end) suecessfully attam Speech faUened, not pon red nsunder'.
Dvandvam al PB. 24 12. 4 adltyá dt'andvam ardhnuvan, 'The AdJtyas
prospered m couples' ¡S, of course adverb; the Comment. glosses It by
dvau-dvau mllltva; cf AB 3 50 4; KB. 26 7 (p. 122, 21); 29.8 (p. 141,
20), QB. 1. 1. 1 22 (bis); 14. 1 3. 1 (bis), TS 5. 4. 2. 1 (ter), 5. 6. 2. 5,
K. 27 1 (p. 138, 20); 29. 9 (p 179, 3)
In vlew of all the preeedmg examples Jt seems advisable to regard the accu-
sahve tmam lokam at <;:B 13.5.1. 2 tmam lokam rdhnott as well as the simIlar
aecusati ves JUB. 1. 37. 2 'mam lokam, 3 rdhnoty amum lokam; 4 rdhnoti
'mam antaralokam, QB. 13. 5. 3. 9 antartksalokam rdhnoti; 10 amum lokam
GB. 2. 4. 18 ímanl lokan rdhnoti, JB 2. 346 yuvan svuruJyo lokas
3*
35
§ 18-20A. Pendent Nominabve
tlivanta¡i¡ svlit'ÜJyarn lokam rdhnavlima as or1ginalIy quasi·cognate accusabves of
content or referencej lokam rdhnoti combInes the meamngs of asml1il loka
and imam lokam ava1"ltnddhe or 'He lS successful in winmng
this world and thnves having attamed It'
"§ lS. 3. The Pendent Nominative consisting of a Simple Noun
anticipates a Locative.
1. athai 'tac charírarn tas1tJ,m na rllso 'sti, 'Now tbis body,-
there is no sap in it'. QB. 4 4. 5. 1.
§ 19. 4. The Pendent Nominative consisting of a Simple Noun
accompanied by Ad.Jectival Qualifiers anticipates an Accusative.
1. athe 'tara!¡ [apah}   f}antas tas tat'rai 'va 'bhya-
abhyatapat samatapad, 'But the other (waters) WhlCh were
drinkable, palatable, appeased,-these he then toiled over, heated,
thoroughly haated'. GB. 1. l. 3.
The Proleptic Nommabve 1mmedmtely precedmg tbls passage is hsted aboye
§ 9, Ex. 4.
§ 20. 5. The Pendent Nominative consisting Of a Noun ac-
compamed by a Gerund anticipates an Accusative.
1. atithyena deva tant samad avzndat, 'The gods having
sacrificed with the guest·offering, -them discord befell'. QE. 3.
4. 2. 1; 3. 4. 3: 1.
1. SpelJer, Ved and Sansknt Syntax, § 287, p.91 cItes tbIS passage as an
example of 'anacoloutblC' cOllslructlOns, and Delbruck, Altmd. Synt. p 409 notes
it as an mstance of tbe absolute use of the ¡jerund the remark tbat t§tvii
IS nearly eqUlvalent to a fimte verh. Cf KeJtb, ZDMG &3, 1 g09, p 346
2. At 8 1. 1. 3 prafiipater visras/lit prana udakrliman devata bhütvli, tan
abravU' .. , 'From PralapatI bemg d1slomted the breaths (= orgam of sense),
ha Vlllg beco me dl VlmtJeS, departed; to tbem he sald' ',the punctuatlOn must
be placed after devata bhütvli, not, as Eggehng does, before 1t. '
r Addition from the Aranyakas and Upall1$ads.
§ 20 A. 5 A. The Pendent Nominative consisting of a Noun ac-
companied by a Present Participle which governs an Object Accu-
sative anticipates an Accusative.
1 A. tam nu tva iti, tmh ha sma
yatha dhümarh va 'ptyad Vliyurh va 'kli({arh va 'gnyarcnh va 'po
'varh ha smat 'narh vyeü, '(Ke<¡in Darbhya said to UccaiC(C(ra-
vas Kaupayeya:) "Let me then embrace thee" j as he tried to
embrace him,-as if oue were to approach smoke or wiud or
36
Pendent Nommative. § 21-22.
(empty) space or the gleam of fire or water even so he (Uccaiy-
yravas Kaupayeya) escaped him (Keyin Darbhya)'. JUB 3.29. 7.
On the questlOn of asslgnm¡\' to the pi esent partJclple partsvaJamanah the
funchon of a timte verb cf aboye § 10. J
§ 21. The folloWlllg two passages are dublOUS.
6. The Pendent NominatIve consisting of a Noun accompamed
by a Gerund anticipates an Ablative.
Under this heading would belong
1. par;avo 'mala O?adhir rnalmir Jagdhva 'pa[/, pítvil tata (!$U rasak
sambhavatl. QB. 2. 3, 1. 10,
If tata[/, be regarded as eqmvalent to an
assumptlOn which is not probable; see the dIScussion of this pas-
sage below § 26, Ex. 6 and § 74, Ex 6.
7. The Pendent Nommative accompanied by a Gerund antIClpates
a Dative.
Here would belong in our present Madhyandma-recenslOn
1. atha 'pa [brahma} acamatt, ... , atha   patram II
athü 'smat brahmabhagam paryaharantt, 'Then he (the Brahman-
prlest) rinses his mouth wIth ... , then he havmg rmsed
the vessel,-they then carry the Brahman's portlOIl round for him'.
QB. 1. 7. 4. 17-18,
but, as Delbrück, who cites this passage Altind Syntax, p. 409,
• 14, notes, there is doubt whether the final words of section 17
should really be construed with the begmning of sectlOn 18, or
whether after patram and before atha 'smat a lacuna should be
assumed. The Commentary states that another Qakha ltlserts at
the end of section 17 after patram the words nabhtm alabhate, 'he
touches hls navel', and cf. KQ. 2 20. 2 patram nab7nm
alabhate.
B. The Pendent Nominative not resumed by a Damonstrative
Pronoun.
§ 22. 1. The Pendent Nomina.tiva resumed by the Repetitiou
of the Noun in its Proper Oblique Case.
1. etena vat devá yajnene '#va ye 'yam devanam prajatir ya r;r'ir
etad babhüvur etam ha vai prajatim prajayata etam r;riyam gacchati
37
§ 22-24. Pendent NorninatJve.
ya evam mdvan etena yajñena yajate, 'The gods having sacrificed
with thIS sacrifice,-what then this propagative power of the gods
(and) what their prosperity were, with that propagative power he
is propagated (and) that prospenty he attains who knowmg thus
sacrifices with this sacrIfice'. QB. 2. 5. 4. lI.
Rere the Pendent NominatlVe deviih in deva istva is resumed by devanam
instead of tesam.
§ 23. 2. The Pendent Nominative resumed by a Past Parti-
ciple in its Proper Oblique Case.
1. etya grhán paf{cad grhyasya 'gner 'nvarabdhaya rtmg
antata1.J, kañsena caturgrhltas tzsra ajyahutir azndrih prapadarh ju-
hatz, «The king) havlDg returned to the house,-for him as he
is seated behind the household fire and is touched (by the priest),
he (the priest) finally offers in a bowl three butter-hbations sacred
to lndra taken in four portions in the Prapad-form'. AB. 8. 10 9.
Rere the Pendent NornlllatlVe [, aja] which rnubt be supphed with etya g1 han
is resumed by the two past partlclples and anvárabdhliya
The staternent of SpelJer, Ved. und Sansknt Syntax. p 25, § 88 and
Delbruck, Vprgl Syntax 1, p. 743, § 292 that c. genit. does not occur
befo re the Qrautaslltras IS due to an oversight. Delbrück hlrnself, Altind.
Syntax, § 112, P 163, 12 refers for pa'tciit c gemt to LJeblch, BB, 11,
p 296, 17-18 who quotes AB. 8. 10. 9, the PW. col 612, 20 cItes Chánd.
Up. 5. 2. 8 pa(iciid agneh Cf further QB. 4 3. 5. 13 pa9cát ..•  
7 4 1 35 pa(icad agneh; K 20 6 (p 24, 15) = 22. 10 (p. 66, 10) parcan
me, K. 20. 6 (p 24, 16) = 22 10 (p. 60, 1 t) ya evii 'sya par;cat, K 22. 10
(66, 10) pa'tcad etesam lJavamiinánam, K. 13 10 (p 192, 4) purastlid anyan '
nabhyii avadyet anyat, .. , purastad vai nabhyáh priinah
apiinah, PB. 5. 6 7 (bIs) • . dhnnyasya; 16 2 8
GB. 1. 4. 17 vtsuvatah, 1. 1 22 lrk] 'va yajñasya purastCid
yUJyata esá par;cát; AIl Ar. ñ 1. 4 (p. 148, 2 Keith) palicat svasya dhtsnyasya
(cr. Kdth's note 10, p. 274)
§ 24:. 3. The Pendent Nominative without any Resumption.
No instance of such a construction occurs. At GB. 1. 1. 32 lO
reply to the question
11 kzm smd iihur Mafi, samtur varenyam 1
Margo devasya 7cavayaly. kzm ahuh 11
'What do the sages, Venerable SIl', cal! "Savitr's highest bliss
(RV 3.62. 10)", what do they call "The glory of the god (RV. 3. 62.
lO)"?' the answer iS'given by the manuscripts and the Blbl. Ind. textj
38
Absolute Nominative § 25-26, Ex. 1-2
11 vedar,; (sic) chandáñsi savitur vare't}yam I
bhargo devasya 7cavaya 'nnam áhul} 11
'The Vedas (and) the Metres the sages call "Savitr's hlghest
bliss, food (they call) "The glory of the god".' But tbe text
sbould be emended (as is done in Gaastra's ed.) to vedañr,; chan-
dañst ..
lIT. The Absolute Nominative.
§ 25. As has been pointed out above (§ 3, 1, Cj § 4-6) tbe
noun must be accompanied by an infinite verb-form, viz. either a
partlCiple (Ex. 1; 3) or a gerund (Ex. 2; 4-11).
The Examples are diVlded into two groups: In Group A there
is a slight conuecting lmk between tbe disjunet nommative and
tbe subject of tbe sentenee; m Ex. 1 tbe dIsJunct nommative con-
sists of two nouns (devar,; ca 'sura{; ca) tbe first of wbiqb lS lden-
tícal wItb tbe subject of tbs sentence; m Ex. 2 tbe subject of
the sentence (to be suppbed from the context) consists of two nouns,
viz. 'husband and wlfe', tbe former of which must be supplied
as tbe noun of tbe disjunct nominative.
In Group B there is no such link between tbe snbject of tbe
sentence and tbe noun of tbe disjunct nominative. Witbin Group B
the first subdivision (1, Ex. 3-8) is composed of tbose examples
in wbich tbe subject noun of tbe absolute nominative is formally
expressed, wbile tbe second subdivision (II, Ex. 9-18) comprises
tbose instances in which tbe subject noun of the absolute nomi-
natIVe must be supplied from tbe contexto
§ 26. Examples.
A. 1. devar,; ca va asurar,; ca 'ditye vyáyacchantas ta/k (so the Com-
mento correctly for tan of tbe Blbl. Ind. text) deva' abhyajayan,
<Tbe gods and the Asuras_ contending about Aditya,-the gods
won bim'. PB. 5. 5. 15.
2. 7c§rraudanam (14 dadhyodanam, 15 udaudanam, 16 tilauda.-
nam; 17 máñsaudanam) pacayitva sarpl§mantam ar,;niyatám, 'He
(tbe busband) baving caused (bis wife) to cook a mess of milk
snd rice (of curds and rice, of water and rice; of sesamum and
ríce; oí meat and rice),- tbey both (husband and wife) should
39
§ 26, Ex. 2-6. Absoluie NommatIve.
eat (It) seasoned with butter'. QB. 14. 9. 4 13-17 (= BAU. 6_
4 13-17 Madhy. = 14-18 KaI).v.).
BOhtlingk renders: 'Del' lasse Rels In MIlch kochen und verzehre dIesen ge-
schmalzt mlt semer FJ au'; Deussen. 'So mussen belde Rels mlt MIlch gekochl
und mIl Butter übergossen essen'. The Comment. to BAU. KaQv. throws no
hght on the exact'consLIuction Both Bóhtlmgk and, apparentIy, Deussen regard
the gerund piicayltta as loosely construed }\11th the subJect of the linde verb
'Both (husband and wlfe) havmg caused a mess of m11k and llce to
be cooked should eat (11) seasoned wlth 1:mtter'; but It 1S lU faet the wlfe who
does the cookmg. Cf below Ex. 9 and 10.
E. 1. 3_ tan nanachandasyanarh sahasram sat sahasram brhatyak
sarhpadyante, 'In tblS manner, tbere being one tbousand (verses)
of varied metres, one thousand BrbatI (-verses) are computed'_
KB. 18.3.
The case-fOlm of sahasl'am sat IS ambiguous; It IDIght be aeeusative, cf. be-
low § 37, Ex.5.
, 4 tasya bhavatz, va afvas
santa¡; te ye   catU¡;¡;apháS tan evat
'tená 'varwnddhe, 'Its Bahi$pavamaoa is (sung) on four (verses),
tbe borses being four-footed, four-boofed,-what animals are four-
footed, four-hoofed those he thereby wins'. JB 2. 176.
5. dafa [pafavoh} 'labhyante, vmiq" vzraq, etany eve
'ndnyani V'iryany atman dhztve, 'yam virad, asyam eva
'Ten (vietims) are taken (for slaugbter); the VU'aj has ten syllables;
tha Vlraj having placed this Vlgour (and) strenght in tbe self (of
tbe sacrificer),-he (tha sacrificer stands firmly upon thlS (earth),
for the Vlraj is (ldentical wlth) this (earth)'. MS. 2. 5. 10 (p. 61, 7).
The words iyam VIral/, are an mtercalary clause wruch loglcally belongs after
asyum prattttsthatz for whleh it glves tbe reason; er. the separalIon of the ned-
clause by tbe inlerealary vaJro va at¡vah at QB 6. 3 3. 12 etan no 'pasprt¡ath
va;ro va at¡vo, nen mi'i 'yam vajl'o hmasad tti, <He does not then toueh (the
horse, thmkmg): "Mar thls thunderbolt not wJure me", for the horse 15 a thunder-
bolt'. Such mtercalal y clauses al e very fl equently Illserled between the Flllal
Dative and the elause to whlCh it properly belongs and will be dlseu5sed under the
headmg of Fmal Dabves. cr. Eggelmg, SBE 43, p 137, note 1 (to QB. 8. 7. 2. 16).
6. 'mala mülinir jagdhM 'paf¿ prtva tata rasak
sarhbhavati, 'The rootless anímals having ea ten the rooty plants
(and) having drunk the water,-then tbis sap originates'. QB. 2.
3. 1. 10.
40
Absolute NornmatIve, § 26, Ex 6-8.
The trans)atlOn follows Delbruck (Altind. Syntax § 226, p. 408, 33) who re n-
ders: 'Wenn nun dIe wurzellosen Tlere dIe bewurzelten Pflanzen gegessen und
das Wasser getrunken haben, dann entstebt der Lebenssaft'.
GrarnrnatICally It would be perrnlssIbIe to take tbe adverb tatah as functionalIy
eqUIvalent to the ablatIve oí" the dernonstratJve pronoun tebhyah (VlZ. pat;ubhyah)
'The rootless anirnals havmg eaten the rooty plants (and) havmg drunk the
water,-from tbem (VIZ frorn these antrnaIs) tbis sap orlgmates', cf. e. g. TS. 5.
1 9. 4 ya [agmhJ ukhiiyilt sambhavatt 'What' (fire) IS produced flOm the pan'
immeilIately followed by ato hy esa [agmh] sambh(Jvati, 'For from thls (pan) tbIS
(fire) IS produced'; (:B 13.3 1 1 tato (viz pra¡ilpater cf. <;;B 13 4.2 3)
  samabhavat, 'From thls (eye of PraJapall) lhe horse was produced' If
tatah be so taken the exarnple would show a Pendent NommatIve (above § 21,-
Ex 1). But the four passages ctB. 1 3 1. 25; 1. 7. 1, 18, 2.3.1, 16, and 2 6 3.
7 gIven below § 74, Ex 5 - 6 rnake It well mgh certam that tatah has he re the
force of a temporal adverb 'then'.
7. praJapatw va [agnilt} bhütva yavata yavad enam anu
tasya retal;. yad agmhotrarh Juhott., 'ThIS (Agni) haviog be-
come PraJapati,- he (the sacrIficer), In that he. offers the Agni·
hotra, casts the seed oí aH that over which he (PrajapatI) rules,
oí aIl tbat which is subject to this (PrajapatI)'. QB. 2. 3 4. 8.
Here beloogs al so the íoIlowiog passage in WhICh the Absolute
Nominativa precedes the exclamatory particle (= et) with de-
pendent accusatIve: .
8. tato vai ca ca devanam yaJñavastv abhyayan:
yajñasya kirh cid praJl1atya lit, te 'b7nta{t parwaranta m't
pafum eva nirantaram fayanam, 'Thereupon meo and sages went
tQ the sacrificial ground of the gods (thinking:) "We will seek
something or other oí the sacrIfice for the sake of orientation";
they wandering about on aIl sIdes, -lo, there was an animal
lying (there) disemboweled'. AB. 2. 13. 6.
'fhe form att cannot, of course, be regarded as a 'grammatischer Schmtzer'
as IS suggested by Aufrecbt (AB, p. 430, 20 where 2. 13. 6 should be read lll-
stead of 2. 7) who proposes an ernendatJon to tI,yan. It IS eltber a lollatera,l
form to el Altmd. Gr. 1, p. 318,14, § 269, b, y) or a faulty readmg
for et (Weber, Ind. Slud. 9, p. 249; Bilhlhngk, Beflchte d. sachs. Ges. d. WlbS.
1900, P 416; pw. s. et, p. 272, col.
In al! the other passages where lbe exclamalory et "ith dependent accusatIve
occurs lt IS (A) either preceded by a fimle form of a verb of rnotIon, thus ceruh
<.lB. 1 6.2.3; eyaya 4. 1. 3.4; (},Ja[lama 11.5. 1. 11; prav(JvraJa 11 6.1.3-7;
For the Irregular externa) Sandbi at ctB. 11. 5. 1. 11 iljagám' et aOlI 11.
6.1. 3-7 pratavriif et er. Whitney, Gr § 137,b (the instances VS 13.53
41
§ 26, Ex. 8-11 Absolute Nominatlve
tv'eman and tv' odman rited there arE' glven by PatañJali on VRrttlka 6
to Pán.6, 1 94); Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 1, § 269, e, p.319-3!W; Mac-
donell, Ved Gr § 70, 2, a; p. 64.
or (B) the place of the filllle verb of mohon IS by a dlrect dlscourse
conlammg such a verb, thus punar ema ttt <;B 2 2 3 3, 2 2. 4. 12, 2. 3. 4 2;
punar aiml 'ti <;B 11. 5. 1. 4, 13, K 8. 10 (p 93, 1 \J where sa punar 'ty
ecl vrksasyii 'gre 'gmm Jvalantam should he read wJth the mss. for Schroeder's
ald, cf Weber, Ind Slud 3, p. 463; Caland, WZKM 23, P 61).
II In the followmg examples (Ex. 9-18) a definite subject for
the Absolute Nominative must be supplied from the context In
thlS respect the instal1ces here hsted dlffer from those given be-
low § 71-75 where the subJect to be supphed with the gerund
is indefinite and the disJunct gerund lS therefore more con-
vemently rendered in English by the passlve.
9. atha yasya jayam artavam vmdet tryaham kañse na pibed alta-
tavasa, nat 'narh vr§alo na apahanyat, trlratranta aplüya
vr'ihin avaghatayet, 'Whose wlfe the menses overtake, she should
not drmk for the space of three days out of a (metal) bowl, being
Ilot dressed (the wlllle) 111 a new-washed garment; neIther a
Dor a Vr$alI should touch her; at the expiration of three nights,
-sbe baving taken a batb,-be (tbe husband) should cause her to
pound rlce'. QB. 14.9.4.12 (= BAU. 6.4.12 Madby. = 13 KaI).v.)
Incorrectly Bühtllllgk, who the gerund aplüya as refernng lo lhe sub-
Ject of the senlence' 'Naeh Ablauf von drel Tagen bade er sleh und lasse (die
Frau) Rels dreschen' COIrectly DeussE'n 'Nacbdem die drel Na, hte voruber,
sol! sle slch haden und man sol! sle den Rel'> ausdreschen lassen'. The Comment
to BAD. Kan v dlslmctly glo'Sses: ti;im apluia»t vrfh'in avaghiitayet Contl asl,
without change of subJect, TE. 1 6 5 2 mrdu,;!!ai   'narh uaramJ varunapu((ena
grahayati, 'She (the wlfe) havmg pointed out thls (her paramour) causes him to
be hound with the noose of Varuna'. And cf. Ex. 2 and 10
10. sa abhyam eva prasüta maro vrtram ahan, te deva 'Urtrwh
hatva     abruvan: havyarh no vahatam ltz, 'Impelled by these
two (viz. heaven and earth) thIS Indra slew Vrtra; the gods,-he
(Indra) having sIain Vrtra,-smd to Agni and Soma: "Carry ye
the oblation for liS",' TS 2. 5. 2. 6.
Keith renders: 'The gods havmg slam Vrlra Sald lo Agni and Soma .', hut
It is Indra and not the gods who slew Vrtra. Gf. above Ex. 2 and 9.
11. athai 'nam [yaj1"iam} brahma 'nvait, tam apnot, tam aptva
parastan ntrudhya   sa apta/¡ parastan ntruddhas ti§thañ
42
Absolute Nommative. § 26, Ex. 12-13
jñatva svany ayudham brahmo 'pavartata, 'Tben the Brabman
(neut.) went after tbis (sacrifice); it (tbe Brahman) havmg reacbed
it (tbe sacrifice), blocking lt in front,-it (tbe sacrifice) stood
still; it (tbe sacrifice) having been reacbed (and) blocked m front,
standmg stlll (and) recognizing its own weapons (VlZ tbe sacrificial
implements) turned toward the Brahman'. AB. 7. 19. 3.
Both Haug and KeJtb take atisthat as auxlliary verb wJtb nirudhya and as
referrmg to brahma as 'It (tbe Brahman) kept blockmg lt (tbe sacnfice)'.
But It IS the sacnfice whlCh, bemg reacbed (apnot, aptva, áptah) and blocked
(mrudhya, niruddhah) hy the Blahman, stood sbll (atz¡,that, tlsthan) The srtua-
tíon IS slmllm to that III gB 1. 6 2 3-4 where the sa(,rlfice, creepmg away in
the shape. of a tortOlse, stands stlll for Aglll; and cf. TS. 2 6 .3 3
12. atha ha szta saVltri somam rüjanam CakCtrlle, c;mddham u sa
cakame, sa ha pitamm pmjapatl11t upasasara, tam ho 'vaca. namas
te 'sttl bhagavah, upa tva yann (Blbl. Ind. yanz) II pra tva padye,
somam va'/, rajanam kamaye, Qraddhüm tt sa 7camayata dí, tasya u
ha sthagaram alarnlvaram lcalpaydi'a daQahotaram purastad vyakhyaya
caturhofararn paf¡cahotarll1n parcat uttal'ataJ;
saptahotaram sambhal'au; ca patmbhu; ca mukhe 'lamlr,rtya
II a 'sya 'rdham vavl'aja, tam ho   'vaca ¡tpa ma "vartas'/;e 'ü,
'Now Sita SavitrI loved king Soma, but he loved Qraddha, she
(Sita) betook herself to father Prajapati; sbe sald to hlm: "Obei-
sanee be to tbee, Venerable Sir, 1 come to thee, I approach thee;
1 love kmg Soma, but he loves Qraddha", he (PrajapatI) having
caused an ornament of Stbagara to be prepared for her, bavlllg
explained to ber tbe in front, the Caturbotr-litany
in the south, the Pañcahotr·litany behind, the Sad9-hotr-litany in
the north, (and) the Saptahotr-htany above,-she (SIta) baving
adorned her face proceeded with tbe (necessary) perquisites and
with her women to tbe place of this (Soma), be, having caught
sight of her, said: "Tarn toward me".' TB 2. 3. 10. 1-3.
13. atha 'dhvaryur hlranyapatrena madhugraham .
atho 'kthyam grh'flaty atha dhntvam athat 'tant smnagrahan uttame
stotra rtv1Jarn vyavamya 'Now tbe Adhvaryu-
priest draws the mead·hbation with a gold cup; ... , tben he
draws the Uktbya-hbation, then the Dhruva·hbahon, then, at the
last Stotra,-he (the Adhvaryu-priest) having poured tbese Soma-
43
26, Ex. 14-18.
Absolute Nommative.
libatlOns into the cups of tbe (several) priests,-they (the priests)
offer them'. QB. 5. 1. 2. 19.
Eggelmg notes the absolute constructlon of the gerund and refers to Delbrück,
Allmd Syntax, p 408. (mlsprmted as 108).
14. 11 dhanaruha U vai 'nyatah pretya sambhava!t II cA tree
grows froro seed; it having -there IS growth from another
(seed, = a new tree grows from the seed of the old tree)'. QB.
14 6 9. 34 (= BAU. 3. 9. 34: Madhy. = 28 KaJ;lv.). Qloka.
Cuntrasl the Impersonal use of pretiJa 'after death' at t;B. 14 7. 3. 13, 14-
(= BAU 4.5. 13, 14) below § 75, Ex. 1.
15. tam [pa(}um] jaghanena catvalam antarena yüpam ca 'gnzm
ca harantt, ... , tasmad antarena yapam ca 'gnim ca haranti,
daksznato mdhaya pratiprasthata 'vadyati, 'They carry thIS (victim)
back of the pit between the sacrifICial stake and the fire; .,
for this reason they carry It between the sacrificial stake and the
fire, they having laid It down to the south (of the fire),-tbe
Pratiprastbatr-priest makes tbe sacrificial cuttings'. QB. 3. 8. 3. 10.
16. tam [garbham7 }aghanena catvalam antarena yüpam ca 'gmm
ca harantz, mdhaya pratiprasthata 'vadyati, 'They carry
thlS (embryo) back of tbe pit between the sacnficlal stake and
the fire; tbey having laid lt down to the south (of the fire),-the
Pratiprastbatr-priest makes the sacrificiaI cuttlDgS'. QB. 4. 6. 2. 8.
,
17. grhapater eva 'ranyolt sarhvadante·. . tiy evam uktvá grha-
pattr eva prathamalJ, samarohayate, 'They hold converse with each
other over the churnmg sticks of the Grhapati: .. , they having
thus held converse,-the GrhapatI hfts (the fire) first. QB. 4. 6.
8. 13; 16.
The slmplex uktvii repeats the corupound samvadante; cf JAOS 28, p 86,
nole 5.
Here belongs also most probably
18. yasya 'gnihotram adht(}rztam prañ udayan skhalate va   va
bhrañt;ate ka tatra praya(}czttzft, 'If one's Agnihotra after it has been
placed on (tbe fire) spills' over or even (completely) falls down,-
(tbe Adhvaryu-pnest) going up to the east (= whIle the Adhvaryu-
priest is going up to the east)-what expiation is   AB.
7.5.6.
44
Apparent D1SJUnct NornmatlveS. § 27, Ex. 1.
The translatIOn, as do Raug's and KeJth's. follows the Commentary which
glos'les: agmhotradravyam garhapatye 'dhlt;l"Úam palead ürdhvam adaya prañ-
muleha iiha/Janiyam pratyudayann udgacchann adhvaryur gada bhavatt tadiiniln
tad dravyf/m skhaleta yad vii   s1chalanam, sakalyena
dravyflpatallalh bhrfllir;ak Illd Stud.9, p 310 -31 1, on the other hand,
udiiyan wJth the subJect of the dause 'Wenn er zu dem (ans Feuer)
angeselzten agmhotram hm ostwarls hmaufkommend slrauchelt oder gar fallt .. '
wllh tbe note: 'Prañ udayan kann mcht als parenthettscher Nebensatz gefafit
werden, sondern 1St SubJect des ganzen Satzes'.
Appendix.r.
Apparent Instances of Disjunct Nominatives.
§ 2'7. Rere are grouped togetber a number of passages in
which at first glance instances of a DIsjunct Nominative might
be assumed. U pon closer examinatlOn, however, It will be found
that these apparent Disjunct NominatIves admit of a different
-explanation.
1. tad i:;ta{l prayaja asur aparyagnikrtam, atha 'sura anvajagmus,
te devah paryagmnai 'va 'surant sapatnan bhratrvyan yajñad antar-
ayan, <Now the fore offerings had been offered without the cere-
mony of carrying round tbe fire havmg (as yet) been performed;
then (= at this moment) the Asuras carne after (the gods); (but)
tbese (gods) excluded the Asuras, their foes aud rival s, from the
sacrifice by meaos of tbe ceremony of carrying round the fire'.
QB. 12. 9 3. 9.
Eggelmg lranslates: 'Now, lhe fore-offenngs had been performed, but the tire
had not been camed round (the obldllons), when the Asuras come after hlm',
and thus seems lo take tad prayiiJa iisuh and aparyagntkrtam as two COOI-
.dmated paratacllcal clauses. The renderlllg aboye takes aparyagmkrtam as an
adverbial accusahve, cf. anavadhrtam, KB 16 4, (bis, p 71,6), 'not tixedly' (PW.
Na! htrag", col 980 'nichl fesbtehend, unbestllllme; pw. 'nach elgenem Gutdunken'.
KeIth '1Ilsecurely'); aniijfliitam 2 1. 6. 5 'm a manner unknown'; aVlchmnam
K. 13. 13 (p 15,17); MS 3.4 1 (p 45,3),3.9 3 (p. 117, 11) amI avyavachmnam
1. 9.3.5 'wlthoul mterruptlOu'; asamavahJtam gB. 9.4.3 15 'wllhout paymg
• lo'. The adverbidl accusatLve aparyagmkrtam would then be lhe semantic
-eqUIvalent 01 a locattve absolute *apariJagmkrte, cf AB 2 5. 2 trcam ágneyam
gayatram anviiha paryagmkrlyamltne, 'He reclles a trIplet m the Gayatñ-metre
{and) addressed to Agni whlle the ceremony of carrymg round the fire IS takmg
place', and slmIlady TS. 3. 4.3. -) paryagnau kriYflmltne Juhoti, 'He makes the
Q!fermg whde the ceremony of carrymg round the tire is brmg performed'. The
closest parallel to gB. 1!:! 9. 3. 9 is gB. 9. 4. 3. 15-16 ista devata bhavanty
45
§ 27, Ex 2-3 Apparent DIsJunct NommatJves.
asamavahttam sVtstakrte 11 afhaz 'nU1h pun·ablnsekena   'The dlvmüies
have heen sacrlÍiced 10 wIlhout tbe havlOg (as yet) be en aUended to;
then he 10uches thls (altar) wlth the formula for the .prelImmary conseclation'.
2. nzvlste mrta patn'l va 'gnihotrarh katham agnihotram
'(Supposmg that) after (the Agnihotrin) has marded, (his) wife has
dled or has disappeared, how does, he offer the Agmhotra?' AB.
7. 10.2.
Weber, Ind. Stud 9, p 312 translales 'Stubt nach dem Emtrltt (des Mannes
m den Stand des Agmhotrm dessen) Frau oder wird (sonst wle van lbm)
verloren, Wle kann er dann das AgmhotIa opfern, das Agmhotra?' Keith: 'If one
bas commenced (the sacrifice), and his wife dles or dlsappeals, how does he offer
the Agmhotra?' Saya na glosses. vwahad urdhvam agnzhotre ntVtste anusthatum
upaki tinte sati patnI mrta bhavatt But 1 am unable to find another
passage where V + nt appears in the techmcal sense of 'entering upon the
state of an Agmhotrm or the like' or oE 'commencmg a sacrlfice'. It would
therefOle beem pleferable to take V Vt9 + nt here in the sense wrnch it frequently
has lU the Eplc, VIZ. 'to estabhsb a household by getlmg marrled', cf. PW s.
V + m col. 1194, no. 5 = pw P 121, col. 1, no. 7 and col. 2, no. 14, f; PW.
col 11?5, no. 10, e = pw. p. 122, col 1, no. 2, and V. Nachtrage, p 242, col. 3,
s. aniVtsta, PW. s. mve9a, col. 226, no. 3, d = pw. P 222, col 2, no. 3, f; PW.
s col. 227, no 2 = pw. p. 222, col. 3, no. 3; PW. s. mvestavya, col :!l27 =
pw P 222, col 3, no. 2 As subJect of lhe locahve absolute [agmhotrim] should
be understood wIth nWfste. The words nivIste [agnlhotnm] mrta patni nasta
va form an independent paratactical clause eqUlvalent m sense to a hypotachcal
condItlOnal sentence
Chapters 10 and 11 of the seventh book of AB are interpolations; ac·
cordmg to the Cornmentaly they weJe recogmzed m certam 10calltIes only
(de¡¡amfeSena ke md amanantz ke cm nti 'manantz)
The lJecuhar repetItlOn of agnlhotram occurs agam at 7. 10 4 apatn'ik(}
'gmhotrarn katham agnlhotram Juhoti.
3. Elghteen passages of QB show a nominative which Eggehng
in 111s note to QB 6. 1. 1, 2 ca]ls 'striking' and 'vivid' and WhlCh
according to his rendering he seems to construe as a Pendent.
Nominative. Delbruck, on the other hand, lS inclined to construe
the nominatIve with the verb of naming and he remarks on the
absence of an expected zh (Altmd. Syntax, § 64, p. 104, 28). In.
reality the nominative forms an independent paratactical and
parenthetical clause.
These elghteen passages have thls III common that they propose mystic ety·
mologles i. e. etymologlcal equatlOns between the real, esoterh: name of a person
or thing and thelr every-day, cryptlc name; thus 'Indra' IS the every·day, cryptic
46
Apparent DISJUnct Nommatlves. § 27, Ex. 3, 1.
name of the god whose real, esoteric name lS 'lndha'. Such statements are
commonIy cast In the styhstic mouId exemphfied by the followmg examples; (,:B.
14.6. 11. 2 (= HAU. 4. 2 2) ta¡h va etam mdham santam indra fty acaksate
puroksene 'va (Kanv paroksenal 'va, for wa = eva cf aboye § 9, Ex 21, Rem), 'Him
who lS (really, esoteucally) Indha they cryptlrnlly call (m every·day speech)
Indra', 9B 6. 1. 2 13, 21 etam prajapatml santam agntr ity acahate, 'Hlm who
IS (really) they calI Agm', AH 3 33 6 tan madusam san manusam ity
acahate paroksene 'va, 'That wlnch lS (really) Mádusa tbey cr)ptJcally can
Mánusa', AB 3. 43 1, '2, 3 tam agnistomam (2 catustomam, 3. jyottstomam}
sanC¡tm (2   3 iyotlstoma) fty acaksate paro].,sena 'That WhlCh
IS (Ieally) Agmstoma (Catustoma, Jyotlstoma) they cryptIcally call Agmstoma
(Ca.tustoma, Jyohstoma), AB. 7. 30 4 tam nyagroham santam nyagl'odha ¡t!!
acaksate pUl'oksena, 'ThlS (tree) Whlch 15 (really) the Nyagroha they cryptJcally call
NYdgrodha', GB. 1. 1 1 tam va etam suvedam santa m sveda tty 'That
WhlCh lS (really) Suveda they call Sveda (sweat)', GB 1. 1. 7 tam Va etam varanUln
santam varuna tty 'Hlm who lS (really) Varal)a they can Varul)a', GB.
1. 1. 7 tam va etanl mucyam santalh mrtyur tt!! acaksate, 'Him who IS (really)
Mucya they call Mrtyu (Death)'; GB. 1. 1. 7 tam va etam añgarasam santam añgirii
tty iicalcsate, 'Hlm who is (really) Añgaras they call Añglras', GB. 1 1 39
puni(ayam santa m préi,nam purusa fty iicaksate, 'The breath WhlCh lS (really)
PUrl¡;aya (Restmg In the Stronghold) they call Purusa (Person)'; GB. 1. 2. 2\
tam va etam iiglahatam santam aglagrdha fty acaksate, 'Hlm who IS (really}
Aglahata (,1) they call Aglágrdha (?)', GB 1. 2. 21 tam va etarh rasam santam
ratha Ity acaksate, 'That WhlCh is (really) Rasa (sap) they can Ratha (chanot)',
GB. 1 3. 19 tam vii etam dh'iksdam santam d'ikstta ity acakliate, 'Hlm who lS
(realIy) OhiksIta they call Dikslta (consecrated)', GB 1. 4. 23 tam va etath
santam prsthya fty acaksate 'That whICh IS realIy SPHya they call Prsthya'.
In the following mghteen passages, however, the real esoteric
name is glven in an mdependent paratactical clause which is then
followed by the phrase tam ... ity containing the every-
day, cryptIc name.
A combinabon of both types of expres510n occurs at Alt. Ar. 2 4.3 (p. 121,
2 KeJth) = Alt Up. 1. 3. 14 tasmad tdUlhdro name, 'dathdro ha vat nama, tam
1damdram santam fndra (Roer indram) tty acaksate paroksena, 'Therefore he lB
Idamdra by name; Idamdr.! by name he (really) lS; hlm who lS (really) Idamdra
they cryptJcally call Indra', JUB. 1. 20 4 tad yad asminn idam sarvam antas
tasmad q,ntaryaksam, antaryaksam ha vat namai 'tai, tad antanksam fti paroham
acaksate; 1 24 2; 2 8. 7.
1. yad amddha tasmad indha, ha vai, tam zndra ity acab;ate
paroksam, 'Because he kmdled therefore he is the Kindler (Indha),
the Kindler (lndha) indeed he (really) is; him they cryptlCally
call lndra' QB. 6 1. 1. 2.
47
§ 27, Ex. 3, 2-6 Apparent DisJunct Nominatives
Contrasl QB. 14.6. 11. 2 (= Bi\U 4.2.2) indho vai námai '.5a yo 'ymh dak5ine
'ksan tam va etam tndharh santam mdra dy acaksate paroksene 'va
{Kanv. 'va; for = eva ef. aboye § 9, Ex. 21, Rem), 'Thls Person
in the right eye is (really) Indha by name, hlm beIng (really) Indha they crypti-
cally eall Indra'.
The adverbial mstrumenlal paroksena wlth iicaksate occurs m <;B. only
at 14 6 11. 2 (= BAU. 4. 2.2), EIsewhere the advel blal accusatJve parok-
lS used QB 2. 1. 2. 11; 3 3 3 1. 1. 11 (bis); 6 1. 2. 3, 6 7. 1.
23, 7. 4. 1 16, 7. 4 2. 12; 7. 5 1. 22 (bIs); 8 6. 2 13: 9 1. 1. 2, 9. 1 1
7; 9. 1 2.22 (biS), 9.1. 2. 36; 10.5 2.14, 10. e. 2, 2, 13 8 1 1 (biS)
2-3. atha yo garbho 'ntara 'sit so 'grir asrjyata, sa yad asya
sa'fvasya 'gram asrjyata tasmád agrir, agrir ha vaz, tam agn%?' üy
licak$ate paroksam, ... , atha yad aQru aSit so  
abhavad, ha vai, tam aQVa ity 'The embryo
which was within was born as Agri; because it was born as
suromit (agra) of tbis universe therefore (it is called) Agri; Agri
indeed he (really) is; him they cryptlCally call Agni; . . ; further-
more the tear (aQru) which had flown together, that became Ayru;
Ayru indeed it (reaIly) is; it tbey cryptICally call Ayva (horse)'.
QB. 6. 1. 1. 11.
4. sa yad ukha namal, 'tad vai devli etena karmanaz 'taya 'vrte
'mán [okan udakhanan, yad udakhanans tasmad utkho, 'tkhii ha vai,
fiirn ukhe 'ty iicak$ate 'Now as to its bemg called Ukha
(pan); by means of thlS rite (and) by means oí tblS procedure the
gods dug out these worldsj because they dug out (udakhanan)
therefore (tbe pan is realIy caBed) Utkha; Utkba indeed it (really)
is; it they cryptically call Ukha', QB. 6. 7 1. 23.
5. asau va aditya e$a rukma, e$a h1; 'mah sarvalt praja attrocate,
roco ha vai, tarh rukma ity acak$ate parok$am, ''fhe gold plate lS
(equivalent to) yonder sun, for he outsbines all tbese creatures;
Roca, indeed, it (really) iSj it they cryptically call Rukma'. QB.
7 4. 1. 10. .
, 6. sa yo 'pam rasa asú tam ürdhvam samudauhañs, tlim
puram akurvañs, tad yad asmai puram akurvañs tasmat
pÜ$karam ha vai, tat pU$karam ity   'What sap
{)f the waters there was that they gathered up on top, they made
it a stronghold for him; because they made a stronghold f?r bim
48
Apparent D1SJUnct Nornmabves. § 27, Ex 3, 7-13.
therefore it is (really called) Püekara; Püekara, indeed, it (really)
is; it they cryptically call Puekara (lotus Bower)' QB 7. 4. 1. 13.
7. tad yad ayya", 'tasyam ramyayarn tanvdrn deva ararnanta tasmad
dhlramyam, Jnramyam ha vai, tad dluranyam zty acak!}ate parolCí;arn,
'Because tbe gods were pleased wltb this pleasing forro of his
therefore it is (really) Hiramya; Hiramya, indeed, it (really) lS,
It they cryptically call HlraI).ya (gold)'. QB 7. 4. 1. 16.
8. yad abravid: adht7rVIn me 'ti tasmad dhürva, dhürva ha 1)a1,
tam darve 'ty acak!}ate parok$arn, 'Because he said: "He bath in-
Jured me", tberefore it is (really called) Dbürva; Dhürva, indeed,
it (really) IS; it they cryptically call Dürva (-grass)'. QB. 7. 4. 2. 12.
9-10. yad abravid: udabhal'$in me 't", tasmad udumbhara, udum-
1Jharo ha val, tam udumbara acak$ate parok$a'm, ... , uru me
karad itt tasmad ttrttkaram, urukararn ha vai, tad ulakhalam lly
.acak$ate paro7c$am, 'Because he said: "He hath lifted me out",
tberefore Jt is (really) Udumbbara; Udumbhara it (really) ¡s; It
they cryptically call Udumbara; ... ; (and because be saId:) "May
it make a wide (space) for me", therefore It is (reaUy) Urukara;
Urukara, mdeed, it (really) is, it they cryptically can Ulükhala
(mortar)'. QB. 7. 5. 1. 22.
11. tad yad etarn devam etena [annena] , famaya1is tasmac ehanta-
devatyarh, fantadevatyarh ha vai, tae ehatarudriyam 'tty aeak$ate
pm'ok$am, 'Because they appeased thls god by means of (food),
therefore it is (really) Qantadevatya; Qantadevatya, indeed, it
{really) is, it they cryptlCally call <;atarudriya'. <;B. 9. 1. 1. 2.
12. tad yad etam fatat;zr$anam rudram etena [annena] 't;amayañs
tasmae ehatafir$antdrar;aman'iyam, r;atat;ir$arttdrar;aman'iyarh ha va""
tae ehatarudriyam zty   'Because they appeased
this hundred-beaded Rudra by meallS of this (fopd), therefore lt
is (really) <;atayírearudrayamaníyaj <;ataylrearudra9amaniya, indeed,
it (rElally) is; It they cryptically call <;atarudriya'. 9B 9. 1. 1. 7.
13. atha yad abruvann avañ naf¡ kam agad   ta avakka abhavan,
avakka ha vm, ta avaka ity acak$ate   'N ow because they
said: "Downward hath our moisture gone", these Avakkas arose;
Avakkas, indeéd they (really) are; them they crypticaUy caU Ava.
kas (lotuses)'. 9B. 9. 1. 2. 22.
Oertel, The Syntax of Cases
49
§ 27, Ex. 3, 14-17 Apparent DIsJunct Nommabves.
14. iyam vai rathantaram, iyam u va lokanam I'asatamo,
'syarh hi 'me sarve rasa, rasamtamam ha Vat, tad, rathantaram dy
'The Ratbantara is (ldentical with) tlllS (earth),
for of (aH) these worlds this (earth) is the one most filled with
sap, for a11 these saps are (contained) in thls (earth); Rasamtama,
indeed, it (really) is; it tbey call QB. 9.
1. 2.36.
Cf. the mysbc connection of rasa wlth ratha GB. 1. 2. 21 tam vii etam rasam
santam ratha ity acaksate; and cf, for th = s, the readlllg TE. 2. 7. 15. 1 prasa-
vaya for prathamilya of AV. 7. 14.3 and the other paralIels.
15. [pra'l)ah] hi 'mah sarvah prajah tasyai 'te pra-
svalJ" sa yada svapdy 'nam ete pranah Sva tas-
mat svapyayo ha vai, tam svapna dy paroksam,
'For this (breatb) leads forth aIl creatures; these (other) breaths
(organs of seDse) are its OWD; llOW wben Olle sleeps then these
(other) breatbs, bemg its own, go unto this (breatb); tberefore it
(tbe state of sleepmg) is (really) Svapyaya; Svapyaya, illdeed, it
(really) is, it tbey cryptically call Svapna (sleep)'. QB. 10.6. 2. 14.
WJth athm 'na m efe p1anah svii aplyanti . cf Chand Up. 6. 8 1 yatrm
'tat   svap¡ti nlima satil Mumya tadá sampanno bhavati 8vam apito bhavatt,
tasmad enam svaplti 'ty ácaksate, H'am hy apilo bhavati, 'When namely aman
sleepeth, then, my dear, hath he beco me umted with the Real, he hath gone
unto (hlS) own, therefore they say of hlm' "He sleepeth'"
] 6. sa vat so 'tta 'gnir eva sa, tasmtn yat kzrh ca 'bhyada-
dhaty ahttaya eva 'sya ta, ahttayo ha vaz, ta ahutaya dy
'Now tbis eater is (ldentical witb) Agni; whatever they
put into tbis (Agni) that is (really) bis Ahitls, Ahitis, mdeed, they
(really) are I tbem tbey cryptlCally call Abuti8 (oblatlOlls)'. QB.
10. 6. 2. 2.
17. yo vai kar; ca mriyate sa r;avas tasma etad annam karotl,
tasmac chavannam, r;avannam ha vaz, tac chmar;anam
QmaQa u hai 'va nama pitr1Jam attaralJ" ... , tebhya etad
annam tasmac chmaQannam, QmaQannam ha vai, tae chma-
Qanam ity 'Whoever dies be is a corpse; for
him he prepares this food; therefore it is (realIy) QavanlJa; Qa-
vanna, indeed, it (really) is; it tbey cryptlcally call QmaQana (bu-
rial groulld), furthermore tbe Eaters among tbe Fatbers are Qma-
c;as by llame; . . .; for them be prepares tb1S food; ,therefore It
50
Apparent DlsJunct Nommatlves. § 27, Ex. 3, 18- Ex 5.
is Creally) Qmac;snna; Qmac;snna, indeed, it CrealIy) is; It they
cryptically call Qmaosna (burlal 'ground)'. QB. 13. 8. 1. 1.
18. sa t6 eva makhah sa tata indro makhavan abhavan,
makhavan ha tarh maghavan 'And he is
also Makha, he is V 1:;;1).U j thence Indra Makha van carne mto being j
Makhavan, indeed, he (really) IS, him they cryptically call
ghavan'. QS: 14. 1. 1 13.
4. In the following passage the words tyam ra(;anti and ra(;ii-
naym yüpar;akalal} and yüpat;akalac are to be construed as
three independent paratactical clauses '(Flrst) there is thls glrdle
rope here', '(Countmg upward) from the girdle rope (Eggeling:
'after tbe rope') there is the chip of the sacrlfiClal stake', and
'CCounting upward) froro the chip of the sacrificial stake (Egge-
ling: <after the ChIp') there IS the top ring'.
1 svargasyo   lokasya samarohanal} kriyate yad yapaQakala,
iyam ra(;ana, rafanayat yüpaQakalo, yüpaQakalác
svargarh lokam samat;nute, 'And tblS, VIZ. tbe chip of the sacrificial
stake, 18 made Ca means of) ascent to tbe heavenly world j first
there is this gírdle rope here, (counting upward) from the gírdle
rope there is tbe ChIP of the sacrificial stake, (countmg upward)
from the Cb1p of the sacrificial stake tbere is the top nngj froro
tbe top rmg he reacbes tbe beavenly world'. QB. 3. 7. 1 23.
Formally lt would be posslble to construe casalam as accusauve dependent
on samafnute and parallel to svargalh lokam, but the context makes it more
hkely that lS nommabve and the clause yüpa,akalac ca§alam runs
parallel wlth the two precedmg pamtactIcal clauses For casala as neuter cf.
TS. 6. 3.4. 7, K. 14 8 (p 207,9), 26.4 (biS, p. 126, 16 and 18), 26 6 (p. 129,7);
MS. 1 1 lo 8 (p 169, 18); 3. 9. 4, (p 119, 3). WIth casaldt bvargarn lokam sarnat;;nutc
cf K 2b. 4 (p 126, 16) casalitd vai devas svargarn lokam ayan.
5. The followmg passage contains tbe enumeration of fifteen
sets of Vlctims WhlCh is introduced by the verb alabhatej four-
teen of these are properly placed in ihe accusatlve, wlllle tbe last
item is loosely added as a paratactlCal nominative.
For sImIlar anacolouthlC constructlOns m Latin cf. FredIik Rorn, Zur
Gescblche der absoluten PartlZlpIdl·Konstruktlonen 1m Latelmschen, 1918,
p 68: 'Wlr konnen oft, besonders m Grabmschnften, eine Menge Tltel
Ulld andere Epllheta lO demselben Kasus [obllljUUS] aufemallder folgen
51
§ 27, Ex. 5-6 Apparent DisJunct NominatIves
sehen, bIs em neuer und wichhger Zusatz kommt, der dann oft im Nomma-
hv steht.' Horn refers to the collechons of KonJetzny in Wólfflin's Archiv,
15, p 308 and of Plrson, La langue des mscnptlOns latmes de la Gaule,
p 165
1. yad aQve paQün niyunakti yajñn eva tad yajñam arabhate 11
aQvam tüparam gomrgam ztz tan madhyame yapa alabhate, . . . 11
agneyam rarate purastat, .. 11 sarasvat'im   adha-
sttid ... 11 aQvzntiv adhortimau btihvoh, ., 11
Qytimam ntibhytim, " 1I smtryaytimau Qvetam ca ca par-
!{vayoh, " 11 lomar;asakthyau sakthyoh, . . . 11 vayavyam
r;vetam , zndraya svapasyaya vehatam yajiiasya sendra-
taym,. vamo, yajiio vaz ... , 'In tbat he bes
up the (Paryañgya-)vICtims to the borse he SeIzes the saenfiee In
the saerifiee; a borse, a hornless (he-goat), a hos gavaeus,-them
he takes (for slaughter and ties up) at tbe mldqle stake, .. ; a
blaek-neeked (he-goat) saered to Agni (he takes and ties up) to the
(horse's) forehead in front;. ,au ewe saered to SarasvatI (he
takes and tl€S up) beneath the (horse's) jaws, ... ; two (he-goats)
b1aek on the lower part of their body (and) saered to the
(he takes and ties up) to the (horse's) front-legs; .. ; a dark-
<loloured (he-goat) saered to Soma and (he takes and tíes
up) to the (horse's) navel;. ,a white and a b1aek (he-goat)
saered to Surya and Yama (he takes and tles up) to the (horse's)
flanks; ... , two (he-goats) wIth shaggy hind-1egs saered to
  (he takes and tles up) to the (horse's) hind-1egs; ... ; a
white (he-goat) saered to Vayu (he takes and ties up) to the
(horse's) tall; ., ; for Indra tbe Active (he takes and ties up) a
GOW who is wont to east her ealf, in order to secure a union of
the sacrifice with Indra; (finally there is) a dwarfisb (he-goat) sa-
ered tú for lS (identieal with) the sacnfice'. QB. 13.
2 2.1-9.
cr. the parallel passage TB. 3 8. 23. 1-3 where a simIlar IIst conslsts of
accusabves only dependent on and iilabhate.
6. In glússing the first two words of the two Mantras VS. 37.
12 a!{rutir uttarato, dhatur adhtpatye rayaspo?am me and vidhrtir
brhaspater adhipatye vacam me the QE. 14. 1. 3. 22
and 23 has
52
Apparent DlSJUnct Nominative, § 27, Ex. 7.
1. uttarata aQravayann uttarata ity 'tad aha.
2. Vldhrtir uparl$tad itt, vzdharayann upari$tad evai 'tad alta.
Eggehng notes the masculine gender of the two particlples aQra-
fJayan and vidharayan (while the VS. invocation refers to the
Earth) and further, refernng to Mah¡dhara's gloss Oil the VS.
M!liltras, suggests that the two partlCiples may be in tended to
sigmfy: 'Where (the priest) calls for the to the north',
and 'Where Brhaspatt disposes on high'. But it seems more li-
kely that the BrahmaI).a, mechanically followmg the case of the
two nouns aQrut!l,t and vzdhrtlk, really intends to equate them with
the two masculme pllrtiClptes in the nominative.
7. At QB. 3 1. 1. 8 the Madhyandina recension reads
1. tam [Qalam] va etam partQrayantl ned abhwar$ad itz nv eva
 
Accordmg to Eggeling's note the Kal;lva recension omits üí nv
eva   and reads: 'Lest it should freeze in winter, lest it
should pour in the rallly season, and lest there should be hurning
heat in the summer'.
As the passage stands in the Madhyandina recension zt", belongs
both to the preceding ned-clause which it closes (Delbruck, Alt-
ind Syotax, § 178, p. 317, 2 and 317, 13-21) and to the fotlowing
nv eva (Delbruck, Altind. Syntax, § 255, p. 517, 5-6 and
§ 263, p. fJ36, 31-34); ef. a similar haplology at JUB. 3. 13.6-7).
Then would appear to be aeeusative of time (Delbrúck,
Altmd Syntax, § 117, p. 170-171), ef. <;lB. 1. 5. 3. 11 tad
u}itam wa 'nnarn lCcharnanarn caratz, 'This (vermin), being prmsed
as it were, moves about during the ratny season seeking food';
12 ta vardhante, 'These (plants) grow durlllg
the ramy season'.
The passage would then mean: 'This same (hut) they cover over
lest it should rain In (upon the saerificer while be is undergoing
the initiation eeremony); so (it is done) during the rain y season
at any rate'.
Eggling slmilarly 'They enelose it on every side Iest it should rain
upon (the sacflficer whlle brlllg consecrated); this, at least, (IS the reason for
doing so) ID the faIny season'.
53
§ 27, EX.8-9A. Apparent DIsJunct NommatIves
8. The passage YB. 4. 6. 9. 11
ta uttarasya havtrdhanasya jaghanyayéirh kubaryam sama 'bhiga-
yanti sattrasya rddhir
is translated by Eggeling: 'At the hinder shaft of the northern
Soma-cart they sing the Saman (called) "The CompletlOn of the
Session".' But sattrasya rddhzr is not the name 01' the Saman
in apposition to sama but the Pratiká of VS 8. 52 sattrasya rddhir
así as at KY. 12 4. 11 and it is correctly listed as such for our
passage in Bloomfield's Concordance. Cf. TS. 7. 4. 5 4; 7. 5. 4. 2.
9. At MS. 2. 2. 6 (p. 19, 13) Schroeder's text reads
deva anyo 'nyasya QrI$ te tZ'l!hamanaQ caturdha vyudakraman
WhlCh should be emended to
deva anyo 'nyasya 'h$fhamana
v
caturdha vyudakraman,
'The gods, not yielding preemmence to one another, went apart
in four directions'.
cr. the same sentence at 1I1S. 3. 7. 10 (p. 90, 1) where two mss 1 ead !tr(llóte
and one ros. for $chroeder's text rolsprmts !tcail!thye and
OIDJts the avagraha before tlsthamtiná!t.
The paralIel passages have' QB. 3. 4 2. 1 te [devah] caturdha vyadravann anyo
'nyasya !triyti attsthamtinah (wJtb V sthii c. geml. personae et dar reJ); TS. 2.
2.11.5; 6.2.2 t te (deváh1 'nyo 'nyasmat Jalsthyaya 't¡sthaJILilnil¡; caturdM (TS.
6. 2. 2. 1 'ttsthamániill pancadhil) vyakrilman (with V stha e ddt rel et personae).
The locat. re! in (he MS. passages IS paralleled by the Qloka 99 15 27
11 te samyañco silkam sal'iltayah \
devarataya tasthtre Jyatsthye !trais(hye ca gathtniih 11
where the parallel passage AB. 7. 18 8 has the datives dhrtyat !tI'Utsthyaya for
the <;9 10catJ ves Jyaisthye !t' azstltye.
The different construchons of V sthii 'concede, Yleld' are discussed
under Dativa.
r Addition from the AraI;lyakas and  
9 A. trayo dharmaskandha: yaJíio 'dhyayanarh danarn prathama[¿
!! tapa eva dmtfyo, brahmacary acaryakulavasi trtiyo 'tyantam atmanam
acaryakule 'vasadayan, 'There are three grades of Dharma: sacrifice,
study (of the Veda), (alrns-)giving are the first (stage); penance is
the secolld (stage); a theological student living in the house of
(his) teacher is the thlrd (stage), - (a student naroely) who great-
ly (?) mortifies his (flesh) in tbe house of (bis) teacher'. Chand.
Up. 2. 23. 1-2. Here the nominatives brahmaeary
54
Anacolouthic Relahve Clauses. §28; §29,Ex 1
and atmanam acaryakule 'vasildayan are formally adapted to the
preceding nommutIves yaJño 'dhyayanarh danam and tapah and
they are furthermore used with a shghtly illogical pregnancy, for
stnct logic would requrre III their stead: 'Life of a theologicaI
student hvmg in the house of (bis) teacher IS the thlrd (stage),
-life of a student namely who greatIy (?) mortifies his (flesh) in
the house of'(his) teacher'.
Bllhtlingk dele tes the worus atyantam " avasadayaYl wJth the note 'Erwelst
sÍl'h durch sem Nachhmken nach tl'ttyo als G1osse'. But cf Chand. Up
2. 19.2 where maJ)no na   va. is slmllarly added after vratam
The PW. renders atyantam for our pa5sage by 'das ganze Leben hmdUlch'
(and so lJeussen followmg Qañkara ye'ivaJJivam); but It belongs perhaps better
lo no. 3 'm hohem Grade' for which meamng the PW. quoles Katha Up. 1. 17
and gvetaf(v. Up.4. 11 14. Nelther atyantam nor the (ausative of v' sad + ava
wlth an obJect accusatlve occur elsewhere ID the Brahmana prose. J
Appendix n.
The Anacolouthic Construction of Relative CIauses.
§ 28. As the present work deals with tbe relation of parts
of the same clause to oneanother the anacolouthic cODstructioD
of relative clauses does DOt properly come wltbin its scope since
that belongs to a discussion of the relatlOn of clauses to each other
WIthout attempting to present a complete collection of tbe materIal
tbe foIlowing instances are given for the sake of comparison with
tbe disjunct uses of the nominative case.
The chief cbaracteristic of the following passages is the loose
connection of a relative clause (introduced by ya) with tbe main
clause. The general type ls dlscussed by Delbrück,·Altind Syntax,
§ 276, p. 561 and § 282, p. 568 under tbe heading 'DIe Ver-
bindung ist ungenau'. The relative pronoun ya is in these instances
'equivalent in meaning to a conditional conjunction plus an in-
'definite pronoun: 'who' = 'lf any one'.
In English th¡s type IS represenled by. 'As who should say: "1 aro SIr Orac1e, I
And when 1 ope roy hps let no dog bark'" (Merchant ofVemce, Act J, Scene 1).
§ 29. A. The Relative Clause has a Finite Verbo
1. tad vai supütam yam ghrtena 'pünan, 'That is good cleansing
if they cleansed. one with ghee' (htera1Jy: 'Tbat lS well cleansed
whom they cleansed with ghee').. QB. 3. 1. 2. 11.
55
§ 29, Ex '2-7. AnacolouthlC Relative Clauses.
2 tad vai supiZtam yam devak savita punat, 'That is good clean-
smg if god Savitr should cIeanse one'. QB. 3. 1. 3. 22.
3. tad 'tat iva yo dhenvanaduhayor   'That
may be called (iva) omnivorousness if one should eat (the meat)
of a cow or an ox'. QE. 3 1 2. 21.
4. tad vai samrddharh ya,m devafi, súdhave karmane ju§ante, 'That
lS assured 8uccess If the gods favour one for the good work'.
QB.3 6.4 8.
6. a) etad vaz tapo yo diksztva payovrato 'sat, 'That is penance if
one, after having be en initlated, lives on fast-mJlk'. QB. 9. 6. 1. 2.
b) etat khalu vava tapa ity ahur yak svam dadat't, 'That indeed 18
called penan ce if one give8 away his own property'. TS 6. 1. 6. 3.
6. yad rtltyajanam anuva¡latkuryad asamsthitan ,tan samsthapa-
yet, .. , ya enam tatra bruyad (GB. yas tarh tatra bruyad): asa m-
,tan 'ti tatha syat,
'If one were to utter tbe Anuva$at-call in connection wltb the
Seasonal Yajas he would put an end to the endless seasons; .•
If anyone then were to say of him: "He hath put an end to
the endless seasons, there will be abad year", It would sureIy
come to pass so'. AB. 2. 29. 7 j GB. 2. 3. 7.
The readmg oC the GB. text In tbe Blhl Ind. samat1stht I yo duhkham anu-
lihavtsyat'i (tbe mss. read samat1stiyo duhsvamam and samat¡stipahuh svamam}
must be emended, as is done In Gaastra's editlOn, to agree wJth AB.
The kh In duhkham of the Blb1. Jnd stands for s, cf. Wackernagel, AIt-
¡nd Gr. J, p 136, § 118 Conversely GB 2 b. 12 (Blbl. Ind. var lect)
has n!libiya for nyÚñkha. At KB. 2. 9 (p 8, 13 -14) all the mss. except
M. read vtsfdati for v1khidati; at Qáñkh. Ar. 9. 7 (p. 316, 30 KeJth's ed.
of tbe Ait Ar. and JRAS 1908, p.374) les'ih IS undoubtedly an error for
lekhrf¡, cf. VS. 5 43; K 3 2 (p 23, 18); 26. 3 (p. 125, 9), etc. and TS. 1 3.
5. 1, 6. 3. 3 3, etc. At MS. 3. 8. 3 (p 95, 4) limukhaf¡ IS read for ltmusah,
cf K.25 1 (p 104, 1), Calalld WZKM.23, p 55. In tbe YaJus gañkb Q.
6. 3. 8 the maJorlty of the mss reads 'sanah for avma 'khanah, at
17 15 4 ásanam for akhanam, and at 17. 5 5 the varo lect. has lisanáya
for iikhaniiya.
7. yad dvzdevatyanam asamsthitán pranan sam-
sthapayet; .. , ya enatn tatra brüyád asamsthttan pranan
prana enam hásyatí 'ti tatha syat, 'If one were to
utter the Anuvaeat-caIl in connection with the Dvidevatya (cups)
5()
AnacoloulhlC RelatJve Clauses § 2[1, Ex 8 -12
he would put an end to the endless breathsj , If one then were
to say of hlm: "He hath put an end to the endless breaths, breath
will leave him", it would surely come to pass so'. AB. 2. 28. 3.
8. prajÜ.i ay?!r vajras, tad yad dhota 'ntarena 'gm eta
'gura vajrena yajamanasya pranan v¡yad, ya enam tatra brüyad'
agura vajrena pranan vyagat, prana enam hasyatl 'ti
r,¡ofvat tatha syat, 'The Dvidevatya (cups) are (ldentical with) the
breatbs, the Agur-formula is (ldentical w1tb) a thunderbolt; if the
Hotr-priest were to pronounce tbe Agur-formula between (the
offermg of the two cups) be ",ould separa te the sacrIficer's breatbs
by means of the Agur-formula (whieh lS ldentical wlth) a thunder-
boltj if one then were to say of him: "By means of the Agur-
formula (which is identical with) a thunderbolt he hath separated
the sacrificer's breaths, breath will leave hlIU", it would surely
come to pass so'. AB. 2. 28. 5.
9. yas tam tatha brüycit : prcincid citmanam antaragan na
't2 tatha ha syat, 'If one were to say of him' "He hath separated
the self from breath, he will not hve", lt would be so'. RE. 12. 7.
10. sa yo 'tra yas tam tatra bruyad: ar,;anto
pranan asya (so tbe mss. LM.; Lindner's text
p1'anant sa) 1Jyagan na 'h tatha ha syad, ya u vai na
yas tam tatra bruyat: prano   pranad atmanam
antaragan na 'tz tatlHt ha syad, 'Now if one were to eat
(of ít),-if one then were to say of such an one: "Unappeased is
the food over which the Anuval?at-call hath not been pronouncedj
he hath separated bis breaths; he will Dot live", it would be so;
if, on tbe other hand, one were not to eat (of it},-if one then
were to say of such an one; "Breath is food, he hath separated
the selffrom breath; he will not live", it would be so'. KB. 13.9.
11 su yo 'tra 'vanantarh brüyat: pra!lad tttmanam antaragan -na
'ti tatha ha syat, 'If oue tben were to say of hiro who
breathes in: "He hath separated the self froro breath, he will not
live", Jt wouId be so'. RB. 23. 6.
12. ya enam tatra brayad: anuvartmá nvá ayam hotá samagasya
'Mat, ... , cyo§'Yata áyatanad ztt r,;aQvat tatha syat, 'If oue then were
to say of him: "This Hotr·priest hath become subservient to the
57
§ 29, Ex. 13-19. AnacolouthlC Relabve Clauses.
Samap-smger, ... ; he w1l1 be pushed off from (his) place", it
would surely come to pass so'. AB. 2. 22. 3.
13. vas tam tatra brayac: ztz tatha ha syat, 'If one then were
to say of him: "He will be pushed off", it would be so'. KB 19.4.
14. ya enarh tatra brüyad: agmm agmm zti val, pratyapady,
agntm apatsyati 'tt fru;vat tatha syat, 'If one were to say of hlm:
"Commencement hath been made ';ith (recourse hath been had
to) 'Agni', 'Agni'; he will fall into the fire", it would surely come
to pass so'. AB. 4. 7. 7.
The passage refers to the inJunctJon not to use RV 10. 7. 3 agntm manye
pitaram agnim ltpzm as mitial slrophe (prallpad); pmtyapadi IS then used wllh
the double rneamng of 'use as mItlal strophe, hegm wlth' and 'have recourse to'.
15. sa yo 'tra 'vanantam brüyan: mrtyor asyam apati na jWt$yat't
'ü tatha ha syat, 'If one then were to say of him who breathes
in: "He hath fallen mto the maw of Death, he will not hve", it
would be so'. KB. 14. 2.
Lmdner's text illlsprmts apat! for apati
16. ya enam tatra brüyad: vacak kutena yajamanat paQün nirava-
dhIr apaQum enam akar itt QaQvat tatha syat, eIf one then were
to say to him (viz. the Hotr-prlest): "Thou hast cut off the cattIe
from the sacrIficer by the hammer of speech; thou hast deprived
mm of cattle", it would certainly come to pass so'. AB. ti. 24 13.
17 ya enam tatra brüyad' etabhyam devatabhyarn yajamanasya
pranan vyagat prana enam hasyati 'ti faQvat tatha syat, 'If one then
were to say of him: "From these two divinitles he hath cut off
the breaths of the sacrificer, breath wIlI forsake him", it would
surely come to pass so'. AB. 6. 26. 6.
18. ya enarh tatra brayad: yajarnanam agnau ... ,
mari$yati yajamana iti r;aQvat tatha syat, 'If one were to say of him:
"Thou hast cast the sacrlficer into the fire; _ .; the sacrificer will
die", it would certainly come to pass so'. AB. 7. 26. 6.
19. ya ahltagnir upavasathe 'r;ru kurv'ita (2 upavasathe 'vratyam
apadyeta; 3 amavasyam paurnamas;¡;rh va 't'tyat) lea tatra  
'If one who has piled the ñre sbould sbed tears on the eve of
the sacrifice (should do anything contrary to his vow on the eve
of the sacrifice; sl;lOuld pass over the ceremonies of the new mOOD
or of tbe fun moon), what expiation is there?' AB. 7. 8. 1-3.
58
AnacolouthlC RelatIve Clauses § 29, Ex. 20-24
20. ya ahitagnir agrayanena 'nislva navannam   ka tatra
'If one who has piled the fire should eat new food
without having made the first-fruit offering, what expiation is
tbere?' AB. 7 9 1.
21. yas tam tatra bruyat: samgatam va ayam bhümanam devanam
patn'tr sabham asya patny   'ti tatha ha
syat, 'If one then were to say of him: "He hath led down the
(divine) Wlves to tbe host oí tbe assembled gods (?), his wife
will go down to the assembly", that would be so'. KB. 7. 9.
The form samgatam occurs al50 m the precedmg clause yatha samgatfim bhü-
manam devanam patnir abhyavanayed eva1h tat The short form salllgatilm for
samgatanam would be unique and extremely CUrIOUS for the Brahmana prose,
it 15 rare even m RV, cf. Whltney, Gr. 329, f (m fine); Oldenbelg, SBE.46,
p. 319, ZDMG 55, p. 289, Rlgveda Noten, Index 1, p.425; n, p. 3í,}, Lanman,
Noun·InflectlOn, p. 354; Macdonell, Ved. Gr. p 262, § 372, B.utholomae, Stud 1,
p 48. The only parallel would be Att Ar 2. 1 5 (p. 104, 11 KeJth) prahztam,
lf mterpreted wJth Sdyana standing for prahlttinam, but te KeIth'5 note 5,
p.207 who lS mchned to dellve Jt from a hase prahit 'Impeller'.
For sarhgattim Kelth suggests 'samgatzm or sathgatam, as a noun', Perhaps
sarhgatam bhümanam 'to the assembled multttude of the gods'?
22, sa yo 'tra 'nurúpam kurvantam brúyad: apnya enam bhratr-
1Jyah pratyakhyayt9ljata tatha ha syat, 'If one then were to say
of him who recites the antistrophe: "Ris unfriendly rival wlll
gainsay him", that would be so'. KB. 17. 1.
23. tad yad enam [adhvaryum] nirbruvantam bruyad: anlruktam
devafam niravocat prana enam hasyafi 'ti fatlta hat 'va syat, 'If
one were to say of this (Adhvaryu-priest) who pronounces (the
Yajus) distinctly: "Re hath pronounced the indistmct divinity
dlstmctly, breath will forsake him", that would be even so'.
QB. 10 3. 5. 15
24. yo 'nam [adhvaryum] tatra brüyat: nva ayam
adhvaryur ya}arnanasya bhratrvyam al"at pratyudyaminam
'f'Varo ha tathai 'va syat, 'If one were to Bay of this (Adhvaryu-
priest): "This Adhvaryu-priest hath made the spIteful riVal of the
sacrificer his equaI (and) a match (for hlm)", it would presumably
be even so', QB. 11. 4. 2. 1.
The thlrd person singular of the root-aorist akat lS confined to QB. (3. 1. 2.
21; 11. 4. 2 1; 9, 12); Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 261, b, note (m fine), p 306,3
explains It ab an analoglCal formatIOn after the second person akaf¡.
59
§ 29, Ex. 25-27. AnawloutblC Relahve Clauses.
For a very doubtful sImIlar formabon ádat (RV.5 32. 8) frolll ,1 dr
'spht' + a cf. Oldenberg, RIgveda-Noten, I, p. 328, Ime 2 from below.
A very curlOus form aklt occurs m five passages of JB., viz. 1. 204 (Caland,
Auswahl, p 81) anustubht nilnadam [sama] aklt = 3 80 (where Whltney's trans-
cnpt lead5 akrn befo re followíng gauriv'itau, whlle Caland glves aklan as the
readmg of hls mss for thls passage); 1. 234 (Caland, Auswahl, p. (1) na vat mdma
ya/la me putram akrt; 3.193 (Caland, AuswahI, p. 267) indro vava me 'dam
Ittham akrt, 3. 234 (Caland, Auswahl, p.278í anrtam grhapatzr akrt (where the
ms, before followmg na, reads akrañ, but the emendatlOn to akrn lS patently
called lor by the other passages). Such a form alert, wlth unstrengthened root,
however, is qUlte anomalous (WhItney, Gr. § 831, a); RV dart from v' dr 'spIIL'
wouId lead one to expect "'ahart, cf. Waekernagel, Altmd Gr. I, § 261, a, p. 304,
35-305, 3
For tb.e eonfuslOn of r and ar cf. RV. 1. 156. 1 ardhyah but TB. 2. 4.
3 9 ldhyah, VS. 12.65 and VB. 7 2. 1. 15 avicrtyam hut MS. 2. 7. 12
(p. 91, 2 where the Padapatha ms, however, has avzcrtyam) and K. 16 12
(p. 234, 10) avicartyam; RV. 10. 155. 5 and VS Madhy. 35 18 ah, sata but
VS Kanv. aharsata; AV 10. 1 22 and 12.3.9 mr(lztr for RV. (passlm)
mardtfr.
Cf. for the eonfuslOn of r and ra below § 49, Ex. 14, Rem.
For the genderless, petrIfied 'il}vatah er. Weber, Ind_ Stud. 9, p. 279; 13, p 111
LleblCh, BB 11, p. 301, Delhl ück, Altllid. Syntax, § 53, p. 87, 31, Spel]er, Sansk.
Syntax, § 3Q2, p, 309, 1. For the construellon ef. Delbruck, AltlDd. Syntax,
p 342,25 - 343, 15, § 193, 1.
25. yo hai 'nam tatra brayac: chülau nva ayam adhvaryur bahü
akrta   't;¡; 'fvaro ha tathm 'va syat, 'If one were
to say of blm: "Tbis Adbvaryu bath made his arms spears, he
will have spearhke arms", it would presumably be even so'. QB. 11.
4. 2.4. The like construction occurs also in the simIlar passages
QB. 11. 4.2. 9; 13; 14; 11. 5. 4. 13; 14; 11. 7 2.4; 12. 4. 1. 4,
12 4.2 7; 9; 12.4.3.6; 7; 8; 12.5.1. 17; 14.4.2.19 (BÁU 1.
4. 19 Madhy. = 8 KaJ;lv.).
26. sa yo hM 'naJh tatra 'nuvyaharet: paran asmad yajño 'bhüd
#i   ha yat tathaz 'va syat, eIf' one then were to curse him.
"The sacrifice hath turned away from him", it would be likely
that it would be even so'. QB. 2. 1. 4. 19.
For the eonstruction.of ¿({varah 'Y1th yad ef. Delbrück, Altmd. Synt § 193, 1,
p.342, !iJ7-31.
27. ye brahmar;alt fU{!ruvaitso 'nucana vidvaitso yajayanlt sai 'va
'hilaZa, 'If learned, instructed, knowing Bra:hmaJ;las perform the
sacrifice there 18 no failure' QB. 3. 1. 1. 5.
60
Anacolouthic Relative Clauses. § 29, Ex. 28-32 B
28. ye va asmzñ loke ) gnihotram ajuhvato nai 'vamvido 'fradda-
dhana yaJante tad a!)raddham gacchati, yac chraddadhanas tac chrad-
dham, 'If any in thlS world, not offering the Agmhotra (and) not
knowing thus, sacrifice without faith,-that (sacrifice of tbeirs) goes
unto Non-Faith; if (they sacrifice) wltb faith that (Agnihotra goes)
unto Fmth'. JB. 1. 43 (JAOS. 15, p. 236-237).
Note' that the relatIve pronoun ye 111 the first half corresponds to the con-
JunctJon yad 111 the second.
29. dvav atW{(tra1t dve catvar'tñ!)e !)ate ukthy-
anam itt nu ya ukthyant svarasama upayanh 11 atha ye '
dvadaQafatam dve catustritiQe Qate ukthyanam dvadaQa
  'Now If any enter upon (the performance
oí) the Svarasamans as Ukthyas, there are two Atiratras, one
bundred and SIX Agmetomas, two hundred and forty Uktbyas,
but if any (perform tbem) as Agnit>tomas, there are one bundred
and twelve Agni¡;;tomas, two hundred and thirty-four Uktbyas,
twelve SoQ.ayins, (and) sixty SaQ.abas'. QB. 12.2. 1. 6-7.
30. ubhayam hai 'tad bhavaf't p1til ca putrar; ca prajapati!) ca
, gnu; ca ' gnif ca prajapattf ca pra)i:tpatu; ca devii!) ca devar; ca
prajapattr; ca ya evam veda, 'rrhis, if one knows thus, becomes botb
fatber and son, Prajapati and Agm, Agni and Prajapati, PraJa-
pati and the gods, tbe gods and PrajapatI'. <;lB. 6. 1. 2. 27.
31. tam antt vyrddhlm yar; ca veda yaf ca na ta ubhav [agm]
,altatul¡, ... , 'After tbis fail ure , wbetber oue knows (it) or not,
tbese two (fires) say: .. .' <;lE. 12. 4. 4. 6; 7
32. yo va apanabhun agnzm cinute yajamanasya nabhim anupra-
myah, sa enam i!)varo hiñsitolt 'Sbould one (viz. an Adhvaryu-priest)
pile tbe fire-altar witbout a navel, it (tbe tire) enters tbe navel
of the sacrificer in consequence (tbereof); it is hkely to inJure
hlm'. TS. 5. 2. 8. 7.
r Additions from the .AraJ?yakas and U panieads.
32 A. sa ya enam rchad eva ta devata upasrtya brüyat: . . ., 'If
anyone sbould barm hIID he, taking refuge with these divinities,
should say: .. .'. JUB. 2. 12. 5.
32 E. ya avtr bhavaty anye 'sya lokam upayantz, 'If one (viz. oue
61
§ 29, Ex. 32 C-32 G Anaeolouthle Relabve Clauses.
who has died) becometh manifest (= reappears), others go to bis
world'. JUB. 3. 29. 5.
32 C. sa yo ha va amur devala upaste . . . diiriipa va eta dur-
anusarnprapya wa, 'If one worships yonder dlVinibes ... they are
of evIl form, illfficult to be completely attained, as it were'.
JUB. 3. 33. 3.
32 D. yas tvai 'tarh¿ (Delbrück's emend. for tve   bruyan:
murdha te 'ft murdha te Vlpatet, 'If one were to say to
thee: "Thy head will fiy asunder", thy head would fiy asunder'.
Chand. Up 1. 8. 6; 8.
32 E. sa ya 2dam avzdvan agmhotram juhott yatha ' ñgaran apohya
bhasmam j1lhuyat tádrk tat, 'If one, without knowing this, offers
the Agmhotra tbat would be as ir one baving removed the coals
should offer in the ashes'. Chand. Up. 5.24. 1.
32 F. asya saumya rnahato vrksasya yo mule 'bhyakanyad jivant
sraved, yo rnadhye 'bhyahanyad jivant sraved, yo 'gre 'bhyahanyad
jtvant sravet, 'If, my dear, one were to strIke at the root of thIS
great tree [If one were to stnke at the middle; if one were to stnke at
the top]' It would bleed but continue to hve'. Chand. U p. 6. 11. 1.
32 G. yo yo hy annam atti yo 1 retal} tadb7tuya eva bhavatz,
'For whosoever (it is who) eats the food (and) who (soever it is
who) casts the seed,-a suchhke being comes into existence (i. e.
the nature of the being wlllch is to be reborn depends on the
nature of the bemg which begets it)'. Chand. Up. 5. 10. 6.
1. Bóhtlingk m hlS translatlOn and m hlS dlSCUSSIOU of the passage In Be-
nehte uber die Verhandl. d. komgl. saehs. Ges. d. WlSS. 1897, p. 89 renders: 'Ja
Jeder, der Spelse gemeat und Samen vergleat, wird von neuem zu diesen (d. l. zu
Spelse und Samen' = 'Elll Mann, der nur ¡at und erzeugt, verdlent kem besseres
Sehlcksal') and expressly notes 'Bel bhavat, kann mcht an em neues SubJekt ge-
daeht werden'. But apart from the fact that the numerous examples of ana-
colouthlC construetlOns of relahve clauses olTer abundant 'parallels for a change
of subJect a companson Wlth the parallel passages EAU. 6. 1 Madhy. = 6. 2
KaI,lv. makes Bohthngk's intelpretatlOn lmposslble.
Both recenSlOns of HAU and the Chand. Up. aglee that lhe souls to be reborn
1 Ram;tnuJa on Vedanta Sulras 3. 1. 26 (Bombay Sanskflt SerIes LXVIII, p.581,
19) reads yo yo retal;¡, siñcati, wIlh repelibon of the relah ve pronoun as in the
pl'ecedmg clause.
62
Anacoloutbic Relatlve Clauses. § 29, Ex. 32G.
descend m lhe form of ram 1 (BAu. vrstim Chand. Up pra-
varsanti
2
). The next step m BAU. IS, that when tbey have reached the earth
they become food (vrsteh prthzvim te prthivith priipya 'nnam
bhavantt) , m the Chand Up. the same idea 1S expressed by an enumeratian of
the kmds of plants m the shape of whlch the descendmg sauls are
rebarn on earth (ta iha vriMyava ttl Jayante) In
the descrlphan of the final stage Ihe three texts dIfIero a) The MádhyandIDa
recenSlOn of BAU. sunply and very briefly says Ihat 'they thus lurn round ID a
clrcte m proper sequEmce' (ta evam eva 'nuparivartante) i. e they follow the course
of saritsara (cr. the opposIte manavam iivartam na 'vartante of those who are
leleased from samsiira at Chand. Up. 4. 15. 6, and BAU. 6. 1. 18 Madhy = 6.2
15 K;tnv. tes{j,¡n na punarávrttzh) The statement Ihat tbe food consumed IS first
converted mto semen and thence mto the embryo IS omitted. b) The Kanva
recenSlOD of BAU slates these facts wantmg m tbe other recension m the phraseo-
logy oí the pañcágmmdya (gB.14 9.1 19 = BAU 6. 1. 19 Madhy = 6,2 16
Kanv., Chlind. Up. 5. 7-'8, JB 1. 46 [quoted below, § 51, Ex. 7])3: 'Theyagain
are offered ID the man·fire, thence they are born ID the woman-fire, f1SlDg up
toward the worlds they thus turn round in a clrcle ID proper sequence' (te punab
hüyante tato yosagnau Jiiyante lokan pratyuttháymas
4
ta evam evá
'nupanvartante). e) The Chand. Up. adds here two eon5lderabons which are
peculiar to that text. a) In the first place (5. 10 7) It makes the nature of the
reblrth to depend on the condud (carana) during the previous (human) eXisten ce
(tud ya raman'iyacarana ha yat te ramaniyiim yonim ápadyeran
bráhmanayonim vá kl!atriyayonim vá 5 vait;yayomm vá, 'tha ya kapuyacaraná
ha yat te kapüyám yomm lipadyerañ chvayontm va sükarayonim va can-
da/ayonun vii). But between thls statement of the factors on whlch a happy
or unhappy rebirth depends (section 7) and the statement that the deseelldmg
soul IS reborn as food (sectlOn 6) which, we have to supply, 18 eonverted mto
semen and thenee mto the embryo, the aulhor of the Ch;tnd. Up. mserts the
remark that the transltion from the plants to human form IS more dlfficult than
1 The precedlDg steps are in BAU. 1. aklir;a, 2 viiylt, in Chand. Up. l. ákiira,
2. viiyu, 3 dhüma, 4. abhra, 5. megha.
2 The plural IS BOhtlmgk's plaUJ;lble cODJecture, see below 2, d.
3 For the sequen ce Eal'th-Man-Woman-Chlld ef. gB. 11. 6. 2. 8-10 te
[iihutf] tmám amr;atah¡ te purUllam aVtfatah, te strtyam avi¡:atab,¡ tatah putro
Jáyate.
4 cr. 98. 11. 6. 2.4; 10 lokah pratyutthiiy¿ and JB. 1. 46 tasyii iihuter hutayat
purufo 'mum lokam sambhavatt, so 'sya lokah punarutthay¡ (the m8S. punarut-
thiiyai) bhavati.
5 cr. JUB 3 28. 4 where, without any reference to previous conduct, the belDg
whlCh IS to be reborn selects (ef Wmdlsch, Benchte d. kgl sachs Ges. d. WlSS.
1907, p. 124, note 1) the famJ!y (ku/a) ID WhlCh he desires to be reborn (sa yadí
kamayeta punar ,ha. 'Jiiyeye   yasmm kule 'bhidhyayed yadi brahmanakule yadt
raJakule tasminn ajiiyate).
63
§ 29, Ex 32G.
Anacolouthic Relative Clauses.
the previous transition from the moon to space (iíkií,a), lo the wmd (vayu), to
smoke (dhüma), to mlst (abhra), to the cloud (megha), to the lam  
and to rice, harley, herhs, trees, sesamum and beans (vr'i,htyava
patayas tllamiisah): ato khalu durmsprapattaram.
1
The exact nature of thls
difficu\ty must be contamed in the followmg yo yo hy annam attt yo
retah s!ñcatt tadbhüya eva bhavati The Import of these words must be' In
order to etlect a reblrth at aH the plants 111ust be eaten and con verted into
semen, for, faIling thIS, the soul WhICh IS to be reborn lS forced to contmue its
plant-exlstence, but morder to be bom as a human bemg Ü IS further neces-
sary that the plants musl be consumed as food by a human ma!e, if, on the
olher hand, the planls happen to be eaten by an amma! a reblrth m ammal
shape ensues; cf Qankara ad loe tathli hi purusat jayate gor gavakrtil'
eva, na Jatyantarakrtts, yuktam tadbhüya eva bhavati 'ti. The pomt
whlCb tbe autbor of tbe Chand. Up. wants to emphaslze is, that whereas m tbe
plevlOus serIes of tl'ansformabons (from space to the plants) each transformabon
lS uneqUlvocally determmed, III the last transformatlOn from the plants to the
embl yo a leblrth in human sbape does not necessar¡ly take place but IS con-
dItlOned on the food's bemg eaten by aman
There is no lUconsIstency between thls statement and the statement m
sectlOn 7 tbat lhose who have led a putnd lIte m a prevlOus (human)
eXlslence are hkely to be concelVed in the womb of a bltch 01 SOW. For
tbls need slmply imply that In thelr case the plants are consumed by
suchllke ammals.
The transformabon lmplied in tadbhüya eva bhavati, no matter how these words
may be parsed (see below, 2) must refer to the soul whlC_h descends for reblrtb.
Of the western translators e. g Max: Muller
2
, Deussen
3
, Thlbaut', and Hertel ¡;
1 Read so accordmg to the plausible emendatlOn of Lüders, Sltzungsber. d:
preuss Ak. d. WlSS 1922, P 237, ef. Wackernagel, AIUnd. Gr. II, 1, § 75, f, P 176,
where VS. 15. 8 prat¡pád and a1l1tpád may be added The root pad + llis-pra
'to move forward out of somethmg' IS the opposIIe of pad + abhl-nts 'to move
out of one's present state mto another state', 'to be transformed mto' QB. 14 9.
1 19 (BAU 6 1 19 Madhy. = 6.2 16 Kanv.)i Chand Up 8.4 2.
• 'For whoever the persons may be tbat eat the food and beget otTsprmg,
be hencefortb becomes hke tbem'.
a 'Denn nur wenn ¡bn eJner gerade als Spelse verzebrt und als Sa.men ergrefit,
so kan n er slch daraus weller entwlCkeln', l!l rus translatlOn of Qañkara's Com-
mentary to the Vedanta Sutras' 'Denn nur wer Ihn als Speise verzehrt, wer lhn
als Samen ergleM, dessen Vermeblung (Nachkommenschalt) wlrd er'
4 In bIS translatlOn of Ramanu¡a's Commentary to the Vedanta Sallas: 'Whoever
the bemg may be thal eats the food and begets otTspnng, that bemg he (l. e.
the sou1 thdt has descended) becomes'.
5 'Denn nUl wenn von allen den en, welche Nahrung verzebren, emer Samen
ergIefit, SO kann, wer slCh 1m Zustande dIeses Samens befindet [= wer slch als
Nahrung aufgenommen aus dieser m Samen verwandelt hat], wleder geboI en ,'Verdeu'.
64
Anacolouthic Relahve Clauses. § 29, Ex.32G
have so taken it; and they' are in this respect in accord wlth the native Com-
mentators. Both gañkara and Ramanuja discuss our passage In detall in thelr
Commentaries to the Ved anta Sütras 3. 1. 26. The whole trend of the argumen-
tation of both great scholasbcs leaves no doubt that they regard the anur;ayin
1 e lhe soul lo which a portlOn of karman st1l1 attaches and WhlCh is therefore
bound m lhe chain of samsara (lhe avarohoñ Jivoh as It IS elsewhere [e. g. In
Ranga RamanuJa's gloss lo Chand. Up. 5. 10. 6] caIled) as subJect of tadbhuya
eva bhavatt and contrast thIS anu¡;ayln wlth lhe retahsic who is lhe subJect of
the lwo relahve clauses yo yo hy annam atti and yo retah stñcati.
The mooled point In the dIscussIOn IS, whether Jiiyante and bhavatt al
Chand. Up 5. 10. 6 refer in theIr literal sense to an actual and subslanbal
transformation and idenhfication of the or whether they should
be understood figuratively as expressIng merely a close aUachment (sam-
or unlOn (yogctJ of the anufayin lo and wilh the plants and the
retahstc. Bolh, followmg the sutrakiira, decIde In favour of the second
alternative, hecause an actual and subslantlalIdenttty of lhe anuyayw wlth
the retahsic is lmpossible (na cii 'tra mukhyo retahszgbhlivah samb!tavatt,
gankara, p. 776, 7); lhe anu¡;ay,n who enters the retahsic through lhe food
which the lalter consumes can only figurahvely he sald to ¡'become" lhe
retahs!c (katham i,'a 'nupacantatadbhavam adyamiiniinniinugato 'nufay'i
prattpadyate, gaiIkara, p. 776, 8) for the retahsw has eXlsted as a separate
indIVIdual long before the act of generabon takes place (cirajato hi priip-
tayaurano reta"(¡sig bhavati, gankara, p 776, 7 - 8) and continues as such
after propagabon; consequently lhere can be no doubt that lhe retahs!g-
bháva (Impbed In the words tadbhüya eva bhavati of the must
he mtel preted here as (tatra tiivad avar;yam retahstgyoga eva
retahszgbhavo 'bhyupagantavyah, t;,::,¡nkara, p 776, 9-10); and, by
the meanmg of Jiiyante m the precedmg clause dt the Upanisad must
likewIse be mlerpreted figuratlvely   cau 'paciirtkam vrihyiidt}anmava-
canam, RamanuJa, p. 581, 18, tadvad vrlhyádtbhiivo 'pi vr¡hyadiyoga eva,
gankara, p 77 b, 10)
2. WhIle It is thus certain that Jt 15 the anucayin to whom the clause tad-
bhuya evo bhavatl refers there remains the questlOn whelher anu¡;ayi should be
understood as fonmng the grammahcal subJect to bhavatz. WIlh the excephon
{lf Bohtlmgk all the western translators seem to have conslrued the clause m
thIS way, ddIermg merely in the InlerpretallOn of tadbhüyah. Wlth regard to
this they fall mto three classes:
a) The group tadbhuyah may be regarded as consIshng of the two spparale
words tad and bhuyah (adverbIal neuter). Thls IS apparentIy the VIew oC Ranga
RamanuJa who glosses: bhüyah tod bhavait, retahsigbhlivam prapnott .
retahsigyogi bhavati, and of Bohtlmgk \IIho renders 'Er wIrd von Neuem zu dIesen
(d. i. zu Speise und Samen)'. Bhüyo bhavatt would then be the equlvalent of
punar bhavati 'comes agam mto eXIsten ce' as bhüyo Jii'late IS the equlvalenl of
punar Jayate 'is born agam' at Up. 3. 8 na tft tat padam apnoti yasmád
Oertel. The Synta:s: oí Cases 6 . 65
§ 29, Ex 32G.
Anacolouthic RelatIve Glauses.
bhüyo na jayate (CoDlment. bhüya(¡. punar na Jayate sa1hsare), Bhagavadgita 13.
23 na 8a bhuyo 'bh¡jayate (Comment. punar na 'bhváyate)¡ Arnrtanada Up.38
yatra tatra mrtyeta 'pt na 8a bhüyo 'bhiJiiyate. The precedmg tad would then
necessanly refer to annam and retalJ, ('He IS born agam a such, VIZ. as food and
semen') as Bóhtlmgk takes lt But, as was pointed out aboye 1., this cannot be
the sense of the clause; rnoreover the eoa should then stand after tad not after
bhüyah.
b) The bulk of tbe native c.0rnmentators regard tadbhuyah as a Tatpuru\,!a-
rornpound, and Deussen and Tblbaut m thel! IranslatlOns of Qankara's and
RamanuJa's Comrnentaries to tbe Vedánta Su tras as 'well as Col. Jacab in bIS
Coneoldanee follow them.\
cr. the Commentary to 14..81 (diiyarathtbhuyam etya):
da¡;arathi riirnah, tasya dál(arathzbhüyam, ramatvam.
And ef. tadbhiiva Káty Q. 4. 3 13 (payasas tadbhii¡,at), MaUr. Up. 6. 27
(atas tadbhavam acirenm 'tz, Comrnent tadbhavam tasya tejaBo bhiivam .•.
priipnoü).
As secand member of a TatpUlusa -bhüya ís not mfrequent m the older
lJterature.
SImIlar farmations with unstrengthened radical vowel and <Íccurríng as
secand member of campaunds anly are:
- áj-ya : prtanáJya RV.
- ád-ya : annadya AV. + ¡ havirádyu RV.
- . 8urváfya VB. 3 1. 2. 21 (lor the accent see Wackernagel; Altllld.
Gr lI, 1, § 92, e, note, p 224, 8-10)
-{-t·ya pratítya RV. 4 5 14 (cf Geldner's note in 111s translatIOn)¡ 7.68. ()
- M·t·ya : vaJakfotya RV. 10. 50. 2; karmakftya AV 4. 24. 6
- c&r.ya : brahmacárya AV. +,   QB. 14. 6. 4 1 (= BAU. 3¡ 4.
1 M =3 5 1 K.); 14.7 2 26 (= BAU. 4. 4. 26 M. = 22 K)
- pat·ya : kartapatya PB. 16 1. 2; gartapatya KB. 16. 9 (p. 72, 11) = 25.
l4 (p 119, 9)
-bhíd-ya : yirsabhidya AV 10.5.50
-bM·.t·ya • rast"abMtya AV. 19 37.3
-mí+ya apamitya MS 1.10.2 (p. 142, 9) = K. 9 5 (p. 108,5). In Mantl'll.
-yáJya . devayájya av. 7. 3. 9
-van-ya: a)ttapunarvanya AB. 7.22.1
- v/dya : patwídya RV. 10. 102. 11; putravidya AV. 3. 23. 6
-vt-ya • ta!n'avtya RV. 1. 134. 5
- rrú-t-ya : mantrar¡rútya RV. 10. 134. 7
1 Deussen: 'Dessen VermehlUng (Nachkommenschaft) wird er'; Deussen's ren-
dermg 'kann er slch daraus weller entwlckeln' 18 perhap8 merely a free paraphrase
of translatIon. - Thibaut· 'That bemg he becomes'. _·Col. Jacob s tad-
Muya. - The PW. and pw. do nol regIster a compound tadbhaya hecause
BilhtIingk (see abo ve 2, a) separates tad trom bhuya1.J.
66
Anacolouthlc RelatJve Clauses. § 29, Ex. 32 G.
-sád-ya . udmusádya RV, 8 43. 19; suttrasádya AV. 9. 6 42; talpasádya
TB 1. 2. 6 5, 6; agnlstomasádya ItB. 4. 2. 4. 7, antaNksasád.vu and
upansádya QB. 'l. 2. 1. 22, 5 4. 4. 1; upansadya PB 5 5. 1
-sáh-ya (wlth metncal lengthemng - sáh-ya) : RV. 3. 37.
3, nrsdhya RV.; prtanasáhya RV 3.37.1 (in the TB. parallel prta-
nasáhya, cf Waekernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 197, b, P 225, 6-9)
- stc-ya retahstcya KB. 10. 3 (p 46, 20 where both retahsicyam and
retodheyam. should be read as compounds)
- sá-ya : raJasúya A V +
- sr-t-ya . smdhusrtya A V 10 2 11
-h&+ya : ahthátya RV , dasyuhátya RV., raksohátya RV. 6. 45. 18;
vrtrahátya RV. +; ¡:ambarahátya RV. 1. 112 14, TB. 2 8 3 8 = MS.
4. 14 13 (p. 236, 13), RV. 1. 51. 6. - For the accent ofthe
Vpldhl-denvatlVes vátrahatya VS. 30. 13 = TE. 3. 4 1. 7 (Mantra), TB.
1 5 9 5 (prosel and avaírahatyá AV. 6. 29 3 ef Waekernagel, Altind.
Gr Ir, 1, § 105, b, note, p 268, 21-23. For avmrahatyá 'the sense
would favor the aeeent ávatrahatya' (Whltney's note to hls AV. trans-
latíon) ef. Waekernagel, Altmd Gr. JI, 1, § 32, e, p. 80; § 91, a, p 215.
-hú-ya . devahúya RV. 7. 85. 2; 9B. 2. 1. 3. 2, ¡ntrhúya 9B. 2. 1. 3.2
A few instanees of sueh formations wlth Irregular oxvtone aeeentuabon
al e met wlth, thus
- Jila-yá . abhyaJilayá <;;B. 9 5. 1. 17
- jya-yá nrJyayá MS. 2. 1. 3 (p 4, 18 = 5, 3, 4, 21, nrJllayám JiMtJ and
jtnlyiit)
- muh-yá ; aturmuhyá MS. 2 1. 9 (p. 10, 18 and 20, aturmuhyáth syat
and bhavah) The meaning of the compound IS obscure, Roth's emen-
datJ.on (pw. IV Nachtrage, p. 291, col. 3) to antarmuhyá 15 haldly correcto
TS 5.5. 10. 7 sudhayá m - the proverb sudhayám ha vat vllJi suhlto
lS correctIy explamed by Weber, Ind. Studlen, 13, p 97, 13 as
an old error for the locahve sudháyam which lS read m the same proverb
at AB. 3 39. 5 = 47. 8, ef. al so besldes QB. 2. 2. 2 6 ta enam ubhaye devah
pritáh sudhiiyam dadhati (clted by Weber) AV. 17. 1. 6 (etc) sudhayam
mil dhehi.
Cf Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr n, 1, § 92. e, note, p.223, 40-224, 10.
And ef. m gen;ral, Lmdner, Altmd Nominalblldung § 76, p 99, Reuter,
KZ 31 (1892) p.533-540, WhIlQ.ey, Gr. 1213. e¡ Waekernagel, AItmd. Gr •.
I1, +; § 75, g, p. 177. ...,
Thus,
< abhtbhríya . AV: 19.37.3 (dative abhtbhriyaya)
vasyobhlíyu • AV. 16 9.4 (datlve vasyobhúyiiya)
amutrahhúya : AV. 7.53.1 = VS., TS., MS K. (ablatrve amutrabhúYiid)
aVlrbhúya : MS 1. 8. 6 (p. 123, 15, aeeusal1ve avtrbháyam wlth   Alt.
Ar.2 3. 2 (Kelth, p. 112, 11, accusative iimrbhüyam wlth  
5*
67
§ 29, Ex.32G Anacolouthic Relative Clauses.
In the Ait. Ar. passage aU mss. and edltions read tusya [pañcavidhasyo
'kthasya] ya iitmanam avtstaram veda '¡mute ha 'urbhüyah whICh the
Commentary glosses by sa puman bhüya avth attr;ayena prakotatvam a¡mute
vyapnoty eva bahullith prapnotz, and Kelth trans-
lates 'He obtallls fullel bemg' But III view of the MS passage (cf the
parallel K. 6. 7, p. 57, 11 (ivzh praJasu bhavah) there can be httle doubt
that the V'ihol!y anomalous neuter form avtrbhüyah should be emended lo
aVlrbhüyam_ Cf. avzrbhava <;8 10.'; 5 16, Chand. Up. 7. 26.1; avzrbhüti
K 8. 9 (p. 93, 6 avwbhütyat), al! quoted by PW. and pw.
vasiyobhúya : MS 1. 4.10 (p. 59, 1-2) = K. 32. (p 26, 11-12, accusabve
vasiyobkúyam agacchan and gacchatt)
iUmabhüya . AIt Ar. 2 5. 1 (KeIth, p. 121, 7) = Ait. Dp.4 2 (accusative at-
mabhüyam with gacchatt)
satyabhtíya : <;B. 14.8. 6. 2 (= BAD. 5. 6. 2 Madh. = 5. 5. 1 KanT. anrtam
satyena parigrh'itam satyabhüyam eva bhavati
Weber's text accents satyábhuyam, and the pW. letams thls accentuauon
while PW. (s. bhüyam) suggested an emendabon to satyabhúyam. The
accent should be on bhú; the accentuabon of gB. XIV IS generaUy in-
accurate, cf. Wackernagel, Altllld. Gr ll, 1, § 91, f, r, p.221, 9-10, and
1, § d, p.295, 18-19.
The PW. (s. bhU, p 314, col. 2, lme 17 and s. bhuyam, p.3M, col. 2)
regards -bhüyam III satyabhayam and ekadhábhüyam as 'absolutivum' but
pw takes both correctly as neuter nouns.
For the constI uction of compounds III -bhüya wlth the root bhü see
below undel ekadhabhúya and ekabhüya, and cf. karmabhüyam bhütva,
Qankara on Vedanta Sutras 4 1 6 (p 1068,9) yat tü 'ktam udgUhadzmati-
bhir upasyamanli a.dztyadayah karmabhuyam bhüt¡,a phalam karisyanti 'ti
tad ayuktam, 'But it IS lllcorrect to aBsert that the Sun etc because they
are worshlpped as etc. assume the characterIshcs of karman and
thus produce frUlt.'
ekadh{jbhúya : QB 14.8.13. 1 (= BAU. 5 13. 1 "Madh. = 5 12.1 Kanv.) eka-
dhabhilyam
ekablfúya . D p 3 2 = QA. 5. 2 ekabhüyam gacchantz and ekabhüyam bhiltva.
68
From the post-Vedic hterature PW, pw., Aple, and Hertel (p. 81, note)
quote: devabh¡¿ya: Harsacarita 160. 13; 194 7 (devabhüyam gatah); Soma-
mandira Ratnapalak.301.
brahmabhüya' Manu 1. 98; 12.102, Bhagavadgita 14.26 = 18.53 (brah-
mabhilyaya kalpate) , Jabala Up 5 (brahmabhüyaya bhavatz) ,
12. 28 (brahmabhüyam gatlm aJagama).
: <;\(,;upalavadha 14 81   etya).
bhasmabhüya . Ravlvarmabhüpa Pradyumnabhyudaya 4, 23, b (p. 40).
bhrñgabhüya : JmakirtI Palagopalakatha 218.
The on Pa!].im 3. 1. 107 gnes devabhuya = devatva and brah-
mabhüya = brahmatva.
Anacolouthlc RelalIve Clauses. § 29, Ex. 32 G.
The native Commentators gloss the VedlC examples of -bhüya by -bhavana
(on AV. 7.53.1; 19.37 3; VS. 27. 9); -bháva (on QB.14. 8.13.1, AH. Up. 4
2; Up. 3. 2
1
), ciriivasthana (on TS 4. 1 7. 4); avyatlrekatá (on AIt. Ar.2.
5 1). Sayana on QB 14. 8 6. 2 and the CommentatOls to the correspondmg
  gloss satyabhüyam by satyabiihulyam.
In the post·Vedlc occurrences the Commentators usually gloss -bhilya
by the suffix • tva
c) If tadbhüyah ls thus construed as predicate wlth bhavaU ('He beco mes such
a bemg') the mascuhne gender is surprlsmg And Herlel, eVldently because he
took offence at the masculme gender of a m -ya, proposes to take
tadbhüyah as Bahuvñhl: 'wer síeh ¡m Zustande dieses Samens befindet'. Thls
mterpretabon is grammatLeally qUIte posslble although adJecttval Bahuvñhls wlth
the last member in -ya are exeeedmgly searee' RV 9 30 3 nrsáhyam wJth
may have attamed adjectival value (cf. Waekernagel, Altmd Gr. I1, 1,
§ 75, g, note, p. 177, 37-39) Posslbly al so at 98. 14 8. 6. 2 (= BAU. 5.5.2
Mli.dhy. = 1 Kánv.) the accentuatlOn 2 satyábhüyam (see aboye under b) may be
due to the faet that 1t was regarded as an adJectival Bahuvñhl, anrtam sa/yena
pangrh'itarit satyabhüyam eva 'Untruth grasped an mound by truth be-
comes havmg tlUth as its nature'.
An undoubted adJeehval compound m -bhüya appears to be the suspect
(PW 'Verdorbene Lesart'; pw. 'wohl verdorben') vrttabhüya as eplthet of
the Al,lvllls at Mbh. 1. 3 63 (= 728) avvinii. Mdum amrtalh vrttabhüyau
tiro dhatUim whlCh the Commentators gloss by vrttam mrvrttam utpannam
viyadádt tasya bhii,yam bhava[¡, kltsnaprapañciitmakaft and by vrttabhuyau
bhüyovlttau nliJlltkal'mltnau
d) AH the aboye translators (2 b and e) make the anUl)ayin (l. e. the soul
whieh descends for reblrth on earth) the grammaheal subJect of bhavati and
take tadbhuyah elther as predlCale noun wlth bhavatz (2, b) or as adJectlve quah-
fymg the umJtted subJect (2, ej, whJle, accordmg to my opmlOn, tadbhüyah
is the grammallcal subJect: 'For whosoever (It IS who) eats the food (and) who-
soever (11 IS who) easts the seed,-a suehhke being comes into eXlstence', l. e.
the nature (-bhülja = bháv(l) 01' the hemg whlCh comes mto HIstence (bhavati)
through the generahve act 01 the retahstc (yo retah stñcaül is the same (tad-)
as tbe nature of the respecb ve retaltstc, consequently only 11' the lalter is a human
bemg the former can be reborn as sueh.
Tbls mterpretahon, Jt seems to me, is made necessary by the faü that both
the BAU. and the Chand. Up. m descrlbing the successive 5tages tbrough whlch
the soul (both on ItS way to final release and nn ItS way through the samsltra)
has to pass do not use the smgular but the plural. Thus m Biu 6 1. 18
1 For ekabhüya = ekabhiiva cf Nlr. 7. 28 and Sayana on RV 10.88. 10 tredhá
bhuve = tredhiibhiiviiya; Nlr. 12. 19 (cited by Sayana on RV 1. 22. 17) tredhá =
tredhabhállaya
2 Cf Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 1I, 1, § 91, d, p 218.
69
§ 29, Ex 22 G Anacolouthlc Relabve Clauses
Madhy. = 6. 2. 15 Kanv. of those who are released from salhsal'a: te ye .. vi-
duh; ye ca 'mI: ., upasate, te. abhisl'tlÍtbhavantl; tan gamayatt, te . ..
tesam na punaravrttih, and 6 1 19 Madhy = 6. 2.16 Kanv. of those
who return to the samsara' ye Jayantt, te. . abhtsal͡bhavanti, te. . an-
nam bhavantt; tan.. deváh. bhaksayanti: te. abhintspadyante, te .. an-
nam bhavanü; [in the Kanva recenslon only te .. hüyante jayantel; te •..
anuparivartante. And m the Chand. Up. 5.!O 1-2 of those who are released
from samsara : ye . viduh; ye ce 'me. . upasate, te. . abhisambhavanti (the
smgular abhtsalhbhavati m the 81h!. Ind. IS a palpable error, BóhtImgk and the
ed have the correct abhisambhavantt), enan (read so with BohtImgk
and the ed. for enam of the Blbl Ind) . gamayatt, and 5.10 3.
5, 6, 7 of those who return to the samsrlra . ya ¡me . upasnte; te abhtsam-
bhavantt, nai 'te. . abhiprapnuvantt; punar mrval tante; dhümo bhavantl (read
so with BohUingk for bhavatl) , abhram bhavanti Cread so wIth Bobthngk for
bhavah) , megho bhat'antt (read so with Bilhthngk for bhavatt), pravarsantt (read
so wlth Bohmngk for pravarsatl); te. . )ayante; 'le raman'iyacaranah; te.
apadyeran; ye • •• kapüyacaranrth; te apadyeran
The faulty smgulars in Chand. Up 5. 10. 5 dhümo bhavatl, abhrUlh
bhavati, 6 megho bhat'ati, pravarsatl (corrected by BohUlOgk to corre-
spondlOg plural s) are old (all the edilions includmg the Anandaltr.
ed. have them) due to the proper singular in tadbhüya eva bhavatt
Of these successive stages through whlch the anul(ayin passes lhe tadbhiiya
eva bhavati of Chand. Up 5. 10 6 does not form a parl t!ut, as pomted out
above (1, e,   the sentence ato vm khalle durmsprapattaram, yo yo hy annam
atti yo retah sincatl tadbhüya eva bhavat1 18 an obller dJCtum of lhe author
of lhe Chand Up which a modern author mlght prefer to relegate to a foot note 1
There remams then the Irregular mascullOe gender of tadbhüyah for WhlCh
the neuter tadbhüyam would be expected. Such an emendation would be shght
and would solve the dlfficulty al once Bul even a masculíne tadbhüyah is not
wlthout analogy:
80th Sayana on RV 7. 85 2 (locatIve devahúye) and lhe KaClka on Pan. 3 1.
123 assume a masculme devahüyah. Sayana glosses by deva vijtf!isavo yoddhtJro
hüynnte yuddhartham parasparam ahüyanta tti devahüyah salÍlgramah, and the
ka says deva"abda upapade hvayater )uhoter va kyap dirghas tugabhiiva" ca
(= -hüya IS derIved either from lhe ;1 hü or froID lhe V hu, wJth the suffix -ya,
wIlh long radICal vo\Vel and wlthout mterposllIon of oto) devahüyah.
AV 19 37 a abhibhüyaya (datIve) IS dellved by Sayana frOID lhe masculine
abhtbhüyah = abhtbhavanam.
The Commentator on TS. 4 1. 7. 4 dellves the ablatJve amutrabhüyad from
the masculme amutrabhüyah : bhiiyah (bhiivah) a7llutra (svarge) amutrabhüyah,
whlle Mah on VS. 27. 9 and Sayana on AV. 7 53. t derIve It froID the neuler
amlttrabhüyam : amutra paraloke bhawnam amutrabhüyam.
J Norden, Kunstprosa, 1, p. 90, 2
70
Anacolouthic Relative Clauses. § 29, Ex. 32 G - 33
Ra}asüya OCCUlS both al' neuter and as mascuhne, adapting Its gender
on the one hand to lcarma (cf. TS 5 6 2. 1 ráJasüyam, Comment raja-
suyakhyath lcarma), on the other to yaiñah. kratuh (cf. AB. 7. 15 8 tasma
etam rllJasflyam ya}iiakratum provllca). Thus rlijasuya appears as neutel
at AV. 11. 7. 7; 19. 33. 1, lI11d at TS. 5. 6. 2. 1 aad lts parallel K 37. 6
{p. 87, 15) whIle the paralIel TB. 2. 7. 6. 1 has raJasüyah. Cf the adJech-
val ra}asüya ID the Mantra K. 15 6 (p 216, 7) = MS. 2 b.8 (p. 68, 9) apo
devir [VS., <;':.B. de¡;ii] madhumaUr agrbhnam [TS. agrhnan, VS, <;,:B agrbh-
nan] ilrJasvati raJasüyiil} [TS l'aJasüytiya, VS., gB. riiJasval}] cUtiniih
B. A still looser connection of the relative cliriuse with the rest
of the sentence is seen in the folIowing
1. 'fhe relative clause has a gerund instead of a fiuite verbo
33 ya ah2tagmr jwe mrtaQabdam (futva ka tatra prayaQcitllb, 'If
oue who has pIled the firé, haviug heard the report of (his own)
death while he,is (still) alive, -what expiation is there?' AB. 7 9.7.
The Commentary glo:;ses iihtttignth svasmtñ Jwaty eva sva7clyamamna¡;abdant
yada dvesimukhác chmuyát , and Aufrecht (AB, p. 430,18, cf Weber, Ind.
Stud 9, p 249) lemalks on the peculiar use of the gerund ¡:rutvii Instead of the
fimte form i}Tnuyat. Bohllmgk (Ber d. Verh. d. sdchslschen G. W. 52, 1900,
p. 417) proposes the emendallOll J'iven for )¡ve 'Wenn der Autor dlE'S (VIZ. the
lhought 'Wenn eIller, der das helhge Feupr angelegt hat, bel semer Lebzelt das
Gerücht, daf3 er gestorben sei, horen solIte') hatte ausdrucken wolIen, wurde er
llIcht Jlve, sondern In rIchtJgem Skt Jiwn gesagt haben. Daf3 man aber eIn
Gerucht vom elgenen Tode nur bei Lebzelten horen kann, versteht slch wohl
van selbst Durch em vor mrtaO hmzugefugtes n erhalten Wlr kOlrekles Ski, den
envarteten OptatlV und emen unanfechtbaren Smn: "Wenn elU AhItagm am
Leben blelben nachdem er das Gerucht von selUem Tode gehort hatte" ,
Kellh follows Bohthngk 'The constructlOn IS so odd that jWet seems obvlOusly
needed', and (p. 89, § 23): 'The apparent use of the gerund as fimte velb ..
cannot be correct, and the obvious solullon IS to read J'iVen mrtaliabdam WhlCh
would be written J!vem and the In would easlly disappear'
To me Jt seems that subslltutmg }wen fOI J'ive, whlle undoubtedly easmg the
grammar, lS a correction of the text rather than an emendahon. It must not
be overlooked that the clumsy constructlOns at AB. 7. 9. 2 -4, 5; 6. 8  
Ex. 34-36 Irnmedlately below) also defy the rules of strlCt syntax. Nor IS the
absohüe locabve JiVe (= *J¡:ve satt), unusual as It is, wholly wlthout paralIel, cf.
\!B. 5 1. 3 2 (biS) tad etad (the second time tasmtid etad) anatirtitl e sat, ,-atre
rilpom kriyate, 'Thus (therefore thus) whlle lt is not an overnight rIte It IS per-
formed In lhe form of (= llke) a mght-Ilte' (see below § 66. 3 and § 67)
Ag. 3. 13. 11 shows the normal constructlOo: surabhaya eva yasmiñ Jwe
which the Commenlary glosses by: yasminn iihitiignau Jivaty
eva IIIrta t;abdah saril}tiyeta tada tyam tsfth kiiryii.
71
§ 29, Ex. 34-37. AnacolouthJC Relatlve Clauses.
2. Two relatIve clauses are iutertwmed, the former of WhlCh is
without verbo
34. ya yasya bharya gaur va yaman janayet ka tatra
'If oue who has pIled the fire,-if such au oue's wife
or cow gives birth to twms,-what explatlOu is there?' AB. 7. 9. 8.
In this awkward construction the second relatIve clause yasya ... janayet is
an afterthought elaboratlllg and correctmg tM' precedmg ya áhztágnih: 'If one
who has Plled the file, that IS, to express it more exactly, If hIS wife or cow
¡¡Ives blrth lo twms . , .'
3. A couditlOual clause iutroduced by the couJuuctiou yadt is
combined with the relative clause and both clauses share the
same finite verbo
35 ya ahztagmr yadt pratar asnato 'gnihotrarh juhnyat (6. yadi
sütakannam prar;n'iyat) ka tatra prayar;cltt1h, 'If one who has plied
the fire,-if he without havlllg bathed ID the morning offers the
Agnihotra (-if he eata food defiled through child-birth), what
expiation ia there?' AB. 7 9.5; 6.
The CODJUDctIon yadt IS here realIy redundant; by Jts omisslOn the sentence
would assume the type dlscussed under A.
4. A conditlOnal clause mtroduced by the conjunction is
combined wlth a relative clause, but the verb of the conditlOnal
clause be construed with the subject of the relative clause
which is thus left incomplete, without verb, and wholly in the airo
36. ya ahttagmr kapalarh naf-yet (3. yadt pavitram nar;yet;
4. yadz htra1Jyam nar;yet) ka tatra prayar;Ctttll}, 'If one who has
piled the fire,-if the potsherd be lost (if the strainer be lost;
if the gold piece be lost),-what explation is there?' AB. 7. 9. 2-4.
Here the Commentary restores the syntactlCal cohesion by glosslOg ya
tagnih wlth yasya '1utagnev,.
5. The thought: 'A part of these forms settled in the water;
that part assumed the character of water and in this shape he
conected them; the other part oí these forms settled on this earth;
that part assumed the character oí clay and il} this ahape he col-
lected them' is very awkwardly expressed in the following passage.
37. yad apsu pramddhanarh   ta apafi,
samabharad, atha yad asyam tam mrdam, 'What (part) of these
(forms) which had been thrown into the water had settled (there),
72
AnacolouthlC RelatIve Clauses § 29, Ex 38 -39.
-that water he collected; (and) further, what (part of these forms
had settled) on thlS (earth),-that clay (he collected)'. QB. 6. 2. 1. 8.
e The relatIVe pronoun ya in an obhque case is equivalent to
the conjunction yad or yad¿ plus a demonstrative pronoun.
38 sruva9 ca 'tra srltk ca prayujyete, vag vat sruk prana!] sru-
vah ... 11 yad v eva sruva9 ca sruk ca yo vm Sa praJapatw asid
e§a sa sruvalt, ptano sruvah, prar;tah atha ya sa vag
asid su srug, va¿ vag, sruk, .. 11 tam samtatam Juhoti,
samtata ln ta apa ayann, atha yalt sa prajapatis trayya vidyaya
saha 'palt sa yair etad yUJubhtr juhot¿, 'Now tbe
Sruva-spoon here and tbe Sruc-Iadle are used; the Sruc-ladle
is (identical with) speecb, the Sruva-spooI\ is (ldentical with)
breatb; ; and as for its being the Sruva-spoon aná. tbe Srgc-Iadle,
-the Sruva-spoon is (identical with) blln who was thlS Prajapati,
for tbe Sruva-spoon is (identical wlth) breath and breatb (in turn)
is (ldentical with) Prajapati; again, tbe Sruc-Iadle is (ldentlcal
with) her who was this speech, for speech is female and the Sruc-
ladle is femaJe; he offers this as a continuous (Hbation), for con-
tinuous these waters went along; furtbermore he is the same
Prajapati wbo with the threefold knowledge entered these waters,
inasmucb as he makes the offering with tbese Y ajuses'. QB. 6.
3 1. 8-10.
The relabve pronoun yml} In the last clause IS equivalent to yad
39. prajapatir yasmad praja asrjata so 'lelayad eva sa
dipyamano (var. lect. samd'ipyamano) bhrajamano   'Wben
Pra]apati had created creatures out of this womb he wavered, he
stood blazing (and) shining'. JB. 1. 299.
The relative pronoun yasmad is equivalent to yad asmad.
The entry: "Zeliiyat JB." III WhItney's Roots s v' 2 Ji, p. 149, 2 should be
deleted as It is based on this passage; ef. below § 57, Ex. 7 Rem.
73
§ 30-§ 31, Ex 1-3 Proleptlc Accusative.
2. Disjunct Accusative.
1. The Proleptic Accusative Resumed by a
Demonstrative Pronoun.
§ 30. A. The Simple Proleptic Accusative (without accom-
panying infinita verb-form).
a) The Proleptic Accusative most frequently consists of a series
of nouns (Ex. 1; 3-10; 12-16) which lS occasionally marked
off by itt (Ex. 6; 7; 13); more rarely of a single nOUll (Ex. 2; 11).
b) As a rule the ResumptIve Pronoun follows i1l1medíately upon
the Proleptic Accusative (Ex 1; 3 -5; 7-16), rarely it is sepa:rated
from it by other words (Ex. 2; 6) e} A series of smgular nouns
is usually resumed by the DemonstratIve Pronoun in the plural
(Ex. 1 j 3-10; 12), les s frequently by the Demonstrative Pronoun
m the singular (Ex. 13- 16; 17 A). d) Once (Ex. 17) a simple
Demonstrative Pronolln accompanied by a relative clause is re-
sumed by a second Demonstrative Pronoun.
§ 31. Examples:
1. tr'l:ny atmane 'kurute 'ti, mano vacam pranam tany almane
'kuruta, '''Three (kinds of food) he prepared for hlmself"; mind,
speech, breath,-these he prepared for himself'. QB. 14. 4. 3. 8
(= BAU. 1. 5. 8 Madhy. = 3 Kanv.).
The quotatlOD refers to the <;:loka <;:8. 14 4. 3. 1 (= SAU 1. 5. 1) 11 yat sapta
'nnam medhaya 'jallayat pita I triny dtmane 'J.:uruta 11
2. paQan tJá asyarh [brhatyam] tan   'The cattle,-those
he deposIted in this (Brhati)'. PB. 7. 4. 4.
3. agneyam sarasvatzm saumyarh barhaspatyam tan sahá 'labheta
brahmavarcasakamah prajakamah   CA
74
ProleptJc AccusatJve
§ 31, Ex. 4-10.
(victim) sacred to Agni, one sacred to Sarasvatr, one saered to
Soma, (and) one saered to Brbaspati,-those he should take to-
gether (for slaughter) who is desirous of tbeologieal renown, desi-
rous of offspríng, desírous oí eattle, desirous oí the offiee of Puro-
hita'. K. 29. 10 (p. 179, 13).
4. tasmin pa9au sarnbhate pranath 9,-otram viicam tam
dadhati. 'Breath, sight, hearing, speech,-these he places into this
animal after it has been created'. MS. 3 2. 8 (p. 28, 7).
Cf without prolepsis, K. 20 9 (p 28, 17) retasy eva slkte pranam ca-
ViiCUlh dadhiiti, 'Into the seed after lt has been cast he places
breath, mind, slght, hearmg, speech'.
5. loma chavím mañsam majjanam " ca 'tmanal.t sprnoti,
• " stanav an{lau avar1cam pranam tani ca 'tmanah sprnott,
hair, skin, flesh, bone, marrow,-these of the body he wins;
., ; and teats, scrotum, penis, the downward breath,-these of
the body he wins'. TB. 2. 3. 7. 2-3.
6. a9vam tüparam gomrgam 'th sarvahuta etañ juhoty esam lokanam
'A horse, a hornless (be-goat), a bos gavaeus,-these
he offers as complete offerings, for the sake of conquering these
worlds'. TB. 3. 8. 20. 5.
For the 'comprehenslve' use of iti cf. aboye § 9, Ex. 3, Rem
7. arvam taparam gomrgam it't tan madhyame yapa alabhate, 'A
horse, a hornless (be-goat), a bos gavaeus,-these he takes (for
slaughter) at the central stake'. QB. 13. 2. 2. 2.
8. apa (TE. apa) pa9úñs tan eva 'sma ekadha sarhsrjya
(MS. tan asmai sarhsrjyai 'kadha) madhumatalJ, karoti, 'The waters,
plants, (and) cattle,-uniting these together he makes (them) sweet
for him'. K. 31. 7 (p. 8,5), MS. 4. 1 9 (p. 11,5); TE. 3. 2. 8.2.
For the accusabve o'pal} of TB. cf. below § 60, Ex. 135 (AB.8. 17. 1).
9. pra'i}am vyanam apanam (MS. pra'IJam apanam vyanam) tan
eva (MS. tan) yajamane dadhati, 'In-breatbing, tbrough-breathmg,
(and) out-breatbing,-these he places into the sacrificer'. K. 31. 5
(p. 6, 12); MS. 4. 1. 7 (p. 9, 12).
The parallel passage TB. 3. 2 6 4 do es not enumerate the breaths but simply
reads: priinan eva ya;amilne fladhiih.
10. saptada9a prrnm   saptada9a trivatSa
aprav'ltas tan paryagnikrtan prok$itan e 'tara labhante pre 'taran
75
§ 31, Ex. 11-12.
Pl'oleptic Aecusal1 ve.
srJanti 'Seventeen speckled five year old bulls (and) seventeen
speckled three year oId eows which are not with calf,-these,
after the fire has been eafrIed round them (and) after they have
been consecrated,-the female ones they take (for slaughter), the
mal e ones they let go'. PB. 21. 14. 7.
FOl the masculme tan paryagnikrtan proksdan er. Delbruek, AItind Syntax,
§53, p 87-88; Vergl. Syntax m, p 244-247, Keith's note to Alt Al' 2.17,
P 208-iW9; SpelJer, Ved und SanskIlt Syntax, § 101, Sanskrit Syntax, § 28, b.
P 19 - 20 For the constl'uctlOn Kaa' IíXov Kai I-iÉpoc; cf Gaedlcke, Aeeusahv,
p 268, SpeiJer, Ved. und Sansknt Syntax, § 83, Delbrüek, VergL Syntax, l, p. 385.
11 sa yat pürvarn sapta pranañs tan etena ' srninn ap-
yayayati ya hye 'ma bahyál), r,;ariran rnatriis tad yathai 'tad agmm
vayurn ad1tyam candramasam paran anyar,; ca (Blb1. Ind. and
Gaastra's text anyañr,; ca) praJas tan etena 'smznn apyayayatz; .,
sa yad dvitiyarn iicamatt sapta 'panañs tan etena 'smznn apyayayati
ya hye 'ma bahyah flLriran rnatras tad yathai 'tat  
amavasyiirn f)raddharf¿ d'ik¡;arf¿ yaJñam dak¡;inas tan etena.
'sminn apyayayati; . . .; sa yat trt'iyam acamati sapta vyanañs tán
etena 'smznn apyáyayati ya hye 'má báhyál), f)arírán rnatras tad
yathai 'tat prthivim dwarn nak¡;atrá1JY rtün ártaván
samvatsaráñs tán etena 'smznn ápyáyayati, 'In that he takes the
first sip, the seven in-breathings,-these he thereby replenishes
lO hlm, (and) what elements there are outside of the body, to
wit, fire, wind, the sun, the moon, the waters, cattle, and the
other creatures,--these he thereby replenishes in him; ... ; in that
he takes the second sip, the seven out-breathings,-these he
thereby replenishes in bim, (and) wbat elements there are outside
of the body, to wit, tbe night of the full moon, the eigbth day
of the full moon, the nigbt of tbe new moon, faith, the con se-
eration, tbe sacrlfice, the sacrifieial fees,-tbese he tbereby re-
plenisbes in blm; ... ; in tbat he takes the third sip, the seven
through-breathings,-these he tbereby replenishes in him, (and)
what elements there are outside of the body, to wit, tbe earth,
tbe atmosphere, the sky, tbe constellations, tbe aeasons, tbe di-
visions of the year, the years,-these he thereby replenishes in
him'. GB. 1. 1. 39.
12. ukthyapatrarn üdttyapatram etany anu gávalj.
76
Prolepbc Accusative § 31, Ex. 13-16
prajayante, 'The Agraya:r;ta-vessel, the Ukthya-vesseI, (and) the
Aditya-vessel,-after (= in accordance with) tbem cows are born'.
QB. 4. 5. 5. 8.
13 a) tasmm Lsuparnaya] ha 'nvagqtaya   amik$a1h
dadhi 'ty etad upanidadhuf;" cFor this (eagle) when he had come
they (viz. the Pa:r;tls) put down this, viz. liquid butter, milk, clotted
.curds, (and) sour curds'. JB. 2. 43R. 3 (JAOS. 19, p. 99).
b) tasyai ha 'nvágatáyai tathm 'va sarpth
• dadM 'ty etad upanidadhub, 'For this (Sarama) 'when she
had come they put down in exactly the same manner this, viz.
11quid butter, milk, clotted curds (and) sour curds'. JB. 2. 439.
4 (JAOS. 19, p. 100).
For the 'eomprehenslve' use of lti ef. aboye § 9, Ex. 3 Rem
14. tad vat tad agnzhotrmh dvadaraham brahma juhavam cakara,
tad dvadaraham hutva kirttm yaralj, praJatim (the mss pra;apattm)
amrtam tad udajahara, cNow the Brahman offered 'this Aglllhotra
extending over twelve days; having offered this (Agnibotra) ex-
tendmg over twelve days, fame, glory, (tbe power of) procreation,
immortality,-tbat he took out'. JB. 1. 37.
15. tad vaz tad agnzhotrarh dvadaraharh prajapatzr juhavarh calcara,
tad dvadaraharh hutva (var. lect. krtva) prajñam medharh mimañsam
tapas tad udajahara, 'Now PraJapati offered this Agnibotra ex-
tending over twelve claya; havmg offered tbis (Agnihotra) extencling
over twelve claya; knowledge, understanding, dehberation, penance,
-tbat be took out'. JB. 1. 37.
16. deva asuran yudham upaprayanto 'bruv(ln: yan no tJamam
vasu tad apamdhaya yudhyamahaz... 2ti, prat}a vava va-
mam vasv aSít, tad apanzdhaya yudham upaparáyañs, tad ekadha
bhutvá srjamanam Teas samlini (bere the mss. insert tu)
gám ajam atnm fJrihlrh yavam brahmat}am rajanYalh
vatryarh yad kirh ca tat sarvam tad ebhya
(the mss. ' dam vai vaS tad vamarh vasv ekadhii
bhutva srjamanarh   'Toe godf'> engagmg in combat wlth
the Asuras sald: "Let us enter the combat having laíd away tbat
WhICh is our dearest treasure ... "; now the breaths were their
dearest treasure; baving laid tbat away they went off to the
77
§ 31, Ex. 17 -17 A; § Ex. 1-3. Prolephc Accusahve.
combat; that treasure having become one ... (?); now with regard
to tbe -B,ces, the Samans, the Yajuses, the cow, the horse, the
sbe-goat, tbe sheep, rice, barley, the Brabmal}.a, tbe Rajanya, tbe
Val\lya, tbe Qudra, and wbat ever else there is,-wIth regard to
an tblS (people) reported to tbe gods: "Tms your dearest treasure
baving become one. . (?)'" JB. 1. 14.f (Caland, Auswahl. p. 43).
For ekadha bhütva sr)amanam Caland reads, wllh Avagraha, ekadha bhütva
'sr}amanam and renders. 'Hler steht eure hebe Habe, zu einem geworden, ohue
zu schaffen'. But what can be the exact lmport of 'wIthout creatmg'',l The
precedmg ekadha bhütva would favour a conJecture sarnsr)yarnanam, and atlsthat,
tlsthah roay be auxllIanes: 'Kept, keeps bemg mixed or fused together'.
17. etam ha vat yany asmad ;¡;janad vytttkrantani bhavantt tany
eva 'sml'ñs tad dadhati, '(AH) these (things) WhlCh are departed from
him In various directious after he has sacrificed,-them he tbus
places (back) iuto him'. AB. 8. 8. 7.
r Addition from the Aral}.yakas and
17 A tad u ha (3. tad u ha punar eva) Jana9rutth pautrayanalJ,
r;atant (3. sahasram) gavam ar;vatar;¡;¡athaln (3. adds
duhdaram) tad adaya praticakmme, 'SIX hundred cows [a thousand
cows], a gold ornament, a chariot drawn by female mules, [and
his daughter],-taking (aU) thlS (with him) Jana\lrutl Pautraya:r;¡a
tben [then again] went to (RaIkva)'. Cband. Up 4.2.1; 3. J
B. The Proleptio Aoousative consists of a Noun aocompanied
by a Participle.
§ 32. 1. The accompanying Participle is a Present Participle.
In Ex. 1-5 the participle is not further qualified, in Ex. 6 it
is qualified by an instrumental.
1. samavattam eva sat'í1n tad enarh [i(lilm ] hotarli.
r;rayati, 'This   beiug completely cut off,-it he tben visibly
fixes in the Hotr-priest'. QB. 1. 8. 1. 17.
2. altar-altar va etad avliyamanarh tad asacanta, 'That
(third) day wmch was not being crushed,-that the Rakeases
pursued'. PB 12. 3. 13.
3. ahalJ santam upañr;um tarh ratrau Juhoti, 'The Upail\lu-cup
being (equivalent to) tbe day,-it he offers at night'. QB. 4.1. 2. 13.
78
Prolephc AccusatIve. § 32, Ex 4.-6.
4. ratrirh santam antaryamarh tam udlte j1thoti, 'The Antaryama-
cup being (equivalent to) the night,-lt he offers when (the sun)
has risen'. QB. 4. 1. 2. 14.
5. prajapater va2 par,;avo 'jatar; ca jayamanar; ca rudrasya Jata,
vyrddhena va ella par,;una carati ya etayos santarh par;urh tam anir-
yacyai 'tayor alribhate, 'To Prajapati belong the animals before
birth and while being born, to Rudra after buthj (consequently)
a victIm which (really) belongs to tbese two (gods),-he who takes
such a (victim for slaugbter) without (first) having asked the per-
mission of these two, proceeds with a victim WhICh is (sacrificIally)
spoiled'. K. 30. 9 (p. 191, 4).
Schroeder's text omits tbe avagraha In pa¡;avo 'Jiitiif.
6. devan ha yajñena yajamana1is tan asurarak¡¡asam rarak¡¡ur:
na yak¡¡yadhva tti, tad yad arak¡¡ans tasmad rak¡¡ansi, 'The gods
sacrificing with the sacrifice,-them the Asuras and lm-
peded: "y e shall not sacrifice"; because they impeded (them),
therefore they are (called) Rakr;;ases'. QB. 1. 1. 1. 16.
SpelJer (Ved. und Sanskrit Syntax, § 287, p.91), who mentions thls passage
among anacolouthlC constructJons, calls attentlDn to the   of the
words devan ha ... raraksuh
On tbe sImIlanty of tbls plOleptIc accusahve constructIon wIth the examples
of the proleptic nommatIve see aboye § 10, Delbruck, Altmd. Syntax § 219,
p 394, 1- 8.
Eggelmg translates the v' raks here and m the similar passage ¡;:B 2. 1. 4.
15 (below § 34, Ex 1) by 'forbid'; Weber, lnd Strelfen,l, p. 34 (= ZDMG., 4.
p. 291) by 'verwehren', Delbruck, Altmd Syntax, p. 294, 1 by 'zurückhalten'
(p. 394, 7 'rettefen' must be an oversight); the Commentary glosses Jt al <;;8. 1
1. 1. 16 by v' bandh + and at 2. 1. 4. 15 by v' rudh + m; the context also
(VIZ. the direct dlscom se following' na yaksyadhve and na 'gmr janisyate, na
'gnt adhásyadhve) requires v' raks to mean 'lmpede, obstruct, hmder'.
A v' raks 'mJure' assumed by PW., pw, Grafimann (cf. Bartholomae, Alt·
lran WB.; col. 1516; Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 209, b, p. 240, 6, Macdonell,
VedIc Mythology, p 164, Hopkms, Epic Mythology, § 17, p.38) 15 not quotable
from SanskrIt hterature. The only passage wblCh 15 gIven ID support of such
a root, VIZ. AV. 5 7. 1 ma no raks'ir dakaJ1lam niyamanam do es not reqmre nor
indeed favour the meanmg 'mJure'. Weber, whIle rendermg it in hIS translation
by 'falle llIchl an' admIts in the note the possIblhty of 'wehre llIcht ab', Lud-
WIg translates 'hemme llIcht'; Bloomfield 'do not keep from us', addmg m the
note: 'More partlcularly the poet has in mind the of the pnest; thal
shall not be wlthheld, but .. hall accrue abundantly' j WhItney hesltatingly trans-
lates 'do nol prevent'.
79
§ 33-§ 34, Ex. 1-2. Prolepllc Accusatzve.
The two meanings 'protect' and 'lmpede' are natural developments of the
central meamng 'keep', cf. Enghsh 'keep' = 1. 'guard, protect' and 2 'hold back,
prevent, wlthhold, restram' (Oxfol'J DlCtzonary, nos 14 and 27);. Old Hígh Ger-
man 'war¡an' = 1. 'protect, defend' and 2 'Impede, l'estl'am', Mzddle Hlgh Ger-
man 'weren' = 1. 'protect, defend' and 2 'keep away, hold back', Greek Epúolla¡
= 1 'protect, guard' and 2. 'keep back' (Solmsen, Untersuehungen z. gneeh.
Laut- und Velslehre, p. 245); Latm 'alceo' = 1 'protect' and 2. 'keep off'.
Both Whltney, Roots, s. V raks, p 134, Uhlenbeck, Etymo1. WB. s. rak,·
as, p. 242, col 1 nghUy therefore reJect a V 2 rales 'mJure' for the Sansknt.
For tbe etymologlCal connectlOn of rahas wJtb V rales in our gB passage
cf. tbe connection of raksastva with V r¡'s at RV 8 18. 13 yó nah kár cid rt-
riksati raksastvéna mártyah. Yáska (Nlr. 4 18) glves three 'etymologles' fol'
1. raksztavyam aamad 'one agalllst whom orre sbould be on hls guard'
(Durga: raksitavyam hi fariram asmad bhavati, rakso hi bhaksayatzl¡
2. rahl)sz ksanote, 'he IllJures Jll a desert place', and 3 ratrau nahate, 'he
approaches by nigbt'
§ 33. 2. The accompanying Participle is an Active Perfect
Participle qualified by an object accusative.
1. mdram val vrtrarh jagknw(insam tam samantam mrdkas sam-
priikampanta, 'Indra baving slam Vrtra,-bim (his) detractors
crowded upon on aH sides'. K. 10. 9 (p 135, 20).
Flve lmes before, K. 10 9 (p. 135, 15) wJthout prolepsis' indram vai vrtra¡h
1aghmvatisam mrdho 'sancanta. The V kamp + sam- pra IS here transJtlve as
at K 10. 9 (p. 135, 21) and 25 6 (p. 110, 3).
§ 34. 3. The accompanying Participle is a Future Participle
qualified by an object accusative.
1. devan ha va agnf adhasyamanan tan
na 'gmr janz$yate, na 'gni adhasyadhva iti, tad yad arak$ails tas-
mad   'Tbe gods being about to pIle tbe two fires,-them
the Asuras and Rakeases impeded: "Agm shall not be borll,j ye
shall not pIle the two fires"; because they impeded (them) there-
fore they are (called) Raki¡lases' <;lB. 2. 1. 4. 15.
Cf aboye § 32, Ex. 6 Rem For the ImperatIval future ef. Delbruck, Altiod.
Syntax, § 167, p.293
2. maruto ha vaí kn<:ltno vrtram ham$yantam indram ágatam tam a-
bhitah panciknduh, 'Indra wishmg to slay Vrtra (and) having come,
-him the Sportive Maruts sported about on an sides'. QB. 2.5.3.20.
Immedlately afterwards, wzthout prolepsIs tatho evat 'tam [YG1amánam] pap-
manam aVlbantam hanisyantam ablHtah parikridante.
For the past partlclple agatam ef. below § 35, Ex. 1.
80
Absolute Accusative. § 35- § 36.
§ 35. 4. The accompanying Participle is a Past Participle
Qualifiers.
1. maruto ha vaz kridino vrtram indram agatam, tam
abhztak parzcikriduk, QB. 2. 5. 3. 20, see above § 34, Ex. 2.
2. eta ha suta etena savena yenai 'tat bhavati
ta evai 'tat prznaiz! 'These same divinities which have been con-
secrated by consecration by which he is about to be con-
secrated,-even these he thus gratifies' QB. 9. 3. 4. 5.
3. agním vai prajapatis tam r;amya 'gre samainddha, 'Agni
baving been created,-him Prajapati first kindled with QamI-wood'.
,.. \
K. 8. 2 (p. 80, 4)
4. somalJ, pavate Janita maUnam (SY. 1. 527) iti
$ol}ar;inarh grhUam tam trliyasamne praJanayati, 'The SogB(,lin-cup
which has been drawn at the morning pressing,-tbat he produces
at tbe tbird presslDg witb (tbe verse) SY. 1 527', PB. 2 11. 6.
r Additions from the Aral].yakas and Upanieads.
4 A. yatha somya 1 mahato 'bhyahitasyai 'kam añgararh khadyo-
tamatrarh tam   upasamadhaya pravlayet .. , 'As,
my dear, a single coal of the size of a fire-fiy left over from a
large pilad up (fire),-covering that completely with (dry) grass
Qne would make it blaze up ... ' Chand. Up. 6. 7. 5.
§ 35 A. C. An Accusative depending on a Gerund is
resumed by a Demonstrative Pronoun.
1 A. yatha somya
1
purU$a'ln gandha1'ebhyo an'iya
tam tato 't¿jane Vtsrjet ... , 'As if, my dear, having led a blind-
folded man hlther fl'OlU the (country oí the) Gandharas,-bim one
were to 1et 100se ill a desert place .. ' Challd. Up. 6. 14. 1. J
n. The Absolute Accusative.
§ 36. 1. Semi-disjunct use of the Accusative.
'fhere are a great many instan ces where a Conjunct Accusative
accompallied by a PartiClple (cí. above § 5) may be rendered in
English by a hypotactical clause. Thus, for instan ce, a) KB 18.
12 tam [pa9um] aprúarh paryagnikrtam udañcarn 'When
the Aprl-verses have been recited over this (victim) and the fire
1 Cf Luders, SB. preuli A. W. 1922, p 229
Oertel, The Syntax oí Cases.
6
81
§ 36.
Absolute AccusatJve.
has been carried round it, tbey should lead (it) to tbe north';
b) JB. 1. 240. 4; 5 (TransactlOns of the ConnectlCut Academy of
Arts and Sciences, 15, p. 163 and l64) tan [aQVlnau] dravantav
(5 dravanta) agnzl,¿ (5 'As the two (Ayvms)
were driving along, Agni (the Dawn) blocked (their) way'; c) JB. 2.
142 (Caland, AU8wahl, p. 171) larn [mdram J sarve deva
ablLltaJ¡, samantam paryam9an, 'When this (lndra) had won a com-
plete victory all the gods crowded around him' < cf. above § 33,
Ex. 1 the similar passages, K. 10. 9 (p. 135, 20 and 15), the former
with a proleptic accusative. >; d) JB. 1. 267 retas tat slñcatl, too
reta.') slktam gayatryo ' dvardhayatl, 'He tbU8 casts, the seed; after
thlS seed has been cast, be causes (It) to thrive by means of the
Gayatrlj e) JB. 3. 310, prajapai1m sasrjanam mukhatal; pap-
ma ' 'After Prajapatl bad created offspring, evíl bOllnd (him)
at the roouth' < Finite forros of the V sa 'bind' accordmg to
the nu-class are confined to JB. 3. 310 where as'mot occurs three
times. >; f) JB. 1. 238 (Caland, lruswahl, p. 92) te [deval,¿] val tan
[annadyam] na 'vindanta,. ') tan avmdamanan [agnzbJ abrav;¡;t. .,
'The gods did not find tbat (food); ... ; when tbey could not
find (it), Agni said (to thero)'; g) JB. 2. 297 (Caland, Auswabl,
p. 200) tena hal 'tena [yaj1ienaJ marttto yata ca-
krate lme ced va idam samapayantt maruta eve ' dam sarvam bha-
'tt, 'Indra and Agni observed tbe Maruts as they proceeded
witb this (sacrifice): "If these Maruts accomplish tbis they will
become this All'" j h) TS. 6. 1. 5. 3 devavifam khalu vm kalpama-
nam manu$yavifam anukalpate, 'As tbe subJects of tbe gods are
in barmony, so he brjngs the human subjects jnto barmony'
(KeJtb), 1) TS. 3.2.1. 3 tam [pavamanam] viehldyamanam adhvaryo[¡,.
prano 'nuviehidyate, 'lf this (Pavamana) be cut in twain tbe breath
of the Adbvaryu-priest would be cut in twain as a consequence
thereof' j J) AB. 2. 15. 13 ma 'yajrtty(j¡k vacam prodztam anupra-
'We w111 not enter upon the recitation after a speech
unsmted to the sacrifice has been uttered'; k) JB. 1. 111 tak
    pranam vwtdana anvasacanta, 'When these (crea-
tures) had found breath, the followed after (tbem); 1) K.
23. 9 (p. 85, 16) tam (yajñam] sriwantam yajamá1l0 'nu parasravali
pmjaya ca ca, 'When tb18 sacrifice leaks tha sacrificel"
82
Absolute Accusahve § 36- § 37, Ex. 1.
also togetber witb (his) offspring and cattle leaks In consequence
thereof'; m) Chand. Up. 3 19.3 tam [adttyam] Jayamánarh ulü-
lavo   sarvant ca bhütam sarve ca kamal)" 'When this
(sun) was being born, noise and jubllation arose after (iW and aH
beings and aU wisbes'; n) Chand. Up. 4 16. 3 yajñum
yajamano   'When tbe sacrifice comes to grief, tbe sacri-
ficer (al so) comes to gnef in consequence thereof, 5 yaJñam pratt-
yajamáno 'nupratztl$thatl, 'Wben tbe sacrifice has a firm
stand, the sacnficer (also) bas a firm stand in consequence thereof'.
Sucb metances could be quoted in great number, but tbere is
nettber an external nor an internal indication wbich would warrant
the assumption of a disjunct accusative much less tbat of an
Absolute Accusahve in any of tbem (cf. aboye § 3, 1, Cj § 4-6).
The mere presence of a participle is not sufficient to make tbe
case a disjunct one. Except for the presence of a participle
examples hke those given aboye under h), 1), 1) do Dot differ in
any way from passages like JB 1. 114 gayatl''im chzdram karoti,
gayatrilh chzdram anu yajf¿as sravah yajñam anu yajamano yajamán-
am anu prajah, 'He makes the GayatrI leaky; in consequence of
the Gayatrt (being) leaky the sacrifice leaks, in consequence of
the sacrifice (leaking) the sacrificer (leaks); in consequence of the
sacrIficer (leaking) the offspring (leaks)'; JB. 1. 178 yajñayajñiyam
chidram 7carotz, yajñayajñ¡yam chzdram anu yaJiias sravatt yajiiam
amt yajamano yajamanam anu prajah, 'He makes the Yajfiayajulya
leaky; in consequence of the YajílayajfiIya (bring) leaky the sacri-
fice leaks; -in consequence of the sacrifice (leaking) the sacrIficer
(leaks); in consequence of the sacrificer (leakmg) the offspring
(leaks)', where a predlcate adjective takes tbe of tbe parti-
ciple or the noun is used without any qualifier.
§ 37. The Absolute Use of the Accusative.
In the following passages an Absolute Accusative may be as-
sumed with more or less certainty:
1. te [añgzrasalt] vatsam upavasrJann : zdam no havyam pradapaye
'il, so 'bravid: varam Vrnal, daga ma rairír jatam na dohan, asam-
gavam matra saha carani 'tI, tasmad vatsam Jatam daga j'atnr na
1 Cf. RV. 1 66.10, 69 10; TB 2 7 9.4, K 37.1 (p 86, 7), Chand Up. 1. 11. 7.

83
§ 37, Ex. 1.
Absolute Accusative
duhanh, asamgavam matra saha carati, varevrtam hy asya, tasmad
vatsarh rudro ghatukalJ" ati hi sarhdham
'These (Angirases) admitted the calf (to the speekled eow, saying).
"Cause (her) to give this oblation to us"; this (ealf) said: "Let
me eho08e a boon; when 1 am born ye shall not milk (tile mother
cow) for the spaee of ten nightsj let me stay with (my mother)
untJI the time when tbe eows are together"; therefore
wben a calf is born they do not milk (the mother eow) for the
spaee of ten nights, it stays with (its) mother until the time when
tbe eows are driven together, for that is its cbosen boon; there-
fore Rudra is fain to slay a calf wbich is admitted to and sucks
(the motber cow at any other time), for it sucks transgressing
the covenant'. TB. 2 1. 1. 3.
H IS clear that In the two c\auses ma ratr'ir Jtuam na dohan and tas-
mad vatsatit Jiita¡it rlitllr na duhanti the accusatIves mii Jiitam and vatsam
)lHam cannot depend as dlrect obJects on the ,1 duh for which the Commentary
correctIy supplies [gam] as dLrect obJect. In the first mstance the Commentary
explains mti jatam by assummg an elhpsís of drstva (1atam mti¡h da¡:a
ratrir bhavanto glim na duhantu)-clearly a mere make-shlft. Bohthngk (ZDMG.,
54, P 514) proposes an emendabon of dohan and duhanti lo drñhan and dril,-
hanti respectlvely; but, as Geldner (Ved. Stud. 3, p. 111, note 3) pomts out, thls
emendation lS not acceptable because the V drnh 15 never used m the sense of
'tymg up' a calf, but always means 'to mJLke firm, to sleady' 1; moreover the
Commentary IS expbcIl on tbls pomt· 'tud dharmatrayam avagamyate
darasu 1'litrisu ks'iram na grahyam, lisarhgavUlh matrli saha vatso
mocaniyah, parelin mtituh saka¡;iid apakartavya   Geldner's mterpretation of
lhe two accusabves as 'peculiar accusatIves of time' seems the most plausible
solutlOn of lhe dIfficulty
On the passage TB 2 1. 2 6 tad [agnthotram] dhüyamiinam adityo 'bra-
vil, whlch Geldner cItes as a paralleI construclion cf helow, Ex. 3.
The Accusalives Absolute mam JtUam and vatsam Jtitam would thus be equl-
valent to the Absolute Locahves *mayi Jate and *vatse 1tite, cf. TS. 2. 2. 5 3-4
vai,vanaram ntrvapet putre Jtite, _ ., yasmiñ ¡lita etam HUm
mrvapatt pütah 11 eva teJasvy annlida indriyavi 'He should olfer
(a cake) on twelve potsherds to when a son is bom, _ ; (a son)
at whose hirth he olfers thls offering becomes pure, splendld, an ea ter of food,
strong, (and) possessed of cattle'; JB. 1. 297 tas/JIlid yajflayaJfliyasya stotre varam
dadylid yatha putre Jate varam dadati, 'Therefore at the Stotra of the YaJñayaJniya
be should grant a boon, Just as they grant a boon when as son IS born'; GB 14,
1 Cf the YaJus APG.l 13 11 drñha glih parallel to drñha gopattm
84
Absolute AccusatJve. § 37, Ex. 2-3.
- .
9.4.23 (= BAU. 6.4.23 M;idhy. = 24 Klinv.) [putre] jate 'gmm upasamadhiiya ...
Juhott, 'When (a son) is born, puttmg {fu el) on the fire " he makes the offermg'.
For another mstance of the jatam cf below, Ex. 6 .
. 2. vi va etad yajnarh c7nndantt yat saijahasamtatarh santam atha
'har utsrJantt, 'Verily they cut the sacrifice in twain if, while it
(= the sacrIfice) is a continuously performed six-day rite, they
leave out a day'. TS. 7. 5. 6. 3.
The Commentary glosses: sadahair abhzplavap1 sthyarüpath satatyena vartarna-
nam yaJñam upetya gady ahar utsrJeyur etena yajnam vzchindanty eva, supplymg
upetya as governing the accusatJve sadakasamtatam santam, as 1t supplies drstva
In the preceding example (TB 2. 1. 1. 3, abo ve Ex. 1) and at TB 2 1. 2 6
(below, Ex 3).
For atha after the Accusative Absolute cf. KB 30 5 (below, Ex 6) and § 7, b.
For sadahasatiltata cf K. 33. 7 (p. 32, 17) san¡ sa{laham tanvantl
In the following passage the assumption of an Absolute Accu-
satIve lS not necessary:
3. tad [agnihotram] dhuyamanam adityo 'bravin miZ hau$ih, ubhayor
va?, nav [viz. mama ca agnef ca] etad itz, so 'gnzr abraHt: katham
nalt ]¿osyanfi 'h, sayam eva tubhyam juhavan pratar mahyam tty
abmVit, tasmad agnaye sayam hüyate süryaya pratah, 'When this
(Agnihotra was being offered)' (or, 'WIth reference to this Agnihotra
as it was being offered', see the Remark) AdItya sald: "Do not
offer it, for It belongs to both of us (viz. to me aud to Agni)";
Agni said: "How shall they offer it to both of us?" (Adltya) said:
"In the evening they shall offer it to thee, ID the morning to
me"; therefore they offer (the Agnihotra) in the evening to Agni,
ID the morning to Sürya'. TB. 2. 1. 2 6.
This example lS uted by Geldner, Ved. Stud. 3, p. 111, note.3, as a parallel
to the Absolute Accusatives at TB.2 1. 1. 3 (above, Ex 1) The Commentary
glosses' tad dhüyarnanam by tad dhavir agnyartham p1'UJapatma hüyamanam
  assummg an elhpsls of drstvli as lO TE. 2 l. 1. 3 (aboye Ex. 1), Just as
It assumes an elhpsls of upetya at TS 7. 5. 6. 3 (above Ex 2).
It IS, however, not necessary to construe tad dhüyarniinam In thls passage
as an Absolule Accusahve, the accusahve may depend on abravU' 'WIth reference
to thls (Agmhotra) as It was bemg offered AdItya sa1d'. cr. for the accusabve
wIth V brü in the sen¡,e of 'to say wJth reference to someone or somethmg'.
QB 11 8 3 b (below § 38, Ex. 1) and e g: QB. 10.3.5 15; 11. 4.2 1; 11. 6 2.
5, 11. 7. 2. 4: 12.4.1. 4; 12.4, 2.7, 9: 12 4.3.6,7: 8, 12.5.1. 17: T8. 6. 4.
10.2; 6.5.5 3, MS. 3.1.4 (p. 5, 7); K. 8.7 (bIS, p 87,3 and 5); 21. 2 (p. 39,
12); 21. 6 (p. 45,7), 22 6 (p. 62, 20), AB. 2. 21. 2; 2.22 3, 2 28.3; 5; 2
85
§ 37, Ex. 4. Absoij.¡te Accusabve.
7, GB.2 3.7;AB.4 77, 6.26.6;KB 7.9(p.33,9);9.4(p 43,1); 127 (p 56,
23), 13.9 (bis, p 61,2 and 4); 14.2 (p. 62,9), 17.1 (p. 75, 8); 23 6 (p 106,1),
PB. 4 8 t 2 (bis); 15 12 3, 20 3 2. The closest paraIlels to our passage are
<;B 3. 7. 3 11 tiin etad devil ahsthamaniins tlJastilram abruvan, 'The gods saíd
to Tvastr with regard to these (ammals) whICh wele unwtlllllg to submlt', <;8. 11.
8.3. 5 tasmad u pa¡;um sarilJñaptarh brüyac' chetam ntt muhürtam ¡ti, 'Thele-
fore he should say wüh regard to the qUleted (= slaughtered) vlctlm "Let lt
lie a moment"'; AB. 8 12 'ji 8.17.5, tam [1fldram, 8 17 5 ra)anam] etasyam
4sandyam ilsInarh   deva abruvan (8 17 5 asIna,h riijakartaro brüyur)' na
va. anabhyutkrusta mdro (8. 17. 5. Tcsatrlyo) v¡ryam kartum
arhaty abhy enam 'it, 'Wllh regard to thls [IndIa; king] seated upon
thls lhlOne lhe All Gods [the kmg-makers] said [should say]. "Verlly, lndra [lhe
Ksatnya] cannot develop strenglh unless he IS greeted wilh shouts of acclamatlOn,
let us greet hlm Wlth shouts of acclamatlOn".'
4. pratyupahuto 'chavako: nivartadhvam ma 'nugate (RV 10. 91.
1) 'ty etasya saktasya paryapnuyat tavat'ir anudraved dhota
va prattkaminam achavakam, 'The Achavaka-priest, being invited,
should run over as many (verses) of the hymn .RV. 10. 91 as he
may be able to grasp, or the Hotr-pnest (should do so) if the
Achavaka-priest be unwilling (?)'. KB. 13. 8.
Lindner's text, eVldently by a mere overslght, reads vii 'pratlkammam.
AJ; lhe lext stands It lS hardly posslble to construe lhe accusatJve pratikaminam
achiiviikam as anythmg but an absolute aCtUSatlve But it IS not Imposslble lhat
after achaviikam the gerond pratyupahuya sbould be mserted, cf. QQ. 7 6.8 (= 12)
anupahüto 'chiivako nlVartadhvam fti süktasya yavac cllaknuYiit tilvad anudravet,
9 (= 13) hofti vii pratlkamtnam achiiviikam pmtyupahüya 'WIlhout being called
upon the Achavaka-pnest should ron over as much of the bymn RV. 10 91 :lb
he can, or the Hotr-pnest (5hould do :;0) after he has called (in vam) on an
unWllhng Achavaka-pnebt'
Kelth, who renders 'Or a Holr (may do so) to an unwilhng Achavaka',
suggests aD emendallOn to hotO, va prati pratikaminam achiiválcam.
The compound pmtikilmm must mean here and at QQ 7. 6. 9 (= 13)
'unw!lllllg', wlllle pratikiimma (cf. Whitney § 441, b; 1209, e) 1 \Vhlch is
found at KB. 15. 3 (p 67, 7 -8) = 15. 4 (p. 68, 4-5) prat¡lctiminam anniid-
yam atti appears to mean 'Ulldesu'able' (PW., pw. 'unerwünschl, wider-
wiirtig', Keith 'unpleasant'). For the fOrLe of prati cf. Wackernagel, Alt-
indo Gr. 11, 1, p. 313, § 119, b, e, 1 The relahon of pmtikamm(a) lo anu-
kiimin (m lhe YaJu5 TS 3.5 6 1 athii 'ha m anukltmln'i 2 8ve loke tila)
15 parallel to that of prahküla to anuküla, lo anuloma.
I The assumption of a transfer to the a-declenSlOn seems to me much preferable
lo Keltb's second alternative ofa change of the gender of annádya (HOS XV, p.81)
2 So also the parallel ApQ., lhe MQ. parallel has anugaminf.
86
Absolute AccusatIve. § 37, Ex 5-6.
5. tan nanachandasyanam sahasram sat sahasram brhatyaf.¿ sam-
padyante, KB. 18. 3. Cf above § 26, Ex. 3.
The case·forro of sahasram sat IS amblguous, It may be nomlllatIve.
6. tam [yajamanam J brahmanachanS'tne prayacchat't, tam sa sukir-
tma yonina pratzgrhnat't, jatam athai 'tam pañktü;añsam
nyüñkham 9arisaty, a¡¡nam nyarikho, jata eva 'smtris tad annadye
'He hands hup (the sacrificer) over to tbe Brabmar;lil-
cbansin-pnest; be (= tbe latter) receives him with the Sukirti-
bymll (RV 10. 131) as womb; whell be (tbe sacrificer) is born,
tbell he recites tbe (RV. 10. 86) as a Paükti-set
(and) with tbe Nyfiükba-insertion; tbe Nyfiñkba-insertion is (iden-
tical witb) food, thus even as he is born, he takes his firm stand
in this food-eatillg'. KB. 30. 5
The AB parallel lb. 29) IS mUlh more detailed. Accordmg to It lhe Sukirti-
bymn is the dlVlne womb (6 29 1 devayomr vai sukirtlh) from WblCh the sacrl·
ticer IS begol by lhe Brabmanachansm.priest (6. 29. 1 tad ya)ntid devayonyai
yajamtinam prajanayatJ; 5. talh brahmanachansi janayltvii .•. ),
the Vrsakapi·hymn IS ldentified wIlh tbe body, and thus by lhe recltatlOn of thls
bymn the body of the sacrificel is shaped (6. 29. 2 atma vai vrsiikapir, atmanam
eva 'sya [ya1am4nasya] tal kalpayah)¡ the Nyuñkha IllserllOn (i. e. the Inserbon
of tbe syllable 'o') is Idenbfied wilh food, tbus the rE'cltabon of the Vrsakapi-
bymn wlth the Nyllñkba-inserbon provides food for the new-born sacnficer (6. ':29.
3 anna1it va' nyutikhas, tad asmai [yajamanaya] Jatayti 'nntidyal1l PI at,dadhati
yatha kumariiya stanam) , tbe Pentad·form of the   hymn IS idenbfied
wJth the five elemellts oC which the human body is composed, viz. hair, skm,
flesh, bones, and marrol'V; thus by the recltatlOn of tbe Vrsakapi hymn m Pentad-
form the sacrificer receJves size and shape of aman (6. 29 4 sa piiñkto bhavah,
piiñkto 'yalh purusah paff,cadhá V¡hlto: lomani tvañ mlZñsam astM maj)ti, sa
yiivan eva purusas tavantam yajamiinalh samskarot¡), after the sacnficer has thus
been {re)bom the Brlthmanltchansm-prlest hands hlm over to the Acbavaka-
pnest who provldes fil m btandmg for him (6. 29 5 ta¡h [yajamanam] briihmana-
chanS¡; janayitva ' chavlikaya samprayacchaty: etasya tvam pratJstham kalpaye 't,).
Cf. the simIlar account at AB. 5. 15. 4, where wlth the Nii.bhanedlstha
hymn the seed IS cast (nabhanedislhenal 'va reto 'BÍff,cat) , wlth the Vala.·
khllya-verses the body IS shaped (tad valakhllylibhw vyakarot) and WIth
the Sukirtl.hymn the \Vomb is made to open for dehvery (sukirtina
kaks¡vatena yonim vyahapayat; the Commentary: tena suk'irtina hotti yOnlm
vyahapayad garbhanirgamaya vivrtam akarot).
In the more condensed KB passage It 18 clear that jiitam cannot be taken as
dlrect obJect of pratlgl'hntiti nor can It be construed as conJunct case wltb the
followmg It is probably best taken as Absolute AccusatIve equivalent to
87
§ 38. Absolute Accusative.
an Absolute LocatIve *tasmifl jate, er. abo ve TE. 2. 1. 1. 3 (Ex. 1) mlim jatam
and vatsam Jiitam, the only dlfference between these and the jlitam of KB. bemg
the absence oí" the'subject tam m the latter.
KeJth notes' 'Jatam represents an ellIptical clause', and he renders:
'Him he recelVes in the womb of the Sukirb (hymn)j for hlm born he
recItes In Pañktl-form wIth repetition of o the hymn', takmg
apparently the elliptlcal jlitam as equivalent to a conJunct jatiiya depend-
mg on ¡;añsah. •
,
For atha after the absolute accusatIve cf TS. 7. 5. 6. 3 (above Ex. 2) and
aboye § 7, b.
§ 38. The following two passages do not belong here:
1. tasmad U putram jatam akrUanabhlm pañca bralmzanan bruyad
ity enam anupranzte 'ti, 'Therefore, with reference to a new-born
son whose navel-string has not yet been cut he should say to
five BrahmaI}.as: "Breathe ye him successively in this manner".'
QB. 11. 8. 3. 6.
The accusative putram jatam akJttanlibhtm is nelther an Absolute Accusahve
= 'when a son has been born, (but) before the navel-string has been cut', nor
is it a Proleptlc Accusahve anticlpatmg the ob¡ect of anuprámta, but It depends
as second accusahve on briiyat, cf. aboye § 37, Ex 3 Remark. The closest
parallel IS gB. 3 7. 3 11 tan [pa¡;un 1 etad devli atisthamlinliñs tvastliram abruvan:
... , 'The gods sald to   wlth regard to these (ammals) whlch dld not
subrnü' .
2. atha vai pa(!Um alabhyamanam nirupyate (read with
Lindner against a11 mss. 'numrupyate) 'Along wIth the victim as
it is being taken (for slaughter) a cake is offered'. KB 10. 5.
Lmdner's emendation of the reading of all mss mrup!Jate to 'nunirupyate
(on the antt- of whlCh the accusative lilabhyamanam depends) lS patently
correcto It IS supporled by the reading ot the mss 0, L, and e yatra purolja¡;o
'nunwupyate lmmedlately below (p. 48, 2) where Lindner by an overslght ha.,
accepted the reading of the single ms. ?tI. nirupyate into his text, ef. gB. 3. 8. 3.
2 yatra kva cat 'sa purodli,o 'numlupyate, and, wJth the locatIve pacau,
AB 2. 8 7; 2. 11. 11, 12 pa{:au pul'odlipam anumrmpanti.
88
Disjunct Insi! umental § 39.
3. The Disjunct Instrumental.
§ 39. No clear example of a Disjunct Instrumental has been
noted in the prose of the BrahmaIfas or in that of the Aranyakas
and Upanieads.
Germs out oí which an Absolute Instrumental might have
developed are indeed not wanting.
For such constructlOns of an Instrumental acrompamed by a parLIclple III
Classlcal Sansknt cf de Saussure, De l'emplOl du gemtJf absolu en Sanscflt, 1881,
p. 94, note 1, who remarks: 'Cette construchon est fréquente surtout a l'mstrurnental,
et II vaut la peme d'ajoutel, qu'elle a éte bIen pres d'engendler un tlOlsleme
cas absolu sansmt', SpeiJer, Sansknt Synlax, § 372, p.290; § 375, p. 292-293;
Ved. und Sansk. Syntax, § 213, p. 65.
Thus a) AB. 1. 13. 8 (cited by Speijer, Sansknt Syntax, § 375,
p. 293, note 2) glosses RV. 10. 71 10 sárve nandantt yafásá 'gatena
(sabhasahéna sákhya sákhayah) by sarro ha va etena [somena] kr'f,ya-
mU'!lena nandati which might well be rendered by 'Everyone rejoices
when this (Soma) is being purchased' < ef. the Locative Absolute
some krite below § 60, Ex. 48-54> and b) RB. 27. 1 nandatz
ha vai yajño mdusa 'gacchata, 'The sacnfice rejoices when a knowmg
one approaehes' < cf. the Locatives Absolute with agate below
§ 59, Ex. 74-79 and with the present partiClple of -y' t + a below
§ 61, Ex. 74-79 >, but in both passages the Instrumentals are
reany conJunct cases dependmg on the -y' nand 'Everyone rejOlces
at this (Soma) when it is being purchased', and 'The sacrifice
rejoices at a knowing one when he approaches' <= cf. the simple
Instrumental without accompanying partiClple GB. 1. 1. 1 tena
[snehenaJ 'nandat; 1. 1. 2 tabhir [svedadharabJnh] anandat; SB. 1. 6. 2
ye yajfiasya vg'rddhena na nandanl¡ nandaniz yat sam1 ddhena; 1. 6 3
yo 'ham yaJnasya vyrddhena nandarm nandamt yat samrddhena, and
cf. below § 63, Ex. 3 Rem. toward the end > c) Eggeling renders
\lB. 1. 2 4. 7 tena samfltena na 'tmanam upasprfati na prthivim by
,
89
§ 39. DisJunct Instrumental
<When it bas been sbarpened be does not touch either himself
or the eartb' but tbe Instrumental is really to be construed as
conjunct case witb upaspr9ati: "With it, when it has been shAr-
pened, he dóes not touch either hImself or tbe earth' < cf. the
similar Instrumental aecompanied by a participle dependmg on
the -V lHñs: QB. 1. 2. 4. 7 ned anena va}rena samfitena 'tmanam va
prthwi'm hlnasam, 'Lest I hurt myself or the earth with tbis
weapen which has been sharpened'; 1. 2 4. 15 ned anena vajrena
Prthivfm huzasan'l, 'Lest 1 hurt the earth with this weapon
which has beell sharpened', 9. 1. 1. 27 na hy avatatena
kam cana hznash, 'For with a bow which is unstrung he injures
no one'. > d) QB. 1. 6. 3 36 and 37 sa visrastazh parvabJur na
fafaka samhatttln and sa smhhitazh parvabhtr z,dam annadyam
abhyuttasthau may be rendered by 'His joiúts being relaxed, he
was not able to rise
1
', and 'His joints havmg been repaired he
stood up for food-eating', but it literally means: 'With his relaxed
joints he was not able to rise', and 'With his Joints l'epaired he
stood up for food-eating < ef. QB. 4 6. 4. 2 yen a ' yam samahasta,
'Wlth what (fast-food) he raised himself'; 5. 2 1. 14 9trpna yüpam
atyuJjlhite, 'With his head he rises above the saerificial stake' =
'He raises his head above the stake'; 10. 6. 2. 8 almtibhir hy agnir
  'For by means of the oblations Agni stands (= blazes)
up'; 9 candramasa hy lidttya   'For by means of the moon
the SUD stands up'; 10 annella hl prána utti
p
thatl, 'For by means
of food breath up'; 8. 2. 4 20 pürvardhena ca }aghanardhena
ca pafur uc ca sam ca vu,;atl 'With Its fore-part and with
its hind-part an animal stands up and lies down' >. Of like
character are e) AB. 1. 27. 1 taya [vaca] mahánagnya (for the n
ef. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, p 194, § ] 73) bhataya sontam rajanam
akri1Jan, 'With this (Speech) who had become a coudesan (as
purchase money) they purchased King Soma'; T8. 6 1. 7. 7 anuma-
tayai 'vai 'naya [vaca somam] kr'inati 'WIth thIS (Speech as purchase
money) after sbe has consented he purchases (the Soma); QB. 3. 2.
4. 10; 15 pritaya [vaca] somam kr1nám 'May I buy the Soma
with Speech who is gratified'. f) AB. 2. 31. 2 tam [vaJram] e$am
1 For r ha + sam cf Lüders, S13. preul3 A. W. 1916, P 289.
90
Absolute Instrumental § 39-§ 40.
{ devanilm] asura na pratyabudhyanta, . .   nan ap"attbuddhena
'gIman, 'The Asuras did not notice this (weapon) of these (gods), .
wIth this (weapon) unnoticed (the gods) slew these (Asuras). g) QB.
2. 4. 1. 1: 4. 6. 9. 24 taya [vaca] samrddhaya 'fi$am lifaste (4. (i.
9. 24   arasate) 'With thIS (Speech) who has been made to
prosper he (they) asks (ask) a blessing (blessings); 1. 8. 1. 17 taya
[idaya] 'tmañ .chrtaya hota ya}amanaya   araste, 'Wüh this
(Iq.u) which is boiled in the self the Hotr-priest invokes a blessing
for the sacrificer' < cf. the simple Instrumental without partrcIple
with aQaste at QB. 1. 8.1. 9; 10; 11; 1. 9 1.16; 3.5 1.
22; 3.5.2.9; 3.7.4.9, AB 1. 13. 19; PB 11. 10.10; 13.12.7;
15. 5. 13 >. h) MS. 3. 8. 6 (p. 103, 8-10) atho havisa va etat
skannena dvit'iyam arl§am avarunddhe, ... , kzm u sa yajñena yajeta
yo skannena dvítiyam avarundham na v/dyat, 'Even
though the oblation be spilled (literally: 'Even with a spIlled
oblation') he attams the second blessing; .. , but why should he
sacrifice wIth a sacrifice who doth not know how to attain the
second blessing even though the oblation be spIlled (literally: 'even
with a spilled oblation')?' < The parallel K. 15. 7 (p. 112, 7) reads'
kl1n u sa yajeta yo yaj11asya skannena na vaS'iyant syat, 'Why should
he sacrifice who doth not grow stronger through the spIlled (part)
of the sacrifice?' > 1) QB. 6. 3 1. 14 na ky ayuktena manasa kzm
cana raknott kartwm, 'For when the mind lS unyoked (literal1y:
<with an unyoked mind') he IS not able to accomplish anything'.
J) QB. 3. 5. 3. 11 tabkyam [manasa ca vdca ca] yuktabhyam yojñam
tmwate 'Wjth these two (viz. mind and speech) yoked they per-
form the sacrifice'; 4. 6. 9. 2l taya [vaca] 'p'inaya yatayamnyo
'ttaram altas tanvate, 'With this (Speech) strengthened (and) lll-
vigorated tbey perforro (the rite of) the last day'
§ 40. The most noteworthy example of an incIpient Absolute
Instrumental denoting time is udyata süryena at TB. 2. 7. 9. 4
ttdyata saryena udyantam va etam sarvd[t prajalJ, pratinan-
danti, 'When the sun rISes (literally: 'WIth the rising sun') it
should be performed; for all creatures joyfully greet hIm (the sun)
when he rises'l. The parallel passage K. 37. 1 (p. 85, 7) bas bere
I cr. RV.1. 66.10,69.10; Chilnd. Up.1.11. 7; 3 19.3
91
§ 42 - § 43, Ex. 1. ProleptIc Ablative.
niravapann aíndrágnam dVádafakapálam pttrorj,Mam, 'For tbese two
(viz. for Indra aud Agni) theu,-as one would cook a common
mess or a goat for two relatives or for two friends who have
come together (on a Vlslt),-that namely is buman (practice), (but)
to tbe gods (belongs) the oblatlOn,-even so tbey spread for these
two (VIZ. Indra and Agni) a common ojfering, VIZ. the sacrificial
cake on twelve potsherds sacred to Indra and Agni'. QB. 1. 6.4. 3.
Cf the similar resumpbon of a gemtIve after a lIathti·clause below § 45, Ex 2,
and cf. § 9, Ex. 18 and Additions from the AralJyakas and Upanisads § 11,
Ex lA.
§ 42. In tbe instances in wbich the Dative is accompanied
by a Participle it always fully retains Its conjunct character; thus
QB. 1. 6. 4. 12 vrtram hy asma [mdráya] etaj   g h n u ~   apyayanam
akurvan, 'For tbey prepared an invIgorating (drink) for tbis (rndra)
when be had sIain Vrtra'; TB. 2. 3. 8. 3 tasmaz [prajápataye)
manusyant sasrjanaya dWá devatrá 'bhavat, 'For tbIS (PrajapatI)
when he had created men there was day among tbe gods'; MS.
4. 2. 1 (p. 21, 6) tasmai [prajapataye] pttrnt sasrjanaya dwá 'bhavat,
'For this (PraJapab) when he bad created the Fathers there was
day'; QB. 11. 1. 6. 7; 11 tasmai [prajápataye] devant (7 omits
devánt) sasrjánáya dwe 'vá 'sa, 'For this (PraJapati) when be had
created the gods tbere was, so to speak, day',
For the hypostasis of dú'á in the last three examples cf below § 59,
Ex 8 Rem
5. The Disjunct Ablative .
• 1. The Proleptic Ablative.
§ 43. Only oue example of a Proleptic Ablative has been
noted i it consists of a serIes of simple llouns wbich are immediateIy
resumed by a demonstratlVe Prono un.
1. antank$ad divah prthwya ahoratrabhyarh tebhya en un sarvebhyo
nzrbhaJaü, 'From the atmosphere, from tbe sky, froID the earth,
from day and mght,-from aH these he excIudes them (VIZ. bis
rivals)'. K. 34. 4 (p. 38, 12)
94
Proleptlc Ablative. § 44.
The parallel PB 9 4 18 has ffithout prolepsls asya amusga adyaft'an
thunád ahorátrábhyam eva 'nan mrbhaJatl. 'From tbls (earth). from yonde! (sky).
flOm to.day and to-rnorrolV, from (procreatJve) umon, from day and mght he
excludes tbem'.
§ 44. There are numerous examples in WhICh a eonjunet
ablative is aceompanied by a participle and where It would be
possible to the two by a hypotactical clause, but in aIl
these passages there is neither a formal nor a semantlC indication
to show that, in the mind of the speaker, the Ablative with its.
participle had assumed an independent character.
Thus, a) QB. Ó. 2. 1. 18 brhaspater ha va prthwf
bzbhayam cakara, 'Oí Brhaspati, after he had been consecrated,
tbe eartb was afraíd'; b) AB. 1 13. 24 bzbhyah val somad raJiia.
rtyafo yajamanasya grhaq, 'The house of the sacTlficer stands in
fear of king Soma when he approaches'; e) QB. 6. 4. 4. 16 etad
dhab 'tasmad [agnef¿] ayata bzbhyatz, 'Now the plants are
afraid of this (Agm) when he approaches', d) MS. 1. 6. 3 (p. 89,
15-90, 1) agner va zyam [vedzf¿] srstad abtbhed, 'Of Agni when
he had been created this (altar) was afraíd'; e) TS. 2. 4 13. 1;
K. 11. 4 (p. 148, 6) deva va1- rajanyaj jayamanad abzbhayul¡" 'The
gods were afraid of the Rajanya as he was born'; f) QB. 5. 5. 2. 2
sa ttdyatad vajrad vrtro bzbhayam cakara, TS. 6. 5. 1. 1 sa vrtro
vajrad udyatad abzbhet, 'Th1S Vrtra was afraid of the thunderbolt
when it was raised'; g) MS. 3. 9. 3 (p. 116, 2) vaJro vai yúpas.
fasmad va tme loka mryamanad btbhyatt, 'The sacrificial post 18-
(ldentical witb) the thunderboltj of it, as it is caused to move
forward, these worlds are afraid'; h) TS. 6. 3. 3. 3 zme vai loka
yüpat prayato b-zbhyatz, 'These worlds are afraíd of the sacríficial
stake as lt moves forward', < on Weber's proposed change of
prayato to prapalo see below § 59, Ex. 231 Rem >, 1) QB 3. 6.
4. 13 vajrat pracyavamanad lokah sarhreJante, 'These worlds
tremble at the thunderbolt when lt moves forward'; J) QB. 3. 9.
4. 18 zme ha val dyavaprthwi etasmad vajrad ttdyatat samrejete,
'These two, heaven and earth, tremble at tbis thunderbolt when
Jt is raised',   K. 31. 3 (p. 4, 19) ¡me val, loka grMtaa
ltdavepanta; MS. 4. 1. 5 (p. 7, 6) havzso grhltad zme Zoka udavepanta,
'Tbese worlds trembled at the oblatlOn when It had been taken',
9&
§ 44. Proleptre Ablative.
< Note that the parallel passage TB. 3. 2. 4. 7 has here the
Loeative Absolute: dyavaprthiví haVl§i udavepetam (er. below
§ 60, Ex. 60) >; 1) QB. 2.4 1 14 etad dha grhapate[t
ilgatad grha[t samuttrastil iva bhavanti, 'Now the house vlOlently
trembles, so to speak, at the master of the house, when he, having
been away from home on a journey, has returned'; m) QB. 5. 4.
3. 2 varunad dha va 'tnd;lyam viryam apacakrama,
5. 4. 5. 1 varu1'}ad dha va bhargo 'pacakrama, 'From
VarUI).a after he had been eonsecrated strength (and) vigour [lustre]
departed'; n) TS. 6. 4. 8. 2 apa mat kraram ca7crusaJ; pat;avaJ¡, km-
misyanti, 'From me who have done a cruel (deed) cattle will
deparf; o) TS 6. 1. 4. 7 apa vai d'ik?dat   mdriyam devata/¡,
kramanti, 'Strength (and) the divinities depart from oue who,
having been consecrated, has gone to sleep'; p) K. 23. 3 (p. 76, 16)
tasmat [yajnat] punar upávartamánád rksáme apákrámatám, 'From
this (sacrifice) when it had returned (to the gods) the and
the Saman departed'; q) K. 27. 2 (p 140,20) tasmat purusat sup-
tat pra1'}apanaU na 'pakramata[t, 'Therefore in-breathing and out-
breathing do not depart from a roan when he has gone to sleep';
r) QB. 12. 4. 1. 10 ar;raddadhánebhyo ha't 'bhyo gaur apakrámatt,
'From them, since they do not believe, the cow departs'; s) QB.
7. 4 1, 16 prajapilter visrastad mmyü tanür madhyata udakrámat,
<From Prajapati, when he had become disjointed 1, the pleasing
form departed from the middle'; QB. 7. 5. 1. 16 prajápater visras-
tat pra1Jo madhyata <From Prajapati when he had
become dlsjointed breath desired to depart from the middle'; QB
6. 1. 2. 12; 7. 1 2. 1 tasmad [praJapateh] Vlsrastát prano madhyata
udakramat, 'From this (Prajapati) when he had become disjointed
breath departed from the middle'; QB. 8. 2. 2. 5 prajapater visras-
tat sarvah praja madhyata udakramann etasya yone[t, 'Froro
Prajapati when he had become disjomted aU creatures departed
from the middle, away from their womb'; QB. 8. 1. 1. 3; 8.2.3.9;
9. 1. 1. 6; 9.4. 1. 2 prajapater msrastilt pra1Ja (8. 2. 3. 9 visrastat
pUfava; 9. 1. 1. 6 visrastlia devata; 9. 4. 1. 2 visrastan mithunany)
udakraman, 'From Prajapati when he had beco me disjointed
1 For the collapse of Pra¡ápati ef. Oldenberg, Nach. Gott. Ges. d. WlSS 1917, p. 3.
96
Proleptlc Ablatlve.
the breaths [the cattle; tbe dlvinities; the. (procreative) unions]
departed'; VB.9 4.2. 13, 16 prajapater visrastad rug (16. viryam)
udakramat, 'From Prajapati when he had become diajointed
brilliancy [VIgOur] departed, t) VB. 11. 4. 3. 1 tasmac chrantat
-tepanac chrir udakramat, 'Froro him having toiled (and) practiced
austerities Fortune departed j u) VB. 7. 5. 2. 8  
.samjtlapyamanebhya eva prana utkramantt, <From these victima as
they are being quieted (= slaughtered) the breaths depart; v) AB.
2. 8. 1-5 puru$am 'Val alabhanta, tasmad alabdhan
medha udakr/lmat ... 11 te ' alabhanta, so ' alabdhád ud-
{17crámat ... 11 te gam /llaManta, so gor alabdhad udakramat . ti te
alabhanta, so 'ver ülabdhad udakramat .. 11 te 'jam alabhanta,
.so 'jad alabdhad udakramat .. , 'Tbe gods took roan as víctlm
{for slaugbter); from him being taken (for slaughter) the sacnficial
easence departed ... ; they took the horae [the ox; the raro; the
goat] (for slaughter); from it having been taken (for slaughter)
this (sacrificial easence) departed', w) GB. 1. 1. 11. tabhya[¡.
.tabhyas taptabhyah samtaptabhya{t fam ity ürdhvam ak$aram ud-
akramat, 'From these being toiled over, beiDg heated, being
thoroughly heated, the syllable "Vam" rose upward'j GB.1. 1. 5
tasmac chrantat taptat samtaptad om iti mana evo' rdhvam aksa,ram
udakramat, 'From this (Atharvaveda) being toiled over, being
beated, bemg thorougly heated the syllable "Om", (viz) the mind,
rose upward'; x) VB. 8. 3. 3. 9 prajapater 'Vtsrastat bhatam
.sarva 'nu vyudakrainan, 'From Prajapati when he had become
disjointed aU beings departed in various directions toward the
quarters'; y) AB. 8 7. 10 athat 'tiini ha tlai ijanad vyut-
krantani bhatanti: brahmak:;atre arg annadyam ... , "Now from
the Keatriya after he had sacrificed, aU these (viz.) the Brahman,
the Keatra, vitality, food-eating ... are departed in various direc-
tions'; z) AB. 8. 8. 7 etani ha vai yany asmad 'ljanad vyutkrantani
bhavantt tany evii 'smifls tad dadhati, '(AH) these (things) whlCh
are departed from him in various directions after he has sacrificed,
-tbese be places (back) into bim < for the Proleptic Accusative
cf. § 31, Ex. 17>; aa) TS. 2. 1. 7. 1 prajapater visrastad reta'"
parapatat, 'From PraJapati when he bad become disjointed the
seed fell away'; bb) JB. 1. 357. 4 -6 (Transactions of the Con-
o ertel, The Synta:z: oí Cases 7
97
§ 44.
Proleptic Ablahve.
necticut Acaderoy of.,."Arts and Sciences, 15, p 155) tan [lokan
prajapatihJ samatapat, tebhyas samtaptebhyas tr'ini r;ukra1Jy udayann:
agnz/.t prthzvya vayur antarik§ad adttyo divah 11 sa etani r;ukrani
punar abhy eva 'tapat, tebhyas samtaptebhyas tr"il1y eva ud-
ayann' rgveda eva' gner yajztrvedo vayos samaveda ad!tyat 11 sa etani
f}ukranz punar abhy eva ' tapat, tebh)las samtaptebhyas triny eva
r;ukrany udayan: bhar ity eva rgvedad bhuva itt yajurvedat svar di
samavedat, 'He (Prajapati) tboroughly beated tbese (worids); froro
them being thoroughly heated these three luminous (bodies) went
up: Agni froro the earth, Vayu froro tbe atroosphere, Aditya froIn
the sky; he agaio heated these lUillmous (bodies), froro them
being thoroughly heated three luminous (bodws) went up: the
Rigveda from Agni, the Yajurveda from Vayu, the Samaveda
froro Aditya; he agaio heated these luminous (bodies); froro them
being thoroughly heated three luroinous (búdies) weot up: "Bhüs"
froro the Rigvada, "Bhuvas" froro the Yajurveda, "Svar" from
the Samaveda'; ce) TS 2 5. 2. 4 tasmaj [vrtrat] Jañjabhyamanaá
agni$omau mrakramatam, 'From tbIS (Vrtra) as be opened his
roonth Agni and Soma went forth'; dd) TS. 6. 3 8. 3 paraii avartate
'dhvaryu/.t pw}oh sanljñapyamanat, 'Tbe Adhvaryu-priest turns away
froro the vlctim as lt is being quieted (= killed); ee) PE. 8.5. 4
tasmat samanaya naszkayah satya nana pra1Jlw   'There-
fore from the nose though it is one two breaths emanate separa-
tely; ff) QB. 11. 5. 8. 1 tasmac chrantat tepanat trayo lo ka asrjyanta,
'From hlro having toiled (and) practICed austerItIes these worlds
were created; QB. 6. 1. 3. 1 tasmac chrantat tepanad apo 'srJyanta,
'From hIro having tOlled (and) practIced austerities the waters
were ereated; gg) AS 5. 32. 1-2 tebhyo [lo7cebhyah] 'bhitaptebhyas
tnni ajayanta, .. , tebhyo 'bJntaptebhyas trayo
veda aJayanta, .. , tebhyo [vedebhyaf1,] 'bhztaptebhyas trtni r;ukrany
ajayanta . ... :1 tebhyo [rukrebhyah] 'bh¿laptebhyas trayo varna aJayanta,
'From these (\rorlds) when they had been heated three hghts
were born; ., j from these (lights) when they had been heated
the three Vedas were born,.. ; from these (Vedas) when tbey
had been heated three luminous (bodies) were boro; ... ; froID
these (luminous bodles) wheo they had beeo heated the tbree ele-
ments (of the syllable "Om", viz. a, u, m) were boro'; QB. 11. 5.
98
Prolepllc Ablahve
§H.
8. 2-4 tebhyas [lokebhya!t] taptebhyas tr'ini Jyoti1i§y aJayanta ... 11
tebhyas [jyotwbhyah 1 taptebhyas trayo veda ajayanta . .. " tebhyas
[vedebhyah] f}ukranyajayanta, 'From these (worlds) when they
had been heated three lights were born, ... , from these (lights)
when tbey bad been beated the tbree Vedas were born,. .; from
these (Vedas) when they had been heated three luminous (bodies)
were born'; bh) QB 6. 1. 3. 1 tasmat taptad apo jayante
'From thIS Person when he is heated tbe waters are born 1'; ii) KB.
6. 1 tasmat [prajapate!tl taptat pañca 'jayanta,' 'gnir vayur adztyaf}
candrama u§üh pañcam't, 'From this (Prajapati) when he was heated
five (divmities) were born Agni, Vaya, Aditya, Can dramas, (and)
Ueas as the fifth'; jJ) QB. 12. 5. 2. 5 tasyai ha [vrkalaym] mdag-
dhaym srgalah sambhavail, 'From this (intestine) when it has been
burnt, a jackal arises'; kk) MS. 3. 2. 8 (p. 28, 4) tasmád retasalj,
szktad paf}uh sarhbhavatt, 'Therefore from the seed when It has
been cast t,his ammal comes mto eXlstence'; 11) QB. 14. 6. 9 31
(= BAU. 3. 9. 31 Madhy. = 28 Kanv.) tasmat tat átunnát (KaI)v.
atrnrJát) prmti raso wa 'hatat (Qloka), 'From this (man)
when he 18 bruised the sap (= the blood) cometh forth as (does
tbe sap) from a tree when it is hewn'; mm) QB. 7. 1. 2. 1 tasmat
pannad annam a sravat, 'From this (Prajapati) when
he had fallen food flowed forth'; Dn) K. 34. 3 (p. 37, 18) atha yo
grwabhyah pravrdhabhyo rasas samasravat ... , 'Now the sap  
flowed from tbe neck when it had been cut ., 00) 1'8. o. 1. 10.
2 agner eva tena [sámna] jatad apahanh, <By means of
tbis (Saman) he dnves away the Rak¡;;ases from Agni when he
lS born'; pp) PB 16.1. 3 yatha va zdam agner jedad agnayo viltrtyante
" , 'Just as here from the fire when it has been born the (other
sacrlfiClal) fires are separately taken .. .', qq) QB. 3. 8. 1. 11, 4
2. 5. 3 st'rrnayai veder dve trite adhvaryur adatte, 'From the altar
after it has been bestrewn the Adhvaryu-priest takes two grasa
blades'; rr) QB. 1. 5. 1. 3 vede(lj,) stirnayai barhtr abhipadya.. ,
'Taking the Barhls from the altar after it has been bestrewn .. .'.
Such instan ces might be multiplied (cf. e. g. JUB. 3. 15. 6- 8;
Cband. Up. 2. 23. 3-4), but though 'there is plenty of material
) cr. Chand. Up 6 2. 3.
7*
99
§ 45, Ex. t-2; § 46, Ex. 1. Proleptlc GemtIve.
out oí which a real Absolute Ablative might haya been developed
such has not been the case. Tha Locative Absolute hamsi grh'ite
parallel to the Ablative havtso grhítad, above, Ex. k), is not sufficient
to establish the absolute character of the ablatival constructiOll.
6. The Disjunct Genitive.
1. The Proleptic Genitive Resumed by a
Demonstrative Pronoun.
§ 45. A. The Simple Proleptic Genitive (without accom-
panying infinita Verb-form).
In Ex. 1 the Proleptic Genitive consists oí a senes of simple
nouns, in Ex. 2 it consists of a single noun which is resumed
by a Demonstrative Pronoun after a yatha-clause.
1. amta va devanam smo 'nanita anyesam,
  j'ivamas   prthwya vatasya 'pam
anitas smas jivamo, ' gnes saryasya divas
anan'itas smas JíVamalj, <By sorne of the gods we
are led OU, by others (we are) not led on; through contact with
some we live, through the presence of others; by the Earth, the
Wind, the Waters,-by them we are led on, through contad with
them we live; by the Fire, the Sun, the Sky,-by them we are
not led on, through tbeir presence we live'. K. 8. 11 (p. 95, 3).
2. tasya ha va etasya bhagavato 'tharvatta r$er yathai 'va brahmano
lomani yatha 'ñgáni yatha prana evam eva 'sya sarva atma sama-
bhavat, <Of this same reverend sage Atharvan,-as the hair of
Brahman, as (his) limbs, as (his) breath,-even so the whole body
of this (sage) carne into being'. GB. 1. 1. 4.
For the resumptJve pronoun aner a yatha-clause cf. aboye § 41, Ex. 2 Remark.
§ 46. B. The Proleptic Genitive is accompanied by a Parti-
ciple (which, in turn, is qualified by an Accusative).
1. prajapater vat prajas sisrk$amartasya 1 tasye' ndragm praja
apagühatam, so 'bravid : indragni vai me praja apaghuk$atam .
1 So with ms D., Schroeder's text -manasya.
100
§ 45, Ex. t-2; § 46, Ex. 1. Proleptlc GemtIve.
out oí which a real Absolute Ablative might haya been developed
such has not been the case. Tha Locative Absolute hamsi grh'ite
parallel to the Ablative havtso grhítad, above, Ex. k), is not sufficient
to establish the absolute character of the ablatival constructiOll.
6. The Disjunct Genitive.
1. The Proleptic Genitive Resumed by a
Demonstrative Pronoun.
§ 45. A. The Simple Proleptic Genitive (without accom-
panying infinita Verb-form).
In Ex. 1 the Proleptic Genitive consists oí a senes of simple
nouns, in Ex. 2 it consists of a single noun which is resumed
by a Demonstrative Pronoun after a yatha-clause.
1. amta va devanam smo 'nanita anyesam,
  j'ivamas   prthwya vatasya 'pam
anitas smas jivamo, ' gnes saryasya divas
anan'itas smas JíVamalj, <By sorne of the gods we
are led OU, by others (we are) not led on; through contact with
some we live, through the presence of others; by the Earth, the
Wind, the Waters,-by them we are led on, through contad with
them we live; by the Fire, the Sun, the Sky,-by them we are
not led on, through tbeir presence we live'. K. 8. 11 (p. 95, 3).
2. tasya ha va etasya bhagavato 'tharvatta r$er yathai 'va brahmano
lomani yatha 'ñgáni yatha prana evam eva 'sya sarva atma sama-
bhavat, <Of this same reverend sage Atharvan,-as the hair of
Brahman, as (his) limbs, as (his) breath,-even so the whole body
of this (sage) carne into being'. GB. 1. 1. 4.
For the resumptJve pronoun aner a yatha-clause cf. aboye § 41, Ex. 2 Remark.
§ 46. B. The Proleptic Genitive is accompanied by a Parti-
ciple (which, in turn, is qualified by an Accusative).
1. prajapater vat prajas sisrk$amartasya 1 tasye' ndragm praja
apagühatam, so 'bravid : indragni vai me praja apaghuk$atam .
1 So with ms D., Schroeder's text -manasya.
100
Absolute Gemtive. § 46, Ex. 2, §47.
mdragni etasya praJam apagahato yo 'lam san praJam na
vindate, 'Of Prajapati desiring to create offspring,-of bim Indra
and Agni hid away offspring; be said: "Indra and Agni bave
hidden away my ofl'spriug", ... , Indra and Agni bide away tbe
ofl'spring of h1m who, being capable of ofl'spring, (yet) does not
find ofl'spring'. K.9. 17 (p. 120,11).
The parallel MS. 2. 1. 1 (p 1, 5) omits both the partJClple and the resumptrve
pronoun- praJiipater va indragn'i prajam apagÜhatamj ... ; indragni khalu ,,{i
etasya praJam apagühato yo 'lari! prajayai san praJam na tnndate.
2. devánám svargam lokarh yatárh te¡;árh difaft samavllyanta,
'Of the gods going to the heavenly world,-of them the qUfirters
collapsed'. K. 20. 11 (p. 31, 2).
The passage lS dlscussed above § 3, 1, r (toward the end) and § 55, Ex 3 In
connectlOn wlth the parallels TS. 5. 3. 2.2; 3.4, PB. 8. 8. 13.
n. The Absolute Genitive.
1. The Germs of the Absolute Genitive.
§ 4:7. Und'er this heading are grouped togetber a large number
of examples in wbich a conjunct genitive accompanied by a parti-
ciple may be rendered in English by a hypotactica1 clause. Such
genitives to which tbe presence of a participle gives, in a greater
or 1ess degree, a certain syntactica1 independence (above § 3, 1, e
and § 5) are the germs out of wbích the true Absolute Genitives
bave developed.
cr. GaedlCke,   p. 47-48, note j Delbrück, Altmd. Syntax. § 217,
p. 389-390;. Vergl. Syntax, 1I, § 164, p. 494; for lhe classlcal Sanskril, de Saus-
sure, De l'emploi du gemtif absolu en SanscrJt, p. 33-41; SpeiJer, SanscrJt Syntax,
§ 370, p. 289.
The examp1es are arranged according to the relation in which
the Gemtive stand s to other parts of the sentence.
A. Tbe Genitive is a Possessive Genitive.
For reasons wbich will be discussed under tbe general headmg
"The Genitive with Verbs of Separation" the examp1es are grouped
under two subdivisions, the first comprising the examples in which
the governing verb is not a verb of separation, the second com-
prising those in wbich tbe governing verb is a verb of separation.
101
§ 48, Ex. 1-8
Absolute Genitive
§ 48. a) The Governing Verb is not a Verb oí Separation.
In Ex 1-36 the genitIve atands at the head of tbe clause, lU
Ex 37 -46 A it lS imbedded in the sentence.
1. prajapater ha sasrJanasya parvant Vlsasmnsuh, 'Of
Prajapati after he had created creatures the joints relaxed'. QB.
1. 6. 3. 35; 4. 6. 4 1. ,
2. vat par;;olJ, samjñapyamanasya prano Vatam aptpadyate,
'Of the victim as it is bemg quieted (= slaughtered) here the
breath passes on to the wind'. QB. 3. 7 4 9.
3. par;;or ha va hrdayam r;;uk samabhyavctlti, 'Into
the heart of the victim as It is being taken (for slaughter) anguish
enters'. QB. 3. 8. 5. 8.
4. etad vai samjñapyamanasya hrdayam r;;uk <Into
the heart of the victim as it is thus being quieted (= slaughtered)
anguish enters'. QB. 11. 7. 4. 3
5. par;;or Va alabdhasya hrdayarh I}ug rchati, 'Anguish reaches
the heart of the victim when it lS taken (for slaughter)'. TS. 6.4. 1. 4.
6. par;;or maryamanasya pranañ r;;ug rchati, 'Anguish reaches
the breaths of the VICtiru as lt is being put to death'. MS. 3. 10.
1 (p. 128, 11).
7. par;;oh khalu va alabdhasya hrdayam atma   'The Self
enters the heart of the victHU as it is taken (for slaughter)'. TS.
6.3. 10 2.
8. par;;or vai maranaya (Schroeder's emend. for mamnaya) 'myam-
anasya 'havan'iyam medhyo (Schroeder's emend. for m(1dhyo and
medhya) 'bhyupakramatt, <The sacrificial essence of the victim as
it is being led to be put to death enters the Ahavanlya-fire'. MS.
3. 9. 7 (p. 126, 5).
Medhyah is eVldenUy tbe eqUlvalent oC medhah; an emendatlOn of tbe former
to the laUer is hardly necessary, cf. the C¡equent redundancy or OIDISSlOn of y
(not only after consonant plus sibilant, Wackernagel, AItmd Gr 1, p 271, § 235,
a) in parallel Mantras; tbus
8uvi:ral!- VS.8 22; TS.1. 4.44.3; 6 sUNryah AV. 7. 97. 6
6 2.2; MS.1 3 38 (p. 44,17); K.
4. 12 (p. 37, 12); GB. 4 4.4. 14
suvimm MS 4 11. 1 (p. 161,5); K.4 8uvrryam RV. 6. 8 6, TS. 1 5 11 2
16 (p. 43, 15)
102
Absolute Genittve § 48, Ex 8 .
.suvil"aln VSK. 29 2. 22, T8 4 1. 8 3
.suviram Mg. 1. 3 2.21 (bIs)
MLVWlim T5. 5. 7. 2 1
mrvIram TS. 7.3.11. 1
tt/a/'Iiisah TB 3 7. 11 5, 3 12 1
martesu RV. 7. 4. 4, 10 45 7, 1S 4.
2 2 2: ApMB 2. 1 ¡' 25
bhaiigena VS. 7. 3; gB.4 1. 1 26
1Jhaiigat;ravah K. 38. 12 (p 113,9-10);
r.IQ 6. 1. 2 (bis)
grahah T8. 1 2.6 1: 6.1. 9.3, ros
1 2.5 (p. 14,3), K. 2. 6 (p 11, 12).
24.5 (p. 94, 3), 1119 2.1. 4.2
.supathaln T8. 4. 7. 2. 2: M8. 2. 11. 3
(p 141, 7 where one ros read.
suplitham), K 18 8 (p 271, 12)
TS 1. 4. 36 1; TÁ 3.
21 1
.sadhamadesu AV. 6.62. 2: RVKlul.
9.86.2, VS 19 44
purIlJavahanah yS. 11. 44; T8 4. 1
4.2;K.16 4(p.224,12),9B 6.4.4 3
  MS 1 11. 4 (p. 165, 16)
klimiiyai MG. 2 13. 6
parnaya V5. 16.46, M5. 2.9 S(p B7,
1); K. 17. 15 (p. 258, 10)
par/¡ar,¡iidaya VS. M8, K. as under
parniiya
pi attsaraya MS 2 9. 6 (p. 125,5)
upalapliya MS. 2. 9. S (p 126, 13, whele
however one ros. upalapyaya)
.svapnad KV' 25 11. 20
RVKh. 10 128.2, VS 34.
50; HG 1. 10. 6
daevam 1119. 1. 5. 2. 4
{lI'vam RV. 1. 72. S
suvft'1Jam VS. 27. 20: 1118. 2. 12 b
(p. 150,6)
8uvfryam TB 3 7.5. 13: ÁpQ 2 20.5
81wiryiim PG. 3. 2 2
ml'1!i1'yam KA <¡v. 3. 1 (p. 157, 19)
mar/yasa!¡ RV. 10. 2. 5; KB. 26. 6
(p 122, 14)
martyesu V8 12.24; 1118 2.7.9 (p. 86,
13: wlth the eXLeptlOn of one Saro-
hitá ms whlch reads martesu)
bhaiigYe11a Apy. 12. 11. 10
TA 652, Ápy.16.
b. 4- (bIs)
grahyah VS 4 24: 98.332 7
supathyam V8. 18. 11; and accordmg
to Schroedel '5 nole to M5 2 11. 3
(p. 141, 7) also Kap S. 28 8
antahpar9vyena VS. 39. 8
sadhamiidyesu 1\1S 3. 11 11 (p 156,
6, where however the Pp -mss. omlt
the y), K 38.2 (p 102, 15, where
the mS5. read 8adamiidyesu)
purIbyuvahanah r.[S. 2 7 4 (p. 79, 2)
vl,i,nyanam K. 14 3 (p. 102, 18); d.
Wackernagel, KZ.46, p 271
MS 4.2 1 (p. 22, 10), M(:
9.5.1, 3
parnyaya TS. 4. 5. 9. 2
pamor,¡adyaya TS as under parny-
aya
pratlsaryiiya VS 16 .. 13; T8. 4. 5. 6.1,
K. 17 4 (257, 7)
upalapyiiya VS lfi 45, TS. 4. 5. 9. 1;
K 17 15 (p. 258, 9)
8Vapnyad AV. 7 100. 1
audb}Hdyam ÁpMB. 2 8. 1
dm,)yam T8. 1. 2 1. 15, Ap9 5 8. 1
'Úrvyam T8. 2. [) 8
103
§ 48, Ex. 9-12 Absolute Genihve.
MS. 3. 4 4 (p. 48, 16) and MS. 4. 11 2 (p 166, 5) aranyani are patent
errors for dwo and aranani respecbvely, as IS the val led samdhe t\VlCe fol'
sarhdhye at KB. 2. 2 (p 8, 2 and 4).
At Kth Up. 1. 2 13 dha¡'myam appears to be an old error for dharmam as
the edlbon wlth Raghavendra's Commentary reads (cf. Bohtlingk's note to the-
passage m BerJCbte d. kgl sachs. d. W., 1890, p 143).
At Chand Vp 8. 9 1; 2, 8. 10 2, 8. 11 1, 2 all mss. collated by Bohtlingk
read na 'ham atra bhogyarh pa9yiimi which IS perhaps unnecessanly emendeli
by Bobtlmgk to bhogam.
JB. S. 261 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 288) has aupadrastraya but JB 3. 94 (JAOS.
18, p. 21) aupadrastryaya,
'tB. 10. 6 5 1 (= BAV. 1. 2. 1) has in the Madhyandma recension twice
arkyasya 'rkatvam (so Weber's text and the Berlm ms. collated by Bóhthngk),
whIle the Kanva text of the Ánanda<¡rama (poona) edJtlOn reads arkasya 'rkatvam
(but a hUle less than half of the mss. collatE'd read arkyasya).
QB. 14. 9. 1 7 (= BAV 6 1 7 l\1adhy. = 6. 2 4 Kanv.) reads atha 'sma argham
cakara in the Madhy, recenSlOn, whlle the Kanva text of the Poona edJtlOn reads-
arghyam (wllh the var lect. argham) m both text and Commentary.
AB.7. 18.2 Udantya Identified by Caland (Auswahl, p.80) wlth JB. 1. 197
Udanta.
CA. 5 1 (= Kaui¡!. Vp 3 1) n'ilarh veti IS an old error for (cf. Cai1kara-
nanda's Comm na vetl na vyeti na   and Keith's note who compare.
TS 3. 1. 1. 2 na 'aya nilU1h na haro vyett)
JUB. 2 12, 1 alokatayai corresponds to <;:B. 14 4. 1. 33 (= BAU. 1. 3 33 Madhy. =
28 Kanv) alokyatayat. .
9. tasya 'bhi$lkfasya kefan prathaman prapnott, 'Of biru when
he has been consecl'ated (the water) reaches the hair first'. QB.
5.5.3, 1; 6.
10. tasya tapas tepanasyai 'bhyo lomagartebhya ürdhvam
agan, 'Froru these hair-pores of him who had practised austerities
lights went upward'. QB. 10. 4. 4. 2,
11. yatha dundubher hal1yamanasya (also V'inayat vadyamanayai
and fañkhasya dhmüyamanasya) na bahyañ chabda1i chaknttyad
grahanaya. ", 'As of drum when it is beíng beaten [of a lute
when it is being played j of a shell when it is being blown] one
would not be able to seize the external sounds ... ' QB. 14. 5. 4.
7-9 (= BAU. 2.4. 7 - 9); 14. 7. 3 8-10 (= BAU. 4. 5 8-10).
12. yatra 'sya mrtasya 'gmm vag apyetl ... , 'When
of this ruan after he has died speech enters the fire .. .' QB. 14.
6. 2. 13 (= BIu 3. 2. 13),
104
Absolute GemtIve § 48, Ex. 13-22.
13. tasya [indrasya ] ' ] pravliyata, 'At
the snortmg of this (lndra) as he ran up he (the   co1-
1apsed'. ,JB. 3. 266 (Caland, Auswah1, p. 290).
Cf. wühout parllciple AB 3 20 1 tasya '¡vrtrasya) rvasathad isamaná vi¡;ve
deva adrat-an; gB. 1 1 4 14 tasya ha 8111a rt'asathild ravathad asural'uhasani
mrdyamaniim yanti.
14. chandasam.vat (GB. chandas.am U ha) $a$thena 'hna 'ptanam
raso 'tyanedat, 'Of the metres which had been obtamed by means
of the sixth day (-rIte) the sap flowed over'. AB. 6. 32. 1; GB. 2. 6
11 (where 'ktanam oí the Bib!. Ind. should be emended to 'ptanam).
15. praJapater msrastasya 'grarh raso 'gacchat, 'Of Prajapah when
he had become disjointed the sap went upward'. QB 10. 1. 1. l.
16. agner vat pa9avo 'k$ya avakQyaya prapatan, 'The
amma1s, havmg looked at tbe two eyes of Agm after be bad been
created, fied away'. MS. 1. 6.7 (p 97, f6).
17. sa [prajapattkJ tapo 'tapyata, tasya tepanasya sapta 'tmano
devata udakraman, 'He (PraJapati) practised austerlties; frOID the
body of h1m after he had practised austerities seven divmities
went upward'. TB. 3. 8. 10. l.
18. tasya 9rantasya taptasya saptadha 'tmano devata apakraman,
'From tbe body of bim when be bad toiled (and) practised auste-
rities tbe dlVImties departed in seven dírections'. QB 13. 1. 7. 1.
19. tasya 'llnasya '$a papma s'tdatl, 'Of this food when
it bas been eaten this evil settles down' QB. 6. 6. 4. 1; 2.
20. tayor ] myator yo 'ntarena 'kcü;a aS'it tad antarik$am
abhavat, 'What intermediate space tbere was of tbese two (worlds)
as tbey were partmg asunder that became the atmosphere'. QB.
7. 1. 2. 23.
21. tasya vai sambhavisyatalt pratta agre pravitanty atha retas
'Of h1m wbo lS about to come into existence tbe breaths
enter first, tben tbe seed is cast'o JB. 1. 17. 4 (JAOS. 19, p.
Windisch, Berichte d. kgl. sachsiscben Ges. d. WlSS, 59, P 115,
cf. below, § 51, Ex. 5, Rem).
22. ete asrgram indava (SV. 2. 180) th bahúnam samya)amananam
prattpadarh kuryad, eta tty evai 'nañ jyat$thyaya f?1a¿$thyaya 'bhwa-
datt, 'In tbe case oi' many sacrificers sacrificing togetber be sbould
use SV. 2. 180 as introductory stanzaj with (tbe word) "These"
105
§ 48, Ex. 23-28.
Absolute GenttJve
he addresses them for (the attainment of) excellence (and) supre-
maey' . JB. 1. 94.
The parallel PB 6. 9. 13-14. omiltmg the parliclple, uses the dahve· etc
<lsrgram mdava th bahubhyah prahpadam kuryilt \1 eta sarvan evai 'nan
rddhym bhütyli abhivadatt
23. tasyo 'padiptasya dhúma eva   dhunoti, 'Of thlS (dead
sacrificer) after he is burnt up (by the fire) the smoke shakes the
body'. JB. 1. 49. 7 (JAOS 19, P 111).
DhUnoti, wlth short u, occurs also at JB 1 1 ttpart trnam dhUnoti; al JB.
1 252 the mss. vary between dhUnute and dhUnute.
24. añglrasárh vai sattram asinanam ¡;arkara aJayanta,
<Dust got into the eyes of tbe Afigirases as they were performing
a sacl'lficial session'. JB. 1. 168
cr. Ex 25 and 26, and aboye § 3, 1, e (toward the end)
In thls chapter otcurs a Mantra yena hy liJtm aJayan nrcaksii yena
fakunarñ suparnam I yad caksur adtf(Jv anantam somo nrcaksii tad
dadhtitu (closely resembhng PB. 1 5 19) which should be added in Bloornfield's
Concordance.
25. sadhyanam devanarn sattram asmanam r;arkara
Jajrttre, 'Sand got mto the eyes of tbe Sadbya gods as tbey were
performing a sacrificral session'. 1. 7. 2.
Cf irnmedmtely followwg, wJthout partJclple· katham nu tesam (= asmakam,
Cornmentary) ,.arkUl a aksasu Jayeran.
Cf Ex. 24 and 26, and aboye § 3, 1, e (toward the end)
26. tasya taptasya sarhtaptasya lalate sneho
JJad ardryam ajayata, cOn the forehead of this (Brahman) when
it had tolled, when it was heated, when it was thoroughly heated,
sweat, viz. moisture, was generated'. GB. 1. 1. 1
Cf. Ex. 24 and 25, and above § 3, 1, e (tow.l.rd the end).
27. tasmad anadhyanam apl satam pañcalanam abhy eva 'nye
jivdarh 'Therefore other (people) envy the life of the
Pañcalas even though they be llot weH off'. JB. 3. 31l.
Cf. Irnmedlately precedmg, wÍlhout partlCiple· 'va praJiiya anye j'iNtam
<lbhtdhyatáro na tava praJa, 'Other (people) Wll! envy lhe hfe 01 thy offspnng,
(but) thy offsprmg (1VI1I) not (envy tbelrs)'.
28. indrasya vrtrarh jaghnusa indnyam vf1'ymn prthwim anuvyarchat,
'Of lndra when he bad slain Vrtra tbe power (and) strengtb
entered the earth'. TS. 2. 5. 3. 2.
106
Absolute Gemlive. § 48, Ex 29-36.
29. vrtram me jaghnuga mdnyarh vírya1il prthwim anuuyárat, 'Of
me having s)ain Vrtra the power (and) strength hath e¡;tered the
-earth' . TS. 2. 5. 3. 3.
30. gaupayananarh Vat sattram {iS'lnanarh kzratakulyáv asuramaye
asan práhratam, 'Two Kirata clansmen 1, Illusions of
the Asuras, seattered the life-breaths of the Gaupayanas, as they
were performing .a sacrificial session, inside of the Paridhi-sticks'.
PB. 13. 12. 5.
Wlth kiratakulyau the PW. compares QB. 1. 1 4. 14 kilatakuli. And cf for
ihe story and for ktratakulf asuramayatt JB. 3. 167 = Br. (JAOS 18,
{I 42).
The dual asul'amaye oceurs also at 1I1S. 4 8. 1 (p 107, 6).
31. agner vat srgtasya m'kañkatam bha archat, 'Of Agni when he
had been created, the light reached the Vikaükata tree'. K. 21.
9 (p. 49, 10).
32. sfgtasya yato v1kaiil.atmh biza at'chat, 'Of Agni when
he had been created (and) was going (forth) the hght reaehed the
Vikañkata tree'. TB 1. 1. 3. 12.
33. agne)' vai teja udadipyata, 'Of Agni when he had
been created ihe splendour blazed up'. MS 1. 6. 5 (p. 95, 5).
34. tasya 'vanenijanasya matsyal,t pani apede, 'A fish
into the hands of this (Manu) as he was engaged in washmg
himself'. QB. 1. 8. 1. 1.
35. tasmat putrasya jatasya nama kuryat, 'Therefore he should
give a name to the son when he is born'. QB. 6. 1. 3. 9.
Gaedicke, AccusatlV, p.47, note, cites tbls example as an Instance oC a rudlmen-
tary GemtJve Absolute; but the gemüve putrasya Jatasya here as well as the
gembves tasya [agne?!] cJtasya and /I)ataBya garbhasya In Ex. 36 and 37, roust
he conjunctly conslrued with 11ama kurgat (nama karoti, nama kU1'1Jantí), ef. QB
6 1 3. 10-17 'liad asya tan nama 'kal'ot ... , 'lnasmuch as he gave hlm a name';
KR.6 2-9 nama me kuru, 'Give me a name'; QB. 14. 9 4.25 (= BAU. 6.4.25
Madhy. = 26 Kanv) atha 'sya nltmadheyam (Ka!)v.   karoti, 'Then he per-
forms the baptIsmal nle for him (gIves hIro a na me). cr. aboye § 3, 1, e (to-
ward the end).
36. tasya cllasya nama karoti, 'To thIS (fire-altar) after
:it has been pIled he gives a name' QB. 6 1. 3. 20.
Cf. Ex 35, Remark.
1 So accordmg to the Commentar) kirii/a 'IIIlecchas tatkulyarupe almramaye
t Cf. below § 49, Ex 29, Remark
§ 48, Ex. 37-41. Absolute GemtJve.
37. na va ajatasya garbhasya nama kurvantz, 'They do not glve
a name to an embryo before it is born'. RB. 7. 2.
Gr. Ex 35, Remark
38. sa jagati prathamo 'dapatat,. ., t   s y   ~ paretayai somapalas
triny ak$arany avmdanta, sai 'kak$ara punar agacchat, ... , atha.
trí$ütb udapatat, t   s y   ~ paretayai somapálft ekam ak$uram avindanta,
Sá tryak$ara punar agacchat, 'First tbe J agati flew up, ... ; of her
when she bad come tbe Soma-keepers obtamed three syllables;
she returned with one syllable; ... , tben the Trietubh flew up;
of ber wben she bad come tbe Soma-keepers obtained Olle syllable,
sbe returned wIth three syllables'. JB 1. 287 (Caland, Auswabl,
p 114).
r Additions from the AraI.lyakas and Upanieads.
38 A. ta ime satyal,t kama anrtapidhanas, t e ~   m satyanarh satám
anrf,am apzdhanam, 'Tbese same true desires have untruth as
(tbeir) covering; of them being (themselves) true untruth is the
covering'. Chand. Up. 8. 3. 1
38 B. na vaz sar;arirasya satah priyaprzyayor apahatir astz, 'There
is no (possibility of) warding off pleasant and unpleasant (sensa-
tions) for one who is possessed of a body' Cband Up. 8. 12. 1.
38 C. asya somya 1 purU$asya prayato van manasi sampadyate,
'Of this man, my dear, when be departs (= dies) the voice enters
into the mind'. Chand. Up. 6.8.6. J
39. r;ocanti 'va hy etasya [agneh] ker;áh samzddhasya, 'The hair
of this (Agni) when he has been .kindled flames, so to speak'.
QB. 1 4. 1. 38.
40. yad dhy asya ctnvata e¡;a pra'l,'la álubhyet tata evai 'so ' gntr
na ciyeta, 'For if tbe breatb of this (sacrificer) as be piles (the
fire-altar) sbould be impaired, then tbis fire-altar would not be
(properly)2 piled'. QB. 10 3.1. 7; 8
41. j'iryantz ha vat Juhvato yajamanasya ' gnayal,t, 'The fires of
tbe sacrificer as be offers (oblations) grow weary'. QB. 11. 7. 1. 1.
1 Bohthngk emends to saumya, hut cf Luders, SB. d. preua. Ak. d. W., 1922,
p. 229
2 SimilarIy <;:B. 8 7. 2. 10 aClta 'nol (properly) bUllt'. And cf § 49, Ex 22.
108
Absolute Gemtive. § 48, Ex. 42 -46
42. mansiyanti ha val juhvato yajamanasya 'gnayal¡" 'The fires
of the sacrificer as he offers (oblations) long for meat'. <;lB. lf. 7. f. 2.
43. ayasyo va añgwasa adityanam annam   'Tbe
Afigirasa Ayasya ate the food of tbe Adityas after tbey had been
consecrated'. PB. 14. 3. 22.
44. yavacho vai retasa(t szktasya 11 tvaqta 1'üpant Vlkarott tavacho
tat prajayate, . .. , retasa eva stktasya rupani vzkaroti,
<In as many ways as fasbions the shapes oí the seed wben
it bas been cast in so many ways tbat (seed) is born forth; .,
in many ways he fasbions tbe shapes oí the seed wben It has
been cast'o TS. 1. 5. 9. 1-2.
45. atha ya eta patny upapravartayaü ya eva tatra vaster
bhidyamanasya 'po yanfz fa eva ta"', 'Further, the waters wbich
the (sacrificer's) wlfe pours out these same are (ldentlCal with) tbe
waters oí tbe broken bladder (?) whICh fiow there'. JB 1 297
(Caland, Auswahl, p. 122).
Caland notes: 'vastt hler offenbar nicht vesICa, sondern uterus' Or do es ya
eva tatra ... yanti refer to the dlscharge of the male semen, cf. K 26. 1 (p. 122,
3-4) yad va. patni yaJñe karot, tal!   yat patny apa upapravartayat.
mithuna eva retah praslñcati; MS. 4 5.4 (p. 67, 18) yat tat'hy ape. upapravartayatl
tasminn eva mlthune rtto dadhah 2
46. vyakhyasyami te, vacarh fu me mdidhyasasva,
'1 will explam (It) to thee, but give attention to my speecb as
1 explain (it)'. QB. 14.7.3.5 (= BAU. 4. 5. 5 Madhy j.
The Kanva. recenSlOn reads bere: etad vyakhyasyaml te, vyacaksltnasya tu me
nldidhyasasva, omlttmg vacam, and tlllS abbrevlated expresslOn IS used by both
In tbe parallel passage QB. 14. 5 4 4 (= BAU 2.4 4): vyaTchyasyami
te, vyacaksiinasya tu me mdidhyasasva.
cr. for sImilar abbl eVIabons TS. 2. 5 1 1 devebhyo bkii.gam avadat, 'He pro-
mlsed a share to tbe gods', but, wlthout bhagam, JB 2. 153 3 (Transactions of
the Connectlcut Academy of Arts and Sciences, 15, p 180) devebhyo vadatJ. AB.
6.33.4 yo me vacam avadh¡h 'Who hast stopped my speech', hut, wilbout va-
cam, AB 7. 28. 1, JB. 2 1:14 (JAOS 19, p. 121) brhaspateh pmtyavadhit 'He hath
contradlcled BrhaspatI', WhlCh the Commentary to AB. glosses by tatha svagur01'
brhaspatel vakyalh svak'iyena vakyena pratyavadhU, so 'yam pratlghato na yuktah,
tatha ca 'pastambah smarati (ApDhS. 2. 2 5 11-12)' vakyena vakyasya prat,-
ghatam iicaryasya varjayec ch"eyasam ce 'tt QB. 3.8.1. 15 apigrhya. . muTcham;
AB. 6. 33.3 mukham apyaglhnat; KB. 30. 5 mukham api)agrilha 'to cover one's
mauth', hut, wIlhout mukharn, TS. 6. 1. 3 8 aptgrhya smayate, 'He smlles covermg
his moulh'. QB 1. 4 1. 2, 4 2.2.11 apigrhya na,sike 'holdmg one's nose', but,
109
§ 48, Ex. 46A, § 49, Ex. 1-7. Absolute GemtIve
wJthout naslke, ItB 4 1. 3 8 tasmiit kunaqandhiin na   'Therefore he
should not close hls nose agamst the foul odour'. K 27.3 (p. 142,6) tasman.
(gandhat) na 'pigrhyam, 'One should not close one's nose agamst thl8 (odour).
(,;:B. 1. 1 1. 6; 1. 9. 3 23, TS 1. 7 6. 6; KB 2. 4 (p 5, 18) vratam vls/jate, 'He
ends hls vow', but, wlthout 1)rat(lm, ItB. 1 1. 1. 3; 6 VISfjate, and cf below S 60,
Ex. 22, Rem, and § 49, Ex 34, Rem

r Addition from the AraJ;lyakas and Upanieads.
46 A. esa eva ' ddyas trwrc rar;mayo mandalam purU$O,
raf¡maya eva hinkaras, tasmat te prathamata evo ' dyatas tayante,
'TbIS sun is threefold, four-footed: rays, disk, (and) personó tbe
HIñkara is (identical with) the rays, therefore they are extended
first when tbe sun rises'. JUB. 1. 33. 9.
Literally' 'They of the sun when It rIses are extended first.' J
§ 49. b) The Governing Verb is a Verb of Separation.
< V t + Vt - ava>
1. mdnyrt1n va etad vtryam abhl$lcyamanasya vyavaitl, 'The
strength (and) vIgour of one who is bemg consecrated depart'o
MS. 4. 4. 5 (p. 55, 8).
< V kram + apa >
2. tasya 'labdhasya medho 'pacakrama, 'Of tbis (man) when be
had been taken (far slaughter) the sacrificial essence departed'.
QB. 1. 2. 3. 6.
3. par;or va alabdhasya mano 'pakramatt, 'Of the victlm when
it has been taken (for slaughter) the mind departs'. TS. 6. 3. 10. 3.
4 tasya bh'itasya svo ma7umá 'pacakrama, 'Of thls (Prajapati)
being fnghtened (hIS) own greatness departed'. QB. 2. 2. 4. 4.
Cf immedlately followmg wlthout partlClple vag t'ii asya svo mahtma, vaq
asyá 'pacakl'iirna, 'Speech IS hls own greatness, hls departed', and ItB.
13. 1. 1. 4 tasya [prajiilJateh] 'pakl'iimat, 'The grealness of thls (PraJa-
pati) departed'.
5. tad asya bhttasye 'ndnyam Vlryam apacakrama, 'Of this (Indra)
being thus frlghtened strength (and) vigour departed'. QB. 5.2.3. 8.
6. varu'lJasya va abhiflcyamanasye 'ndnyam víryam apakramat,
'Of VaruJ;la as he was being consecrated strength (and) vigour
departed'. MS.4 3. 9 (p. 49, 4).
7 varunasya val susuvanasya Margo 'pakramat, 'Of VaruI;la when
he had been consecrated the splendour departed' PB. 18. 9. 1.
110
Absolute Gembve § 49, Ex. 8-12.
8. tndrasya t'al vrtram mdriyarh v'iryam apakramat, 'Of
Indra after he had slain Vrtra strength (and) vIgour departed'.
K. 36, 1 (p. 68, 5).
9. agner srstasya bha apakramat, 'oí Agni when he bad
been created tbe hght departed'. MS.3 1. 9 (p 12,8).
10. atra va etasya jayamanasye 'ndnyam viryam apakramat, 'Of
hlm as he was bemg born there the strength (and) vigour depar-
ted' MS. 2. 5. 5 (p. 63, 20)
11. devanam va antam indnyam v'iryarn apakramat,
'Of tbe gods when they had reached the end strength (and) vigour
departed'. TS. 7. 5. 8. 1; JB. 2. 396.
The JB passage runs as te p¡áñco 'bhlkramqrt catválam aveksamanáh
krogena stuvate, devanam vii. . aplikriimat, tat kror;enai 'vii 'tarundhatli, 'ntam
wai 'te gachantt ye samvatsarasyo 'drcam ar;nuvate, tad yat krofena stuvata in-
d'nyasya t'iryosya 'varuddhyat, 'Proceedmg toward the east (and) faclIlg the pJt
(ef PB 6. 7 24) they PI alse wllh the   of the gods , .. departed r
by means of the they recave¡ ed Jt; those who attdm the goal ol
the year(ly sacTlfice) reach tbe end, so to speak; when they plalse wlth the
(·Saman) (tbey do so) In order to dttam strength land) vIgour'.
cr. wühout particlple MS.2 3 7 (p. 34, 13) [devanam] vii indr¡yiim t'zr-
yány apáh amann: agne rathantal'am tndrasya brhad deviinam vairup-
am sav¡tur vatraJam tvastü revat'i marutl1m r;akva1'i, K 12 ñ (p 166,18) teslim
[devaniim] viryiiny apakriio/ann' agne rathantaram tndl'iid brhad w;vebhyo deve-
bhyo 1:atl'üpam sam/ur vazraJam maruttim 9akvart tvastü retan;; MS 3. 10.6
(P 137, 2) tesiirh devanám vii Mdr¡yiim 1J'ir'yany apakriimann, rksáme va euhyas
(ad apiikléimatc7,m.
The VarlRtlOn between the gemllve and ablat¡ve lU the last two passa-
ges IS under the headmg "The Gemllve wlth Verbs of Sepa-
ratlOn." And d. below Ex 27
12 tasmad uta jivata eva caksur apakramatt, .... tasmad uta
j'iVata eva frotmm apakramafi,. ,tasmad uta jivafa eva vag apa-
kramaty, 'apa 'nye na pranah, 'Tberefore of oue
who is (stIll) alive sight dfparts.. " tberefore of oue who 18
(still) alive hearIug departs j .:; therefore of one who ie (still)
ahve speech departs, (in short, all) the other breaths (= senses)
depart (whIle a person is still ahve), but the (vItal) breath (does)
not (depart)'. JB. 1. 268.
The case of jttatah ::tmblguoUSj It may be ablatJve.
For uta d Delbruck, Allmd Synt. § 260, 1, P 528.
111
§ 49, Ex 13-14.
Absolute Genitiva.
13 tasya yamasya '((varh '1'dham indnyasya 'pa-
kramat,. ,tasya 'gner hiranyarh pratijagrhUíjaS trtiyam zndriyasya
'pakramat, ... , tasya rudrasya garh prattjagrhusa(( caturtham tndri-
yasya 'pakramat, ., 'tasya brhaspater paii-
camam indriyasya 'pakramat . ... tasyo 'ttanasya 'ñg¡rasasya 'pranat
pratzjagrhusalJ mdrtyasya 'pakrfimat,. ., tasya
saptamam tndriyasya 'pakramat, 'Of this
Yama when he had accepted a horse one halE oE the strength
departed; .. ; of this Agm when he had accepted gold one thlrd
{)f the strength departed; .. ; of this Rudra when he had accep-
ted a cow one fourth oE the strength departed, ,0E this Brhas-
pati when he had accepted a garment one fifth of the strength
departed; . ; oE this Uttana Afiglrasa when he had accepted
sometbing lIEeless one sIxth of the strength departed, .. ; oE this
Plajapati when he had accepted aman one seventh DE the strength
departed'. K. 9. 12 (p 113, 13)
cr. Ex 14. The parallel passage MS. 1. 9 4 (p. 133, 12) omlts the partlclple' tasya
'rdham (also tasya trt¡;yalll; caturtham; paficamam; mdNyasya 'pakramat
14 tasya va agner hiranyarh 'rdham mclriyasya
'pakramat, . . " tasya val somasya vasah trtiyam
mdrzyasya 'pakramat. 11 ., tasya vai rudrasya gam pratljagrahusa((
caturtham indrzyasya 'palcramat, ... 11 tasya vai varttnasyií ' ((vam
pratzjagrahu$ah pañcamam indriyasya 'pakramat, ... 11 .' tasya
prattjagrahusah   tndrzyasya 'pakramat,
11 tasya vat manos talpam saptamam indrzyasya
'pakramat, .. , tasya 'l-a uttanasya 'ñgzrasasya 'pranat pratiJagra-
huso ' tndrtyasya 'pakramat, 'Of this Agni when he had
accepted gold one half of the strength departed; ., ,of thls Soma
when he had accepted a garmeut oue third of the streugth de-
parted; .. ; of this Rudra when he had accepted a cow one
fourth oE lhe strength departed, ... ; of this Varu:Q.a when he
had accepted a horse oue fifth of the strength departed; .; oE
thlS Prajapati when he had accepted aman one sixth of the
strength departed; ... ; DE this Manu wheu he had accepted a
couch one seventh of strength depnrtedj. ., of this Uttana
Angirasa when he had accepted something lifeless one eighth of
the strength departed'. TB. 2. 3. 4. 1-4.
112
Absolute Genitlve. § 49, Ex. 14
el. Ex. 13.
It would be easy to emend the' readlOg of TE. prat,jagrahw¡alJ, to the normal
pratijagrhusal,l, whICh lhe K. palallel (Ex. 13) has, especlally as the confusion of
ra and r 15 by no means uncommon (cf. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I, p. 71, § 63,
a, bj tbe aUlbor, Transaclions of tbe Conneclicut Academy of Arts and SClenees,
15, p. 172-173). Thus for hradaJlyllya TS. 4. 5. 9. 1 and hradavyáya K. 17 5
(p. 258, 7) the parallel texts VS 16. 44 and MS. 2. 9. 8 (p. 126, 12) read h1'dayyllya
and hrdylJya respectrvely, the r-form there being a patent blunder. Instead of
MS 1. 5. 4 (p. 71,5); 1. 5. 11 (p. 79,19); K. 7. 2 (p. 64, 7); 7.9 (p. 71, 10), MQ.
1. 6. 2. 12 (WhItney, Gr. § 1148, 1, cl the parallel text Ap<;: 6. 18. 2
reads nimrdah (Wlutney, Gr. § 1148, 3, a). lnslead of TS. 5. 5 13. 1
the ms. Ch of the parallel passage KA<;v. 7.3 (p 180,2) reads cakrviikah. In-
stead of TB. 3. 6. 13. 1 prtlak (Whitney, Gr. § 693) the parallel text MS. 4. 13. 8
(p. 209, 12) reads ID one ms. pranak whlCh Schroeder accepts in bIS text, whiJe
the Pp.-ms. has pra11an and three rnss. have the normal prnak; m the same
Mantra the ms. Ch of K. 19 13 reads prlJnak WhlCh Schroeder emends to pranak
In two formulas the name of an othel Wlse unknown metre 15 glven as bhrajah
VS. 15.5; TS. 4. 3.12.2, K. 17. 6 (p 249, 19 and ms D p. 249, 22); Kap. S; <;:B.
8.5. 2. 4 (bIS), whlle Jt appears as bhrJah at MS. 2. 8. 7 (p 111, 15 and 112, 1 lO
WhlCh lalter place tha Pp.-ms. reads bhÜJah) and as bhriiJalJ al VS. 15.4, K. 17.
6 (p. 249, 22 ms Ch), ef. the adJechve bhrJviin ID one of the formulas al TS.
4. 3. 12. 3. The nama of a certam Apsaras appears, m tha same formula, at
VS. 15. 15, <;;B. 8. 6. 1. 16 as kratusthula, but at MS 2. 8. 10 (p. 114, 14) i K 17.
9 (p. 251, 22) as krtasthalá (cC. pw. s. krtasthal'i and PW. s. rtusthala).
A similar confuslOn of krtam and kratum IS found at Kg. 25. 12.5
where kratum lS read mstead of krtam of the parallel texts K. 35. 5 (p. 54,
8); TB. 3. 7. 8. 3, Apg. 14. 30. 3.
Instead of RV. 8. 98 12, AV 20. 108.3 fatakrato the SV. 2 52 J leads saltas-
krta The name of the Hotr-prlest's asslstant varles belween hotrka and hotraka,
cf PW, and contrast ApQ. 12 23. 4 hotrakanam wJth Mg 2. 4 1. 21 hotrkánam
III the same formula. The llame of a eerlam tree appears al <;:B 6. 6 2. 11 and
K. 19. 10 (p. 11, 7 and 8) as krmuka (cf.   28 2 k.rmukacakala), but III Kap. S.
(see Schroeder's note to K.) as kramuka, and so ID the later lIteratura, whlle MS. 3
1. 9 (p. 12, 4 and 5); TB.l 4.7.3 and ¡plt. 14. 24. 5, 16 9 6 have krumuka.
Instead of the obscure pratltusnuh TB. 3. 7. 5. 3, Áp<;: 2. 10. 6 (Cor whlCh tha
pw. the rather violent emendation to ghrtqsnuh) the varo lect. at MQ
1. 2 6 20 has prthusnu(¡,. KB. 4. 3 (p. 15, 3) has the varo lect. abhyu(d)drasta.
for   At KB. 13. 1 (p. 57, 22) the Anand. ed. reads prasrpsyan fOl
prasrapSiJan.
In a number of instances it is well mgh lIDposslble to decide whether ra for
r 15 a mere blunder, or whelher it has Its origm in the phonehe character
of the r-vowel (WackernageJ, Altmd. Gr. 1, § 28, p. 31), or whether tha ra-form
really represenls ihe strong ablaut-stage to a weak r-form.
For tipo jligrta MS. 1. 1 3 (p. 2, 11), K 1. 3 (p. 2, 8); 31. 2 (p. 3, 19) and lipo
Oertel, The Syntax of Cases 8 113
§ 49, Ex. 15-17. Absolute GemtIve.
huVlZ¡su Jiigrta ApO. 1. 14. 3 the paralIel HG. 2.4.5 has apo g¡hesu Jagrata (add
the ra·form to Whitney, § 1011); and the same ra-form m the 2d. pIur. lmperat. is
read at Up. 1 3. 14 (where, accordmg to Bohtlmgk, one ms. reads the
normal jagrta) As 2
d
pIur. mdleat. onIy Jagratha is quotable (Whltney, § l007a)
in the .Mantra yatha devesu }agratha ApQ 1. 14. 3; PG. 1. 16. 22; HG. 2. 4. 5.
Anomalous strong stem·forms Instead of the regular weak ones are not un-
beard of ID the perfeet tense, cf Whitney, Gr. §. 793, h, and add to the examples
given there pasparfuh whlCh the Atharva version of .the Kena Up. reads IDstead
of pasprfuh of the Jalmmlya reeenslOn, JUB. 4. 12. 2.
A SImIlar eonfusion of the strong form grabh and the weak forro grbh is seen
in the reduplicated aOrlst MS. 1. 1. 13 (p 8, 18), S. 3. 8 (p. 41, 10) aJrgrabhat, K 1 12
(p. 7, 6) aJigrabham contrasted wlth K. 18.3 (p. 267, 21); 21. 8 (p. 48, 7) afigrbham.
The abnorroal quantlty of the reduplicating vowel (Whitney, Gr. § 858, b)
IS paralleled by TA. 6. 1. 4 viJihvarah for the regular vi)rhvarab, of the
parallel texts RV. 10 16.8; AV. 18.3.53; AG. 4.3.25, and by TS. 1. 2.
13. 2 Jihvaratam for the regular Jihvaratam of the paralIel texts VS. 5. 11;
QB. 3. 5. 3. 17.
Cf slmlIarly, In nOffimal denvatlOn, RV. 1. 100.9 (Oldenberg, R\'. Nl)ten, 1, p 96)
samgrbhita for salilgrabhita.
15. tlim ha va asyai 'táni brahmacaryam upetasya
'pakramant¿ : mrgan asya brahmavarcasam gacchaty acaryam yafo
'Jagaram svapno varaham krodho   r;lagha kumanm rüpam
vanaspatin punyo gandhaft, 'These same (powers) one who has
undertaken the BrahmaI)ical vow depart: his theological lustre
goes to tbe deer, his glory to the teacher, his aleep to the Boa, his
wrath to the boar, bis pride to the waters. his shape to the maiden,
hlS sweet odour to the plants and trees'. GB. 1. 2. 2 (p. 33, 5).
r Addition from the AraI;1yakas and Upanieads.
15 A. tasya teJo 'pakramat, 'OL him when he had
smued the splendour departed'. TA. Ó. 1. 3. J
< -y'kram,+ud >
16. ar;vasya Va álaódhasya reta udakramat, 'Oi the horse when
lt was taken (for slaughter) the seed departed'. <;E. 13. 1. 1. 3;
TE. 3.8.2.4
QB. 13. 1 1. 3 and 14 3 1. 2 (below. Ex. 20) me cIted by GaedICke, AccusatIv,
p.47, note, as examples of the Absolute GemtIve; but cf. aboye § 3, 1, c.
17. arvasya Va alabdhasya medita udakramat, 'Of the horse when
it was taken (for slaughter) the sacrificial essence departed.' QB.
13. 3. 6. 1; TE. 3. 9. 21. 1.
114
Absolute Gemtive. § 49, Ex. 18-26.
18. ar¡vasya Va alabdhasya mahimo ' dakramat, 'Of the horse when
it was taken (for slaughter) the greatness departed'. TB. 3. 8. 2. 4.
19. tasya taptasya viryam udakramat, 'Of him
when he had toiled (and) practised austerities gIory (and) vigour
departed'. QB. 10. 6. 5. 6 (= BAU. 1. 2. 6).
20. yajñasya udakramat, 'Of tbe sacrlfice when
its bead bad been cut off the fervour departed 1 QB. 14. 1. 2. 13;
14.3. 1. 2.
QB.14 3. 1. 2 and 13.1. 1. 3 (above, Ex. 16) are cited by Gaedlcke, AccusatIv,
p.47, note, as examples of the Absolute Gemtlve; but ef. aboye § 3, 1, c.
21. somasya va priya tanar udakramat, 'Of
Soma wbIle he was being pressed the dear form departed'. TB.
1. 4. 7.4.
22. yad dhy asya pratta (3 4 vag; 5 mana;
6 utkramet tata evai '$0 'gmr na c'lyeta, 'For if of tbis
sacrificer as he pIles (the fire-altar) the breath [sight; speech; tbe
mind; hearing] were to depart then this fire-altar would not be
(properly 2) piled'. QB. 10. 3. 1. 2-6.
< Y k$ar + ati >
23. yo vai sa esam lokanam apsu praviddhanii1h paran raso
  sa kurmak, 'Wbat\ sap (= essence) of these worlds
after tbey bad been plunged into the waters flowed forward (and)
beyond that is this tortoise'. QB. 7. 5. 1. 1.
< Y + vz>
24. p1'ajapater visrastasya sarva raso 'nu vyak$arat, 'Of Praja-
pab when be had become disjointed the sap (= essence) flowed
in a11 directions toward a11 tbe quarters'. QB. 7. 3. 1. 16
25. yajñasya raso vyak$arat, 'bf the sacrifice
when ita head bad been cut off the sap (= essence) flowed in
a11 directions
s
'. QB, 14. 1. 2. 9; 19; 14. 1. 3. 11; 15; 24; 31; 14.
2.2 11; 14; 35; 53.
26. tad asya [vi$nok] parigrhúasya raso 'Of this (VieI;lu)
after he had peen tbus encompassed, the sap (= essence) flowed
in a11 directions'. QB. 14. 1. 2. 12.
1 cr. below Ex. 25. - 2 Cf. above § 48, Ex. 40. - 3 Cf aboye Ex. 20
8*
115
§ 49, Ex. 27 -32.
Absolute Gembve
< y' car + vi - nzs >
27. sa yatha     abhyáh1tasya prthag clhuma v¡ntQcar-
anti .. " 'As of a fire when it is piled wlth damp fuel smoke
clouds proceed in aU directlOns .. .' QB. U. 6. 4 10 (= BAU.
2.4. 10, wbere, however, tbe KaI;lva recension reads tbe ablatlve
abhyahttát; cí. above Ex. 11, Rem.); 14 1. 3. 11 (= BAU. 4. 6. 11)
< v' chzd >
28. yajnasya val ' clndyata, 'Of tbe sacrifice wben
it bad been created tbe bead was cut off'. MS 4. 6. 2 (p. 79, 19)
29. taSatn [nadlnlim] samudram ablnpadyamánanam clndyate ná-
madheyam samudm zty ... , [vedánam] yajñam abht-
padyamananaril chtdyate namadheyam yaJiia '/,ty ácak$ate, 'Of these
(rivers) as they enter into the ocean tbe (mdividual) appellation
is cut off, they (slmply) call them "Ocean" , .; of tbese (Vedas)
as tbey enter into tbe sacrifice tbe (mdividual) appellation is cut
off. tbey (simply) call tbem "Sacrifice"'. GB. 1. 2. 10 (p. 44, 1).
For the thought ef. MunrJaka Up. 3 2.8; Prar,na Up.6 5, (Chand. Up 6.10.1);
and, 1ll Buddhistic lIterature, Cullavagga 9 1. 4 (p. 239, 14).
namadheyam is praetieally equlvalent to nama, ef. 14 9.4.25 = Biu 6.
4.25 Madhy niimadheyam= 26 Kanva niima, and AV. 2. 26 1 rüpadheya Wlth
Whitney's note. 80th (Blbl. Ind. p. 385, 10) and Ranga Ramanu]a
ed. p 470, 29) In thelr gloss on Ch;¡nd. Up 6. 1. 3 interpret -dheya In
ntimadheya as havmg the value of a mere suffix without affectmg the meamng
of nama Cf Katy. V;¡rtt and 3 to Pan. 5. 4. 36.
30 sa kutsa aurava upagoh sauQravasyo 'dgayata audumbarya
'chinat, 'Tbis Kutsa Aurava with an Udumbara branch cut
off the head of Upagu as he was singing tbe UdgItba'.
PE. 14. p. 8.
<"., chid+á>
31. tasya [agneh] tántasya hrdayam achmdan, 'Oí this (Agm)
wben be had íainted they cut out the beart'. TB. 1. 1. 3 12.
The parallel K. 8. 2 (p. 85, 8) omlts the partlClple: tasya marutas stanayttmmá
hrdayam achindan.
< v' chíd + pra >
32. tad asyá aharantya apad asta 'bhyayatya parnam practeheda
gáyatryaz va somasya va rájñah, 'Of ber as she was thus carrying
off (the Soma) a footless archer taklllg aim cut off a feather-
116
Absolute GemtIve § 49, Ex. 33-34.
either (a feather) of the GayatrI or (8. Jeaf) of kmg Soma'. QB.
1. 7.1. 1; 3.3.4.10 .
.Ápad asta l5, as Eggeling notes to CB. 1. 7. 1. 1, 'a doubtful reading and
perhap» an old corruptlOn'. The Commentary to CE. 1. 7 1. 1 (ed. Blbl. Ind.)
reads apadhasta (wIth the varo lecl. apadastá and aplivastli) whlcb he glosses by
adhastatpradece. At RV. 4. 27. 3 the archer   (krcánur ásta) shoots at
the engle (cyena).
The autllor, playmg upon the doubIe meanmg of = 'feather' and 'leaf',
combmes the cuttmg off oC a leat or sprlg of the Soma < ef. 98 11, 7. 2.8;
TS 3.5.7.1, TB.1. 1 3.10,3.2.1. 1, K. 30.10 (p. 192,6); MS 4 1. 1 (p '1,4);
TB 1. 2. 1. 5-6 CS. 4 5. 10. 3 > and the euttmg off oE a feather of
tbe Gayatr1 < er, RV.4 27. 4, where a feather of the Soma·earrymg eagle IS
eut off, and AB 3 26.3, K 34.3 (p. 37, 15) where the lalon of tbe G!tyatñ is
cut off > The same combmation occurs al PB. 9. 5 4 gayatri somam aharat,
tasya anUVtsr;ya somarakstlJ. parnam achutat, tasya yo '1icuh parlipatat sa pil-
tiko 'bha¡,at.
For fue alternative gayatryai t'a somasya ¡,a rCiJnah d the sImilar alternatIves
98. L 7.4 1 pra)Cipatt¡' ha vat svii1it duhitaram abh¡dadhyau divam vo 'sasam
va, 4. 1 5 1 yatra ven bhrgavo va 'ñgtraso t'a svargam lokam samCi¡:nuvata tae
cyavano vii bhargaw¡; cyavallO va 'ñgtrasas tad et'a . Jahe, and cf. QR 13.2.
2. 14 brhadttktho ha vamadevyo 'j(I'O "a sarnttdrtr a,vasya 'prir dadarc;a.
Gaedlcke, AccusatIv, p.47-48, note, regards Qe 1. 7. 1. 1 = 3 3.4.10 as a
dear example of the Abbolute GeOltJve, but a cotlJunet constructlOn oC asyo,
Cihm antyat. . gdyatryai is nol lmposslble. Cf above § 3, 1, c.
< ida +a>
33. prajapater Vtsrastasya 'gnzs teja ádáya 'ksarat, 'Of
PraJapati when he had become disjointed Agni took the splendour
and carded it off to the south'. QB. 7. 4. 1. 39.
34. na vai striyam ghnanty, nta tva asya }ivantya evá ' dad ate,
'For they (viz. robbers) do not kill a womall, rather of her while
she is alive do they take away (the valuables)'. QB. 11. 4. 3. 2.
The obJect of ádadate IS omllted as al TS 3. 5. 4. 2-3 yaJiiahano vai devd
yaJiiamusah l 11 8ant" te. Cisata l/.dadana vimathnCina yo dadatt yo ya;ate
tasya, 'The gods are sacrlfice-slaying, sacrlfice-stealmg, Jll these worlds they con·
tmually take away (and) deslroy (lhe g¡fts and sacnfices) of him who glves and
who sacnfiees'; K. 10. 4 (p. 128, 15) varunagrhito ta esa yo 'nyasyCi 'dadana
ltpaharamanac; carati, 'Seized by VaruI].a is he wbo contmually takes away and
appropnates (the property) of anolher', er. Delbrüek, Altmd. Synt § 153, p. 247"
10, and above § 48, Ex. 46 Rem.
1 For these eplthets ef. Arbillan, Rudra (Uppsala Umvelsltets Ársskríft 1922),
p, 150.
117
§ 49, Ex. 35-39. Absolute Genibve
35. tasya ha diksamanasye 'ndra eve 'ndriyam adatte vfryam
stoma somo rajyarh pdaro yar;as kirüm, 'Of hlm
while he is being initIated rndra takes away the vigour, the
Trietubh the strength, the fifteenfold Stoma life, Soma sovereIgnty,
the Fathers glory (and) fame'. AB. 7. 23. 1
For the Sandh! kirttm cf Aufreeht, AB, y. 428, 8; Waekernagel, Altmd.
Gr. 1, p. 340, § 286, e, a
36. tasya ho 'davasyato 'gnir eva teja adatte gayatri v'f,ryam trivrt
stoma liyur brahmana brahma yáfas kirtzm, 'Of him as be con-
eludes (the ceremony) Agni takes away the splendour, the Gayatrl
the strengtb, tbe tbreefold Stoma life, the BrahmaI}.as (take away)
the Brahman, glory, (and) fame'. AB. 7. 24 1.
37. [devanam] u svapatarh pramattanam asuras teja in-
dnyam v¡;ryam adaya 'psv anvabhyavanayan (the me. anvabhyava-
mayan), 'Tbe Asuras taking away the splendour, strengtb, (and)
vigour of these (gods) while they were asleep (and) unconscious
poured them successively mto the waters'. JB. 3. 353.
Cf. JB. 3. 168, below Ex. 66.
The v' ni + anu-abhi-ava is not registered in pw.
38. ymtdhajayena vaz deva asuran samVlcya (var. lect. samslcya)
rauravenai   svam adadata, yaudhaJayenaz 'va
dm$antarh bhratrvyarh sarhV1,cya (without varo lect.) 'sya
svam adatte ya evarh veda, 'The gods baving tborougbly
shaken tbe Asuras by means of the Yaudbajaya-Saman took away
the property of tbem while they were roaring qy means of tbe
Raurava-Samanj he who knows thus, baving tborougbly sbaken
(his) hateful rival takee away the property of him while he ie
roaring by means of tbe Raurava-Saman'. JB. 1. 123.
The v' V1C + sam is not reglstered m pw., hut er. the opposlte v' mc + vi 'to shake
apart' e. g. at RV. 1. 39 5 pra vepayantt [marutah] parvatan vi viñcanti vanaspa-
Un The v' me + sam oceurs again al JB. 1. 135 rathantarena va, deva asuran
sarhvicya brhata Jalene 'va 'bhwyaubJan, rathantarenai 'va dvisantath bhratrvyam
sarhmcya brhatajalene 'vI'! 'bhinyubJati ya evarh veda, 'The gods havmg thoroughly
shaken the Asuras by means of the Rathantara-Saman held them down with the
Brhal-Saman as wlth a net; he who knows thus, havIDg thoroughly shaken (hIS)
haleful rival with the Hathantara-Sa;man holds him down wllh the Brhat-Saman
as with a nel'.
< y'nag+ vi>
39. tasya ha tredha sadhukrtya mnagyah, 'Of him,
118
Absolute Gemtive. § 49, Ex. 39 A-44
when he has been arrested the good works disappear in three
directions'. JB. 1. 46.
r AdditlOn from the AraQ.yakas and Upani¡¡;ads.
< Vned + pra >
39 A. tasya [vacab] rasaf¡, pra'IJedat, [lokánam]
rasalt pranedat, tásám [devatanam] abhipilzfanam rasak
prq'IJedat, tasya [vzdyayai] rasak pranedat, tasam
[vyahrtinám] abhipiI#anam rasalJ, pranedat, tasya 'bhi-
rasaf¡, pra'l}edat; 'Of this (speech¡ [of these (worlds) j of
these (divinities); of this (knowledge); of these (sacred utterances);
of th1S (syIlable)]. when it [they] had been pressed the sap (= essence)
fiowed forth'. JUB. 1. 23. 3. J
< v' pat >
40. tad udíca[¡, [pagolJ,] 'vañ medhalJ, papata, 'Of
(the victim) as. lt was being drawn upward the sacr1ficial essence
fel! downward'. QB. 3. 8. 2. 17.
41. tasya [addyasya] saptadaf{ena [sto mena] hnyamanasya tejo
hara 'patat, 'Of th1S (AdItya) as he was being seized with the se-
venteenfold (Stoma) the splendour (and) energy fell off'. TB. 1.
5.10.3.
For the ambiguous tasya [gayat1'yai] aharantyai in QB 1. 7. 3.
19 tasya [gayatryai] aharantya¿ somasya 'ñf{ur apatat cf. below
§ 54, Ex. 2
< -V paf + para>
42. yat'inám adyamananam parapatan, 'Of the Yatls as
they were bemg devoured the heads feH off'. TS. 2. 4 9. 2
The pa¡:S)el K. 11. 10 (p. 157,5) omits the paItic¡p)e te$lim   parupa-
tan. The parallel passages JB. 1. 185 and K S 5 (p 88,20) have the partltlve
genitive, see below § 50, Ex 13 and 14 '
43. indrasya daQadhe ' ndriyam viryam pm-apatat,
'Of Indra when be bad been consecrated vigour (and) strength
feH away in ten places'. TS. 5 6.3.4; TB. 1. 8. 5. 1.
44. mdrasya tredhe 'ndriyam víryam parapatat, 'Of
Indra when he bad beeu consecrated vigour (and) streDgth fell
away in tbree places'. TB. 1. 8. 2. 5.
119
§ 49, Ex. 45-53.
Absolute Genilive.
45. varu'l}asya dar;adhe 'ndriyam viryam parapatat,
'Of Varul)a when he had been consecrated vigour (and) strength
feU away in ten places'. TB. 1. 8. 1. 1.
46. tasya [somasya] ye hnydmanasya 'ñr;avaft, parapatañs te pü,tika
abhavan, 'The sprigs of this (Soma) as he was being seized which
fell off become PutIka-plants' 1. PB 8. 4. 1.
47. gayatrya patantya yatra parapatat tatra parno
'jayata, 'Where of tbe GayatrI as she was fiying the feather feU
off there the Parl)a-tree grew'. MS. 3. 9. 3 (p. 116, 10).
48. svadhiter btbhyatah, prathamena r;akalena saha tejalJ,
parapatah, 'Of the tree as it fears the axe the splendour falls
away together with the first chip'. TS. 6. 3 3. 2.
49 tasya [pra}apateft,] viddhasya retal] parapatat, 'Of this (Praja-
pati) when he was plerced (by the arrow) the seed feU away'.
JB: 3. 262 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 288).
50. yo va etasya 'bhlhatasya 'gre r;akalak parapatatt tam asya
tejo 'nvapakramah, 'What chip of this tree when it has been struck
(with the axe). falls off first, along wIth that (chip) ItS splendbur
departs'. MS. 3. 9. 3 (p. 115, 19). ,
< 1"pru + tn>
51. sa [agnz,k] eta 'janayata ya imak sküyamanasya
[agneh] vipravante, 'He (Agni) generated these sparks, viz. those
(sparks) of (the fire) when it is being stirred which fiy off in aU
directions'. MS. 2. 1. 11 (p. 12, 19).
The example is cited by Delbrück, Altind. Synt., p. 390, 1-2 as an mstance
of a quasl absolule gemlive: 'Der ursprüngllch possessive Genitiv mit semem
Partlcipium ist bereits zu einem relativ selbstandlgen, unseren Nebensatzen III
der FunkllOn ahnhchem Salzteil geworden'.
< v' bhid + sam >
52. prajanarh tau samabhidyetam, 'Of the
creatures when they had been created these two (viz. in-breathing
and out-breathing) were cut off', K. 27. 3 (p. 141, 12).
< v' -t- pari >
53. tasyá áharantyai gandharvo [somam]
  'Of thlS (Gayatri) as she was fetching (it) the Gan-
dharva Vi¡;vavasu stole away (the Soma). QB. 3. 2. 4. 2.
1 Cf. wllhout particlple PB. 9. 5.4 ta8ya yo '1i{!Uh parápatat sa pütiko 'bhavat
120
Absolute Gemtive. § 49, Ex. 54-60.
The parallel passages MS 3 7. 3. (p. 77, 14); 3 7 8 (p 87, 1); K. 24. 1 (p. 90,
4); PB. 6. 9. 22, TS 6. 1 11. 5 have nothmg syntacllcally comparable
The case oC tasyCi aharantlJai IS amblguouS. It may be ablatlVe, cf. v' mus
+ ms, K. 37. 14 (p. 94, 7) tasye   'ndrat; t;yeno bhlitva 'syad amltam
niramusnat (Schroeder-Caland's emendatlOn for mramathnát), but cf. the gemtlve
wJth v'mus + pUI'i, GB 1. 3. 19 (p. 89, 12) yataro v'iryavatta1'o bhavatl su parasya
ya;ñam parwmsnatij wlth v' mus + pra, I;B 14.1. 3. 16 nen me 'yam taptah
pramusnat, MS. 3.6 9 (p. 72,9) apo me dIksalh net pramusnan j
wllh v' mus + ava; K. 23. 5 (p. 80, 15) iipo me ned dlksiim awmusnan. WJth
-y' mus + a the case IS amblguous at AB 7. 28 1 Cimusya somam.
<- -V 2 yu 'separate' >
5-1. s01nar; ca va etasya ca jayamanasye ' ndnyam
ayuvetam, 'Of him as he was being born Soma and snatched
away vigour and strength', MS. 2. 5. 5 (p. 54, 1). •
< V vrafc + pra >
55. tasya 'rct$alt pragrhitasya 'sura agram pravrfcan, 'Of tbis
flame wben it was held forward the Asuras cut off tbe point'.
QB. 6.6.2 11
< V 1 r;); 'fall', passive to V fad >
56. prajapater vtsrastasya yam lomany ar;iyanta ta ima o$adhayo
'bhavan, 'Of Prajapati when he had become dlsJointed the hair
which feH out that became these plants' QB. 7 4-. 2. 11.
57. yatha havi$o 'hutasya skanded evarn etat skandat¡,
yasya mktasya lomam 'Just as (part) of an oblation which
has not (yet) been offered may be spllled, even so (part) of a
victim of which, after it has been wetted, the hair falIs out is
spllled'. QB. 13. 2. 6. 8.
58. yatha Val grhftasya skandafy evam va etad
skandati yad asyo 'pakrtasya lomam 'Just as (part) of an
oblatlOn after it has been taken lS spilled, even so (part) of the
horse lS spilled when the hair of thls (horse) after it has been
prepared (for the sacrIfice) falls out'. TB. 3. 9. 4 4.
< V 1. ft 'faIl' + ava >
59. etasya vaz rnathyamanasya bhasma 'va{:'iyate, 'Of this
(fire) as it is being churned the ashes faU down'. JB. 1. 1.
< V sad + vi - ud >
60. tasya [somasya 1 kr'itasya manusyan abhy upawrtarnanasya
dlQo Viryanf 'ndrzyanz '/JyHdasidan, 'Of tbis (Soma) when it had
121
§ 49, Ex. 61-66; § 50, Ex: 1 Absolute Gemtive.
been purchased (and) was turning toward men the vigour (and)
strength departed in al! dlrections toward the quarters'. AB. 1. 12. 3.
< V skand >
61. tam [cháyam ] asye [brahmanall] svayam reto
skandat, 'Of this (Brahman) as it was contemplating this (shadow)
the seed dropped off of its own aecord'. GB 1. 1. 3 (p. 2, 14).
< V han + apa > ¿
62. etena ha va asya sa1ncaramiinasya garhapatyáhavan'iyau páp-
miinam apahataJ.¿, 'Of this (sacrlficer) as he moves along in thlS
lDanner (viz. as he walks between the Garhapatya and Ahavanlya
fires) the Garhapatya and Ahavaniya fires smite away the evil'
AB. 7. 12. 7.
63. tav 'asya ca ca 'ntarena 'tiyataJ.¿ pap-
manam apahataJ.¿, 'These two, viz. the Ahavanlya and the Garha-
patya fire smite a way the evil of this (sacrificer) as he passes
between (them)'. QB. 2. 3. 3. 12.
< ylhan+ms>
64. varu1}asya va 'pa mdriyam viryam niraghnan,
'Of VarUI;ta as he was being eonsecrated the waters smote off
strength (and) vigour'. MS. 4. 4. 4 (p. 54, 15); TB. 1. 8.9. 1.
65. nai 'tasya   '9anta apo viryam nirhanan, 'May
not the waters unappeased smite off tbe strength of this one after
he has been eonseerated'. AB. 8.6. 11.
<ylhr+
a
>
66. tau [asuramayau] paretya subandhor gaupayanasya
pramattasya 'sumahttya nyadhattam, 'These two (Asura-
illusjons), going away, snatching the vital spirit of Subandhu
Gaupáyana as he was asleep (and) unconscious, deposited It witbm
the enclosure-sticks'. JB. 3 168 (JAOS. 18, p.
The fragment from tbe Brabmana quoted by Sáyana to RV. 10.
57. 1 IS identJcal wlth the JB. passage.
Cf JB. 3.353, above Ex. 37.
B. The Genitive is a Partitive Genitive.
§ 50.
1. te$am [devanam] cetayamanti1u'im prajapatw l1nám [prthWi"m]
prathamarh svayamatrnná1h apa9yat, QB. 6. 2. 3. 1; te$am
122
Absolute Gemtlve.
§ 50, Ex. 2-7
[devanam] cetayamananam ca vlQvakarma ca
dvitiyam svayamatrnnam cztMn apaI}Yat, QB. 6. 2. 3. 3; [devan-
am] cetayamananam   divaJn trtiyaril svayamatrnnam citun
apafyat, QB. 6. 2. 3. 5, 'Of tbese (gods) wbile tbey were meditating
Prajapati [lndra, Agni, and Vl<;wakarmau; saw tbis
eartb [tbe atmospbere; tbe sky] as the first [second; tbird] self-
perforated
2. [devanam ca ca] cetayamananalh deva dmtiyam
citzm apafyann caturlhim, 'Of these (gods and sages) whIle
tbey were medltating tbe gods saw tbe second, the sages tbe
fourtb layer'. QB. 6. 2. 3. 7. •
3. [devallam] cetayamananam savitm' 'tani savitrany apawat,
'Of these (gods) while tbey were meditatlDg SavitT saw tbe Savi-
tra-formulas'. QB. 6. 3. 1. 1.
4. te$aJh [devanam] vifatám prajapallr uttamo 'VtQat, QB. 8 6. 2.
5; etad vm devanam vIQatam prajapatú' uttamo 'vu;at, QB. 8.6.2.
19, 'Of these gods as they were entering (the beavenly world)
Prajapati entered last'.
5 .. athe 'to yatam [pafUnam] pmthama eti, . ", tad yad
ito yatam arua!t prathama eti ... , 'Of these (anirnals) when they
go away from this (fire) the borse goes first; ... j because of these
(ullimals) whell they go away from tbIS (fire) tbe horse goes first '
<;lB. 6. 4. 4. 12.
6. nai 've 'to yatam [pafÜnam] na 'muto rasabhah prathama etl,
'Of these (animals) lleither whell they go froro here nor froill
there do es the ass go first'. QB 6. 4. 4. 13
7. devániim u ha sma ya!t samiddhiiro va svadhyiiyam
vii visrJate tam ha sma ... asUrarak$llSlini jighañsantl, 'When allyone
of the gods after tbey had been consecrated (was) fetchillg fuel
or interrupted (his) Veda-study the Asuras und . . . en-
deavoured to slay hirn'. QB. 3. 4. 3. 6.
ViST;ate is tbe reading of Weber's text and of tbe Commentator (Blbl lod
p. 248, 17). Tbe text of tbe BIbl. Ind. edihon reads msr;yate (notmg vlSljate as
varo lect). Weber, Verzeichms der Sanskrithandschnften II (1886) p. 69, lme 14
corrects the visTjate of his edition (as a IDlsprint) to "isr;'yate without notmg
that 11 was the readmg of the Commentatol'g text
If visrjate is read, svadhyliyarh ViSTjate must here mean' 'He ends hIS Veda·
123
§ 50, Ex.8-1!l. Absolute Genitive.
lesson', cf vratam vtsrjute, 'He ends hls vow', QB. 1. 1 1. 6, 1 9.3 23, TS.1.
7.6 6; KB 2.4, (p. 5, 18)
The Commentary, however, glosses msrjate by uCCaral¡ati, and yab
svadhyayam visrjate by rtvijalh mantrotsrastiiram, and Eggeling, followmg
him, renders: 'Or uttered his appropdate text'o
If the passlve vtSrjyate IS read our passage closely resembles QB 4.6. 9 6
teljam [[tvijiim] ekatlca eva vacalhyama aste, .. , jthe 'tare visY1yante samlddha¡'o,
t'o, svadhytlyalh va, 'The other (prlests) are sent off eIther as fuel·carrlers or for
thell Veda-Iesson'.
Is it possible that on account of the outward simIlarlty of the two passages
the passlve vtsr}yate was Imported mto QB 3 4. 3. 6 froro CB. 4. 6. 9. 6? The
time when the gods ended (or interrupted) their Veda-Iesson would certainly be
a very approprlate tIme for aUack 011 the part of the Asuras
8. tasmat samavat par;ünam prajayamananam  
kanfyañsah, 'Therefore of the animals which are born of equal
size (= although animals are born of equal size) the wild animals
are smaller (when grown up)'. TS. 5. 1. 4. 3; 5. 2. 9. 5; TA. 5.
2. 11-12.
9. ttiSárn [prajanam] parzgrhitanam ar;vataro 'tyapravata, 'Of
these (creatures) when they had been grasped the he-mule escaped'.
TS 7. 1. 1. 2; JB. 1. 67. 3 (Transactions of the Oonnecticut ,aca-
demy of Arts and Sciences, 15, p. 178, where the mss. are dwided
between 'tyapravata and 'tyaplavata).
The parallel PB. 6. 1. 4 has tiisiirh pangl hifanlim al(vatary atyakt iimat
10. bahünam samanam ahar yajamananam yo vai devatalJ, .pür-
vedyur grJmati tasya 9VO bhüte yaJiiam agacchanti, 'Of many who
perform the sacrifice on the same day,-he who seizes the divinities
on J;he preceding day, his sacrifice they approach on the next
day'. K. 31. 15 (p. 17, 6).
Cf. Ex. 11 and 12
11. bahünám samanam ahar yajamananam yalJ, pürvedyur agnim
grhnaf¿ sa 9'170 Müte devata abhtyajate, 'Of many who perform the
sacrifice on the same day,-he who seizes Agni on the preceding
day he (really) sacrifices to the divinities on the next day (= his
sacrifice to the divinities on the next day really counts)'. MS. 1.
4. 5 (p. 52, 10).
cr. Ex. 10 and B!
12. bahünám yajamananam yo vai devatah pÜ1'valJ, parigrh1Jatt sa
enalJ, bhüte yajate, 'Of ruaoy who perform tbe sacrIfice (on the
124
Absolute Geuihve. § 50, Ex. 13-15.
same day),-be wbo first .appropriates tbe divinities be sacrifices
to tbem on tbe next day (= 111S sacrIfice to tbem on tbe next
day really counts)'. TS. 1 6. 7. 1.
Cf. Ex 10 and 11.
13. [yatinam] adyamananarh syü,maraQmir pn1-
v!Qat, 'Of these (Yatis) as they were being devoured tbe sage
Syümarac;mi entered the bor5e'. K. 8. 5 (p. 88, 20).
The trauslation assumes that Syümaral;mi Bhiirgava, the reputed author of
RV. 10. 77 aud 78, and the hero of an obseure legend RV 1. 112. 16, was oue
<lf the Yatls.
Cf Ex 14.
14 te$am [yafinam] adyamananam trayall kumara!l paryafisyanla,
'Of these (Yatis) as they were bemg devoured tbree boys were
1eft'. JB. 1. 185 (JAOS 19, p. 123).
The parallel TS 2 4. 9 2 (above § 49, Ex 42) has the possesslve genibve.
er. Ex.13.
ló. zndragni va akámayeta:m
1
: sadrfánam eva satárh
r;re$thatam gacc]¿eva samanena yaJñena samanim rdhnuyáve
'ft, tav etam yají'iam apaQyatám tam aharetam tena 'yajetam, tato
vm tau sadrr;anám eva satám devanam r;re$thatam agacchatam sa-
manena yajñena sanutním rddhzm ardhnuttím, .. , yau  
ca rajanyar,; ca kiimayeyatam : eva satam svánám fre¡;tha-
tam gaccheva samanena yajiiena saman'im rdhnuyave 'h tav
yajeyatam sadrr,;anam eva satam SvanCim r,;re¡;thatam gacchatas
samanena yajñena samCinim rdhnutalj" 'Iudra aud Agni
desired: "Among the gods wbo are (aH) alike 1et us two attain
preeminence, through the same sacrifice let us both achieve the
same prosperity"; tbey saw tb18 sacrifice, tbey seized it, tbey sacri-
ficed with it; thereupon tbese two attained preeminence among
the gods who are (aH) alike,. ., if a BrahmaI;la and a Rajanya
ahould desire: "Among (the members of) our own (class) who are
{aU) alike let ua attain preeminence, tbrough tbe same sacrifice
1et us acbieve the same prosperity", they sbould sacrifice witb
this (sacrifice); they attain preeminence among (the members of)
their own (cIass) who are (aU) ahke, they achieve the same pros-
perity through the same sacrifice'. JB. 2. 132.'
1 The mss atanumayetañt.
125
§ 50, Ex. 16-18.
Absolute Gemtlve.
Cf without parlIclple TS 2 ;) 6. 6 tasmat sa[lr{iniim rátrinám amávasyiiyiiriz
ca paurnamasyam ca devli l)yante 'Therefore of (all) the nights which are aH
ahke It IS ooly On the night of the new moon and on the mght of the full moon
thal the gods are sacnficed to'.
For the general thought d. JB 2 139 indro vii akamayata . sarvesarn deva-
nam I(resthatám gaccheyam , tato mi sarvesam devanalÍz agacchat,
'Indla desired "May I attalll preemlllence amonfj aIl the gods",. ; thereupon
he attamed preemllleoce among aH the gods'.
16. tes{t1iL sval'garh lokam yatam so [9vztra(t] 'ltiyata 'nrtarn hy
auravít, 'Of these going to the heavenly world this (Qvitra) was
left behind, for he spoke untruth'. JB. 3. 77 (Caland, AuswahI,
p.237).
17. sa yo 'vam vzdvan sarhmhztayar brüyad:
tva sarhntdadham,'j; 'tt paraln gramam sa hai 'va tam gra-
mam )ayail, (He who knowing thus should say to the other
(= the bostile) host of two arroies which are engaged in battIe:
"With the syllable 1 brlllg thee in confbct", he conquers that
(hosble) host'. JB. 1. 107 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 23).
Wlth sarhnzhztayoh cf 1. 2 5 18 devli ha vaz saníg¡'amam sa¡hntdhasyantah ,
'The gods belDg about lo engage m battle '
18. te ha 'tthilpyamana rttrttvzre : .•. svit so
'smaka 'sti Vlra ya imam somapítham abh'tje$yat't 'ti 11 ayam aham
asmt va vira itt ha 'vaca ramo margaveyah 11 rama ha 'sa margaveya
'nacanah fyaparniyas, testlm ha   uvIU;a: 'pi nu rajann
ltthamvidarh veder utthapayant:¡; 'h, 'These (QyavapaTI).as) while they
were being turned out (oí the sacrificial enclosure) ahouted: ".
Wbat hero is there among us who wIlI win this Soroa-draught?"-
"1 am that hero among you", said Rama Margaveya; this Rama
Margaveya naroely was a learned roember of the QyaparQ.a clan;
of them while they were rising be said (= amongst them while
they were rising it was he who spoke up): "O king, do tbey
(= will they dare to) turn out froro tbe sacrificial enclosure even
one who knows thus?'" AB. 7 27. 2-4
For uS1/Iiika 'sti instead of asrntikam astt
'
cf Whitney, Gr § 213, h; Wacker-
nagel, Altmd Gr. J, p.333, § 283, Geldnel', Deutsche Llteraturzeltung, 1911, col.
1 Cf. K. 15. 7 (p 214, 7-10) chandasa 'vatu for TS. 1. 8 13. 1; MS 2.6. 10
(p. 09, 13-70, 1) chctndasam awtu, l\IS.2. 12. 6 (p 150, 12) Jlhva 'bht for VS
27. 18, TS 4. 1. 8. 2 )th1Jtim abht < the Pp. ms. of 1I1S has phvám abht; the
parallels AV. 5 27.9, K. 18 17 (p. 277, 21) and Kap. S. 29. 5 readJihvaya 'bht >.
126
Absolute Genitlve.
§ 50, Ex. 19-21.
400; Oldenbe¡g, Rigveda Noten n, p. 69 BohtUngk's emendatlOn (Berichte über
dIe Verhandl d k. sachs Ges. d. WlSS, 52, p.419) asmiilco 'sh is not necessary.
Lleblch, (B8. 11, p. 299) regards tesam uttisthatam as 'ein slCheres beisp¡el
rur g[emtIvus absolutus], und zwar, wle der zusammenhang lehrt, in deutlkh
konzessivem smne', l. e. conform to Piimm's rule (2. 3.38) sasthi ca 'nadare.
'The absolute genitive IS permlssible when dlsregard 15 expressed'. DelblUck
(Vgl. Syntax, II, p. 494, § 164.) .1grees wIth LIeblCh: 'Mag der Gemtiv in dlesem
Satze emem   oder, was wahrschelllhcher 1St, emem partitlven nach-
gebJldet selll, soviel 1st kIar, daEl er emen kasuellen AnschluEl an den Satz nicht
mehr hat, und deshalb dIe KonstruktlOn als eine bezelchnet werden mufl'.
Both Eggelmg (SBE , 43, p. 435, note 3 to QB 10. 4. 1. 10, 'When they rose to leave
he saíd') and KeIth ('When they were rismg up he sald') render the gembve by
a hypotactical clause, as IS mdeed most natural m Euglish, but the latter, at
any rate, appears to construe te5am utt1!Jthattim as a conJunct gemtrve for he
remarks (Harvard OrIental Series, 25, p. !:I3, § 7, no 8)' 'The locatlve absolute
lS found [m AB and KB.] but not the gembve absolute'.
The sen5e lS doubtless that, whlle the other gyiivaparl}as rose up to leave tbe
sacred endosure stood hls ground and made hls challenge.
But 1 can see nelther mternal nor formal reasons (ef. § 3, 1, e) which would
plevent the syntactIeal connectlOll of teslim utttsthatám wlth the rest of the
sentence' 'Of (= amongst) these Vya;vapalnas who were rismg up to leave the
sacred enclosure he, Ráma Milrgaveya, alone hls ground, sald'.
19. etam eva pratzpadam kurVíran dZKsitanam prarniyeta
t
'pata wa va ete 'nzedhya tnanyante d'ik$ztanam pram'iyate,
'gnznat 'vai 'nan pavamanena pulan medhyan karofl, 'If one of
those who have been consecrated should die (literally, 'Of whom,
when they have been consecrated, one should die') they should
use this introductory stanza; for lf one of those who ha ve been
consecrated dles they consider themselves unclean (and) impure;
by means of Agui as the Cleanser it makes them clean (and)
pure'. JB. 1. 92.
The stanza. referred to is SV. 2. 814 = RV. 9. 66. 19.
cr. the partltive gemtIve yadi diksitanám pramIyeta JB 1 345.
20. tad yad eva 'tra yají'tasya hatasya vyathate tad eva 'sym 'tad
dak$ayatz, 'What (part) of the sacrIfice after it has.
been slain wavers that (part) of Jt he thus steadles by means of
tbe sacrlficial gifts (to tbe priests)'. QB 4.. 3.4. 2.
2l. yad vai yajñasya kriyamalJasya 'ntaryantl puyah va fUlya tai.
'What (part) oí the sacrifice as it lS being performed they pass
over (= omit) that (part) of it becoroes putried'. TS. 5. 3. 1 lo
127
§ 50, Ex. 22-27. Absolute Genillve.
22. askanllam In tad yad yajíiasya samstlntasya skandatt, 'For
what (part) of the sacnfice after it has been completed lS spilled
tbat (part of lt) is (regurded as) unspilled' TB. 3. 8. ti. 5
Cf, wlth omlSSlon of the noun havisah, <;:8. 13 1 3 1 j 4, 5 askannalh ht
tad yad dhutasya [havtyah] skandah.
23. yatha val, 'lmtasya skandeiJ evam etat par;o(h) skandatz,
'Even as (part) of an oblatlOn when it has not (yet) been offered
may be spilled, so (part) of the vlctlm i8 thus spilled'. QS. 13.
1 3 1; 5; 13. 2. 6. 8.
24. yatha val grh'itasya s7.anclaty evam va etad a')vasya
skandatz, 'Even as (part) of an oblatlOn when it has been taken
i8 spllled, so (part) of the horse is thus spIlled'. TB. 3. 8. 6. 1;
3. 8. 8. 1; 3 9. 4. 4.
25. bahu va etasya parvedyur ahnyamanasya (M8. almyamá!1asye
'ha ce 'ha ca) skandati, 'Much of this (sacnfiClal strew) when it
has been collected on the previous day IS spilled [here and there].'
K. 31. 1 (p. 2,9); M8 4. 1. 2 (p. 4, 5)
26. bahu va etasya duhyamanasya 'Much of this (mllk)
while it is being mi1ked is spüled'. K. 31. 2 (p. 3, 6).
27. suvargam va ete lokam yantb ya upasada upuyantl, ya
unnayate h'iyata eva sa, no 'ti sanníyam iva, yo va'/, svarthelci1h
yatam r;ranto lnyata uta sa salta vasatl, tasmat sakrd unniya
na 'pararn unnayeta, 'Those who enter upon the (performance of
the) Upasads go to the heaven1y world; of these he who takes
out (food) is 1eft behind, (with the words). "I have not taken
out (food)", (food) is taken out carefully so to speak, of people
who proceed bent on thelr own (affairs) he who i8 left behind
exhausted " (?); therefore, haviug taken out (food) once he
should not take out again'. T8. 6. 2. 4. 1.
Whlle It IS clear that s¡arthetam gatam 15 to be construed as partltlve ge-
nitive: 'Amongst a crowu 01 travellers aH bent on thelr own busmess one vy,)l.o
falis to keep pace IS left behmd and the devIl takes the hmdmost', the
meanmg of the passage is far from clear, cf KeJth's note, who renders. 'He
who 15 left behmd weaned among those who go on thelr own misslOn shcks
behmd and lives (at home)', dl5regardmg the aaha before vasatt. But for the
presence of th¡s saha one mlght be tempted to construe vasatt as auxlhary verb
Wlth the gerund nrstyaya 'he keeps sheking'; ef. gB. 11. 3. 3. 1 tasmiid yiim
rlitrtlÍ! brahmaciil ¡; na 'haratg   eva tilm avadliya vasati, 'There·
128
Absolute Genillve § 50, Ex. 28-29.
fore a Brahmaeann keeps cuttmg off that mght from hlS hfetlme durmg whleh
he does not fetch fuel' (Delbruck, Altmd. Synt p 260, 27 'raubt semem Leben
Jede Naeht, ID der el' llIcht Bl'ennholz hel'beibl'ingt'; thls rendermg IS prefel'able
to his translatlOn p 3'35, 1 'Darum brmgt der Brahmanenschülel dIe Naeht, in
welcher er kem Brennholz herbeibringt, unter Verlust eines Telles semes Lebens
zu', see Eggehng's note), aud ned ayuso 'vadaya vasllni 'Lest 1 keep cuttmg off
from my IlfetIme', AH. 5 10. 4 tad eva [saptamam ahah} saptamena padena
'bhyarabhya vasanü (where the PW s. v' vas, col 828, 14 renders v' vas by
'innehalten'), 'They keep takmg hold of thls (seventh day) by means of the
seventh Pada'; KB 22 2 (p. 98, 5), 30. 11 (p. 125, 2, whele Liudner's text er-
roneously reads parame tad) param evai 'nad (30. 11 'tad) ahar abhyál'abhya
ThlS use of v' vas as auxIllary \VIth the «erund should be added to
Delbruck, Altmd. Synt. p 407, 24-35
But the presence of saha makes such a construcbon ImposslbJe, and masmueh
as mstyaya (01' mhstya.ya, so Weber, ef Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 1, p. 342,
§ :l87, b) as gerund of V styli + m 01' n/S do es not yleld a vely sahsfactory sense
a eorruption of tbe text mlght posslbly be suspected. Does nístyaya perhaps
eontalll a corrupted lllstrumental dependent on saha? As a sOJourn among
strangers lS eonsldered a calamlty at JB 2. 135 (Caland, Auswahl, p 168) esa
ha vai padbhyarn papam karoti yo Janam ett, and QB 14. 4. 1 11 na Janam iylit
an emendallOn of mstyaya lo mstymh 'wtlh strangers' might tentatively be sug-
gested, the sense bemg' He IS len behmd and, unable lo gel back home, he is
even forced to IIve among strangers. For v' vas 'vith the lllstrumental (but
without saha) ef. AH. 3 23. 8 sa va asmin¡: ca loke   ca p¡'aJayll ca
pafubht9 ca grhesu vasati ya evarn veda, 'He who knows thus hves both m
ihls and m yonder wodd at home together wIlh plOgeny and cattle'
EIsewhere III the Brahmana prose v' vas takes the 10catIve, PB. 16. 6
7 msadew, 8 Jane = JB. 2 183 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 178); 9 samanaJane,
JB 2.183 (Caland, Auswabl, p. 178) sajane, QB. 14.6.7. 1 and
so always brahmacaryalh vasati wIth the locatlve of tbe teacher.
An emendatIon of ntstyllya to mstyayli 'wlth a strange \Voman' would
not seem to lit the eontext so well, besldes V vas 'cohabIt' governs the
10catIve JO the older prose, ef. MS 2 2. 7 (p 21,5), K 11 3 (p 147, 2,
4; 5; 7; 8); QB 11. 5.1. 2.
For uta introducing the apodosis 1 am unable to glve a palalle!.
28. anaddha vai samkrantayor yad¡ 'taro ve 'taram ablHbhavatí
ve 'taram, 'It is uncertam whether of two (persons) who
have joined (in comhat) the first will prevall over the second or
the second over the first'. QB. 1. 6. 3. 33.
The case of 8arnkrantayolJ, IS amblguous; It may posslbly be 10catIve, ef. below
§ 59, Ex. 67.
29. QB. 13. 5. 2. 3 see below § 61, Ex. 38.
Oertel, The Syn!ax of Cases. 9
129
§ 51, Ex. 1.
Absolute GenitIve.
§ 51. C. The Gemtive is to be construed with the Verbo
< -y' rdh + m>
1. agnma va an'ikene 'ndro, vrtram ahañs, tasya samasrptasya
MUasya yatra vyardhyata tato dhumo (so Roth's emendation, MS.
vol. IV, p. 311) 'srjyata, tasmad dhümavat'i (so Roth's emendation)
na 'nücya, vyrddha ha sa, 'With Agni. as edged weapon Indra
slew Vrtra; where he when he had crawled up and was frightened
suffered a 10ss thence smoke arose; therefore (a verse) contaimng
(the word) "8moke" should not be recited, for such (means) failure'.
M8. 3. 9. 5 (p. 121, 14).
The parallel passage K. 26. 8 (p 131, 18) reads' na dhümavatim anub1'üyüa,
maro mi vrtram ahans (Caland·Schroeder's emendahon for yatram ahans), tasya
yatra-yatra vyrddham (Schroeder's emendatlOn for vyaddham) ltsif tato dhüma
udüyata, vyrddhad (Schroeder's emendatlon for vrddhad) ta esa Jütah.
Reference IS apparently made to lndra's loss of strength after hls fight with
Vrtra, cf. e.g. TS 2.5.3. 1 = TB 1. 6. 1. 7 tnd1'o vrtram hat¡,a devaUibhu; ce
'ndnye¡¡a ca vyardhyata In MS and K thls lost strength turns mto smoke as
at TS. 2. 5. 3. 2 It enters the earth and turns mto plants and herbs (inarasya
vltram jaghnusa tndnYUlh viryan. prthtv'im anuvyarchat, tad osadhayo virudho
'bhavan)
As MS. tasya ... yatra· vyilrdhyata is synonymous wIth K. tasya yatra-yatra
vvrddham asit, 'where there was a failure (1055) of hlm', the translation above
construes Ihe gemtIves tasya samaslptasya bhUasya as dependent on the verh
vyardhyata and vyarahyata itself as an Impersonal thlrd person smgular.
Cf for such constructrons Delbrück, Altind. Syntax § 2, P 5, 39-41
and p. 6, 7-11. But asya at \;B. 6. 4. 4. 20, tad yad eva 'sya 'tro
'panaddhaBya may be partItive gemtive dependmg on yad, as
Eggelmg takes It: 'Whatever part of his (body) pains hlm (Aglll) when
tIed up, that pum he now puts outslde of him'. Add to Delbruck's examples
OB. 10. 6. 1. 1 tesam ha na samtyliya, 'lis de Vau;vanalo
non convemt' (PW. s. v' i + sam, no 3; and ef. Lüdels, SItzungsbenchte
d preuf3. Akad. d 1922, p. 242). Also the impersonal mlyate wIlh
the gemtive (01 ablatlve?) litmana?¡ at K. 31. 1 (p. 1, 13-14) and MS. 4 1. 2
(p 3, 11-12) yii.vad-yavad   av¡dvan adhvaryur barhtso (MS. yavad-yavad
ewm avid¡"an adhvaryur barhtr) dülí ta¡,ad asya 'tmano rn'iyate, na 'sya
'tmano miyate ya evari. veda; TE. 3. 2. 2. 5 na 'sya 'tmano miyate ya
evari. veda_
But 1 cannot quote an exact parallel for the Impersonal vyrdhyate wIth gem-
tIve from the Briih!p.ana prose At K. 8. 15 (p. 98, 16) yady tidhaya ma'liyeta:
vyrdhyate 'sya (so Scbroeder's text, Wlth avagraha and Ibe note 'so Ch.; D. sya')
punar adadhUa the avagraba befare sya should be deleted. The plOnoun is
the nommatIve sya (Caland, ZDMG 72, 13), here eqUlvalent to the pronoun of
130
Absolute Genitive. § 51, Ex. 2-4.
the tirst person (aham) as appears from the parallel MS. 1. 7 2 (p. 110, 7) yady
adadhano manyeta vi sya rdhyata
For sya = aham ef. e. g. MS. 2 4. 3 (p. 41, 5) = 4. 6. 5 (p. 85,5) asti
ta idrrm tyasmmn antar vlryam with TS 2.4. 12.4-5 = 6. 5 1. 1 asti
va tdam mayi viryam and K. 12. 3 (p. 164, 16) = 27. 10 (p. 150, 6)
va idaln mayy asti.
For tbe Sandbi K sya 1ti and MS. sya 1dhyata iti cf. Wackernagel,
Altmd. Gr. I" § 267, a, T, note, p. 315, 1 and Schroeder's note to MS 1. 5.
4. (p 71, 11).
A close parallel to K. 26 8 (p. 131, 18) tasya yatra-yatra vyrddham lisU seems
to occcur at QS. 1. 2 2 9 tam na satra prthum kuryaf I mlinw¡a»¿ ha kuryiid
yat plthum kuryad, vyrddhGlh Vat yaJíiasya yan manusam ned vYlddhath yaJñe
karatani 'ti, tasman na satra plfhum kuryat, 'Let blm not make It too broad,
for he wou1d make IÍ a human (profane, common cake) If he were to make 1t
(too) broad. Unlucky for (or excluded from) the sacnfice mdeed lS that one, viz.
the common (cake). "Tbat 1 may not do anythmg that lS unlucky lit tbe sacri-
tiee", (thus he tbmks and) therefore be should not make (the cake) too broad'
(Eggelmg). Here QB. vyrddham yaj1iasya seems to mean: 'For what IS human
(= profane) entalls a 1055 (a fadure, a miscarriage) in legard to the sacrlfice',
Just as K. tasya yatra-yatra vyrddham asit literally means. 'Where a 10ss was
sustamed In regard to hlm'.
< -y jan >
For the competmg con5tructlOns of V Jan with the gemtIve and ablatlve see the
detal1s undel "Genitive". The gemhve wltb vi Jan 15 hardly to be explained by the
assumptlOn of on e1hpsls of grhe as Delbruck suggests, Altmd. Synt. p. 9, 32-36.
2. apam taptánám pheno jáyate, '(Out) of the waters when they
are heated foaru is generated'. QB. 6. 1. 3. 2.
r Addition from the AraI}.yakas and Upani¡;;ads.
2 A. tasya [1. 3 rgvedasya; 2.2 yajurvedasya; 3. 2 samavedasya;
4. 2 ¿hhasapuranasya; 5. 2 'bh1taptasya yar,;as teja in-
V'iryam annádyam raso 'j ayata, 'Of this (Rigveda; Y aj urveda;
Saruaveda; ItIhasapUrál).a; Brahruan) when it was heated glory
(and) splendour, power (and) strength, food-eating (and) sap was
generated'. Chand. Up. 3. 1. 3; 3.2.2, 3.3. 2; 3.4. 2; 3.5.2. J
3. tasya 'reata ápo 'jayanta, 'Of him while he was worshipping
the waters were born'. <tB. 10. 6. 5. 1.
4 [devanam] tapyamánanam raso 'jáyata: prthivy
ayaur tM, ... , tapyamananam raso 'Jáyata: rgvedah prtMvya
yajurvedo   samavedo   ... , tapyamananam
131
§ 51, Ex. 5.
.Absolute GemtIve.
raso 'Jayata: rgvedacl garltapatyo yaJurveclad samavedád
ahavaniyafi" ... , tapyamananam 'jayata, 'Out of these
(gods) as they wel'e practismg austentIes the sap (esseoce) was
boro, viz the earth, the atm9sphere, (and) the sky, ... , out of
these as they were being heated the sap was boro' the Rigveda
froro the earth, the YaJurveda from the atmosphere, the Samaveda
from yonder (sky) , ... , out of these as they we1'e bemg heated
the sap was boro: froro the Rlgveda the Garhapatya·fi1'e, froro
the Yajurveda the southern fire, (and) froro the f;lamaveda the
Ahsvanlya-fire,. .; out of these as they we1'e being heated roan
was born'. SB. 4. 1. 2.
5. fasmad u samanasyat 'va retaso sato yaclrr;a ew bhavatz taarr;o
jayate, 'And the1'efo1'e out of the seed, tbough that is (always) tbe
same, he (= the future being) is boro such as he lS (= wlth his
individual cha1'acteristics)'. JB. 1. 17.4 (JAOS. 19, p. 115).
The whole passage whlch runs as follows: 2. sa ya manusyayontl' manusya·
loka eva sa, tat (the mss. tatam and talit) striyai praJananam, ato 'dhí PI aJah
praJáyante. 3. tasmad u kalyanrm Jayam ,'ccheta: kalyano (the mss l..alyane)
ma atma salilbhavad itz, tasmad u Jay{ilÍl jllgztpsen' nen mama yonau mama
loke 'nyas satilbhaviid iti. 4. tasya vai sambhavzsyatah prána agl'e (the mss.
pranii'gre)   atha retas swyate, sa tlnan priinl!n aka,an (so all the
mss wIthout variant) abhimvartate, tasmlid u samiinasyal 'va.. tadrco Jayafe
is by Wmdlsch, Berlchte d. kgI sachs. Ges d. WlSS., 59, p. 115-116.
Up to the second half of the fourth paragraph the text IS falrly c\ear 'The
human world 15 Idenbcal Wlth) the human womb, that (viz. the human womb)
i.5 the prlvate pads of the female, from that offspring is bOlO; therefore one
should seek an excellent wlfe, (lhinkmg): "May an excellent (second) self of me
come into existence"; and therefore one should guard one's WIEe, (thmkmg)
"Lest m my womb, in my world, another self come mto eXIstence", now the
breaths of him who is ahout to come into eXlstence enter (the womb) first, then
the seed IS cast'.
In § 3 the readmg of the mss. kalyane should probably be retamed:
"lIiay roy (second) self come ioto existence in an excellent (place)".
. The active VOlce of the deslderatlve of V gup should be added 10
Whitney's Roots etc., p 37. The mlddle VOl ce of the desiderabve of the
V gup has in the older language the sense of 'to avoid'.
In the next clause sa priiniin iikiit;iin abhinivartate Windlsch proposes
an emendation of 'In mua em Fehlel' stecken. Em Wort wle
prak4t;ayann würde m den Smn passen, den dleser Schluasatz zu haben schemt,
da13 namhch die BeschaffenheJt des neu Eutstehenden von den 1J1'CZnlih abhangt
und nicht vom Samen
l
der überall derselbe 1St', and he translales: 'El kehrt
132
Absolute Gemtive. § 51, Ex 5.
wleder, mdem er dlesíl Hauche zum Vorschem brmgt'. There can be no doubt
that Wmdisch has correctly mterpreted the general sense of ,the c1ause, but his
emendatlOn of tiktifli'l agamst the concurl ent testImony of the mss does not
appear to me convmcmg. If the mss -reading is retamed akacun must be takel1
In apposItlOU to priinlin and the passage would mean: 'He (VIZ. he who IS about
lo come mlo eXIsten ce) lurns toward tbese brealhs (wbich, in tbe macrocosm,
are IdentIcal wllh) the ethereal space5'; that 15 to say: When a human belUg
15 about to come into eXIsten ce (tasya the priillaQ of the future
bemg enler the mother's womb first (praJla agre pravlfantt) and before the ¡¡eed
15 emItted into it (atha 1'etas s,cyate); It 15 tO\\ ard these PI (iAlalt, whlCh m the
rnacrocosm correspond to the ethereal spaces (ükiiCaM that the future bemg turns
(sa [sU!i!bhavisyan) imiin prtini'in iikii¡:iin abhmwa,.tate), and thus it comes to
pass that the cbaracter and nature of the future bemg do not depend on the
seed,-for the seed IS umform in character for all beíngs,-but on lhe character
and nature of the praniib, WhlCh have entered the mothel 's womb before the
seed lb cast and wlth whlCh the sambhavisyant has umted (tasmlid u samanasyaJ
'va ¡'etasas sato yadrea eva tiid, fO jayatel_
The Identlficahon of the mICrOCOSID1C pranak with the macrocosmw
cotresponds to the Identificabon of the mlcrocosmlC manusyayoni
wlth the maclOcosmic manusyaloka In the second paragraph.
For the connectlOn of pra/Ia Wlth cf. the followmg passages:
Up. 2 14 te [pranáh] váyupravíJtii (the other recenSlOn reads
tayupratlsthá) nkiit;iitmiinah swr Iyuh; Chand Up 4 10.5 (The files ex-
plallJ the Brabmlln to Upakosala Kamalayana') prano bl ahma, kati! brahma,
khatn brahme 'ti, .• , yad t'ava ka/h tad eva kham, yad eva khaln tad eva
kam tiz, pra¡IGm ca hii 'smai tad akti¡:am ho 'cul!; JB. 2. 18 reto va etad
agl e gad giiyatram, tato 'nyany añgam   priino "a
esa pra"v;atz yad giiyatram, tam anyány añgany upastdanti, sa tman
jJl!i¡¡tin iiktit;tin abhz nirmanthat¡ (the mss. nirmanthanU). 'The seed,
VI:!:. tbe GlIyatñ metre, enters first, frOID it the other members (oC tbe
body) are respecttvely fashlOned, thls breath mdeed, VIZ. the Gayatr! metre,
enters, the other members (of the body) clustet round lt; th1s (primary)
breath cburns out (= generates) these (otber) breaths (= sense organs)
wlth reference to (?) the ethereal spaces' At ttB. 10. 6. 3. 2 the supreme
atlllan is descnbed as manomayah and priina¡:a1"irah from the pomt of
vlew of the human mlcrocosm, and as bhiirupah and iikat;atma from the
pomt of view of the macrocosm, cf. 14_ 7_ 2. 6 (= BAU. 4. 4 6 lI1ady. =
5 Kanv) where the supreme atman is descrlbed as manomayah, viiñmayah
prli"amayah, caksurmayah, and ¡;rotramayalJ from the pomt of view of
the human mícrocosm, and as akacatnayah, viíyumayah, teJomayak, lipo-
mayah, and prthlVimayah from the pomt oí vlew of the macrocosmo
Wllh regard to the gemtJve samallasyaJ 'va retasas seltah of the last
Wmdlsch notes: 'DIe \Vorte samiinasyai 'va retasah sato sind Gen. absol. in der
bekannten Bedeutung', and he renders 'Deshalb \Vlrd er bel (uberall) gleichem
]33
§ 51, Ex 6-7 Absolute Genittve.
Samen mIt der BeschaffenheIt geboren, die Ihm eigen ¡st'. But there seems to
be no cogent reason why the gemuve retasaf¡ should not be eooJunctly construed
wlth the verb jáyate: 'Therefore out of the seed WhlCh IS (always) the same he
is boro sueh as he IS', I e. 'allhough all men are boro from identIea! seed yet
they are not al! allke but eaeh one shows after birth an mdlvidual character,
beca use the charaeter 01 each mdlvidual does not depend on the seed from whlch
it is produced but 00 the oature of the priMIl?! wItu- whICh the future individual
has umted in hls prenatal state and before the seed has entered tbe womb at
aH'. A very close parallel (but with ablatival construction) is K. 20. 4 (p 22, 14)
tasmllt samiiniid yone1' nanarúpah praJliyante, 'Therefore out of the same womb
(oflsprmg) ol" varied shape IS born'; ef. further QB. 1. 8 3. 6 sanu'lnad eva pUl"usild
atta ca 'dyat; ca jliyate, 'Out of the same mao he who eats (= the husband)
and he who IS ea ten (= the wife) is boro'.
For the genitival constructIon ef. e g. AH. 3 37. 7 pumanso 'sya p1th á jayante;
:K. 25. 5 (p. 108, 11) puman asya putro jliyeta, 22.8 (p. 64, 11 and 14) na 'sya
'parüpam jayate and nii 'bya 'rüpam )ayate, 27. 8 (p. 148, 11) saparva 'sya
siipakiii(o jlíyate; TS. 1. 5. 8 5; 1. 7 6 5 tejasvy na 'sya brahmaMrcaS¡ putro
jllyate; T8. 2. 5. 5. 3 pragalbho 'sya Jo.yate, T8. 2. 6. 5. 5, 6.6.4 3 (bis) stry
asya }ilveta and pumiin evti 'sya jayeta¡ TS 1. 5. 8. 5 (biS), 1. 7. 6. 5, 6 yasya
putro ,;atah (and Jatah) sylit; AB. 7. 14. 2 tasya ha putro ¡ajñe.
< y jan + pra >
6. tasya ha vai tapyamanasya [prajápateh] mana!l prájayata, 'From
this (Prajapati) as he was practising austerities mind was born
fortb'. SB. 4. 1. 1.
For v' jan + pra wlth the genitive ef. PB. 23. 13. 5 anlikrtam esam pra)liyate
ya eta [rütrih] upayanti (Comment. asyli [mruasattrasya] 'nustho.{rllC'im apt putra-
pa¡;vadlkam aprayatnenai 'vo 'tpadyate) 'W¡thout effort is (offsprmg) boro of those
who undellake (the performance of) these (night-ntes)'.
< ybha + sam >
7. e§a va agnir ya e§a tapati, tasya ratns samid altar
jyoti dhamo nak§atrani   candramá añgáras, tas-
minn etasminn agnazt vairvánare 'har-ahar devo, amrtam apo juhvatl,
tasyá áhuter lmtáyai somo rájá sarilbhavati; stanaydnur evO, 'gnir
vair;vlinaras, tasya dyaus samid vidyuj jyotir dhumo hládulIayo
(tbe mss. hládanayo) vt§phuliñga añgarás, tasminn etasminn
agnat' vairvanare 'har-ahar devás somarh ráJiinam juhvatl, tasyá
ahuter hutayai vr§tis sambhavati; prthwy eva 'gnir vair;vanaras,
tasya 'ntarik§a/h samid agmr jyotir vayur dhilmo maricayo vt§pllttliñ-
ga dzro 'ñgaras, tasminn etasminn agnau 'Izar-alzar deva
vr§tuh juhvati, tasya ühuter' lmtayá annam samblzaüatt; put"tt§a evá
134
Absolute Genibve § 51, Ex 7_
'gnir tasya vák samic caksur jyohQ prano dhtuno mano
  migarás, tasminn etasmznn agnau
'har-ahar devii annam jtthvaü, tasyii a7mter hutayat retas
stry eva 'gnir (the mss. striyo vii 'gnir and striyo '/;{i agmr)
viinaras, tasyo 'pastha/k samid yonir jyotir (so aIl mss.) dhumo
'bhinando 'ñgaras, tasminn etaS1n1nn agnau
'har-ahar deva reto juhvati, tasya ahuter hutayai
smhbhavati, so 'tra pañcamyam purtt§O devevhyo Jáyate
paiicamyám divá vadanti yatha (the mss.
vadanty atha yatha) 'mum lokam apyett 11 tasya 'gnir eva 'gnú'
vanaras, tasyau ca vanaspatayaf ca smmd jyotir eva Jyotlr
dhama eva dhümo eva aligara eVá 'ñgaras,
tasminn etasminn agnau 'har-ahar Juln-ait,
tasyá ahuter hutáyat 'rmtm lokarh sambhataü, 'ThIS Agni
Vaic;vauara is (identlCal with) hlm who burns here (= the sun)
[with the thunderj with the earth; with man; with woman];
its kindling wood is (identical with) the night [with the SkYi
with the atmosphere; witb speecb¡ witb the female private parts];
its ligbt is (identical with) tbe day [with lightning; with the
fire, witb sight, with the womb]; its smoke is (identical with)
tbe (sun's) rays [witb tbe thunderclouds; with the wind j with
breath; with sexual passion], its sparks are (id en tic al with) tbe
constellations [with the hail stones j with the sun-motes j wltb
mind; with erotie pleasure]; its coals are (identieal with) the
moon [with the thunderbolt; with tbe quarters; with hearing;
with sexual embrace J; in this same Agni -Vaiyvanara the gods
day by day otrer immortality, the waters [King Soma; ram;
food; seed]: from this oblation wben it has been offered King
Soma [rain j food; seed j man] comes into eXIstence; there in
tbis fiftb creation man is born from the gods; at the fifth creation
the divine waters endowed with human speech say how be proceeds
to yonder world. Agni Vaic;vanara is (ldentical with) his (= man's)
(sacrifil}ial) fire; its kindling wood is tbe plants and trees, its hght
i8 jU8t tbe (ordinary) light (of the fire), its smoke i8 just the
(ordinary) smoke (of the fire) , its sparks are just the (ordinary)
sparks (of the fire), its eoaIs are just the (ordinary) coals (of
tbe fire); in this same Agni VaiQvanara the gods day by day offer
135
§ 51, Ex 7. Absolute Gellltt"e.
man, from this oblation when it has been offered man comes inta
existence (for union with) yonder world'. JB. 1. 45-46.
Hlliduni wlth 1 lor J' (Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, p 215, § 191) IS used by
yaJikara as gloss lo hrliduni BAU 6 2. 10 (p 104.7, Blbl Ind).
Isya IS rather nomm. plur. mase. lsyiih than fem. smg The word does not
appear to occur elsewbrre in the hterature, but in Un 1 144 'ilfmah is given
as meanmg both Mma and t'asanta and Hemacandra has tS111ah aod isyal¿ in
the laUer sense.
Tbe accusative amu¡j¡ lokam m the last clause lS odd, elther a 10catJve
be expected as at JB. 1 17.6 (JAOS 19, p.1l5) so 'sya 'tma 'mttsmmn adtt!Je
sambhavatt,"ThlS self of hls comes mto eXlstence m yonder sun'; gB 8.7.3 3
evam ha so 'm1lsmml loke sambhawtt, 'Thus be comes 1I1to eXls\ence in yonder
world', K 14 6 (p. 205, 17) vajapeyaYiiJ! tva amusl1mil loke salÍ!bhavati, 'He who
sacntices wJtb the Va¡apeya c,omes mto eXlstence ID yonder woIld' 1, or the ple-
posItlOn abh¡ should be supphed: amwit lokctm abh¡ sambhavatt 'He comes IDto
existence for }ollder world', d. gB. 6. 2 27 tam kltamlokam abht Jiiyate, 'He
lS born mto tblS (prevlOusly) prepared world'. It IS bal ely possible that sambha-
vati IS here used ID the double sense of 'to come mto eXIsten ce' and 'to umte
wIth', cf for the latter roeanlllg gB 4. 2 5.4 (praJapaflh] idam sa/'vam bUlhbha-
vatt, ,nai 'nalh [adhva/'yum)
The JB passage 15 glven !ll exten;:,o because It forros an mtelestlllg parallel
to the paficlignwtdya Chand. Up. 5. 3-;). 10, Y8. 14 9. 1 (= BAU. 6. 1 Madby =
6. i Kánv.). The followlll!;' table glves a synopsls of the four verSlOnso
1 Flre asalt lokah asalt lokah asult lokah ya tapati
Fuei' q,dttyah adttyah adttyall ratnh
Smoke rafmayah ra/;mayah rar;mayah rar;mayah
Flame:
ahah ahah ahah aha/¡
Coals candramlih dUla/¡ cand¡amah candramah
Sparks: llaksafloánt
aujntal'a-
naksatl'am naksatl'ani
dtfah
In thls tire the gods
r:l'addha ¡;raddha ¡;raddha
a1l!1tam (t-
offer'
pah
Out oi thlS oblatlOn
rliJa .101110 ¡'aJa
I
¡ aja somo rtiJti somo SOll10
anses:
I
1 DlÍTerently TB 1. 3. 3 4 va}apeyayü)y   loke stl tya¡h salnbhavati
136
Absolute GemtJvé, § 51, Ex: 7,
I
(,lB =:= BAU, I BAU, KanV'¡ Chand, Up, ¡ JB
Madhy,
-
n Flre' parJanyah pal'janya/¡
par]anyah stanayttn1th
Fue!' sanwats(tI'ah samvatsarah vayuh dyauh
Smoke: abhlani abhran,
abhram abhram
Flame: vidyut t-tdyul vidyut
Coals a((aml! a((anih acant /¡
Spa¡]"s: hradunayah
hradunayah hradunayah hladunayah
In thls fhe the gods
soma/¡
80mo "aja
somo raja somo I lija
offer'
-
Out of thls oblatioh
vlstlh VI stfh
varsam
anses'
III Flre: ayam lokah ayam lokah prthtvi prthwi
Fuel: prthwi prthwi samvatsal'ah
Smoke: vayuh agnih
akaca/¡ vliyuh
Flame ratnh ratNh rlitN/¡ a(jnth
Coals: dll;ah candl'amah

du;ah
avanta/'a-
naksatrani
avlintara-
maricat¡ah Sparks
dtt;ah diC
ah
In tbls fhe the gods
vlstlh vrstzh var8am

offer:
Out of thls obla-
tlOn arises:
annam annam annam annam
IV Fue'
I purusah I puru8ah I purusah I purusah
Fuel: vyattam
I
vyattam
t,ak vale
Smoke' prlinah prlinah pl'ánall plinah
Flame: vale tak J,hz'a calesul!
Coals: caksuf¡ caksuh caksult

Spalks: ((rotram t¡rotram   manah
------
In thls tire the gods
annam annam annam annam
offer:
------
Out of thls oblatlOn I
,'etah
arlses:
I retah I retah
retal!
137
§ 51, Ex. 8-11
Absolute Gemtlve.
IIIiB = BAU., BAU. Kiinv \ Chiind UP.\ JB
Mádhy.
V. Flre
I yosa I yosá I yosa strf
I
Fuel'
upastha1J ttpasthah upasthah ttpastham
Smoke'
loman; lománi
yad 1tpa-
tsyah
,
mantrayate
Flame:
yonih yomh yonih yomh
Coals:
yad antaf¡ yad antaf¡ yad antaf¡

karoti karoti
Sparks: abhmandllh abhtnandah abhinandaf¡ abJullandiih
In thls fire the gods
retah retah ¡'etah reta1J
offer:
Out of thls oblatlon
I
I purusah
I
purltsal! garbhah
arlses
I
8. r;a9'/)ad dha vm rctasah siktasya   eva prathame samqha-
vatalt, 'From the seed when it has been cast the eyes (oí the
embryo) undoubtedly come into existence first' .. QB 4. 2 1. 28.
The Kiinva recenslOn aarhbhavatar after aiktaaya
< -y das + upa >
For the gemtlve wlth V das + upa cf. K 27.9 (p. 149,20) yad wi putrasyo
'padasyatt pitararh sa 21padhavati, '\Vhen a son IS m want of anything he has
recourse to (hls) father', and the lIIantras kur¡,ato me mo 'padasat, TS. 1. b. 3. 3 etc.
dadato me mo 'padasat MS. 1. 4. 12 (p. 62, 6) etc.
9. kanvayananarh sattram aStnana¡h par;ava upadasyan, 'The
KaI,lvayanas while they were performing a sacrificial session were
in need of cattle'. J B. 3. 220.
10. r$ina¡h va¿ sattram asinanam par;ava upadasyan (the ms.
pupadasyan), 'The sages while tbey were performing a sacrifiClal
session were in need oí cattle'. JB. 3. 225
< V 1 pr 'fill' >
For the gembve wlth V pr 'fill' ef. Delbruck, Altind. Synt. p. 133, 20-33,
§ 90; tbe detaIls are glven under "GenitIva"
11. e$a hai ' naf¡, [ahut¡f¡,] smhtarpayati, tasam samtrptanam deva
hiranmayatir; pürayante, 'He gratifies these (oblations); with
these (oblations) after they have been gratified tha gods fi11 gold
cups'. QB. 11.4. 2. 16; 17.
138
Absolute Gemttve § 51, Ex. 12-13; § 52, Ex 1.
< V r;ru + upa >
12. te¡;arn ha jyog eva yajamananam no bahfmy eva
te¡;am tl 710 'par;/tr;rtwur: ar;ravayati 1.;az va¡;atkaroh va ttl,
(They (= the sages) did not hear these (Atharvans) when they
were sacrificing for a long tIme, even many years, but they
(= the Atharvans) heard them (= the sages): "He gives the order
for the he utters the JB. 3. 269 (Caland,
Auswahl, p. 291).
Similar coustructlOns are frequent· a) ItB. 11.8. 3. 8 tasmad etasya [vayoh]
lelayata wai 'vo na tv enam pattyantt, 'Therefore (people) heaI thls
(\Vind) as It shakes so to speak, hut they do uot see it'; b) MS. 4 8 1 (p. 106, 11),
K. 30. 1 (p. 181, 11) tasya [lsabhasya] ruvato !favanto 'sura .. , 'As
many Asuras as heard thls (bull) when he roared . .'; e) MS 4. 8. 1 (p 106, 6)
[patrantlm] samlihanyamiínanlirij yavonto 'aura upáyr7lvon . , 'As manr
Asuras as heard these (vessels) whlle they were bemg beaten together ,
d) MS. 4.8. 1 (p 107, 3), K. 30. 1 (p. 181, 15) tasya [ml1niiyyal] vadantya yavanto
'sura upalirnvan .. I 'As many Asuras as heard thls (wife of l\Ianul when she
spoke ... ' < d., wJth simple y frU, ((8. 1. 1. 4. 16 tasyat ha sma yatra vadan-
tyai ¡nnvanti>; el MS.4 1. () (p. 8,11) tasyii [vacah] wdantya yavanto 'sura
uplllimvan. ., 'As many Asuras as heard thls (voice) when It spoke .' '; fl TB.
3. 2. 5 9 te 'surll yavanto yaJñüyudhanam udvadatüm 1Ipa,rnmn .. , yavanto
'sya bhtatrvya ya)iiiiyudMnam udvadatlim ttpa!!rnvanti . .. , 'As lllally of these
Asuras as heard lhe sacrificial implements when they ralsed thelr VOlee. .; as
many of hls rivals as hear the sacnficlal implemeuts when they ralse thelc VOlce .. .',
< The parallel passages K 31. 4 (p. 5, 14 and 16) and MS 4. 1. 6 (p. 8, 13) omlt
the parbclple >, g) PB. 8. 2. 2 sa vrsadanl/(aSlla 's iti hm'ata tlplifmot, 'He
heard a cat as It sneezed (making the sound) h) QB 8 1. 4 9 spltotator
hai 'kah paksayor 'tena 'One heard the WIDgs of (tlús
altar) when It \Vas touched WIth this (formula) as they clacked'.
< -V han + upa 'to make tbe sacrificial cuttings' >
13. sa etasya sarvasya 'nnadyasya sambhrtasya srttveno 'paghatam
vajaprasaViyani Juhoti, 'Making cuttings of a11 this food, after it
bas been brought together, with the Sruva-spoon he offers the
Vajaprasavlya-oblations'. QB. 5 2. 2. 4.
§ 52. D. The Genitive depends on an Adjective.
1. te¡;am ha devanarn prabubudhananam apnyam asU, tan vi¡;nur
abrav'in: ma vo 'pnyam bhüd (the ros '¡myam abhüd) ... tÜ, 'To
these gods when tbey had waked up this was unpleasant;  
said to them· "May this not be unpleasant to you .. '" JB. 3. 353.
139
§ 53, Ex. 1-3
Absolute Gemltve.
§ 53. E. The Genitive depends on an Adverb.
1. tasya knyamanasya tejan'im uttarato dharayantl, 'To the uorth
of thlS (mound) whlle lt is bemg made they bold a reed bundle'.
QB. 13. 8 3 12
2. yata[l khalu vai yaJñasya mtatasya na knyate fad anu yajJ1am
rakt!añsy avacarantz, 'Where (= at what point) of the sacrifice when
It has been undertaken anything (necessary in the ritual) is not
performed, along tbat (pomt) the Rak¡¡;ases descend upon the sa-
crifice'. TS. 6. 4. 2. 6.
3. ahar va aflVasya jayamanasya maluma purastaj Jayate, 'Day,
as the Mahlman-cup, is born before the horse while lt is beiug
boru'. TS. 7 2. 25 2.
Such IS patently the obvlous rendering of the TS. If taken by itself
A ulfficulty is caused by the parallel passage <;lB 10. 6 4 1 (= BAU 1. 1 2
K:inv). The two versions run as follows:
TS ahar ['a jayamanasya
¡¡¡ahuna purastiiJ Jayate, ratnr enam
mahtma pafcad anujuyate, etau t'at
mahl1nanav a¡(vam abhttalt .sambabhüva-
tllJ¡.
ItB. ahm' va arwm purastan mahtma
'nvaJayata, tasya púne samudre yomh,
rat1 Ir enam mahirna 'nvajayata,
tasya 'pare samudre yomh, etau va ar-
Va¡il mahunanav abh¡tah sambabhüvatuh.
Eggelmg, dlsregardmg the anu- !ll tbe first anvajayata of the <;lB verSlOn,
makes a9vam in the first clause to depend on purastad, and simllarly, as It would
appear, he COllstrues enam m the second clause wIth parcat 'The day, mdeed,
was plOduced as the J\Iahlman (cup) before the horse and Its bllth place is m
the eastern sea. The mght was plOduced as the Mahlman (cup) behmd (or after)
It and Its birth place was m the western sea, these two Mahlman (cups), mdeed,
come to be on both sldes of the horse'. For purastát wlth dependent accusatlve
the Br;¡hmana prose appears to furmsh only the following two ll1stance5: <;lB 3.
8 1. 14 yat1'a¿ 'nam mfasanti tat p¡¡rasttit tll¡am 1tpasyanti, 'In front of that
(place) whel e they cut up (nctIm) he thlOWS down a blade ol grass' (li:ggeling)
and 'tB. 8 3. 1 ti tá u evii 'mii,h pltl'astad darbhastambam ca loge5tal.a9 co
  'But prIOr to these (bnck5) he deposlts the bunch of grass and the
clod-bncks' (Eggehng), whlle for parctit wlth dependent accusatlve the only
example m the Brahmana prose appears to be <;lB. 3. 8. 1 15 tasya na kütena
1
praghnantt, manusam ht tan, no eva pa9cat karnam, 'They do not stnke it on
the forehead,-for that 15 human practIce,-nor yet behmd the ear' (Eggelmg).
At 'tB 14. 5. 1. 11 (= BAU 2 1. 11 Madhy. = 10 Kanv.) ya 'yarh yantam
pal(cac chabdo anüdeti (Boehthngk's text IDIsprints aniidaitt) the accusatIve yantam
1 Cf. JAQS, 19, P 114, note to JB. 1. 49. 2.
140
Absolute Gemtive. § 53, Ex a
depends on the anu- of anüdet¡, and par¡ciit IS advel b' 'What that sound is which
rIses up iu the rear after oue gomg', ef. Boehtlmgk's reudermg 'Den Laut, del
nach emem gehenden hmterher slCh erhebt' and Qankara's gloss' y(wtaJll gac-
chantam ya eLr% 'yam t¡abdah pat¡cát PI sthato 'nüdetl. To t111S last passage the
second clause of QB 10 6. 4. 1 riUnr enam [a(Jvam] par¡can mahimü 'nvaJayata
formo an ,exact parallel pa¡;ctit is adverb and enam IS governed by the anuo of
(J.nvajtiyata, 'NIght was bom after thls (bor<;e) as tbe i\fahlman-cup behind'; cf
BoehtImgk's amI Oeussen's translatlOll 'Oer dahinter¡;tebende Bechervoll entstand
nach dem Rosse aJs dIe Nacht', and 'Ole Nacht 1St fur es entstanden a!s dIe
Opferscha!e, dIe hmter Ibm steht'. The parallel first clause of QB. 10 b. 4 1
<Lhal va a¡;vam pllrastan mahZ/na 'nvaJayata must then be rendered' 'Oay, venIr,
was born after the borse (Gelman. 'ward dem Rosse nachgeboren') as tbe l'rlahl-
man-cup In front', cr. Boeht1mgk's and Deussen'" translatlOn 'Der voranstehende
Bechervoll (be1m Rofiopfer) entstand nach dem Rosse als der Tag', and 'Oer Tag
fürwahr i'St entstanden fur das RoEs als die Opferschale. dIe' vor lhm steht'. and
cf further 9ankara's gloss sallvw·/¡a/·tijatM¿ mahlr/lakhyau grahav al(vasya 'grafah
prsthata¡; ca sfhapyete
The QB. verSlOll would tbus appear to dlffer from tbe ·TS. verSlOn m that
according to TS the first l\lah1man-cup 18 born bef01e the horse bemg bOl n,
the second Mah¡mall-cup after the horse, whlle accol<hllg to QB both Mahlman-
cups are born after the horse.
An ÍnterpretatlOn of the TS wlnch would permlt both pUl"asttit
and to be taken as advelbs quahfymg mahlrlll'¡" and thus leconcJ!e
TS. wJth CB may be tentatJvely suggested
If one compares the use of the gemhve m passages hke AB 7. 14 4
danta nv asya [putrasya] Jayantam; 5 tasya ha danta   ' , ' (t)íiata
va asya 'dantah, 6 danta nv aS!Ja punar Jayantam, 7 tasya ha dantaly,
punar jajíhre, ,ajnata vti asya dantah, AB. 7. 15 1 tasya [hartrcan-
drasya] ha 'dw·ath jajile, K. 33. 1 (p 27,1), AB 4.17.2, TS. 7.5.1 1,
7 5.2. 1; PB 4. 1. 1 tasam [gtivaml I(/ñgtiny ajayanta, < paralle! wlth
ihls in K , AB ,PB and in TS. 7 5. 2 1 ttisam "rñgani prlivartanta and
this latter phrase alone in JB. 2 372 >. TS. 7 5 1. 1 yasam [gavüm
t¡rñgant] na '¡ayanta,. . ytisam cti ';iiyanta yasam ca na, TS 7 5 1 1
r;rñgam no (= 'to us cows') Jltlfanta!; 1'8 4. 1 1 opata no (= 'to us
cows') '.Jnata, oa 3. 2. 1. 27 yad vat me 'to mahad eva 'bhvam nti
'nuprajtiyeta, JB.3 165 (Caland, Auswahl. p 260) so [agmr vaifvanaralt]
'kamayata ¡;nllstayo me Jtiyerann arca ya tti, sa etat sama
'paryat, tena 'ótuta, tato vat tasya r;nllstayo "'cayo jayanta, TA. 5.
2. 1 tasya 'nv(lgatasya svaytid dham¿r aJtiyata dakstnad isava[!, It
may perhaps appear possible to constt ue arvasya jtiyamanasya In TS
wlth the verb Jiiyate as. dahval gembve of mterest or concem' 'To the
horse while it 15 bemg born the Mahlman-cup In front is born' (German.
<Oem Rosse, wenn es geboren wlrd, Wlrd der vordere Mahlmanbecher ge-
boren')
141
§54, Ex. 1-2, §55, Ex. 1-2 Absolute GemtJve.
§ 34. 2. The Case Form is Ambiguous.
To tbe instan ces of ambiguous case forms noted abo ve, viz.
JB. 1. 268 (§ 49, Ex. 12), QB. 3. 2. 4. 2 (§ 49, Ex. 53); QB. 1 6. 3.
33 (§ 50, Ex. 28), und QB. 13. 5. 2. 3 (§ 50, Ex. 29) must be added
l. antayor vava madhyam samskriyate, 'Wbile
tbe two ends are being fasbioned tbe middle is fasbioned', QB.
7. 1. 2. 23, wbere antayolJ, though it might for-
mally be regarded as a genitIve is more probably an absolute
locative, cf. below § 62, Ex. 11.
2. [gayat1'ym] ahamntyai somasya     apatat, 'From this
(Gayatrí} as she was fetcbing (the Soma) a sprig of tbe Soma fell
down'. QB. 1. 7. 3. 19.
Here tasya aharantyat may posslbly be GemtJve, d. the examples aboye § 49,
Ex. 40 and 41, for the ablatJve cf CB. 1. 7 3 19 sa 1athat papiita, 'He fell from
the car'; TB. 3. 2. 9 5 te.'manyata: divam vii ayam itah patisyat'i 'ti, 'They con-
sldered: "Thls (Asura Araru) wIII fall from here (= from this earth) toward heaven"'>
cr. for vanatlOns between the gemtJval and ablatival constructlOn § 49, Ex. 11
III fine, and Ex. 27.
§ 55. 3. The True Genitive Absolute.
EhmÍnating then the examples where the case form is ambiguous
(above § 54) and those in which a conjunct construction is possible
and the assumption of an Absolute Genitive is not necessary
(above § 47 - 53) notably such passages as JB. 1. 17. 4 (§ 48,
Ex. 21); QB. 6. 1. 3 9; 20; KB. 7. 2 (§ 48, Ex. 35-37); QB. 13.
1. 1. 3 -= 'rE. 3 8 2. 4 (§ 49, Ex. 16); QB 14. 1. 2. 13 = 14. 3. 1.
2 (§ 49, Ex. 20); QB. 1. 7. 1. 1 = 3. 3. 4. 10 (§ 49, Ex. 32); MS. 2.
1. 1 (p. 12,19, § 49, Ex. AB. 7. 27. 4 (§ 50, Ex. 18); QB.
6. l. 3.2 (§ 51, Ex. 2); and JB. 1. 17.4 (§ 51, Ex. 5), there
remain the following examples:
1-2. 1. tasya 'labdhasya sa vag apacakrama, cWhen he (viz.
Manu's bull) had been taken (for slaughter) this (Asura-killmg)
voice (which had entered him) departed'. QB. 1. 1. 4. 15.
2. tasya alabdhayat sa vag apacakrama, cWhen she (viz. Manu's
wife) had been taken (for slaughter) this (Asura-killing) voice
(WbICh had entered her) departed'. QE. 1. 1. 4. 16.
As Gaedicke (Accusativ, p 47-48, note) rightly points out the
two genitIVes tasya 'labdhasya and tasya cannot logically
142
Absolute Genitive. § 55, Ex. 3-4 A.
be construed as possessive genitives witb vak because it is not
tbe (natural) voice of Manu's bull and of Manu's wlfe which de-
parts, but a foreign Asura-killing voiee wbich had entered bull
and wife. It should, however, be remarked,
a) According to stnct logic the Asura-killing voiee which entered
Manu's bull and his wife is, to be sure, not tbeir own natural
voice; but, in as mueh as hull and wife for the time being speak
with it, it may, somewbat looseIy, be well enough considered
their voice, and so tbe passage QB. 1. 1. 4. 15 is actually taken
by DeIbruck (Vergl. Syntax, n, § 164, p.494): 'So wird z. B.. .
erzahlt, da13 Manu einen Stier opferte und dan n fortgefahren: tasya
'labdhasya sa vag apacakrama; das heiLIt wórtlieh: "dieses ge-
opferten Stimme entwich", aber wir ú.bersetzen: "als er geopfert
war, entwich seine Stimme":
b) The genitives tasy((, 'labdhasya and tasya alabdhayai may be
construed, as genitivi separationis (ef. the details under "Genitiva
with Verbs of Separation") with apacakrama: 'This voiee departed
from them when they had been taken (for slaughter)'; cf. TE. 2. 1.
2. 1 prajápatw agnim asrjata, tam praja anvasrjyanta, ... , so ' sya
prajabhlr apakramat (Comment. saha tasmat prajapater
apakramat), 'Prajápati created Agni; after him the ereatures were
created; ... ; he (Agni) went away from this (Prajapati) together
with the creatures'.
So rather, wIth the Commentary, than 'He (Agm) went away together
wJth the creatures of tbis (PraJapati)'.
3 - 4 A. 3. aevanüm vat (T8. 5. 2. 3. 4   Sltvargam (PB.
svargam) lokarh yatüm diraf¡ samavl'iyanta (PE. alfO 'vliyanta), 'When
the gods were going to the heavenly world the quarters eollapsed'.
TS. 5. 2. 3. 4; 5. 3. 2. 2; PE. S. S. 13.
4. tasya [znd1'asya] '/,rtram rtavo 'muhyan, 'When this
(lndra) had slain Vrtra the seasons were confused'. TS. 6. Ó. 5. 1.
r Addition from the AraI).yakas and Upani¡¡;ads.
4: A. te 'bhyatapyanta, tapyamünanam apyayata
veda[¿, cThese (gods) practised austerities; while they were praetis-
ing austerities the Veda was filled up'. JUB. 1. 8. 12. J
143
§ 55, Ex.4A.
Absolute Genihve
AH three passages (Ex. 3; 4; and 4A) appear at first sight clear
instan ces of the true Absolute Genitive, snd tbey are so rendered
in the aboye translations. Moreover the Comment. to PB. 8. 8.
13 (Ex. 3) expressly states that the genitIve devanam . .. yatam
heJ;e takes the place of au (absolute) locative: svargalh gacchatam
devanam saptamyarthe $a$thi deve$u svargam yatstt satsu.
The paraIlel lIIS 3. 2. 9 (p 29, 17) expre-sse5 the thought In short para-
tactlcal clauses' deva vai svarga¡h lo/mm ayans, te dtl;a ákramanta, ta
avliyanta, 'The gods went to the heavenly world, they bestrode the quar-
ters, these (quarters) collapsed'.
There would be no questlOD about the interpretation of devanam
... yat(7m iu Ex. 3 if it were not for the parallel passage K 20.
11 (p. 31, 2)     vai svargam lokam yatam te$cim du;¿as sam-
avl'iyanta (above § 46, Ex. 2) lO which the proleptic genitlVe
devanam .. yatcim is resumed by the demonstrative pronoun te$am.
In this K. passage the interpretation of devanam . .. yatam as
absolute genitive is impossible inasmuch as te$cim connects the'
proleptic genitive devanam. . yatcim with dir,;a!;: 'Of the gods
when they were going to the heavenly world,-their quarters
collapsed'.· The genitive in this connection express es not so mnch
possesslon as interest a.nd concero and is functionally eqmvalent
to a dative of interest, cf. the dative tasmai at QB. 8. 7. 1. 11 yo
vm mnyata rtavo ha tasmai vyuhyante, 'The sea.sons are deranged
for him wbo dies'
This QB. passage again makes it possible to construe the geni-
tive tasya vrtra1n Jughnu$alj, in TS. 6. 5. 5 1 (Ex. 4) as conjunct
genitive of interest and concero: 'For this (lndra) when be bad
slain Vrtra tbe seasons were confused' (German: 'Diesem Indra, als
er den Vrtra erschlagen batte, wurden die Jahreszeiten verwirrt').
Keith renders: 'Of him when he bad slain Vrtra the seasons were con-
fused'.
And the same is true for the third passage (Ex. 4 A), JUB 1. 8. 12
te$Ctm tapyamanánam apyayata veda!;, 'For these (gods) as they were
practising austerities the Veda was filled up' (German: 'Diesen
Gottern, wltbrend sie sich kasteiten, wurde der Veda vollgefuHt').
In aH three passages (Ex. 3, 4, and 4 A) the speaker may well
bave felt the genitives as conjunct genitives of interest and concern
while the hearer construed tbem as absolute genitives; cf. § 3, 1, c.
144
"
Absolute Genitlve.
§ 55, Ex '6.
5. te de va tallülJ, dhá1nam sardham samavadadlre,
te ho 'cur: etena na/¿ sa naná 'sad etena yo na etad at1krámad
kasyo   tananaptur eva 'h. QB. 3. 4. 2. Ó.
The KaI).va recension, as reported by Eggeling, reads tasya
ka 'Who (will be) the witness oí this (covenaut) of ours?',
and in Vlew of this parallel oue is tempted to render the Madhyau·
diua text: 'These gods divested themselves of their beloved forms
(and) dear possessions aud put them together; they smd "He who
transgresses thlS (coveuant) of ours shan be·without claim to this
(and) witbout share in this". -" Who (being) witness?" - "The
Mighty Tanunapat (being witness)".' However the absence of the
participle satalJ, which cannot be paralleled either from de Saussure's
classical exaroples (p. ,8, § 3 in fine) nor froro the older prose
literature and which is hardly compensated for by the latent
verbal and partlCiplal character inhereut 1U the derivatives in -tr
(Whitney, § 271, d, 946) roakes such an iuterpretatiou o·f kasyo
  and tanünaptur eva r,;akvarasya as Absolute GenitIves
les s likely. Eggeling is probably right in rendering: 'Whose (lS
it) as witness?' i e. 'In whose keeping as trustee shaIl lt for the
present be?' And such appears to be the understanding of the
Cororoentator who glosses kasyo   by tasya plwastad ldam
bhavet and tananaptulJ, by tasya purastat.
v da + - ava WJth tanü}¡, as in CS 3 4.2.8; 9, 15, 16; TS. 6 2.2.1,
6.2.2.3; MS. 3. 7. 10 (p 90,4), K. 24, 9 (p 100,6), GB. 2. 2 2 (p 166,10), 2
2. 3 (p. 167, 4) not 'hlde' (Delbrück, Altind. Synt p. 60, 35) but 'cut off from
one's self and collect as common property', pw. 'zertellen und die Stucke
sanuneln', E¡¡¡¡elm¡¡ 'laid down to¡¡ether (l!terally: cut off together, part by part)',
the Commentator glosses samavaaadire by viMajya sthapitavantah.
6. samidheninam evai '$a yogas, tásám yuktánam yám kámayata
tam avarunddhe, 'This 1S the application of the kindling-
verses; when these are applied he attains that blessing which he
desires' K. 31. 15 (p. 17, 21).
An Instrumental would be expected, cf TS. 1. 7. 3 2 yavat'im ekena havistl
  avarunddhe tátatim avarundhita, 'As ¡¡reat a wish as one secures by one
offerin¡¡ so ¡¡reat (a WJsb) he would secure'.
Tbe absolute genitive tasá1n yuktanám in this passage (Ex. 6)
does not agree with the laid down by de Saussure (p. 7, § 2)
Oertel, The Syntax oC Cases. 10
145
§ 56. The Dislunct Locailve
for classical Sanskrit: 'Le sujet du génitif absolu est touJours
une personne, dans le sens grammatical du mot, c'est-a-dlre un
etre animé et intelligent, ou censé ter.
In view oí the fact that the true Absolute Genitive is a well
established construction in classical Sanskrit (for the limitations
of its use as contrasted wJth the free use oí the Absolute Locative
cí. de Saussure's monograph De l'emploi du génitlf absolu en
Sanscrit, 1881; Speijer, Sanskrit-Syntax, § 369, p. 288-289) the
sman number of instances in the Brahmal}.a prose is notewortby;
nor do they conform to the special restrictive rule laid down by
Panini 2. 3. 38 $a* ca 'nadare, '(Instead oí the Absolute Locative)
the Gemtive also (may be used) if disregard (be, expressed)' which
the Kayika illustrates by rudatak pravrajft, kro9atah pravrajit =
    anadrtya pravrajitalJ, 'Disregardmg (= in spite of) his
weeplDg, laroentmg he went away' .
••
7. The Disjunct Locative.
§ 56.
A. The Proleptic Locative.
No example oí a Proleptic Locative has been noted in the
Brahma:r;tas proper. But an instan ce of a Proleptlc LocatIve occurs
at AA. 2. 3. 1 (p. 112, 1 = 5 Keith)   yo 'nnam ca 'nnadam
ca veda ha 'sminn annado jayate bhavaty asya 'nnam, <To him
who lrnows food and the food-eater,-to him a food-eater lS boro,
his is food'.
Agamst Sayana and Max Muller who take tasmm to refer to ulctha, Keith
correctly takes ü as 'a precursor to asrnm' (p 216, note). Gf. for a ha 'smmn
annado Jayate AB.8 9. ó it há 'smzn [yajamane) viro Jayate, and contrast the
genitlve at JUB. 2. 5.1; 2.6.1-10, 2.9.9.
A kinc1 of quasi-prolepsis is seen in the resumptiou oí the Ab-
solute Locative samstlnte dafame 'hani by etasnnn kale at KB. 27.
4 (p 131, 22) sarnsthite dafame 'ham pura patnisamyilJebhya etasnnn
kale samprasarpant1, <When the (nte of the) tenth day has been
completed (but) before the Patnlsamyajas,-at that time they per-
form the SamprasaraI).a'; aud of the Absolute Locatives astam1te
and apahate     by tasmm kále at KE. 2. 9 (p. 8, 8) sayam
146
The Absolute Locative. § 60, Ex 159.
12) tam va etam muc!lUth santmil mrtilur itil acaksate, 'Hlm who 15 (really) Mucyu
they call "Mrtyu (death)" '; GB 1 1. 7 (p 6, 16) tarn va etam añgarasam santam
añgu a ity 'Hlm who IS (reaUy) Añgaras they call "Añgiras'''; GB 1. 1
13 (p 10, 16) tad vai yaJñasya ity acaksate, 'They call thls "The Torn
(part) of the Sacllfice"', GB. 1. 1. 39 (p. 31, 1 O) santa m pranarh purusa
tt1l licaksate, 'They call the breath WhlCh 19 (really) PUrJ<;aya (resting In the
stronghold) GB. 1. 2. 10 (p. 44, 1) fiisiirh [nadinam] samudl'am abhi-
padyamiiniinam chtdyate namadheyalh, samudra d!! acaksate, 'Of these (rrvers)
as they flow mto the ocean the (indivIdual) appellation IS cut off, they call (them
slIup1y) "Ocean''', GB. 1. 2 10 (p. 44, 6) tMán¡ [vedanám] 1Jajñam abhzpadyamalllinám
chidyate niimadheyam, yaJña tty acaksate, 'Of the'3e (Vedas) as they approach the
sacrlfice the (mdlVldual) appellahon IS cut off: they call (them slmply) "SacrIfice";
GB 1 2. 21 (p. 5!), 5) tam vii etam iiglahataril santam aglágrdha ity iicahate, ., ,
ya ella briihmano gayano (l:lIbl. Ind inserts va) nal'tano va tam aglagrdha
ity acaksate, 'Hlm who 1'3 (reaUy) Aglahata (?) they call "Aglagrdha", .. " they
can a Brahmana who or dances' Aglagrdha", GB 1. 2 21 (p 57, 13) tam
1)ii etarh rasam santaln ¡'atha 1ty ii.caksate, 'That WhlCh 15 (realIy) Rasa (sap) they
call "Ratha (ehariot)"', GB 1. 3. 19 (p. 88, 5) kaóya svid dhetor tty ii.caks-
ate, 'For what reason do they ca1l hlffi "Dikslta (conseclated)"?', GB I 3. 19
(p. 88, 7) tath va etam dhiks1tíim santmh dikslta tty acak¡¡ate, 'Hlm who IS (really)
(from dhiyañl   they tan (consecrated)'" 1; GB 1. 4 23
(p 110, 16) tam va etam spll;yam santam prsthya ity acaksate, 'That whlCh is
(really) Spr<¡ya they can "Prsthya'''j GB 2 2 6 (p. 171,8) tad etad devam¡thunam
tty acaksate, 'They call thls "The DlVlne Umon"'; GB. 2. 5. 15 (p 241,13) tany
etany ahinasüktani 'ty ii.caksate, 'They call these same "The Complete H}mns",
GB.2 6.14 {p 266,6} tad devanUham 1ty acaksate, 'They call this 'The Devanilha"',
GB. 1. 2. 10 (p. 43, 14) tad yii.h pracyo nadyo vahantz yáC ca daksJ1lii.cyo yiir; ca
praticyo yiil; co 'dicyas tal,¡ sarváh prthañnamadheyii. (so Gaastra's edltlOn, the
Blb1 Ind. prthañnamadheyll j the mss Qdheyor, Qdhyeyar, and Qdherl) tty licaksate,
'The rivers whlCh flow to the east, to the south, to the west, to the north,-all
these they call "(Rivers) havIllg DIstInct Names"'; JUB 1 20.4 tad antarlkliam tlt
parok\am ácaksate; JUB.l 24 2 tad alesaram 1t1 paroham licak¡¡ate; JUB 2 8,
7 tam agastya t{¡ paroksam acakl!ate; Alt. Ar 1. 4. 1 (p 93, 12 Keüh) tii [rcah]
acaksate yathiichandasam usmha 1tt; Ait. Ar. 2. I 4 (p. 103, 2 Kelth) tasmat
prapade tty acaksate r;aphiih khlWd ity pa9ünam; Alt Ar.2 1 6 (p. 105,
4 KeIth) tasmac chanaansi 'ty Alt. Al'. 2 2 1 (p. 108, 4 Kelth) tasmac
chatal·Ctna (p. 108, 6 madhyama, p 108, 8 grtsamaaa j p. 108, 10 vi!fviimura, p 108,
13 vamadeva; p. 108, 15 atraya) iicaksata etam eva santam; Alt. Ar 2 2 9
(p 109, 2 Keith) tasmiid bharadviJJa (p 109, 4 p, lOQ, 7 pragatha, p. 109,
9 ptivamanya; p 109,11 lesudra8Üktuj p 109,12 sü1.tam, p 109,15 rg, p 109,
17 ardharca, p 109,19 padam; p. 110, 2 alesaram) Ity licaklfata etam el'a santam,
Ait Ar. 4 3 (p 121, 3 Kelth) = Alt. Up 1. 3 14 taslIlad tdamdro name, 'darhdl'o
1 Cf QB 3.2 2.30
247
§ 60, Ex 159. The Absúlute Locatlve.
ha nama, tam wamdmth santam mdra (Roer's text indram) Ity acakljate
parokfena; AIt. Ar. 3. 2.3 (p. 135, 7 Kelth) etom eva bmhme 'ty acaksate, Chand.
Up. 1 3 2 svara di 'mam pratya5vara ity amum; Chand Up. 1. 3. {)
vltg g'ir, vaco hi gira ley acakt¡ate; Chand Up. 4. 15. 2 etali! samyarivama tey
iicak,!ate; Chand. Up.5. 1. 15 na vai vaco na caksünf1- na tp"otram na
'ty acaksate, prafla ity evii 'calcsate [ef Delbrtlek, Altind. Synt, p 600, 4-9];
Chand. Up. 6. 8.3; 5 tad yathii gonayo 'Qvanayah puru¡¡anaya tty evam tad
apa (5 tat teja) acalct¡ate 'Qaniiye 'tt, Chaoo. Up. 7. 24.2 go-at¡vam ¡ha mahtme
'ty acakt¡ate, Chand. Up. 8. 5.1-3 yad yajña (2 yat sattrayanam, 3 yad ardil;akáya-
nam and yad aranyltyanam) ttyacaksate brahmav((1'casam eva tat; <;añkh Ar 10.
1 (p. 317, 17 of Keith's ed. of the Alt Ar) atha 'to 'dhljatmtkam ántaram agni-
hotram tty aca!.sate.
(e) KB 30. 8 (p. 145, 14) yad va urvarayor asambhtnnlJlh bhavati khzlam itt vat
tad ácalcsate, 'What portlOn of two fields IS not eonlIguous lhey call Khlla';
The parallel passage <;B. 8. 3. 4. 1 has lhe nommallve khtla tti, ef. above
under (b).
GB 1.1. 13 (p. 10, 13) tan va etiin wdahprasarpal.-iin ¡ty acaksate
'These same guards they cal! Sadahplasarpakas, (they aJe)
thnvmg thlough gifts',
Daksinii8amrddhán stands Ilke an after-thought outslde of the tti-clause.
Roer's text reads at AIt. Up 1. 3_ 14 = Alt. Ar_ 2 4.3 (p 121, 3 Kelth) tam
wathdram santam mdram [mstead of tndra, cf Alt A.r., abo ve under (b)] fty

B. The v' ah has always the paratadleal eonstructlon, VIZ the nommattve
wJth tti.
At AB 3. 33 1 praJapaftt vat sviün duhttamm abhyadhyayad dtvam ity
anya lihur ususam lty anye, the accusatJves dfvam and usasam do not,
of eourse, depend on ahuh but on abhyadhyliyat 'PraJápatl had deslgns
on his own daughter, on Heaven (as) sorne say, on thc Dawn (as) others (say)'.
ºB 2. 1 1. 7 tft val tam iJ,huh, 'They call hirn "Puñsya"'; liB. 6. 1.
1 10 tasmiJ,d anücanam iihltr agmkalpa tlt, 'Therefore they caIl a VedK scholar
"Agm-Ilke''', ctB. 8.4.1. 9 (bIS); 10 (biS); 11 (bIS), 12 (biS), 13, 14-21; 22 (bis),
23-':.1.5 yat tam iiha 'QUr (lO iiha bhanta, 11 «ha vyome, 12 iJ,ha dharuna¡ 13
aha pratürttr, l4. ¡¡ha tapa; 15 ahli 'bhl1,arta, 16 dha va¡ ca, 17 aha sambharana;
18 aha yonir; 19 aha garbha, 20 áhatt 'la, 21 aha kmtnr; 22 aha pratfsthe;
23 tiha bradhnasya vt8tapam, 24, li,ha niika, 25 aha vivar/a; 26 aha dhart1 am)
¡ti, 'Inasmuch as he calls thls (9-14, 20-22, 26 Stoma; 15-19, 21; 23-25
rear) "The SWlft One" ["Tbe Brlght One", "Spaee", "Tbe Upholder"; "Speed";
"Heat"; "VlCtonous Assault", "Splendour"¡ "Array"; "Womb"; "Embryos",
"Strengtb"; "Design"¡ "FoundatlOn", "Range of the Ruddy One", "Firmament",
"Revolvmg (Sphere)"; "The Stay"l', TS 2 4_ 3. 2, 3 tasmM eUlth gáyatr'i 'ti
(3 samval'ga di) 'stim ahtth, 'Therefore they call thls offermg "The GáY.l.lri"
["The Gatherer"), cf the parallel passages K 10. 7 (p. 133, 18) sm   gayatrlc
248
Tbe Absolute Locatlve. § bO, Ex. 159.
name ',s!ir atho ahuh ltsatrasya samvatga ¡tI, and MS. 2. 1. 11 (p. 13, 16) sai 'so,
gaya trI atho lihii rastrasya sarhvarga ¡'tI; TS. 7. 1 10.3 atho enath vacaspattr
lty ah!th, 'And tbey also call him "Lord of Speech"'; TB 1. 1 2. 4 aryame 'tl
tam ahur yo dadatl, 'They call hIm who glves   TB. 2. 3. 5.4 lirya
vasatlY #1 tal tam lihur yarh pra,ansanti, tOne whom tbey laud they raJI "Aryan
Abode"; TB. 1. 3. 2. 3 tam [yaJnam] va etam va)apeya 'tty ahuh, 'They call thIS
same (sacrlfice) "The VaJapeya'''; TB 2. 1. 2. 2 tasmad yasya daksllIatah ker;ii.
unml'stas ta,h (so, with a) jyesthalaklfmi praJapatye 'ty ahuh, 'Therefore, If one's
hall IS brmhed up on lhe r1ght side, they call thIS (mark) "Prajapati's Excellent
Mark'''; MS.l 8.1 (p. 115,16) tasmad yasya dak¡¡inatah ker;a unmrstas tam (so,
w¡th a) ahur Jyesthalaksml 'tt, 'Therefore they say of one whose haIr IS brushed
up on tbe r1ght slde: "An Excellent Mark", MS. 2 5. 3 (p. 50, 17) tasmad etam
(so, wlth a) sahasrI laksm'ir lty ahuh, 'Therefore they say of hIm: "A Lucky
Mark Connected a Thousand"', "
The readmg tam m TB. 2. 1. 2. 2 scbould probably be changed to tiím
as In the two MS. parallels. Then vah 15 not so much 'to call, name
a person' as 'to say of (= concernmg) a person" 'They say of such an
one: "(That ¡s) PraJapatl's Excellent Mark"', as m the Mi; parallels
The Commentary to TB gIves a mythologlCal explanahon of Jyesthalaksm'i.
PB 10.1. 3,6; 9, 12,15,18; 21 tam [stomam] ltpratisthe 'ty (6'v oJobalam
lly; 9 u p/'aJitpatzl' zty; 12 u devatalpa ity; 15; 21 u pustzr zty; 18 u naka lty)
ahuh, 'And they call thls (Stoma) "The Foundahon" ["VI.g'our (and) Strength";
"PI aJapatI"; "The Couch of the Gods", "Success", 'The Flr?nament"]', PB. 11.
10 12; 13.11. 12; 14.9.18; 15.3.36 tad [suma] u stdantiyam (13.11.12 dir-
gham; 14.9 18 dhiiram same 'ty; 15 3 36 sarhvad) úy ahuh, 'And they caU
thIS (Saman) "Sidantiya" ["Dirgha", "Dhulam Sáma"; "::;amvat"l'; PB 25.12.3
yam ahur aryamnah panthtt tty viit'a devayanah panthlih, 'The (palh) whlCh
they call "Aryaman's Path" that IS the path wl1lCh leads to the gods'; MS 1. 6.
3 (p. 91, 13) purisi vat grhamedhmam dhuh. 'Tbey call one who offers the
Grhamedha "RICh In PossesslOns" '; MS 2. 5. 8 (p. 58, 10); 9 (p 59, 12) vrtmtiir
¡ti hy etam lthul' yah sl'ltraJyari¡ gachati, 'HIm who attallls sovereIgnly they call
"Slayer of Vrtra"', MS.3. 7.3 (p 77,11) tasmat papava tttJagatlm ahtth, 'There-
fore tbey caJI the Jagali "Cattle"'; KB 2.8 (bIS p. 6, 21, 7,2) tam (agnim, m
tbe second mstance süryam] Jyot,h santant Jyotir ¡ty iiha, 'He calls thls (Agm,
[Surya]) who is hght "LIght"'; KB. 14. 5 (p 64, 12) atha vatrvadev'im puroruca¡J¡
l!ansati, su 5atpada bhavatt, tltm ) tava (read so wIth codo M. for LmdneI 's tva
rlava; the ms. L. has tvam Itava) ity lthlth, 'He then recItes the Puroruc·stanza
addressed to the Al! Gods, that conslsts of SIX Padas; they call It "The   ';
Because the SIX Padas are IdentIfied wJth the SIX seasons.
liB 1. 2. 5 (p, 37, 14) apy apakirtitam ltcaryo brahmacar'i 'tyeka lthuh, 'Sorne
call even an lll·famed (man) "Teacher" and "Student'''.
In all these examples yah is not reaIly and pIÍmarlly Oto call, name' but It
hteralIy means Oto say of (= concellllllg) a person° "_" '; thus QB. 2. 1. 1. 7
pUlfsya lit val lam ahuh, 'They say wlth regard to blm' "(He IS) Purrsya"', cf
249
§ hO, Ex. 159. The Absolute Locative.
the direct discourse at KB. 12. 6 (p. 57, 7) ya elta [pafuM alabhyate ttÍm etam:
amdragna}¡ syad ili hai 'ka tthuh, 'Now \Vlth regard to thls (VIC tt m) WlllCh lS
taken (for sIaughtel) some say: "It should be sacred to Jndra and Agni'''.
[nstead of havrng an obJect accusatIve depend on .¡ ah lt IS also posslble to
frame Ihe serltence so as to IUcorporate the object accusabve m the dlrect dls-
course and make it Jts subject, thus AB. 4 5 5 apil,;arvaram khalu va etlim
chandans'i 'tJ ha sma 'ha, 'He sald "Tbese metres are mdeed the NlghtIy Ones'"
= 'He called these metres "The NightIy One6'''.
C. Tbe ,1 vad bas always tlle paratac1tcal construction, VlZ tbe nornma1tve
wJth itt.
v' vad TS.5. 1. 5 7 rl!abha tt, hy etam [agnim] rlJayo 'vadan, 'For tbe sages
caBed t1m (Agm) "The Ass'" (wJth reference lo VS 11 46 nanadad riisabhah
pat/Ja) , TB 1. 8. 8. l' sarva enarh prajll. raje 'ti /Jadanti, 'All creatures call him
"Kmg"'; PB 12.10 24 annari¡ vai devah 'ti vadanti, 'The gods call food
"The Speckled One'''; PB 18 8 7 sarva enalh vaco raje 'ft vadantl, 'AH vOlces
calJ hlm "Kmg"', PB. 19. 1. 2 taln tu vai raje 'ti vadeyuh, 'They should call
hlm "Kmg"', PB. 14. 9. 2 devam vá etalÍl ml'gayur 1ti vadanti, 'They caIl this
god "The Hunter''';
The mdependence of the .ti-clause is secn at AB. G. 21 6; GB. 2 {) 3
(p. 2) m hai 'ke purastlit pragáthlinam I}añsanti dhayya
ttt t'adantah, 'Sorne recite these before the PraglUhas, saymg'
"They are Dhayyas" '. -
D. The v' mantray + ü has the paratactical conslructlon, VIZ. the nornmatIve
wJth til.
PB 13. 3 24 sa [I}i¡mr ájiglrasah J pttrn putraka lty 4mantrayata, ta¡n pttaro
'bl'llVann : adharmam kar0r' yo nah pltrn satah putraka ity amantrayasa .tl,
'ThIS (gu,u Añg¡casa) addressed the Fathers as "Llttle Sons"; the Fathers sald
lo hlm' "Thou dost wrong in that thou addressesl us who are the Fathers as
"LItUe Sons"'.
E The v' vac has (a) tWlCe the paratactical constructIOn, VIZ. ,t¡ wJth the
nommaüvej elsewhere (b) the Iogical predlcate is put m the accusatrve.
(a) KR. 13. 4 (p. 58, 24) atha 80ma it. val pa¡mm avocamai 'vam
'\Ve llave called the victlm "Soma" and so (also) tbe sacnficJaI cakes';
Literal/y: 'We have srud oí the victim' "(It is) Soma" ele.' Cf for the
mdependence of the ,tl-clause AB. 4. 8 3 na ha tath [indram] dadhlltatur.
apodihi 'ti vaktum, '(The two Ac¡vins) dld not dare to say to tbls (lndra)'
"Get out of tbe way'"
Ait Ar. 3. 2. 3 (p. 134, 9-14 KeJth); Cañkh. Ar. 8.3 (p 31.1. 2-6 of KeJth's
ed. of the Ait. Ar)   ,ti yam at'ocama sa <'tañkh Ar omJts sa) !la
evá 'yarh daJhlka atm4; ... ; "h yam avocamii ' k.!araSamiimnaya
eva (gii.ñ.kh. Ar. avocama yena vedan veda);. ,vedapurUl!a ftl yam avocdma
yena vediin veda (Cañkb. Ár. omíts thls clause),. mahlipurusa lti yam a/lOcama
samvatsara toa.
Contrast, \Vlth the loglcal predicate in lhe accusabve, accordmg to (b), AJl.
250
The Absolute Locatlve § 60, Ex 1:)9
Ar 3. 'l 2 (p 133, 12 Kellh) yany ItkRUl ally avocama 'Mm tam, yan
'vocama rlUrayas ta, yan sarñdhin avor;ama 'holiUrallum te samdhayah.
(b) gB 13.1. 3.4, TS 6.4 5.2 etiirit ha vava sa ya)ñasya sathsthitim uviica,
'ThlS he calIed the 'establishment of the sacrífice', TB. 3. 8 6. 5 emm ha vava so
"¡:vamedhasya sarnsthttim uviica, 'This he calIed the estabhshment of tbe AQVa-
medha'j TS. 7.4.5.4, 7. 5 4 2 etalh ha va udañka!¡ faulbayanah sattrasya
rddhim uvaca yad dat;uratrah, 'This, viz the ten-níghts rite, Udañka gaulbayana.
called the prosp.enty of the SaUra',
SattraSlja rddhth wlth reference lo VS 8. 52 sattrasya 1 cldhil asi; ef. CB·
4.6 9.11, above § 27, Ex. 8.
gB. 14. 9. 1. 5 (= BAU. 6. 1. 5 Miidhy. = 6 2. 3 Kiil).va) tam ha 'vace: 'ti vava
kila no bhaviin pura 'nu(nstan avoca tU, 'He (the son) sald (to hls father): "In
th¡s way tben hast thou, Reverend Sir, declared us (= me) heretofore (well)
instructed!" ,
For tbe plural nas = mam ef Delbrück, AltlDd. Synt. § 134, p. 204, 12.
Bha(ga)vlin wJth the person of the velb oecurs apparently only
ID this passage, where, however one ms. of the Kanva ret-enSlOn has the
• varo lect at'ocadj the regular thlrd person al gB. 10 5.6.3; 14.5.4.3
HAU. 1. 4. 3), 14.7 3 4 (BAU. 4. 5. 4, where the Kiinva recension has
the varo leet. bhagavan vettha), 14.6 11. 1 (BAU. 4. 2. 1).
GB. 1. 1. 31 (p. 23, 2) vii ayam bhavantam avocat, 'This (man)
hath called your Reverence lll·insiructed'; GB. 1. '2 10 (p   6) 8a ha 8Venli 'hmünc'Ila
manusalh vittalh ne 'yaya, tam mato 'vaca ta eva, 'tad annam avocan . .• iti, 'He
through selfconceIt had nothmg to do wIlh human sustenance, lus mother sald
lo hlm "They have called (= call) thls food'''.
F The V brü (a) tWICe appears to have lhe logícal predlCate in the accusa·
tive, (b) elsewhere Jt takes the paratactJcal construetion, VIZ the nominatl ve
wIth it, .
.. (a) gB. 8 1. 3. 5 tod yathá pltUb- put1'Um evam trHn prathamany aha,. ., tad
yat tatra 'pi yathd pituh putl'am evarit brüyád yatha pati1ft santalh putrariz brÜ·
ydt tádrk tat, '<No\'\' as of a father's son he speaks of the fhst three (bncks); .. ;
but lf he were to speak of them Oll tbls oceasion also as of a father's son that
would be as Ir one were to call one a son while he IS (really) a hushand';
Bul yathii patilh santam putram br'ÜlJiit should perhaps be better rendered
here' 'As If one were to speak of one who lS (really) a husband as
a son'.
Ciiñkh. Ar. 7. 8 (p. 308, 13 ID KeIth's ed. of the AIl. Ar) and 7.9 (p. 30S, 23)
pn'ino vldyiit sa ya enam prallalll vanlialh bnwan param upavadet .,
and sa prtlnam bruvantU/h param upavadet . •. , 'He should know'
"Breath IS the Beam" , lf anyone calhng Breath tlle Beam should rebuke anothel •. "
and 'If anyone should rehuke another who calls tireath the Beam ... '
ef Keith's note lo AIt Ar. 3. 1. 4 (p. 243, note 5) But tlns passage also
should perhaps beUer be rendered 'speaking of Breath as the Beam'
(b) CB 3. 2. 1. 40 rajanyam vai vaÍfyall¡ va brahmana ¡ty eva brayáf, 'He
251
§ 60, Ex. 159 The Absolute LocatIve.
should call (= address) a RaJanya or a VaÍ<;ya     üB 1. 2. 12
(Gaastra, p.45, 14; erroneously numbered 11 10 tbe Blbl. Ind. because 7 IS counted
t\Vlce on p. 29) tad yathá ha t'a tdalh ca ca dtvarh brüyu1,t
prthtv¡ 'ti prthivim tii dyaul' 1Ü bl'üyus tad anyo nll 'nujiiniiti, 'If the sacnficer
and (lhe pnests) who sacrIfice for hlm \Vere here to coll the sky 'earth', or i
they weJe to cal! the earth 'sky', then another (person) does not (cannol) under·
stand (them)', GB. 1. 2 12 (p. 46, 1) hote 'ty eva hotiira¡h brüYiid t'iig iti vacarh
bl'ahme 'tt bl'ahma deva ttt devam, adhvaryúr 1ty eva 'dhvaryurh brüyiit priina-
piinav ¡ü priinapiinau brahme 'tt brahma deva iti devam, udgiite 'ty evo 'dglltaram
bl üytlc ltt cakfur brahme 'tt brahma deva iti devam, brahme 'ty eva
brahmiinam brüyiin mana ¡ti mano brahme 'ti brahma deva iti devam, 'He sbould
ral! lhe Hotr-prlest Hotr, spee<.h speech, the 8rahman Brahman, the god god; he
cal! the Adhvaryu-priest Adhvaryu, m-breathmg (and) out-breathmg m-
breathing (and) out-breathmg, the Brahman Brahman, the god god ¡ he should call
the Udgatr-priest Udgatr, slght slght, the Brahman Brahman, tbe god god¡ he
should call the Brahman·prlest Brahman, mmd mmd, the Brahman Brahman,
the god god'¡ K 37. 14 (p. 94, 17) tad gady enam yatudhana jtl bruyur ná
'pahnuvita (Schroeder's emendatlOn fOl 'pahnavita), 'Now if they should cáll hlm
a Yatudhana·demon he should not demur'.
Schroerler's emendatJon of apahnavIla to apahnuvita lS certainly justJ-
lied; ef. K. 34. 2 (p. 37, 7) nt .• hn11vate; fOlms wIth a found In the
Brahmanas are very doubtful AB 1. 26. 5 nthnavate
1
; AB. 7. 14. 4 (m
a ftloka) tad aham mhnave tubhyam, where the parallel passage QC 15.
24 reads nzhnuve, but er. Aft.4 5. 7, 8. 13.27 mhnaMntej and PW cites
mhnavanti from Mbh.; cf Aufrecht. AB, p 429, 12; Liebich. Pamm, p 77.
In these passages also v' brü IS not really 'call' but 'say to a person'; thus
hote 'ty eva hotararh bruyat 15 llterally' 'He 5hould say to the Hol"r'prle¡,l:
"Hotr"'; cf 98. 1. 4. 1 35 ned Q1'am tty átmánaJIt bravam, 'Lest I should say
to myself. "Enough", , and at K8. 6. 2-9, afler the demand ¡¡lima me  
tll'iyUih, caturtham, paikamant, sastham, saptamam, astamarh me nama) kuru,
'Give me a name [a second ... elghth name)', the story contmues' sa val tvam
tty abravtd bhava cee 'tt (farva eve 'ti; eve 'tt, ugra eva deva itt; rudra
ttt; ¡tI; tU), 'He sald to hlm' "Thou art Bbava [etr.]'''.
G Similar parataetlcal constructlOns wIth it¡ and the nomlllatJve are found wllh
1. v' vId.
PB 20 15 10; 11 antankSfun Ity vzduh and dyaur ¡ti du:am viduh,
'They kno\V the atmosphere [Ihe sky] as "atmosphere" ("sky"]'.
2. v' vId + pan.
QB. 7.2.1. 11 nirrtir iti tva 'ha»! pariveda sarvatah, '1 know lhee as    
everywhere'
This passage paraphrases VS. 12 64 nirltirh tv{t 'ham pariveda
bul the parallel passages AV. o. 84. 1 j TS. 4. 2. Ó. 3, an,} K. 16. 12 {p. 234-,
1 Ape. 11. 1. 12 lo which Sayana refers reads nzhnUt'ate.
252
The Absolute Locatlve § 60, Ex 159.
16) read the nominabve m this Mantra' nU'rlir iti tvli 'harh pariveda sal'-
vatalt (TS. and K.
-V lis + upa (cf. Oldenburg, Lehre der Upanishadeu, p 349, note 101)
CB. 10 5. 2. 20 tam etam agnir ity adhmryat'O uplisate yaJm' it2, 'Hlm tbe
Adhvaryu-pnests worship as "Agm", as "YaJus", QB. 14 5 1. 2-13 (BAU 2. 1.
2 -13) atisthah sarvesiim bhiltltna,h mardhii fliJe 'ti (3 attl!tha b1'han piindaravasah
somo rliJe 'tt, 4_ tejasvi 'ti; 5 pilrnam apravarti 'ti; 6 indro vaiknntho 'pm'a1ttii
sene 'ti; 7 vit¡ásahlr ni; 8 prattrilpa 9 rOCls»ur #1; 10 dvitIyo 'napaga ltf,
11. 081/1' itf, 12 mltyUl' fh, 13 atmanvi 'tI) vli aham etam upiise, '1 worslnp
hlm "The Lord, the Head of all Creatures, the Kmg" ["The Gl'eat Lord, CIad
In Whlte and YelIow Robe, Soma, the Kmg"; "The Lummous One", "FulInes5,
the Irnmeasurable", "Indra Valkul)tha, the Iuvmclble Arrny"; "The Powerful
Oue", "The Counterlmage"; "The Shmmg Oue"; "The Second, who never turns
away" , "Llfe"; "Death",   ofthe Self"]'; (:8.4.6.10 3; 6; 9; 12; 15,
18 (=BAU 4.1. 3; 6; 9; 12,15,18 Madhy. =3 2,4; 5; 6; 7 Kanva) pnyam
ity (b praJiie 'ty j 9 satyam ity, 12 ananta ity; 15 ananda it!!, 18 sthiti1' fty)
enad [brahma] upiiSita, 'He should worshlp this (Brahman) as "The Dear" ["Know-
ledge", "Truth"; "The Endless One", "Bliss", "Immoblhty"l', JUB, 1, 49. 1 so
[praJiipahh] 'bravit· purusah praJiipatis same 'ti mo 'piiddhvam ... itl; 4 tam
[prajapatlm] pUl'usa?! p¡'aJápatts same 'ty upasota; ., j sa yo ha . .. purusah
praJapatis same 'ty ttpliste " JUB. 2. 4. 4 sa ya eIJam etam [pninam] libhütir
ity ttpaste ... , 5 sa ya evam etaTÍ¡ sa,itbhütir ity úpaste .. ; 6 sa 'Ya evam etam
pmbhatir ety upaste .; JUB. 4, 21. 6 tadvanam ity upasitavyam,
Contrast, wlthout iti, JUB. 3 3. 2 6 so 'rakso upasitavyab.
AIL Ar 2. 1. 4 (p 103,5 KeJth) «daram brahme 'tI ptlrka1'ak,ya nptlsate hldayam
brahme 'ty lil'u¡¡ayah; Alt. Ar. 2 1. 8 (p. 107, 8 KeJth) tam bhüttr 2tt" deva upIJ·
sam cakrzre ..• abhützr ¡ty asura[¡; Alt. Ar. 2 6 (p. 123, 1 Keith) = Alt. Up 3.
1. 1 ko 'yam atme 'ty 1tpasmahe; Chand. Up 1 3.8 upasaranani 'ty upasUa;
Chand. Up. 2 1. 4 sa ya etad evam vulva n siidhu slime 'ty upaste.. ; Chand.
Up. 3 13. 1 tad etat teJo 'nnadyam ety upiisíta, 2 tad etac ca ce 'ty
upasita; 3 tad etad brahmavarcasam annadyam ity uplisita; 4 tad etat ca
ce 'ty npiisita; 5 tad etad oJa, ca ce 'ty "pasita; 8 tad etad drl!tam
ca ce 'ty upasUa; Chand. Up. a 14.1 taj Jalan (cf.Oldenberg, Lehre der
Upamshaden, p.350, note 116 wlth the references) iti fiinta upasita; Chand. Up.
3 19. 4 sa ya etam evam vfdviin ádttyam brahme 'ty upáste ." Chand. Up. 4.
5. 3, 6. 4, 7. 4; 8. 4 sa ya etam evam mdviiny catuskalO1h padam
prakiil}avan (6.4 brahmallo 'nantavan; 7 4 brahmano Jyotil!miin, 8 4 bl'ahmana
iiyatanavlin) tty upaste .. ; Chand. Up. 5. 10 1 ye ce 'me 'mvye tapa
fty up4sate ... ; 3 atha ya ime grlima dattam ity "pasate ..• ; Chand
Up. 7.1. 5; 2.2; 3 2; 4.3, 5.3; 6.2; 7.2; 8.2, 9.2; 10.2; 11.2; t:!. 2, 13.
2; 14.2 sa yo Mma (2.2 vllcam, 3 2 mano; 4 3 yah samkalpam; 5. 3 yay
czttam, 6.2 dhyiinam; 7.2 tnjiiiinam, 8 2 balam; 9.2 'nnam, 10.2 'po; 11. 2
yas teJo; 12 2 ya 4káfam; 13 2 yah .%aralllj 14.2 ya liyam) brahme 'ty upaste,
253
§ 60, Ex 159. 'rhe AbsoluLe Locahve
¡;A. 4. 6; KUB. 2. 6 tad / 9 ity upiis'ita tad yajur Ity upásita. . tat same 'ty
upiisita . tae chrir ¡ty upiislta . tat teja íty upasUa.
Contrast lhe double accusative WIlhout ¡ti at Chand. Up 5. 12. 1-17. 1
kU/jt tvam atmanam upiissa ,ti, dwam (13. 1 éidltyam; 14 1 vc'lyum, 15 1
16.1 apa, 17.1 plthwlm) eva •• Itl ha 'váca.
JUB. 2 9. 10 bahuputra esa udg'itha ity evo 'pc'lsitavyam sho\Vs the dlrecL
diseourse.
4 vi ya}
The 1I:B 8 2 somam salltam Vil}/IW1, (so Lmdner's text, the cod M.
redds Vll}nur) tti yaJatt lS dlscussed under "Accusative"
H. Verbs of calhng and nammg in lhe middle voice and with reflexlve meamng
have the predICate nonn m the nommative wJthout itt.
The nommative IS normal here as the predicate nonn refers to the
8ubJect of the clause and consequentIy agrees wlth It m case, cf. sarve
at gB 3 1. 2. 3 tad d}¡m 'ke sarva eva vapante, 'Now sorne shave them-
selves aH over'. Cf. Whltney, Gr. § 268, a, Weber, Ind Stud.9, p 295;
Delbrück, Altmd Synt § 64, P 104, 3-9; and compare the similar con-
struction of Latin 'pse m agreement wlth lhe subJect, e. g. Nepos, Mlll. 7
ttaque cum zpse pro se dfcere non posset t'c,'ba fecerunt elus amzct. and
see above § 59, Ex 175 Rem. (in fine). When the subJeet IS m the voeaLIve
case the predICate noun 1S ID Ihe same case, thus, ID the Subrahmanylt-
formula QB 3. 3. 4. 19, f?B. 1 1. 21, JB. 2. 79 (JAOS 18, p.35), TA. L
3; LO. 1. 3. 1 kaur¡t!ca brü}¡mana gautama (m JB. only one ms. reads
gautama, the rest   bruvana, 'O thou Brahmana Kau<;llta who callest
thyself Gautama' Cf Delbruck, Altmd. Synt. § 46, p. 76, 38, Wacker-
nagel, Altmd. Gr Il, 1, § 82, b, note, p. 194.
Wlth vi brÜ.
gB 1. 6 1 8 abhakto ha vaz tasylhh pullyakrtyijyüm bhaVflti yam asya samüno
bruvanah karott, 'For he obtams a share m that mentonous deed which he
performs whlle he calls hlmself hls equal'; OB. 14 6. 1 3 (= BAU. 3 1 3 Madhy.
= 2 Kanva) kathañ¡ no brahmistho bruvita, 'How may he call hlmself most
brahman·msplled amongst us?', OB. 14. 8 15 11 (= BAU. 5. 15. 11 Madhy. = 5.
14 8 Kanva) yan nu ha tad gayatl ¡md abrüthah, 'Smce thou callest tbyself a
Gayatri-expert', PB. Id. 12 8 tasmad !le ca paranco gotamlid !le ca 'rl,añcas ta
ubhaye gotamarsayo bruvate, 'Therefore bolh those who precede Gotama and
who follow hlm call themselves Gotama-sages"
254
For the meaning of gotamarsi cf. Wackernagel, AItmd Gr. II, 1, § 100, b,
p. 251, brahmarsi,
For the hlatu8 in the componnd cf. Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. J, S 267, e,
p.316.
The Absolute Locative. § 60, Ex 15<).
l?B. 1. 1 24 sa yat tad gotamo va cacllra ... , 'Inasrnuch as he went
eJther callmg himself Gotama ... '; QB. 2. 1. 2. 14 sa [mdrah] b¡·ahmano bruvana
ekestakarh prabadhye 'yaya, 'This (Indra), calling hlmself a Brahmana, carne takmg
one hnck'; TB 1. 1 2. 5 lJa indro brahmano bruviina ii}takflm ftpadhatta, 'Thls
Indra, calhng hlmself a Hrabmana, put down a brlck'; MS 4 8. 1 (p 107, 6)
tam [manum] indro brahmano bruviina upmt, 'Indra, callmg hlrnself a Brahmana,
approached tbis (Manu)'; JB. 1. 288 (Caland, Auswabl, p. 114-115j quater) aham
te wki}yami tva!h tu bruviinli, 'l (= the Gáyatñ) wlll carry It for thee (= the
  etc.) calling myself (by the name which) tbou (hast)'; Chand Up 4.4
2 sa satyakáma eva Jablllo bravUhah, 'Call thyself then slmply Satyakama, the
son of Jabala'; Chand. Up. 5. 3 4 a/ha nu kim anufit¡to 'vocatha, yo hi 'mani
na V'ldyat katham so 'nUftSfo bruVita, 'How now hast thou called thyself in-
structed? How, indeed, may one cal! hlmself IUstructed who does not know
these (things)?'
In the later language -bruvana is used as the second member of com-
pounds, cf. e.g. the Epic brahmabruvana, Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 11, 1,
§ 82, b, p. 193, but such compounds are not found m the earlier language;
lhe LOmpound gautamabruvaná which WhIlney quotes (Gr. § 1273, d
appears to be an error due to a misinlerpretatlOn of gautama bruvana of
the Subrahmanya-formula.
2 Wlth v' vaco
TS. 6 2. 4. 2, 3 durge val hanfa (3 durgad va aharta) 'vocathall, 'Thou hast
caBed thyself a si ayer m an inaccessible (place) [a fetcher from an maccesslble
(place)].'
3. The middle of the f vad do es not oceur in the sen se of 'to eall oneselfj
lt is erroneously rendered so by Delbrück, Altmd. Synt. p. 104, 10 and p. 252,
8 where samgrah'itiiro vadante IS rendered by 'sle geben slch für Wagenlenker
aus'. But AB. 25 6 turiye hat 'va sarhgrah'itiiro vadante 'munai 'va
gad ada mdrah siirathtr !Va bhütvo 'daJagat means 'The eharioteers lay clalrn
to one fourth (of the hooty) hasmg theu claim on the faet that Indra on that
oceasion havmg beco me the charioteer [this alludes 10 RV. 4. 46. 2, 48. 2 niyutviiñ
mdrasarathlh] won the VlctOry'. The COlreet translatlOn IS given by Weber,
Ind. Stud, 9, p 253, 'So beanspruehen die Wagenlenker em Vlertel.'
'fhe v' t'ad here IS used in the sense of v' vad + vi 'to dIspute about,
lay elalm to, something'j ef. QB. 1 4 5. 8 atha 'to manasaf cat 'va ca
'hambhadra udttam, 'A dIspute about supremacy arose between Mmd and
Speecb,' [In the simIlar passage Chand. Up 5. 1. 6 prana ahalh¡;reyasi
vgudfre, 'The organs of sense dlsputed abaut supremacy', the v' vad + VJ
IS actually used] , I;B. 1 4. 5 8 ca ha Val vlik ca 'hambhadra üdlite,
'Mmd and Speech dlsputed about suprernacy'; TS. 2.1 9. 3-4 de/Ja vai
pustim na 'vmdan I tam mtthune 'pa,yan, tasyam na samaradhayan, tatl
afvmiiv abriliam. avayor va elJa, mai 'tasyi'im vadadhvam iti, 'The gods
dJd not find prospenty, they saw it m (sexual) umon, they eould not agree
about it: these two smd: "Venly, Jt IS ours, do not clalffi It".'
255
§ 60, Ex 159-165.
The Absolute Locabve
SimllarIy the simple ,1 vad IS used in the sense of V vad + sam 'lo
hold a dlseussion about' at TB. 1. 1. 3. 11 deva vai brahmann avadanta,
'The gods had a dlseusslOn about the Brahman', and at MS. 2. 4 4 (p. 41,
19) va avadetlJm, 'These two had a dlseussion about thls'.
4 But the mIddle of V dha with nitma, 'to assume a name' construes the
loglcal predicate paratactIeaIly m the nommabve wIlh iti.
GB 1 5 8 (p 122, 12) sa rajasuyene (also' sa váJapeyene, so   sa
sa sarvamedhene)   raje 'ti (also samrag, svartUj. virag,
ftl, 5(/rvarad namá 'dhatta, 'He, havmg sacnfieed with the Rlljasuya [VaJapcya;
Ar;vamedha, Puru§lamedha, Sarvamedha], assumed the name (btIe) of Rajan [SamraJ,
SvarliJ; VlraJ, SarvaraJ]'. "
ihIS It the only example noted; in faet V dhii wllh nama occurs but
once agam m a corrupt passage oC MS 3 8 10 (p 109, 12) ta etam dvi--
tiycim namany adhatta (val. leet. adhata) mañgalechayaf (val' leet mañ-
gachayaf), the sense of whlCh Rolh (MS vol. IV, p 310) eorrectly renders
by 'SIC nahmen dIese zweIten (anderen) Namen an faustí OffilDIS eaussa'
Roth regal .ls adhatta as a third person plural j it IS, however, more likely
an erlor for adadhata (ef. fhe var lect)
< y' su+pra>
The noua sorne must be suppbed throughout.
160 na ity aha, prasute prasthztam lti, 'He does not
(then) say: "(Give t1'le order for) the prepared (Soma)"; (but) after
(the Soma) has been pressed (he says): "(Give the order for) the
prepared (Soma)".' QB. 3. 8. 2. 27, 3. 8. 3 29
Prasthttam refers to the formula: prasthitam (scll KQ 6 6 26 etc
161. atha yadi prasuta ahavaniyo 'nugachet ... , 'lf, after (the
SomaJ has been pressed, the Ahavaniya-fire should go out .. .'
QB. 6. 6. 4. 14.
162. kamam prasute 'r,;11/lyát, 'After (the Soma) has been pressed,
he may eat if he pleases'. KB. 7.3 (p. 29, 21).
163. sa ha pras¡de 'Cclu1vákfyam cakara, 'After (the Soma) has
been pressed he performed the function of the Achavaka-priest'.
KB. 28. 4 (p. 136, 5).
164. tasmad etenai 'va prasute prapadyeta, 'Therefore
he should proceed (to the bath) with tbis (Mantra) after (the
Soma) has been pressed'. SB. 3. 1. 8.
< y' srj + vi >
165. salnsthitayam sayam vae1 visr#ayiilh Vftlagana-
gma upasameta bhavanti, 'When the initiation-offering has bef'n
256
The Absolute LocatIve § bO, Ex 166-172
completed (and) after speech has been relea sed in the evening,
master lute-players are assembIed'. QB. 13. 4. 4. 2
166. tam te tatha I ahar-ahar vaci agn'i-
antatah samsthayam panhrtasu   'They thus
sing of thlS (sacrificer) day after day, when speech has been
released (and) finally at the completlOn of the offerings to Agni
and Soma, when the VasatIvari water bas been carried round'.
QB 13.4.4.3
167. atha paf{ukiimaS sayarh agmhotrarn JUhuyád,
brahma va agmkotram, brakmanai 'va tat paQ'lin parigrhnaty,
pratar, brahma va agnihotram, brahmanm 'va tat paran
pangrh"Jati, 'He who lS desirous of cattle sbouId offer the Agni-
hotra in the evening when the cattle have come together; for the
Agnihotra is (ldentical with) tbe Brahman; by means of the
Brahman he thus encloses the cattle; (and) in the morning (he
shouId offer tbe Agmhotra) when the cattle have not (yet) been
dismissed (for pasture); for the Agnihotra is (identical witb) the
Brahman; by means of the Brahman he tIms encloses the cattle'.
JB. 1 5.
< V slu>
168. tav ajagmatur devan yajiiam tanvánant stute bahz?pavamane,
<These two approached tbe gods as they were preparing the sacri-
fice, after the had been chanted'. QB.4. 1. 5. 13.
169. tasmád stute graho grhyate, stute ht
baht$pavamana agachatam, 'Therefore this cup is drawn after the
Bahiepavamana has been chanted; for the two approached (the
gods) after the had been chanted' QB. 4. 1. 5. lo.
170. tasmád bahz8pavamane stuta [grahah] grhyate, 'There-
fore the Ayvina-cup is drawn after the Bahiepavamana has been
chanted'. TS. 6. 4. 9. 2.
171. tasmad bahz$pavamane stuta a(:vinau [grahau] grltJlete, 'There-
fore the two Ayvma-cups are drawn after the Bah1epavamána has
been chanted'. MS 4. 6. 2 (p 80, 6).
Caland, WZKM. 23, p. 57 plauslbly ernends a¡:vmau grnyete to 4pnno grhyate
the IS drawn'; cf Ex 170 aboye and Ex 172 below.
172. tasmat stute (Schroeder's emendation for
tute a(:Vino [grahah] grhyafe, 'Therefore the Ayvina-
Oertel, The Syntax oC Cases.
17
257
§ 60, Ex. 173-180. 'file Absolute Locatlve
cup is drawn after the has been chanted'. K. 27.
4 (p. 143, 13).
173. stute ' astavam a,kramayantl, 'After the
has been chanted they make tbe horse step Oil
the place for chanting'. QB. 13 Ó. 1. 16.
17 4. stute I uha (G 6. stuta aha)
Bahiepavamana has been chanted he sayó .
1-2, GB. 2. 2. 16 (p. 182, 3).
; 'After the
TS. 6. 3. 1.
175. yad stuta aha. ., 'In that, after the Bahie-
pavamana has be en chanted, he says: .'. MS. 3. 8. 10 (p. 110,8).
176. tasmad brahma stute vaca>nyamak syad (the
mss. have vacoyamyam for vacamyamak syad) o  
bhyam, atha ye pavamüna o 'drcas te$v, atha yam ca stotram ca
ca (the mss., omitting ca, have a) vasatkarat
'Therefore the Brahman-priest should restralll his speech after
the Bahi¡¡;pavamana has been chanted up to the (drawing of the)
Upanyu and Antaryama cups, and further during (the Stotras)
which (are called) the Pavamanas (he should restrain hlS speech)
up to the end, and further during the Stotras and Qastras (he
should restrain his speech) up to Vasat-call' GB. 1 3 3 (p. 66, 13).
cr. tbe parallel passage, AB. 5. 33 4 aboye Ex. 41
For the lmposslble vacoyamyam of the mss Gaastra (p. 31, 3) doubtingly con-
Jectures viicam yacchet, but viicamyamah Sljat 18 perbaps grapblcaJly an eaSler
emendatlOn For viicamyama ef. Wackernagel, Altmd. GI. 11, 1, § 87, a, y, p. 206, 23.
ls viicoyama perhaps a blundermg analogy formabon after tbe model
of (Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. I1, 1, § 89, c, p. 213, 22 and § 99,
p 247, 42)?
177. = Ex. 159, aboye.
178. tasmad brahma stute vacayat1" 'Therefore the
Brahman-prlest glves permission to speak after the Bahll;;pavamana
has been chanted':Í;.,GB. 1. 5. 11 (p. 128, 14)
179. stute madhyandme pavamane [dadh¿gharme1}a caratiJ, '(He
proceeds with the Gharma of whey) after the midday Pavamana
has been chanted' QB. 14. 3 1. 29.
180. stute pavamane caranti, 'They proceed with
the Gharma of whey after the Pavamana has been chanted'.
KB. 15. 1 (p. 65, 11); 29 2 (p. 139,4).
258
The Absolute Locatlve. § 60, Ex 181-188.
181. yat pavamane stute 'gnayo vlhrzyante. ,'In tbat the fires
are taken apart after tbe Pavamana has been cbanted M8.
3. 8. 10 (p. 109, 17).
182 atha stute pavamane paQuna carantl, 'Then, after the Pava-
mana has been chanted, they proceed wlth the victim'. KB. 16.
1 (p. 69, 8), 30. 1 (p. 142, 15)
183 sa stute pavamana etam japarh japet, 'After tbe PaVamanR
has been chanted he should mutter this Japa'. KB. 12.5 (p. 55, 16)
184. pavamane stuta aJyam r;añsaty ajye stute praí¿gam, 'After
tbe Pavamana has been chanted he recites tlle Ajya(-Qastra); when
the AJya(-Qastra) has been chanted (he recites) tbe Prauga(-Qastra)'.
KB. 14. 4 (p. 63, 24).
185. stute stome daQamarh [graham] grhnatz, 'After the 8toma
has been chanted he draws the tenth (cup)' AB. 3 1. lo
186. ekasyam stotrlyayam astutáyarh padav up avahara ti, 'When
one (verse) belonging to the Stotra remains uncbanted (= before
the last verse of the Stotra has been chanted) he takes down
hlS feet'. PB. 5. 5. 7.
187. yady ekasmw paryaye 'stute 'bhivyuchet pañQadaQabhir hotre
stnyuh pañcablnft-pañcabhtr ltarebhyo, dvayoh paryayayor astu-
tayor abhwyuched dhotre ca maltravarltnaya ca pürve stuyur brah-
mane ca 'chavakaya co 'itare, yadt (var. lect.
  abhwyuchet hotre stuyus tisrbhls-ttsrbhtr
ltarebhyalt, 'If day should break while one Stomarround remalllS
unchanted they should perform the Stoma wIth fifteen (verses)
for the Hotr-priest (and) with five (verses) each for the other
(priests); if day should break whIle two Stoma-rounds remain un-
cbanted they sbould chant the first two (verses) for the Hotr-
priest and the Maltrávaru1}a-pnest, (and) the Iast two (veraes) for
the Brahman-priest and the Achávaka-priest; if day should break
when a11 the Stoma-rounds remam unchauted they should per-
form the Stoma with six (verses) for the Hotr-pnest (and) with
tbree (verses) each for the other (priests)'. JB. 1. 348.
Cf. Caland on ApQ. 14.23. 12-14.
188. tad ahus: tzsr§v eva 'stutttSU dhaveyus, trayo va¿ pruna-
panavyanas, sarhtatya avyavachedaye 'ty; atho ahur· ekasyam
eva stutayam dhaveyulp, ko hy 'sa yat prar,to 'pano vyana tÜj
17*
259
§ 60, Ex 189-194 The Absolute Loeabve
tad va ahus: sarvasv eva 'stutasu dhaveyur (the ms. dhaver)
etayor ajyor asamsargaye   'No\\' they say: "They should run
(the race) when three (verses) remam unchanted, morder that
these three, viz. m-breathing, out-breathing, and through-breathmg,
may be firmly held together and that there may be no separation
from them"; agam tbey say: "Tbey.should run (the rae e) when
one (verse) remains uncbanted, for in-breatbmg, out-breatbmg,
and through-breathing are (identlCal with) Ka (= Prajapati)"; still
furtber they say: "'fbey should run (tbe race) wben all (the verses)
remam unchanted morder that tbese two races may uot be fused
together".' JB. 2. 193.
The noull lS omitted m the following two paflsages
189. (a) atha stuta etam vacam vadatt, 'Wben tbe cbaut bas
be en completed he utters tbis speech'. QB. 4. 2. 5 1I.
(b) pranam eva nli 'tl,stuvantt, val, prlina eva paru;iS1Jlde
JB. 2. 39, aboye Ex. 61.
< -y stu + pra >
190. prastute bruyat ., cAfter tbe Bahlf;ipavamana
has been rnanted be should say ..' K 34. 18 (p. 48, 13).
191. prastute . . . brahmanam at%7c$eta,
'After the Bahi
9
pavamana has been chanted ... he should gaze
upward beyond the Brahman-priest' K. 34. 18 (p. 48, 19).
192. rathantare prastute bruyat . .. j brhati prastute bruyat •
'After the Prastava of the Rathantara(-Saman) [of the Brhat
(Saman)] has been finished he should say . '. JB. 1. 129 (Caland,
Auswahl, p 33).
Cf. below § 62, Ex 76 [l'uthan/are] plastüyamline
. o
193. rathantare ha 'tfy uktva 'dun adad%ta; .. ; brhat
i
a dy u7ctva 'dun adad'ita, 'After the Prastava of tbe
Rathantara(-Saman) has beerí finished he should commence tbe
Adi having sald' "Ho", .. : after the Prastava of the Brhat
(-Saman) has been fimsbed be should commence the Adi baving
sald "Ah".' JB. 1. 130 (Caland, Auswahl, p 34)
For V da + {j wIth adtm ef Whitney, JAOS 11, p cxLvII ff; fol' MI as a
subdlV1SlOll of the Saman ef. JUB 1. 11. 7 ete (see the Index, p. 248) and JB 1
178 sudb7m aksaruir lidun lidatte
194. rathantare prast1tte prthivím hastabhyam gacchet, <After tbe
260
The Absolute LocatJve. § 60, Ex 195-196.
Prastava of tbe Rathantara-(Saman) bas been finisbed he should
touch the eartb with both bands'. JB. 1. 130 (Caland, Auswabl, p. 34).
Prth¡vim hastilbhyilm gacchet is a curJOus expreSSlOn lf lt IS mtended to niean
'he should touch   the earth Wlth both hands' (cf QB. 1. 2 4. 7 na
'tmanam na prthtv¿m; AB. 3 31 14; 3 38 12 1tpaSplfian bhümlm).
Cf. prthivim, antanksam, pa¡;ün, diva m, arrd 1 Hin manasa gacchet in the
followmg Ex. 195
195. gayat-ryarh prastutayarn gayatram eva gayan prthW'im manasa
gacchetj prastutayarh (the mss stutayam) gayatram
eva gayann manaSa gacchetj. ,Jagatyam prastutayarh
gayatram eva gayan dir;alJ, (tbe mss. dtr;a and dlQam) payun manasa
gacchetj J anu¡;tubhi prastntayarh gayatram eva gayan dwarh
manas a gacchetj .. . , pañktyarh prastutayarh gayatram eva gayann
rtún manasa gacchet, 'After the Gayatrl [the Trietubh; tbe JagatI;
tbe Anu¡;;tubh; tbe Pañkti] has been cbanted, while be smgs III
tbe GayatrI-metre, be should go with bis mmd to (= fix his
mmd on?) tbe eartb [tbe atmospbere;· tbe quarters (and) cattJe;
the sky j tbe seasons J'. JB. 1. 104.
196. mano vai retasya prano gayatr'i cak¡;us tri¡;tup frotram jagatí
vag retasyayam prastutayam yasya kamayeta I tasya manasa
mano dhyayed, gayatryarh prastutayam yasya kamayeta tasya pranena
pranam dhyayetj prastutayam yasya kamayeta tasya
cak¡;ur dhyayed; Jagatyam prastntayarh yasya kamayeta tasya r;rotrena
frGtrarh dhyayed; anustubhz prastutayárh yasya kamayeta tasya vaca
vacarh dhyayet j . . .; atha¿ 'ta devadhurar; ca manu¡;yadhuraf ca
samdadhaü J muno vai manu§yadhúr apo devadha, retasyayam pra-
stutayam manasa 'pas samdadhyat j .• J prano va¿ manu¡;yadhür
vayur devadhúr, gayatryam prastutayarn pranena vayurn samdadh-
yat j •• , caksur vat manu¡;yadhar addyo devadhas, tn¡;tubht prastu-
tayam cak$u.sa ' dityam samdadhyat J. ., r;rotrarh
devadhúr, jagat3'am prastutayarh yrotrena samdadhyat j .. J
vag prthw'i devadhur, prastuttiyam vaca
prthiV'im samdadhyat. 'The Retasya (verse) is (identical wlth) the
mind, the Gayatr! (with) breath, the Tri¡;;tubh (with) slght, the
JagatI (with) bearing, the (with) speech; after the Retasya
[the Gayatr!; tbe Trif;ltubh; the Jagat!; the has been
chanted, be should medItate with the mind [breath; slghtj hearmg;
speech] on the mind [breath; sigbt; hearmg; speecb] of him whom
261
§ 60, Ex 19i-202. The Absolute Locative
he may desire; ; furthermore he puts the dlVIne Hnd the
human Dhúrs together; mind [breath; sight; hearmg; speech]
is the human Dhur, the waters [the wind; the sun; the quartersj
the eartb] are [isl the divine Dhur; after the Retasya [the Gayatrij
the Tri
9
tubh; the Jagatí, the Anustubh] has been chanted he
should put together the waters [the wind, the sun, the quarters,
the earthJ with the mind [breath, slgh!; hearing, speech]'. JB 1.
269-270.
197 prastute pura 'deh sa '(The mterval) after the
PrHstava has been chanted (and) before the Adi is one hell'. JB.
1 325 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 124).
For the hypostasis of the absolute locatlve cf aboye § 59, Ex. 8, Remark.
<V str>
198. stirne samiddhe devebhyo juhavam, 'After the sacri-
ficlal strew has been strewn 1 will offer to tbe gods in the kindled
(fire)'. QB 4. 2. 5 11.
199. = aboye § 57, Ex. 18 (K. 25. 8, p. 113, 12).
< V stha + 112 S >
200.   mahts'im, 'panipadayantt,
'After the water for washing the feet has, been made ready they
make the queen lie down by the horse'. QB 13. 5 2. 2.
< 1/ han>
201. sa ho 'vaca: hato vrtro, yad dhate kuryata tat kurute 'tl,
'He sald: "Vrtra is slam; do ye what ye would do if he were
slain" .' QB. 4 1. 3. 4.
Eggelmg renders: 'Do ye wlth the sIam what ye IIst', better Delbrück, Altind
Synt. p 388, 3'5 'Was ihr tun würdet, wenn er tot ware, das tut'.
:202 sa vm putre hate somam aharad rta indram, 'After
(hIS) son bad been slain Tva9tr offered Soma, excluding lndra'.
MS. 2. 4. 1 (p 38, 7): •
The palallel passages expless the Idea of putre hate usually by the compound
hataputra or putrahata (WackernageI, AItmd. Gr. n, 1, p 302, § 116, a), thus,
TS 2. 5. 2. 1 tvastli hataputro V'ind1 am somam dharat,
FOI tñndra cf. WackernageI, AItInd Gr. n, 1, p. 285, § 110, b, 1, who corno
pares AB. 7. 27. 1 viryaparno yajñah, 'a sacrlfice from whICh the Qyaparnas
were excluded'
JB 2. 154 5 (Transacbons of the Connechcut Academy of Arts and SClences,
15, p 181) sa tva\ta hatal:nd1'o 'pendra1h l!jahre;
262
The Absolute Locatlve. § 60, Ex 203-208.
Apendra belongs to Wackernagel, Alhnd Gr n, 1, p 282, § 110,   In
connection with apadeva and contrasted wilh sena, a It occurs also at JB.
3. 160 tesám apendro 'padevo yaJno 'bhavat; ... ,' sendro flas sadevo yajnas
syat, •• , tata esa sendras sadevo yajño 'bhavatj ••• , sendro ha 'sya sadevo
yaJíio bhavati ya evam veda.
K 12. 10 (p. 172, 1'1) sa tvasta putrahato ffindram somam aharat; t;:B. 12. 7.
1. 1, 12 8 3. 1 tari! tvasta hataputro 'bhyacarat. At QB 1. 6. 3. 6; 5. 5 4. 7 the
idea 18 expressed by a dlrect dlscourse: sa tvasta cukrodha: kuvin me JJ1ttram
abadh'id fa 80 'pendram eva 80mam áJahre
< v' han + apa >
203 yak prathamas tamasy apahate suryasya raQmir yüpasya
'vatanot (Schroeder's text erroneously omits the avagraha)
sa 'mr vaQa 'bhavat, 'Tbe first ray of tbe sun which, after dark-
ness had been dispelled, spread over the top of the sacrificial
stake became a barren ewe'. MS. 2. 5. 2 (p. 48, 19).
The parallel passages K. 12. 13 (p. 175, 6) and TS 2. 1 2 2 have nothing
syntactIcalIy comparable. Cf Caland, ZDMG. 72, p. 7, who querles whether at
K 12 13 (p. 175, 7) clUvlilam should be corrected to casalam.
204 prataft puro 'dayad apahate tamasi tasmin kale juhuyat, 'In
the morning before sunrIse when darkness has been dispelled,
- at that time he should make the offering'. KB. 2. 9 (p. 8, 9).
For the resumptlOn by tasmm kale cf aboye § 56
< v' hu>
205. atha hute 'gnihotra   'Now after the Agnihotra
has been offered he worshlps (the fires)' QB. 2. 4. 1. lo
206. yasya 'gnir uddhrto 'hute 'gnihotra udvayatz .. " 'If allyone's
fire after it has been taken out (of tbe Garhapatya-fire) goes out
while the Agmhotra has not (yet) been offered .. .'. TS 2. 2. 4. 7.
207, yasya 'hute 'gnihotre pilrvo 'gnir anugachet .. ,; yasya 'hute
'gmhotre parvo 'gnir anugachatz. . ., yasya 'hute 'gnihotre 'paro
'gnir anugachet ... , 'Ir, while the Agnihotra has not (yet) been
offered, anyone's first [second] fire should go out [goes out]'.
MS. 1. 8. 8 (p 127,7; 18; P 128,1; 3).
208. sayam ahute 'gnihotre (Schroeder's emendation for
'gmhotra) parvo 'gmr anugachet .. ; yadt prátar ahllte (SchlOeder's
emendation for ahute) 'gmhotre 'paro 'gmr anugachet . . " 'H, m
the evenmg [m the mormng], the first [second] fire should go
out while the Agmhotra has not (yet) been offered ..' K. 6. 6.
(p. 53, 3, 6)
263
§ 60, Ex. 209 -218 The Absolute LocatIve.
209. tasmat sayarn ahute 'gnihotre 'gmhotrina na 'Qdavyam tas-
mad u pratar ahute na '(fitavyam, 'Therefore the Agmbotrin lS not
permitted to eat in the evening when the Agmhotra has not
(yet) been offered, and therefore he ís not permitted to eat in the
roorning before the Agnihotra hAS (yet) been offered'. MS 1. 5.
7 (p. 75, 3)
210. etasyam ahutyam hutayam agn,¿r devebhya udakt'amat, 'After
this oblatIOn had beeo offered Agni departed froro the gods'.
QB. 6. 3. 1. 22.
211 etad va [agm{l] etasyam ahutyam hutayam pradipyata,
'Then, when this oblation has been offered, this (fire) blazed forth'.
QB. 9. 2. 3. 37.
212. yat purvasyam ahutyam hntayarn atha 'gmr anugac}¡et. .
'If, after the first oblation has been offered, the fire were to go
out..'. QB. 12. 4. 3. 1.
Fo! atha cf aboye § 7, b, and below § 65, a.
213. yat purvasyam ahutau hutayam añgara ... , 'lf,
after the first oblatlOn has been offered, the eoals should go out
JB. 1. 56. 3 (JAOS. 23, p. 338).
214. yadi (TB. yat) parvasyam ahutyam hutayam uttara 'hutü¡,
skandet ... , 'If, after the first oblatIOn has been offered, tbe second
oblation should be Bpilled ... '. K. 35. 19 (p. 66, 3); TB. 3. 7. 2. 4.
:!15. yat purvasyam ahutau hutayam yaJamano mNyeta ., 'If,
after the first oblation has been offered, the sacrIficer should die
JB. 1. 57. 3 (JAOS. 23, p.  
The parallel passage <;:B 4. 2 5 has nothmg syntactIcally comparable.
216. tam [gam] tasyam eva 'hutau hutayarh brahmanaya dada ti,
'They give this (cow) to a BrahmaI}.a after this oblation has been
offered'. JB. 1. 58. 1 (JAOS. 23, p. 340).
The parallel passage <;:B 12.4. 1. 10 has the sImple locatIve wlthout partIclple:
tlim tasyam ahutya1Íl brahmallaya dadyiit.
217. vettha yattthyam almtyam hutayam apalJ, . .. vadanti3, 'Dost
thou know after the offering of which libation the waters.
speak?' QB. 14. 9. 1. 3 (= BAU. 6. 1. 3 Madhy. = 6. 2. 2 KaI}.va).
218. ahutastt va aham devata havyam gamayamt, '1 will
cause the offering to go to the gods before the oblations have
(yet) been offered' MS 1. 4. 10 (p 58, 7); K. 32. 7 (p 25, 23).
26.!
The Absolule LocalIve 60, Ex 219-228
219. ahutasv eva 'sya 'huti¡;u devata havyarh   'HIs offermg
goes to the dlvmities before the oblations have (yet) been offered'.
MS. 1. 4. 10 (p 58, 8), K. 32. 7 (p. 26, 1).
220 sayamahutyarh hutayam jaghanena gárhapatyam udañ váva-
taya saha   'After tbe evening-oblation has been offered
he, having bis face turned to tbe north, lies down witb the
favourite wlfe the Garhapatya-fire'. QB. 13 4. 1. 9.
221. pratarahutyarh hutáyam adhvaryuh purnahutzm jtthotz, 'After
the morning-oblation has heen offered the Adhvaryu-priest offers
a fuIl oblation'. QB. 13. 4. 1. 10.
222. elant (4. 5. 8. 15 omits etam) va vapayarh hutáyam
dadyad udavasaniyayam ve '¡;!au, 'He should make a present of
these (garments) either after the omentum of the barren cow bas
been offered or at (= after) the concludmg ceremouy'. QB. 4. f>
8. 15; 5.3. 5.26.
223. tad dhat 'ke vapayarh hutayarh dakszná nayanti, 'Now sorne
lead up the glft-cows after the omentuDl has been offered'. 9B.
11. 7. 2.4.
224. vau)vadevasya (2 atndragnasya; 3 kaydsya) vapaya1n hzttayam
tad anv ztara juhuyul), 'When the omentum of (the victim) sacred
to the AH Gods [to rndra and Agm, to Ka] has been offered,
-after that they should offer the other (omenta)'. QB. 13.5 3 1-3.
For tad anu ef. above § 7. b
225 af{ttavyarh vapayam hutayam, 'Eating is permitted after the
omentum has been offered'. AB. 2.9. 6.
226. te¡;arh [devanam] vapayam eva hutayarh svargo pra-
khyayata, 'After just the omentmn had been offered by these (gods)
the heavenly world become apparent' AB. 2. 13. 6.
227. hutasu vapasu prapadya ' dhvaryü rajatena patrena prajapat-
yam mah1manam uttararh graham grhnati, 'After the omenta have
been offered the Adhvaryu-priest, entering (the Soma-flhed) draws
the second Mahiman-cup sacred to Prajapati in a silver vessel'.
QB. 13.5.3.7.
228. hutasu vapasv evam eva trtiyasa'liane hute¡;u
hamlJ,¡;u / tri1Javam a¡;tamam altar bhavati, 'When at the morning
pressing the omenta have been offered (and), in like manner, when
265
§ 60, Ex. 229-235.
The Absolute LocatIve
at the third pressing the offerings have been offered, the eighth day
is a TriJ)ava-day'. QB. 13. 7. 1. 9-10.
229. niyante, 'After (the offerings) con-
nected with the sacrrficial fees have been ofl'ered the gift-cows
are led up'. KB. 15.1 (p 65, 17); 29. 2 (p 139, 12).
230. na 'hutayor upaill;/Jantaryamavor hota vacam vtsrjeta J yad
ahutayor ttpáñr,¿vantaryámayor hota vacam msr.ieta..., tasman na
'hutayor upa1ir,¿vantaryamayor hota vilcam visrjeta, 'The Hotr-pnest
[If the Hotr-priest; Therefore the Hotr-priest] should not relense
speech before the Upanqu and the Antaryam,a cups have been
offered'. AB. 2. 21. 1-2.
231. huta e'm ValSa1'Jme I ra)anam pra'(tayatt, 'When the VaisarJina·
offer.ing has been offered he leads the king (Soma) forward'. QR.
4.6 8.6-7; 11--12; 16-17.
232. yad idam ghrte hute prat'/: 'va 'rcw ujjvalati (also r,¿onam
iva 'rctr and suvar'(tam iva 'reir ui.jvalati) .. , 'When
here, after ghee has been offered, the flame fiares up, so to speak
[burns red, as it were j burns golden, as it were]. .' K 8. 9
(p. 92, 21 j p. 93, 4 and 8).
233. vastu hi tad yaj1iasya yad   'For (the time)
when the oblations ha ve been offered that is the place of the
sacrifice' . QB. 1. 7. 3. 7.
For the hypostasls of hutesu er. aboye § 59, Ex. 8, Remark.
Cf. TS 3. 1. 10. 3 vástu vii etad yaJñasya kriyate yad grahán grhítvii bahll¡'
sarpanti. 'In thal they creep loward the Bahll?pavamana. afler the
cups have been drawn thereby the place of the saerifiee is prepared'.
The subject of the locative absolute is wanting in the following
examples (Ex. 234-236)·
234. atha pratar hute va 'hute va yataratha kamayeta so 'sya
kumMyai darvyo 'pahanti. 'Now in the morning mtber
after (the Agnihotra) has been offered or before (it) has been
o ffered , whichever way he may prefer, he cuts out (the remainder)
wIth the Darvi.spoon from this vessel after (its contents) have
been eaten up'. QB 2.5. 3. 17. \
235. hutaya svahe (TS. 7. 4 16. 1) 'h hute juhoti, 'With (the
formula) TS 7.4. 16. 1 he offers an oblation after the offerlllg
has been made' TB. 3. 9. 16. 2.
266
The Absolule Locative. § 60, Ex. 236-240
- .
Cf Ap<;: 20 15 6 upakltilya svahe 'ty upiikrte [arve] Juhoty, ilZabdhaya svilhe
'ti myukie, huiaya svahe 'tt hute. And cf aboye Ex 45
236. yad dhuta adadhyat ... , 'If he were to load (the cart) after
the oblation has been offered . .' TS. 3. 4. 10 4.
236 A. At K. 6 3 (p. 52, 5) Schroeder's text reads: pura
upasannam ahute skandet " , but Caland, on ApQ 9. 6. 5, is cer-
tainly right in emending ahute to ahutam, cIf (the milk) after lt
has been set down in front (of the Ahavaniya-fire) should get
spilled before It is offered . . .'
< y'hr + a>
237. (2 6.1 madhyandtne savanej 2. 7. 1 trt'tyasa-
vane) savanamukhIyesv ahrteya 'pahavam icchate, cHe
seeks for an lllvitation at the mornillg pressmg [at the mldday
pressing; at the thlrd pressing] after (the vessels) which are em·
ployed at tp.e beginnmg of the pressing have been brought'. SB.
2. 5. 1; 2. 6. 1; 2. 7. 1.
238. tam [agnim] ahrte mrmanthantt, 'They churn this (fire) after
(the dead sacrIficer) has been brought (home)'. QB. 12. 5. 1. 3.
< y' hr + ud>
239. yad ahavan'iya 1tddhrte garhapatyo 'nugachet ... , cIf, after
tbe Ahavaniya-fire bas been taken out (of tbe Garhapatya-fire)
the Garhapatya-fire should go out .. ' JB 1. 61. 3 (JAOS. 23,
p. 243).
Cf the parallel passage <;:B 12 4 3 6, aboye § 59, Ex. 72
r Addition from the Prllse of the AV.
239 A. = Ex. 148, aboye. J
< y' lir + >
240. tarh te tatha I ahar-ahar vact agn
i
-
sarhsthayam parzhrtaslt . .. I praja-
patlnil sutyasv evam eva 'har-ahalJ, panhrtasv eva ' dava-
samyayam antatah   CThey thus sing of this (sacrificer)
day aftel' day, when speeeh has been released (aud) finally at
the completlOn of the offering to Agni and Soma when the VasatI-
val'i-water has been carned round, ., j on the Sutya-days (they
sing of hlm) aloug with Prajapati, iu exactly the same way, day
after day, wheu tbe VasatIvari-water has been carried round (aud)
267
§60,Ex 241-249, §bl, Ex 1 The AIJsolute LocatJvl'
when the Udavasaniya-ohlatlOn has finally been completed'. QB.
13. 4. 4. 2-4.
2 .. H. = § 69, Ex 200,
< -y' hr + pra >
242. = § 69, Ex 222 and 227.
243. yat   hanyoJannm Juhot! ,'In that he
offers the .Harlyojana-cup after thé enclosmg sticks have been
thrown mto (the tire) ..' K 28. 9 (p. 163, 18).
244. = § 59, Ex. 229 and 230.
< V hva (kü) + á >
240. áhuta ttkthe (Schroeder's emendation for ukte, the Kap S.
parallel has 1tkthye) 'vanayet ... ; yad áhüte 'vanayet . . .; yac
chaste .. , 'When the Uktha has been recited by way of invitatlOn,
he should pour It out.. , if he were to pour lt out after (tbe
Uktha) has been recited by way of invitatlOn.. , If (he were to
pour lt out) after the Qastra has been recited .. .'. K. 28. 1
(p. 153, 7 and 8).
< -y' hva (ha) + upa >
246. upahutayam idayam apa upaspn;ya mahendram graham
grhnat/', 'After the Iq.a has been mvoked, touching water, he draws
the Mahendra-cup'. QB. 5. 2. 2. 19 j 21; 5. 4. 4. 25.
247. sa va üf,ayam upahütayam ajagama, 'He carne after tbe
Iq.a had been invoked'. KB. 28 4 (p. 136, 1)
248. atha va etarhy upahütayam uf,ayam purorJ,ar;asyal 'va barh/,-
§aclo 1m/mansa, 'Now after the Iq.a has be en invoked, tbere is doubt
concerning the cake WhICh is placed on the sacnficial strew' TB.
3.3.8.5.
For barhi(h)sad cf Wackernagel, Altind Gr 1, p. 342, 6, § 287, a, 11, 1, p. 125,
27, § 55, b, Uj Oldenberg, Rlg·Veda Noten, J, p 191 (to RV.2 3 3), Prolegomena,
p 49, Anm. 1 j Arnold, VedlC Metre, p. 143
249. purorf,ar,¡edayam evo 'pahutayatn nayet, 'After the
Ida of the Cake has been invoked he should lead up the gift-
cows'. QB. 11. 7. 2. 5 (bis).
B. The Accompanymg Participle is a Present Participle.
§ 61. T h e Ver bis 1 n t r a n s 1 ti v e.
< -y' 1 as Oto be' >
1. tasmad etacl [payah] amayam gam satyam r;rtam, agner ht
268
The Absolute Locatrl'e § 61, Ex. 2-5.
retas, tasmad yadt krsnayarh yadi 'J'ohinyarh f{ztklam eva bhavati.
QB. 2. 2 4. 15, see aboye § 57, Ex. 4.
2. tasmad   'va vaQe sat't vmwarh paQava
'And therefore cattle are at the dlsposal of the VaiQya (only) as
long as the K¡;;atriya pleases' QB. 1. 3. 2 15.
For va¡;e sat. cr. TS. 6. 3 2 6 sve vafe bhute, above § 59, Ex. 110, Remar!.,
upatlSthante = 'serve, are of use' cf lts connectlOn with v' 2 bhuj 'enJoy" TS
2. 1. 4. 8 bhufljaty enam md upattsthate, MS 4 3. 6 (p. 45, 8) virastha vii anye
p'l¡;:avo 'vIrastha anye, ye purastat te Vi1 astha, ye purQda¡;:ás
te 'vIrastha, ye purustat purodafii bhuñJatas ta upatlSthante, MS. 4. 7. 4 (p. 99,
2); MS 1 10.7 (p. 147,5), K 36 1 (p 69,9) bhuftjanta ena¡iI [yajamanam] pa·
¡;uva (MS. pafava) upatlsthante; K 28 9 (p. 164, 10) samr;aruka enan! [yajamanam]
bahavab, par;avo bhuñjanta upatisthante; K. 28 9 (p. 164, 8); TS 6 5 9.4 sam-
t¿lJ,rul.Ji, enam alpah pUfavo (TS alpa enam pafavo) bhuñJanta upattstheran,. .,
asamr;liru1c1i enam bahavah pal}avo (TS. bakava enam paf/avo) bhufl}anta upaUsthe·
mn, TS 6. 5 9 4 bahava evav 'nam pal)avo bhuñjanta upatistheran And cf
MS 4.3.8 (p 48,3) sütamukhti vai Vlt hatram uputzsthate, TS 2. 3 9.3; 3.4
8. 2 tan [sa7atan] eva avarunddhe (3. 4 8 2 adhidevana eva 'smai sUjatan ava-
runddhe) ta enam avaruddhti upattsthante, TS 3. 5 7 3, 3. 5. 9 1, MS. 2. 5 1
(p 47,9) sart'any enam [yujamanam] par;ünam rüpany (TS sarvany evU1 'nam
pa¡;ünam rüpany) upatisthante
3 suryo ha va agmhotram . . . / sa yat sayam astamlfe juhoh
ya tdam tasm'tnn tha sati 'ty, atha yat pratar anudtle
juhot't ya tdarn tasm'tnn dw sah Juhavam 't't, tasmad 'lJat· suryo
'gmhotram tty ahuf¡" 'The Agnihotra is (ldentical with) the sun ... ;
when he offers It in the evening after (the sun) has set (he does
so thmkmg): "1 wIll offer lt whIle he who IS (identical wIth) this
(Agmhotra) IS here"; and when he offers it in the morning before
sunrise (he does so thinking): "1 will offer it whlle he who is
(identical with) thls (Agnihotra) is here", therefore they say: "The
Agnihotra lS (Identical wlth) the sun"'. QB. 2 3 1. 1-2.
4. tad etad (the second time tasmad) etad anatiratrc ratre
rüpam kriyate, 'In thIS way [therefore] while it is not an over-
mght-rite it lS (yet) performed In the manner, of a night-rite'.
QB. 5. 1 3. 2 (bIS).
5. tad yad aQvule pa9au saty (13 tad yat sarasvate paf{au saty;
14 tad yad atndre pa9au saty j 15 tad yad mndre purodage saty;
16 tad yat savztre purodaQc satyj 17 tad yad varutJe puro{laf{c saty)
athaz 'ta devata saha yaJatt ... , 'In that he sacrifiees to aH these
divl!lltles In eommon while the victim is saered to the Ayvins [to
269
§ 61, Ex 6-10 The Absolute LoeatJve
Sarasvati j to Indra; w hile the cake lS sacred to Indra; to Sa vItr;
to VaruDa] QB. 12. 9. 1. 12-17.
For atila d above § 7, b, and below § 65, a.
6. yat saty ühavan¡ye 'thü 'nyatra carantí . .. , eIf, while there
lS an Ahavamya-fire, they proceed elsewhere (= offer in another
fire) ... ' TB. 1. 6. 9. 8.
For atha ef. above § 7, b, and below § 6o, a
7. müdhuchandasa eva praüge sah gürtsarnadam vatf(vadevam
madhuchandasasya vmf(vadevasya paryaharet, e Although
thIS is just the Madhuchandasa Praüga he should tl'anspose the
Gartsamada (triplet) sacred to tbe AH Gods so as to precede tbe
Nlarlhuchandasa (triplet) saered to the AH Gods'. KB. 24. 1 (p. lOS, 9).
S yad agmsto'/'lW, eva yajfie dve ukthe attrtcyete.. .,
'Inasmuch as two Ukthas 01' the Hotr-priest are left over, this
sacnfice bemg un Agm$toma. GB. 2 6 6 (p 251, 3)
9. yad eva sati yajiie sarva devatah sarvam chandaitsy
apyayayanti . . , 'Inasmueh as aU the dlvimtíes (and) aU the
metres are made fuU, this saerifice being an Agni$toma . . '.
GB. 2. 6 6 (p. 251, 6).
10. tad dlza sma 'hanagar'tJanar,;ruteyo na 'va tavad dawasuram
(val'. lect. devasuram) bhavtta yavad trwrd vaJro 'Izar-ahar iman
lo7.an antlVartata (the mss. anuvartate 'ty) , ürdhvo hy ayam agnir
d'lpyate, hryañii, ayam vayu{l pavate, 'rvañ asav addyas tapatt, ta
ete anyo 'nyam ikflante; katham evam satsu (var.
leet. satyasu) dawasuram (var. lect devasurarh) syad 1 ti, 'Now
Nagarin Jana¡;ruteya used to say: "So long as the threefold thunder-
bolt lloves along these worlds day by day so long there WIll be
no (feud) between gods and Asuras, for thIS fire blazes upward,
ihis wind blows across, hitherward doth yonder sun hurn; these
three, without winking, gaze at eachother, how could there be a
(feud) between gods and Asuras while these (three) are thus?'"
JB. 1 247 (Caland, Auswahl, p 96).
Caland reads anuvartata lty (but the first   seems to be redundant); and
m both instanees devasuram, whleh he renders by '(Kampf) zwiscben GoUern und
Asuras', wIth the note: '1st mJt éiner hs dawasuram (sell. vairam) zu les en ?'
ItB 11 1 6 <} nai 'tad yad daivasuram, 'That IS not (a faet) VIZ the (feud)
between gods and Asuras' favours the readlllg dawasuram.
For the neuter bhavúlJ, In the periphrastIc future ef. aboye § 59, Ex. 93, Remark.
270
The Absolute LocatIve § 61, Ex.10A-lti.
r Addition from the Ara1)yakas and Upani¡;!ads.
lOA. ha va ayam satsa 'dgasyatz, 'Shall tbis one
sing tbe Udgltba, wbile these bere (= we, tbe BrahmaJ).as of tbe
Kurus and Pañcalas) belong to the family?' JUB. 3. 31. 9.
For the conceSSlve force of the locative absolute cf § 64. J
< y as + pan>
11. evai 'nam [vedzmJ etat anagnarh
karott, 'WhIle these (BrabmaJ;las) tbus sit around tbis (Vedi) be
(by strewmg tbe sacrificial grass on tbe Vedi) clotbes it'. QB.
1. 3. 3. 8.
<-riTa>
12 tad ayatsu vacayati.. , 'Wbile they approach he makes
(the sacrIficer) say .. .'. QB 3.3 2.6; 3.6.3.11.
13. tasmad telam apy etarhy amttresv ayatsu vittam apaguhantt,
'Therefore even now in ordinary life they bId e the property when
enemies approach'. JB. 3.117 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 215).
14. yatha' r;;reyasy ayai't pÜPíyan pratyavarohet . . , 'Even as an
inferior would descend (to do hOllour) when a superror
proaches ... '. QB. 4. 1. 3. 9.
Cf. AB. 2 20 15 pi att t'at veyansam ayantam utttsthantz, QB .3 9 3 7 ha·
triyam ayantam .mah praJa v1l;ah pratyavarohar¡tt, TS. 7. 5 4. 1 Jyayansam
kaniyan pratyaval'ohatt, and TS 5 5 4 2-3 samvatsaram na kam / wna pra-
tyavarohen, na hI 'me kam cana pratyaMlohatah, 'For the space of a year he
should desccnd In honour of no one, for these (worldsl do not descend ID honour
of anyone', TB 1 3 9 2 vaJapelJayaJI na "'am cana pratyavarohatz, 'He who
offels the VaJapeya descends ID honour of no one', MS. 3. 4 3 (p 47, 18) na hl
slt3ltviinah kam cana pratyavarohat.
15. yatha r;;reyasy ayaty apornuta evarn tat, 'Even as one
cavers when a superior approaches so lS tblS'. MS. 3 7. 8 (p. 86,4).
The parallel passage TS. 6. 1 3. 3 has yatha vaslyiinsarn praty apornute tiidrg
eva tato Both passages refer to the uncovermg of the pprson who undergoes the
consecratlOn-nte (diksa) and who, m imltatlOn of an embryo, IS covered wlth a
cloth representmg the caul WblCh IS removed when the Soma is purchased.
 
16. udyatsu [agmh] mathyah, 'When tbe (first) rays (of
tbe sun) me up (the fire) should be cburned'. MS. 1. 6. 10 (p. 102, 1).
Thence udyat8tt IS repeated at Ap9. 5. 10 8, see Caland's note.
271
§ 61, Ex. 17-22
The Absolute Locatlve
17. tasmad udyati sürye kriyate, 'Therefore it is done when tbe
8un is rising'. K. 37. 1 (p. 85, 6).
The parallel passage TB. 2 7 9. 4 has the temporal Instrumental, udyata sür-
yena kiiryah; see aboye § 40.
18. amuri! va sarva VaCO gachanti, ta udyatz (Schroeder's
emendation for udya1itz) sarVa srJyante, 'AH kinds of speech go
toward yonder sun; when he is risl'ng they are all emitted' MS
3 6. 10 (p. 88, 15).
The idea 'at sunrise' is also expressed by upodaye süryasya,
MS. 4. 2.3 (p. 24, 7); 4 3.4 (p. 43, 11), and so perhaps at K. 6.
5 (p. 54, 5) where the cod Ch reads upodayo saryasya, wbile the
Kap. S. parallel has upodaya and Schroeder emends to the adverb
upodaya'/'n (cf PW. 8. upavyusam, upavyt<$asam, upastamayam) By
  MS 4. 5. 1 (p. 63, 2). By sakam silryeno 'dyata TS. 1.
8.4. 1, 2, TB 1. 6.6. 2; 1. 6. 7.5. By ttdyata saryena, TB. 2. 7.
9 4 (se e aboye § 40). By sakam   K 11. 5 (p. 149, 8);
MS 2. 1. 5 (p. 7, 4); K. 36.10 (p. 77,9), MS.1. 10.16 (p. 155,20).
And by yatah saryasyo 'dayanam, MS 3. 1. 3 (p 4, 14), cf. for this
last phrase Caiand, WZKM. 23, P 73. note 2, and ZDMG. 55,
p 266. Cf. also aboye § 59, Ex 14, Remark.
<-V'l +upa-a>
19. a dhcnavah payasa (RV 5 43. 1) upáyatü¡u
[anvaha], '(He recItes) RV. [) 43 1 while (the Vasativari and
Ekadhana waters) are coming up'. AB. 2. 20. 5.
The Cornmenta ry glosses upayatfsu by tipo yadii catvalasa1llipmh pratyagachantí.
< -V 1, +pra>
20. agmm prayatl yaJiie [vrnidhvam], '(Cho08e ye) Agni whIle
the sacrifice proceeds'. QB. 1. 4. 1. 39.
Thls IS merely a paraphrase of RV. 5. 28. 6 a Jnhota duvasyata 'gnim prayaty
adhvare vmidhvarh havyavahanam.
< -V + prat¿ - (j >
21. tam etat pratyayatyám ratrau sayam upatisthanta, <When
mght was returning, in the evemng, (tbe gods) stepped up to
hlm'. QB. 2. 3. 4. 2.
<-Vi +vi>
22. yad anayor myatol' vág avadat tasmat sarasvati, 'Beca use
272
• Tbe Absolute Locabve. § 61, Ex. 23-27.
when these two (viz. heaven and earth) separated speech spoke,
therefore it belongs to SarasvaU'. TS. 3. 4. 3. 2.
< -y' 1 + - a>
23. tam k§atriya upadhavet senayoh samayatos: tatha me
kuru yatha 'ham imam senam 'tt " , 'If, when two armies
are coming together (for battle), the should approach
blm (= his Purohita) (saying): "Arrange it so for me that 1 may
conquer this army", ... ' AB. 8. 10. 2.
24. sam anya yanty upa yanty anya (RV. 2. 35. 3) it¡
[anvaháJ, '(He recites) RV. 2. 35. 3 when (the Vasatlvarl and
Ekadhana waters) are flowing together'. AB. 2 20.6; KB. 12. 1.
(p. 53, 10).
< -y' rdh>
25. tasmad bráhmano 'nrdhyamane   nama kurVíta, "fhere-
fore a Brahmal).a, If things do not go well with him, should take
another name'. QB. 3. 6. 2. 24.
Atlrdhyamane IS the absolute locallve of the Impersonal tia rdhyate, 'thmgs
do not go well', cf. MS 2. 2 9 (p. 22, 13) jane ma rdhyeta, 'May lt go well with
me among people' (Delbrück, Altmd. Synt. § 2, p. 6, 6) i K 9. 17 (p. 121, 3) asyam
me ¡anatiJ.yam rdhyeta, 'M ay It go well W1th me in thls community', PB. 6 10
12-13 jane ma rdhyeta, .•. , janatiJ.yítm eva 'sma rdhyate, K. 34. 17 (p. 48, 9),
GB 2 2. 10 (p. 176, 2 whICh should be emended so as to agree with K) 1dhyate
!I(1Jaman(Jya rdhyute praJaya rdhyatl' rdhyate brahma1le, PB 11. 5. 8
rdhyate 'smai [yaJamanaya] krf/au ya evam veda, TS. 6. 6. 10. 2 ubhabhyam na
rdhyeta, . .. , ubhabhylim rdhyeta
< y' jña >
26. ta rtavo ajanatsv asuran upavartanta, 'The Seasons
went over to the Asuras when the gods dld not approve'. QB.
1. 6. 1. 2.
< -y' jña + sam >
27. brúyaf¡ sauhárdyaya me J
yathá 'ham, 'peyá1n tava putratám, 'With tbe consent
(ofthy sons) mayest tbou, O Bharata-bull, explain to me (= Qunah-
for the sake of friendshlp (and) for good fortune, how 1
may enter thy sonsbip (= become, by adoptlOn, one of thy sons)'.
AB. 7. 17. 7; QQ. 15. 25. (Qloka).
For samJniinanesu the 99. parallel reads sam)auanel!U and the above trami'
latlOn follows tlns readmg, AB sarhJñánane'!'U is either a 'grammatical monster'
O el t el, The Syutal( oC Cases 18
273
§ 61, Ex. 28-30
The Absolute Locatlve.'
like other forms by Aufrecht, AB., p. 431, 11-19, or a false readmg. Auf-
recht (AB., p. 387, 5) proposes an emendation to samjnanam e8U, of which Keith
approves; he renders I he verse· 'Bid these agree I For fnendship and prosperity
to me I That 1 may, O Bull oC the Bbaratas, become thy son'. My translation
takes as absolute Iocative with· the omission oC the noun puiresu.
The text oC AB., the Commentary, and the varo lect of CC. agree in readmg
brüylU, but the readmg of gg. bruyiih is required by the sense (Aufrecht, AB.,
p 387,.5). '
Aufrecht's readmg sauhi'irdyaya for sauhardyaya (so Haug; Blb\. Ind.; PW ;
and CC.) appenrs to be a mere misprm1.
< -y. tap + a >
The noun or sürye) is always wanting
28. na   prachadayeta (also and prasravayeta),
'When (the sun) ahines he shonld not cover himself [he should
not spit out; he should not urinate]'. QB. 14. 1. 1. 33.
29. ya [apa{!,] atapati ... , '(Such water) as rains down
whlle (the sun) shines ... '. QB. 5. 3. 4. 13.
30. ya atapati , "(Such water) as rains down while
,(the sun) shines .. .'. MS 4.4. 1 (p. 50, 13).
As the text stands yal¡, [apah] would have to be construed as accusa\)ve depend-
mg on the Impersonal var8ati· 'What water it rams'. But varsati should very
prohably be emended to varsantJ as <;8. 5. 3 4 13 (above Ex. 29) reans
Tbe only mstances of an accusabve wilh the Impersonal are the
oC time rtum or rtün, 'at, or during, the season{s)', TS.5 1. 5.2 (et.
AItmd. Synt, p. 170, 26), 5. 3. 1. 3; 5. 3 10 l. K. 19. 5 (p. 5, 7). 20.
10 (p. 30, 5-6); 28 2 (p. 154, 18) and the accusative oC Ílme tam sermam, 'dur-
mg that year', K 22. 12 (p. 68, 2).
Elsewhere accusatives depend on the personal varsat, only; thus the cognate
accusabve Drsttm· MS 2. 4. 8 (p. 4&, 2) tam [vrst1m 1 süryo, va/·satt;
ii<;ñkh. Ar. 7 3 (Kelth's ed. oC Alt. Ar p. 307, 15) mahamegho (var leet. 'pa-
he'imegha) varsutt (varo lec!. varsantt); the cognate aceusatlve suvrstam:
TS 1. 6. 10 5 ya/ha vai par)anyalt suvrstarn varsatl, TB. 3 11. 10. 3 yatha vai
parjanyah suvrstam vrstv/J pra)abhyah sal"tJ/Jn kamant sampürayati; the quasi-
cognate, accusauve ('Accusattv des Inhalts', Delbrück, Altind. Syn1. § 116, P 1(9)
I(I·iyah: <;B. 12.4. 1. 11 p"lyo voí parjernyo vursatt. 'PaTJanya rains down blesslJIgs'.
274
At MS 2. 5 4 (p 52, 2) yad dhy asuu varsat, tad asyam p/
the pronouDs yat and tat are temporal adverbs 'When yonder (sky) rams
then he (= the sacrIllcer) stands firmly on thIS (earth)', cf. CS 8 2 3.8
tusmad yada varsaty atha paraval¡, praMlsthantt, 'ThereCore when lt rains
then eatUe stand firmly (= prosper through abundanee oC rood)'.
At MS. 4. 6. 3 (p. 80, 15) tato ye stok/J av/Jpadyanta tatr tdam rarsatt
'The drops WhlCh fell down from there (j. e from the eye of PraJápatl)
The Absolute Locative. § 61, Ex. 30 A-l).
1"th them It raIDS here (= they are the rain·drops here)', idam IS local
adverb, slmllarly at <;:8. 2. 6. 3 7 esa 1>cJ idam sarvam prapyayayatl yaa
ldam kim ca varsat1, 'He causes aH thls to swell up (= grow luxurwntly)
whenever It rains bere', yat kim ca IS temporal advclb = 'whenever', and
idam IS local adverb = 'here'.
An impersonal varsati with a dependent accusatIve, e g. *stakiin varMti, '[t
rams ram-drops', does not occur, such an idea 15 expressed by the personally
construed V V1 s; <;:8. 12. 3 2. 5 '/favant1 svedayanllni távanta ete stok4 tar-
'As many sweat-pores as there are, so many dlOpS ram down'; 08 3 8.
2.22 ta ete stoka varsanti. Cf BV 5 3 dwo varsantivrótayah, AV. 4. J'i. 4
sarga varsasya val'sato prthwim anu, 'Let gushes 01 rammg ram rain
along (= al! over) tbe eartb'.
r Additions from the AraJ;lyakas and Upanil;lads.
30A. atapatt grhnati, 'He takes ram water (which fallst·
when (the sun) shines' TA 1. 24 1.
30 B. tasmad esa atapaty pavatf, 'Therefore thIS (wmd).
blows hotter when (the sun) shines'. JUB. 3. 32, 7.
< y' tap + upa >
30 e etad dlta tad vldvan brahmana uvaca mahtdasa alta¡ eyu,
upatapatt ... , 'Now the Brahmana Mahldasa Altareya, knowlll):';
this, sald when illness befell hun .. ' JUB. 4. 2. 11.
< yltrp >
30 D.. . 1ti pránas trpyatt I prane trpyatl,
trpyaty adttyas trpyaty, adztye trpyatt dyaus trpyah, dWI trpyantyam
yat kim ca dyaur; ca ' dltya r; ca 'dh1tlQthatas tat trpyatl. . 11. . ltí
vyánas trpyatt I vyilne trpyati r;rotram trpyatl, r;rotre trpyati candra-
más trpyatt. candramasi trpyati dlr;as trpyamz, yat
kirn ca diQa{) ca candramaQ ca ' dhztl#hanti tat trpyatz . . . 1I •.  
apanas trpyat't I apane trpyati vak trpyati, VaCl trpyantyam agms
trpyaty, agnau trpyatt prthivi trpyatt, prthwyarh trpyantyarh yat kl1'1t
ca Prthiv'f, ca 'gniQ ca ' tat trpyaü ... 1I • • . itz samanas
trpyati I samane trpyatt manas trpyatl, manasi trpyati parjanyas
trpyati, parjanye trpyati v/dyut trpyatl, VZdYUtl trpyantyarn yat kirh
ca vldyuc ca parjanyafl ca tat frpyati ... /l. 'tty
udanas trpyati / udane trpyati vayus trpyati, vayau trpyaty
trpyaty, akaQe yat kim ca vayuQ ca 'karaQ ca
tat ... , '. . thus the PraJ;la [the Vyana; the Apana; the
Samanaj the Udána] is satIsfied; the Pra:r;ta [the Vyana; the
18*
27&
§ 61, Ex. 31-3:i!B The Absolute Locattve.
Apana; the Samiina; the Udana] being satisfied, sight [hearing;
speecb; mind; the wind] is satisfied; sight [bearing, speech,
mind, the wind] being satisfied tbe sun [the moon, Agni, Par-
janya; space] is satisfied; ihe sun [tbe moon, Agni; Parjanya;
space] being satisfied, heaven [the quarters, the earth; lightning]
is satisfied i heaven [the quarters the eartb; lightnmg] belllg
satisfied, everything over which heaven and the sun [tbe quarters
and the moon; tbe earth aod Agni; lightning and ParJanya; wind
and space] rule is satisfied'. Chand. Up. 5. 19. 2; 20.2; 21 2;
22.2; 23 2.
Contrast the final clause In each of these sectlOns whele mstead the loca-
tlve absolute tasmms trplIati the nominal phrase taaya 'nu trptiri¡ trpyah pra-
;allti et,·., 'In consequence of its satisfacl10n (= because lt 15 5ahsfied) he (= the
sacnlicer) ]s satJslied with offsprmg' etc. ]5 used
The paralJel passage Qáñkh. Ar. 10. 2-8 (p 317-31ELm-KeJth's ed. of Al!. Ar.)
CODJUDct partJclples throughout. J
< v' dyut + vi>
31. tasmad evamvzd vate vatí vidyotamane stanayaty avaspharJaty
adhiyitai 'va, 'Therefore one knowing thus should study when the
wind blows, when it lightens, when it thunders, when it rumbles
in the distance'. QB 11. 5. 6. 9.
Contrast, Immedlately precedlllg, the temporal yad-clause: tasya "ti etasya
brahmayaJnasya catvaro vasatkard yail varo edtt yad vld!fotate yat stanayati yail
avasphürJati, 'Of this Brahman·sacrifice there are four Vasat·caIl5, VIZ. when the
wmd blows, when ¡t hghtens, when it thunders, (and) when It rumbles In the
dlstanee'.
32. vidyotamane stanayaty atho   'When it lightens, when
it thunders, then it rains'. GB. 1. 3. 19 (p 89, 14).
For atha ef. above § 7, b, and below § 65, a
r Additions from the Aral}.yakas and Upanieads.
32 A. ya evam vidvan meghe vldyotamane stanayaty ava-
spharjati pavamane váyav amauasyayam svadhyayam adhite tapa eva
tat tapyate, 'He who, knowing thus, engages upon study in the
Dight of the new moon when a cloud raíns, when it lightens,
when it thunders, when it rumbles in the distance, when the
wind blows. he thus undergoes penance'. TA. 2. 14(
<vpa>
32 B. = Ex. 32 A. (TA. 2. 14). J
276
The Absolute Locative. §61, Ex 33-il7B.
< y' man + anu >
33. tayor anumanyamanayofi" 'Wbile tbese two approve'. QB.
1. 9. 1. 8.
This merely paraphrases tayar in the formulá tayor avidy agnir ¡dam
havir a)usata, TS. 2. 6 9. 6, etc
< y' 1 va 'blow' >
34 = Ex. 31 (QB 11. 5 6 9).
r Addition from the Araz.¡yakas and Upani§ads.
< y' 1lrt>
34A. masi-masy amavasyayarh vrtta.1/am (so the Calcutta ed.;
the ed omita the participle) candramasam
upatistheta, 'Every montb, when the mgbt of the
new moon has come round, one should worshíp the moon as ít
appears in the west'. Kau¡;;. Up. 2. 8. J
< >
35. tasmad var§aty apravrto vrajet, 'Therefore when it rains he
should go about uncovered'. QB. 7. 5. 2. 41.
36. amuto vai divo var$ati 'hau '$adhayo vanaspatayafi, prajayante,
'When it rains from yonder sky herbs (and) trees grow here'.
QB. 12. 4. 1. 7.
Contrast the temporal yad-clauses 98. 8 2. 3 8 tasmad yada varsaty atha
pa{:ava[¡ pratitisthanti, 'Therefore when lt rains then cattIe have a firm standmg
(= prosper wJth abundant food)', and MS. 2 5 4 (p. 52, 2) yad dhy asau val sati
tad asyam [yaJamanah] 'For when yonder (sky) rams then this
(sacrIficer) stands firrnly upon thlS (earth)'.
37. tasmad agniczd na dhavet, 'Therefore one who has
pIJed the fire-altar should not run when it rains'. TS. 5. 4 9. 2.
Cf. below Ex 37 B.
r Additions from the Araz.¡yakas and Upanl¡;;ads.
37 A. = Ex. 32 A (TA., 2. 14).
37 B. varsati na dhavet, 'He should not run when lt rains.'
TA 1. 26. 6.
er aboye Ex 37. J
The PW. s. varQ, col. 7!:l6, 33 registers an absolute locative
  TS. 2. 4. 10. 1", but this is an error; the form does not
277
-§ 61, Ex 38-45 A The Absolute Loeatl'l'e
occur In the passage quoted nar has It been notad elsewhere In
the BrahmaI}.a prose
< -V 2 (:'i 'líe' >
38. tayok (:ayanayor a(¡Vam yaiamano 'blnmethatt, 'WhIle these
two (VIZ. the borse and the queen) are lying (there) the sacrificar
addresses tbe horse'. QB. 13 5. 2 a.
Tayoh may posslbly be a partluve gellltlve' 'Of these· two (VIZ
the horse and the queen) he addresses the horse', ef. abo ve § 50, Ex 29.
< -V (:ru +- upa >
39. tvam süktavag asy upar;rnvatyor anayor dyavaprthwyok, 'Thou
art hymn-speaking whIle these two, viz. beaven and earth, are
listening'. QB. 1. 9. 1. 4.
This IS merely a paraphrase of the Mantra agne tvam sü"ktavag asy uparrutf
(MS upar;ruU, TS, TB. (TS., TB. dlVah) prthivyoh, TS 2 6 9 5,
TB 3. 5 10 1, MS 4 13 9 (p. 211, 14); vB. 1. 9 1. 4, AQ 1 9 1, VV 1. 14 2, 3
< -V stan >
40. = Ex 31 (QB. 11. 5. 6 9).
41. = Ex 32 (GB. 1. 3 19)
r AdditlOns from the AraQyakas and Upanieads.
41A = Ex 32A (TA.2. 14). J
< V stha>
42 purastat prat'icyam Juhuyat, 'He should offer
(tbe oblation) in front (of tbe Agnidb-priest's place) wbile (tbe cow)
stands facing tbe west'. TS 7. 1. 6. 7.
43. [soma m] 'WhIle (the Soma-cart) stands
facIng the east they put (the Soma) on (the cart)' AB. 1. 14. 6
< -V stha + ud >
44. carum mrvapet senayam utt¿¡;!hantyam, 'He should
offer a pap to IndraI;ll whlle the army is lining up (for battle)'.
MS. 2.2 5 (p. 19, 6).
The parallel passage K 10. 10 (p 136,8) has, the past partiClple, cf above
§ 59, Ex 198
< -V sphurJ + ava >
45. = Ex. 31 (QB. 11 5. 6. 9).
r Addition from the Aranyakas and  
45A. = Ex 32A (TA 2.14) J
278
The Absolute Locatlve § 62, Ex 1-7
§ 62. 1. '1' h e Ver bis T r a. n s i ti v e.
< -y' 2 af 'eat' >
l. yo anafnatsu pürvo   . .. ; yo deve¡w anaf{natsu
pürvo 'fwEyat .. , 'If anyone should eat first while (other) men
[wbile the gods] are not (yet) eating ... ' QB. 1. 1. 1. 8; 2. 1. 4. 2.,
r Addition from the AraQ.yakas and Upani$ads.
1 A yo va'/; mahaf{ane 'naf{naty afnalt ... , 'If one eats wbIle tbe
Voracious One (= Agni) is not eating .. ' JUB 2. 15 1. J

2. devaf ca   ca samyatta asan, so 'gnu mjayam upayatsu
iredha tanvo mnyadhatta: trt'iyam apsu trtiyam
ad¿tye trt'iyam, 'The gods and the Asuras were engaged in combat;
as they were enterlllg upon tbe decisive contest Agni deposited
the bodles in three places: one third in the cattle, the (Becond)
thud in the waters, (and) the (laBt) third in yonder sun'. K. 8.
8 (p. 92, 3).
Conlra,t the conJunct partlclples at TS 1. 5 1 1 dev(lsurlih samyattli llsan, te
deva Vl)ayam upayanto 'gnau vamalh vasu samnyadadhata, K 8. 15 (p. 99, 5)
devac ca va ca samyatta. ¿hafÍs, te devll vz)ayam upayanto 'flnau priyas
tan vas samnyadadhata (Schroeder's emendahon for sa vyadadhata and tanviim-
manyedadhata) , MS. 1 7 2 (p 110, 16) deva asurazr v,)ayam upayanto 'gnaú
priyas tanvah samnyadadhata, 4.4.9 (p. 61, 2) deva asurazr vz)ayam upayanto
'rvtnoh püsani satyam nyadadhata
< -y'kr >
3 yajñamukhe-yajñamukhe vai yajñam jighañs-
anti, 'As each beginnmg of the sacrifice is being made the Rak$-
ases are fain to harm the sacrifice'_ TS. 5. 1. 3.4; 5. 2. 7.5.
4. kande-kanr}e vai knyamilne yaJñam 'As
each part (of the sacrifice) is being performed tbe are
fain to injure the sacrifice'. TS. 6.). 7.3; 6.1. 8. 3, 6.2.10. lo
5. , nam [agnim] krzyamat;le samardhayatt, 'As
each part (of the sacrifice) is being performed he strengthens thlS
(Agni)'. TS. 6. 3. 5. 4.
6 anrte khaltt vai kriyamane varunO grhntit'¡" 'When a sin lB
being committed VarUQ.a seizes (the evil-doer)'. TB. 1. 7. 2. 6.
7 paryagnau jUhotl, 'He offers (the oblation) while
279
§ 62, Ex. 8-9. The Absolute Locative.
the (ceremony of) carrying round the fire lS being performed'.
TS. 3. 4. 3 5.
The same idea lS expressed by tbe compound   at AB. 2.
5 2, see below Ex. 9
The opposIte Idea expressed by tbe adverb aparyagnikrtam at QE. 12.!l 3.
9, see above § 27, Ex. 1.
8. catusstanarh patrarh bhavati, cattlsro dtgbhya eva vrst¿rh
sampracyavayati, yam prathammh stanam anup:1dyate tasya 'bhy
etad (so Schroeder's tentative emendation of bhyo, Kap. S.
difO bhyotad) apl patre krtyamane varsati, 'The vessel has
four teats; there are four quarters; he causes the rall1 to move
forward from (a11) quarters, what teat he steps up to, from that
quarter (i. e. from the quarter corresponding to that teat) it rains;
e"\'en whlle the vessel is being made it rain s' . K. 30 4 (p. 186, 4).
For K. catu8stana parallel to QB 6 5.2 18, M8. 3. 1. 7 (p. 9, 4) catustana ef.
Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 1, p.342, § 287, b.
For the sympathetJc magic ef. T8 2 4 9. 1-2 al!tau I juhott, catasro val
catasro   digbhya eva vrstun sampracllavayati, cHe offers elght(offermgs);
there are four quarters (and) tour mtermedJate quarters, he causes the ram lo
move forward from the quarlers'.
Inslead of di90 'bhy the readmg dteo 'dhy· might be suggested, ef. K. 11. 8
(p. 154, 15) yathiidevatam evat 'n(lm digbhyo 'dhi sam¡;, ayati; GB. 1 4. 3 (p. 94,
4) parjanyad adhi vlsttr Jayate; and cf. the confuslOn of adht and abht m the
Mantras: •
adhi RV. 10. 13 3 abh, AV 18. 3. 40
adhi V8. 32. 10; AV. 2. 1. 5 abht TA. 10. 1 4 = Mahan Up.2 5
adhiAV 7.81,KauQ 421 abhlT8 1.2.3 3,31.1.4;AB 113.
2, KB 7 ID, etc
adhi PG. 3. 3 5 abhi AV 8 9 15, T8.4 3 11. 4; M8.
2. 13 10 (p. 161, 6); K 39 10 (p 126,
12)
adhtti¡;thatt K 31:'1. 12 (p. 113. j 3); MQ. abhlttsthatt TA 6 5 2, APIt 16. 6 4
6 1. 2
also the confuslOn of bh and dh in the Mantra
aVlksodhiiya K 31. 14 (p. 16, 16) av,ksobhaya TE. 3.7.6. 7, ApQ 4 6. 3;
cf MS. 2. 5. 3 (p. 51, 3)
At TE. 2. 2 7. 3 IS misread m the Ribl. Ind. ed. for TB. 2. 2. 11.
5
< v' kr with paryagni >
9. trcam agneyarh gayatram anvaha paryagntkrlyamane, 'While
the (ceremony ol) carrying round the fire is being performed he
280
The Absolute Locative.
§ 62, Ex 10.
recites a triplet sacred to Agni (and) composed in tbe Gayatri-
metre'. AB.2 5 2.
el. above Ex. 7 wlth the Remark.
< y kr wItb hUi::>
10. samno htñkrzyamana etam yarh dm¡;yat tam manasa
mrbadheta, " ; etam u eva diffarh yarh dvisyat tarh
manas a 'pastabhnuyat, 'Wbile tbe Hin-sound of tbe Saman is being
uttered be sbould witb hIS mind crowd him wbom he may bate
from (?) thIS quarter; .. ; while the Pratihara is being sung he
should with hIS mmd exclude him whom he may hate from tbis
same quarter   JB. 1. 325 (Caland, Auswabl, p. 124).
Caland renders' 'Wahrend der Hm-Iaut eines Samans gemacht wnd, soll er
1m Gelste ¡,einen Femd aus der Hlmmelsgegend, in welcher dleser SiCh befindet,
hmausdrangen, .. , wahrend der Pratih¡¡;ra gemacht WIrd, sol! er 1m Gel'ite
semem Femue Jene Hlmmelsgegend verschhe.een'.
Instead of the accusative eüllh dtram wlth nirblidheta an ablative would be
expected, cf K. 19. 11 (p. 12, 15); 20. 5 (p 23,5) tebhya [devalokebhyah] eva bhra-
tn'ya1i¡ nirbt.ldhate, MS. 3. 2 1 (p 14,8-9) tatr [nirba.dhath) asuran ebhyo loke-
bhyo nirabt.ldhanta;. ., tad ftatr eva nirbadhair yaJamano bhratnyam ebhyo
lokebhyo nirbadhate; QB. 3. 1 2 21 Jarayai garbham nirabiidhit. Caland asmmes
'a bmd of attraction', hut It IS bard to account foro
Tbere IS a similar dlfficulty about tbe constructlOn of apastabhnuyat wIth two
aceusatJves. Tbe f stabh + apa does not appear to occur elsewbere as fimte
verb; for V slabh + ava the PW. col. 1251, 9 No. 3 glves the meaning 'ver-
  for wluch It Cltes R. 3. 56. 7 rathamargam avastabhya, but even If
apastabhnuyat IS taken as a synonym of avastabhnuyat, the accusatIve yam dM-
syat tam IS anomalous; a datlve of disadvantage ('he bars this quarter agamst
h¡m whom he may hate)', 01 an ablative ('he bars thls quarter from blm
whom be may hate') would be expected.
For the excluslOn of one's enemy from the quarters er. TS fi 2. 7 5 dlgbhya
{va tad yaJamano bhratl'vyan pranudate, and the YaJuses TS. 1. 6. 1. 6 (cf 1. 7.
(j 2) ¡dan¡ aham amum bhratrvyam abhyo 'syat dtvo. . nirbhaJamt; OO.
4. 12. 10 fdam aham abhyo dlgbhyo 'syai divo . .. dVtsantam bhratrvyam ntrbha·
}amz; and cf. further TS 5. 2 5 6, K. 20. 4, (p. 21, 17); MS.3 2. 5 (p 22, 5).
It IS not elear WhiCh quarter eUim refers too It may refer to the quarter
",here the sacrificer stands, or, perhaps beUer, as Caland understands lt, to 'the
quarter In WhlCh the enemy happens to be'; cr. for the latter TS. 5. 2. 5. 6 yatra
sa [bhratlcyahl syat tasyat lostan¡ aharet, 'He should take a clod of earth
trom that quarter where hls (rIval) may (happen to) be'; K. 20. 4 (p. 21. 17) yam
Janatam dvisyat tasya dfra ¡¡harel.
The two verbs mrbadheta arrd apastabhnuyat are chosen to account lor tbe
terms nirblldha and apastambha WhlLh forro the theme of the chapter WhiCh is
281
§ 62, Ex. 11-17. !'he Absolule Loeati.e.
headed· atha   Ntrbiidha occurs at MS. 3.   1, K. 19. 11,
TS. 5. 1 10 4 where the ntrbiidhlih are the knobs of the gold plate (hlranyam
rukmam) by means ot whlch the gods worsled the Asuras: TS. nirbadhatr vai
devii asuriin nirbtldhe 'kurvata¡. .í bhratrvylJn eva nirbiidhe kurute.
The PW. renders V kr wüh 1urbadhe by 'm die Ecke schleben, be-
seltJgen'; pw. by 'wegzlehen, beseltlgen'; Kallh by 'reduce to stralts'.
Apastambha is noted In PW and pw as an anatomlcal term only, cein luft-t.
fuhrendes GeflifJ an den Seiten der Brust'. rts meaDmg here IS obscure.
<-V kr + 3am>
11. antayor vava samskriyamanayor madhya1h samskrtyate, <While
the two ends are being fashIOned the middle lS fashioned'. QB.
7. 1 2 23.
The case form is amblguous, d. above § 54, Ex 1
< -V gr
h
>
12. devata vai sarva grahe grhyamane, <They address
a Qastra to all the dlVinities whIle the cup is bemg drawn' MS.
4. 8. 7 (p. 115, 4).
< v' Jña + nlS >
13. mbhraja ahuttm Juhuyad anirjñayamana adttye yo 'nupayuktah
syad, avir ebhyo bhavatz, <If one be unfit he should offer an ob-
lation to (Adltya) the Shininig One, while the sun is not dis-
cernible; he (Aditya) become¡¡ visible to them'. KB 18.5 (p. 80, 21).
The exact meanmg of anupayulcta nol clear
For ebhyah one woula expect tasmal, or Juhuyuh . ye 'nupayuktáf¡, syuh
for juhuy(jd .• yo 'nupayuktah syiit.
< V jñii + sam, Causative>
14. sa1hjñapyamana [parau] ahut'ir Juhott, <He offers the oblations
while (the vlctim) lS being qUIeted (= slaughtered)'. QB. 13. 2. 8. 2.
<-vtan>
15. etasyam [ahutyam] tayamanayam arvam mktvo 'danayanti,
<While this (oblation) lS being performed they lead up the horse
after cleaoslllg it'. QB. 13.4.2. 1.
16. tasyal prayajef)u tayamanef)u brahmano v'íl}agathí . .. tisraf¡, ...
gatha gayatz, 'While the fore-offerings of this (Ii¡lti) are being per-
formed, a BrahmaJ;ta who is a lute-player three stanzas'.
QB. 13. 4. 2. 8; 11; 14
< -V da + a>
17. ekasminn eva paf(av adiyamane 'priyam bhavati k,m u bahuf)u,
'It is an unpleasant (experience) if even a single animal be taken
282
The Absolute LocatJve. § 62, Ex. 18-24.
away; how much more so if many {be taken away)'. QB. 14.4.
2. 22 (= BAU. 1. 4 22 Madby. = 10 KaJ}.va).
< 1/ duh:::>
18. mmrukte sl1'1'ye vag yantavya 'tho duhyamanayam, 'When the
sun has set speech should be restrained, and also while (the cow)
is being milked'. MS. 1. 8. 4 (p. 119, 11).
< -V + pratl >
19.   yad apo adr(:ram ayatzr (RV. 10. 30 13) lb pratidr(:Ya-,
manasu [anvaha], '(He recItes) RV 10 30. 13 wiJile (the VasatIvari
and Ekadhana waters) are bemg beheld (= gazed at by the Botr-
pnest)'. AB 2. 20. 4. '
'fhe parallel passage KB. 12 1 (above § 60, Ex. 55) has pratlkhyiitasu for pra-
t¡drwamanasu
<-Vdha + a>
20. rathantararn (2 brhad) abhzgayati (2 abhzgayata) garhapatya
(2 ahavan'iya) adhiyarnane, 'He smgs the Rathantara-Saman [the
Brhat-Saman] while the Garhapatya [the Ahavaniya] fire lS beiug
put down'. TB. 1. 1. 8. 1; 2.
For the change of VOlee m abhtgayatz, abhtgayate ef. GB 1. 4- 13 ntrm"ttyet,
mrmntyeran, above § 60, Ex 156 with lhe Remark
< -V dlta -T-- pan :::>
2 L. yunajm¿ tva brahmana dawyene (TS. 1. 6. 2. 1)   partdhz$u
vadet (K. vadatz), 'He should reCIte [he recites]
TS. 1. 6. 2. 1 whIle the kindhng sticks are being laid around'.
MS 1. 4 5 (p. 63, 1); K 31. 15 (p. 17, 18).
< -V dhr, causative:::>
22 sa va (in the second instance tasmad) upary-upa1'y eva pro-
dharyamanasv atha sphyam udyachatl, 'He [Therefore he]
takes up the (wooden) sword while the sprinklmg water lS held
above'. QE. 1. 2. 5. 20 (bIS).
For atha ef above § 7, b, and below § 65, a.
23. sa yad dharyamane 'gna(v) vyagharayatz ... , 'Now
the reason why he pours ghee on the high altar whl1e the fire
IS bemg held (over it) is .. .' QE. 3. 5. 1. 23, 3. 5. 2. 9.
< -V ni:>
24. tam ha kumarmn santa m niyamanasu '
283
§ 62, Ex. 25-31.
Tbe Absolute LocatIve
'Rim, being a boy, faith entered as the gift-cows were being led
up'. TB. 3. 11. 8. 1.
Kath. up 1. 2 repeats sentence.
25. atha yam kr'ite rajanz subrahmanyam yam etam
daksznast' n"iyamanasa 'tkare subrahmanyam ahvayati sai
've 'yam, JB. 2. 80 (JAOS. 18, p. 36), see above § 60, Ex. 50.
26. n'iyamanasu: pracy ehi pracy eh;¡; 'h prac'i
vetv ajyasya svahe 'h sruveno 'pahatya 'havan'iye juhuyat, 'While
the gift-cows are being led up he should make an offermg in the
Ahavanlya fire, touching It with the Sruva-spoon (and reciting
the formulas) .. ' TB. 3. 11. 9. 8
< y' ni + a>
27 sa aniyamana [gharme]
bemg poured ID he says .. :
aha . . , 'While (the Gharma) is
QB. 14. 3. 1. 30.
r Addition from the AraI}.yakas and
27 A. a!(vmaf¿ payasy '(The Gharma) belongs to tha-
A
y
vm'5 whIle the milk is being poured ID'. TA. 5 11. 4 J
< y' nI + ttd >
28. unn'iyamana eva yantavya (read so with Caland, ZDMG 72,
p. 7, for yantavyas, and supply vak), '(Speech) should be restrained
whIle (the AgDlhotra) lS being poured out'. MS. 1. 8. 4 (p. 119, 11).
29. vacam yached agmhotra unn'iyamane, 'He should restram
speech while theAgmhotra is being poured out'. K. 6. 7 (p. 56, 14).
30. unniyamane stheyam, '(The sacrificer) should stand up while
(the Agnihotra) lS bemg poured out'. MS. l. 8. 7 (p. 126, 4).
<vni + pra>
31. pranitasu pran'iyamanasu vacam yachaty á havi$krta udvadanad,
etad vaz yaJñasya dvararh, tad etad a!(ünyarh karot'i,   ca
á 'uuyaJanam prasavad etad dha val, (GB. prasavad ity etad val,
wIth the varo lect. prasavad dy etad dha Val) yaji'tasya dvzt'iyarh
dvaram, tad evaz 'tad afünyam karotz, 'He restrams speech while
the Pra:r;üta water is being brought forward until the utterance
of the that namely is one door of the sacrifice,
that he thereby makes practICable; and (he should restrain speech
also) after the Svietakrt-oblatlOn has been offered until the be-
ginning of tbe after-offerings; tbat namely is tbe second door of
28-1,
The Absolute Locahve § 62, Ex. 32-36
the sacrifice, tbat be thereby makes practICable'. KB. 6. 13
(p. 27, 1); GB.2 1. 1. (p. 143, 7).
Contrast wIlh the absolute locatlve svtsfakrtt the parataclical constructlOnq
5. 2. 2. 1, 5. 3. 3 10, 5. 4. 4. 1 tasyti 'nista eva sVl'Jtakrd bhavaty athii ' smd
annam sambharati (5. 3 3. 10 athai 'ta¡r hamrbhth pracamti, 5.4 4 1 athit
'ama asandim aharanti), 'The SVli¡ltakrt·oblalIon of thls (offermg) has not (yet)
been offered (= before the SVIstakrt-offermg has been offered), tben be brmgs
food for him [then he proceeds wIth tbese oblations, then they bring the throne
for himl'
32. trcam agneyam (14 trcam saumyam) gayatram anvaha sorne
rajani prattiyamane, 'He recites a triplet sacred to Agni [sacred
to Soma] (and) composed in tbe   while Kmg Soma
is being brought forward'. AB. l. 30. 7; 14.
33. tasmad upañfu vaca carztavyarn sorne rajanz krite, gandharve¡;u
h'l, tarhi vag bhavat'l" sa 'gnav eva praniyamane puna,r agachatl,
<Tberefore, wben King Soma bas been bougbt, one should proceed
with low voice, for tben Speech is among the Gandharvas, sbe
returns again while tbe fire is bemg brought forward'. AB. 1. 27. 4
34. so, [vale] va dad upavasathe' gnau prattiyamana agachat, 'She
(= Speech) returned on the eve of the sacrifice while the fire was
being brought forward'. KB. 9. 1 (p. 41, 10)
35. so 'gnau praniyamane 'fve 'nvarabdham (so Blbl. Ind. and
Gaastra, the mss. read 'nvarabdhe, 'nvarabdha, and 'nvaradhvam)
brahma yajamanam vacayatt ... , 'Whlle the fire lS bemg brought
forward the Brahman-priest makes the sacrIficer, who has taken
hola of the horse, say _ . .' GB. 1 2. 18 (p. 52, 13).
FOl the active force of anvárabdha cf PW s rabh + anu - á, col 269, 13,
and above § 60, Ex 121-125.
¡pr the locallve dependent on V rabh + anu - a cf TS. 2 6 2. 5, TB
1. r. 3, 2, 8 brahmann eva ksatram árambhayati, 'He causes the nobIlity to take
holtl of (= follow after, be dependent on) the prlesthood', ToS. 2.4. 2 2, 4 ta
[devatah) mdra [4 YUJamana) atmann anusamarambhayata (4 anusamárambhayate),
<Indra [tbe sacnficer) caused [causes) these (divIDlties) to take hold of (= to be
subserVlent to) hlmse]f'.
< -y' m + sam - ava >
36. upa no devir upa hotrtyam (RV. 1 83. 2) ztt hotrcamase
samavaniyamanasv anvaha ekadhanasu, 'WhIle the Va-
satIvart and the Ekadhana waters are being poured, together lllto
the vessel of the Hotr-priest he reCItes RV. 1. 83 2'. AB. 2. 20. 9.
285
§ h2, Ex 3í-44 The Absolute Locatlvl'.
< v' pac>
37. tasmin pacamane [agmlt] vyadasyat, 'While he was cooking
(the fire) went out'. K 10. 6 (p. 130, 13).
< v' pad + pra >
38. [sorne] prapadyamane: tam asya raja varunas tam
(RV. 1. 156. 4) 'ti vrajam ca sakhivañ aporrmta (RV.
1. 156. 4) ity abhirüpam [rcam] prap'adyamanaya 'nvaha, 'Wbüe
this (Soma) is made to come forward (l. e. to enter by the eastern
door) he recites for him as be lS made to come forward tbe ap-
propriate (verse) RV. 1. 156. 4'. KB 9. 6 (p. 43, 22).
39. ca praga adthr bhavas'i (RV. 8. 48. 2) 'ti prapadyamane
'nvaha, 'Whlle (tbe Soma) lS made to come forward he recites RV:.
8 48.2'. AB. 1. 30. 20.
< v' brü + anu >
40. sarva ha 'smm [yajamane] devafalt prataranuvakam anubruvati
pramodante, 'When thlS (sacrificer) recItes the morning litany aIl
the divimties reJoice'. AB. 2. 16. 2.
Keith, collstrumg the lo<.atIve conJunctly, renders' 'Al! the delties delight m
lum begmmng the mornmg l1tany'. ef. below § 63, Ex 3, Remark, In fine.
< v' bhuj>
41 apa Mage bh!J,jyamane na   'Altbough so great
a share lS consumed the waters are not exhausted'. QB 3.9.3. '27.
For the conceSSlve force see below § 64.
< y' bhr>
42. yad ukhye bhriyamane 'yam devah praJa abhimanyeta ... ; yad
ukhye bhnyamane kamayeta ..• ; yad ukhye bhnyamane " ,
'H, whl1e (the fire) in the pan is carried this god should bave
designs on the creatures ... [he should wish ... j anytbing shQuld
be 108t .. ]' K 22. 12 (p 67, 16 and 18; p. 68, 1 and 3).
< v' math>
43. trcam agneyam gayatram anvaha 'gnau mathyamane, 'While
tbe :fire is being churned he recites a trlplet sacred to Agni (and)
composfd in tbe Gayatri-metre'. AB. 1. 16. 7.
<vyaJ>
44. adhvamkalpam prattmrvaped bhratrvye yaJamane,
'WhIle his rivalls sacrl:ficmg he should offer agamst (bim) an Il?ti
equivalent to a Soma-sacrifice' TS 2. 2. 9. 4.
286
The Absolute LocatIve. § 62, Ex. 45-51.
For adhvaralralpa lis!,] cf MS. 2. 1. 7 (p 9, 8) clted by pw Nachtrage 4, p.291,
col. 3, and K 10 1 (p 125,22).
45. yaJíiature yaJamane brahmana Janah 1 •. vzbhaj(Lnte
sma dakslnah 11, 'When Yajfl.atura was sacnficing the Brah-
man-prlest foIk divlded the gift-cows amongst tbemselves' QB.
13. 5. 4 15 Qloka
46 satrasa;heyaJamane' QVamedhena taurvar,;ah 1 udirate trayastnnr,;alJ,
sahasranz varmznam 11, 'When Satrasaha lS sacrificing with the
Ayvamedha-sacrifice Taurvaya horses come forth, the thirty-three-
foId (Sto m as), (and) slX-thousand mail-clad men'. QB. 13. 5 4.
10. Qloka.
CI. Eggehng'., note.
47. satrasahe yajamane pañcale raJm susraJl 1 amadyad mdrah
somena /1, 'When Satrasaha, the garland-crowned king of the Pañ-
calas was sacnficing Indra revelled in Soma'. QB. 13.5.4. 18. Qloka.
48. fvetan vazrocano hayan 1 prastin mfcrtya
prayachad yaJamane purohzte 1 J, 'Eighty-eigbt thousand white steeds,
side-horses, Vairocana gave away,loosmg them, when (his) Puro-
hita was sacrificing' AB 8. 22 5. QIoka
< -V yam + ud>
48 A ud u devah savzta hlranyaye (RV. 6 71. 1) 'ty ud-
yamyamana udyatavatim abhirupam 'When (the pot) 18
being lifted up he recites the appropriate (verse) RV. 6 71. 7,
which contains (the verb) "to lift up" '. KB. 8,. 7 (p. 38, 13).
< -V labh + a>
49. devanam vaz manaiiSl gachaü pafa(v) alabhyamane,
'When the victim lS bemg taken (for slaughter) he approache8
the minds of a11 the gods'. MS. 3. 10. 2 (p. 132, 10).
Conlrast the yatra-clause at KB. 10 6 (p. 48, 18) yatra alabhyate tad
vanaspat,r acyutah, 'When the vicbm 1S bemg taken (for slaughter) then the
forest·lord (= tree) 1S un moved'.
< -V vac + anu >
50 tasrnad etasv anücyamanasu yam tam
avabadheta. 'Therefore, while these (kmdlmg verses)
are being recited, be may crush bim wbom be may hate wlth
his two great-toes', QB. 1 3 5. 7.
51. anucyamanasu   kavlT asaaayantt, 'WbI..!e
287
§ 62, Ex. 52-59. The Absolute Locabve
tbe kindling verses are being recited they deposit tbe offerlllg'.
MS. 3. 8. 7 (p. 104, 8).
52. dar;alwtaram samidheni$v anücyamanaslt vyacflkt:ate, 'While
the kindling verses are being recited they explam the Da<;ahotr-
section'. K. 9. 14 (p. 116,22).
53. tam [carum J anucyamane par;cat udaharantz, 'Whlle
tbe Anuvakya-verse lS bemg recited they draw this (pap) froill
the rear forward'. K. 10. 11 (p 169,2)
< yvad +sam>
54:
1
tad dltaz 'va samvadrcmilnet:v anyataram [apsarasam] abkipede,
'While they were conversing about thlS, he approached one (of
the Apsarases)'. JB. 3. 234 (Caland, Auswabl, p 278).
< yvah + pra>
55. trcam saumyalit gayatram anvaha some rajant prohyama1Je,
'He recites a trlplet sacred to Soma (and) composed in the Ga-
yatrI-metre, while kmg Soma 18 being carried forward'. AB.1. 13.6.
< V 2 vr 'choo8e' + pra >
56. tat pmvare pravaryamane brayat ... , 'Whlle the hst of
ancestors is caused to be chosen, be sbould say .. .' MS. 1 4.
11 (p. 60, 6).
57 tat pravaram pravnu'ine brüyat ... , 'When one chooses the
list of ancestors he should say .. ' K. 31. 15 (p. 18, 5).
58. tasmat pravare pravnyamane viicayet. " 'Therefore when
the l1st of ancestors is being chosen, he should make (the sacrI-
ficer) say ... ' GB. 1. 5 21 (p. 134, 4)
58 B. SayaI,la in his IntroductIon to the RV. (p. 9, 23) cites the
following passage from an unidentified BrahmaI,la: pravare p1 a-
vnyamarte brayad devilk pitara  
cr. Ap\!. 4. 9. 6 devah pltal ah ... evii 'snn sa samyuJa tti hOtl pl'aval'e 'dhvaI'!fu-
pi ca pravTlyamane.
Tbe varíatlOn of tbe four texts (Ex. 56-58A) in the fOIro of the partlclple 15
noteworthy' the MS. uses the paSSlve of the cau5attve (WhlCh does not appear to
occur elsewhere in the older hterature), K. has lhe mlddle present [for the cognate
accusatJve pravaram wlth f Vl --r pra (J. AB. 7. 25. 4 pravaratit prav1'nlran];
and GB. and the Brlihmana passage quoted by Sayana the passlve (WhlCh m the
older literalure is found agam al ApQ 4. 9. b)
<yvrj+pra>
59. tasmzn pravr;yamane patnl Qlra!¡ prornute, 'While thlS (pot)
288
The Absolute Locahve § 62, Ex. 60-66.
is being pnt 00 (the fire), the wife (of tbe sacrificer) covers ber
head' QB 14. 1 3. 16
< -V '!Jr
t
+ pra >
60. tasmat pravartyamanayor   hota 'nvaha.
'Therefore, while (the two oblation-bearers) are being turned for-
ward, the Hotr-priest recites. ' MS. 3. 8. 7 (p. 104, 9).
< 1"vraJ >
60 A. nake suparnam tipa yat patantam (RV. 10 123. 6) dl vra-
jatsn patantam dy abhirüpam abhlt:tllutl, 'As they move he recites
the appropriate (verse) RV 10 123. 6, (m which occurs tbe word)
"the fiying one'" KB. 8. 7 (p. 38, 15)
< -V vraj + pm >
60 B. pral 'tI( bmhmanuspatzl" (RV. 1. 40. 3) itz pravrajatsu p1a-
vatl1h brahmana.9patyanz abhl1üpam abhzt:tautt, 'As they move forward
he recites tIle appropriate (verse) RV 1. 40 3, addressed to Brah-
maIfaspatl (and) containing (the word) "forward" '. KB. 8 7
(p. 38, 14).
.
61 yasya' süryo na 'vir bhavatz. " 'If in the
case of a (sacrificer) the sun be not visible while the Ac;lvina-Qastra
is being recited ' TS. 2. 1 10. 3.
62. yasya 'fVtne fasyamane saryo no 'diyat (in tbe second in-
stance 'deti). .. 'If in tbe case of a (sacrificer) the sun should
not [does not] rise while the is being recited ... '
MS. 2.5. 11 (p. 63, 13 and 15).
63. etad va zndmsye 'ndriya1i! yat sajaniyam [süktam], etasnHn
Va?, fasyamana tndram indrzyam 'This (hymn, viz. RV. 2.
12) containing (the words): "sá janasa [índralt]" is (identical wltb)
lndra's vigour; while tbis (hymn) is being recited vigour enters
lndra' AB. 5.2. 2.
64. fez f,asyamanayam avanayati, 'While a verse
sacred to the AH Gods lS being recited, he pours (the cup) out'.
TS 6.5.2.3.
65. vayavyayám [rci]   pat1'ani vt1nuñcati, 'While
(a verse) saered to Vayu 18 bemg recited he releases the vessels'.
MS. 4. 6. 2 (p. 79, 4).
66. paridhan'iyayam r;asyamanayam aranayatl, 'While the con-
Oertel, The Syntax of 19
289
§ 62, Ex. 67-73.
The Absolute Locative
cluding (verse) is bemg reCJted, he poms (the cup) out'. MS. 4.
6. 6 (p. 87, 3).
67. tarh [graham] 'vanayatt, 'He pours this (cup) out
while the Qastra is bemg recited'. QB. 4 2 4. 7.
68. tad dha tatha (GB. ed. Gaastra  
ajagama, 'Now GauQla carne when the Qastra was bemg recited
thus'. AB. 6.30 8; GB. 2. 6.9 (p '257, 2).
69. yañ [avanayet] yuvanal], pramiyeran, 'If he were
to pour it out whIle the Qastra lS bewg reCIted. the youth would
perish'. MS. 4. 6. 6 (p. 88, 15).
r Addition from the AraT.lyakas and
69 A. sa [brahma] yad dha so in stayamane va va
vüvadyamana aSIta .. , 'If this Brahman-priest were tú sit loudly
talking while the Stotras are being chanted or while the Qastras
are bemg recited .. .' JUB. 3. 16. 3. J
< V :2 r;am, causative>
I
70. 9amyamane¡m caksur 'When the victims
are brmg quieted (= slaughtered) they take away (their) sight'.
GB. 1. 2. 21 (p. 58, 10).
On the strength of passage and of Valt. 10 18 the causatJve !passlve
fiimyate should be lIsted as pre·EpIC lO WhJtney's Roots ctc. p. 171.
< V sad, causative >
71. e 'ma agman revatir jwadhanya (RV. 10. 30. 14) iti sadya-
1nanaSV anvaha vasaUvariQv ekadhanasu ca, 'He recItes (the verse)
RV 10. 30. 14 while the Vasatlvari and the Ekadhana waters are
bemg set down'. AB. 2. 20. 26.
< -y' stu >
72. arbhavapavamane stüyamana audumbarya dak$ína pravrto
mpadyate, 'While the Arbhapavamana is being chanted, having
put on (a new garment) he lies down to the right of the Udum·
bara-branch'. PB. 17. 12. Ó.
73. pavamane stayamane hotaram mrtyuh pratyallyata, 'While
the Pavamana was belDg chanted Death clung to the Hotr-priest'.
KB. ló. 5 (p. 68, 10).
cr. AB. 3. 14 1 agnir vai devanafl¡ hota 'sIt, tam ml'tyzU' ·sidat.
290
74. tam
'vanayet
while (the
'fhe Absolute Locative.
[graham] na stüyamane 'vanayet.
. 'He should not'" [If he were to]
Pavamana) is bemg chanted '
§ 62. Ex. 74-81.
. , yat stüyarnane
pour out this (cup)
QB. 4. 2. 4. 6.
75. yat stuyarnane 'vanayed garbhal] prapaclukah syuh, 'If he
were to pour out (the cup) whiIe (the Pavamana) is being chanted
the foetuses would be prematureIy born'. MS. 4. 6. 6 (p 88, 14)
r Additions from the Aral).yakas and Upani¡;;ads.
7bA. = 69A. (JUB. 3. 16.3).
75 B. tad stüyamttne manaso 'dgrht¡iyat, 'While the
Bahi
9
pavamana is being chanted he should draw (the cup) with
the mind (= silently) JUB. 1. 5. 6 J
< v' stu + pra >
76. [rathanf,are] prastuyamane sammilet, 'Whlle the
Prastava of the Rathantara-Saman is being sung he may close
h1S eyes'. PB 7. 7. 15
Cf abo ve § 60, Ex. 192-1<l4, I'ilthantal'e pl'astute.
<v'han>
77. sorne hanyamane yaJíio hanyate yajíle yajamanalt, 'When the
Soma is being slain the sacrlfice 1S slain, when the sacrifice (is
slain) the sacrificer (IS slain)'. TS. 6 6. 9. 2.
< v'h1¿>
78. juhvaty agm.hotram upaklpto ',"ha bhavatt, 'Whlle he offers
the AgnihoÚa the pot has bee'n prepared'. QB. 1. 7. 1. 10.
79. atha saya1h huyamanasu rajanyo   tzsrah ...
gatha gayatt, 'Then. in the evening, while the Dhrti-oblations are
being offered, a Rájanya lute-pIayer sings three stanzas'. QB.
13.4. 3. 5.
80. agne harya tad vaca (RV. 1. 144 7) tty ahut-
yam hüyamanayam anvaha, 'WhIle the oblatlOn is bemg offered
he recites RV. 1. 144. 7'. AB. 1. 30.
< V hr -+- abhi - ava>
81. tad yad eva 'sya 'tra kamal1tim vyavachzdyate 'gnav apo
'bhyavahriyamane .. 'What (part) of hIS desires is cut off there
when the fire 18 being thrown into the water .. ' QB. 6. 8. 2. 11.
19*
291
§ 62, Ex 82-8
4
, § 6'3, Ex 1 Tbe Absolute Loealive
< v' hr + ti >
82. vapayám va, tihnyamantiyarn agner medho 'pa7cramati, 'When
the omentum is bemg fetched Agni's sacnficial essence departs'.
TS. 3. 1. 5, 2.
<-v'hr+ud>
83 vamadevyam ablngayata ttddhnyamane, 'He smgs the Vama-
devya-Saman whIle (the fire) lS lifted out'. TB. 1 1 8 2
TblS passage IS ci.ted at ApQ :) 14 4
<v'hr +pra>
84 sa me satya{lr devan gamyad lMS. 1. 4. 1, p. 47, 13) 1tt
prastare prahnyametne vadet, 'WhIle the Prastara-bunch is being
thrown (into the fire) he should say (the formula) MS. 1 4. 1:-
MS. 1. 4. 5 (p. 53, 8).
Ro. vi te muñcam'/. ra{:anu1l1 v'/. rarm'in (MS 1. 4. 1, p. 48, 2) 1t1
vadet, 'While the enclosing stICks are
being thrown (into the fire) he sbould say (tha formula) MS 1
4. 1'. MS. 1. 4 5 (p. 53, 12).
86 chandobhu' 'va agmr uttaraved'/.m abh'/.pmhnyate, ya agnau
prahnyamane 'nvahus tus (Iead so for Schroeder's tam) tarht manasa
dhyayet, 'With the metres the fire is thrown on the hlgh-altar;
what (verses) they recite while the fire is being tbrown 011 (the
altar), these he should then meditate on with his mind' MS. 3
2. {) (p. 22, 15).
< y' 7Ir -1- pruti >
87. pratdw ra eva pratihr'/.yamüne vag tty udgata brüyat, 'Wlllle
the PratIhara is being sung the Udgatr-priest should say: "Speech"'.
JB. 1 140
88. pratlhriyamana etám t¿ eva yarh tam manasa
'pastabhnuyett, .lB. 1. 325 (Caland, Auswahl, p. 124) see aboye
§ ti2, Ex. 10.
< v' 7wá (hü) + npa >
89. asmetsv indra mdnyam dadhatv (TS 1. 6. 3. 2)   ' {ltiyam
upahuyarnanayath vadet, 'While the Iq.a is bemg invoked he should
say (the formula) TS. 1 6. 3. 2'. MS 1. 4. 5 (p. 53, 2).
§ 63. C. The Accompanying Participle is a Futura Participle.
1 yatha rreyasy avasatheno   'páS'lta ...
'As if, when a superior is about (= intends) to come, one would
292
The Ahsolute Locative
bonour (bim) by putting the house In order
3 9.2.7.
Cf. the Remalk to Ex 3.
§ 63, Ex 2 -3.
QB. 2. 3. 1. 8;
2. praJapatau vai svayam hotan prataranuvakam anuvak$yaty
ubhaye deviiSurá yajñam ttpavasann. asmabhyam antwalc$yaty asma-
bhyam ztz, 'When PraJapati himself as Hotr-priest was going to
recite the morning litany, both gods and Asuras were waiting at
the sacrifice (thinking): "For us he ís going to reclte (it), for us".'
AB. 2. 15.4.
Cf the Remark to Ex. 3.
3. PI ajapatau vaz svayam hotart prtdaranuvakam anuvak$yati
sarvü devatü müm abht pratlpat5yatz müm abh¡, 'tz, 'When
PraJapati himself as Hotr-priest was gomg to recite the morning
1Itany a11 the divimtlE'S were In hopeo "Toward me he wlll turn,
toward me".' AB. 2. 16 1.
Of these three passages (§ 63, Ex 1-3) the 11Ist (913 3 1. 8 = 3 9 2 7)
shows a clear absolute locatlve.
At AH 2 16. 1 (Ex 3) Delbruck (Altmd Synt. p .389, 11-12, § 216) prefers
to construe the 10catIve praJapatau .. as conJunct case dependent
on the fimte verb ii(ia1Ísanta, 'They put thelr hope in PraJa.patI who (= as he)
was about to reCIte', ano lt 18 true that such a COJlstruction would be grammati.
(,¡lIy unexceptlOnable, cf vi   + a wlth the locatlve of the person at 9B 1.
b 4. 17 (ter), 8 'J. 2. 1., K 2i 1 (p 169, 8); MS 1. 5. 11 (p 79, 14), alld wlth riiJye
t'B 19 1. 2, 21. 5 2, K. U. 3 (bIS, ¡i 182, q and 10).
Hut m the other AB. passage (AE. 2. 15 4" Ex 3) the 10catIve cannot be con·
"trued wJth the finite verb upiivasun.
The passage TS. 1 6. 7 3 upa chvo dewtti vasanti
Ija evam vidvan agnim upastr IltiU, 'The dlvnlltIes dwell m ¡11m who IS
gomg to sacnfice on the next day, who, knowlllg thus, bestrews the fire·
aliar', cannot, of COUlse, be compared
YaJñam 1tptívasan bere cleaIly means 'They with the sacrlfice, dld
not leave le, cf. TS. 6 4. 2. 1 1fCtJíiam eva 'rabhya grhUúO 'pavasati and 2
eva 'I'abhya grhUvo 'pavGsati, 'TakIllg bold of (and) selzIllg the sacnfice [the cattle],
he stays wllh (= do es not leave) lt [them)' The followIllg direct dlscourse as-
mabhyam anuvaksyaty asmabhyam elahoratE's the Idea ot expectation WhlCh IS
latent III the V vas Tupa, cf. TB 1 6 b 4 evii 'dyo 'pavasiima' kasya va
he 'dam kasya va ((t'o bhavtte 'te, 'We, bClIIg sated, wIlI Walt to·day (lo see) whose
1t will be now or whose to-morl'ow'.
As the tIVO passages trolll AB, VIl AB. 2. 15 4 (Ex. 2) and AB. 2. 16. 1 (Ex. 3),
are closely parallel, and as the absolute use of the future particlple IS made
certam by 9B. 2 3. 1 8 = 3 9 2 7 (Ex 1) there can be but httle doubt that
praJapatan .. anuvahyatJ m AB :i! 16 1 (Ex. 3) should be construed as absolute
293
§ 63, Ex. 3.
The Locativ-e
10catIve, cf. also the immedlately Collowmg ab50lute pre5ent partlclpIe
m AB. 2. 16. 2 sarvii hii 'smm [ya} ama ne] devatah pri'itaramwalcarn allubruvatl
pramodante (see ahove, § 62, Ex 40)
Kellh renders AB. 2 lb. 2 by 'AH the deIlles dehght m him begmnmg
the mornmg hlany', constl umg apparently asm1ll ... anubruvatl conJuncUy
wIlh the fimte verh pramodante. Bul there is no example quotahle froro
lhe Briihmana plOse m whICh V mud or V mud + pra is construed Wllh
the locatlVe of the thmg enJoyed, hu( thls IS expressed by the msl1 umental,
thus, 9. 4, 1 7 osadhlbhfr h'i 'dUln sarvaln modate. 'Everythmg here
dehghts m pIants', [contrast V mud with saha and the instrumental m
lhe 'tB 14 7. 1 14 (= BAU 4.3. 14 Miidhy = 13 Kanva)  
saha modamiinal¡ 'ElIJoying hlmself wiili womell']. 3. 3. 4 18 tair eWI
'nUlh p1'amumoday1satl, 'He deslres to make hlm enJoy these'; the syno-
nymous V nand hkewIse takes the lIIstrumental , thus, KB. 27 1 (p. 129, 18)
nandatl ha vat yaJílo vtdusli 'gachatii, 'The sacrilice reJoices al a knowlOg
one when he .• pproaches (= at the approach of ¡t 1nowmg one)' [cf aboye,
§ 39, b]; AB 1. 13 8 sarvo ha vii etena [some1la] krlyamiillena nandatl,
'Everyone reJoice!> at tlllS (Soma) when It IS bemg purchased (= at the
purchase oC Soma),' whlch glosses RV. 10 71. 10 sárve nandanti ya-
¡;ásá 'gatena [cf ahoye, § 39, al. GB. 1 1. 1 Ip 1,6) tena [snehena] 'nandat,
'(The Brahman) reJolced at thls (sweat)', GR. I 1. 2 (p 2, 1) tiibhlr [Ste-
dadhal'iibhfh] anandat, '(The Brahman) reJolced dt these (sweal.drops)' ,
f?B 1. 6 2 ye ya}ñasya vy¡ ddhena na nandanti nandant¡ yat samrddhena,
'Who do nol reJOlce at the fallure of lhe sacllfice, (but) reJOlce at (its)
success'; $8. 1 6. 3 yo 'ham ya)11asya vylddhena nandütm nandltm2 yat
samlddhena, '1 who am grattfied at the falIure of the sacrlfice, grattfied
(also) at (lis) success'.
Both LieblCh (Bezzenberger's Beltrdge, 11, p 299): 'AIs PraJiipalI selbst als
Opferpriesler ¡m BegrifIe stand, das FI ühgebet zu rezItleren, hoftlen alle Gótter ')
and Keith ('When PraJiipah hlmseIf as Hotr was about to recIte the morlllllg
lItany, all the deltles expected ') cOllslI ue praJltpatau . at AB
2 16. 1 (Ex. 3) as absolute case
Contrast wJth the absolute locatll'es 10 Ex. 2 and 3 the conjunct conslructlOu
9B 1 1. 2 18 sarta ha vai devata han! grah'isyantam upatisthante
mama mima grahIsyati, mama niima gralllsyatt 'tl, 'All the dlvinilIe5 (expectantly)
stand near the Adhvaryu-prIí'st as he 15 about to take the oblatlOn, (thmking)
"My name he wlli take, my name he \VIII take".'
Delbruck, Altmd. Synt. § 152, P 235, 15, notes only active forms of the future
oC V pad. It IS true that these are m the maJonty; AB 2. 16 1 pratipatsyatt
and pratipatsyiiml; 4 7 7 apatsyati; Ait. Ar. 2. 1. 4 (p. 103, 11 Keith) patsyati,
K. 29. 1 (p. 168, 3) avapatsyantl; and the dabve of the active future partlCiple
nipatsyate 10 the Ya,¡us TS 7 1. 19 3, KA4(v l. 10 (p. 154,5) But the middle
future 15 read at Chiind Up 5. 11 3 p'ratipatsye; 6 14.2 sampatsye, 't9 6. 12.
12 prapatsyamuniih
294
'fhe Ab501ute LocatIve § 64
§ 64.
The Meamng of the Absolute Locative.
While the absolute locatlVe is thus seen to be fullyestablished
in the Brahma:J;lu prose its use lS almost wholly confined to the
of telllporal relations.
Very rarely a concessive Idea IS suggested by the general cqn-
text of the passage, as at QB. 3. 9. 3. 27 (above § 62, Ex 41)
where the absolute locatIve bhage blwJyamane may be
Ifendered by 'although so great a share is bemg consumed', und
at JUB 3. 31 9 (above § 61, Ex. lOA) ha
satsu which muy be translated by 'although these (= we) belong
to the famIly'. Stmilarly a con ces si ve rendering is possible at
QB. 1. 6 4. 14   parvasmmn anne, 'although ,the old food lS
not (yet) exhausted' (§ 59, Ex. 69); QB. 1. 8. 1. 39 asalllstTlíte yairie
'although the sacrifice lS not (yet) completed' (§ 59, Ex. 216), QB.
2. 2. 4. 15 amayam gavt satyam, 'although the cow is raw' (§ 61,
Ex. 1 and § 57, Ex. 4), KB 24 1 (p. 108, 9) madhuchandasa eva
praz1ge satí, 'although tIlis is Just tbe Madhuchanoasa Praüga'
(§ 61, Ex. 7); QB 7 5. 2. 41; TS. 5. 4. 9. 2; TA. 1. 26. 6
'although It rams' (§ 61, Ex 35, 37; 37 A); QB. 1. 1. 1. cl = 2. 1
4. 2 anafIWts1t, ana(:natsu, 'although (other) men
[the gods] do not eat'; JUB 2. 15. 1 maha(:ane 'nal}natl, 'although
the Voracious One does not eat' (§ 62, Ex. 1; 1 A)
A causal meaning may be read mto a few absolute locatives;
thus TS. 6. 4. 11. 2 vilcy apakrantayam, 'because speech had de-
parted' (§ 59, Ex. 60); QB. 7. 1. 2.9 utkrante utkrante virye,
S1'ute 'nne, 'because breath [vigour] had departed, because food
had flown away' (§ 59, Ex. 61); QB. 7 1. 2. 1 = 7. 4. 2. 11 tas-
mtnn utkrante, 'because thls (breath) had departed' (§ 59. Ex. 63);
QB. 14.9. 2. 7 (= BAD. 6. 2. 7 M. = 6. 1. 7 K.); Chand. Dp. 5. 1.
7; QA. 9 2, Ait. Al'. 2. 1. 4 yasminn utkrante, 'because of whose
departure' (§ 59, Ex. 66; 66 A; 66 B); Ait. Ar. 2. 1. 4 yasmin pra-
panne, 'because of whose entrance' (§ 59, Ex. 106A); K 7. 10
(p 61, 21) ratryam bhütayam, 'because night had fallen' (§ 59,
Ex. 108); TS. 6. 3. 2. 6 sve va(:e bhüte, 'because his pleasure is
paramount' (§ 59, Ex. 110); GB. 2. 6. 6 (p. 251, 3 and 6)
eva sati yajñe, 'because this sacrifice is nn Agni$toma' (§ 61, Ex. 8
295
§ 64-b5. The Absolute Locahve.
and 9), 1\18. -l. 5 9 (p. 77, 4) abhunrtayam asyam, 'because this
(earth) has been affected by death (§ 57, Ex. 20).
'l'he absolute locative thus appears to haye developed out of,
and in close parallelism to, the simple locative of time (Delbrúck,
Altind. Synt. § 76, p. 116-117). Compare, e. g., QB. 12. 4. 1. 10
tam [gam] tasyam ahntyam brahmanaya dadyat, 'At this oblahon
he should give this (cow) to a Brahmána', wIth JB. 1. 58 1 (JA08.
23, p. 340) tam [gam] tasyam eva ' hutan hntaya1h bt'ahmanaya
dadatt, 'They give this (cow) to a BrahmaI).a when thIS oblatlOll
has been offered' (literally: 'at this oblation when it has been
offered')j QB. 1. 8. 1 7 tatalj, samvatsare sambabhuva, 'Thence
after (the expiratlOu of) a year a woman carne into being', with
QB. 13. 4.4. 1 samvatsare paryavcte 'When a year has passed
by (literally: 'after [the explration of) ayear when it has passed
by') the consecration (takes place)'; TS. 5. 6. 5 1 dvitiye sariwatsara
agneyam nirvapet, . . trUye samvatsare 'bhijzta yajeta,
'After (the expiration of) the second year he should offer (a cake}
on eight potsherds sacred to Agm, after (the expiratlOn of) the
thml year he should sacrIfice wIth the Abhljlt-offering', wIth K.
22 3 (p. 58, 22 and 59, 1) d'lJltiyc samvatsare paryeta agncyam
kapalam nirvapet, .. , trt'í:ye samvatsa1·c paryete   yajeta,
'When the second year has passed [literally: 'after tbe second
year when It has passed'] he should offer (a cake) on eight pot-
sherds sacred to Agni; when the thud year has passed [literalIy.
'after the third year when It has passed'] he should sacrIfice wIth
the Abhijit-offermg'; RB 3. 4 (p 10, 16) vasante va sarvam
samidhyatc, 'In the sprmg aH thl8 18 kllldled' wlth KB. 4. 13 (p. 17,
10) ntha vasanta agatc ... venuyavün nddhartava aha, 'Now when
8prmg has arrived (literaHy: 'm the spring wbell it has arrived')
he.orders tbe bamboo-seed to be collected'; QA 4. 8; RUB. 2 8
panrnamasyam con the nigbt of tbe fuH moon', with amavasyayam
vrttayam 'tbe mght of tbe new moon baving come' [lIterally: con
the mght of the new moon when it bas come'] (§ 59, Ex. 178 A).
§ 65. The Separation of the Absolute Locative from the Rest
of the Sentence.
The independence of the absolute locative is sometimes emphasiz·
ed by the fact tbat it is separated froro the rest of the sentence by
296
The Absolute Locatlve !lul>, Ex 1-2.
(a) atha; thus OS. 1. 2. 5 20 bis (above, § 62, Ex. 22); OB. 1.
6.4. 14 (above, § 59, Ex. 69); QB. 1. 8. 2. 7 (above, § 60, Ex. 107);
OB. 1 9. 2 26 = .t. 4. 4, 3 (above) § 60, Ex. 108) j QB. 7. 3. 1.
2 and 3 (above, § 60, Ex 62); OS. 11. 2 4 10 (above, § 59, Ex.
212); OS. 12. 4.3 1 (above, § 60, Ex. 212); QB. 12.9. 1. 12-17
  § 61, Ex 5); TE. 1. 2. 5. 1 (above, § 60, Ex 4); TS. 1. 6.
9. 8 (above, § 61, Ex. 6); GB. 1. 3. 19 (abo ve § 61, Ex. 32)
(b) atra, OB. 4. 2. 2. 8 and 1 (abo ve § 60, Ex. 68 and (9).
(e) tad anu, OB. 13. 5 3. 1-3 (above § 60, Ex. 224)
aboye § 7,b.
and (d) by the resumptive (e)tasmzn ka le, RE. 2. 9 (bIS, aboye
§ 60, Ex. 20 and 204); RS. 27. 4 (above § 59, Ex. 204).
See <lhove § 7, b, and § 'J6.
* 66.
Tha Subjact of the Absoluta Locativa
1. The subjeet of the absolute locatIve lS frequently omItted,
(a) when It may be easily supplied from the eontext;
(b) 1Il tbe case of verbs WhICh are used absolutely i. e where
the subJect lS implied in the verb, thus (§ 61, Ex 35-37);
vidyotamane (§ 61, Ex. 31-32); stanayatt (§ 61, Ex. 31-32); ava-
sphürjatt (§ 61, Ex. 31); (§ 59, Ex. 174); anrdhyamane
(§ 61, Ex 25); upadrute (§ 59, Ex. 104); anü,,"te (§ 59, Ex. 1(5);
anttcyamane (§ 62, Ex'. 53); pratihrte (§ 59, Ex. 250), pratlhnyama1,Ze
(§ 6:?, Ex. 88); 1mikrte (§ 60, Ex. 24); hitiknyamane (§ 62, Ex 10);
(§ 60, Ex. 25-34); (§ 60. Ex. 35-38); Vtjzte
(§ 6'), Ex 71-73, see the Remark to Ex. 73); faste (§ 60, Ex. 141);
r;asyamt1ne (§ 61, Ex. 67-(9); prastute (§ 60, Ex. 197),
f'or 1\18 1. 8. 6 (p 124-, 2) sthtte see below § 68, Ex. 4.
(e) by abbreviatlOn m eertain standmg phrases; thus (an)udlte
(§i)9, Ex 19-51); (§59, Ex 165-174), (a)samsthlte
(§ 69, Ex. 224-236); astamtte (§ 60, Ex. 9-20); alld so always
prasute (§ 60, Ex. 160-164) and atapatt (§ 61, Ex. 28-30 B).
2. In the phrases rathantare andbrhati prastute (§60, Ex. 192-194)
aud rathantare prastüyamane (§ 62, Ex. 76), 'When the Prastava
of the Rathantara [of the Brhat] Saman has been sung' and 'lS
bemg SUllg', the pregnant eonstruetion of " stu + pra tto sing the
Prastava' with the name of the Saman whose Prastava lS sung
is noteworthy.
297
§ 66, Ex. 3, § 67. The Absolute Locah ve.
3. The subjeet of the absolute locative almost always differs
from that of the main verbo
Identity of the subjeet of the finite verb and the subjeet of
the absolute locative is found once at QB 5. 1. 3. 2 (bis) tad etad
(in the second instance tasmád etad) anatzratre satí rütre ruparil
kriyaie, 'Thus [Therefore], while it}s not an over-night rite. it is
(yet) performed in the manner of a night rite'.
A second example would be AB. 7. 9.7 jwe; see the dJc;cussion of this
aboye, § 29, Ex. 33
For K. 6 3 (p 52, 5) almte see aboye § 60, Ex. 236 A
4. The subject of the absolute loeative is
(a) a cognate aecusatlve at JB. 1. 140 (§ 62, Ex. 87) and possibly
at, K. 23. 6 (p. 81, 8) yáma ágate, see § 60, Ex. 57,
(b) for TS. 3.4. 10. 3 prayáte vastau, see § 60, Ex. 115,
(e) an aecusative of eontent appears in the phrase samgrame
smilyatlc. see § 60, Ex. 109-113.
§ 67. The Predicate of the Absolute Locative
The predieate of the absolute locative is almost always a
partieiple.
A nominal predieate without aecompanying partieiple is found
at MS., 4 2. 11 (p. 34. 17) pratar evá     gosu hotavyam,
'He should offer the oblatlOn in the morning while the cattle are
(still) in the stable' (see § 60, Ex. 39). The simple adjeetlVe Jwe
at AB. 7. 9. 7 is diseussed aboye § 29, Ex. 33.
r Addition from the Aral)yskas and Upanit¡lads.
At Chand. Up. 8. 9. 1 = 2 the adjectives suvasane, andhe, and
sráme oecur as predicates of the absolute locative along with a
series of partieiples: yathai 'va khalv ayam asmiñ char'lre sádhv-
alamkrte sádhvalamkrto bhavatt suvasane suvasana!t pari-
skrta evam eva 'yam asminn andhe 'ndho Mavatí srame srámah
parivrkne panvrknal], 'Even as this (Self) is beautifully adorned
when this body is beautifully adorned; is beautifully dressed when
(this body) is beautifully dressed; is handsomely fitted up when
(this body) is handsomely fitted up; even so this (Selí) lS blind
when (this body) is blind; lS lame when (this body) is lame; is
maImed when (this body) IS maimed'.
298
Absolute Locatlve § &8, Ex. 1-4
Contrast the yad¡-dauses at Chand. Up. 8. 10. = 3-4 tad yad!J api 'dClIIt
{!ariram alldha,h bhavaty anrtndhah sa bhavat¿ lIadi sramam asriimo nat 'va 'sya
dosena     I na vadhena 'sya hanyate na 'sya sramyena sramah, 'Even though
tllis (Self) be not bhnd when ihls body IS bhnd, be not lame when (thIS body)
is lame, be not maImed through ils (= tbe body's) malmmg, be not barmed
through lts (= the hody's) harmmg; be not lame tbrough lts (= the body's)
lameness J
§ SS. Appendix 1.
Passages which are not to be construed as Locatives Absolute
1 At QB. 11 1 5. 1 tad apaf)avyam syacl apl'ayar;ctttlkrtu, etas-
mad ... , 'That would be injurlOus to the cattle 10 the case of
one who has not performed the expiabon; therefore. " the form
aprayaf)czttzkrta stands for the gemtive aprayaf)cittzkrtal} from the
theme aprayaf)czttzkrt-, not for the locatIve ap1'ayaf)cittlkrte from
the theme aprayaf)cittikrta-; cf. pw. s. p. 82, col. 2, 2.
2. At KB. 26. 3 (p. 121, 3) atha kaf) CtC chastre 'va ' 1UtVaCane va
pramatta upahanyad vicikitsa va syat " 'If one, being mattentive
(= through mattentlon), makes an error (by omittmg a letter) in
'tbe Qastra. or in the recitation, or if there be a doubt . tbe
form pramatta stands for the nominative p't'alllattah; cf. KB 27
1 (p. 129, 19) yadz kar; Clt plamatta upaltanyat .
The V han + upa (PW. 'anstosen, stecken bleihen un Rezlherpn') lefers to
tbe oruission of a letter ID the recllation; cf the Commentary to AB 3. ,F) 3
adhfyann upahanyat wbICh it glosses by upaghiitan¿ Val I!fzlopallt kw·yiit. The
passlve voice IS used ID tbe sense at TS 7.3. 1. I sa yo t'at 'haml
avwakya upahanyate sa h¡:yate,"He IS left (= 10st) who on the tenth day, VlZ.
on tbe AVlviikya·day, makes an error (tbrough tbe omlSSlon of a lelter).
3. At QB. 3. 4. 3 19-20 atha prastare mhmwate ... I tad
ahuh: .. , akte mhnttVira3n anaktMJ itz, 'They make amends on
the Prastara-buncb, .. , now tbey say' " ... : should they make
amends' on tbe anointed or on the unanointed (Prastara-bunch)?",
the simple nominal locative prastare in 19 sbows that akte and
anakte 10 20 should be construed as conjunct cases. See above § 57.
4. At MS. 1. 8 6 (p. 124,2) Schroeder's text reads: tad 'iJantl
sukrto 'mum loka1h te va ete yan nak?atrü!d, yad ahur
jyotw avapadi tara7.á 'vapadi 'h te va ete 'vapadyanta, aptva stlnie
(read sthttas?, see the Remark) ta ldam yathalolvalll sacante yadá
'mutalt pracyavante, 'The pious who have sacrIficed attsm yonder
299
§ 68, Ex.;) The Absolute Locatlve.
world, they are the constellations; when (people) say: "A light
hath fallen down; a star hath fallen down", it is tbey who faU
down; when they move forth away from yonder (sky or \Vorld)
they abide here (each oue) in his proper place. havmg reached
it, standing still'.
The dlffieulty líes m the words I1plva flthite. Delbruek (Altmd. Synt. p.407,
'3'), § 226) translates tbe last c1ause: 'Naehdem sle angekommen sind, so balten
slch bler Jeder an semem Orte auf, wenn sle von dort verschwmdell'; and
he (ompares the expresslOn aptLa sthtte wlth phrases .like apakramya
\\ herE' tbe mam Idea IS expressed by the gerund whlle ti'ithatz plays the part of
.ln auxlhary.
Cf. the sllDllar use of partlclples \Vlth v' sthl1; v' as, v' car, WhItney,
Gr. § 1075, e, Delbruek, Altmu Synt p 391, § PW. stM, no 9,
col 1287,., as, no 4, col. 730; s car, no 3, b, col 953; and of the gerund
wIth v' vas ItB 11 3. 3 1; Delbruck, Altmd. Synt. p. p. 334-335.
'Man kann also', eontinues Delbrück (p. 408), 'aptt'a tÍl¡thati "el steht da,
naehdem er eIlangt hat" kürzer ubelsetzen "er trifft em".' Bul thls explanation
does not lemove the dlfficulty of the locative sthite, mstead 01 which one wouId
expect eJther a fimte form til!thantz; or a conJunct partlcIpIe t¡s!hantas, tasthi-
t-añsah, or stMtas, or a gerund sth¡tva [hut the earhest of thls gerund
are m the Sutras, Itlt. 5. 13. 11, AG. 1 2. 9, cf below, § 73, E'l:. 7 Remarkl.
My translation aboye sthite as 11' it were sth¡tas. Bul as the text
stands, stlllte can only be éonstrued as an impersonalloeallve absolute: 'A standmg
havmg been maue (= they havmg come to a standsbll)' Cf. § 66, 1, b.
5. K. 23 6 (p 81,6) na dilctlztena hotavyam; .. ; yatha vi gaur
udhal; kU1'uta evam esa devebhyo yaj1iarh sambharati yo
(Schroeder's emendation for   yaj Julmyad yajñam vtd1thyat
srevayed yatlto 'padlüta (Geldner's emendation for 'padhite) suta
evam tat, '(The Agmhotl'a) should not be offered by one who
has been consecrated j j as a cow modifies (?) her udder, so
he who is consecrated brmgs together (= prepares) a sacrifice
for the gods; if he were to offer (the Agnihotra) he would drain
the sacrifice by miIkmg (= mIlk the sacrifice dry), he would cause
Jt to miscarry j as when (a cow) gives birth (to a caIf) while she
lB sucked (by another caIf) even so lS this'.
Thls passage IS dlscussed by Geldner m the Wmdlsch Feslschflft, p 175, who
right1y proposes lhe emendatlOu of the locatlve 1tpadh'ite m Sehi-oeder's text,
whkh cannot he eonstrueu, lo ltpadhUa, and correcUy takes süta as equlvalent
lo siUe (cf K 13.4, P 184, 19), not of sittal' as Slmon rloes m hls Kathaka-Index.
It IS not dear lo me what the exact meanmg of V kl + 'Vi wIth üdhah can be.
Geldner render, yatllii, 'Vi gallr üdhah kllrute by 'wle eme Kuh Euter wechselt'.
300
Tbe Absolute Locahve S (¡8, Ex (¡
The vi kl + t'i occurs In the Brlihmana most flequently with le-
ference lo the moulding of lhe seed mIo an arllCulate human bemg, thu.;
wlth retah s1ktam AB. 2.39 1, 5.15.4, KB .. 1 9 (p 14,:!) .30 4 (p. 143,
22); CB I 9 2.10, 3.7.2.8,4 4 2. lb, (, i 2 :); 7 I 1. 17,7.5 :!.35,
'lo 5. 1. 56; JUB 2. 2. 15; wJth retasal, s/kta8ya rüpiillt TS ti (J. (, 2, with
"¡¡piim TS.:! (¡. 10.3; 6. (¡ 6.2, TB I 8 1. 2.2 7.2 1, K. 13 5 (p 185,
20), 2&.7 (p. 131, 2); 28.8 (p 169.!, 18), 32 4 (p. 22, (¡), 3b.3 (p. 71, 11),
3i.3 (p. 86,11),1\18.1. 10.9 (1'.149,12); 3.7 7 (p. 81, 9), 3.9 b (p 123,
18); 4. 7. 4 (p Sí, 14), PB. 20. U. 2, or wlth reference lo mouldlllg and
fashlOnmg mIo a particular shape, 1 hus AB. 2. ::9 4, CB. 3 1 3 4, 6 7
2.5,7,7.11.19.9.2.3.34; 11S 3.2 8 (p. 27, lb), 42.13 (p 36,5),
PB 20. 16. 1, JLJB 1. 21. 6; 4 11. 5; also in lhe ,ense of dlVldmg ,ome-
thmg, thus 1. b. 3 17, 10. G. 5. 3 (= BAU 1 2 3 K;lnva), TB I í
1. 2; PB. 9 2.3; 20 14.5; Jl'B.l 46 2, 1. 58. 8, q
The causatJve form 81"evayati 5hould be added to Whltney, Rools elc , p 200, 10
6 At QB. 11. 5. 3. 12 yutm ta etasmmn eva kale nwate satve
"gnayo 'nugacheyult ... , 'lf at tbat same time, in a place where
there is no wind, all the fires should go out ... ', nwate lS correctly
glossed by the Commentary wIth cler;e; cf. av¡;ra, ajana
'a place without a hero, without aman' at QB. 11. 6. 1. 3 av'ira
itJa bata me 'jana wa putraril hamutt, 'They carry off my son,
alas, as if in a place where thel'e IS no hero, as If in a place
where there is no man' and 4 katham nu tad aVT,ra1l1 katham
aJanarn syad yatra 'ham s1jam, 'How should that place be wJthout
a hero, how without aman where 1 happen to be', whel'e the
Commentary slmllarly glosses arire and ajane by  
and 'a place where there are no witnesses' at
JUB. 3. 7. 6 na 'nupadrste r;udra wa   'Let us 110t
dispute in a place where there are no witnesses, like Qüdras'.
For lhe prIvative 111- In nivltta d. Wackernagel, Altllld. Gr. n, 1, p. 281,
§ 110, b, e Besldes the phonelic change of nis- to ni- under certam condltlOlli,
(Wackelnagel, Altmd. Gr. 1, p. 342, § 287, a and b) the use of ni- In \Vords hke
AV. mmanyu 'one whose wrath has dled down' = 'one \Vho IS without wlalh',
may have contrlbuted to prIvatlve force ot nt· '1'0 lhe instances quoted b)
Wackernagel add RV. nt-SVal am (so dlvided by the Pp., and cf. Oldenberg, Rlg-
veda Noten, n, p.4 to RV.7 1. 7) amI K. 27.9 (p. 149,17) and 28.8 (p. 163,1)
atl'" mVll'yii and amvtryalt ¡nmfiin
At K. 28. 8 (p. 163, 1) Caland and Schroeder emend the ms. readmg
niv'irya and amvlryalt (Wlth lingual 11 after tbe r of the preceding word,
cf. Wackernagel, AIlmd Gr. 1, p 191, § 171, a, and below § 73, Ex. 15
Remark) to 11I1'l'i1'yli and amrvfl'yah, probably because K. elsewhere ("
301
The Absolute LocatI ve
10 7, P 133,17, JI: 12.3, p 164-,21, K 24 G, P 95, lb and 20, K 2\J.2,
p. 170,2) reads nintrya wIthout varJant. Bu! the Kap S. In the parallel
passage to K. 29. 2 (p 170, 2) reads mvlryam.
In classICal SanskrJt ntdhanata 'poverty' (PW) shows the pnvabve m-o
§ 69. A P P e n d i x n.
Paratactical Constructions Seml}ntically Equivalent to an
Absolute Locative
A number of passages in which a paratacti"cal clause lS used
instead of an absolute locative has be en noted aboye § 59, Ex 52;
60, §60, Ex. 16; 62; 102; 155; §62, Ex.3l.
A few additional examples may be noted here: (a) QB. 9 5. 1.
19-21; 23-26 tasya a}¡utam asa (20 tasya ramyor
uktam asa; 21 tasye 'rJo 'pahüta ' sa, 23 tasya ahntany -
üsu¡-; 24 tasya% 'tavat krtam asa yavat pratahsavanam; 25 tasyai
'ttivat krtam lisa yavan madhyandmam; 26 'tavat krtam asa
yavad etasya pafo!;, h-tyate) 'tha (23; 2-1; 25 atha) 'Jagmuft, 'The
Sami¡;;tayajus-oblatlOn of thlS (offering) had not (yet) been ofl'ered
[The Qamyo:Q.-formula of thlS (offering) had not (yet) been pro-
nounced; The Ida of this (offering) had not (yet) been invoked;
The of this (offering) had not (yet) been
offered; As much as the mormng pressing of this (sacrifice) had
.-been performed; As 111uch as the midday pressing of tbis (sacri-
fice) had been performed'; As much of this (sacrifice) had been
performed as is done m the case of tbis animal-sacrifice J, tben
they arrived', < cf. aboye § 60. Ex. 206-209; 218; 219; 230;
235 >
(b) QB. 8.7.4 7, 9. 1. 2 32, 9.2 1. 12, 10.2.1. 8 atra% '?a
sarvo 'gnih samskrtas, tasmm dev(l etad amrtam (9. 2. 1. 12; 10. 2.
1. 8 omit amrtam) 1'upam 1tttamam adadhult, 'The entire tire-altar
was completely bmlt up there, (then) the gods placed this im-
mortality, thelr highest form, on lt'; equivalent to   atra
sarvasminn agnau samskrte deva etad amrtam rilpam uttamam
adadhlt/], < cf. aboye § 57 >
(e) QE. 6. 4. 4. 1 hasta Mavaty atAa par;an abklmantrayate,
'l'his (lamp) is (stIlI) m his hand, then he addresses the victims
wlth a Mantra'.
(d) QB. 6. 3 3. 1 pradipta ete 'gnayo bltavanty atha mrdam acha
302
The Absolute Locahve. 9
69

yanh, 'These fires are blazmg forth (= have been freshly kmdled),
then they approach the lump of clay'.
(e)' QB. 9. 4: 3. ló-16   devata bluwalttyasamavahttaJn sVl#a-
krte / atha1, 'nam 'The dlvIlllties have
been sacrificed to without attending to the Svi¡¡;takrt, then he,
touches this (altar) wIth the formula for the preliminary con-
secratlOn' .
For asamavahztam cf above § 27, Ex 1 Remark
(f) QB. 12. 9. 3. 9 see above § 27, Ex 1-
(g) QB. 13.6. 2. 12-13 tat paryagmkrtalJ pafavo bab7tüvur ltsam-
Jtlaptatt / atha hal 'nam vag abhyuvada, 'Now the fire had been
carried round the vietllus (but) they had uot (yet) beeu quieted
(= slaughtered), iben a VOlce addressed tblS (sacrlficer)', < ef.
above § 60, Ex. 75 >
(h) TS.2. 1 -1,. 7 dyavaprth'/,'/;yam dhenum alabheta Jyogaparuddho,
'nayor hi va eso 'that jyog aparuddho, dyavaprthw'f,
eva svena bhagadheyeno 'padhavatz, te evaz 'nam gamayu-
talJ, 'He who is long in extle should take (for slaughter) a eow
sacred to Heaven and Earth; fol' he is not firmly established in
these two (= for since 01' when he is not firmly estabhshed in
these two), then he lS long in exIle, so he has recourse to Heaven
and Earth with theIr own sharej they (in turo) cause him to
obtam a firm footing'.
(1) TS. 2. 1. 4. 8 vayavyam vatsam alabheta, vayttr va allayor
vatsa, 1,me va etasmai loka VId apafu§ka 'thm Jyog
aparuddho, vayum eva svena bhagadheyeno 'padhavat1" sa eva 'sma
tmañ lokan V'/,f{am pradapayatt, 'He should take (for sJaughter) a
ealf saered to Vayu, for Vayu is the calf of these two (VlZ. Heaven
and Earth)j for these worlds are dried up for h1[u, the peasantry
is dried up for h1m (= for since or when these worlds and the
peasantry yield no sustenance for him), tben he is long in exile;
so he has reeourse to Vayu wlth his own share; he (in turo)
causes these worlds (and) the peasantry to give to hlm'.
(j) TS. 6. 6. 6. 2 vapaya bhavaty vafaya 'tha pat-
n'tVatena '(When) the offering with the omentum has
been accompJi;hed, (but when) the offering wIth the cow has not
303
§ 70 The Absolute Locatlve
(yet) been uccomphshed, then he proceeds wlth (the oblation for
Tva¡;;tf) accompamed by the Wives'.
(k) QB. 1. 2. 1. 21-22 pzñsantllJigtany abh'indhate kapalanl I athal
'ka ajyam nirvapaft, '(While) they are grinding the ground grains
(and while) they are heating the potsherds, sorne one pours out
the butter'.
(1) KB. 12. 2 (p. 53, 21) anaktall pratamnuvaka aSId apraptany
(val'. lect. aprapta) u7cthüny asaits ttin etasmint sarhdhav asura udayan,
«When) the morning litany had been recited, (but when) the Ukthas
had not (yet) been attained,-at tbat juncture the Asuras went
against these (gods)'.
(m) QB. 5. 1. 3. 13; 5. 5.4. 33 athe 'yta (5. 5. 4. 33 omltting
atha) anuyaJll bhavanty avyürJ,he smCav athai   (5. 5. 4. 33 athai
'talr) havirbltilt pracaranti (5. 5. 4. 33 pracarati), 'Now (when) tbe
after-offerings have been made (and when) the two spoons have
not been shifted,-then they proceed [he proceeds] wJth the ob-
lations of these (victIms) [with these oblations]'.
A detailed discussion of the relative frequency of such para-
tacheal dauses compared with the use of the absolute locative
on the one hand and with the use of conjunctional clauses on
tbe other hand (cf. aboye the Remarks to § 59, Ex. 113; § 60,
Ex. 38B, § 61, Ex. 31; 36; § 62, Ex. 49; § 67), belongs to the
chapter 011 connection.
§ 70. Appen dix III
The Use of the Absolute Locative as a Means of Connectlng
Sentences.
As the present work is confined to the use of cases withm the
same sentence the point which Delbruck makes in tbe final para-
graph of his diseussion of the absolute locative (Altind. Synt
§ 216, p. 389, 17) falls, stl'ictly speaking, outside the scope of this
investigatlOn. Delbrilck there calls attention to the part played
by the absolute locative as a means of connecting sentences with
oneanother, e. g. vag devebhyo 'pakramacl yajiiáya  
te llevü viWy apakrilntayam   grahan agrh1Jata, 'Speech, not
submitting to the sacrIfice, departed froID the gods; speeeh having
departed, the gods drew the cups in silenee" TS 6. 4. 11. 2.
304
The Absolute Locative. § 70.
CEin Hauptwert dieser Konstruktion', Delbrück concludes, cbesteht
darín, daO sie geeignet ist, die Erzll,hlung weiter zu fúhren'.
It is true that such use is not rare, cf. PB. 7. 5. 2; QB. 7. 5.
2.44, 7.4.1. 16¡ 6. 1. 2.12; 7.1. 2.1; 7.4.2.11; 10.6.5.6;
GB. 1. 3. 14 (p. 83, 3), 2. 2. 15 (p. 181, 7); QB. 9. 5 1. 19-22;
24-27; PB. 14. 1. 2; QB. 1. 3. 3. 8; PB. 7.5.2; QB. 3.6.3.11-12;
AB. 7. 34. 7-=-8; 8.17.1; QB. 2. 1. 2. 16; AB. 2.31 6; 6.30. 7-8
= GB. 2. 6. 9 (p. 257, 1-2); TS. 6. 6. 9. 2, QB. 1. 7. 1. 10; 1. 6.
1. 2, 11. 1. 6 1.
But considering the whole bulk of absolute locatives it cannot
be said to be excessively frequent.
Nor is this resumptive concatenation of sentences confined to
the absolute locative. Other cases are utilized for the same pur-
pose. Thus AB. 6. 4. 1 deva wi yajnam atanvata, fans fanvanan
asura abhyayan, 'The gods performed the sacrifice, against them,
while they were performing it, the Asuras came forth' j JB. 1. 42
(JAOS. 15, p. 234) sa ha tatama, sa ha pararh lokam jagama,
cHe famted, he, havmg fainted, went to the other world'; TS. 6.
1. 6. 6 gandharva avadann agayan devah, sa [vak] devan gayata
upavartata, 'The Gandharvas pronounced (a spell), the gods sang;
to the gods, as they were singmg, this (Speech) turned'; QB. 1. 6.
4. 12. vartraghnarh vai paurnamasam, indro hy etena vrtram ahann,
athai 'tad eva vrtrahatyam yad amavasyam, vrtram hy asma etad
jaghnu$a apyayanam akurvan, 'The fuH-moon rite belongs to (Indra)
The Vrtraslayer, for by means of it lndra sIew Vrtra; again, the
new-moon rite is (identical with) the sIaying of Vrtra, for they
prepared it for this lndra when he had sIain Vrtra, as a strength-
ening'; QB 6. 1. 1. 8; 10. 6. 5. 6 so '   sa tapo 'tapyata, sa
te pano 'va prathamam aSrJata (10. 6. 5. 6 tasya
taptasya víryam udakrámat), cHe toUed, he practised
austerities; having tOlIed, baving practised austerities, he created
the Brabman first [of him ha ving tOlled, having practised austerities,
glory (and) strength departed]'; AB. 3. 42. 1-5 tarh [agnim] te
[1 2 3 adttyalJ" 4 devaf¡.] trivrta [2
a saptadar;ena; 4 ekavinf}ena] stomena 'stuvans, tan stuto 'tyarjata,
I ekai 'kena tarh devaf¡. .stomena 'stuvañs, tan stuto 'tyaljata, 'Tbese
(Va sus [Rudras; Adityas; AH Gods]) praised this lAgm) witb the
Oertel, The Syntal: of Cases. 20
305
§ 70
Tbe Absolute Laeattve.
tbreefold [fifteenfold; seventeenfold; twenty-one-fold] Stoma; be,
being tbus praised, allowed them to pass; wltb each single Stoma
the gods praised bim j be, being praised, allowed them to pass';
JB. 1. 22
1
te ha 'jagmus, te ,ha brahmacarÍ'l;tam pra no brüh;¡;
'ti. tan ha provaca, tebhyo ha proktehhyak prthag asanani prthag
udakani prthañ madhuparkan pr1hag' avasathan prthak pancabhyalJ
panca     cakara, 'Tbese (five Brahmal}.as) carne; tbey said to
tbe pupIl: "Announce us"; he announced them; for tbem, when
they bad been announced, (tbe king) prepared separate seats,
separate (dlshes of) water, separate guest-offerings, separate abodes
(making) tbe five obeisances separately to the five'; QE. 14. 7.
3.5 (= BAU. 4. 5. 5); 14.5 4.4 (= BAU. 2. 4. 4) vyakhyasyami te,
vacam tu me vyacak¡¡anasya (14. 5. 4 4 = BAU. 2.4. 4, and tbe
Kal}.va recension also at BAU. 4 5. 5 tu me) ntdi-
dhyasasva, see aboye § 4¡;, Ex. 45.
TblS general concatenatmg use of the partlCiple IS noted by: Delbruek, AItmd.
Synt. § 215, P 385, 20-25' 'Sehr oft dient das PartIClplUm m Verbmdung mil
dem Demonstralivum zur Welterfübrung der Darstellung, mdem es den Inhall
des letzten Satzes zusammenfa8t'
AH tbe instan ces quoted aboye form part of a well establisbed
and not mfrequent general type of sentenee connection whicb is
cbaraeterized by the repehtion of a longer or shorter part oí tbe
preceding clause in the next following one; ef., e. g., the repetition
of yak papmana grhito bhavatl by yak papmana   syat at
TS. 2. 3. 13. 2 varuna enam varunapafena   pfipmana
grhito blzavah, yaJ;, papmana grhitah syat tasma etam atndravarun'irh
payasyarh nirvapet, 'Him who is seized by evil Varuna seizes witb
VaruI}.a's noose; for bim wbo may be seized by evil he should
offer an oblation of clotted milk sacred to Indra and Varuna' .
. .
1 Caland (Auswahl p. 9; 11; 13) emends brahmacarinam ücuh to brahmaclirma
ücuh whlCh he rendel's by 'und spracben (slCh) als Sebuler (bel lhm emstellend)'.
But would thls not requlre the middle VOlee and iti? cr. § 60, Ex. 159, Exeursus,
H, p. 254-255. He further translates pra no brahi and tan ha provaca by
'Sage uns an' and 'da sagte er ihnen an' supplymg 'gasthehe Bewlrtung' as obJeet
and comparmg 98. 10 6. 1. 2 tebhyo ha plthag avusathan (Camment. = grhan)
prthag apactuh prthak sahasrant soman provaca.
306
8. The Disjunct Gerund.
§ 71. Ordmarily the gerund expresses an action which refers
to the subject of the sentence or to an element within the clause
which lS felt as the subject of the sentencej thus TS 2. 3. 2. 9
atmanam eva mrtyor nt¡;kriya   ~ n avarunddhe, 'Having ransomed
himself from death he obtains cattle' j QB. 11. 6. 1. 7 tam hai
'nam dr¡;tva bhír viveda (= *sa hai 'nam dr¡;tva bibhaya), 'Fear
seized him wheo he had seen him'.
CI. Whltney, Gr., § 994, b and e, SpeIJer, SanskrIt Syntax, § 379-380, p.296;
Delbrück, Altmd. Synt. § 226, p. 405, 27, P 406, 11; p. 407, 14.
In the followiDg examples, however, the Gerund has assumed
a much more independent character inasmuch as it cannot be
construed with any element of the clause.
cr. WhItney, Gr. § 994, d; Delbrück, Altind. Synt § 226, P 408, 10
Only such instances of the dlsjunct gerund are enumerated
below in which a subject iB neither formally expressed nor can
It be easily supplied from the context, as in the examples ,listed
above § 26 n.
According to the character of the main clause the examples
are grouped in four divisions:
1. The main clause consists of a verbal adjective ID -tavya or
-ya used impersonally
cr. for the Impersonal use of the verbal adJeehve ID -tavya Delbrüek, Altmd.
Synt p. 399, 7; and for the same use of the verbal adJeebve in -ya lbld. p 397,
28, 398,17
n. The main clause consists of a noun accompanied by a verbal
adjective in -tavya or -ya which is construed personally.
nI. The maio clause consists of a nominal subject accompanied
by a finite verbo
IV. The maio clause consists of a nominal subject with 01
without too substantive verb 'to be'.
20"
307
§ 72, Ex. 1-6. The DlsJunct Gerund.
§ 72. 1. The Main Clause Consists of a Verbal Adjective
in -tavya or -ya Used Impersonally.
1. tatha 'nyam dugdhva punar hotavyam, 'Tbus, after another
(cow) has been milked, a second offering should be made'. TB.
1. 4. 3. 4; 5.

2. tat krtva   dugdhva punar hotavyam, 'After this has been
done (and) after another (cow) has been milked, a second offering
should be made'. TB. 3. 7. 2. 2; 3; 4; 5.
3. yatra 'nyarh [agnim] tata (read so with the varo lect.
and the Commentary for yata of the Blbl Ind. text) ahrtya hotav-
yam, 'After (the fire) has been taken from a place where he may
see another (fire), the offering should be made'. TB. 3. 7. 3. 1.
4. varU1J'im rcam anacya varunya hotavyam, 'After a verse ad-
dressed to VaruJ;la has been recited (as invitatory prayer), the
offermg should be made witb (a verse) addressed to VarUl).a'. MS.
1. 8. 3 (p. 118, 9).
4 B. SayaI}.a in the Introduction to bis RV. Commentary (p. 10,
18) quotes the following passage froro an unidentified Brahroana:
ktra1Jyam ntdhaya cetavyam, 'After a gold piece has been deposited
the piling (of tbe altar) should be undertaken'.
5. yapasyai 'va 'nte 'gnim mathitva 'tha hotavyam, 'After the
fire has been ehurned at the end of the sacnficial stake, the
offering should then be made'. MS.3 9.2 (p. 114, 6).
For atha see aboye § 7 J b.
Contrast the conJunrt constructJOn of the gerund III the parallel passage K
26. 3 (p 124, 15) agnirit 1IIathitva valSnavya rca yüpasya 'nte Juliuyat.
6. havyam pürvam devata gamayitva 'tha f{ar'iram anvarohnyitavyam
ity ahur, yad ahut'ir hutva paf{um havyam va etat pür-
vam devata gamayitva 'tha anvarohayatt; 'They say: "After
tbe divinities have first been made to go to the offering, they
should thereupon be made to aseend the body"; in tbat he
touches tbe victim after the oblations have been offered, he,
after he has first made tbe divinities to go to the offering, then
causes tbem to aseend the body'. MS 3. 10. 4: (p. 134:, 11).
For atha see aboye § 7, b.
308
The DIsJunct Gerund.
§ 73, Ex. 1-7.
§ 73. The Main CIause Consists of a. Noun Accompanied by a
Verbal Adjective in -tavya or -ya Used Personally.
1. suvarnam upasya 'gnir adheyah, CAfter (a piece of)
pure gold has been tbrown upon (it) tbe fue sbould be replenished
(witb fresh fuel)'. MS 1. 6. 4 (p. 93, 9).
Cf. MS. 1. 6. 5 (p. 93, 17).
2. atthaya parvam ahutim uttara hotavyá, 'Passing over the first
oblation, tbe. second (oblation) sbould be ofl'ered'. MS. 1. 8. 5
(p. 121, 4).
Contrast the conjunct construction of the gerund at TB. 2. 1. 4. 4 ahhdya
pürvam ahutim Juhuyat, and K. 6. 5 (p. 54, 8) tam fpürviihutim] atihaya juhuyat.
3. bhasmana ' rattí samsprr;ya [agmb-] manthttavyab-, 'After tbe
two churnÍng sticks have been brought in contact with tbe ashes,
(the fire) should be churned'. MS. 1. 8. 9 (p. 130, 3).
Manthitavya here Wllh nasalized verbal slem, like manthitavai MS. 1. 6. 10
(p 102, 1) Contrast K. 26.7 (p. 129,22; below Ex. 4) mathttavya Wlthout nasal,
like vimathtt0?t AB 1. <:lO. 2 and pramathitoll PB. 7. 7. 15.
4. pafum alabhya 'gmr CAfter the victim has been
taken (for slaughter) tbe fire sbould be churned'. K. 26. 7
(p 129, 22).
For mathttavya wlthout nasal see above Ex. 3, Remark.
Contrast the conJunct use of the gerund at TS. 6. 3. 5. 2 yat pa¡:um ltlabhyd
'gnlm manthatz . . .
5. upakrtyai 'va '(The fire) sbould be churned after
(the vlCtlm) bas been prepared'. TS. 6. 3. 5. 2.
6. prajapataye pratiprocya (MS. 3. 1. 3; K. 22. 8 and 19 2 procya)
, gmb- sambhrtyal,t (MS. 3. 1. 3; K. 22. 8 'gnif j K. 19. 2  
cetavyo rajñe procya), <After the announcement to PraJapati [and
to the King] bas been made, the fire altar should be assembled
[should be piled]'. TS. 5. 1. 2.5; MS. 3. 1. 3 (p. 4,14); K. 22.
8 (p. 64, 16); K. 19. 2 (p. 2, 15). •
Contrast the conjunct use of the gerund al TS. 5. 1. 2. 5 eva praj4-
pataye pratiprocya 'gmm sambharati.
7. yad vayavyam va camasam va 'nanvarabhya 'fYavayeti suad
iyat, tasmad anvarabhya ' 'If he were to call for the Va¡¡;at
wlthout holding (tbe cup) sacred to Vayu or the beaker, he would
depart from his own; therefore tbe call for tbe Va¡¡;at should be
309
§ 73, Ex. 8-13. The DisjuncL Gerund.
uttered after (the cup or the beaker) has be en taken hold of'.
TS. 3. 1. 2. 4.
Contrast In the precedmg secllon, TS. 3. 1. 2. 3, the conjunet use of the present
particlple yad abhikramya juhuyiit pratisthaya iyat, tasmllt samanatra tll!thata
hotavyam, 'If he were lo make the oblation movmg aboul, he would depart from
firm standmg; therefore the offenng should he made by hlm while he slands
sllll on the same spot'.
Here the inshumental of the partJciple IS functlOnaIly
equivalent to a. conJuncl gerund sthttva (lhe eariJest oeeurenees of which
are found In the Sütras, CC. 5. 13. 11, AG. 1. 2. 2. 9; ef. above § 68, no. 4,
Remark.).
8. anücya [yapalt] 'eche 'After (a verse) addressed
to Vie:Q.u has been recited (as invitatory prayerl, (the sacrificial
stake) should be approached'. MS. 3. 9. 2 (p 114, 6)
Contrast the conlunct use of tbe gerund at TS. b. 3. 3. 1 "cit hutva
yüpam 'tl, 'Afier he has made the offenng wIth a verse addressed to
VIsnu, he approaches the sacrificial stake'.
9. (also   sarasvatim, and barhaspatyam)
anücya vag yantavya, 'After (a verse) addressed to Vlenn [to Agni
and VieQ.Uj to Sarasvatí'j to Brhaspati] has been recited (as in-
vitatory prayer), speech should be. restrained'. MS. 3. 6. 8 (p. 71,
13; 14; 16; and 17).
10. punar vag yantavya, 'After the second initiation
has taken place, speecb sbould be restramed'. MS. 3. 6. 8 (p. 71, 13)
11. agnzhotrahava7}ith pratapya hasto 'vadheyo, hasto 'IIa pratapya
'gnihotrahavanyam avadheyah, 'After the Agnihotra-ladle has been
heated, the hand should be inserted, or, after the hand has been
heated, it sbould be inserted in the Agnihotra-ladle'. MS 1. 8.
5 (p. 122, 4).
12. ubhau [agni] samahrtya 'ntara dagdhavya{t, 'After
the two (fires) have been brought together, tbe sacrifice sbould
be burnt between them'. MS. 1 8.6 (p. 124,7).
13. yo apabhütalt syat tatil stltale 'vasayya bralt-
maudanam paktva /¡otavya[t, 'If
the bead of a family be deprived of domimon, (tbe
oblations) should be offered for hlm, after he has been placed
on a mound (and) after a Brahman-mess of rICe four Qaravas in
siza bas heen cooked'. TS 3 4. 8. 7.
Apabhütalz = rlistrad apabhütah TS. 3. 4. 8. 2. Gr. V"udh + apa, § 11, Ex. 3.
310
Tbe DlsJunct Gerund. § 73, Ex 14-15, § 74, Ex 1.
14. na parañ avasrjyo, yat para1icam avasrjed yajamanam
jahyad, andhalj, syat, pratyavagrhyá 'dheyo, yajamánayai 'va
pratyavagrahrt, '(Tbe horse) sbould not be permitted to
walk off, ir he were to let (the horse) walk off, sight would leave
the sacrificer, be would be blind; after (the horse) has been kept
back, (the fire) sbould be replenished (with fresh fuel); tbus he
has kept back (= keeps back) sigbt for tbe sacrificer'. MS. 1. 6.
4 (p 92, 7).
15. tad ahur: amna eva 'nudrutyá 'tha 'gmhotram hotavyam iti,
<Tbey say: "Irnmedlately after (the verse) has been quickly mn
over the Agnibotra sbould be offered' MS. 1. 6. 10 (p. 102, 8).
There is no need to assume an am1lah (with lmgual n) by the side of amnah
(with dental n) as lS done by the pw. Nachtrage 5, p. 244, col. 3. The hngal n
in the two OCCUlrences of amna!i IS due to the r m the precedmg word, VIZ.
here to the precedmg ahur, and at MS. 1. 10. 10 (p. 150, 12) to the precedmg
kumare (er. Waekernagel, Altind. Gram. 1, p. 191, § 171, b). At K. 8. 8 (p. 92,
11) the codo Ch. reads amno after a precedmg agni1' yad, but ihe ms. D. has
amno; amnah (wItb dental n) IS read at K. 8. 8 (p. 92, 13, varo lect. sna); 6. 5.
Jp. 54, 4); and, according to Schroeder's certam emendation, at K. 3fi 5 (p. 72, 7)
where ihe codo Ch. reads 'gnau for 'mno) = MS. 1. 10 10 (p, 150, 12).
Besldes the examples Clted by Wackernagel, l. C., fOl the change of
dental n lo lingual n afler the r of a preceding wOld cf. RV. S 36 7
7 samudt'e na (Bloomfield, JAOS. 27, p. 77, and see tbe references quoted
by Oldenberg, Rlgveda.Noten, to this passage); JB. 1. 208. 6 (TransactiOns
of the ConnectIcul Academy of Arts and SClences, 15, p 1(3) punar hanyat
(var. lect. punar hanyllt); K. 28.8 (p. 163, 1, see aboye § 68, no 6, Remark)
stH nil/iryii 'niv'iryah puman; MS. 1 8. 7 (p. 125, 1) te 'gmhotl'e na sao
mariidhayan (so Caland's emendatlOn of Schroeder's 'gnihotrena, WZKM.
23, p. 53, cf K. 6. 6, p. 54, 15 te 'gnihotra eva na samardhayan).
For atha cf. abo ve § 7, b.
-§ 74. lIL The Main Clause Consists of a Nominal Subject
with a Finita Verbo
1. devasura va   samayatanta, te vaz devilh
'hnm (GB. 'hnaz) 'bhyo 7okebhyo 'surán pranudanta
(GB. paranudanta), yany antarhast:lnani (GB. antarhastani)
vasüny asmis tany adaya (the GB mss. erroneously ádáyant) sa-
mudra1h praupyanta (GB. mss.; BibI. Ind., and Gaastra's ed.
prarüpyanta), 'The gods and Asuras contended about tbese worlds;
tben the gods pusbed off tbe Asuras from tbese worlds by means
3ll
§ 74, Ex. 2-4. Tbe DisJunct Gerund.
of the sixth day (rite); now the treasures which were in the hands
of tbese (Asuras),-after tbey had been seized,-were scattered
over tbe ocean'. AB. 5. 11. 1; GB. 2. 6. 11 (p. 260, 3).
GB. prarüpyanta should evidently be emended to AB. praupyanta.
As to AB. praupyanta Keltb notes: 'Tbe passlve praupyanta IS an odd use,
which, bowever, can hardly be corrected', but be renders praupyanta as if it
were a mlddle forro: 'Takmg aH the tbat was wltbin reach they cast it
into tbe sea'.
The V   + pra with double accusatJve whlCh the passive construcbon pre-
supposes occurs only here; at K. 19. 12 (p. 15, 7, 9; and 11) it IS construed with
the accusatJve and .locative: apsu bhasma pravapanti.
The adJective GB. antarhasta is not reglstered In pw.; for tbe formation cf.
WhItney, Gr § 13tO, a; Wackernagel, Altmd. Gram. ll, t, § 119, b, a, p. 312,9-14.
Wlth the secondary derlvatIve AB. antarhas/ina (Whltney, Gr. § 1223, d) com-
pare es. 4 3 4. 19 )tlatakulfna 'belongmg to a known famJly'; Ape. 7. 6. 1 (pw.
Nachtrage 3, p.250, col. 3) 'situated between the horns'j Samhlto-
27. 2 (pw. Nachtrage 1, col. 2, in fine) antahsamika 'm the mlddle oí
a Saman'; cr. Wackernagel, Altínd. Gram. 1I, 1, § 44ff.
2. [brahmanaf¡] [brahma] adaya evá
  'Wben tbe full (Brabman) is taken from tbe full (Brab-
man) it (= the Brahman) i8 1eft (= neverthe1ess remains) full'.
<;lB. 14. 8. 1. 1 (= BAU. 5. 1. 1).
The metrical cadence of the passage 15 noted by Deussen, Sechzlg Upanisaden.
For tbe content cf. Deus5en, System des Vedanta, p. 298, and Geschichte der
PhJ!osophle, 1, p. 322.
3. yad amum [agnim] adhaye 'mam adadhyad apa tad adadhyad,
yad vave 'mam adhaya 'mum adadhyad apa tad adadhyat; tad imam
eva 'dhaya 'the 'mam atha 'mum fatha samrddha üdh'iyate, 'If,
after he bas replenisbed yonder (fire), be were to replenisb this
(fire), be wou1d replenisb wrongly; again, if, after he has rep1enished
tbis (fire), be were to replenish yonder (fire), be wou1d replenisb
wrongly; but if tbis (fire) alone is replenisbed, then this (fue)
and then yonder (fire), in tbat manner (tbe fire) is successfulIy
(= rigbtly) rep1enisbed'. MS. 1. 6. 13 (p. 107, 17).
For the subJect malter ef. K. 8. 4 (p. 87, 2 ff.).

4. tad yan'/, tatra vmfvadevani bhavanti tany uddhrtya 'nyani
praJapatyany aniruktani avadh'iyante, 'These
(bymns) to tbe AH Gods baving been omitted, others addressed
to PraJapati (and) undefined (I.e. witbout specia1 indication of
312
The DisJunct Gerund § 74, Ex. 5-8.
tbe divinity to wbicb tbey are addressed) (and) esoterically ad-
dressed to tbe AH Gods are substituted'. KB. 24. 9 (p. 11 1, 3).
Here and at KB. 18 3 (p. 79, 20) tt'ayltniim
uddh1tya tltní trilli brhati,atiini (see below, § 75, Ex. 2) the gerund uddhrtya
has well nigh assumed the charac1er of an adverb 'excepting, barrmg', cf. WhItney,
Gr. § 994, g; PW. s. hr + ud, no. 4, col. 1533; pw. s. hr + ud, no. lO, p. 256, col 2.
5 yad tdath kim ca varsaü jayanta, jagdhva
'palf, p'itva tata- etad adbhyo 'dhi sambhavati, 'Wben it rains
anywhere here, plants grow from the rain; after the plants bave
been eaten (and) the water has been drunk, tben from the water
milk comes into being'. QB. 2. 6. 3. 7.
See Ex. 6, Remark.
6. idam ht yadá athau ' jáyanta, jagdhva
  pUM tata esa sambhavatt, 'When it rains bere, then
plants grow; after tbe plants have been eaten (and) the ",ater
bas been drunk, tben tbis sap (= essence) comes into being'.
QB. 1. 3 1. 25; 1. 7. 1. 18; 2.,3. 1. 16.
The passages given under Ex. 8 and 9 make It practiealIy eerlain that pafav()
'mülii Ofadhir mülmir ;agdht·lt 'pah pi/va at 9B. 2. 3. 1. 10 should be construed
as absolute nommatlve (ef. aboye § 21, Ex. 1 and § 26, Ex. 6), tatav, havmg
the force of a temporal adverb.
7. yad eva garhapatye   'havaniyam abhyuddravet (the
Bibl Ind text abhyuddravan) tena tMm prinati; ... ; tasmad yad
gárhapatye ' 'ltavaniyam abhyuddravalt vayum eva tena
prinMt, 'If (any mi1k) should flow toward tbe Abavaniya-fire, after
(the milk) has been placed on tbe Garhapatya-fire, with that (milk)
be gratifies tbee; ... ; therefore, if (any milk) flows toward the
Ahavanlya-fire after (tbe miJk) has been placed on the Garhapatya-
fire, witb that (milk) he gratifies Vayu'. TB. 2. 1. 6. 4.
The absolute gerund adht,nt!la IS semantIeally eqUlvalent to an absolute
locative adhu;rtte, el. aboye § 60, Ex. 145-149.
8. tasmat praja maso garbham bhrtvai   anu praja-
yante, 'Tberefore creatures are born along with (= within) the
eleventb montb, after tbe foetus bas been carried for ten months'.
PB. 6. 1. 3.
Contrast the parataell(al construetion ID the parallel passage JB. 1. ó7. 2 (Trans-
actIons of the ConneetIeut Academy of Arts and Selenees, 15, p. 177) tasmiit
da,a maso bibhl'aty (tbe mss. bíbhrttj lnbhyahtaj bibh/tttam) ek4dat;am
313
§ 74, Ex. 9-11 A The DIs¡unct Gerund
anu prajayante, 'Therefore ammals carry (their foetuses) for ten montbs, along
with the eleventb (month) they are born'.
9 etasya ha va [mdhanam] krtva (the ross krtvo and
krlor)   ca parjanya uc ca 'When tbis lS roade (tbe Nidh-
ana) of this Saroan, ParJanya both rains and holds up'. JB. 1. 117.
In the following examples (Ex. 10-11) it is not certain that
the gerund should be construed al:Y!301utely:
10. sa [indrah¡ 18 yaJamanah] vas'iyan eve '$tvá 'bhavat (13 bha-
vatí), 'After the sawfice had [has] been roade, he (Indra; [the
sacrificer] became [becoroes] stronger'. QB. 5 5. 4. 11; 13.
In sectLOn 11 It IS strIctly speakmg the AQvins who perform the sacrlfice for
Indra, and in sectlOn 13 it is stnctly speakmg the pnests who perform the saCrI
tice for the ya)amilna. But It IS queshonabIe whether It IS falr to press such
a strictly Ioglcal pomt of Vlew here. The transIabon 'He, having sacrificed
became [becomes] stronger' (with istvil as conJunct gerund) would be possible
according to the maxlm yah kilrayati sa karoa, 'Facit per ahum, facit per se',
rí. G. A. Jacob, Lauklkanyi.iyiiflJakf:¡ / bhiigah, A Second Handful of Popular
Maxlms Cutrent m Sanskrlt LItelature, Bombay, 1902, p.35 who refers to Can-
kara's Commentary on the Brahma Sütras 1. 2 11 (p 180, Deussen's translabon,
p.98; Tblbaut's translatlOn, SSE. 34, P 119); and compare RamanuJa's Gom-
mentaly to the same passage (Thlhaut's translatlOn, SBE. 48, p. 2(8)
11. athm 'nam [putram] matre pladaya stanarn '(The
father), having handed the (new-born boy) to the roother, offers
hiro (or: she ofI'ers hiro?) her breast' QB. 14. 9. 4. 28 (= BAU.
6.4.28 Madhy. = 27 Ka:Q.va).
It is not certam whether the father 01 the mother IS the subJect of the fimte
verb prayachati. Accordmg to PG. 1. 16. the fathel gives the breast to the
chIlil, according to ApG. 5. 6. 15 5 he causes the mother to do "o In the forrner
case the gerund pradiiya would be used conJunctly, whlle m the Iattel case
pradliya would be an absolute gerund
Both B5htlmgk and Deussen take the father as subJect of the gerund pradiiya
and of the finite verb prayachati. OrdmarJly v' yam + pra wJth stanam is used of
the mother glvmg her breast to the babe at JUB. 3. 14. 7, cf. stanam wlth "r dhii
+ apt <;8. 2. 2. 1. 1; K. 21 9 (p. 49, 16), 1\IS. 1. 6 3 (p. 90, 18); wJth f dhi.i + upa
KB. 13 2 (p. 58, 10), wlth v' dhi.i + prati AB. 5. 31. 1; 6. 29. 3; and wlth v' yam
+ sam - prati GB 2. 6. 8 (p. 256, 1).
r Addition from the AraI;lyakas and Upanü;;ads.
11 A. atha yo na pratyaha tam ",ha vr$hr bhútvá var$atí, 'But he
who do es not answer, hiro, after he has becoroe rain, he (= the
moon) raios (down) here (= upon this earth)'. QA 3.2; KUB. 1. 2.
314
The DisJunct Gerund. § 75, Ex. 1-3, § 76
The Commentary glosses   bhütva by p"lipya where
priipya may possibly be intended for the causatIve (Pan. 6. 4. 57). Deussen:
'Hmgegen wer Ihm (= dem Monde) nicht antworten kann, den lalH er, zu Regen
geworden, herabregnen', KelÍh 'Hlm who answel's it (= the moon) not It rams
down on earth, becommg Itself ram'. There can be no doubt that the sen se
requires vrt¡tir bhütvii to be construed wlÍh tamo J
§ 75. IV. TJ¡e Main Clause Consists of a Nominal Subject
with or without the Substantiva Verb 'to be'.
1. na pretya samJ11,a 'Stl, 'After (a man) has died there is no
(longer) consciousness'. QB. 14. 7. 3 13; 14 (= BAU. 4. 5.13; 14).
Cf Chand. Up. 8 11. 1', where the same problem is dlscus:,ed as In the QB.
dIalogue between YaJíiavalkya and MaItreyI, nii 'ha khalv ayam evam (viz yatrai
'tat suptah samastah samprasannah 8vapnam na sampraty iítmlinarh
jiíniity' ayam aham astil;;; no eve bhütlim, 'Venly, in such a condJtlOn
(VIZ. when one is asleep, completely withdrawll [lrom all sensatlOns], completely
at rest, and no dreams) such an one IS completely unCOllSCIOUS of bimselt
(being no longer conscious of the fact)· "Thls is 1" nOI IS he consclOUS of (the
fact that there are) these (other) bemgs'.
2. trayanam gayatrír;atam uddhrtya tam tr'ín't
brhatír;atani, 'If one deducts a hundred GayatrI (verses) from three
hundred Tri¡¡;tubh (verses) three hundred BrhatI (verses) are (left)'.
KB. 18. 3 (p. 79, 20).
Cf. aboye § 74, Ex 4
3. evam zmañ lokant samaruhya 'thm gatzr ya
tapatt, 'When one has ascended these worlds, then he who
burns here (= the sun) is the goat he is the firm standing'.
QB. 1. 9. 3. 10.
Appendix 1.
§ 76. At MS. 3.7.5 (p. 81, 13) Schroeder's text reads without
vanant: vag vaz somakrayan'i, r;ash vavat 'nam etat, tasmat praJak
sr§tva prajayante 'l'he parallel passage TS. 6. 1. 7. 4 has: vag
va yat czd aSl mana 'Si (VS. 4. 19) 'tyaha, r;asty
evaz 'nam etat, tasmac praja jayante, 'The cow with which
the Soma is bought is with) speech; he says (the formula)
VS. 4. 19, thus he instructs her, therefore offspring born in-
structed'. Accordingly III MS. should be emended to
For the confUSlOll of r and i (Wackernagel, Altind Gr. 1, p 19, 11, § 16) cf.
the Mantra varIants.
315
§ 76. The OisJunct Gerund.
prasrtth MS.4. 9. 12 (p. 133,9).
prasrtih MS. 2 11. 2 (p 140, 10), K. 18.
7 (p. 18'.
samrddham <;G. 2. 1. 30.
nrsadvara[1 AB. 7 15. 1.
gotrabhrd MS. 3. 11. 1 (p. 140, 1).
SlIDllarly:
vrsnah RV. 1. 154. 6; Nlr. 2. 7.
MS. 2. 8. 1 (p. 106, 10).
ehi MS. 4 2.5 (p 26,13), 4.
2 6 (p. 27, 10).
hrdvidhe TA. 3.5. 1, K. 9. 8 (p. 111, 1);
CC 10. 14. 6.
prasitl[t TB 3. 7. 13. 4, TA 4. 20. 3.
prasiM VS. 18 1; TS. 4. 7. 1. 1.
samwdham PG. 2. 2 10; HG. 1. 4. 6;
ApllfB. 2. 2. 11.
nt/wdvara[¡ OO. 15 19.
gotrabhid VS. 20. 38; K. 38. 6 (p. 107.
"16).
vtsnoh VS. 6 3; TS. 1. 3 6. 2; MS. 1. 2.
14 (p. 23, 17); K. 3. 3 (p. 24, 10).
Pipthi VS. 14. 2; K. 17 1 (p. 246, 4).
dadhisa ehi Ape. 4. 10. 4.
hinmdhe MS. 1. 9. 1 (p. 131, 8); 1. 9. 4
(p. 133, 10); M<), 5. 2. 14. 3.
And cf. the confuslOll of vrdh and md:
vrdhad K. 40. 10 (p. 144, 14). vidad AV. 1. 20. 1; 5. 3. 6; TB. 3. 7. 5.
13, AP\!' 2. 20.6.
hotl'livrdha[t TB. 2. 6. 16. 2. hotrlividah RV 10. 15. 9; AV. 18. 3.47.
MS 4. 10. 6 (p. 157, 16).
At AV 13 4. 54 the Commentary reads Vi dhadvasu[¡ while the text has idad-
t'Usu[t (eorrupted from ·vidadvasuh).
For the confusion of s and (above § 59, Ex 159, Rem., p. 182, 6-8) cf.
the Mantra variants:
AV 20. 127 9.
  AG 2. 8. 16
parisrutam eo. 12. 17. 1 3.
pansl'tah MG. 2. 11. 12, parisrutaf¡ PG.
3. 4. 4, ApMB. 2. 15. 4.
For the fauIty insertion of the v in for el. the faulty omission
of the v in TB. 2. 4. 3. 11 yuktli ror yuktva (R V. 1. 177 1, etc.). •
316
Corrections and Additions.
Page 1, !ine 5, froro bottom, read: personis casibus perturbatur.
Page 2, line 13, read: TS. 2. 6. 9. 3.
Page 5, line 1, after KB. 7. 2 iusert: (p. 29, 9)
Hne 5, after KB. 6. 2 - 9 insert: (p. 23, 7, 11; 16; 22;
P 24,4; 10; 16; 22).
Page 6, line 23, at tbe end of § 4 add:
For 'Pendent Cases' compare now the suggestive artIcle of W. Havers,
:Oer sog. Nommativus pendens' in IF.43 (1925), p.207-275
Page 8, lines 8 and 7, from bottom, dele: Ex. 23 (QB. 5. 1. 3.
13 = 5.5.4.33). .
Page 9, line 1, dele: tad
!ine 2, read: § 65, b-c.
Page 11, line 13, after GB. 2. 2. 14 insert: (p. 179, 12)
line 11 from bottom, after 7. 24. 2 and before QA 1. 4
add: 8.8.5.
lme 10, from bottom, at tbe end of tbe Remark, add>'
For the present force of the aorlst akaran cf Whitney, Gr. § 930,
Delbrück, Altmd. Syntax, § 166, 2, P 287-289; and below § 60, Ex. 115;
§ 73, Ex.14.
line 9, from bottom, read: 'bhyarramyad
line 6, from bottom, read:  
line 1, from bottom, after GB. 1 1. 3 add (p. 3, 1)
Page 15, line 12, after KB. 18. 3 add: (p. 79, 19)
line 19, read' dak{;ir.üz
!ine 26, iva 'pakramya is Gaastra's eroendatlOll
line 4, from bottom, read: parok$ene.
Page 18, line 14 read: Raghavendra
lme 24 read: appears.
Page 21, line 19 read:
line 8-7 and line 3, froro bottom, read: pratlttstheyam.
317
Corrections and AdditlOns.
Page 22, line 15, read . so 'yam.
Page 23, line 9, after KB. 7. 4 add: (p. 30, 5)
line 13, from bottom, read . Proleptic Accusative
line 5, from bottom, after GB. 2. 2. 1 add: (p. 165, 15)
and note that Gaastra' s edition gives
as the. reading of the mss., which ahe emends to
(mI sprint  
Page 25, line 7, at the end of Ex. 17 add the reference : PB. 22.
17. 2, and the Remark:
Contrast the normal construction at TS. 6. 4. 6. 1 te deva bibhyata m,
dram upadhavan.
lme 12, after GB. 1. 3. 15 add : (p. 84, 9).
Page lme 17. read: krtva.
30, Hne 13, from bottom, read: (p. 38, 14).
Page 31, line 6, from bottom, read : vartlam.
Page 32, line 4, from bottom, after PB. 6. 9. 17 add: (where, with
Caland, ZDMG. 72, p. 20, sarvam 11 rddhim should
be read for sarvan v rddhtm of the Bibl. Ind.)
line 1, from bottom, after GB. 1. 3. 15 add : (p. 85, 8).
Page 33, line 7, dele the reference to GB. 2. 1. 12 (p. 152, 11); in
this passage rddhya(t) is final dative and belongs to
the precedmg clause, while rdhnoty eva forms a se-
parate clause.
318
line 9, after KB. 26.1 add: (p. 120, ]2; 13)
Hne 10, after KB. 25. 2 add: (p. 112, 13); and after
KB. 26. 15 add : (p. 127, 23)
Hne 20, after KB. 2. 3 add : (p. 5, 15)
after KB. 4. 4 (bis) add . (p. 15, 13; 14)
after KB. 6. 15 (bis) add . (p. 28) 1; 3)
after KB 7. 1 add: (p. 28, 20)
line 21, after KB. 11. 6 add: (p. 51, 10)
after KB 13. 1 add: (p. 57, 24)
after KB. 28. 1 (ter) add : (p. 134, 5; 7; 8)
after KB. 29. 6 add : (p. 141, 7)
after GB. 1. 1. 2 add : (p. 2, 12)
after GB. 2. 1. 26 add: (p. 164, 12)
after GB. 2. 2. 18 add: (p. 184, 4)
CorrectIons and Addlbons
lme 13, froro bottom, read: agmm rdhnott
line 12, from bottOill, between 1. 7 and prajapatim insert:
(p. 150, 2)
line 5, {rom bottom, after GB. 2. 1. 11 add: (p. 151, 14)
line 4, from bottom, dele the reference to GB. 2. 5. 4
(p. 230, 11) where, with Gaastra, prajattm should be
read for praJapatlm of the mss. and tbe Blbl. Ind.
After GB. 2. 5. 8 add (p. 234, 11)
Page 34, line 6, after KB. 25. 3 add: (p 113, 2)
line 7, after KB. 3. 2 add: (p. 9, 6)
lme 13, after GB. 2. 2. 13 add : (p. 179, 10).
Page 35, line 3, after GB. 2. 4. 4 add : (p. 213. 8)
line 10, after GB. 2. 5 8 add : (p. 234, 7)
!ine 17, after GB 1. 2. 2 add. (p. 33, 9)
lme 31, after RB. 11. 8 add: (p. 52, 18)
after KB. 27. 6 add: (p. 132, 22)
line 1, from bottom, after GB. 2 4. 18 add: (p. 226, 5}
Page 36, line 14, after GB. 1. 1. 3 add: (p. 3, 4).
Page 38, line 13, read: fire and touches (the priest)
line 17, add:
The Commentator, glossing anf,árabdhiiya by upasprstavate, takes the-
past partlclple In the actIve sense, cf. Caland, ZDMG. 53, p 215 and below
§ 60 the Introductor)' Remarks to Ex 12t-123 and Ex. 124-125
line 7, from bottom, after GB. 1. 1. 32 add: (p. 25, 8)
line 5, trom bottom, read: klm svid.
Page 40, lme 11, read: tan nanach-
Hne 14, after KB. 18. 3 add : (p. 79, 24).
Page 41, line 6, from bottom, add:
Caland, ZDMG. 72, P 23, also regards ait as an error fol' et.
'Page 42, line 8, after WZKM. 23, p. 61 add: ZDMG. 72, p. 12.
Page 43, !ine 16, read : kamaye
line 20, read : a 'sya 'rdham
line 24 - 30 read: he (PraJapatl) having prepared au
ornament of Stbagara fOl" her, havmg explained tha
DaGahotr-formula ID front, the Caturhotr-formula in
tbe soutb, tbe Pañcabotr-formula behind, the l;laQ.¿lhotr-
formula in the north, (and) the Saptahotr-formula
aboye, having adorned (her) face with the Sambbara
3I!}
CorrectlOns and Addltions
and Patni-formulas (TA. 3. 9 and 10), - she (Sita)
proceeded to the place of this (Soma).
And add the Remark:
cr. Caland, on 14. 15. 2. 'Fur Sle machte er nun das Sthagara-
5chmuckmlttel (vgl. KauQ. 35. 21) zurecht; nachdem er vorne die Zehn-,
sudlich die Vier-, hin ten die Fünf·, nordhch die Sechshotrformel und ober-
ha lb desselben die SIebenhotrformel lÍergesagt hatte, schmückte er mit
dlesem Mlttel lhr das Gesicht, mdem er die Sambhára· und die Patni-
formeln (TA. 3. 9 und 10) daruber hersagte, und so begab sle slch zu
ihm (Soma)'
Page 46, line 25, after 'conditional sentence' add:
AB. nasta corresponds in sense to Áplt. 1. 20. 12 avidyamanayam 'when
(the Wlie vf the sacrlficer) is no! present', WJllch the Commentator glosses
by analambhukatvadma nimlttena '8amnihttayam abhave ca tasyah
Page 47, line 14, after GB. 1. 1. 1 add: (p. 1, 7)
line 15, after GB. 1. 1 7 add: (p. 6, 10)
line 17, after GB 1. 1. 7 add : (p. 6, 12)
line 18, after GB. 1. 1. 7 add: (p. 6, 16)
line 19, after GB. 1. 1. 39 add : (p. 31, 10)
Jine 21, after GB. 1. 2. 21 add: (p. 59, 4)
Une 23, after GB. 1. 2. 21 add: (p. 57, 13)
line 25, after GB. 1 3. 19 add: (p. 88, 6)
line 26, after GB. 1. 4. 23 add: (p. 110, 16)
Page 50, line 8, after GB. 1. 2. 21 add: (p. 57, 13).
Page 51, line 3, from bottom, read: Geschichte.
Page 53, line 2, from bottom, read : while being.
Page 54, !ine 15, from bottom, read: samyafíco
line 14, from bottom, read: tasthtre
tine 12, from bottom, after add:
Caland, WZKM. 16, P 98 emends MS 2.2.6 (p. 19, 13) to deva anyo
'nyasya t¡raisthyaya 'tisthamanar; caturdha vyudakraman
Page 56, Une 5, after Ex. 3 add:
320
3 A. sarhtatzr va esa yajñasya yo 'gnin anvadhaya vratam
tlpaiti, 'That is (= guarantees) the continmty of the
sacrifice if one undertakes the vow aftar he - has
successively put fuel on the fires'. TB. 3 7. 1. 2
line 13, after yad rtuyajanam insert:
yo 'tra  
line 20, after GB. 2 3. 7 add: (p. 193, 14)
Correchons and AdditlOns
lllle 25, after GB. 2. 6. 12 add: (p. 262, 2); and add
that, accordmg to Gaastra, the varo lect. there is
nyuñsa (wIth dental s)
line 5, froro bottom, after akhanaya add ..
cr. Dallla's ukhare fOl usare (Caland on 3Q, 25, Altmd Zauber-
utual, p 135, note 17). Apll.5 9.8 akhum ln a fur K 7.12 (74,
14), 38. 12 (1 17) < so also MQ and Hlfany. Q > at;um seems to be
an lntentlOnal adaptabon to the akhukarisam of the nlual
Page 57, line 15, at the end of Ex 8 add the Remark:
For v' ga + vi and v' i + Vt, 'penetrate', 'separa te', wIth mstrumental
and accusatlve cf. AH 2 21 2 vaca vaJrena ya)amanasya pranan vyagat
and Vfyat, 6. 26. 6 etabhylim devatlibhyari! yajamlinasya prlinan vyagilt and
t'lyat; PB 2 1 4 tan [lokanJ hmkiírena vyetl (Commentary = t'igamayatl,
fJtyuktan karote), 14 6.6 rtena 'gmm t'yayat'a, K. 19.5 (p 6,8) agmna t'ae
deva idam agre vyliyan; and KB 13. 9 (p 61, 3) pralldnt sa vyagtu.
lllle 18, after KB. 12. 7 add: (p. 56, 23)
line 29, after KB. 13. 9 add: (p. 61, 2); and add the
Remark:
For pranan asya vyagat er. § 29, Ex 8, Rem., CorreetlOns and Ad·
ditions to p. 57, 15.
line 33, after KB. 23. 6 add (p. 106, 1).
Page 58, line 4, read: KE. 9. 4 (p. 43, 1)
lllle 17, after apati add:
DI. Sleglmg had the kmdness to collate the Berlm rnss. of the KB
Lmdner's B, b, and K read alld so does Chambers 253. The PW
s pat + ii (col. 397, 41) has correctly Kelth's apiíti (HOS. 25, P 76,
no 21) should be corrected. Whitney, Roots ete., s v' paf (p. 94, 5) gives
the form eorreetly wlth long a, but lt IS not Usted by him Gr. § 844. '
The context would lead one to expect apadt, ef KB 10 3 (p 46, 7)
agnisomayor va esa lisyam apadyate yo d¡;Tcsate; liB. 1. 6 4 18 so 'sya
vyattam apadyate (Commentary' vivrtarn mukham prapnot¡)j 3. 6 2 20
.sa etesarn vyattam apadyeta (Commental y. Vtvrtarn mukharh
An outnght eonechon of KB apatl to iipiidl eould be supported by
numerous mstances of a eonfusiOn of t and a, thus (a) AV. 4. 17. 6 ana-
padyatam should, as suggested m the PW. and m spIte of Weber's defense
(Sitzungsber. d Berhner Ak, 1896, p. 272), be emended to anapatyatam,
as IS done m Shankar   edltlOn on the authonty of three ms". and
of the Commentary (apatyarahttyam) , cf Whltney's and Bloomlield's notes
(b) For AV. 3 7 1 raghltsyadah Apll. 13. 7. 6 and, aceordmg to Caland's
note also Bhar. and Hlr lead raghusyatah (but two mss of Ap9. have d).
(e) For RV 8. 6 24 pradzdayat TE. 2. 7 13. 2 wlth the Commentary read"
pratzdayat (one ms prattdayan) (d) For AV. 7. 14 2 = VS 4 25 ete. adt-
Oertel, The 8yntax of Cases 21
321
322
and Addlhons.
dyutat VSK 4. 8. 3 reads atidYldat. (e) For RV 9 82. 3 uta 'saran SV.
2 667 Jeads ttdltsaran. (f) For RV 1. 115. 3 = MS. 4.10. 2 (p 147,3)
etagvah TB 2 8.7. 1 wlth the Commentary reads edagva{t (g) For RV.
6 21. 2 etc. pariiwtaghntm TB 2. 8. 2 8 wJth the Commentary reads
paravadaghn'im. (h) For SV. 1. 458 cita gok (AV. 7. 22. 2 ctte gol:t) ApQ.
21 q. 15 read., culii goh. (1) For RV 6.17.2 etc. tarutra{t Varadap Up.
2.2 reads tarudrah. (J) For VS. 21. 30 = TB. 2. 6 11 1 patha madhu·
mata bharan MS. d. 11. 2 (p 141, 5) ;eads pathii madhttmad iibharan.
(k) For TS. 5. 5. 17. 1 pítvah VS. 24. 32 and MS. 3 14. 13 (p 175, 4) read
judua{t (KA«v. 7, 7, P 180,12 bulvah). (1) For VS. 19 4 etc mayandl1li¡
chandas MS. 2. 8. 2 (p. 107, 17) and MG. 6 ':l. 1 read mayantam chandus.
(m) For Ag. 4. 7. 4 = gg. 5. 10. 8 purutamiisah A V. 7. 73. 1 reads puru-
damasah, cf. Wlntney's note and Roth, ZDMG. 48, p. 107,17. (n) For RV.
3. 31. 6 etc mdad yad'i saramlt TB 2 5 8. 10 (with the Commentary wmch
glosses yaff by tiyan, indrena preyitá) and API.!. 12. 15. 6 read vidad yaü
sarama. (o) For TS. 4.4. 12.4 = Ag 4. 12.2 deuy avatu MS. 3. 16 4
(p. 189, 1) reads tevy avatu. (p) For AV. 14 1. 45 etc. antltn abhtto 'da·
danta 5MB 1. 1. 5 reads antan abhlto (sic) tatantha; and PG. 1. 4. 13 tan'
tün abhtto (sic) tatantha; cf. Roth, ZDMG.48, p. 108 and Lanman's note
m Whltney's AV translatlOn. (q) For AV 12.2 H dlñhantam an emen-
datlOn to tmhantam lS suggested by Roth, ZDMG. 48, p. lO7, (r) On
liakrda for ef. Caland on   26. 22; Altind. Zaubemtual, p. 76;
and on 80. 20, ZDMG. 53, p. 220.
But such an outright eorrecbon of KB. llpii# to IS perhap.s not
necessary, ror confuslOn of the roots pat and pad IS occaslOnally met wIlh;
thus (a) For TB. 3 7.11. 2 = Apg. 3.11. 2 = 9. 12.1 = 9. 15. 23 ati-
padayanz AQ 3. 13. 18 wIth the Commentary reads atipataylini. (b) For
MS.2 1. 10 (p. 11, 17) bahu va esa vratam atipadayatt ya áhttagmT,¡ san
pravasatz the parallel passage GB 2. 1. 14 (p. 153,2) wIlhout variant reads
atiplitayatz. (e) For GB. 13. 5. 2. 2 mahistm 'panipádayantt QQ 16.
3.33 and Ag. 10.8.9 with the Commentaly read upanipatayanti (PW.).
(d) (i'or RV. 10. 165.5 = MG.2 17.1 < and so also AV Palpp. and the
AV. Commentary > pra patat patistha{t AV. 6 28. 1 reads pra padal
pathisthah; ef. WhItney's note. Ce) For TB 1. 2. 4 2, PB. 4. 5. 11; K. 33.
6 (p. 31, 9) atipiidat AB. 4. 18. 5 Wlth the Commentary reads attpiitat
(t) For TE. 1. 2. 4. 2; PB.4 5 9. K. 33. 6 (ter, p. 31, 8; 14; 20) avapadiit
AB 4.18.5, 6; 4 19.3 reads avapatiit; and note that the Commentary
to botb TE and PB. glosses avapadltt by adhallpiítanat. (g) For K. 33. 6
(bIS, p. 31, 17 and 32,1), PB. 4. 5. 12 anavapMaya AB.4. 19 3 reads
anavllpátciya, and note that the Commentary to PB. glosses anavapadaya
by adhahpatanam na bhavati.
Under clrcumstances KB llpat! may he an old error An Impersonal
thJrd smgular of the passlve aOrIst iipat¡ is clted by the PW. s. pat (col
393,31) from the Bbat!Jkavya 15.27 (Bombay ed. p. 164 = Ca)cuUa ed.
p. 223) nyapaptan mttsale gldhra diptayá 'pah co 'lkay{i.
CorrectlOns and AddltIons.
Page 58, line 18, read: katena
. line 25, read: "With these two divmities .
line 27, after Ex. 17 add tbe Remark:
For etiibhyiím dpvatlibhyam yaJamanasya prauiín vyagat cf § 29, Ex. 8,
Rero, CorrectlOns and Additions to p 57,15.
Page 59, line 9, after KB. 7. 9 add: (p. 33, 9)
line 20, at the end of the Remark to Ex. 21 add:
The PW s. 2 bhUman (col. 348, 2-4) assumes on the strength of this
passage a femmme bhüman 'Versammlung' (Commentary = sabha), and
Wackernagel refers to J. Scbmldt, Pluralbildung, p. 96 f. where tbe origmally
femmme gender oC oxytone abstl acts in -mán lS assumed
line 24, after KB. 17. 1 add: (p. 75, 8).
Page 63, line 13, from bottom add to Note 1.:
In general, Cor tbe sequence: water, plants, fCUIt, Cood, seed, man, ef.
KB.2 7 (p. 6, b) te [devah] 'piim ürdhvam rasam udauhans, ta osadhayat;;
ca           ca samabhavann,   ca vanaspat"inam co 'rdhvam
rasam udauhans, tat phalam abhavat, phalasyo 'rdhvam rasam udauhañs,
tad annam abhavad, annasyo 'rdhvam rasam udauhans, tad reto 'bhavad,
retasa ürdhvUlh 1'Usam udauhant, sa 'bhavat, 'Tbey (tbe gods)
hfted upward tbe essence of the wa.ters, that became the plants and
trees; they Mted upward the essence oC tbe pIants and trees, that became
frUIt; they hfted upward the essence oí flUit, that became fooq.; they lifted
upward the essence of food, that became seed, they hfted upward the
essence oí seed, that became man.'
Page 67, Hne 22, read: QB. 9.!í L 57
Hne 22-27. Wlth reference to the irregularly accented
oxytones abhyajñayá, nirjyayá, and aturmuhyá Wacker-
nagel notes: 'Mit M8. aturmuhyá 1St uberhaupt nichts
anzufangen. Und kan n nrjyayám jina,h w1rklich be-
deuten "Menscbenschindung ausubt"? Kann nrjyayá
nicht vielmehr "Menschenschinder" bedeuten, wo dann
die Oxytonese zu Recht bestünde? AIso bleibt a1Jhya-
jñayá als einzig sichere Stel1e mit falsch betontem
Verbalabstractum; Accente aber in der zweiten Halfte
des QB. haben keine Autoritat.'
Page 71, tine 1, from bottom, after karya add :
For the thougbt cf K 10 6 (p. 131,3) where accordmg to Caland's
CODJccture (ZDMG 72, p. 14) agnaye surabhtmate 'stakapalam nirvaped
yam apramitarh (Sehroeder's text wIthout apramUU1h) pramitam y1'nuyuh
should be read; APIt. 9. 11 17 yady apramUU1h pramitam upat;;rnuyuh
(Commentary: amrtant ml'tam upafrutya).
21*
323
CorrectlOns and AddltiOns.
Pnge 74, lme 1, read: The Disjunct Accusative.
Page 76, lme 2, froID bottom, after GB. 1. 1. 39 add: (p. 31, 12).
Page 81. lme 4, between Ex. 1 and 2 íusert:
1 A. yatha 'gm1i1 sarmddham tarh ghrtena (and tam uda-
kena) 'b/Ilimlcet _ . 'The kindled fire,-as if he were
to sprinkle that with Ghee (wlth water)'. QB. 2. 2.

2.19.
Iíne 18, read: prajvalayet
line 3, from bottoro, after KB. 18. 12 add: (p. 83, 4)
Page 83, line 3, from bottom, read:   no.
Page 85, Hne 20-21, read: 'Wheu this (Agnihotra) was beiug
offered' .
lme 2, froro bottom, after K. 8. 7 (bis, p. 87, 3 and ó) add:
K. 19. 11 (p. 13,5) asuranam va ime loka asañs, te deva lnSn1tm abruvan.
yavad ayalit kltmaro     tavan no datte 'tI, 'These worlds belonged
to the Asuras; these gods sald (to the Asuras) wltb regard to V¡snu: "As
much as this boy bestrides so much glve us"'; cf Caland on Apft 4 14 8
'Da sllrachen die Gotter zu VI!:lnu (d. h. wohl: zu den Asuras mtt Bezug
auf VI¡¡;nu).'
Page 86, Une 1, after GB. 2. 3. 7 add' (p. 193, 15)
line 15, read: RV. 10 19. 1
Hne 18, read: RV. 10. 19
line 20, after KB. 13 8 add. (p. 60, 12)
line 2, froro bottoro, nl)te 1, add:
Wackernagel notes: 'Prattkamtnam gehort mJt AV. 19. 9. 4 paramesthí-
nam und RV.I0 66. q vanínam zusammen; die Nomina auf -in- waren
m der alteren Sprache (und zum Tell auch noch spater) m erster Lmie
für personhche Begnffe ubhch und daher sllld spezielle Neutralformen
seIten belegt¡ Lanman) p.542, verzelChnet   RV. und AV im ganzen
nur vier Formen auf -i (denn ubhayahast'i 1St anderer Arl) und keme
neutraIen Dual- und Pluralformen auf -Mi, bez. -Int, die oblgen Formen
auf -tnam, -wánt stellen Versuche dar, auf anderem Wege Neutralformen
zu gewmnen. Dalan schemt KB. prahkaminam   werden
zu durfen'
Page 87, line 2, after KB. 18. 3 add: (p. 79, 24)
line 13, after KB. 30 5 add: (p. 144, 3).
Page 88, line 8, froro bottom, after KB. 10.5 add': (p. 47, 24)
Page 89, line 18, after KB. 27. 1 add: (p. 129, 18)
324
Hne 6, froro bottom, after GB. 1. 1. 1 add: (p. 1, 6)
Hne ó, from bottoro, after GB. 1. 1. 2 add: (p. 2, 1).
CorrectlOns and Addltions.
Page 92, line 11, from bottom, read : breatbe III and breatbe out
regularly duríng ...
line 7 and Hne 5, from bottom, read : gr'tpmahemantlibhyam.
Page 93, hne 6, from bottom, read : eva  
Page 95, line 25, read . niryamanad And add:
The translatlOn takes nl,ryamana as of the causabve of v' ir +
ni (Whltney, Roots ele., p. 10 and 23b), ef. KO 7.2.26 samiksyam/%nam
'eaused to be looked at', passive of the eausabve of v' + sam, on
account of QB. 3. 3. 1. 11 athai 'narh sO/1lakrayanya samkhyiípayatl; K. 24.
4 (p. 93, 18) somakrayanya patni'ln samkhYápayati; MS. 3. 7. 7 (p. 84, 8)
yat somakrayanyá patnim sarhkr;ápayati, :llIU cf. below § 59, Ex. 231 Rem.
on ,,¡;ryeta.
tine 7, from bottom, read: samrejante.
Page 96, line 5, from bottom, read: from bIS womb.
Page 97, líne 17, after GB. 1. 1. 11 add: (p. 9, 10)
line 20, after GB. 1. 1. 5 add: (p. 5, l)
Page 99, line 9, after RB. 6. 1 add: (p 22, 23)
Page 100, line 12, from bottom, after Ex. ], K 8. 11 (p. 95, 3)
add tbe Remark:
The exact meamng of (an)anita 15 uncel'tam. Caland on ApQ. 6. 29. 2
rellders devanam anitah III the passage K 12 7 (p. 169, 20) = 10.5 (p 129,
13) = 8. 11 (p 95, 9) anUo t'á em detanarh ya ahttlignir, adanty asya
'»nmn, 'Wer seme Feuer gegrundet hat, 1st van den Góttern akzepuert (?),
SIe essen seine SpeIse'.
Hne 7, from bottom, after GB. 1. 1. 4 add: (p 4, 3).
Page 103 after tbe last lme from bottom add·
áptam AV. 5. 2 7 aptyam RV. 10. 120. 6; AV 20.107
9, Nn 11. 21
kaustha K. 38 12 (p 116,8) kausfhya TA. 6. 5.2; APG. 16,6. 4;
MQ.6 1. 2
tad TS 4 7 15.7,AQ.6 221, HG. tyad RV 4.12.6, 1l.126.8; MS.
1 8.3 3.16 5 (p. 192, 9); 4.11.1 (p. 161,
11); K. 2. 15 (p. 21, 16); 9. 19
(p. 123, 16).
varunad ApQ 7.21. 6; LQ. 2.2. 11 t:arunyád RV. 10. 97. 6; AV. 6. 96.
2, 7. 112.2; VS. 12.90
Page 104, Hne 16, from bottom, at tbe end of the Remark to § 48,
Ex. 8, add:
QB.4. 1.5.3 ra'yata correspond!> to JB 3.121-122 (JAOS. 26, p. 58)
raryatya.
Instead oC MS. 3. 8. 4, (p. 98, 20, Schroeder's text nil'vaske, varo lect.
níl'varske), Ap<;:. 10. 20. 6, KQ. 22 3. 5 mrvraska all the mss. oC Rudra·
325
COlrectlOns and AddltlOnS.
daUa's Commentary on ApQ. and the ValJayanti read nirvraskya, Rlr.\!.
atiplavraskya, ef. Caland on Apl¡. 10.20 6 and ZDMG. 72, p. 9, 35-38.
lnstead of rtviya   Apastamba (ApQ. 3. 1. S; S. 4. 6, ApDh. 2. 2
5. 17) reads rtva, cf Bubler, SBE. 2, p. XIV, Garbe, PI eface to ApQ. p. VII
Ap9 16.34.4 erroneously (Bloomfield. AJPh.27, p. 415) reads annama-
dhyehi for annamad dhehi, for K. 40. 5 (p. 169, 6) annavad dheht.
Page 105, lme 10, aEter GB. 2. 6. 11 arld: (p. 261, 1). And after
'of the Bibl. lnd: add: and Gaastra's texto
Page 106, line 11, froro bottom, after GB. 1. 1 1 add: (p. 1, 5).
Page 107, line 31, after KB. 6. 2-9 add; (p. 23, 7; 11; 16; 22;
p. 24,4; 10; 16; 22). '
Page 108, Hne 2, after KB. 7. 2 add: (p. 29, 9).
Page 109, Une 3, froro bottom, after KB. 30. 5 add; (p. 144, 9).
Page 111, line 10, from bottom, at the end of the Reroark to Ex. 11,
after 'below Ex. 27' add: and § 60, Ex. 81 A., Rem.
Page 113, line 24, read: krtam
Hne 26, after ApQ. 14. 30. 3 add:
And cf. also PB. 4. 1. 9 where sat kratün of the Bibl. Ind. should be
ernended to sar) rtün (Caland, ZDMG. 72, p. 19,40) and ApQ. 10.25. 1
where devebhyah 7cratün should be ernended to devebhya rtün (Caland's note)
Hne 29, last word, read: hotrkanam
Page 116, lme 24, read: Katy.
Page 117, line 15, read: anuvisrjya.
Page 117, line 20, after tad eva .. jahe insert:
KB. 7. 4 (p. 30, 6) sa ha sa ligo 'lo varsliim ddha itan va k{it'yah
khand¡ vlt yii)flaseno yo va sa asa sa sa lisa, <Thls (blrd) was e1ther Ula
Vársnivfddha, or Hant Kávya, or Qil..han4m YáJfiasena, or he was whoever
he was'.
Page 118, tine 9, read: yat;as
Hne 12, from bottom, after JB. 1. 123 add: (Caland,
Auswahl, p. 30)
line 9, from bottoro, after JB 1. 135 add: (Caland, Aus-
wahl, p. 38).
Page 122, line 8, froro bottom, after JAOS 18, p. 42 add : (Caland,
Auswahl, p. 261).
Page 128, line 15-16, read: when it i8 being collected.
Page 129, line 10 and Hne 11 read: KB 26. 11 instead of 30. 11.
Page 130, Hne 14, froro bottom, after' .' puts outside of hilll'
add:
326
Correchons and AddltlOUS.
Cf tbe Brahmana quotation (vi.Jñéiyate) at ApQ. 21. 1. 9 yad a8yO
'ñganalh In/yate Juhoty eva tat
Page 131, line 6, after mayy astt add'
And ef. Caland, ZDMG. 72, p. 8, 32-35, p. 9.
Page 133, line 17, after tadrQo jayate add the note:
ThlS Vlew dlffers from QB 6. 6. 1. 6 yadrg vai yonau retah swyate
tttdrg Jiiyate, 7.4 1. 1 yiid1fiid vaz jiiyate tttdrññ el'a bhavati (ef Brhat
Sainh 75. 2) the character of the bemg whlch to ba born slmply
depends on the seed which is casto
line 27, read :prano.
Page 134, line 20, at tbe end of the Remark to Ex. 5, after putro
jajñe add:
K. 26. 1 (p. 122. 7) ahrftamukhy asya (ef. Caland, ZDMG 72, p. 12)
)ayate, PB. 8. 7 11 mana (the Commentary = manasI'mam putram) eva
'syií (read asyai, Caland on ApQ 13. 15. 11) ta] janayanti.
Page 138, line 14, froID bOttOIll, after 'MS. 1. 4. 12 (p. 62, 6) etc:
add . purnam me mo 'padasat, AG. 2. 2. 3
line 11, from bottom, after JB. 3. 220 add: (Caland,
Auswabl, p. 302, s. KaQvayana)
Page 141, line 13, from bottom, after JB. 2. 372 add: (Caland,
Auswabl, p. 208).
Page 142, line 11, froro bottom, read MS. 2. 1. 11 (p. 12, 19).
Page 146, line 8, froro bottom, after 2.9. 9 add:
TS. 1. 5.8.4; TB. 2.2 3.5; 2. 2 11. 1; 2; MS. 1. 9. 8 (p. 140, 6); 1
8. 3 (p. 118,12; 13); 3.7.9 (p. 89,5-6), TB. 3.8.13.3; TS 7.1. 8. 1
{bis); TB. 3. 9. 22. 2; K. 8.7 (p. 91, 2); TS.5 3.4.6 (bis); 7; TB 1. 3. 2
4 (ter); TS. 7. 4. 5. 4, PB. 25. 7. 4 (whele a,   should be read for
et¡arh of the Bibl. Ind, Caland, ZDMG. 72, p. 23), MS. 3. 1. 9 (p. 12, 2)
where kamáyeta 'sya should be read; Caland, ZDMG.72, p. 7)
Page 149, line 8, read : (below, § 59, Ex. 181).
Page 150, line 4, from bottom, read: juhott.
Page 152, lme 6, after aprayate add:
TB. 2. 1. 2. 12 yatha 't,thaye pradrutaya .•• aharf¡am ha1 anti might
also be cIted in favou!" of Weber's vlew.
Page 154, line 19, read: MS. 3. 2. 3 (p. 18, 5)
Page 155, line 3-4, read bhütva
line 8, read: (month)
Page 161, line 3, read: RB. 12. 4 (p. 55, 3).
Page 163, line 12, froro bottom, read: JB. 2. 269.
Page 164, line 19, read: anomalous
327
Corrections and AddItiolls.
Hne 5, from bottom, read:
1me 3, froro bottoro, read: K. 13. 3 (p. 182, 18).
Page 165, Hne 23, at the end of the Reroark to Ex. 57 after-
"Locative oí Time" add: And cf. § 60,
Ex. 34, p. 204, 26.
Page 166, line 16, read: TS. 6. 4. 11. 2.
Page 169" 1ine 4, froro bottom, read .. _ arrived; he ...
Page 170, 1me 16, at tbe end oí the Remark to Ex. 86, add:
The trans1atlOn   (an embryo) IS born' follows the Commentator's-
yatha loke samvatsarena pürno garbho kale sukhena jayate. But as VfJa-
yate, passlve1y used, does not appear to oeeur elsewbere in the older
prose Wackernage1 suggests the rendermg: 'As (a wlre) ls (properly) de1i-
vered'. Delbruck, Altmd Synt. p.388, p. 19-20, renders 'wle m.an sleh
fortpflanzt'
Page 171, Hne 10 read· anagatam
line 5, from bottoro, read r;;aifllrayor
Page 176, line 8, read: Wackernagel, Altind. Gr l, § 103.
Page 181, tine 19, (Ex. 155), read: 2.431.
Page 184, line 30, read : Syntax.
Page 186, 1me 10, from bottom, note 1, read: mstead. And at
the end of note 1 add:
Wackernage1 notes: 'apiya·, atm'iya- sIDd gegenuber ap!la-, atmya- doeh
gewlli sekímdar und \Vlederum das -eya- der MS und der Kap S. gegen-
uber dem -iyet- des K. Verstehe leh recht, so tuhren Ekata, Dvita und
Tnta so\Voh1 dIe Bezelebnung .lIs Almyas als dIe als Apyas. Das sehemt
3uf tolgendes zu fuhren
Indo-nan. (awest. a3wya-')
,
amd. tilmyá- amd. iiptyá-
I
amd lipyá-
d. h. das ererbte Wort *litpyá- wurde emerseJts dureh EIsatz des p mIt
m, anderel seits durcb Metathese des tp zu pt dero mdischen W
angepaEt, dIese Anpassung "1st alsdann m der Forro apya- noeh weiter
durchgeführt' .
Page 189, line 7, from bottom, read.
Page 196, !ine 22, read : 'as it .
Page 201, line 20, read .. the east'.
Page 203, line 6, from bottom, read:
Page 208, line 21, at the end of the Remark to Ex. 56, add:
328
In favour o{ the nominative llylikhyatah, tone to whom somethmg has
been explamed' Waekernagel cItes namaskrta tone to wbom honour has
CorrectlOns and AdditlODS.
been paid' to \/ kr and namas wlth datJve, and nip¡ ta 'one to whom the
Manes offermg has heen offered', to V 1 pr + ni wlth datIve; bui the
Commentary to AQ. 2. 7. 1 (the only passage where niprta occurs) mprUin
anumantrayeta mterprets níprta as 'offered as (or In the manner of) a
• Manes offenng', supplymg ptndan and contrastIng mpr tán wJth hután
(lnpürtán eva pllidán anumantrayate na hután tty et'am artham mpltán
ily ucyate). For other peculiar uses ofthe past partlClple cf § 60, Ex 115.
Rem., p.221-2:12.
Page 208, after line 6, froID bottoID, add:
< 2 ga 'sing' + Vt >
57 A. a va etat patny (the mss paty) 'ttdgatuk (var. lect.
gaturh) prajarh dalle yad vzgite (var. lect. virglte) suman
samkhyapayanti, 'In that they cause (the wife) to be
looked at (by the Udgatr-priest) when tbe Sarnan is
partly sung thereby the wlfe takes for herself offspring
froID the Udgatr-priest'. JB. 1. 173.
Caland, on Ap\!. 13. 15. U, renders· 'Indero ruan, wenn das Saruan zuro
TeIle gesungen 1st, die belden sICh gegenseItlg anbhcken lafit, mmmt Sle
die NachkommensGhaft des Udgatr weg'.
For !he ablatIval gemtIve wlth v' dá + a ef. above § 49, Ex. 11 ano
27, and e. g. K. 37 11 (p. 92, 12-13) etabhir vat devatabhzs sayu)yena
deva asural¡illn ra?tram adadatai 'tabhir eva devatabhts salJu)yena bhra-
trvyad ra?tram adaya .. , the details of thls varIaban between gemtJve
and ablatlve wIll be dlseussed under Gemtiva wlth Verbs of Separation.
Wlth salhkhyapayanti the aeeusa.tiv; patnim and the mstruruental ¡¡d-
gatl·a should be supplied; cf the YaJus udgatriJ, patnlm (<;;B. 4. 4. 2 17
and K/). 10. 6. 20 omlt patn'im) samkhytipoya Apt,;;. 13. 14. 11 (Caland:
'Lafi dle Herrm des Hauses mIt dem Udglitr Bhcke wechseln'), ano TS.
ti. 5.8. 6 udglitra [patn'im]   prajapntw va yad 1tdgata,
pl"U)anam pra)ananaya; \!B. 4. 2. 2. 18 tam [patnlm] Udgiitl á samkhya-
payatt; PB 8.7. 12 udgatra pntn¡h sUlhhhyapayantt, ,·etodheyaya; K.26.
1 (p. 122, 4) ¡¡dgütra patnim sarhkhlfapayatt < Dlfferently MS. 4. 5.
(p. 68, 5) sar¡¡k()apyamano t-a udgata patnya reta adatte where a¡l emen-
dation to samkr;apyamünti va udgátra patny ti reto datte might be sug-
gested. > Slmilady QB. 3. 3. 1. 11 athat 'nar¡¡ (and tasm{J,d enlim) [pat-
nim] somakráyanyá smhkhyapayati¡ K. 24. 4, (p. 93, 18) soma7crayanya
patnhh samkhyapayatt, MS. 3. 7. 7 (p 84, 8) yat soma7crayanya patn'im
sam7cr;apayantt.
For vigUe eC. 2. 1. 11 ya8ya vat dhuro vigUas tasya samgUah. 12.
yasya vá eta baMspavamane vig'iya 'ntara 'jyesu salhgayanti tasya vai
dhllro vigfttls tasya samgUah, where the Comruentary glosses vigttah by
prthag gltah; and JB 1. 262 (m fine) tad ahur: vtgeya dhu1·a3 na mgeya3
ftt, vtgeya ftyahuh, 266 .. ya evam vidván dhuro na vigayati 'ti, sa yadt
329
COl rections and Addlbons
vigayed ado vidvan vigayed yady U na vIgayed na vlgayet,
318 tiúh 'tam eke pm1ktim vigayanti, ., tad u ho 'vaca rlityayamr.
ya etam vigayanti tata idam garbhli muhyantt . , tad lihus' savlidya  
dhuro vigayed ya eniis samgiiturh vidyad .ti, tad dhal 'ka lihUl'
pavamline vava vayam vigliyantas samgayamah. itt,.. atha hal 'ka
iihur. ajyesv eva vayarh vigliyantas slllhgliyiima iti, 320 a¡'dhukam asmal
sviiyam }anatiiyiim bhavatl ya evanl vldviin dhuro na v¡gayliti 'tI, tasmiid
yadi 'tara dhuro vIgiiyed vy eva 'jyadhw'(u,; ca pavamanadhurap ca gayed
tti, tad u ho 'vaca ¡;atyiiyanir' Vlkarsanta etc dhul'o ye vigayanti lti
Page 211, last line from bottom, read: grhe.
Page 214, Hne 11, at the end of the Remark to Ex. 80, add:
Wackernagel quenes. 'Kame mcht auch dIe Ubersetzung "MIIilgeschlCk
mit emem MiI3geschICk begleüen" in Betracht? Sie steht allerdmgs mIl
dem Kommentar in WllIerspruch'.
Page 217, line 4, read: y 1 pet.
Page 221, between lines 11 and 12 add:
For the present functlOn of the aOrJSt akah cf. Wbitney Gr. § 930, Del·
brück, Altmd. Synt. § 166, 2 (p 287-289); and above § 9, Ex. 3, below
§ 73, Ex. 14.
Page 222, line 22, read: va'tf!Vadevam
Page 225, line 3, from bottom, at the end of note 2, add:
Wackernagel notes: 'lo der klasslscheo (aber, wie es schemt ooch nicht
m der epIscheo) Sprache wird uberhaupt anv-isyati für ami tCChatl gebr,lucht,
dIe Bedeutung "senden" war klasslsch bei tsyah nur mlt pra lebendig
gebliebeo, cf. PW'.
Page 226, Jine 27, add:
(12) At JB. 2. 26 (Caland, Auswahl, p 131) anu mam atape 'tt prthIV'i
priiyacchat JcsemUlh ca vimokam ca, 'tha ha 'pah ¡;reyas'ir memre, tah
pratt vayam iitapama iti yatriim ca prayiim ca priiyacchan, 'The earth
bestowed on him (= Adltya) rest and uoyokmg (saymg): "Heat me al!
along", then the waters themselves beUer; they bestowed on
mm Jouroeyiog aod gomg-forth (saymg). "We will heat (VIZ. with the
reflected rays of the suo) toward thee''', herna 1:5 combmed with vunoka,
añd both are cootrasted with yatrá and prayá.
Page 230, Jine 11, from bottom, read: BesItz.
Page 231, Hne 23, read:
Page 232, hne 6, from bottom, add to the Remark :
330
lo Vlew of the parallel passage TS. 3. 4. 10. 3-4 (above, Ex. 115) yad
yukte Juhuyad yathii prayiite vastav lihutint Juhott tiidl'g eva tat aod the
Commentator's gloss ttbhayayoge hi prayiillasya nil¡pannatvan na 'yam
prayasyan bhavati it may he querled whether the readmg of MS. should
not be emended to na sarvesft yuktesu hotavyam, aviistau Juhuyat, 'The
oblatlOn should not be offered wheo all Ithe ammals) are yoked, for so
Correcbons and AdditlOns
he would offer the oblatlOn in a place which is no (\onger) a hornestead';
M5. avastatt would tben be eqUlvalent lo TS. PI ayate vastau (Comment.
ayaJñader;e lal¿hke).
Page 241, lme 28 (left column) read: GB. 2. 5. [)
line 5, from bottom, after (be1ow, § 62, Ex. 20) add.
KB. 13. 1 (p. 57, 23) atisl)ante hut GB. 2. 2. 18 (p. 184,2) atlsrjunt!
Page 245, lme 5, from bottom, read: parisarakam
¡me 3, -from bottom, read: "Parisaraka"
Page 257, Hne 3, from bottom, read: 'tbe  
Page 263, last line from bottom, read: (p. 55, 3; 6).
Page 272, Jine 8, read: MS 3. 6. 10 (p. 73, lo).
Page 274, Hne 13, from bottom, read: Qafikb Ar.
Page 282, line 7, from bottom, read:
Page 287, Hne 13, read: raJñl.
Page 288, line 8, read' K. 10. 11 (p. 139, 2).
Page 289, line 7, from bottom, read
Page 290, line 21, read: etc.
Page 293, line 25, read: (AB. 2. 15. 4; Ex. 2).
Page 301, Une 9, from bottom, read' 'one ...
Page 311, after line 8, add tbe Remark:
For the pl'esenL force of the aonst pratyavligrah'it er. WhIlney, Gr.
§ 930, Delbruck, Altmd § 166,2, p. 287 -289, and above § 9, Ex 3;
§ 60, Ex. 115. As Whüney no Les, the MS. is especlally fond of thls use
of tbe aorlsL, more tban three bundred mstances bemg found ID thls text
At MS. 1. 5. 10 (p 79,3), 1. 5. 11 (p. 79, 10 and 17); and 2 3.2 (p '29. 4)
lhe avarttnddha of Schroeder's text should be emended Lo aVliruddha, and
this should he lead at MS.3. 7 1 (p. 75, 17) for Schroeder's avliraddha;
and aL MS. 3. 1. 4 (p 5, 3) Schroeder's avzndat should be emended to aVldat
Page 312, line 5, from bottom, after K. 8. 4 (p. 87, 12 fr.) add:
Llterally apa tad adadhydt 18 'be would tbus take (tbe fuel) away (froIn
the lire)'. cr. KB. 9. 6 (p. 44, 9-10) net prlinad atmlinam apadadhani,
KB. 17. 7 (p 77, 22); 25. 12 (p. 118, 14) net pranebhya iitmiinam apa-
dadhani < GB. 2 5.4 (p. 230, 16), the parallel passage to KB. 17 7 (p. 77,
22), has net pranebhya atrnlinam antarglit [read so for antaragát of GaasLra's
ed., varo lect antaragat, whIle a few instan ces of mli wIth augmented
aOflst are quotable from the old prose (Wbltney, Gr. § 579, e) an augmented
forrn atter ned would he unique.l> The compouDd root dhti + apa,a should
be added to Delblück, Altmd. Synt. § 238, p. 447, 1.
Page 313, Hne 18, read: under Ex. 5 and 6
Page 316, Une 4, 1eft column, read: samrddham.
331
Indioes.
l.
Index of Subjects.
a- (prlvalIve) = 'not properIy', § 48,
Ex. 40, § 49, Ex 22
Abbreviation
of compounds, § 26, Ex. 17, Rem.;
§ 60, Ex 159, Rem, H, 3
of phrases, § 48, Ex. 46, Rem.; § 49,
Ex 34, Rem; § 60, Ex. 22, Rem.
abhakslta 'that from which one has not
drunk', § 60, Ex. 115, Rem
abhaye § 60, Ex. 70, Rem.; Ex. 73, Rem.
abhl, confuslOn wJth adht, § 62, Ex. 8,
Rem
abhlbhüyah (mascuIme), § 29 A, Ex. 32
G, Rem
abhtmrta § 57, Ex. 19, Rem.
Ablative
  germs of, § 44
antlClpated by a pendent nommatlve,
§ 21
dlsJunct, § 43-44
double, wlth V bh'i, § 11, Ex. 9, Rem.
proleptJc use of, § 43
vanabon between conJund ablabve
and absolute locative, § 44, k; § 66,
Ex 60, Rem.
vanation between gemtJvaI and abIa-
tJvaI constructions, § 4!), Ex 11,
Rem. (m fme) , Ex. 27, Rem.
AbsoIute
ablallve, germs of, § 44
accusatJve § 36-n8
cases, defimtJon of, § 2; § 5
gemhve § 47-55
gerund § 71-75
mstrumental, germs of, § 40
Iocabve § 57-67
nommatJve § 25- 26
V § 11, Ex. 13 with Rem.
332
Accusabve,
absoIute § 36-38
antlCipated by a pendent nominabve,
§ 19-20 A
cognate, wIth V pus, V rdh, ./ radh
§ 17, Ex. 2, Excursus.
cognate, as subJect of an absolute
locabve, § 66, 4, a
of content § 17, Ex 2, Excursus,
of content with V yat + sam § 60, Ex.
109-113
01 content, as subJect of an absolute
locative, § 66, 4, a
dlsJunct § 30-37
pecuhar use of, wlth V biidh + ms and
V stabh + apa § 62, Ex 10, Rem.
pecuhar use of, wlth V bhü + sam
§ 51, Ex 7, Rem
plural apah § 31, Ex 8, Rem.; § 60.
Ex. 135, Rem.
proleptic § 30-35 A
of tIme § 27, 9
achadtrdarr;a § 59, Ex. 8 B; § 60, Ex.
113, Rem.
Active force of past partJclples, § 60,
note mtroductory to Ex. 121 and Ex
124; Correctlons and Additions to
p.38,17.
Active and middle voices, variabon
between, § 59, Ex. 17, Rem, § 60,
Ex. 156, Rem.; § 62, Ex. 20, Rem ;
§ 63, Ex. 3, Rem. (m fine);
Active and passive VOlces, variabon
between, § 68, 2, Rem.
adevayaJana (not in pw.) § 60, Ex 126,
Rem.
adhvarakalpa (ist1) § 62, Ex. 44, Rem.
adh1, confuslOn wlth abht, § 62, Ex. 8,
Rem.
IndICes.
adi (part of saman), § 60, Ex. 193, Rem.
AdJective, varlatIOn of, wtth dahve,
§ 59, Ex. 142, Rem.
Advelbs, hypostasls of adverbs and
adverbial phrases, § 59, Ex 8, Rem
'I! ah, construchon of, wlth ztt, § 60, Ex.
159, Rem. B.
mt (mterJechon) for et, § 26, Ex. 8, Rem
a)ñaniidhyapanam, § 60, Ex. 115, Rem
p.230
akar;a, as macrocosmlc. parallel to pra'
na, § 51, Ex 5, Rem
  In legends, § 49, Ex. 32,
Rem. .
amnah (wJth cerebral n), § 73, Ex 15,
Rem.
amutrabhuyah (mascullne), § 29 A, Ex
32 G, Rem
Anacolouthon § 1, Rem. (in fine)
In enumerahons, § 27, 6
In relatlve clauses, § 28-29
aniijñiitam (adverb) § 27, Ex. 1 Rem.
anaparudhya, 'thul from WhlCh one
may not be dnven away', § 60, Ex.
115, Rem
anapoddhilrya, 'that trom whlCh noth·
mg should be omltled', § 60, Ex 115,
Rem
aniistre, § 60, Ex. 70, Rem., Ex. 73,
Rem.
anavadhrtam (advelb) § 27, Ex 1, Rem.
anrdhyamilne § 61, Ex. 25, Rem.
antarhasta (nol m pw) § 74, Ex. 1,
Rem.
antarhastina § 74, Ex. 1, Rem
Antecedence of actIOn emphaslzed by
urdhvam § 60, Ex 99, Rem
anupahüta, 'that to WhlCh one has not
been mVlted', § 60, Ex. 115, Rem.
anvarabdha (wIth actIve force) § 60,
Ex 121 and 122; Corrections and
AdditlOns to p 38, 17
anviiyatta, constructIOn of, § 59, Ex
101, Rem
AorIst, wlth present fu n ctIOn, § 9, Ex.
3; § 60, Ex 115, § 73, Ex. 14 (wrth
the Corrections and Additions to
thls passage)
vanatIOn hetween first and fourth,
§ 60, Ex 130, Rem
ap 'water', .
accusative apah, § 31, Ex. 8; § 60,
Ex. 135
accusatIve apah omitted as obJect
WIth v' i + ab7u-ava, § 60, Ex.
22, Rem.
v' iip,
samMt.9al'am iiptt'a § 59, Ex. 86. § 60,
Ex 4, Rem.
iiptvil sthlte § 68, 4
apabhuta, § 73, Ex U
aparyagmkltam (adverb) § 27, Ex 1,
Rem
apastambha § 62, Ex 10, Rem. (In fine)
apendra § 60, Ex 202, Rem.
apl iiya¡;ctttzkrt § 68, 1
aptvil sthite § 68, 4
Aptya and Apya, Corrections and
AdditlOns to p 186, note 1.
al and r, confuslOn of, § 29, Ex. 24,
Rem. (In fine)
v' as + upa. con structlOn of, v. Ilh tti,
§ 60, Ex 159, Rem G, 3.
asamavahztam (adverb) § 27, Ex 1,
Rem.; § 69, e.
asañga § 11, Ex 9
asuramaye (dual) § 48, Ex 30, Rem
atha, separa tes dIsJunct cases from the
mam verb, § 3,1, h; § 7, h; § 65, a
atman (reflexlve pronoun) In the plUl al,
§ 59, Ex 175, Rem
Atmya, Corrections and Additions to
p. 186, note 1
atra, separates dlsJunct cases from the
maIn verb, § 7, b; § 65, b
atyantam (adverb) § 27, Ex. 9 A, Rem
AuxIlmry verbs § 68, 4
Y car § 10, Rem.
y stha § 9, Ex. 4, Rem.; § 26, Ex. 11,
Rem , § 31, Ex. 16 Rem.; § 68, 4,
Rem.
y vas § 50, ¡';x. 27, Rem.
avarunam (adverh) § 60, Ex 4, Rem
(m fine)
avarsatt (PW as absolute 10catIve) § 61,
Rem after Ex 37 B.
avasatlvrta, 'tbat over whlCb tbe Vasat·
cal! has not been pronounced', § '6U,
Ex 115, Rem.
avzcchmnam (adverb) § 27, Ex 1, Rem
avyavacchznnam (adverh) § 27, Ex 1,
Rem
ayogalvsema § 60, Ex 102; Ex. 115, Ex-
cursus
v' badh + nzs. constructlOn of, § 62,
Ex 10, Rem
ba1 hu/ad for ba r hlhsad, § 60, Ex 248,
Rem
bh and dh, confuslOn of, § 62, Ex 8]
Rem.
333
Indices.
bhagam omItted wlth V vad, § 48, Ex.
46, Rem.
bha(ga)van wlth second person of verb,
§ 60, Ex 159, Rem, E, b (p 251, 16)
V bhi wlth double ablabve, § 11, Ex. 9,
Rem.
V bhü + apa § 73, Ex. 13
V bhü + sam, wrth accusative, § 51,
Ex 7, Rem
bhuman (femmme),:;Corrections and
Addihons to p 59, 9
·bhuya, as second member of a Tat-
purusa, § 29, Ex. 32 G, Rem. p. 66
Brachylogy, see under AbbrevlatlOn and
Omlsslon.
V brü,
constructlOn of, wlth § 60, Ex.
159, Rem., F, and H, 1
wIth accusabve = Oto say of, concer-
nmg, someone', § 37, Ex. 3, Rem.;
§ 38, Ex. 1, Rem
·bl'uvána as second member of a
compound, § 60, Ex. 159, Rem., H, 1
(m fine)

" confuslOn wJth 8 and 8, 9 59, Ex. 159,
Rem ; § 60, Ex. 156, Rem ; § 76,
Rem.
conlusion wIth v, § 59 Ex. 231, Rem.
rabala, § 59, Ex. 48
V caks + a, constructlOn 01, wlth
§ 60, Ex 159, Rem , A
V caks + Vt - a, wlth gemtive, § 48,
Ex. 46, Rem.
wIth and wIthout vacam § 48 Ex 46,
Rem.
Calhng, constructlOn of verbs of, with
itf, § 60, Ex. 159, Excursus
V 2 'be qUlet', causahve passlve
of, § 62, Ex 70, Rem.
+ a, wIth locabve, § 63, Ex. 3,
Rem.
V car, as auxllIary verb, § 10, Rem.
casiila (neuter), § 27, 5
Cases, absolute, § 2; § 5
conjunct and dlsJunct, defined, § 1
dlsJunct, § 2-7
l,niluence of an accompanylllg parb-
clple or gerund on the mdepen-
dence of the case, § 3, 1, c, § 4-6
pendent § 2; § 4
proleptic § 2, § 3
slgns oí severance from the rest of
the clause, § 7
catustana for catuhstana, § 62, Ex. 8,
Rem.
334
Causal force of the locabve absolute, § 64
  § 60, Ex 113, Rem.
Cognate, accusabve § 17, Ex 2, Excursus.
accusahve as subJect of an absolute
locahve, § 66, 4, a
instrumental, § 17, Ex 2, Excursus,
C, Rem.
"CompletlOn", "befo re the completIon
of sacrIfice" and the like, § 59,
Addendum after Ex. 237; § 60, Ex 4,
Rem.
Compounds, Dvandva, § 60, Ex. 115,
Rem.
Compound verbs resumed hy sImple
verbs, § 26, Ex. 18, Rem
Compound instead of 10catIve absolute,
§ 60, Ex. 202, Rem.
Concatenabon of sentences by means
of parhclple5, § 70
Concessive force 01 the 10catIve abso-
lute, § 64
ConfuslOn of strong and weak stem-
forms of verbs, § 49, Ex. 14, Rem.
ConJunct cases defined, § 1
ConJuncbonal clauses equivalent to a
10catIve absolute, § 59, Ex 113, Rem ;
§ 60, Ex 38 B, Rem., § 61, Ex. 31,
Rem., Ex. 36, Rem ; § 62, Ex 49,
Rem.' 67; § 69 (m fine)
ConnectlOn of sentences by means of
parbciples § 70
by means of the locatIve absolute § 70
Content, accusatIve of, § 17, Ex 2, Rem
as subJect of an absolute locabve,
§ 66, 4, c
CopulatIve compounds § 60, Ex. 115,
Rem.
v (!ru, wIlh gemtlve, § 51, Ex. 12,
Rem., d
V ,ru + upa, wIth genitive, § 51, Ex.
12, Rem.
§ 59, Ex. 48
d and J, confuslOn of, § 9, Ex, 9, Rem.
d alld v, confuslOn of, § v9, Ex. 231,
Rem
V 1 da + a, wlth omlSSlOn of obJect
accusabve, § 49, Ex. 34, Rem.
wIth ablatIval gemtIve, Corrections
and Additions to p 208, 5 from
l}ottom
wIth adim, § 60, Ex. 193, Rem.
v 1 da + pra wJth stanam § 74, Ex. 15,
Rem.
V 2 da + sam - ava Wlth tanüh, § 55,
Ex.5,Rem
Indices.
dawasura for devtisura § 61, Ex. 10,
Rem
V das + upa, wIth gemtIve, § 51, m-
Rem. to Ex 9 and 10.
Dative, antIclpated by a pendent nomi·
natIve, § 21
datIval use of genitJve, § 3, 1, c; § 53,
Ex. 3, Rem. (in fine); § 55. 4 A, Rem.
disJunct, § 41 - 42
sym patheilc, § 57,. Ex. 17, Rem (m
fine)
valles wJth adJectJve, § 59, Ex. 142,
Rem
wlth vI dha + a, §57, Ex.!7, Rem
wIth ,/ 1 dhti + upa, § 57, Ex 23, Rem.
Demonstrallve prono un, resumptIOn by,
       
devahUyah (masculme) § 29 A, Ex 32 G,
Rem
devasura· daz¡,asura, §61, Ex. 10, Rem
dh and bh, confusIOn of, § 62, Ex 8,
Rem
dh and th, confu;,IOn of, § 59, Ex 111,
Rem
V 1 dha + a, wJth datJve and 10catJve,
§ 5/, Ex 16, Rem.
v' dha + apa - ti, Corrections and
Addltlons to p. 312, lme [) from
bottom.
V 1 dhii + ap¡, wlth stanam, § 74, Ex.
11, Rem.
V 1 dha, wIth nama, construchon of,
§ 60, Ex 159, H, 4
,1 1 dhii + pratt, with stanam, § 74,
Ex. 11, Rem.
\/ 1 ahii + sam - ni, wJth samgrama,
§ 50, Ex 17, Rem
V 1 dha + upa, wJth stanam, § 74, Ex.
11, Rem.
wJth datJve, § 57, Ex. 23, Rem
DlsmtegratIOn of sentences, § 1 , § 3, 1, c
DlsJunct
ablatIve, § 43-44
accusatIve, § 30-37
cases, defined, § 1; § 2-7
datIve, § 41-42
gemtIve, § 45-55
gerund § 71-75
mstrumental, § 39-40
10catIve, § 56-67
nommalIve, § 8-26
- dheya, meamngless second member
of compounds, S 49, Ex 29, Rem.
V aM, dhunoti § 48, Ex. 23, Rem
durmsprapattaram, § 29, Ex. 32 G,
p. 64,4
Dvandva - compounds wlth masculine
smgular termmatwn, § 60, Ex. 115,
Rem
Enumerahons, anacolouthon In, § 27, 7
et (mterJectwn) § 26, 8. Rem
eva and   confuswll of, § 9, Ex. 21,
Rem.
"Expu atwll", "dt the expiratwn of a
year" and the llke, §59, Ex.55, Rem j
Ex 57, Rem.; Ex. 86, Rem., § 60,
Ex 4, Rem.
"Fadt per ahum, faelt per se", § 74,
Ex 10, Rem.
Fmlle use of partIciples, § 10, § 20 A,
Ex 1 Aj § 27, Ex. 2, Rem
Future,
gendelless masculme m the penphras-
tIc future, § 59, Ex. 93, Rem (m fine)
ImperatIval, § 34, Ex 1, Rem
V 1 ya 'go' + Vt, wlth Instrumental and
accusatIve, CorrectlOns and Addi-
tions to p. 57, 15
V 2 ga 'smg' +   Corrections and
Additions to p. 208, Ex. 57, A wüh
Rem_
v' gam, wJth prthtvim, § 60, Ex 194.,
Rem
V gam + ava, § 11, Ex. 4, Rem.
Gender,
casala (neuter) § 27, 5
genderless masculIne 'i9varah, § 29,
Ex 24, Rem (m fine)
genderless masculIne In the perl-
phrastJc future, § 59, Ex. 93, Rem
(m fine)
mascuhne pleva!ls over feminine,
§ 31, Ex 10, Rem
samsrsta (neuter), § 9, Ex 5, Rem.
SUfflX ·m, neuter oí adJectlves m
-In, Corrections and Additions to
p. 86, 2 from bottom.
GemtIve,
absolute § 47-55
antIcipated by a pendent nommative,
16
datlval functwn of, § 3, 1, e, § 53,
Ex. 3, Rem (in fine); § 55, Ex 44,
Rem
dlsJunct § 45-55
proleptic § 45-46
ShOft form sarilgatiim for sarngatii-
namer), § 29, Ex 21, Rem.
335
Indlces
varlahon hetween gemtlval and ah-
lahval constructlOns, § 49, Ex. 11,
Rem. (m fine), Ex 27, R('m
wlth verbs of separahon S 49
w11h v' caks + vi - ti, § 48, Ex. 46,
Rem.
w11h v' fru, § 51, Ex 12, Rem , d
wIlh v' ¡;ru + upa, § 51, Ex. 12, Rem.
wJth v' das + upa § 51, Introductroy
Rem to Ex. 9
with v' han + pra, § 59, Ex. 51, Rem
• wlth v' Jan, S 51, Ex. 5, P 134; § 53
Ex 3, Rem p 141
wlth v' Jan + ti § 56, Rem
wüh v' Jan + pra § 51, Ex. 6, Rem
wlth v' kl and mima § 48, Ex. 35 Rem
wIlh pa¡;clit § 23, Ex 1, Rem
Wlth v' 1 PI 'flll', § 51, Introductory
Rem. to Ex. 11
with v' 1dh + vi § 51, Ex 1, Rem.
wlth v' vadh (badh) + [Jratt, § 48, Ex
46, Rem
Gerund,
disJunct § 71-75
parallel to the instrumental of a con-
Junct parhclple, § 73, Ex 7,
Rem
functlOnally eqUIvalent to an absolute
10catIve, § 74, Ex. 7, Rem
-ti gl h + apt, wlth and wlthout mu-
kham and nas/7ee, § 48, Ex 46, Rem.
v gup, achve VOlce of  
§ 51, Ex. 5, Rem.
JI, omlSSlOn or, § 50, Ex. 27, Rem , § 60,
Ex 159, Rem. A.; Ex. 248 Rem
.1 hti + sam, mth mstrumental, § 3Q, d
V han + upa, Wlth gemt¡ve, § 59, Ex.
51, Rem
hataputra and putmhata and lJUtl e hate,
§ 60, Ex 202, Rem
V hnu, apahnav'ita tor apahnuvUa, § 60,
Ex. 159, Rem F, b (p 252, 20)
V hl + ud, uddhrtya, § 74, Ex 4, Rem ;
§ 75, Ex 2, Rem.
Hypostasls of adverbs and adverbial
phrases, § 59, Ex 8, Rem.
i and 1', confuslOll of, § 76, Rem
v' i + abhí - ava, with obJect apah omito
ted, § 60, Ex 22, Rem
,1 + pra § 5Q, Ex. 231, Rem
v' +   w1th lIlstrumental and aeeu-
sahve, Correetions and Additions
to p. 57, 15
336
'i¡;VU1 a,
genderIess mascuhne § 29, Ex 24,
Rem (m fine)
wlth yad- clause, § 2Q, Ex 26, Rem.
-1'11 (suffix), neutel ad¡ectIves m, Coro
reetlOns and Addlhons lo p. 86, 2
fram bottom.
Infimte velb fOlms, thelr mfluence on
the of the sentence, § 3,
1, c; § 4-6 '
Instrumental,
absolute, germs of, § 39
antIclpated by a pendent nomlllatIve,
§ 17
cQgnate, § 17, Ex. 2, Excursus, e, Rem
of a conJunct present pal trcipIe par-
alleI to a dlsJunct gerund, § 73,
Ex. 7, Rem.
dlsJunct, § 39-40
inclplent ahsoIute lllstr umental of
trme, § 40
of a noun, paralleI to an absolute
10catIve, § 60, Ex 74, Rem
of tIme, § 40, Rem ; § 60, Ex 80,
Rem., § 61, Ex 17, Rem.
wJth ,1 ha + sam, § 39, d
Wltl! v' mud and v' mud + pra, § 63,
Ex. 3, Rem
wlth v' nand, § 39, b, e, § 63, Ex 3
Rem p 294
Intercalary clause5, § 26, Ex. 5, Rem ,
§ 27, 4
v' ¡jO + vz § 59, Ex 231, Rem
isyah § 51, Ex. 7, Rem, p. 13&
itl
'comprehenslve' use of, § 9, Ex. 3,
Rem , § 31, Ex. 6, Rem , Ex 13 E,
Rem.
Haplology of double, § 27, 8, Ex.!,
Rem
ztthasapUl'dnah § 60, Ex 115, Rem,
p 229
iva and eva, confuslOn or, § 9, Ex 21,
Rem.
j and a, confuslOn or, § 9, Ex 9, Rem
J and t, confuslOn of, § 59, Ex. 195,
Rem, § 60, Ex 156, Rem
v' Jan, wlth gemtJve, § 51, Ex. 5, Rem.
p 134, § 5.1, Ex. 3, Rem. p. 141
v' jan + a, wIfh gelllhve and locatíve,
§ 56, Rem
v Jan + pra wlth gemtIve, § 51, Ex. 6,
Rem.
causatlve gerund pra)anayya, § 59,
Ex 175, Remo
Indlces.
V Jan + Vt, passive vi}áyate 'lS horn'(?),
Correetions and Additions to p 170
16 '
kamp + sam - pra, transItive use of,
§ 33, Ex 1, Rem.
kasmiill} ctd bhüte § 59, Ex 111 Rem.
(in fine) ,
rc(X{}' oXov Kai /lÉpOt;, constructzon of,
§ 31, Ex. 10, Rem (m fine)
kh and 8, confu.,JOu of, §2!J, Ex 6, Rem
V khtd + sam, § 11, Ex'1 A, Rem.
y 1chytl + Vt - a, § 60, Ex 56, Rem.
ktktdwIVld'iyayah, § 60, Ex 115, Exeur.
sus, p 229
V kr, thlrd person singular aoríst akat
and aTert, § 29, Ex 24, Rem
y kr + V'I, wlth üdhah, § 68, 5, Rem.
kf!ayavlddhth, § 60, Ex. 115, Excursus,
p.230
ksémya (abnormal aecent) § 60, Ex. 115,
Exeursus, p. 223, note 1
ksemayoga § 60, Ex. 102; Ex 115, Ex-
cursus.
1 and r, intelchange 01', § 51, Ex 7,
Rem.
lela § 57, Ex. 6, Rem
lelaya (adverb) § 57, Ex 6, Rem.
y lI, lelayat, § 29, Ex 39, Rem., § 57,
Ex. 6, Rem
lelaya § 57, Ex 6, Rem
Locatlve absolute § 57-67
causal force of, § 64
conceSSlVe force or, § 64
germs of, § 57 •
meamng oí, § 64
parallel to the Instrumental of a slmple
noun, 60, Ex. 74, Rem
parallel to a dlsJunct gelUnd, § 74,-
Ex. 7, Rem
parallel to a conJunct ablahve, § 44,
k, § 66, Ex bO, Rem
parallel to the simple locatJve of time,
§ 64, p.296
paratactical construchons semantJcally
eqUlvalent to, § 69
predlcate of, § 67
separatlOn of, from the rest of the
sentence, § 65
subJect of, § 66
use or, as a means of connectmg sen·
tenees, § 70
LocatJve,
anbclpated by a pendent nomIllabve,
§ 18
dlslunct § 56-67
() erte 1, The Syntax oC CaE€&
proleptLc § 56
of time § 64
with V'   + a, § 63, Ex 3, Rem.
with v' dha + tí, § 57, Ex. 17 Rem.
with y Jan + a, § 56, Rem
wIth V' 1 abh + anu - a, § 62, Ex. 35,
Rem.
-m (final), ellSlon of, and contractlOn
after, § 50, Ex. 18, Rem.
mahabrahma § 9, Ex. 8, Rem.
Mantra addltlOn to BloomfieJd's Coneor.
dance, § 48, Ex 24, Rem
Mantra rernllllscence § 59, Ex 79, Rem
V mantriiy + d, construction of, wlth
ttt, § 60, Ex 159, Excursus, D
y math, manthitavya and mathztav!l0'
§ 73, Ex 3, Rem
medhyuh for medhah, § 48, Ex 8, Rem.
Mlddle and active VOlces, varIabon be·
tween, § 59, Ex 17, Rem, § 60, Ex
156, Rem ; § 62, Ex. 20, Rem.; § 63,
Ex. 3, Rem. (m fine)
V' mr + ablti, § 57, Ex. 19, Rem.
V' mr¡t + ms, § 60, Ex. 156, Rem
V' mruc + ni, § 59, Ex 162, note 1, p.
182
Y mud and y mud + pra wlth instru·
mental, § 63, Ex 3, Rem
mukham omItted with V 91 h + api,
§ 48, Ex 46, Rem
y mus, V mus + ava, + ms, + ijar¡,
+ p1'a, § 4!J, Ex. 53, Rem.
n, change to cerebral on account of
an r m the precedmg word, § 57,
Ex. 6, Rem , 68, 6, Rem (m fine);
§ 73, Ex 15, Rem.
nama k1. w!lh gemtlve, § 48, Ex 3'i,
Rem
namadheya = nliman § 49, Ex 29, Rem
namaskrtah 'oue to whom honoul has
been pald', Correctiona and Addl·
tions to p 208, ¡me 21
Namlllg, constructlOn of verbs of, Wlth
§ bO, Ex 159. Excursus.
y nand wlth mstrumental, § 39, a, b,
§ b3, Ex. 3, Rem , p 294
nas'ike omltted wIth y 91 h + apt, § 48,
Ex 146, Rem
nastaZbm § 60, Ex. 115, Rem.,
p.225.
ned wüh augmented aorlst, Corrections
and Additione to p 312, lme 5 from
bottom
22
337
Indices.
Neuler of adJeclIves In -in, Correetions
and Additions lo p 8b, 2 from bottom.
ni-, pnvative force of, § 68, 6, Rem
V ni + ava (nol m pw.) § 49,
Ex. 37
niprtal,l 'one lo whom tbe offermg lo
lhe Manes ha<; been offered', Corree-
tions and Addltlons lo p 208, Ime 21.
mrbadha § 62, Ex 10, Rem
Nuukla § 9, Ex. 9, Rem.
mrvarunam (adverb) § 60, Ex. 4, Rem.
(m fine)
ntrt'irya and nwirya § 68, 6, Rem.
  nu¡kasa, § 59, Ex. 15<), Rem.
msthiiva = ni[¡sthiiva, § 60, Ex 159,
Rem. A.
nistyaya = mhstyaya, §50, Ex.26, Rem.
nivtita § 68, 6, Rem.
mVirya and nu v'irya § 68, 6, Rem.
Nommal phrase paraHel \0 an absol1l1e
10catIve, § 60, Ex. 74, Rem.; § 61,
Ex. 30, Rem.
Nommalive
absolute § 25-26
adJecllves and pronOlln<> con&trued
witb lbe subJect nommative, § 59,
Ex 175, Rem (In fine); § 60,
Ex 159, Excursus, H (imt.)
anacoloulhlc, In enumerallOns, § 27,6
apparenl mstances of dlsJunct noml-
natIves, § 27
denotes absence of syntactlcal rela-
tIons, § 4 (m fine)
dlSlunct, § 8-26
pendenl, § 16-24
proleptlC, § 8-15
nyañga, § 60, Ex. 81 A
OmlSSlOn, of subJecl wllh Ihe absolute
locallve, § 66,1
see also under AbbreVlation
  wlth gemtlve, § 23, Ex 1, Rem
wllh accusative, 53, Ex. 3, Rem.
v' pad and v' pat, confuslOn of, Corree-
tions and Additions to p_ 58, 17
v' pad, future actIve and mlddle, § 63,
Ex 3, Rem (In fine), p. 294
v' pad +   § 29, Ex. 14, Rem.
PañcagnlVldya according lo JB., and
companson 01' Ihe four texts on Ibe,
§ 51, Ex. 7, Rem p 136-138.
ParataxIS, § 11, Ex. 12; § 12, Ex. 3,
Rem.; Ex. 6, Rem., § 27, Ex. 4; § 55,
Ex. 4 A, Rem., § b9j § 74, Ex 8.
338
Paratacbcal conslructions semanbcally
eqmvalenL lo an absolule locatlve, § 69
  § 10, Rem p 19
paroksam and paroksena § 27, Ex 3,
no. 1. Rem
ParllCiple,
concatenahon of sentences by means
of, § 70
lIlfluence of an accompanying pal ti-
clple" on the lIltegraLlOn oí the
sentence, §.3, 1, c; § 4-b
lIlstrumenLal of a eonJunLl
parhclple parallel lo a dlsJuncl ge-
lund, § 73, Ex. 7. Rem
pasl, as fimte verb, § 27, Ex 2. Rem.,
wIlh actIve mean 1Il g, § 60, Inlro-
ductory Remalk to Ex 121 and 124¡
Correetions and Addltions lo p. 38,
17,
peculiar use (lf, § 60, Ex. 56, Rem.;
CorreetIons and Additions IQ
p. 208, lme 21; § 60, Ex. 115, Rem.
perfect mlddle as finite verb, § 10
presenl, as fimle verb, § 10, § 20 A,
Ex. 1 A.
Parhcles, separation of dlsJunct cases
from the rest of the clause by means
of, § 7, b
and paryagnau k1
yamane, § 62, Ex. 7, Rem.
Passlve and active VOl ces, varJahOll be-
tween, § b8, 2, Rem
Pendent cases, defined, § 2; § 4
Pendent nommative § 16-24
prahttarll, short toren fOl prahltani'im(?l,
§ :19, Ex 21, Rem
pri'ina, as mlcrocosmlC parallel to  
§ 51, Ex 5, Rem
prathama-, as firsl member of com-
  § 59, Ex 181, Rem
prattkamtn-, prattki'imina-, § 37, Ex. 4,
Rem.; Correetions and Addltions
lo p 86, 2 trom hottom.
pravara wilh v' 2 vr + pra, § 62,
Ex. 56-58
pravargya for pravlJya, § 60, Ex. 159,
Rem, p. 242-243
prayi'ita, 'tbal from whlch one has de-
parted', § 60, Ex 115, Rem
prayate vastau § 60, Ex 115, Rem.
Predlcale of the absolule 10calIve, § 67
ProlepSIs, § 3
Quasl- prolepsIs' § 56
Prolephc cases, defined, § 2; § 3
Prolephc,
ablatlve § 43
Indices.
acmsatIve * jO-35
¡;ellltlVe S 45-46
nonunatIve § 8-15
Pronoun,
wlIstrued wlth lhe subJect nomma-
tlve, § 59, Ex. 175, Rem. (m fine) ;
§ 60, Ex 159, Excursus, H (mIt)
reflexlve (atman) m plural, § 59,
Ex. 175, Rem.
resumptlOn of dlsJunct cases by a
demonstrallve, S 3, 1
V 1 pr wHh gemtlve, § 51, Introductory
Remark lo Ex 11
purastlit wIth   § 53, Ex. 3,
Rem.
V pus with accusatlve, § 17, Ex 2, Ex-
cursus, A
putrahata and hataputra and putre
hate, § 60, Ex 202, Rem.
QuantJty,
abnormal, ofreduplicatmg \'owel, §49,
Ex 14 Rem. (111 fine)
Jengthenmg of final uncontracted - u
before íü, § 51, Ex. 1, Rem.,
p 131, 7-9
Quasl-prolepsls S 56
'Qund qms per ahum facJt facJt per se',
S 74, Ex 10, Rem
r and ar, confuslOn ot, § 29, Ex. 24,
Rem. (m fine)
r and   confuslOn of, § 76, Rem.
r and l, mterchange 01, § 51, Ex. 7,
Rem
r and ra, confuslOn of, § 49, Ex. 14,
Rem
1 and "i, confusion of, § 60, Ex 156,
Rem.
r and re, confusion of, § 60, Ex. 156
Rem. (m fine)
ra and 1, conluSlOn 01, § 49, Ex 14,
Rem.
V 2raks 'mjure', § 32, Ex 6, Rem
V rabh + ami-a
past partlclple wllh active meanmg
§ 60,IntroductoryRemalk to Ex.121
wlth 10catIve, § 62, Ex. 65, Rem.
V rabh + sam-anu-á, past parllciple
wlth active meamng, § 60, Introduc-
tory Remarke to Ex 124
V rádh wlth accusatIve, § 17, Ex 2,
Excursus, B.
V rdh wlth accusatJve, § 17, Ex 2, Ex-
CUlSUS, e
Impersonal use of, § 61, Ex. 25, Rem.
V rdh + v, wlth gemtivp, § 51, Ex. 1,
Rem
re and r, or, § 60, Ex. 156,
Rem. (in fine)
Redundanl y, § 48, Ex. 8, Rem.; Cor-
rections and Addltions to p. 103,
last Ime from boltom, and to p 104,
Ime t6 from boltom
Redundant yad" § 29, Ex. 35
Reduphcating vowel, abnormal quanlIty
of, § 49, Ex. 14, Rem. (m fine)
RefleXl ve pronoun (atman) m plural,
§ 59, Ex. 175, Rem.
Relatlve cla;¡,ses, anatOlouthic construc-
tlOn or, §:lS-29
'ResumptlOn of a compounrl verb by
the sImple verb, § 26, Ex. 17, Rem.
ResumptlOn of a dlSjUnct case
by an adJectwal partlclple, § 7, a¡
§ 23
by a demonstrabve pronoun, § 3,
1, a; § 7, a; § 8-13.
by (e}tasmm kale, § 7, a; § 56;
§ 65, e
by a noun, § 7, a; §22.
alter a yatha - clause § 41, Ex. 2;
§ 45, Ex. 2
rJ and r, confuslOn of, § bO, Ex. 156,
Rem
V rudh + apa, § 11, Ex. 3, Rem.
rüpadheya=riipa, § 49, Ex 29, Rem.
s, OmJSSlOn DI, 62, Ex. 8, Rem
s, 8,   confuslOu or, § 59, Ex. 159,
Rem.; § 60, Ex. 15ó, Rem.; § 76,
Rem
I! and kh, confuslOn of, § 29, Ex. 6, Rem.
s and th, § 27, Ex. 3, no 14, Rem.
V sa 'bllld' accolthng to nu-cIass, p 36, e.
V sa + adhl-ava, S 60, Ex. 115, Rem.
p 2i3
vi ba + In 'set', § 60, Ex 155
sabhaga, § 9, Ex 9, Rem
V sad + uva (causatlve) § 27, Ex 9 A.,
Rem
V sal (sañ)) + a, § 11, Ex 9, Rem.
samant'arabdha § 60, Ex 124
samayavislta § 60, Ex 155
samgatam, short form for samgatlinam (?), '
§ 21), Ex. 21, Rem.
samSl sta (neutel), § 9, Ex 5, Rem
Sandhi,
-s k-, § 49, Ex 35, Rem.
asmákli, 'stJ = asmakam astl, § 50,
Ex. 18, Rem.
22'
339
Indices
áJagdm' et and the hke, § 26, Ex. 8,
Rem.
lengthenmg oí final uneontracted -a
before ttt, § 51, Ex. 1, Rem. p. 131,
7-9
sasya agate § 59, Ex. 93, Rem
Sentence connechon, § 70
Separabon, verbs of, wlth genibve, § 4,9
Separahon of the disJunct case from
the rest of the clause, § 7
Formal separatlOn by
atha, § 3, 1, b (m fine); § 7, b,
§ 65, a
atra, § 7, b, § 65,b
tad anu, § 7, b; § b5, e
tatah, § 7,b; § 2b, Ex 6
a resumptive demonstrabve pro-
no un § 7,a
the resumptlve (e)tasmin kale
§ 56, § b5d
SemanlIL separahon § 7, d
SyntaclIcal separatron § 7, c
SImple verb reSUmes compound verb,
§ 26, Ex. 18, Rem
V skand, varJahon m the formallon of
the aonst, § 60, Ex. 130, Rem
somya, § 35, Ex. 4 A., § 48, Ex. 38 C.
V sphá. past pal'tlciple ·sphUa § 59,
Ex. 88
,1 srj + ud with ahah, § 59, Ex. 154,
Rem
V srJ + vi,
wJlh and without vratam § 48,
Ex. 46, Rem.
wlth sviidhyayam, § 50, Ex 7, Rem.
variatlOn of actIve and mIddle vOlees
wlth vacan¡ § 56, Ex 18, Rem.
V sri:V, eausallve srevayaN, § 68,5
V stabh + apa (not m pw ) § 62, Ex 10,
Rem.
V stha,
as auxlhary verb, wllh gerund, § 9,
Ex. 4, Rem" § 26, Ex. 11, Rem ,
§ 31, Ex. 16, Rem
= 'concede' § 27, 10 Rem
sthJte in the phl'ase áptva sthtte § 68, 4
Strong and weak stem forms oí verbs
confused, § 49, Ex. 14, Rem.
V stu + 11pa - pra (not In pw.) § 59,
Ex 154,
V stu + pra, pregnant use or. § 66,2
,¡stya + ni(s), § 50, Ex. 27, Rem.
SubJect of the absolute locatlve, § 66
'sunnse, after" dlfferent expressions for,
§ 59, Ex 14, Rem.; § 61, Remalk after
Ex. 18
340
'sunset, befare', dlfferent expressJOns
for, § 60, Remark after Ex. 20
svlidk!fli.yam wlth y srJ +   § 50, Ex. 7,
Rem
aya = aham, § 51, Ex. 1, Rem.
St'a1'1jánt, § 11, Ex. 15, Rem.
Sympathehc datlve, § 57, Ex t 7, Rem.
(m fine)
t and d, 'eonfuslOn of, Correctlons and
Addltions to p. 58, 17
and j, confuslOn of, § 59, Ex 195,
Rem., § 60, Ex 156, Rem
tad anu, separation of the dlsJunct case
from lhe rest of the clause by means
of, § 7, b; § 65, c
tadbhüyah (masculme) § 29 A, Ex 32 G,
Rem
tata?l,
equivalent to th€' gemhve·ablatíve
of lbe demonstratIve pronoun, § 26,
\ Ex 6, Rem.
separahon of the dIsjunct case trom
tbe rest of the el.'use by means
of, § 7, b, § 26, Ex 6
compounds wlth -bhüya as
second member § 29, Ex 32 G, Rem
p 66
th and ah, confuslOn of, § 59, Ex 111,
Rem
th and s, § 27, Ex 3, no 14
uksavapáh § 60, Ex 115, Rem p.
uksavehát § 60, Ex. 115, Rem. p
udakacara and udakecara § 16, 1, h
11ddhl tya § 74, Ex 4, Rem.; § 75, Ex 2,
Rem
upahüta 'that to WhlGh one has been
mVlted' § 60, Ex 115, Rem.
upapu1 ana (?) § 60, Ex ()9 A, Rem.
ül'dhvam emphaslzes anteceden ce of
achon, § 60, Ex 99, Rem
1da, mlroduclllg an apodoSIS (?) § 50,
Ex 27, Rem. (in fine)
utkroda, utkrodm § 59, Ex 7i, Rem
v and p, confuslOn 01, § 1)9, Ex 231, Rem.
v and d, eonfusIOn of, § 59, Ex 231, Rem.
y vac, constructlOn of, wllh iti, § 60,
Ex 159, Rem., E, and H, <;:!
11a9a m the phrases sve va¡:e bhüte and
vare sati § 59, Ex 110, Rem.; § 61,
Ex 2, Rem
vacam omItted wJth V cah + vi - ti.
and Wltb V rJadh (badh) +   § 48,
Ex. 46, Rem
Indlces.
tacoyama § 60, Ex. 176, Rem.
v' vad,
constructlOn of, wJth ¡ti, § 60,
Ex. 159, Rem, e and H, 3
with and wJthout bhiigam, § 48,
Ex. 46, Rem
simple v' vad equivalent to the eom-
pounds v' vad + Vt and v' vad +
sam, § 60, Ex. 159, Rem, H, 3
v' "adh (badh) with vacam paraIlel to
vadh (badh) + prati wlthout "acam,
§ 48, Ex. 46, Rem.
v' "adh (badh) + prati wüh gemtive,
§ 48, Ex 46, Rem
valradeya § 13, Ex. 4, Rem.
v' "ap + anu - nís § 38, Ex. 2, Rem.
v' vap + pra, construction of, § 74, Ex 1,
Rem.
v' 1 vas 'shine', past paItlclple -u-
stta, § 59, Ex. 174, Rem.
v' 3 vas 'dwell', as auxl!Jary verb, § 50,
Ex. 27, Rem.
v' 3 vas + upa, § 63, Ex 3, Rem
·Vasat·call', 'before the Vasat·caIl has
been uttered', § 60, Remark after
Ex, 34
vasatkrta, 'that over which the Vasat-
call has heen pronounced, § 60, E.-i.
l1j, Rem
VQstau prayate § 60, Ex 115, Rem.
vastí § 48, Ex 45, Rem.
vayaso. 'ptah, § 60, Ex 159, Rem., A.
vehat § 60, Ex. 115, Rem, p 228
'lit·, pnvatJve force of, § 59, Ex 237,
Rem
+ ni, § 27, Ex. 2, Rem
yvic + sam (not in pw) § 49, Ex. 38,
Rem.
vv¡d and ,I'lita + conslruehon of,
WIlh ti" § 60, Ex 159, Rem., G, 1
and 2
vindra, § 60, Ex. 202, Rem.
§ 60, Ex. 129, Rem. (in fine)
Hsita, § 60, Ex. 155, Rem.
V Olee of verb,
variabon between active and mlddle,
II.
§ 59, Ex 17, Rem, § 60, Ex. 156,
Rem , § 62, Ex. 20, Rem ; § 63, Ex 3,
Rem. (in fine)
varJation belween active and passive,
68, 2, Rem.
y 2 vr + pra wlth pravaru, § 62,
Ex. 56-58
vratam omJtled w1th YSI) + Vt, § 48,
Ex. 46, Rem
yvrs,
construüLOll of, § 61, Ex. 30, Rem.
future   § 59, Ex 231, Rem.
(m fine)
vyakhy¡:Uah, tone to whom something
has been explamed' (?) § 60, Ex. 56,
Rem. , CorrectIons and Addltions to
p 208, lme 21.
vyltSt § 59, Ex. 174, Rem
Weak and strollg stem forms of verbs
confused, § 44, Ex. 14, Rem.
y, redundant, § 48, Ex 8, Rem ; Coro
rections and Additions to p. 103,
last lme from boUom, and to p. 104.
lme 16 from bottom.
-ya, verbal abstr,lcl nouns in, § 29,
Ex 32G, p. 66-67
yya},. constructlon or, wIlh § 60,
Ex. 159, Rem G, 4
yadi, redundant, § 29, Ex. 35
'yah kiirayaft sa:karotl', § 74, Ex 10,
Rem
yyat + aH1t-a, conshuction of, § 59,
Ex 101, Rem.
yyat + sam, with accusatJve of content,
§ 60, Ex lO9-113
yyam + pra and yyam + sam-prate
wlth stanam, § 74, Ex. 11, Rem.
gama § 60, Ex. 57, Rem.
yiimya 'connected wlth Journeylllg',
§ 60, Ex. 115, p. 223, note 1
ydvattarásam § 59, Ex 51 A, Rem.
yogaklferna § 60, Ex 115, Excursus.
Index of Authors.
Apte, p. 230, 26; 231, 1
Arbman, p. 117, note 1; 224, 4 froen
bottoID.
Arnold, p. 268, 30
Aufrecht, p 15,31; 41,32; 71,17, 118,
b; 148,12; 236.18, 241,26,
274, 1; 7; 9
841
IndlCes.
Bartholomae, p. 59, 15, 79, 3 L
Bloomfield, p 79, 38; 106, 17; 163, 13;
Correetions and Additions to p. 58, 17
and to p. 104, tine 16, from bottom
(in fine)
BOhtbngk, p. 11, 15; 18, 18,15; 40,3,
6,41,35; 42,23; 55,8; 62,25, 63,
note 2; 65,35; 41, 66,5; 70,9; 10;
14, 15, 16, 19; 71,19; 84,19; 104,
5; 114,3, 127,1, 141, 2; 8; 13; 195,
30, 200, 43; 2 ~ 9   38,42,230,1; 234,
23; 241, 24, 314. 31
Bubler, p. 11, 17, 230, 24, Correetions
and Additions to p 104, 16 flOm
bottom
Caland, p. 12, 37; 19, 1, 24, 28, 28, 1;
42,8, 56,31; 78,7; 104,19, 109,17;
130,42, 149,12; 28, 154,19; 175,
31,34; 176,41; 181,14; 184, 11;
186, note 2; 194, 19; 195, 31, 211,
note 1; 222, 38, 233, 7 ; 240, 14; 242,
29; 34; 24.3,4, 257, 34, 259,34;
263,17; 267,6, 270,33; 271, last
lme trom bottom, 272,19, 281,12;
36; 301,38; 306, note 1; 311,28;
Correetions and Additions to p. 32,
4 from boltom; to p 38,17; to p.43,
25-30; to p. 54, 15 from bottom,
toO p. 56, 5 from bottom; lo p. 58,
17; to p 71, 1 from boltom, to p.
100, 11 from bottom; to p. 104, 16
from bottom; to p 113, 26, to p.
131,6, to p. 134, 20; to p. 146, 8
from bottom.
Delbrück, p. 3,31; 7,21; 11,16; 12,
3; 19, 6; 9; 28; 34; 36; 22, 12; 23,
42; 31,10, 13, 29; 34, 20, 36,23;
37,22; 38,19; 20; 41,1; 44,3,46,
34; 53, 20; 22; 24; 55,27; 60,22;
23; 37; 76,6, 10; 79,22¡ 26; 92,
4, 7; 42; 101,24; 111, 3!J, 117,38;
120,25, 127,6, 129,2,13; 130,25,
131,25; 138,29; 143,10; 145,25,
148,2'1; 149,5; 16, 156,4; 162, 5,
163,27,165,22; 175,21,184,28;
185,21; 195,31; 196,21; 32, 219,
28; 236,6; 248,6; 251,15, 254,20,
28,255,26; 262,26; 273,19,274,
25, 34; 293,18; 294, 38; 296, 4;
300;'6; 13,15; .304,28; 31; 305,1;
306,16, 307,9, 13,22; Correetions
and Additions to p. 170, 16; lo p.
312, ¡me 5 from bottom.
Deussen, p. 18, 18; 40, 4; 6; 42, 25; 55,
12, bb,9, 141, 8; 13; 228, note 1;
312,23,24; 314,31; 315,2
342
Edgerton, p. 13, 7, 16
Eggeltng, p. 13,6, 15,31; 22,12; 31,
31; 36,29, 40,35; 44,3; 40,25,46,
31; 53,34; 54,4, 79,24,117,3,124,
4,127,11; 129,6; 130,28; 140,21,
145,18; 27; 210,27; 212,28; 222,
14; 21; 24; 33; 223, note 1; 225,15;
17,23; 220,7, 230,35, 231,9, 244,
note 1, '!62, 26; 287, 12.
Gaastra, p 164, 31; 33; 258, 22
Gaedlcke, p 3,13; 4, 36; 76,9; 101,
24; 107,26; 114,35, 117,22, 142,36
Garbe, Correetions and Additions lo
p. 104, 16 from bottom
Geldner, p 66, 25; 84, 21, 85, 28; 126,
35, 176,11; 226, 31; 300,28; 36, 41
Graf3mann, p. 79, 31
Grlffith, p. 222, 4, 223, note 1
Haug, p. 34, 27; 43,7, 45,1; 151,34,
274,9
Havers, p. 152, 20; Correetlons and
Additions to p 6, 23
Hertel, p. 64, 26; 68, 34, 69, 9
Hopkms, p. 79, 33
Horn, p. 51, 34
Jacob, p 66, 10, 314, 17
Keith, p 11,20; 15,32. 19,7; 39; 22,
14, 34,22; 36,25; 43,7; 45,1, 46,
10,56,28; 59, 17; 19; 68, 4, 71,
28, 76, 7 , 86, :30; and note 1; 88, 4,
127,12, 128,33, 144, 30; 146,24,
151,34; 175, 16, 192,6; 196,21;
38; 217, 11, 39, 221, 38; 222,14,
35; 223, note 1; 228,9; 13; and note 1 ;
231, 8, 242,22; 34; 243,4, 244,
note 1; 251, 3 from boUom; 274, 2;
282,6; 284,19; 294,4, 30; 31c:l,5,
315, 4, Correetions and Additions
to p.58, 17
Klelhorn, p. 21, 6
Knauer, p. 11, 19
KonJetzny, p 52, 2
Kuhn, A, p 13, 18
Kunst, p 7, 19
Lanman, p 59, 14, 15, 236, 17, Corree·
tlona and Additions to p 58, 17 ,
to P 86, 2 from boltom
Lieblch, p. 38, 21; 60, 22, 127, 3, 228,
30, 252,25; 294,28
Lindner, p 67, 30; 88,30; 242, 21
Lüders, p 20, 33; 134, note 1, 81, note 1;
90, note 1; 108, note 1; 1 3 0 ~ 31,
230, 1
LudWig, P 79, 37, 228, note 1 ¡ 245, 22
Macdonell, p 42, 3; 59, 15, 79,32
MorrIs, p. 1, 12
Indlces.
Muir, p 223, note 1
Muller, Max, p 64, 26, 146, 24; 228,
note 1
Neisser, p. 19,39
Norden, p. 70, note 1
Oldenberg, p. 19, 37; 5\1, 13, 14, 60, 2;
96, note 1, 114, 18; 127, 1, 244,
note 1, 253,3, 33; 268, 29; 301,35
l'lrson, p. 52, 3
  p 244, note 1
Reuter, p 67, 35
Richter, p 228, 30
Rles, p 1, 12
Roth, p. 27, 18, 67,26' 256,15, Coro
rections and Aditions to p. 58, 17
de Saussure,p 89,8, 101,25,145,37;
146,7
SChillldt, J., Corrections and Additions
to p. 59, 20
v. Schroeder, p 149, 15, 301, 38
SIeg, p. 182, note 1, 201, note 1
SIeghng, Corrections and Additions
to p 58, 17 .
Solmsen, p. 80, 1
SpeiJer, p 12, 4; 13, 11; 19, 7, 20, 9;
29,7; 36,22, 38,18; 60,22; 76,8;
10; 79,18, 89,11, 101,26, 146,8,
184,29, 307,8
Stohr, p 1, 12
Thlbaut, p 64,26, 66,9
Uhlenbeck, p 80, 8
Waekernagel; p. 6, note 1, 12, 24, 32;
13, 11, 18, 30, 1, 41,34, 42,2, 56,
24, 59, 38, 60, 12; 64, note 1; 66,
23; 67, b, 15; 18, 34; 36, 68,19,
69, 14 and note 2; 79, 32, 86, 36;
102,31; 103,29, 113,4, 42, 118,6,
126,34; 129, 15,131,7, 136,3,169,
32; 179,26, 182, 4, 7; 186, note 3;
196, 28; 38; 200, 30; 209, 21,
218, 1; 33, 220, 18; 222, 29; 227,
15, 228,5; 8; 15, 16, 29; 31, 229,
33; 230,9; 16; 34, and note 3, 231,
31, 240, 36; 242, note 1,   31,
246,19, 254.,28; 40, 42, 255,16.
258, 24; 26; 262, 32, 34, 263,1,
268, 28, 301, 30; 32; 40; 311,16,
21; 312, 13; 18; 315,37; CorrectlOns
and Addltions to p 59,20, to p 67,
22-27, to p 86, 2 from bottom;
to p. 170, 16, to p 186, note 1
Weber, A, p. 13, 5, 41, 35; 42, 8.
45,5,46,8;60,21,67,29,71,17,
79,25; 37; 95,29; 123,34, 129,15,
151,34; 38; 187, note 1, 196,18,
223. note 1, 254, 19, 255, 32, Coro
rections and Additions to p. 58, 17
WhItney, p 12,5; 13,11; 19,29; 41,
41; 59,13, 60,11, 67,17, 36; 73.
29, 79, 40; 80,8, 86,33, 113,10,
11; 13, 114,4, 7; 13; 126,34, 132,
35; 145, 16; 149, <.l2; 24; 164,4, 168,
30; 169,26; 170,26; 171,25, 26,
175,32, 181, 184,20, 28; 187,
note 3, 196,27; 31; 22'>, 5.   29,
229, 11, 234, 34, 236, 17, 241, 3
from boUom; 243,3; 254, 19; 255,
18, 260,34, 300,12, 301,15; 307,
8; 13, 312,13; 14, 313,5, Corree·
tions and Additions to p 58, 17
Wllldlsch, p.63, note 5, 132,23, 37,
133,43
III.
Index of Passages.
A itareya Aral)yaka.
t 3.8 (p. CJ2, 13), § 9 Ex. 22 A, p. 16
2.1 4 (p 103,10 and 14), § 59 Ex.66B
P 167
2.1 4 (p. 103, 18 and 104, 1), § 59 Ex
106 A, p. 174
2.1 5 (p 104,7), §59 Ex 8Rem, p. 157
2 3 1 (p. 111, 13-14), § 9 Ex 22 B,p 16
2 3 1 (p 112,1-5), § 56, p 146
2 3.2 (p.,112, 11), § 29 Ex. 32 G Rem.,
p.67-68
2.3.6 (p. 115, 9), § 9 Ex. 221, p. 18
5. 1. 2 (p. 146, 1), § 60 Ex. 44 A, p. 206
5. 1 4 (p. 147, 3), § 59 Ex. 199 A,
p. 191-192
5.1. 5 (p. 148,8), § 60 Ex. 143 A, p.238
5 1 5 (p 148, 10), § 60 Ex. 132 B, P 235
5.3.1 (p 155,15), § 60 Ex 91 A, P 215
5.3.3 (p 159, 5), § 59 Ex. 106 B, p. 174
5.3.3 (p. 159, 6), § 59 Ex. 59 A, p. 166
5.3.3 (p. 159,6), § 60 Ex. 99 A, P 217.
343
Indices.
Aitareya Brahma1;la.
1.123, §49 Ex. 60, p 121-122
1. 13. 6, § 62 Ex. 55, p. 288
1. 13.8, § 39, a, p.89
1. 13.24, § 44, b, P 95
1. 14.1-4, § 60 Ex 102, p. 218, § 60
Ex. 115 Excursus, p. 224
1. 14.6, § 61 Ex. 43, p. 278
1. 15. 1, § 5, p. 7, § 59 Ex. 74, p. 168
1. 15.6, § 59 Ex 75 and Ex. 76, P 168
1. 16 7, § 62 Ex. 43, P 286
1 16.13, § 60 Ex. 131, p. 235
1. 27. l, § 39 e, p. 90
1.27.4, § 60 Ex. 48, p. 207, § 62 Ex.
33, p.285
1. 29. 20, § 60 Ex. 1 5 ~   p.239-240
1. 30. 7, § 62 Ex. 32, P 285
1 30.12, § 62 Ex 80, p.291
1. 30. 14, § 62 Ex. 32, p. 285
1 30. 20, § 62 Ex. 39, P 286
1. 30.21, § 59 Ex. 190, p. 190
2.5.2, § 62 Ex. 9, P 280-81
2.6.8, § 11 Ex. 1, p. 20
2.8.1-5, § 44v, p.97
2 9. 6, § 60 Ex 225, p. 265
2.11 1, § 60 Ex. 100, p.218
2. 13.6, § 26 Ex 8, p. 41
2 13. 6, § 60 Ex. 226, p. 265
2.15.4, § 63 Ex. 2, p.293
2. 15. 8-10, § 60 Ex.134, p.235-236
2. 15. 13, § 36, 1, J, P 82
2.16.1, § 57 Ex. 20, p. 152, § 63 Ex. 3,
p.293
2. 16. 2, § 62 Ex. 40, p. 286
2.20. 3, § 60 Ex. 137, p.236
2.20.4, § 62 Ex. 19, p.283
2.20.5, § 61 Ex. 19, p.272
2. 20. 6, § 61 Ex.24, p.273
2.20.7, § 59 Ex. 189, p. 190
2.20. ll, § 62 Ex. 36, p.285
2.20. 26, § 62 Ex 71, p.290
2.21. 1 - 2, § 60 Ex. 230, p. 267
2.21. 2, Corrections and Additions lo
p 57,15
2.22,3, § 29 Ex. 12, p.57-58
2.28. 3, § 29, Ex. 7, p. 56- 57
2. 28.5, § 29 Ex. 8, p. 57
2.29. 7, S 29 Ex. 6, p.56
2.31. 2, § 39 f, p. 90-91
2.31. 6, § 60 Ex. 140 and 141 and 143,
p.237-238
2.31.6, § 70, p.305
3. 1. 1, § 60 Ex. 185, p.259
344
3. 8. 9, § 60 Ex. 32, p. 204
3.14.1, § 62 Ex. 73 Rem., p.290
3. 35. 3, § 68, 2 Rem., p. 299
3. 39.5, § 29 Ex. 32G Rem, p.67
3. 42. 1-5 § 70, p. 305
3. 47.8, § 29 Ex. 32 G Rem.,p. 1) 7
4.5. 1, § 9 Ex. 21 note, p. 15
4.7.7, & 29 Ex. 14, p.58
4.9.2, § 59 Ex. 73, p.168
4 18. 5, Corrections and Addltlons lo
p.58,17
4. 18. b, Corrections and Additions lo
p 58,17
4. 19.3, CorrectlOns and Additions to
p.5S,17
4.19.4, § 59 Ex. 5, p.155
4. 26. 3, § 59 Ex. 94 and 95, p. 171 -172:
5. 2.2, § 62 Ex. 63, p.289
5. 10.4, § 50 Ex. 27 Rem., p.129
5.11. 1, § 74 Ex. 1, p.311-312
5. lb. 14, § ~ Ex. 20, P 15
5 ~ 4 11, § bO Ex. 16, p.201
5. 2a. 2, § 60 Ex. 18, p. 202
5.29 3, § 59 Ex. 40, p. 162; § 60 Ex. 17,
p.202
5.29.4, § 59 Ex. 33, p.161
5.29.5, § 59 Ex 33, p.161
5.29 5, § 59 Ex. 41, p. 162
5.29.5 § 59 Ex. 42, p. 162
5.29.5, § 59 Ex 43, p. 162
5.29.5, § 59 Ex. 46, p.163
5. 29. 6, § 59 Ex. 44, p. 162
b. 29. 7, § 59 Ex.42, p.162
5.29.8, § 59 Ex. 33, p. 161
5.30.1, § 59 Ex. 45, p.162
5.30. 1, § 59 Ex 46, p.163
5.30.4, § 59 Ex. 33, p.161
5. 30. 4, § 59 Ex. 42, p. 162
5.30. 15, § 59 Ex. 33, p. 1b1
5.30. 15, § 59 Ex. 42, p.162
5.31.1, § 59 Ex. 45, p. 162
5.31. 1, § 59 Ex.46, p. 1b3
5.31. 2, S 57 Ex. lb, p. 151
5.31. 2, § 59 Ex. 33, p. 161
5. 31. 2, § 59 Ex. 42, p. 162
5.31. 2, § 59 Ex. 45, p. 162
5.31. 2, § 59 Ex. 46, p. 163
5.31. 3, § 59 Ex. 33, p. lb1
5.31. 3, § 59 Ex. 42, p. 162
5.31.4, § 59 Ex. 33, p. 161
5.31. 4, ~ 59 Ex. 42, p. lb2
Altareya Brabmana (contmued). lndlces.
5.31. 4, § 59 Ex. 44, p. 162; § 60 Ex. 19,
p.202
5.32.1-2, § 44 gg, p.98
5. 33. 3, § 60 Ex. 40, p. 205
5.33.4, § 60 Ex. 41, p.205-206
5. 34. 4, § 60 Ex. 43, p. 206
6. 3. t, § 60 Ex. 4Q, p. 207'
6.4.1, § 70, p.305
6.4.6, § 59 Ex. 175 Rem., p. 185
6.24.13, § 29 Ex. 16, p.58
6. 26. 6, § 2'J Ex. 17, p. 58; Corrections
and Additions to p. 57, 15
6. 29. 1 tr., § 37 Ex. 6 Rem., p. 87
6.30 7-8, § 70, p. R05
6. 30. 8, § 62 Ex. 68, p. 290
6. 3 ~   1, § 48 Ex 14, p. 105
7.2.2, § 60 Ex. 148, p.238-2311
7.2.3, § 59 Ex. 1<)1, p.190
7.5.1. § 60 Ex. 99, p.216
7.5.6, § 26 Ex. 18, p.44
7.8.1-3, § 29 Ex. 19, p.58
~   9.1, § 29 Ex. 20, p.59
7.9.2-4, § 29 Ex. :-36, p. 72
7.9.5, § 29 Ex.3">, p.72
7. 9. 6, § 29 Ex. 35, p. 72
7.9.7, § 29 Ex. 33, p. 71, § 66, 3, p.298,
§ 67, p.298
7.9.8, § 29 Ex. 34, p.72
7. 10. 2, § 27 Ex. 2. p. 46, § 59 Ex. 177,
p. 188
7. 12.7, § 49 Ex. 62, p. 122
7.16.3, § GO Ex. 129, p.234
7.17.1, § 60 Ex. 122, p.233
7.17.7, § 61 Ex. 27, p.273
7.18.2, § 48 Ex. 8 Rem., p. 104
7.19.3, § 26 Ex. 11, p.42-43
7.23.1, §49 Ex. 35, p.118
7.24. t, § 49 Ex. 36, p.118
7.26.6, 11 29 Ex. 18, p.58
7.27.2-4, § 50 Ex. 18, P 126
7.28.1, § 48 Ex. 46 Rem., p.109
7.33.1, § 60 Ex. 33 and 37, p.204
7.34.7-8, §60 Ex. 132, P 235, § 70,
p.30'i
8. 5. 2, S 59 Ex. 209, p. 193
8.6.11, § 49 Ex 65. p.122
8.7.10, §44y, p.97
8.8.7. §32 Ex. 17, p.7i!, §44r, p.97
8.10.2, § 61 Ex. 23, p.273
8.10.9, S 23 Ex. 1, p.38
8.12.5, § 37 Ex. 3 Rem., p.86
8.14.2,3, § 60 Ex 159 Rem , p. 246, 35
8. 17. 1, § 60 Ex. 135. p. 236; S 70, p. 305
8.17.5, §37 Ex. 3 Rem., p.86
8. 22. 5, § 62 Ex. 48, p. 287.
A tharva Veda.
13.4.54, § 76 Rem , p.316 15.12.1, § 60 Ex. 148 B, p.239
Qtauta Sntra. Apastamba
4.9.6, § 62 Ex. 58 B Rem., p.288
5.10.8, § 60 Ex. lb Rem, p 27\
9.4.4 (Vedlc quotatlon
1
, § 60 Ex. 76
Rem., p 213
20. 15.6, § 60 Ex. 235 Rem., p.267.
Brhadaral)yaka UpaOlt:lad.
1. 1 2 K, § 53 Ex. 3 Rem., p. 140 3.2. 13, § 48 Ex 12, P 101-
, 1 2.1, §48 Ex.8 Rem., p 104 3.9.3 M = 2K., § 9 Ex. 14, p.14
1 2.6, § 49 Ex 19, p. 115 3 9.4 M = 3 K , § <) Ex 13, P 14
1 3. 33M. = 28 K, § 48 Ex. 8 Rem., 3.9 31 M = 28 K., § 44,)J, p. ~ 9
p.104 3 9.34 M = 28 K, § 26 Ex 14, p.44
1. 4. 19 M. = 8 K, § 29 Ex.25, P 60
1 4. 22 M = 10 K., § 62 Ex. 17, p.
282-283
1. 5. 8 M. = 3 K., § 31 Ex.l, p.74
2. 4. 4, § 70, p. 306
2.4 5, § 60 Ex. 74 Rem .• p 213
2.4.7-9, §48 Ex. 11, p.104
2 4.10, 949 Ex 27, p llb
4, 3. 3-6, § 60 Ex. 6, P 201
4.3.4-6, !l60 Ex. 7, p.201
43.5, §59 Ex. 179, P 189
4. 3 6, § 59 Ex. 179, p. 189
4.3.6, § 59 Ex. 180, P 189
4.5. 5 M., § 48 Ex 46, p. 109;
P 306
4 5.6, § 60 Ex 74, p.212-213
4 5 8-10, § 48 Ex. 11, p.l04
§ 70,
345
Brhadaranyaka UpaDlsad (continued). IndlceS.
4 5.11. § 49 Ex. 27, p.116
4.5. 13, § 7'6 Ex 1, p.315
4. '6 14, § 75 Ex 1, p 315
5.1.1, § 74 El\. 2, P 312
5.5.2 M. = 1 K., § 29 Ex 3:2G Rem.,
p.68 and 69
6.1. 3 M. = 6.2.2 K .. § 60 Ex 217,
p264
6.2. 7 M. = 6 1. 7 K , § 59 Ex. 66, p. 167
6.4. 12 M = 13 K, § 26 Ex 9, p.42
6 4.13-·'17 M = 14-18 R., § 26 Ex.2,
p.39-40
6.4 231\1. = 24 R, § 37 Ex. 1 Rem.,
p 85. § 59 Ex 99, p.172
6.4.25 M. = 26 K.,.§ 3, 1, e, p.5
6.4 28 ... M.=27K, §74 Ex.1J,p 314
Qafikhayana Aranyaka.
217, §60 Ex 38A, P 205 51, §48 Ex 8 Rem, p 104
3.2, § 74 Ex. 11 A, P 314 9.2 (p 316, 10 Keith), § 59 Ex 66 A.
48, §59Ex.178A,p.188, §64,p 296 p.167.
Qatapatha BrahmaJ;la
1. 1 1. 3. § 48 Ex. 46 Rem., p 110; § 59
Ex. 224, p. 194
1 1. 1. 5, § a9 Ex 224. p 194
1. 1. 1. 6, § 48 ~ : x 46 Rem, p.110
1. 1. 1. 8, § 62 Ex. 1, p. 279
1. 1. 1. 16, § 32 Ex. 6, p. 79
1 1. 2. 3, § 11 Ex 9, p. 22
1 1 4. 15, § 55 Ex. 1, p 142
1. 1. 4 16,'§ 51 Ex 12 Rem (d), p 139
1 1 4. 16, § ñ5 Ex. 2, p. 142
1 2. 1 6, § 11 Ex. 9, p. 22
1. 2 1. 21-22, § b9 (k), P 304
1. 2. 2. 9, § 51 Ex 1 Rem. p 131
I 2. 3.6, § 49 Ex 2, p. 110
1. 2. 4 7, § 39, e, p 89-90
1. 2. 5. 8-9, § 11 Ex 8B, p.22
1. 2. 5. 18, § 11 Ex 10, p.23
1. 2. 5. 20, § 60 Ex 89, P 215
1. 2.5. 20, § 62 Ex 22, p 283
1. 3.1. 5, § 11 Ex 9, P 22
1. 3.1. 25, § 74 Ex. 6, p.313
1. 3. 2.15, S 5!1 Ex 110 Rem, p 175,
§ 61 Ex 2, P 269
1. 3. a. 8, § bl Ex 11, p.271
1. 3 a. 8, § 70, p. 305
1. 3. 5.7, § b2 Ex. 50, p.287
1 3 5. 14, § 51} Ex. 110 Rem., p.175
1. 4 1. 38, § 48 Ex 39, p. 108
1 4 1. 39, § 61 Ex 20, p.272
1.4 4.1, § 57 Ex. 8, p,150
1. 4.4 8, § 11 Ex 9, p.22
1. 4.4.10, § 59 Ex 8 Rem, p.158
1. 5 1. 3, § 44rr, p qq
1 5.4 12, § 60 Ex 103, P 219
1. 6 1 2, § 61 Ex. 26, P 2i3
1. 6. 1 2, § 70, P BOJ
1 6. 1. 11, § 11 Ex 9, p. 22
1.6 3. 33,§50Ex 28,p 129;§59Ex.67,
P 167
346
1 6.3.35, §"l, 1, e, p. 3; §48 Ex. 1, P 102
1. 6. 3 36, § 39 J, p.90
1.6.337, §39d, p.90
1 6. 4. 3, § 41 Ex. 2, P 93-94
1 6 4. 12, § 70, p. 305.
1 6.4.14, § 59 Ex b9, P lb7.
1 6 4 18, Correchons and AdditiQUS
to p 58, 17
1. 7.1. 1, § ~ Ex 32, p. 116-117'
1.7.1 10, § 62 Ex 78, P 291.
1 7. 1 10. § 70, P 305
1. 7. 1. 18. § 74 Ex. b, P 313
1. 7. 2 12-14, § 60 Ex. 25, P 20J
1 7 2 13-14, § 9 Ex 22, p.15
1.7.3.7, §59Ex 8Rem., p. 157; § 60
Ex 233, p. 266 •
1. 7. 3. 19, § 54 Ex. 2, P 142.
1. 7. 3 28, § 59 Ex. 215, p.193
1. 7.4 17--16, § 21,7 Ex. 1, p.37
1 8. t. 1, § 48 Ex. 34, P 107
1.81.4, §59Ex 196, p.191
1.8.1.5, § 59 Ex. 197, p.191.
1 8.1.7, § 64, p. '29b.
1. 8. 1. lb, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem., p.220
1 8.1 17, § 32 Ex. 1, p.78
1 8 1 17, § 34 g, P 91
1. 8.1 24-25 § 14 Ex. 1, p 28
1. 8. 1. 25, § 3, 1, b, p. 2
1 8.1 39, § 59 Ex 21b, p.193
1.8.2.7, §60Ex.107, P 219
1. 9 1. 4, § 61 Ex. 39, P 278
1. 9. 1. 8, § 61 Ex 33, p.277
1 9.2.25, § 15 Ex 1, p 2S-29
1 9.2.26, § 60 Ex. lOS, p.2Hl
1.93 1, §5<)Ex.217, p.194
1. 9. 3 10, § 75 Ex. 3, p.315
2 1. 2. 16, § 60 Ex 138, P 23b
2 1.2. 16, ~ iO, p.305
<;!atapatha Brahmana (continued). IndlCes.
'2 1 4.2, § 62 Ex 1, p.279
'2 1. 4. 8, § ;)9 Ex. 19, P 160
2.1.4 8, § 59 El( 20, P 160
2.1.48, §51}Ex 21, P 160
2.1. 4. 8, § 59 Ex. 22, P 160
2.1.4 9, § 59 Ex. 23, p. 160
2.1.4. 15, § 34'Ex. t, p 80
2 1. 4. 11}, § 29 Ex 2G, p. bO
2 2.4 4, § 41} Ex 4, p 110
2.2.4.15, §57Ex 4, p -148; §61Ex.1
P 2ó8-'J
2.2 2. 19, § 35 Ex. 1 A, Corrections
and .A..dditions to p. 81, 4
2.3.\ 1-2, §61Ex 3, p 269
2.3 1 2, § 59 Ex. 'i5 p. 160
2. 3 1. 2, § 60 Ex 9, p. 201
2.3 1. 4, § 60 Ex 9, P 201
2.3.1.5, § 59 Ex 2,"i, p.160
2.3. 1. 8, S 63 Ex 1, p.292-3
2.3. 1. 9, S 59 Ex. 25, P 160
2. 3 1 9, § 60 Ex. 9, P 201
2 3. 1. 10, § 21 Ex 1, P 37; § 26 Ex 6,
p.40i § 74 Ex. 6 Rem p 313
2.3. 1. 11, § 60 Ex 9, P 201
2. 3 1. 12, § 59 Ex 2j, P 160
2.3 1 16, § 74 Ex 6, P 313
2.3.3.9, § 5',) Ex. 24, p.160
2 3. 3. 9, § üO Ex. 10, p. 201
2.3 3.12, § 4,9 Ex 63, P 122
2 3 3 16, § ')q Ex 100, P 112
233 17, §57Ex: 12, p 151
2.3 4.2, § 61 Ex. 21, P 272
2.3.4.8, §26Ex 7, p 41
2.4.1. 1, § 31}   P 91
2.4.1. 1, § 60 Ex. 205, p 263
2. 4 1 14. § 44 1, P 9&
2.42.7, §59Ex 68, p 167
2.4 2 10, § 57 Ex 2, p 147
2.5.13, §12Ex 11', P 26
2 5.230, §57   P 147
2.5.231, §óOEx 26, P 203
2. 5. 2 32, § 60 Ex. 26, p. 203
2. 5 2. 37, § 60 Ex 27, p. 20'3
2,5.2.38, § 60 Ex 27, P 203
2.5.2.43, § 5() Ex. 175 Rem, p.188
2.5.3. 5, § 57 Ex.   p 153
2 5 3 7-10, § 60 Ex '27, P 20,'!
2.5.3. 11, 57 Ex 23. 11 153
2.5.3 12-15,   P 203
2. 5. 3 17, 60 Ex 234, P 266
2. 5. 3 20, § 34 Ex. 2, p 80; § 35 Ex. 1,
p.S1 .
2. 54.11, §22 Ex t, P 3í-38
2:-& 1. 27-29, 60 Ex. 27, p.203
2.6.1.31, § 60 Ex. 27, p. :l03
2.63.7, §í4Ex 5, p 313
3.1. 1. 5, § 29 Ex. 27, p.60
3.1. 1. 8, § 27 Ex. 7,1, P 53
3. 1. 2. 11, § 29 Ex 1, P 55
3.1.2.21, §29Ex.3, P 56
3. 1. 3. 22, § 29 Ex 2, p.56
3 2. '!! 4, § 6U Ex. 11, P 201
3 2.2.26, § 5'l Ex. 26, P 160
3.2.4.2, § 4'l Ex 53, p 120
3.2.4. 10, § 39 e, p. 90
3. 2. 4. lij, § 39 e, p 90
3. 3. 1. 11 Correctiolls and .Addltions
to p. 208, Illle 6 from botlom § bO,
Ex. 57 A, Rem.
332 b, §61Ex 12, p.271
3 3. 3. 16, § 11 Ex 9, p 22
3 3. 4 2, § 11 Ex. 9, p 22
33.4.10, §49Ex 32, p 116-117
3 3.4. 14, § 9 Ex 9 Ilote, p 13
3.4.2. 1, § 20 Ex. 1, p.3b
3 4, 2. 5, § 55 Ex. 6, (1. 145
3 4- 3.1, § 2u Ex 1, p. J6
3 4 3 6, § 50 Ex 7, p. 123
344 11-13, §60Ex 27, p.203
3. -l. 3 19-20. § 68, 3, p.294
3. 5 1. 23, § 62 Ex. 23, p. 283
3.5.2.9, § &2 Ex 23, P 283
3.5.3.11, § il9J. p.91
a.5 3. 15, § 11 Ex.!J, P
3 5. 3 25, § 60 Ex. 46, P 207
3. 6 1 2.5, § 60 Ex 47, p 207
3.6. 1. 27, § 11 Ex 9, P 22
3. 6. 2 20, Correcbons and Additions
top58,17
3.6.2 24, § bl Ex 25, p.273
3.6 3 11, § 61 Ex. 12, p.271
3.6.3.11-12, § 70, p.305
3.6.3.12, § 60 Ex. 90, p.21:'>
3. 6. 4. 8,' § 21l Ex. 4, P 5b
3.6.4. 13, § 4.4 i, p
3.7.1.23, §27Ex 4,1, p 51
3.7.1. 25, § lb Ex. 2, p.30
3 7, 2. 2, § 11 Ex.9, p 22
37.3.11, §37Ex 3 Rem., p.86, §38
Ex 1 Rem., p. 88
:3 7 4. q, § 48 El; 2, P 102
3. 8 L 11, § 44, qq. P 09
38.2.17, §49Ex 40, p 119
3.8 2.23, § 60 Ex 27, P 203
3.8 2. 27, § 60 Ex 27, p 203
3.8.2.27, § 60 Ex. 160, P 2')1)
3 8 3. 10, § 26 Ex. Vi, p oH,
3.8.3.29, § bO Ex 160, P 256
3 8. 3 32-34, § 60 Ex. ::7, p 203
347
<;atapatha BlahmaJ.1a (contlllued). Indices.
3.8.5.8, §48Ex 3, p 102
3 8.5 8, §57 Ex 17, p.152
3.9.2.7, § 63 Ex. 1, p.292-3.
3.9.3.27, §62Ex 41, p.286
3. 9. 4. 6, § 11 Ex. 9, p. 22.
3 9.4.18, §44J, p 95
4. 1. 1 6, § '11 Ex. 9, p. 22.
4.1 2.11, § 59 Ex: 27, p.160
4.1 2.12, § 59 Ex. 27, p.160
4 1. 2. 13, § 32 Ex 3, P 78
4. 1. 'l. 14, § 32 Ex:. 4, p. 79
4. 1 2.14, § 59 Ex. 32, p.161
4- 1. 3. 4, § 60 Ex. 201, p 2b2
4.1. 3.8, § 48 Ex 46 Rem., p.110
4 1. 3. 9, § 61 Ex. 14, p 271
4. l. 5 3, Corrections and Additions
to p. 104, hne 16 froro bottoro
4 1. 5. 10, § 60 Ex. 56, p. 208
4. l. 5. 13, § 60 Ex 168, P 257
4.1.5 15, § 60 Ex. 169, p 257
4 2.1.22, § 60 Ex. 28, p 203
4. 'l. 1. 28, § 51 Ex. 8, p. 138
1. 33, § 60 Ex 104, p.219
4. 2.2 8, § 60 Ex. 68. p.
4. 'l. 'l. 12, § 60 Ex 69, p 210
4 2. 2.18, Corrections and Additions
to p. 208, 1me 6 from botlom; § 60,
Ex. 57 A , Rem. .
4. 'l. 4 6, § 62 Ex:. 74, p.291
4. 2.4.7, § 62 Ex. 67, p 290
4- 2.4. 1\1, § 11 Ex 9, p. 22
4. 'l. 5. 3, § 44, qq, p. 99
4. 2. f:> 4, § 51 Ex. 7 Rem., p. 136
4. '2 5.11, § 60 Ex 189 (a), p.260
4.2.5.11, §60Ex 198, p.262
4.3.1.3-4, § 59 Ex 183, p.189
4.3.1.21, § 60 Ex 115 Rem., p.222.
4. 3. 3. 5, § 60 Ex. 73, p. 212
4.3.3.16, § 60 Ex. 70, p.21O
4. 3.4.2, § 60 Ex. 20, p 127
4.3 5.2, § 59 Ex :239, p.197-198
4. 3. 5. 8, § 59 Ex. 240, p. 198
4. 3. 5 20, § 60 Ex. 27, p. 203
4.4.1.7, §60Ex 27, p 203
4 4.1.8, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem., p.222
4. 4. 2. 4-6 § 60 Ex. 27, p. 203.
4- 4. 3 9, § 60 Ex. 27, p 203
4. 4. 3. 9, § 60 Ex. 34; Ex. 38, p. 204
4. 4. 3. 11, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem. p. 222
4.4.4.3, § 60 Ex 108, p.219
4 4.5.1, § 18 Ex 1, p.36
4.4.5.16-17, § 60 Ex. 27, p.203
4.4.5 19, §59Ex.110Rem., p.175
4.5.2.8, § 26 Ex 16, p.44-
4. 5. 2. 9, § 60 Ex. 28, P 203
348
4. 5. 2. 11, § 60 Ex. 28, p 203
4.5.2. 17, § 59 Ex. 181, p.189
4.5.3.11,   p 201
4 5.5.8, § 31 Ex. 12, p.76-77
4 5. 8. 15, § 60 Ex:. 222, P 255
4.5.10.7, §60Ex. 96, p.216
4. 6. 1. 6, Corrections and Additions
top 133,17
4. 6. 4 1, § 48 Ex. 1, p 102
4. 6.6. 1, § 11 Ex. 9, p.22
4.6.8.6-7, § bO Ex 231, p.2b6
4.6.8.10-12, § 60 Ex. 231, p.266
4.6 8. 13, § 26 Ex. 17, p.44
4.5 8.15, § 26 Ex 17, p.44-
46.8.16-17, § 60 Ex. 231, p.266
4.6 9 6, § 50 Ex. 7 Rem, p. 124
4.6.9 8, § DO Ex. 124, p.233
4.6 9.11, § 27 Ex. 8, p.54
4.6.9.21, §39,j, P 91
4.6.9.23, § 60 Ex 13, P 201
4.6. 9. 24, § 39, g p. 91
5 1. 2.19, § 26 Ex. 13, p.43-44-
5.1. 3. 2, § 61 Ex 4, p. 269; § 66, 3
p.298
5. 1. 3. 13, § 69 (m), p 304
5.1.3. 14, § 50 Ex. 27, p.203
5.1.5.10, § 59 Ex 194, p.191
5.2.1.18. § 44,a, p.95
5.2.2.4, §51 Ex. 13, p.t39
5 2.2. 18, § 60 Ex 27, p.203
5. 2. 2. 19, § 60 Ex 246, p. 268
5. 2 2. 21, § 60 Ex. 246, p. 268
5.2.3.2, § 59 Ex 114, p.l77
5 2.3.6, § tJ9 Ex. 115, p 177
5. 2. 3. 7, § 60 Ex. 116, P 177
5.2.3.7, § 60 Ex. 71, p.211
5.2.3.8, § 49 Ex. 5, p. 110
5.2 3. 8, § 59 Ex. 117, p. 177
5.2.4.3, § 60 Ex. 71, p.211
5.2.4 7, § 60 Ex. 72, p.111-112
5.2 4.12, § 60 Ex 72, p.211-212
5.2.4. 14, 60 Ex. 72, p.211-212
5. !a. 5. 13, § 59 Ex 118, p 177
5 3. 1. 2, § 59 Ex. 119, p. 177
5.3 1.3, §59Ex. 120, p 177-178
5.3 1. 4, & 59 Ex. 121, p. 178
5.3.1.5, § 59 Ex. 122, p 178
5.3. 1.6, § 59 Ex. 123, p. 178
5.3.1.7, § 59 Ex. 124, p.178
5. 3. 1. 8, § 59 Ex. 125, p.178
5.3.1.9, § 59 Ex. 126, p.178
5.3.1.10, §59Ex.127, P 178
5.3. 1. 11, § Ex 128, p. 178
5.3. 1. 13, § 59 Ex 129, p. 178
5.3.2.8, § 60 Ex. 27, p.203
'tatapatha Brahmana (eontinued). Indices.
5.3.3.15, § 60 Ex. 27, p.203
5.3.4.4, § 60 Ex 21, p 202
5. 3. 4. 6, § 60 Ex. 22, p. 203
5.3.4.13, § 61 Ex.29, p.274
5. . 5. 26, S 60 Ex. 222, p. 265
5.4.2.9, § 60 Ex 123, p 233
5. 4. 3 2, ¡j 44, m. p. 96
5.4.4.24, § 60 Ex. 27, P 203
5. 4.4. 25, § 60 Ex. 246, P 268
5.4.5.1, § 44 m, p <J6
5. 5. 2 2, § 44 f, P 95 .
5 5. 3. 1, § 48 Ex. IJ, p. 104-
5.5.3 6, §48 Ex. 9, p.l04
5.5 4.11, § 74 Ex. 10, p.314
5.5.4.13, § 74 Ex. 10, p.313
5. 5.4. 33, § 69 (m), p. 304
6.1 1. 2, § 27 Ex. 3,1, P 47
6. 1. 1. 8, § 70, P 305
6.1.1 11, § 27 Ex. 3, 2-3, p.48
6.1. 2. 12, § 4 4 ~   P 96
6. 1. 2.12, § 59 Ex 64, p.167
6.1.2.12, § 70, p.305
b.1 2.23, § 57 Ex. 3, p.147
6. 1 2.27, § 29 Ex. 30, P 61
6.13.1, §44ff, P 98
6. 1. 3 1, § 44 hh, p. 99
6. 1. 3. 2, § 51 Ex. 2, p.131
6. 1. 3. 9, § 3, 1 e, p. 4
6.1.3 9, § 48 Ex. 35, p.l07
6 1. 3. 10-t 7, § 3, 1 e, p 5
6. 1. 3. 20, § 3, 1 e, p .4; § 48 Ex. 36,
p.l07
6.2. 1 8, § 29 Ex. 37, P 72-73
6.2 1. 39, § 59 Ex 110 Rem, p. 175
6.2.2.27, § 51 Ex. 7 Rem., p.136
6 2 3 1, § 50 Ex 1, p 122
6.2.3.3, § 50 Ex. 1, p 123
6 2.3 5, § 50 Ex. 1, p 123
6 2.3 7, § 50 Ex. 2, p. 123
6.3.1.1, § 50 Ex. 3, p 123
6.3. L 8-10, § 29 Ex. 38, p. 73
6. 3. 1. 14, § 39, J, p. 91
6.3. 1. 22, § 60 Ex. 210, p.264
6.3.3 1, § 69 (d), P 302
6. 4. 4. 1, § 69 (e), p. 302
6.4.4.12, § 50 Ex 5, p.123
6.4.4.13, § 50 Ex. 6, p.123
6.4.416, §44c, p.%
6.4. 4. 20, § 51 Ex 1 Rem, p 130
6.6.1. 22, § 59 Ex. 218. p.194
6.6.1.22, § 59 Ex.219, p.194
6.6.2.11, § 49 Ex 55, P 121
6.6.3. 1, ~ 9 Ex. 18, P 15
6.6.4.1, § 48 Ex 19, p.105
6.6.4 1, § 60 Ex.5, p.201
6.6.4.2, § 48 Ex 19, p.105
&. 6.4.2, § 5':> Ex 3, p 155
6. 6.4 11, § 59 Ex 70, P 168
6.6 4.14, § 60 Ex. 161, p 256
6. 7 1 23, § 27 Ex. 3, 4, p 48
6.7.1.27,99 Ex 15, p.14
6.7.1.28, § 9 Ex. 16, P 14
6. 7. 4 9, § 60 Ex. 115, Exeursus, p. 224
6 7.4 14, § 59 Ex 3, p. 155
6.8 1 11, § 60 Ex 83, p 214
6.8.1 11, § 60 Ex 84, P 214-215
6.82.11, §59 Ex. 71, p 168
6.8 2.11, § &2 Ex.81, p.291
7.1.2 1, § 44, mm, p.99
7.1. 2. 1, § 59 Ex 63, P 166
7.1. 2. 2, § 44, s, p.96
7 1. 2 9, § 59 Ex 61, p. 166, § 59 Ex.
249, p.198
7.1 2.23, § 48 Ex. 20, P 105
7. 1. 2 23, * 54 Ex. 1, p. 142, § 62 Ex
11, P 282
7.2 1. 18, § 60 Ex. 63, p.209
7.3.1.2, § 60 Ex. 62, p.209
7. 3. 1. 3, § 60 Ex 62, p. 209
7.3.1. 16, § 49 Ex. 24, p. 115
7.3 2.2, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p.158
7.3 2.18, § 5l} Ex 109, P 175
7. 4. 1 1, Corrections and Additions
to p. 133,17
7.4 1 10, § 27 Ex 3,5, p.48
7.4 1. 13, § 27 Ex 3,6. p.48-49
7.4.1. 16, § 1.7 Ex. 3, 7, p.49
7.4.1. 16, § 44, s, p.96
7.4.1 16, § 59, Ex. &5, p.lb7
7.4 1 16, § 70, p. 305
7.4.1.39, §41) Ex.33, p.117
7.4. 2. 11, § 49 Ex. 56, P 121
7.4.211. §'í9 Ex. 63, p.166
7. 4 2. 11, § 70, p. 303
7.4 2. 12, § 27 Ex. 3, 8. p.4\1
7 5 1 1, § 49 Ex 23, p. 115
7.5.1.16, § 44" s, p.96
7.5.1 17-18, §f>0 Ex. 58, P 208
7.5 1.19, § 60 Ex 59, p.209
7.51 22, §27 Ex 3,9-10, P 49
7.5.2 8, § 44, u, p 97
7.5.2.28, § 60 Ex. 64, P 20<J
7.52.41, §S1 Ex 35, P 277
7.5.2.44, §59 Ex 1, p 154
7 5 2. 44, § 70. P 303
8. 1 1. 3, § 20 Ex 1 Ram 2, p. 36; § 44, 'S,
p.96
8 1. 4. 9, § 51 Ex t:l Rem. (h), p.139
8 2. 2. 5, S 44, s, P 96
349
Qatapatha Brahmana (contmued). Indices.
8 2 2 5, § 60 E'{ 92, p. 216
8.2.2.7, § 60 Ex 93, P 216
8. 2. 3. 9, §     p. 96
8. 3. 3. 9, 9 44, x, P 97
8 3 4.1, § 60 Ex.159 Rem, p. 244, 32
8 4 2.1, § 60 Ex 94, P 216
8 4 4 2, § 60 Ex Su, P 215
8 5 1. ti, § 60 Ex 95, P 216
8 6 2 5, § 50 Ex 4, p. 123
8 6 2.19, § 50 Ex. 4, p. 123
8 7 1 11, S 3, 1, e, p.5
8 7 3.3, § 31 Ex 7 Rem, p 136
8.7.4 7, 11 69 (h), P 302
9.1 1. 2, §27 Ex. 3, 11, p.49
9. 1 1. b, § 44, 5, p.96
\) 1 1 7, § 27 Ex 3,12, P 49
9 . 1. 2 22, § 27 Ex 3, 13, P 49
9 1 2 32, S 6<) (b), P 30'!l
9. 1 ::2. 36, § '1.7 Ex 3, 14, P 50
9 2 1 1, § 59 Ex 4, P 155
9. 2 1. 12, S 69 (b), p. 302
9.2337, §60 Ex ::211, p 2b4
9 3.1. lb, !l60 Ex 2'.1, p.203
9.3.1 17, § 60 Ex 30, p.203
9. 3 4 5, § 3'í Ex. 2, p.81
q 4 1 2, § 44 5, p. 96
Q.4 2 13, § 44 s, p H7
9.42 16, §44s, p 97
9.4.3 15-16, 969(e), p.303
9.5 1 2, § 29 Ex 5 (a), p.56.
<). 5. 1 19-21, § 6H (a), p 302
9.5119-22, § 5<) Ex. 58, p.165
9.5.1 19-22, 9 íO, P 305
9. 5 1. 23-:26, § 6!) (a), p 302
9. 5. 1 24-27, § 59 Ex 58, p. 165
9 5 1. 24-27, 970, p.305
9.') 1 57, §29Ex 32G, p 67,22
9 5 1. 61, § 57 Ex 9, p 150
9. 5 1. 68, § 57 Ex q, p. 15Q
10111 15, P 105
10 1 1. 6 § 60 Ex 31, p.204
10 1. 4 10, S 60 Ex. 65, P 209
101 4.11, §60Ex 99Rem. p.216
10.2 1. 8, S 69(b), P 302
10 3.1.2-6, § 49 Ex 22, p 115
10 3 1 7, § 48 Ex 40, p 108
10 3. 1 8, § 48 Ex 40, p 108
10 . .3 3 5, § 60 Ex. 127, P 234
10 3.5.15, S 29 Ex 23, p.59
10.4 1 14, § 60 Ex 31, p 204
10 4. 1. 20, § 60 Ex. 31, p.204
10.4.4.2, § 48 Ex. 10, p 104
10 5 2 14, § 27 Ex 3, 15, P 50
10.5 2 14, 960 Ex 159 Rem., p 243,12
350
10 6 1 1, § 51 Ex 1 Rem., p 130
10 6 2.2, S 27 Ex ::1, 16, p.50
10 6.4.1, § 53 Ex 3 Rem, p 140
10.6.5. 1, § 51 Ex 3, p.nl
10 6 56, §49Ex 19, p 115
10.6 5.6, § 59 Ex 62, P 166
10.6. 5 6, § 70, P 305
11.1 1 2, § 60Ex 136, p.236
11. 1. L 3, § 60 Ex. 82, p 214
11.1. 5.1, § 68,1, p.299
11.1.6 1, §57 Ex 5, p 148
11. 1. 6. 1, § 70, p.305
11. 1. 6 7, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p 156
11 1 6 11, § 59 Ex 8 Rem , p 156
11 1 6.35. !¡ 60 Ex liS Rem., p.222'
11.2.25, §60Ex 27, p 203
11 2.4.10, § 59 Ex   p.193
11 3 3. 1, § 50 Ex 27 Rem, p. 128
11.4 2. 1, § 29 Ex. 24, p 59
11. 4. 2. 9, § 2<) Ex 25, p. 60
11.42.13, §2<)Ex 25, p 60
11. 4. 2.14, § 29 Ex ::l5, p.60
11 4 2 lb, § 51 Ex 11, P 13S.
11 4 2.17, §51Ex 11, P 1:18-
11 4. 3. 1, 44 t, p. 97
11. 4. 3 2, § 49 Ex 34, p 117
11 5.1 11, § 60 Ex 91, P 215
11 5 3.12, § 68, 6, p 301
11 5.4 13, § 29 Ex 25, p 60
11 5. 4. 14, 11 29 Ex 25, p 60
11 5 6.9, § 61 Ex. 31, p 276
11 5. 8 1, § 44 ff, p 98
11 5 8 2-4, § 44 gg, p 99
11 6. 1. 7, § 71, p.307
116.35, !l9Ex 14, p 14
11.63.6 !¡9Ex 13, p 14
11 7 1. 1, § 48 Ex 41, p.108
11 7.1.2, § 48 Ex 42, p.l09
11.7.24, §29Ex 25, P 60
11 7. 2. 4, § bO Ex 22a, p. 265
11. 7 2.5, § 60 Ex 249, p 268
11.7.43, §44Ex 4, p.l02
11. 8 3. 2, § 60 Ex 8, p. 201
11 8.3 5, § 37 Ex 3 Rem, p.86
11. 8. 3. 6, § 38 Ex. 1, P 88
11.838, §51 Ex 12 Rem.(a), p
12 1. 3. 22, § 60 Ex 156, P 240
12.2.1 6-7, § 2\l Ex 29, p 61
12 3.4 6, § 59 Ex 241, p.l':18
1241.4, §60Ex 145, p.238
12.4. 1. 7, S 61 Ex 36, p.277
12 4.1 10, § 44r, p.96
12 4.1.10, 60 Ex 216 Rem, p.264-
12 4 1. 10, § 64, p 296
Qatapatha 8I1ihmana (continued). Indices.
12. 4 2. 4, § Ex 25, P 60
12. 4 2.5, § 60 Ex. 147, p.238
12. 4 2 7, § 2') Ex. 25, p bO
124 2 9, §29Ex p.60
12 4.3.1, § 60 Ex 212, p.264
12 4 a. 6, § 29 E't 25, P 60
12 4 3 6, 59 Ex 72, p.168
12 4.3. 7, § 29 Ex 25, p. 60
4.3.8, § 29 Ex 25, p 60
4 4 6, S 29 Ex 31, p.61
12.4.4 7, § 29 Ex 31, p.61
12.5.1.3, § 60 Ex 238, P 267
12 5.1.17, § 2!J Ex. p 60
12.5.2 5, § 44,]J, P 99
12.7.3 3,!¡59Ex 166
p 183
12 8 1 20, S 60 Ex 125, p.233
12. 9 1. 12-17, § 61 Ex 5, p. 269-70
12 9 3 9, § 27 Ex 1 Rem, p.4'), §69(f)
p.303
13.1.1 3, § 49 Ex 16, p 114
'13 1.3.1,   p 128
131.3.5, §50Ex.23, p.128
13.1. 7.1, § 48 Ex. 18, p.105
13.2 2 1-9, § 27 Ex. 5, 1, p.52
13.2.1 7, §59 Ex 6, p 155
13.2 2 2, § 31 Ex. 7, p. 75
13 2 68, !¡49Ex.57, p 121, §50Ex.23,
p. 128
132.7.1, §60Ex 119, p 232
13271, §60Ex J21, p.233
13 2. 8 2, § 62 Ex. 14, p. 282
13.36.1, §49Ex 17, P 114
13 3 6 6, § 59 Ex 220, p.194
13.4.1 9, § 60 Ex :l20, p.265
13 4.1 10, § 60 Ex 2:H, p 265
13 4 2 1, § Ex 15, P 282
13 4.2 8, § 62 Ex. 16, p 282
13.4211, §62Ex.16, p.282
13.4.2 14, IH2 Ex 16, P 282
13.4.2 15, Ex. 246, p.198
13 4 3.2, § 59 Ex. 178, p. 188
13.433, §16 Ex 1,a, p.29
13 4.3.5, § 62 Ex. 79, P 291
13.4 3. 6, § 4, p.5
13 4 3.6, § 59 Ex 130, 11 178
13 4.3.6-14,§lbEx 1,b-J,p.29-30
13 4.3.6-14, § 59 Ex 205, p.192 .
13 4 4.1, § 59 Ex 52, p. 164, § 64,
p.296
13 4.4 2, § 59 Ex 213, p. 193; § 60,
Ex 165, p 256-2'>7
13 4 4.2-4, § 60 Ex. 240, p 267-268
13 4 4.3, § 60 166, p.257
13 4 4 4, § 59 Ex 206, p.193
13.4.4.6, §;)9 E". 62, p.166
13. 5 1. 2, § 17 Ex 2, P 31
13.5 1 4, § 59 Ex 200, p.192
13.5. 1. 16, § 60 Ex 173, p.258
13.5.2 1, § 60 Ex. 75, p. :l13
13. 5 2 2, §!JO Ex 200, p. 262; Correc-
tions and Additions to p. 58, 17
13.5.2.3, § &1 Ex 38, p.278
13.5.2 11, § 60 Ex 144, p 238
13 5.2 16, § 60 Ex 128, p.234
13.5.2.23, § 60 Ex 27, p.203
13 5. 2 23, !¡ 60 Ex 133, p 235
13 5.3 1-3, § 60 Ex 224, p 265
13.5.3 7, § &0 Ex 27, p 203
13.5 3.7, S 60 Ex 227, p.2b5
13.5 4 15, § 62 Ex. 45, P 287
13.5 4.16 § 62 E>- 46, p.287
13.5.4. 18, § 62 Ex. 47, P 287
13.5.4 25, § 59 Ex 207, p.193
13.5.4.27, § 59 Ex. 208, P 193
13.6.2. 12-13, § 69 (g), p.303
13.6.2.16, § 59 Ex 207, p.193
la 7.1. 9-10, § 60 Ex 228, P 265-26{)
13.8 1. 1, § 27 Ex. 3, 17, P 50-51
13.8.3 12, § 53 Ex. 1, p. 140
14.1. 1. 9. § 60 Ex. 67, p.21O
140.1. 1.13, § 27 Ex. 3, 18, p 51
14.1.1 32, !¡ 59 Ex. 131, P 178
14.1.1.33, § 61 Ex 28, p 274
14. 1 2 9, § 49 Ex 25, p. 115
14 1. 2 12, § 49 Ex 26, p.115
14. 1 2 13, 49 Ex. 20, P 115
14.1.2.19, §49 Ex 25, p.115
14 1 3 11, § 49 Ex 25, p. 115
14 1 3.15, § 49 Ex 25, P 115
14 1..3.16, § 6:2 Ex. 59, p 288-289-
14 1 3.22, §"27 Ex. 6, p.52-53
14. 1. 3 24, § 49 Ex 25, p. 115
14.1.3 31, § 49 Ex 25, p 115
14 2.2.4, § 60 Ex 98, P 216
14.2 2 11, §49 Ex. 25, p.115
14 2 2.14, §49 Ex. 25, p.115
14. 2 2 15, § úO Ex. 27, p. 203
14.2.2 17, 1160 Ex 35, p.204
14."2 2. 35. § 49 Ex. 25, p. 115
14 2.2.53, § 4c) Ex. 25, p 115
a 3.1.2, § 49 Ex 20, P 115
14 3. 1. 29, § 60 Ex. 179, P 2b8
14.3 1. 30, § 60 Ex.27, P 203
14 3. 1. 30, § 60 Ex 36, p. 204
14.3.1.30, § 62 Ex. 27, p 284
144 1 11, § 50 Ex 27 Rem., p.129
14 4.1 33, § 48 Ex 8 Rem, p. 104
14 4 2. 19, § 29 Ex. 25, P 60
14.4.2.22, § 62 Ex. 17, p.282-283
351
Qatapatha Brahmana (eontmued) IndIces.
14.4.3.8, § 31 Ex. 1, P 74
14.5.4 4, § 70, P 306 '
14.5.4 5, § 60 Ex. 74 Rem, p. 213
14.5 4 7-9, § 48 Ex 11, p.104
14.5.4.10, § 49 Ex. 27. P 116
14.6 2.13, § 48 Ex 12, p. 104
14.6.9.3, § 9 Ex. 14, p.14
14 6.9.4, § 9 Ex. 13, p. 14
14.6.9. 31, § 44, 11, P 99
14.6 9.34, § 26 Ex 14. p.44
14. 7. 1. 3-6, § 60 Ex 6, p. 201
14.7 1. 4-6, § 60 Ex 7, p.201
14.7.1.5, § 59 Ex. 179, p.189
14 7.1. 6, ~ 5 9 Ex. 179, P 189
14.7.1.6, § 59 Ex. 180, p. 189
14.7.3 5, §48 Ex 46, P 109
14.7.3.5, § 70, p.306
14.7.3.6, § 60 Ex. 74, p 112-113
14.7.3.8-10, § 48 Ex. 11, P 104
14 7.3.11, § 49 Ex.27, P 116
14.7 3.13, § 75 Ex 1, P 315
14. 7. 3. 14, § 75 Ex. 1, p. 315
14.8.1.1, § 74 Ex '2, p. 312
14 8.6 2, § 29 Ex. 32 G Rem, p. 68-69
14.9.1.3, § 60 Ex. 217, p 264
14.9.2.1, § 59 Ex. 66, P 167
14.9.4.12, § 26 Ex. 9, P 42
14.94.13-17, §26 Ex. 2, P 39-40
14. 9. 4 23, § 37 Ex. 1 Rem., p. 85, 1,
§ 59 Ex. 99, P 172
14 9.4.25, § ~   1, e, p.5
14. 9 4 28 § 74 Ex. 11, p.314
Qatyayana BrahmalJ,a
S.1yana on RV. 7. 33. 7, § 16 Ex 3, P 30 Sayana on RV 10.57. 1, § 49 Ex 06,
p. 122
QaIíkhayana Qrauta Sutra
15.25, § 61 Ex 27, p 273
Chandogya UpaDli;;ad.
1. 4.4, § 60 Ex. 4 Rem (in fine), p. 200
1 8 6, § 29 Ex. 32 D, p. 62
1. 8. 8, ~ 29 Ex. 32D, P 62
~ . 9. 3, !i 59 Ex 8 Rem, p 157 j § 59
Ex. 51, e, p. 164
2.9.4, § 5q Ex 8 Rem, p. 157
2.9.5, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p.157
'2 9.8, §59Ex 8 Rem, p 157; § 60
Ex 20B, p 202
2 21.1, §9Ex 22D, p 17
'2 23 1-2, § 27 Ex. 9 A, p.54-55
3 1. 3, §51 Ex. 2 A, p.131
3.2 2, § 51 Ex. 2 A, P 131
332, §51 Ex 2A, p.131
2.4 2, §51 Ex. 2A, p.131
3.5 2, §51 Ex.2A, p.131
3.11. 3, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., p 156
3.19.3, § 36,1, m, p.83
4.2 1, § 31 Ex 17 A, p. 78
4 2.3, §31 Ex. 17 A, p.78
4. 3 8, § 11 Ex 2 A, p 20
4 6. 1, § 59 Ex. 159A, P 182
47.1, §59 Ex. 159A, P 182
4 8.1, § 59 Ex. 159A, P 182
4. 10 5, § 51 Ex 5 Rem., p. 133
4,15 5-6, § 9 Ex. 22 J, p 18
4.16 2, § 60 Ex 42c, p 206
4 16.3, § :36, 1, n, p. 83
4.16.4, § 60 Ex 42D, P 206
352
4. 16 5, § 36,1, n, p 83
5 1. 7, § 59 Ex. 66 A, p. 167
5 1 12, § 11 Ex 1 A, p 20
5. 3. 6, § 9 Ex 9 note, p. 13
5.10.2, § 9 Ex.22J, p.18
5. 10 6, § 29 Ex 32 G, p 62
5 11 1, § 9 Ex. 22 H, P 17
5.19 2, § 61 Ex 30D, p.275-276
5 20 2, § 61 Ex.30D, P 275-276
5 21. 2, § 61 Ex. 30 D, P 275-276
5.22.2, § 61, Ex. 30 D, P 275-276
5.23 2, § 61 Ex. 30 D, p.275-276
5.24.1, § 29 Ex. 32 E, p.62
6.7.5, § 35 Ex 4A, p.81
6.8 1, § 60 Ex. 159 Rem, p 243, 10
6 8 6, § 48 Ex 38, e, p 108
6 11. 1, § 29 Ex. 32 F, p. 62
6.14.1, § 35A Ex. lA, P 81
8 3 1, §48 Ex. 38A, p.l08
8.9.1, § 67, P 298
8.9.1-<¿, § 48 Ex.8 Rem., p. 104
8.9.1-2, § 60 Ex. 38B, p.205, § 60
Ex. 45 A, p. 207
8.9 2, § 67, P 298
8 10.1-2, § 67, P 299
8 10.2, § 48 Ex. 8 Rem., p.104
8 10.3-4, § 67, P 299
8. 11. 1-2, § 48 Ex 8 Rem., p 104
8.12 1, §48 Ex 38B, P 108
IndICes.
Gopatha
1. 1. 1 (p 1,5), § 48 Ex 26, p. 106
1. 1. 3 (p 2,14), § 49 Ex 61, p 122
1. 1. 3 (p. 3, 1), § 9 Ex 4, p. 11
1. 1. 3 (p. 3, 4), § 19 Ex 1, p. 36
1 1 4 (p. 4, 3), § 4;) Ex 2, p. 100
1. 1 5 (p 5,1), § 44, w, p.97
1. 1. 11 (p 9, 10), § 44, w, p.97
1 1. 32 (p. 25, 8), § 24, p. 38
1 1. 39 (p. 31, 12), § 31 Ex 11, p.76
1 2 2 (p. 33,5), § 49 Ex. 15, p.l14
1 2 10 (p. 44, 1), § 49 Ex 29, p.116
1 2. 15 (p. 48, 12), § 59 Ex. 53, p. 164
1. 2 18 (p 52,13), § 62 Ex. 35, P 285
1 '2 21 (p 58,10), § 62 Ex 70, p.290
1. 2. 22 (p 60, 8), § 59 Ex. 102, p. 173
-174
1. 3.3 (p. 66, 13), § 60 Ex 176, p.258
1 3.14 (p. 83, 3), § 59 Ex 101, p.172
-173; § 70, P 305
1 3 15 (p. 84, 9), § 11 Ex. 18, P 25
1. 3 19 (p. 89. 14), § 61 Ex. 32, P 276
1. 4 30 (p. 104, 13), § 60 Ex 156, p.204
1 5. 11 (p. 128, 14), § 60 Ex 178, p 258
1.5.15 (p. 131,5), §59 Ex 242, p.198
1 5.21 (p 134,4), § 62 Ex. 58, p.288
1 5.25 (p. 140, 14), § 60 Ex 77, p.213
2 1. 1 (p. 143, 7), § 62 Ex 31, p.284
-285
2. 1. 1 (p. 143, 9), § 60 Ex. 105, p 219
Brahmal}a.
2 1 4 (p 153, 2), Corrections and Ad-
ditlOns to p. 58, 17
2.1. 23 (p 160, 4), § 59 Ex. 8 Rem.,
p. 157
2.1.23 (p 160,6), § 59 Ex. 159, p.181
2.2.1 (p 165,15), § 11 Ex. 11, p.23
\1 2.10 (p. 176, 2), § 61 Ex. 25 Rem.,
p 273
2.2.14 (p. 179, 12), § 9 Ex. 3, p.ll
2 2. 15 (p 181, 7), § 70, p.305
2 2.15 (p 181,8), § 59 Ex. 106, p.174
2.2.16 (p. 182,3}, §60 Ex. 174, p.258
2. 2 18 (p. 184, 2), Corrections and
AdditlOns to p. 241, lme 5 froro
hottom
2.2 24 (p. 189, 13), § 59 Ex 137, p. 179
2.3.6 (p. 192,9), § 60 Ex 32, P 204
2.3.7 (p. 193, 14), § 29 Ex. 6, p.56
2.5.1 (p. 227, 3). § 9 Ex. 21, p 15
2. 5. 4 (p. 230, 16), Corrections and
Additions to p. 312, lme 5 from
bottom
2 6.6 (p. 251, 3), § 61 Ex. 8, p.270
2.6.6 (p. 251, 6), § 61 Ex 9, p. 270
2 6.9 (p. 257,1-2), § 70, p.305
2.6.9 (p. 257,2), § 62 Ex. 68, p.290
2.6.11 (p ~ 6 0   3). § 74 Ex. 1, p.311-
312
2 6.11 (p. 261, 1), § 48 Ex. 14, p 105
J aiminiya Brahmal}a.
1. 1, § 49 Ex. 59, p. 121 1. 22 (Caland p. 9), § 70, p. 306
1. 5 (Caland p. 5), § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., 1. 22 (Caland p 10), § 9 Ex 8, p. 12
p 157
1. 5 (Caland p.5), § 59 Ex 47, p.163
1. 5, § 59 Ex. 59, p. 166
1.5 (Caland p 5), § 59 Ex. 172, p. 183
-184
1. 5 (Caland p.5), § 60 Ex. 14, P 201
1. 5, § 60 Ex. 167, p.257
1. 6 (Caland p.5), § 59 Ex. 48, p. 163
1. 6 (Caland p. 5), § 59 Ex. 173, p. 184
1. 6 (Caland p 6), § 60 Ex 15, P 201
1 10 (JAOS. 16 p.234), § 60 Ex. 81 A,
p.214
1. 17. 4 (JAOS 19, 115), §48 Ex. 21,
p.l05
1. 17. 4 (JAOS. 19, 115), § 51 Ex. 5,
P 132
1. 17 6 (JAOS 19,155), § 51 Ex. 7 Rem.,
p 136
1. 21, § 57 Ex 11, p.150
Oertel, Tbe Syntu oreases
1. 31-36, § 9 Ex. 10, p.13
1 37, § 31 Ex. 14 and Ex. 15, p.77
1. 4-2 (JAOS. 15 p. 234), § 70, p. 305
1 43 (JAOS.15 p.236-2.37), § 29 Ex,
28, p.61
1.45-46, §51 Ex 7, p.134-138
1. 46, § 49 Ex 39, p.118-119
1. 49. 7, (JAOS. 19, 111) § 48 Ex. 23,
p. 106
1. 56. 3 (JAOS 23, 338), § 60 Ex. 213,
p 264
1. 57.1 (JAOS. 23,338), § 60 Ex. 147,
p.238
1.57.2 (JAOS. 23,339), § 59 Ex. 103,
p.174
1. 57. 3 (JAOS 23, 339), § 60 Ex. 215,
p.264
1 58 1 (JAOS. 23, 340), § 60 Ex. 216,
p. 264
23
353
JaimlDlya B¡lihman:t (contmued). Indices
1. 58. 1 (JAOS 23, 340), § 64, P 296
1. 61 3 (JAOS 23, 243), § 60, Ex. 239
p.267
1. 67.2 (Trans. Conn Ac 15,177), § 74
Ex. 8 Rem., p.313
1. 67. 3 (Trans. Conn. Ac 15,178) § 50
Ex. 9, p 124
1. 89 (Galand p 18), § 60 Ex 154, p.24O
1. 92, § 50 Ex. 1 q, p.127
1. 94, § 48 Ex. 22, p.l05-106
1. 104, § 60 Ex 195, p 261
1 107, (Caland p. 23) § 50 Ex. 17, p. 126
1. 111, § 36,1 k, p.82
1. 117, 74 Ex. 9, p 314
1. 120 (Caland p 28), § 60 Ex. 88 Rem.
p.215
1. 123 (Caland p. 30), § 49 Ex . .38, p. 118
1. 12q (Caland p 33), §60Ex 192, p.260,
§ 66,2, p.297
1 130 (Caland p 34), §60 Ex. 193, p.260,
§ 66,2, P 297
1. 130 (Caland p. 34), §60 Ex 194, p.260,
§ 66, 2, P 297
1. 135 (Caland p. 38), § 49 Ex. 38 Rem.
p 118
1. 138 (Caland p. 39), §59 Ex. 111, p.175
1 140, §62 Ex. 87, p.292; §66,4a, p 298
1. 142 (Caland p. 43), § 31 Ex 16,
p.77-78, §59Ex 111, p 175
1.147 (Calandp 48), §11Ex.8, p 21
1 154 (Caland p. 54), § 9 Ex. 1, p.l0
1 168, § 48 Ex. 24, p.106
1 173, § 60 Ex. 57 A; Corrections and
Addltions to p 208, 5
1. 185 (JAOS. 19,123), § 50 Ex 14, P 125
1. 209.4, (Trans Conn Ac. 15, 163) § 12
Ex.12, p.26
1 212.3 (Trans. Conn Ac 15,1(5), § 12
Ex. 13, P 26
1 212 3 (Trans Conn. Ac. 15, 165), § 5q
Ex 15, p 159
1. 213. 9 (Trans. Cono. Ac 15,166), § 59
Ex. 16q, p.159
1 213.10 (Trans Gonn Ac 15,166), §59
Ex 174, P 184
1. 213 11 (Trans Conn. Ac 15,166), §5q
Ex 49, P 163
1. 214 (Caland p 82), § 11 Ex. 5, p. 21
1. 216 (Caland p 82), § 11 Ex 7, p.21
1. 226 (Caland p 88), § 13 Ex. 5, p 27
1 238 (Caland p 92), § 36, 1 f, p 82
1 240.4,5 (Trans Conn Ac. 15, 163-
164) § 36, 1 b, p.82
1. 245, § 59 Ex 78, P 169
1 247 (Caland p 96), § 61 Ex 10, P 270
354
1 262, Corrections and Additions to
p. 208, afier !ine 6 from boltom
1. 266, Corrections and AdditIons to
p. 208, aftel' line 6 from boltom
1. 267, § 36, 1 d, p.82
1 268, §49 Ex. 12, p.111
1 269-270, § 60 Ex. 196, p. 261-2
1 271   p. 103) § 9 Ex. 9, p 12
1. 285 (Caland p. 110), § 60 Ex 88, P 215
1. 287 (Caland p 114), §48 Ex. 38, p 108
1. 297 (Caland p. 122), § 37 Ex. 1 Rem
p.84; § 59 Ex 98, P 172
1 297 (Caland p. 122), § 48 Ex. 45, P 109
1. 299, § 29 Ex. 39, p. 73
1.318, Corrections and Addltions to
p. 208 aftel' hne 6 fl'offi boUom
L 320, Correctlons and Additions lo
p 208 after lme 6 from bottom
1 325, (Caland p 124) § 59 Ex: 8 Rem
p.157, §59 Ex. 104, p 174,59 Ex
250, P 198-199, §60Ex.197, p.262
1. 325 (Cal<lnd p. 124), § 62 Ex.IO, p.281 ,
§ 62 Ex. 88, p. 292
1. 348, § 60 Ex. 187, p. 259
1 357.4-6 (Trans Gonn Ac 15, 155),
§ 44bb, p.98
2. 18, § 51 Ex 5 Rem, p 1.33
2.26 (Caland p. 131), Corrections and
Addltions to p. 226, 27
2.37 (Caland p 134), S59 Ex 30, P 161
2 37, § 5\1 Ex.50, p 163
2.38 (Caland p 130). § 59 Ex 31, P 161
239, §60Ex.61,p209,§60Ex 141(b)
p.237
2 b8 (Caland p 141), § 57 Ex. 3 Rem,
p.148
2.77 (JAOS 15,239), § 9 Ex 13, P 14
2 77 (JAOS, 15,239), § q Ex 14, note,
p 14
2.80 (JAOS 18, 361, § 60 Ex 50, P 207
2 80 (JAOS, 18, 32), § b2 Ex 25, P 284
2 128 (Caland p. 164), § 11 Ex 12, p.24
2 132, § 50 Ex 15, p.125
2.134 (JAOS 19, 121), § 48 Ex. 46 Rem.
p.lO'-)
2 135 (Caland p. 168), § 50 Ex 27 Rem ,
p.129
2 142 (Caland p 171), § 36, 1 e, p.82
2 152 (Caland p 172), §59 Ex 77, p.168
2 153. 3 (Trans. Con n Ac 15, 180), § 48
Ex 46 Rem, p. 109
2.156 2 (Trans Conn. Ac. 15, § 60
Ex 115, P 222
2.158, §9Ex 7 p 12
2.168, p 197
Jalminiya Brahmana (continued). Indíces.
2. 176, § 26 Ex. 4, p. 40
:l. 178, § 59 Ex 175 Rem., p. 185
2.179, § 59 Ex. 175 Rem., p. 184-185
2. 193, § 60 Ex. 158, P 242
2. 193, § 60 Ex. 188, P 260
2 202, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem, p.226
2.240 (JAOS. 18,34), § 16 Ex. 3, p. 30
2.269 (Caland p. 191), §59 Ex.51, p 163
2 276 (Caland p. 194), § 9 Ex. 11, p.13
2.276 (Calalld p. 194), § 59 Ex. 152,
p. 180
2 297 (Caland p 200), § 36, 1 g, P 82
2.371 (Caland p.207), §59 Ex.lS1, p.180
2. 372 (Caland p. 208), § 53 Ex 3 Rem.,
p.141
2 374, § 59 Ex 175 Rem., p. 185
2.389, § '19 Ex. 8 Rem, p.158
2 394 (Caland p. 211), § 59 Ex. 153,
P 181
2 394 (Caland p 211), § 59 Ex. 154,
p. 181
2.396, § 49 Ex. 11, P 111
2.409 (Caland p. 164), § 11 Ex. 12, P 24
2.431 (Caland p. 229), § 59 Ex. 155,
p 181
2.438.3 (JAOS. 19, 99), § 31 Ex. 13, a,
p.77
2 439.4 (JAOS. 19, 100), § 31 Ex. 13, b,
p.77
3. 117 (Caland p. 250), § 61 Ex. 13,
p.271
3.121-122 (JAOS. 26,58), Corrections
and Additions to p. 104, lme 16
from hottom
3. 124 (Galand p. 252), § 59 Ex. 156,
P 181
3. 168 (JAOS. 18,42, Galand p. 261),
§ 49 Ex. 66, p. 122
3. 168 (JAOS. 18, 43; Caland p. 261),
§59 Ex 107, p.175
3.172, § 59 Ex. 157, p.181
3.203 (Caland p. 274), § 13 Ex. 6, p.27
3 220 § 51 Ex. 6, p.138
3. 220 (Caland Auswahl p. 302 Kan-
v;iyana), § 51 Ex. 9, p 138
3.   § 51 Ex. 7, p.138
3. 234 (Caland p. 278), § 62 Ex. 54.
p.2SS
3 237 (Caland p. 282), § 60 Ex. 78, p. 213
3. 245 (Calano p 285), § 59 Ex. 158,
p. 181
3. 262 (Galand p. 288), § 49 Ex. 49,
P 120
3. 266 (Caland p. 290), § 48 Ex. 13,
p. 105 •
3. 269 (Galand p. 291), § 51 Ex 12,
p.139
3. 272, § 9 Ex. 12, P 14
3 278, § 60 Ex. 115 Excursus, p 224
3.74 (Caland p.235), § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., 3.310, § 36,1, e. p.82
P 156 3.311, § 48 Ex. 27, p. lOó
3. 77 (Caland p. 237), § 50 Ex. 16, p. 126 3.312, § 11 Ex 13, p. 24
3.82 (Caland p.238), §11 Ex. 4, p.21 3.353,949 Ex. 37, p.1l8
3. 106 (Caland p. 245), § 59 Ex. 2, P 155 R.353, § 52 Ex. 1, p. 139.
Jaiminiya Upanif,;ad Brahmana.
l. 5. 6, § 62 Ex. 75 B, p. 291 3. 16. 3, § 62 Ex. 69 A, p. 290
1. 8. 12, § 55 Ex. 4A, p.143 3.16.5, § 60 Ex. 42 A, p.206
1 19.2, §9 Ex.22C, p.16-17 3 16.6, Ex. 42B, p.206
1. 23. H, § 49 Ex. 39A, P 119 3 !l9.2, § 59 Ex 5SA, p.165
125.2, §59 Ex.8A, p.158 3.2'1.5, §2q Ex. 32B, p.61-62
1. 3.3. 9, § 48 Ex 46 A, p. 110 3.29.7, § 20 A Ex. 1 A, p.36-37
1. 45. 5, § 60 Ex 81 A Rem., p.214 3.31. 9, § 61 Ex. 10 A, P 271
1.57.7, §9 Ex. 22E, P 17 3.32.7, §61 Ex.30B, p.275
2.12. 1, § 48 Ex 8 Rem., p.l04 3.33 3, § 29 Ex 32 C, p.62
2. 12.5, § 29 Ex. 32 A, p. 61 3. 34. 6, § 60 Ex 81 A Rem., p. 214
2.15.1, p.62 Ex. 1 A, p.279 4.2.11, § 61 Ex.30C, p.275
2.15.3, § 60 Ex 132 A, p.235 4.10 12, § 59 Ex. 51 B, p.164
3.4.2, § 59 Ex. 51 D, p.164 4.10.17, § 60 Ex. 20 A, p.202
3.7.2, §9Ex.22F, p.17 4.25.1, §9 Ex.'22H, p.17-18.
Kathaka.
6.2 (p. 50, 16), § 60 Ex. 114, p.220 6.5 (p. 53, 15), § 60 Ex.85, p.215
6.3 (p. 52, 5), § 60 Ex. 236 A, p. 267; 6.5 (p. 54,4), § 59 Ex. 163, p. 183
§ 66,3, p.29tl 6.5 (p. 54, 5), § 61 Ex 18 Rem., p.272
23*
355
Káthaka (continued) IndlCes.
6. 5 (p. 54, 8), § 73 Ex. 2 Rem., p. 309
6. 6 (p. 5b, 3, 6), § 60 Ex 208, p. 263
6.6 (p. 55, 17), § 59 Ex. 187, p.190
6. 7 (p. 56, 14), § 62 Ex. 29, p. 284
7.10 (p. 61, 21), § 59 Ex: 108, p. 175
7.15 (p. 79, 5), § 59 Ex. 53, p.164
8.2 (p. 85, 4), § 85 Ex 3, p.81
8. 3 (p. 86, 4), § 59 Ex: 13, p. 159
8.3 (p. 86, 5), § 40, p.93; § 59 Ex. 8
Rem., p.156
8. 3 (p. 86, 6, 7; 9), § 59 Ex. 14, p 159
8. 3 (p. 86,2), § 59 Ex. 169, p.183
8.4 (p. 87, 2), § 74 Ex 3 Rem., p.312
8. 5 (p. 88, 20), § 50 Ex. 18, p. 125
8. 8 (p. 92, 3), § 62 Ex. 2, p 279
8 9 (p. 92, 21 , p. 93, 4, 8), § 60 Ex.232,
p 266
8.11 (p. 95, 3), § 45 Ex 1, p.l00
8. 11 (p. 95, 9) Corrections and Addi-
tions to p, 100, hne 12 fram boUom
8. 15 {p. 98,16}, § 51 Ex. 1 RenJ., p. 130
8. 15 (p. 99, 6), § 59 Ex. 111, p 176
9. 11 (p. 112, 13), § 12 Ex.9, p.26
9.12 (p. 113, 13), § 49 Ex:. 13, p. 112
9 14 (p.ll6,6), § 60 Ex. 112, p.220;
§ 66, 4, e, p. 298
9 14 (p. 116, 22), § 62 Ex. 52, p.288
9. 17 (p. 120, 11), § 40 Ex:. 1, p.l00-101
9.17 (p. 121, 3), § 61 Ex:. 25, p.273
10.3 (p. 127, 3), § 60 Ex 4 Rem., p.200
10.4 (p 128, 15), § 49 Ex. 34 Rem.,
p.117
10.5 (13.129,6), § 60 Ex.76, p.213
10.5 (p. 129, la), Corrections and Ad-
ditions to p 100,lme 12 from bottom
10.5 (p 130, 1), § 60 Ex. 151 Rem.,
p.239
10.6 {p. 130, 13}, § 62 Ex. 37, p. 286
10 6 (p. 131,3), Corrections and Ad-
ditions to p. 71, 1
10.7 (p. 133, 8), § 9 Ex.2, p. 11
10.7 (p 132,10), § 9 Ex 1, p.10
10 9 (p. 135,20), § 33 Ex. 1, p. HO
10.10 (p. 136,8), § 59 Ex 198, p.191
10.10 (p. 136, 12), § 59 Ex. 199, p. 191
10. 11 (p. 139, 2), § 62 Ex 53, p.288
11.2 (p. 145,7), § 9 Ex. 5, P 12
11 5 (p. 149, 8), § 61 Ex. 18 Rem
p.272
11.5 (p. 149, 15), § 60 Ex. 151 Rem.,
p.239
356
11.6 (p. 152, 1), § 59 Ex 232, p.196
11.10 (p. 158, 5), § 59 Ex. 233, p.19S
12 2 (p. 164,9), § 59 Ex. 234, p. 197
12.2 (p 164,9), §60 Ex. 76, p 213
12 2 (p. 164, 10), § 59 Ex 235, p.197
12.7 (p. 169,20), CorrectlOns and Ad·
ditions to p. 100, lme J2 ftom boltom
13.1 (p. 1'80, 1), § 60 Ex. 4 Rem., p. 200
1S. S (p. 182, 18), § 59 Ex. 54, p.164
13.7 (p; 188,16), § 59 Ex 55, p.164-
165
13.7 (p. 189, 14), § 11 Ex 11, p.23
14.6 (p. 205,7), § 59 Ex. 87, p. 170
14.6 (p. 205, 17), § 51 Ex. 7 Rem., p 136
14.7 (p. 206, 19), § 59 Ex. 80, p. 169
19.2 (p. 2,15), § 7S Ex. 6, p 309
19.5 (p. 6,6), § 59 Ex 161, p.18·2
19. 5 (p. 6,8) Corrections and Ad-
ditions to p 57, 15
19.11 (p. 13,5), CorrectIons and Ad-
ditions to p. 85, 2 from bottom
19.12 (p. 14, 8), § 60 Ex. 115 Excursus
p.223
19.12 (p. 15, 7,9,11), § 74 El>.. 1 Rem,
p 312
20.4 (p. 22, 14), § 51 Ex. 5, p. 1'34
20.10 (p. 30, 1), § 57 Ex 22, p.153
20.11 (p. 31,2), § 3, 1, e, p. 5, § 46
Ex.2, p 101, § 55, p. 144, 12
21 2 (p 38, 14), § 16 Ex. 4, p.80
21 6 (45,21, § 11 Ex. 14, p.24
21. 9 (p. 49,10), § 48 Ex. 31, p 107
22.1 (p. 57, 18), § 12 Ex. S, p.25
22.2 (p. 58, 17), § 57 Ex. 14. p.151
22. 3 (p. 58, 22), § 59 Ex. 56, p. 165,
§ 64, P 296
22 3 (p. 59, 1), § 59 Ex 57, p 165,
§ 64, p.296
22.6 (61, 19), § 59 Ex. 82, p. 169
22 6 (p. 61, 21), § 59 Ex. 83, p. 169
22. 6 (p. 61,22), § 59 Ex. 84, p. 169-170
22.6 (p. 62,2), § 59 Ex. 8'>, p.170
22. 6 (p. 62, 9), § 5'7 Ex 14, p. 151
22.8 (p 64, 16), § 73 Ex 6, p.309
22 12 (p. 67, 16 and 18; § 68, 1 and 3),
§ 62 Ex. 42, P 286
22. 13 (p 68, 6), § 57 Ex 25, p. 154,
§ 60 Ex. 151, p 239
Káthaka (contmued). Indices.
23 3 (p. 76, 16), § 44, p, p. 96
23. 4 (p. 78, 3), § 11 Ex 15, p 24
23.6 (p 81, 6), § 68, 5, p. 300
23 6 (p. 81,8), § 60 Ex 57, p. 208,
§ 66, 4, a, p. 298
23. 7 (p. 82, 19), § 9 Ex. 6, p. 12
23.8 (p 83, 10), § 13 Ex. 1, p.27
23. 9 (p. 85, 16), § 36, 1, 1, p. 82
24. 4 (p 93, 18), Corrections and Addi-
tions to p 208, hne 6 from bottom;
§ 60 Ex. 102, p.218
24.8 (p. 98,8), § 60 Ex. 102, p.218
25.8 (p. mI, 12), § 57 Ex 18, p.152
26 1 (p 122,4), CorrectlonB and Addi·
tions to p. 208, line 6 from bottom;
§ 60 Ex. 57 A, Rem.
26. 1 (p. 122,7), Correctíons and Addi-
tions to p 134, l!O
26. 3 (p. 124, 15), § 72 Ex 5 Rem,
p.308
26.7 (p. 129,22), § 73 Ex. 4, p.309
26.8 (p. 131, 18), § 51 Ex. 1 Rem., p.130
27.2 (p. 140,20), § 44, q, p.96
27.3 (p. 141, ]2), § 49 Ex. 52, p. 120
27.3(p.142, 5), §"l9 Ex lbl Rem., p.182
27.3 (p. 142,6), § 48 Ex.46 Rem., p.110
27.4, (p. 143, 13), § 60 Ex. 172, p. 257-8
27.4 (p. 143, 14), § 16 Ex. 5, p SO
27.9 (p. 149, 17), § 68,6 Rem , p.301
27. 9 (p. 149, 20), § 51, Introductory
Rem. to Ex. 9, p.13B
28.1 (p. 153, 7, 8), § 60 Ex 245, p.268
28.1 (p.1S3,8), § 60 Ex. 141 (a)
28.2 (p. 154, 1), § 13 Ex. 2, p. 27
28.2 (p 154, 18), § 12 Ex. 10, p.26
28. 3 (p. 155,3), § 11 Ex. 2, p.20
28.3 (p. 155, 16), § 59 Ex. 165, p. 183
28.3 (p. 155, 17), § 12 Ex. 6, p 25
28.3 (p. 156, 9). § 13 Ex 3, p.27
28.3 (p. 156,11), § 11 Ex. 16, p.25
28.6 (p. 160, 6), § 13 Ex. 4, p.27
28. 6 (p. 160, 10 and 12), § 60 Ex. 150,
p.2a9
28.8 (p. 163,1), § 68,6 Rem., p. 301, §73
Ex. 15 Rem., p. 311
28. 9 (p. 163, 18) § 60 Ex. 243, p. 268
29.6 (p. 174, 3), § 12 Ex. 1, p.25
29.7 (175,16), § 12 Ex 2, p.25
29.9 (p. 178, 7), § 12 Ex. 3, p.25
29. 10 (p. 179, 13), § 31 Ex. 3, p 74-75
HO.l (p. 181, 11), § 51 Ex. 12 Rem (b),
p.139
30. 1 (p. 181, 15), § 51 Ex. 12 Rem. (d),
p. 139
30. 4 (p. 186, 4), § 62 Ex. 8, p 280
30.5 (p. 187, 12), § 12 Ex. 4, p.25
30.9 (p 191,4) § 32 Ex. 5, p.79
31.1 (p.l,13-14),§51 Ex. 1 Rem.,p. ISO
31 1 (p. 2, 9), § 50 Ex. 25, p.128
31.2 (p. 3, 6), § 50 Ex. 26, p.121.:S
31. 3ip. 4, 19), § 44, k, p.95; § 60 Ex 60
Rem., p .209
31.5 (p. 6,12), §3,la, p.2, §31Ex.9
p.75
31 7 (p. 8, 5), § 31 Ex 8, p 75
31. 7 (p 11, 3), § 59 Ex. 175 Rem., p. 186
31. 15 (p. 17,6), §50 Ex. 10, p 124
31.15 (p 17,6), § 59 Ex. 137, p.179
31.15 (p 17,9), § 59 Ex 1 3 ~   p.179
31. 15 (p. 17,12), § 59 Ex. 1 ~ 2   p.182
31.15 (p. 17,18), § 62 Ex 21, p 283
31. 15 (p. 17, 21), § 55 Ex. 6, p 145
31. 15 (p. 18,5), § 62 Ex. 57, p.2SS
32 7 (p. 25, 23), § 60 Ex 218, p.26-l
i$2.7 (p. 26,1), § 60 Ex. 219, p.265
33.6 (p. 31, 8; 14; 20) Corrections and
Addltions to p 58, 17
33,6 (p. 31, 9), Corrections and Addi·
tions to p. 58,17
33,6 (p. 31,17; p. 32, 1) Corrections
and AdditlOnB to p. 58, 17
34. 3 (p. 37, 18), § 44, nn, p. 99
34.4 (p. 38,12), § 3, 1 a, p. 2; § 43 Ex.l,
p.94
3417 (p.47,18), §60Ex.130, p.234
34. 18 (p 48, 13), § 60 Ex. 190, p.260
34.18 (p. 48, 19), § 60 Ex. 191, p.260
35.18 (p. 64, 11), § 60 Ex. 106, p.219
35. 19 (p. 66, 3), § 60 Ex. 214, p.264
36.1 (p. 68, 5) § 49 Ex. 8, p 111
36 4 (p. 71, 14), § 59 Ex 222, p. 194
36.10 (p. 77, 9), § 61 EX.l8 Rem. p.272
36.12 (p. 78, 17), § 60 Ex. 151 Rem, p.
239
37.1 (p 84,15), § 12 Ex 8, p.26
37.1 (p. 85, 6), § 61 Ex. 17, p.272
37.1 (p. 85, 7), § 40, P 91-92
367
K¡¡thaka (contInued) Indiees.
37.11 (p 92, 12-13), Corrections and 37 12 (p 93, 9), § 60 Ex. 112, p. 220
Additions to p. 208. lme 6 from hot- § 66, 4 e, p. 298
tom, § 60 Ex. 57 A Rem.
Kathaka A ~ v
5. 17 (p. 170, 18), § 59 Ex. 93 Rem., p. 171.
Katha Upaniead.,
1. 2.1, § 62 Ex. 24 Rem., p '284 1. 2.13, § 48 Ex. 8 Rem, p 104
KaueItaki Brahma:qa.
2. 7 (p. 6, 6), Corrections and Additions
to p. 63, lme 13 from hottom (note 1)
2.8 (p 7,7), § 57 Ex 13, p.151
2.9 (p. 7,17), § 59 Ex. 36, p 162
2.9 (p. 7,17), § 59 Ex. 38, p. 162
2.9 (p 7,18), § 57 Ex. 16 Rem, p. 151
-152 -
2.9 (p. 7, 19), § 59 Ex. 37, p.162
2.9 (p. 8, 8), § 56, p. 146-147, § 60
Ex 20, p.20i
'l 9 (p. 8, 9), § 60 Ex. 204, p. 263
3.4- (p. 10, 16), § 64, p 296
4.12 (p. 17,3), § 59 Ex. 92, p.171
4.13 (p. 17, 10), §59 Ex. 91, p.170, §59
Ex 105, p.174; § 64, P 296
4.14 (p. 17, 13), § 59 Ex. 93, p.171
6. 1 (p. 22, 23), § 44, 11, p. 99
6.2-9 (p.23,7; 11; 16; 22, p.24,4j
10, 16; 22), § 3, 1, e, p [)
6. 13 (p. 27, 1), § 62 Ex. lH,' P 284-5
6.13 (p. 27,2), § 60 Ex. 105, p.219
7.2 (p. 29, 9), § 3, 1,e, p 5; § 48 Ex. 37,
p. 108
7.3 (p. 29, 21), § 60 Ex. 162, p.256
7.3 (p 29,22), §59Ex 175, p.184
7.4 (p. 30, 6) Corrections and Addi-
tions to p. 117,20
7.9 (p. 33, 9), § 29 Ex. 21, p.59
8.1 (p 34, 14), § 59 Ex. 192, p.190
8.7 (p. 38, 13), § 62 Ex. 48 A, p. 287
8 7 (p 38,14), § 62 Ex 60B, p.289
8. 7 (p 38, 15), § 62 Ex. 60A, p.289
8 7 (p. 39, 15), § 60 Ex 159, p.242
9. 1 (p. 41, 10), § 6l Ex. 34, p.285
9. 4 (p 4S, 1), § 29 Ex lS, p.58
9.6 (p. 43, 22), § 62 Ex 38, p 286
9 6 (p. 44, 9-10), CorrectionandAddi-
tlOns to p 312, Ime 5 fI om bottom
358
10. S (p. 46, 7), Corrections and Addi-
tions lo p. 58, 17
10.5 (p. 47, 24), § 38 Ex. 2, p 88
12. 1 (p 53,9), § 60 Ex. 137, p.236
12 1 (p. 5S, 10), § 60 Ex 55, P 208
12. 1 (p. 53, 10), § 61 Ex 24, p.273
122 (p 53,19). §59 Ex. 95A, p.172
12 2 (p. 5ol, 21), § 69 (1), p S04
12.4 (p. 55, 3), § 59 Ex. 28, p. 161
12 4 (p. 55, 4), § 59 Ex.29, p. 161
12.4 (p. 55, 6), § 59 Ex. 39, p. 162
12.5 (p. 55, lb), § 60 Ex 183, p.259
12. 7 (p. 56, 2S), §   Ex. 9, p. 57
lS 1 (p. 57, 2il), Corrections and Addi-
tions lo p.241, Ime 5 from hottom
13.8 (p 60,12), § 37 Ex. 4, p.86
13. 9 (p. 61, 2), § 29 Ex. 10, p. 57
13. 9 (p. 61, 3), Corrections and Addi-
tions lo p 57, 15
14 2 (p. 62, 9), § 29 Ex. 15, p.58
14.4 (p. 63, 24), § 60 Ex. 184, p. 259
15 1 (p. 65,11), § 60 Ex. 180, p. 258
15 1 (p. 65, 17), § 60 Ex. Z29, p. 266
15. 5 (p 68, 10), § 62 Ex 73, p 290
16.1 (p. 69, 8), § 60 Ex. 182, p.259
17.1 (p. 75, 8), § 29 Ex. 22, p.59
17.7 (p.77,22), CorrectionsandAddi-
tions lo p. 312, lme 5 froui hottom
18.3 (p.79,19), §9Ex 17, p.15
18.3 (p. 79, 20), § 75 Ex 2, p 315
18. 3 (p. 79, 1:'4), § 26 Ex. 3, p. 40, § 37
Ex.5, p.87
18.5 (p. 80, 21), § 62 Ex 13, p.282
18.5 (p. 81, 6), § 59 Ex. 193, p.191
18 12 (p. 83, 4), § 36, 1, a, p.81
18.14 (p. 84, 2), § 59 E:'l:. 247, p. 198
18.14 (p. 84, 3), § 59 Ex 202, p.192
Kausilah Bráhmam (conlmued). Indlces.
19.6 (p 86,7), § 59 Ex 238, p.197
19 7 (p. 87, 2) § 59 Ex. 210, p 193
22.2 (p 98,5), § 50 Ex. 27 Rem, p.129
23.6 (p. 106, 1), § 29 Ex. 11, p 57
24. 1 (p 108,9), § 61 Ex 7, p.270
24.9 (p. 111.3), §74Ex 4, p.312-313
25. 12 (p. 118, 14), Correctionsand Addi-
tions to p.312, lme 5 froro bolloro
26.3 (p. 121,3), § 68,2, p.299
'26.6 (p.122, 15-16),.§59 Ex.223, p.194
-26.11 (p. 125,2), §50 Ex.27 Rem, p 129
27.1 (p. 129, 18), § 39b. p.89
27. 1 (p. 129, 19), § 68, 2, p.299
27.4 (p. 131,22), § 56, p.146; § 59 Ex.
204, p.192
27.4 (p. 1 H, 24), § 59 Ex. 214, p. 193
27.6 (p. 132, 22), § 17 Ex. 2 Excursus,
p 35
28.4 (p. 136, 1), § 60 Ex. 247, p.268
28 4 (p. 136, 5), § 60 Ex 163, p.2¡¡6
29. 2 (p. 139,4), § 60 Ex. 180, p.258
29 2 (p. 139, 12), § 60 Ex 229, p 267
30. 1 (p. 142, 15), § 60 Ex. 182, P 259
30 5 (p. 144,3). § 37 Ex. 6, p 87
30 8 (p. 145, 14), 60 Ex 159 Rem.,
p.244,34
KaueHaki U panif;;ad BrabmaI;la.
1. 2, § 74 Ex 11 A, P 314 2.14, § 51 Ex 11 Rem, p.133
-2.8, §59 Ex 178A, p 188; §61 Ex. 34 A, 3.1, § 48 Ex. 8 Rem, p.l04
p. 277, § 64, p 296
Maitraya:r;lI Sambita.
L 4. 5 (p. 52, 10), § 50 Ex. 11, p 124
1 4. 5 (p 52, 11), § 59 Ex. 136, p. 179
1. 4.5 (p 52,13), § 59 Ex. 134, p. 179
1 4.5 (p. 53, 1), § 62 Ex. 21, p.283
1.4 5 (p 53,2), § 62 Ex. 89, p. 292
1. 4. 5 (p 53, 8), § 62 Ex. 84, p. 292
1. 4. 5 (p. 53, 12), § 62 Ex. 85, p.292
1. 4.10 (p. 58, 7), § 60 Ex. 218, p.264
1. 4.10 (p. 58, 8), § 60 Ex. 219, p.265
4 11 (p. 60,6), § 62 Ex 56, p.288
1. 4. 12 (p 62,6), § 51 Ex. 9, Introduc-
tory Rem to Ex 9, p 138
1. 5.5 (p. 73, 11), § 59 Ex 112, p.177
1.5.7 (p. 75, 3), § 60 Ex. 209, p.264
1. 5.10 (p. 79, 3), Corrections andAddi-
tions to p. 311, lme 8
1.5.1 (p 79, 10; 17), Corrections and
Additions lo p 311, ¡me 8
1. 5. 13 (p. 82, 5), § 60 Ex 118, p.232
L 6 3 (p. 89, 15-90,1), §44d, p 95
1 6 4 (p. \12, 7), § 73 Ex 14, p.311.
i.6 4 (p. 93, 9), § 73 Ex. 1, p.309
1. 6. 5 (p 93, 17), § 73 Ex. 1 Rem., p 309
1. 6. 5 (p. 95, 5), § 48 Ex. 33, p 107
'1.6.7 (p. 97, 16), § 48 Ex. 16, p.105.
1. 6 9 (p 101,7), § 60 Ex 139, p.237
1. 6 !tI (p. 102, 1), § 61 Ex. 16, p. 271
1. 6. 10 (p. 102, 8), § 73 Ex 15, p.311
1 6.13 (p 107,17), § 74 Ex 3, p.312
il. 7. 2 (p 110, 17), 59 Ex. III Rem.
p.176.
1. 8. 3 (p 118, q), § 72 EA 4, P 308
1. 8 4 (p 119,10), § 59 Ex 164, p 183
1.8.4 (p. 119,11), § 60 Ex. 149, p.239,·
§ 62 Ex. 18, p.
1. 8 4 (p. 119, 11), § 62 Ex 28, p 284
1 8.5 (p 121,4), §n Ex 2, p 309
1. 8. 5 (p. 4), § 7 ¡ Ex 11, P 310
1. 8. 6 (p. 123, 1 § 57 Ex. 6, p 1't8-
149: S 59 Ex. 182, p 189
1. 8. 6 (p. U4, 2), § 68, 4, P 299-300
1. 8 6 (p. 124, 7), S 73 Ex 1'2, p 310
1. 8.6 (p 124,8), § 59 Ex 8 Rem , p 156
1. 8.7 (p 125,1), § 73 Ex. 15 Rem , p 311
1. 8. 7 (p. 125, 9), § 59 Ex 171, p.183·
1 8.7 (p. 126, 4), 62 Ex 30, p 2tl4
1. 8.8 (p. 127,7,18; P 128,1, .:1), § 60
Ex. 207, p 263
1. 8. 9 (p 1 '30, 3), § 73 Ex. 3, p '309
1 I:l 5 (p 135,6), S 11 Ex 15 Rem p.24
1 9.6 (p 137,13), § 60 Ex 112 Rem,
p.220
1. 10 5 (p. 154,9), § 59 Ex. 138, p.179
1 10.9 (p. 149, 16), § 59 Ex. 227, p. 195
1.10 16   ld9,p.179
1 10 lli (p. 155,20), § 61 Ex. 18 Rem.,
p 272
1. 11. 6 (p 167,14), § 59 Ex. 87, P 170
1 11 7 (p. 169,5', § 59 Ex 19:', p.191
2 1. 2 (p 2, 7), § 60 Ex 4 Rem., p. 200
2. 1 3 (p. 4, 6), § 59 Ex. 140, P 179
359
MaItrayam SainhJta (contmued). Indices.
2. 1. 5 (p. 7,3), § 60 Ex 151, p ::39
2.1.5 (p. 7, 4), § 61 Ex. 18 Rem., p.272
2. 1 8 (p 9,13), § 59 Ex. 231, p.195
2 1. 9 (p. 10, 18 and 20), § 29 Ex. 32G,
p.67,25
2 1. 10 (p. 11, 17), CorrectlOns and Ad-
ditlons to p. 58,17
2 1. 11 (p. 12, 19), § 49 Ex. 51, p. 120
2.2.1 (p 14, 11), § 59 Ex 232, p 196
2.2.5 (p. 19, 6), § 61 Ex. 44, p.278
2.2.6 (p. 19, 13), § 27 Ex 9, p.54
2. 2. 9 (p 22. 13), § 61 Ex. 25 Rem., p. 273
2. 3. 2 (p. 29, 4), Corrections and Addi-
tions to p. 311, hne 8
2. 3. 5 (p. 32,5), § 59 Ex. 141, p. 179
2.4. 1 (p. 38, 7), § 60 Ex 202, p. 262
2.5.2 (p. 48,19), § 60 Ex. 203, p 263
2. 5 4 (p 52, 18), § 59 Ex. 142, p 179
2 5.5 (p. 53,20), § 49 Ex. 10, p 111
2.5 5 (p. 54, 1), § 49 Ex 54, p 121
2.5.6 (p. 55,14), §60 Ex. 4 Rem., p.200
2.5. 10 (p. 61. 7), § 26 Ex 5, p.40
2 5.11 (p. 63,13 and 15), § 62 Ex. 62,
p 289
2 6. 1 (p. 64, 9), § 59 Ex 143, p 180
2. 6 1 (p. 64, 9), § 59 Ex. 144, p 180
2 6. 1 (p. 64, 10), § 59 Ex 145, p 180
2 6.1 (p 64,11), § 59 Ex 146, p.180
2.6.1 (p. 64,12), § 59 Ex 147, p. 180
3 1. 3 (p 4, 14), § 61 Ex. 18 Rem.,
p 272,18
3. 1 3 (p 4, 14), § 73 Ex 6, p. 309
3 1 4 (p 5, 3), Corrections and Ad.
ditions to p. 311, ¡me 8
3 1. 9 (p 12, 8), § 49 Ex. 9, p. 111
3 2 2 (p. 16, 14), § 60 Ex. 115 Ex-
cursur" p. 223
3.2. 3 (p 18, 5), § 57 Ex 24 Rem. (in
fine), p 154
3.2.3 (p. 18,5), § 57 Ex. 25 Rem., p 154
3 2.5 (p. 22, 15), § 6:¿ Ex. 86, p.292
3 2.8 (p. 28, 4), § 44, kk, p. 99
3 2.8 (p. 28, 7), § 31 Ex. 4, p. 75
3 2 9 (p. 29, 7), § 57 Ex. 22 Rem.,
p 153
3.3 4 (p. 37, 8), § 11 Ex. 15, P 24-
3. 4. 4 (p. 48, 16), § 48 Ex. 8 Rem.,
p.104
3 4.5 (p. 50, 6), § 59 Ex 82 p. 169
3.4. 5 (p. 50, 7), § 59 Ex. 83, p. 169
3.4 5 (p 50, 7), § 59 Ex. 84, p.169-
170
3.4.5 (p. 50, 9), § 59 Ex 85, p 170
3.4. 5 (p. 51, 5), § 57 Ex 14, P 151
3 6.3 (p 6.1,15), § 60 Ex. 54, p. 208
360
3 6 7 (p. 68, 15), § 60 Ex. 52 p.207
3.6.7 (p. 69, 5), § 11 Ex. 15 Rem., p. 24
3. 6. 7 (p. 69, 17), § 59 Ex. 88, p. 170
3.6.8 (p 71,3), § 59 Ex. 148, p.180
3.6.8 (p. 71, 13), § 73 Ex. 10. P 310
3.6.8 (p. 71,13, 14, 16, 17), § 73
Ex 9, p 310
3.6.10 (p. 73,15), § 61 Ex. 18, P 272
3 6.10 (p' 74, 10), § 59 Ex. 149, p. 180
3. 7.7 (p 84,8), CorrectlOns and Ad-
ditlOns to p. 208, lme 6 frOlll bottom
§ 60 Ex. 57 A., Rem.
3.7.8 (p. 86,4), § 61 Ex 15, p.271
3.7 8 (p. 87, 6), § 59 Ex 201, p 192
3.7.9 (p 88,3), § 60 Ex 102, p 218
3.8.6 (p 103, 8-10). § 39, h, p. 91
3.8.7 (p. 104, 8), § 62 Ex. 51, p 287
-288
3. 8 7 (p. 104, 9), § 6:¿ Ex 60, p. 289
3.8 7 (p 105,9), \;59 Ex. 135, p.179
3 8.10 (109,17), § 60 Ex. 181, p.259
3.8. 10 (p. 110,8), § 60 Ex 175, p.258
3 9.2 (p 114,6), § 72 Ex 5, p. 308
3. 9.2 (p. 114,6), § 73 Ex 8, p. 310
3.9.3 (p 115,19), § 49 Ex. 50, p. 120
3.9.3 (p 116, ;l), § 44,1>, p.95
3.9.3 (p. 116,2; 3; 5), § 59 Ex 231
Rem, p 196
3.9.3 (p. 116,10), § 49 Ex. 47, p.120
3 9.4 (p 119, 13), § 59 Ex. 221, p. 194
3.9.5 (p. 121, 14), § 51 Ex. 1, p. 130
3 9.7 (p 126,5), § 48 Ex. 8, p. 102
3.10.1 (p. 128, 11), § 48 Ex 6, p. 102
3 10.2 (p. 132, 10), § 62 Ex 49, p.287
3. 10.4 (p. 134, 11), § 72 Ex 6, p. 308
3 10.6 (p. 137,13), § 17 Ex. 1, p. 30
-31
4.1 2 (p. 3, 11-12), § 51 Ex. 1 Rem,
p.130
4 1 2 (p. 4, 5), § 50 Ex. 25, p 128
4. 1. 5 (p 7, 6), § 44, k, p. 95; § 60 Ex 60
Rem., p 209
4 1.6 (p. 8, 11), § 51 Ex. 12 Rem. (e),
p. 139
4. l. 7 (p. 9, 12), § 31 Ex. 9, p.75
4 1. 8 (p. 9,17), § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., p. 157
4 1. 9 (p. 11, 5), § 31 Ex. 8, p. 75
4.1. 9 (p 12, 6), § 59 Ex. 175 Rem,
p. 186
4 2. 1 (p. 21, 6), § 59 Ex. 8 Rem,
p. 156
4. 2 3 (p 24, 7), § 61 Ex 18 Rem.,
p. 272
4.2 6 (p. 27, 17), § 60 Ex. 113, p. 220;
§ 66, 4, e, p. 298
MaItrayani Sainhlta (eontmued). IndlCes.
4.2. 11 (p. 34. 17), § 67, p 298 4.6. 2 (p 80, 6), § 60 Ex. 171, p. 257
4. 2. 11 (p. 34, 18), § 60 Ex 39, p. 205 4. 6. 6 (p. 87, 3), § 62 Ex. 66, p. 298
4.3. 1 (p. 39, 15), § 59 Ex 143, p.180 -290
4.3. 1 (p. 39, 19), § 59 Ex 114, p. 180 4. 6. 6 (p. 88, 141 § 62 Ex 75, P 291
4. 3. 1 (p. 40,5), § 59 Ex. 145, p. 180 4. 6. 6 (p. 88, 15), § 60 Ex. 142 p. 237;
4. 3. 1 (p. 40, 8), § 59 Ex. 146, p. 180 § 62 Ex. 69, p. 290
4 3. 1 (p. 40, 13), § 59 Ex 147, p. 180 4. 6. 8 (p 91, 2), § 59 Ex 188, p. 190
4. 3. 4 (p. 43, 11), § 61 Ex. 18 Rem, 4. 6. 8 (p. 91, 18), § 59 Ex.79, p. 169
p 272 4. 7.4 (p 98,5), § 59 Ex 228, p.195
4.3.9 (p 49, 4), § 49 Ex. 6, p 110 4. 7 4 (p 98,6-7), § 59 Ex 229, p. 195
4.4. 1 (p 50,13), § 61 Ex.. 30, p.274 4.7.4 (p. 98,17-18). §59 Ex 230, p.195
4. 4.4 (p. 54, 15), § 49 Ex 64, p. 122 4.8.1 (p. 106,6), § 51 Ex 12 Rem. (e),
4 4. 5 (p 55, 8). § 49 Ex. 1, p 110 p. 139
4. 5. 1 (p. 63, 2), § 62 Ex. 18 Rem, 4.8. 1 (p. 106, 11), § 51 Ex 12 Rem,
p.272 p.139
4.5.1 (p. 63, 6), 59 Ex. 113, p. 177 4. 8 1 (p 106, 11), § 12 Rem (b),
4 5. 3 (p 67, 9), § 59 Ex. 170, p 183 p. 139
4 5 4 (p. 68, 5), Corrections and Ad- 4 8 1 (p. 107,3), § 51 Ex. 12 Rem. (d),
ditions to p 208, ¡me 6 from bottom, p. 139
§ 60 Ex. 57 A Rem. 4.8.7 (p. 115,4), § 62 Ex. 12, p.282
4.5.9 (p. 77, 4), § 57 Ex. 19, p. 152 4. 8. 10 (p. 119, 15), § 59 Ex. 150, p 180
4. 6. 2 (p. 79, 4), § 62 Ex. 65, p.289 4.11.2 (p 166, 5), § 48 Ex. 8 Rem,
4. 6. 2 (p 79, 19), § 49 Ex. 28, p. 116 P 104
Nirukta.
10 5, § 9 Ex 9 Rem., p 12
  Brahma:r;ta.
2 1. 4, Corrections and Additions to 8 5. 4, § 44, ee, p 98
p. 57,15 8. 7. 11, Corrections and Additions
2. 11. 2, § 35 Ex 4, p. 81 to p. 134, 20
4. 1. 9, Corrections an Additions to
p. 113, ¡me 26
4. 5. 9, Corrections and AdditlOns to
p 58,17
4. 5. 11, Corrections and Addltions to
p. 58,17
4. 5. 12, Corrections and Additions
to p. 58, 17
5. 5. 15, § 5, p. 7; § 26 Ex. 1, P 39
5. 8. 9, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem, p. 156
6. 1. 3, § 74 Ex. 8, p. 313
6.10.12-13, § 61 Ex. 25 Rem., p. 273
7.4.4, §31 Ex. 2, p.74
7.5. 2, § 60 Ex 79, p. 213
7. 5. 2, § 70, P 305
7.7.15, § 62 Ex. 76, p.291, § 66, 2,
p.297
8. 1. 13, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p. 156
8. 2. 2, § 51 Ex 12 Rem. (g), p. 139
8.4. 1, § 49 Ex 46, p.120
8. 7. 12, Corrections and Additions
to p. 208, ¡me 6 troro bottom; § 60
Ex. 57A Rem.
8. 8 13, § 3, 1, e, p. 5, § 55 Ex. 3
9.1. 11, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p. 156
9. 6. 2, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem., p. 222
9.6.5, § 60 Ex. 80 Rem, p.214
11. 5. 8, § 61 Ex 25 Rem, p. 273
11. 9. 3, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., p 158
12. 3. 13, § 32 Ex. 2, p. 78
12.6.8, § 59 Ex. 8, p. 155; § 59 Ex. 8
Rem., p 157,21, §59 Ex. 167, P 183;
§ 59 Ex 168, p 183
12.7.2, § 60 Ex. 1, p.199
12.10. 13, § 60 Ex. 24, p. 203; § 60
Ex. 44, p. 206
12 12.6, § 11 Ex. 3, p. 20-21
13.4. 17, § 10 Rem., p. 19
13. 12 5, § 48 Ex. 30, p. 107
14.1.2, § 60 Ex. 2, p. 199·
23**
361
Bl';¡hmana (contmuoo) Indices
14 1. 2, § 70, p 305
14. 3. 22, § 48 Ex. 43, p 109
14. 6. 6, Corrections and Additions to
p 57,15
14 6.8, § 49 Ex. SO, p. 116
15.3 25, § 11 Ex. 6, p. 21
15. 9.3, § 60 Ex.3, p. 199
15. 11. 9, § 60 Ex. 70 Rem., p. 211
16. I 3, § 44. pp, p. 96
16. 10 6, § 57 Ex 21, p. 153
17.11 2, § 59 Ex. 184, p.189
17.12.5, § 62 Ex .. 72, p.290
18.3.2, § 1i9 Ex. 185, p.189-11/0
18.9.1, § 49 Ex. 7, p 110
21. 14. 7, § 31 Ex. 10, p.75-76
22 17.2, § 11 Ex. 17, p.25
,
24 18. 8, § 57 Ex 24, p 158
25.10.3, § 59 Ex. 203, p.192
25.10.8, § 59 Ex.211, p. 19i1
SadviJi«a BrahmaJ;1a.
1. 2. 9, § 59 Ex. 237, p. 197, § 60 Ex. 42, 2.5 1, §60 Ex. 237, p.267
p. 206 2.6. 1, § 60 Ex. 237, p.267
1 7.2, § 3, 1, e, p   § 48 Ex. 25, 2.7.1, § 60 Ex 237, p 267
p. 106 3. 1. 8, § 60 Ex. 164, p.256
2.1.11, Corrections and Additions to 4.1.1, § 51' Ex. 6, p.134
p. 208, line 6 from bottom; § 60 4.1.2, § 51 Ex. 4, p 131-132
Ex 57 A, Rem. (m fine) 4 5. 4, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem., p. 158.
Taittiriya AraJ;1yaka.
1. 24. 1, § 61 Ex. 30 A, p. 275 5. 1 3, § 49 Ex. Uí A, p. 114
1 26.6, § 61 Ex. 37 B, p.277 5.2.11-12, § 50 Ex. 8, p.124
211.1, §59 Ex. SE, p.1S8 5.2.12, §60 Ex.15t Rem, p.239
2.14, § 61 Ex. 32 A, p.276 5.3.1, § 60 Ex. 151 Rem .. p.239.
2.15, §59 Ex.5lA, p.163-164 511.4, §6Z Ex. 27A, p.284.
Taittirlya BrahmaJ;l.a
1.1. 3 12, § 48 Ex. 32, p.l07 1 7 10.5, § 59 Ex. 34, p.161
1. 1. 3.12, § 49 Ex. 31, p 116 1. 8 1 1, § 49 Ex 45, p. 120
1. 1.4.3, § 59 Ex. 17, p.159 1. 8.2.5, § 49 Ex 44, P 119
1. 1. 8.1, § 62 Ex. 20, p.283 1. 8 5. 1, § 49 Ex. 48, p.119
1. 1 8.2, § 62 Ex. 20, p.283 1. 8. 9 1, S 49 Ex. 64, p 122
1. 1. 8 2, § 62 Ex. 83, p. 292
1 2.3 3, § 12 Ex 5, p.25
1. 2.4.2, Corrections and Additions
to p. 58, 17 •
1.2.5.1, §60 Ex 4, p 199
1. 3.10 1, § 12 Ex. 7, p.26
1. 4.3.4, § 72 Ex. 1, p. 308
1. 4. 3. 5, § 72 Ex. 1, p. 308
1. 4. 3. 6, § 60 Ex. 146, p.238
1.4.4.6, § 59 Ex. 176, p.188
1. 4. 7.4, § 49 Ex. 21, p. 115
1.5.6.5, § 59 Ex.90, p.170
1 5.10.3, § 49 Ex.41, p.119
1 6.6 2, § 61 Ex. 18 Rem., p 272
1. 6. 6. 4, § 63 Ex. 3 Rem., p. 293
l. 6 7. 5, § 61 Ex. 18 Rem., p 272
1. 6. 9. 8, § 61 Ex. 6, p. 270
1. 7. 2.6, § 62 Ex. 6, p.279
1.7.5.3, § 59 Ex. 34, p.161
362
2.1. 1. 3, § 37 Ex. 1, p.83-84
2. 1. 2. 6, § 37 Ex. 3, P 85
2.1.2 7, § 59 Ex. 9, p. 158
2.1. 2.7, § 59 Ex. 10, p.159
2.1. 2. 8, § 59 Ex. 10, p. 159
2. 1 2 8, § 59 Ex 11, p. 159
2.1.2 8, § 59 Ex 12, p.159
2. 1.2.12, § 59 Ex. 9, p. ]58
2. 1. 3 9, § 57 Ex. 10, p. 150
2. 1. 4. 4, § 73 Ex 2 Rem., p. 309
2.1 6.4, § 74 Ex. 7, p.313
2.2 7.3, § 62 Ex. 8 Rem. (lO fine),
p.280
2. 2.9. 9, § 59 Ex 8 Rem, p. 156
2.3.4.1-4, § 49 Ex 14, p 112
2 3. 7. 2-3, § 31 Ex 5, p.75
2.3.8. 3, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p. 156
2.3.10. 1-3, § 26 Ex 12, p 43
TalttIñya Briihmana (eontIllued). IndICes.
2.7. 1. 3, § 59 Ex. 186. p 190
2.794, §40, P 91; §61 Ex 18 Rem.,
p.272
3.2 2.5, § 51 Ex. 1 Rem, p 130
3.2 4 7, § 44, k, p 96, § 60 Ex. 60
p.209
3.2.5.9, § 51, Ex 12 Rem. (f), p.139
3 2.8.2, § 31 Ex 8, p 75
3.2.8.11, § 59 Ex. 175 Rem, p 186
3.3 6. 11, § 41 Ex. 1, p 93
3 3. 8 5, § 60 Ex 248, p '268
;-t. 3. 9.12, § 59 Ex 89, p 170
3. 7. 1 2, § 29 Ex. 3 A, CorreetlOns and
AdditlOns to p. 56, lme 5
S.7 2. 2, § 72 Ex 2, p 808
3 7. 2. 3, § 72 Ex 2, p. 308
3.7.2.4, § 60 Ex 214, P 264
3.7.2.4, § 72 Ex 2, p 308
3.7.2.5, § 72 Ex. 2, p.308
:'l 7.3. 1, § 72 Ex 3, p 308
3.8 2.4, § 49 Ex 16, p. 114
3 8.2. 4, § 49 Ex. 18, p 11 'í
3.8.6. 1, § 50 Ex 24. p. 128
3.865, S 50   p.128
3.8.8.1, § 50 Ex 24, p. 128
3 8 10 1, §48 Ex. 17, p 105
3.8. 16 4, § 59 Ex 35, p. 161
3.8.20 5, § 31 Ex 6, p.75
3.9 4.4, §49 Ex. 58, p. 121; § 50 Ex 24,
p. 128
3.9 8.1, § 59 Ex. 226. p 195
3. 9.8 2, § 59 Ex 226, p. 195
3 9. 16. 2, § 60 Ex. 45, p.207
3.9 16. 2, § 60 Ex 2%, p.266
3.9.16 2, § 60 Ex. 120, p 232-233
3.9.18.1, § 59 Ex. 220, p 194
3.9.21. 1, § 49 Ex. L7, P 114
3. 11. 8 1, 62 Ex 24, p. 283-4
3 11. 9. 8, § 62 Ex. 26, p.284
Taittirlya Sarnhita.
1. 5. 9. 1-2, § 48 Ex 44, p.109 2.4 9 2, § 49 Ex 42, P 119
1 6.3.3, § 51, Introduetory Rem. to Ex. 2. 4. 10. 1, § 59 Ex 113, p. 179
1 9, p. 138 2.4.13.1, § 44, e, p.95
1.6 7. 1, § 50 Ex 12, p. 124- 125 2.5.2.4, § 44, ce, p 98
1.6.7.1, §59 Ex. 132, P 179 2.5.2.6, §26Ex.1O, p 42
1.6.7.2, § 59 Ex. 132, p.179 2.5.3 2, § 48 Ex 28, p. lOS
1. 6 7.3, § 63 Ex. 3 Rem, p.293 2.5.3.3, § 48 Ex. 29, p 107
1.6.84, §59Ex.81, p.169 26.17. §60Ex.106, p 219
1.6.10.3, §59 Ex 96, p.172 2.6.9.3, § 3, l,a, p 2, §41 Ex.1, p.93
1.7 1.2, § 60 Ex 115 Rem., p.222 2.8 1. 5, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem., p 222
1. 8. 4. 1; 2, § 61 Ex. 18 Rem., p 272
2. 1.4 7, § 69(h), p. 303
2 1. 4. 8, § 69 (1), p. 80'3
2.17.1, §44,aa, p.97
2. l. 8. 4, § 60 Ex 109, p.219
2.1 8 4, § 60 Ex 110, p.219-220
2. 1. 8 4, § 66, 4 e, p.298
z.1. 10 3, § 62 Ex 61, p.289
2.2.2.3, § 60 Ex. 151 Rem., p 239
2. 2 4, § 60 Ex. 1l0, p 219-220;
§ 66, 4 e, p. 298
2.2. 2. 5, 60 Ex 110, p.219-220
2.2.4.7, § 60 Ex. 206, P 263
2.2 5. 3-4, § 37 Ex.l Rem., p. 84; § 59
Ex 97, P 172
2.2 6. 2, § 60 Ex 4 Rem., p.200
2.2.8.2, § 60 Ex, 110, p. 219-220, § 66,
4c, p.298
2. 2. 9. 4, § 62 Ex. 44, p 286
2.329, §7J, p 307
2 3.7.4, § 9 Ex 19, P 15
:2. 3. 13 2, § 70, p. 806
2.41.1. §3,1,a, p 2;§9Ex.1, p.10
3 1. 2 3, § 73 Ex 7 Rem., p 310
3. 1.2 4, § 73 Ex. 7, p 309-10
3. 1. 5 2, § 62 Ex 82, p. 292
3. 1. 10 3, § 60 Ex. Rem., p. 266
3.2.1. 3, §   l,l, p.82
3.2.7.6, § 59 Ex. 225, p 194
3. 4 3 2. § 61 Ex. 22, p. 272-3
3.4.3.5, § 62 Ex. 7, p.279-80
3.4.3.7-8. § 60 Ex. 126, p. 233-234
3.4.8 3,§60Ex 111,p.220;§66,4,c,
p.298
'B 4.8.7, § 73 Ex. 13, p.310
3. 4. 10.3, § 66, 4, b, p. 298
3.4 10 3-4-, § 60 Ex. 115, p 220
3. 4. 10 4, § 60 Ex.236. p.267
3.5.4.2-3, § 49 Ex 34 Rem, p.117
5. 1. 2 5, § 73 Ex. 6, p. 309
5.1. 3. 4, § 62 Ex. 3, p. 279
5.1.4.3, § 50 Ex 8, p. 124
5. 1. 5. 7, § 59 Ex. 160, p 182
5.1 10 2, § 44, 00, p.99
5.2.1 7, § 60 Ex 115 Excursus, p.223
363
TaIttIñya SañlhltiL (contmued) IndlCes.
5.2.2.4, § 57 Ex 15, p. 151
5.2 3.4, 93, l,c, p. 5; §55 Ex.3, p.143
5. 2. 7 5, § 62 Ex. 3, p 279
5. 2. 8. 7, S 29 Ex. 32, p. 61
5. 2.9. 5, § 50 Ex. S, p. 124
5.3 1.1, § 50 Ex 21, p.127
5.3.2. 2, ~ 3, 1,c, p.5, §55 Ex.3, p 143
5.3.4.7, § 59 Ex. 8 Rernt p 156
5 3.10.2, § 60 Ex. 87, p.215
5.4.9.2, § 61 Ex. 37, p.277
5. 5. 1. 6-7, § 59 Ex. 86, p. 170
5.5.1.6-7, § 60 Ex. 4 Rem., p.199
5.5.3.1, § 59 Ex. 81, p. 169
5.5.10.7, § 29 Ex. 32G Rem, p.67
5 6. S. 4, § 49 Ex.4S, p 119
5. 6. 5. 1, § 64, p. 296
6.1. 3. 3, § 60 Ex. 51, P 207
6. 1 3. 8, § 48 Ex. 40 Rem., p. 109
6. 1. S. 8, § 60 Ex. 97, p. 216
6. l. 4. 2, § 60 Ex. 53, p. 208
6.1 4. 4, § 59 Ex. 18, p. 159
6. 1. 4. 7, § 44, o, p 96
6.1 5.3, § S6, 1, h, p.82
6.1 S.3, § 29 Ex. 5 (b), p.56
6. 1. 6. 6, § 70, p. 305
6. 1. 7. S, § 62 Ex. 4, p 279
61.74, §76, p.315
6.1.7.7. § Sge, p.90
6. 1. 8. 3, § 62 Ex 4, p. 279
6.2. 1. 1, § 60 Ex. 102, p.219
6.2.4 1, §50 Ex. 27, p. 128
6. 2 10. 1, § 62 Ex. 4, p. 279
6.3.1. 1-2, § 60 Ex. 174, p.258
6. 3. 1. 6, § 59 Ex. 243, p 19B
6.3. 1. 6, § 60 Ex. 57 Rem, p.208
6. S. 2. 6, § 59 Ex 110, p.175
6.3.3.1, § 73 Ex. 8 Rem , p.310
6. 3. 3. 2, § 49 Ex.48, p.120
6.3.3 3, § 44,h,p. 95, §59 Ex. 231 Rem
p. 196
6 3.4.6-7, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem, p. 158
6. S. 4. 9, § 59 Ex 244, p. 198
6.3.4.9, § 59 Ex. 245, p.19B
6.3. 5 2, § 72 Ex. 4, p. 309
6. S 5.4, § 62 Ex. 5, p. 279
6. 3. 8. 3, § 44, dd, p. 98
6.3.'10.2, §48Ex 7, p 102
6.3 10.3, § 49 Ex 3, p.110
6. 4 1. 4, § 48 Ex. 5, p. 102
6 4.2. 1: § 63 Ex. 3 Rem., p. 293
6.4.2.4, § 59 Ex 8 Rem., p 157
6.4 2. 6, § 53 Ex 2, p. 140
6. 4. 8. 2, § 44, n, p. 96
6 4. 8 3, § 59 Ex. 8 Rem, p. 156
6.4.9.2. § 60 Ex. 170, p 257
6.4.11. 2, § &9 Ex. 60, p. 166; § 70,
p.304
6.5. 1. 1, § 44,f, P 95
6.5.2.3, § 60 Ex. 142 Rem, p. 237
6.5.2 3, § 62 Ex.64, p.289
6.5. 5. 1, § 3,1, e, p.5; § 55 Ex. 4,
p. 143
6. 6. 6. 2, § 60 Ex. 57 Rem., p. 208
6. 6. 6. 2, § 69 (J), p. 303-304
6.69.2, § 62 Ex. 77, p.291
6 6. 9. 2, § 70, p. 305
6.6. 10.2, § 61 Ex. 25 Rem., p.273
6.6.11. 6, § 60 Ex. 155, p.240
7. 1. 1 2, § 50 Ex. 9, p. 124
7. 1.3. 1, § 14 Ex. 2, p.28
7.1. 6 7, § 61 Ex. 42, p.278
7.2252, §53 Ex. 3, p.141
7.3.1.1, § 68,2 Rem., p.299
7. 5. 6. 3, § 37 Ex.2, p. 85
7 5.8.1, § 49 Ex. 11, p.lll
7.5.15.1, § 60 Ex 66, p.210
7.5.15. 1-2, § 57 Ex 7, p.149-150
7.5.20.1, § 59 Ex. 93 Rem., p.171.
Vajasaneyi Sambita.
8.12, § 60 Ex. 115 Rem, p.222 17.68, § 11 Ex. 15, p.24.
16.33, § 60 Ex. 115 Excursus, p.223
Unidentified Brahmal).as.
Sayana RV., Introduction p. 9,23, § 62
Ex. 58 B, p. 288
Sayana RV., lntroducbon p. 10, 18,
§ 72 Ex. 4 B, p 308
¡pO. 21. 1. 9, Corrections and Addi·
tions to p. 130, ]me 14 from bottom.
            ~ ~            
364
e F. WIDtenche Bucbdruckerel

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful